OSHA 1926 Construction Safety

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.
61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-

ards and labels.
REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1926.62 Lead.
1926.64 Process safety management of high-
Subpart A—General ly hazardous chemicals.
1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and
Sec.
1926.1 Purpose and scope. emergency response.
1926.2 Variances from safety and health 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction
standards. of spray booths.
1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.
1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life
adjudications for enforcement of safety Saving Equipment
and health standards.
1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Pa- 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective
perwork Reduction Act. equipment.
1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
Subpart B—General Interpretations 1926.97–1926.98 [Reserved]
1926.100 Head protection.
1926.10 Scope of subpart. 1926.101 Hearing protection.
1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
distinguished. 1926.103 Respiratory protection.
1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards.
1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. 1926.105 Safety nets.
1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ types 1926.106 Working over or near water.
of performance. 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract
part.
Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
1926.16 Rules of construction.
Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention
Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.150 Fire protection.
Provisions 1926.151 Fire prevention.
1926.152 Flammable and combustible liq-
1926.20 General safety and health provi-
uids.
sions.
1926.21 Safety training and education. 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas).
1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
[Reserved] 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.23 First aid and medical attention. part.
1926.24 Fire protection and prevention.
1926.25 Housekeeping. Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades
1926.26 Illumination.
1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
1926.27 Sanitation.
1926.28 Personal protective equipment. 1926.201 Signaling.
1926.29 Acceptable certifications. 1926.202 Barricades.
1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing. 1926.203 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.31 Incorporation by reference. part.
1926.32 Definitions.
1926.33 Access to employee exposure and Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage,
medical records. Use, and Disposal
1926.34 Means of egress.
1926.35 Employee emergency action plans. 1926.250 General requirements for storage.
1926.251 Rigging equipment for material
Subpart D—Occupational Health and handling.
Environmental Controls 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
1926.50 Medical services and first aid. Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power
1926.51 Sanitation.
1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. 1926.300 General requirements.
1926.53 Ionizing radiation. 1926.301 Hand tools.
1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
mists. 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
1926.56 Illumination. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw,
1926.57 Ventilation. and hydraulic.
1926.58 [Reserved] 1926.306 Air receivers.
1926.59 Hazard communication. 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission ap-
1926.60 Methylenedianiline. paratus.
VerDate Aug<31>2005 14:00 Jul 31, 2007 Jkt 211115 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\211115.XXX 211115
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—LIST OF NA-

TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L—LIST OF TRAINING
1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DIS-
1926.352 Fire prevention. MANTLERS [RESERVED]
1926.353 Ventilation and protection in weld- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L—DRAWINGS AND
ing, cutting, and heating. ILLUSTRATIONS
1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in
way of preservative coatings. Subpart M—Fall Protection
Subpart K—Electrical 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions
applicable to this subpart.
GENERAL 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria
1926.400 Introduction.
and practices.
1926.401 [Reserved]
1926.503 Training requirements.
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M—DETERMINING
ROOF WIDTHS
1926.402 Applicability.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M—GUARDRAIL SYS-
1926.403 General requirements.
TEMS
1926.404 Wiring design and protection.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M—PERSONAL FALL
1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and
ARREST SYSTEMS
equipment for general use.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M—POSITIONING DE-
1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and in-
VICE SYSTEMS
stallations.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M—SAMPLE FALL
1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations.
PROTECTION PLANS
1926.408 Special systems.
1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved]
Subpart N—Cranes, Derricks, Hoists,
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES Elevators, and Conveyors
1926.416 General requirements. 1926.550 Cranes and derricks.
1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. 1926.551 Helicopters.
1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists,
and elevators.
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 1926.554 Overhead hoists.
1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. 1926.555 Conveyors.
1926.432 Environmental deterioration of
equipment. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized
1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] Equipment, and Marine Operations
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL 1926.600 Equipment.
EQUIPMENT 1926.601 Motor vehicles.
1926.602 Material handling equipment.
1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] 1926.604 Site clearing.
1926.605 Marine operations and equipment.
DEFINITIONS
1926.606 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
part.
Subpart P—Excavations
Subpart L—Scaffolds
1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions
1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
applicable to this subpart. 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements.
1926.451 General requirements. 1926.652 Requirements for protective sys-
1926.452 Additional requirements applicable tems.
to specific types of scaffolds. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P—SOIL CLASSIFICA-
1926.453 Aerial lifts. TION
1926.454 Training requirements. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P—SLOPING AND
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L—SCAFFOLD SPECI- BENCHING
FICATIONS APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P—TIMBER SHORING
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L—CRITERIA FOR DE- FOR TRENCHES
TERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF PROVIDING APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P—ALUMINUM HY-
SAFE ACCESS AND FALL PROTECTION FOR DRAULIC SHORING FOR TRENCHES
SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P—ALTERNATIVES TO
[RESERVED] TIMBER SHORING
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P—SELECTION OF CONNECTION AND A STAGGERED CONNEC-
PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS TION: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
COMPLYING WITH COMPLYING WITH
Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry § 1926.756(C)(1)
Construction
Subpart S—Underground Construction,
1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air
applicable to this subpart.
1926.701 General requirements. 1926.800 Underground construction.
1926.702 Requirements for equipment and 1926.801 Caissons.
tools. 1926.802 Cofferdams.
1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place con- 1926.803 Compressed air.
crete. 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. part.
1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construc- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S—DECOMPRESSION
tion operations. TABLES
1926.706 Requirements for masonry con-
struction. Subpart T—Demolition
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q—REFERENCES TO
SUBPART Q OF PART 1926 1926.850 Preparatory operations.
1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders.
Subpart R—Steel Erection 1926.852 Chutes.
1926.853 Removal of materials through floor
1926.750 Scope. openings.
1926.751 Definitions. 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sec-
1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection tions, and chimneys.
plan and construction sequence. 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and mate-
1926.754 Structural steel assembly. rial with equipment.
1926.755 Column anchorage. 1926.857 Storage.
1926.756 Beams and columns. 1926.858 Removal of steel construction.
1926.757 Open web steel joists. 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
1926.758 Systems-engineered metal build- 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives.
ings.
1926.759 Falling object protection. Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of
1926.760 Fall protection. Explosives
1926.761 Training.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R—GUIDELINES FOR 1926.900 General provisions.
ESTABLISHING THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE- 1926.901 Blaster qualifications.
SPECIFIC ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY 1926.902 Surface transportation of explo-
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH sives.
§ 1926.752(E) 1926.903 Underground transportation of ex-
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R [RESERVED] plosives.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R—ILLUSTRATIONS 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting
OF BRIDGING TERMINUS POINTS: NON-MAN- agents.
DATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting
§ 1926.757(A)(10) AND § 1926.757(C)(5) agents.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R—ILLUSTRATION OF 1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges—
THE USE OF CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE electric blasting.
CONTROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): NON- 1926.907 Use of safety fuse.
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
WITH § 1926.760(C)(3) 1926.909 Firing the blast.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R—TRAINING: NON- 1926.910 Inspection after blasting.
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING 1926.911 Misfires.
WITH § 1926.761 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R—PERIMETER COL- 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under
UMNS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR compressed air.
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(E) TO PROTECT 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this sub-
THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR EDGE OF A part.
WALKING/WORKING SURFACE
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R—FALL PROTECTION Subpart V—Power Transmission and
SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRACTICES FROM Distribution
§ 1926.502: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES
FOR COMPLYING WITH COMPLYING WITH 1926.950 General requirements.
§ 1926.760(D) 1926.951 Tools and protective equipment.
APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R—DOUBLE CONNEC- 1926.952 Mechanical equipment.
TIONS: ILLUSTRATION OF A CLIPPED END 1926.953 Material handling.
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
1926.954 Grounding for protection of em- RECORDKEEPING
ployees.
1926.955 Overhead lines. 1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements.
1926.956 Underground lines. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y—EXAMPLES OF
1926.957 Construction in energized sub- CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR
stations. LIMIT EXPOSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDI-
1926.958 External load helicopters. TIONS
1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety straps, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y—GUIDELINES FOR
and lanyards. SCIENTIFIC DIVING
1926.960 Definitions applicable to this sub-
part. Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous
Substances
Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures;
Overhead Protection 1926.1100 [Reserved]
1926.1101 Asbestos.
1926.1000 Rollover protective structures 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpre-
(ROPS) for material handling equipment. tation of term.
1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl,
rollover protective structures for des- etc.).
ignated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders, 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
and crawler tractors.
1926.1105 [Reserved]
1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over pro-
tective structures, known as ROPS) for 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
wheel-type agricultural and industrial 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its
tractors used in construction. salts).
1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
of agricultural and industrial tractors 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
used in construction. 1926.1110 Benzidine.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART W—FIGURES W–14 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl.
THROUGH W–28 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine.
1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone.
Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene.
1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene.
1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine.
applicable to this subpart. 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride.
1926.1051 General requirements.
1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.
1926.1052 Stairways.
1926.1126 Chromium (VI).
1926.1053 Ladders.
1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved] 1926.1127 Cadmium.
1926.1060 Training requirements. 1926.1128 Benzene.
1926.1129 Coke oven emissions.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X—LADDERS
1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane.
Subpart Y—Diving 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.
1926.1147 Ethylene oxide.
GENERAL 1926.1148 Formaldehyde.
1926.1152 Methylene chloride.
1926.1071 Scope and application.
1926.1072 Definitions. APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNATIONS FOR
GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS INCOR-
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS PORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION
1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. STANDARDS

SUBJECT INDEX FOR PART 1926—SAFETY AND
GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
1926.1080 Safe practices manual. SOURCE: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR
1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted.
1926.1082 Procedures during dive.
EDITORIAL NOTE: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979,
1926.1083 Post-dive procedures.
and corrected at 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979,
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES OSHA reprinted without change the entire
text of 29 CFR part 1926 together with cer-
1926.1084 SCUBA diving. tain General Industry Occupational Safety
1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving. and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR
1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. part 1910, which have been identified as also
1926.1087 Liveboating. applicable to construction work. This repub-
lication developed a single set of OSHA regu-
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS
lations for both labor and management
1926.1090 Equipment. forces within the construction industry.
10
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.4
Subpart A—General § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.

(a) It shall be a condition of each
AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract contract which is subject to section 107
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
U.S.C. 3701 et seq.); sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Standards Act that the Secretary of
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 Labor or any authorized representative
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- shall have a right of entry to any site
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
of contract performance for the fol-
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), and 5–2002 lowing purposes:
(67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR part (1) To inspect or investigate the mat-
1911. ter of compliance with the safety and
health standards contained in subpart
§ 1926.1 Purpose and scope. C of this part and following subparts;
(a) This part sets forth the safety and and
health standards promulgated by the (2) To carry out the duties of the Sec-
Secretary of Labor under section 107 of retary under section 107(b) of the Act.
(b) For the purpose of carrying out
the Contract Work Hours and Safety
his investigative duties under the Act,
Standards Act. The standards are pub-
the Secretary of Labor may, by agree-
lished in subpart C of this part and fol-
ment, use with or without reimburse-
lowing subparts.
ment the services, personnel, and fa-
(b) Subpart B of this part contains
cilities of any State or Federal agency.
statements of general policy and inter-
Any agreements with States under this
pretations of section 107 of the Con-
section shall be similar to those pro-
tract Work Hours and Safety Stand-
vided for under the Walsh-Healey Pub-
ards Act having general applicability.
lic Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50–
§ 1926.2 Variances from safety and 205.
health standards.
§ 1926.4 Rules of practice for adminis-
(a) Variances from standards which trative adjudications for enforce-
are, or may be, published in this part ment of safety and health stand-
may be granted under the same cir- ards.
cumstances whereunder variances may (a) The rules of practice for adminis-
be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) trative adjudications for the enforce-
of the Williams-Steiger Occupational ment of the safety and health stand-
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. ards contained in subpart C of this part
65). The procedures for the granting of and the following subparts shall be the
variances and for related relief under same as those published in part 6 of
this part are those published in part this title with respect to safety and
1905 of this title. health violations of the Service Con-
(b) Any requests for variances under tract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except
this section shall also be considered re- as provided in paragraph (b) of this sec-
quests for variances under the Wil- tion.
liams-Steiger Occupational Safety and (b) In the case of debarment, the find-
Health Act of 1970, and any requests for ings required by section 107(d) of the
variances under Williams-Steiger Occu- Act shall be made by the hearing exam-
pational Safety and Health Act with iner or the Assistant Secretary of
respect to construction safety or Labor for Occupational Safety and
health standards shall be considered to Health, as the case may be. Whenever,
be also variances under the Construc- as provided in section 107(d)(2), a con-
tion Safety Act. Any variance from a tractor requests termination of debar-
construction safety or health standard ment before the end of the 3-year pe-
which is contained in this part and riod prescribed in that section, the re-
which is incorporated by reference in quest shall be filed in writing with the
part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu-
variance from the standard under both pational Safety and Health who shall
the Construction Safety Act and the publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG-
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety ISTER that the request has been re-
and Health Act of 1970. ceived and afford interested persons an
11
§ 1926.5 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
opportunity to be heard upon the re- 29 CFR citation OMB con-

quest, and thereafter the provisions of trol No.
part 6 of this title shall apply with re- 1926.1115 ............................................................ 1218–0044
spect to prehearing conferences, hear- 1926.1116 ............................................................ 1218–0081
ings and related matters, and decisions 1926.1117 ............................................................ 1218–0010
1926.1118 ............................................................ 1218–0104
and orders. 1926.1126 ............................................................ 1218–0252
1926.1127 ............................................................ 1218–0186
§ 1926.5 OMB control numbers under 1926.1128 ............................................................ 1218–0129
the Paperwork Reduction Act. 1926.1129 ............................................................ 1218–0128
1926.1144 ............................................................ 1218–0101
The following sections or paragraphs 1926.1145 ............................................................ 1218–0126
each contain a collection of informa- 1926.1147 ............................................................ 1218–0108
1926.1148 ............................................................ 1218–0145
tion requirement which has been ap-
proved by the Office of Management
and Budget under the control number [61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63
listed. FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19,
1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810,
29 CFR citation OMB con- Apr. 16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006]
trol No.
1926.33 ................................................................ 1218–0065 Subpart B—General

1926.50 ................................................................ 1218–0093
1926.52 ................................................................ 1218–0048
Interpretations
1926.53 ................................................................ 1218–0103
1926.59 ................................................................ 1218–0072
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
1926.60 ................................................................ 1218–0183
1926.62 ................................................................ 1218–0189 and Safety Standards Act (Construction
1926.64 ................................................................ 1218–0200 Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333).
1926.65 ................................................................ 1218–0202
1926.103 .............................................................. 1218–0099 § 1926.10 Scope of subpart.
1926.200 .............................................................. 1218–0132
1926.250 .............................................................. 1218–0093 (a) This subpart contains the general
1926.251 .............................................................. 1218–0233 rules of the Secretary of Labor inter-
1926.403 .............................................................. 1218–0130 preting and applying the construction
1926.404 .............................................................. 1218–0130
1926.405 .............................................................. 1218–0130 safety and health provisions of section
1926.407 .............................................................. 1218–0130 107 of the Contract Work Hours and
1926.408 .............................................................. 1218–0130 Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Sec-
1926.453(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0216
1926.502 .............................................................. 1218–0197
tion 107 requires as a condition of each
1926.503 .............................................................. 1218–0197 contract which is entered into under
1926.550(a)(1) ..................................................... 1218–0115 legislation subject to Reorganization
1926.550(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0115 Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267),
1926.550(a)(4) ..................................................... 1218–0115
1926.550(a)(6) ..................................................... 1218–0113 and which is for construction, alter-
1926.550(a)(11) ................................................... 1218–0054 ation, and/or repair, including painting
1926.550(a)(16) ................................................... 1218–0115 and decorating, that no contractor or
1926.550(b)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0232
1926.550(g) ......................................................... 1218–0151
subcontractor contracting for any part
1926.552 .............................................................. 1218–0231 of the contract work shall require any
1926.652 .............................................................. 1218–0137 laborer or mechanic employed in the
1926.703 .............................................................. 1218–0095 performance of the contract to work in
1926.800 .............................................................. 1218–0067
1926.803 .............................................................. 1218–0067 surroundings or under working condi-
1926.900 .............................................................. 1218–0217 tions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
1926.903 .............................................................. 1218–0227 or dangerous to his health or safety, as
1926.1080 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1081 ............................................................ 1218–0069
determined under construction safety
1926.1083 ............................................................ 1218–0069 and health standards promulgated by
1926.1090 ............................................................ 1218–0069 the Secretary by regulation.
1926.1091 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1101 ............................................................ 1218–0134 § 1926.11 Coverage under section 103
1926.1103 ............................................................ 1218–0085
1926.1104 ............................................................ 1218–0084
of the act distinguished.
1926.1106 ............................................................ 1218–0086 (a) Coverage under section 103. It is im-
1926.1107 ............................................................ 1218–0083
1926.1108 ............................................................ 1218–0087
portant to note that the coverage of
1926.1109 ............................................................ 1218–0089 section 107 differs from that for the
1926.1110 ............................................................ 1218–0082 overtime requirements of the Contract
1926.1111 ............................................................ 1218–0090 Work Hours and Safety Standards Act.
1926.1112 ............................................................ 1218–0080
1926.1113 ............................................................ 1218–0079 The application of the overtime re-
1926.1114 ............................................................ 1218–0088 quirements is governed by section 103,
12
which subject to specific exemptions, full scope of the work to be performed

includes: (1) Federal contracts requir- under each statute. The individual
ing or involving the employment of la- statutes should be resorted to for a
borers or mechanics (thus including, more detailed scope of the work.
but not limited to, contracts for con- (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The pro-
struction), and (2) contracts assisted in visions codified in 23 U.S.C. 113 apply
whole or in part by Federal loans, to the initial construction, reconstruc-
grants, or guarantees under any stat- tion, or improvement work performed
ute ‘‘providing wage standards for such by contractors or subcontractors on
work.’’ The statutes ‘‘providing wage highway projects on the Federal-aid
standards for such work’’ include stat- systems, the primary and secondary, as
utes for construction which require the well as their extensions in urban areas,
payment of minimum wages in accord- and the Interstate System, authorized
ance with prevailing wage findings by under the highway laws providing for
the Secretary of Labor in accordance the expenditure of Federal funds upon
with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision the Federal-aid system. As cited in 41
to section 103 excludes from the over- Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney General
time requirements work where the ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway
Federal assistance is only in the form Acts are subject to Reorganization
of a loan guarantee or insurance. Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(b) Coverage under section 107. To be (3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C.
covered by section 107 of the Contract 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748,
a contract must be one which (1) is en- 1748h–2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1),
tered into under a statute that is sub- 1715z–1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and
ject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1x-B, 1715z–7). This act covers construc-
1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for ‘‘con- tion which is financed with assistance
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- by the Federal Government through
cluding painting and decorating.’’ programs of loan and mortgage insur-
ance for the following purposes:
§ 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 pro-
of 1950. vides mortgage and insurance on rental
(a) General provisions. Reorganization housing of eight or more units and on
Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates to the pre- mobile-home courts.
scribing by the Secretary of Labor of (ii) Section 1715a—Repealed.
‘‘appropriate standards, regulations, (iii) Cooperative Housing—Section
and procedures’’ with respect to the en- 1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on
forcement of labor standards under cooperative housing of five or more
Federal and federally assisted con- units as well as supplementary loans
tracts which are subject to various for improvement of repair or resale of
statutes subject to the Plan. The rules memberships.
of the Secretary of Labor imple- (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section
menting the Plan are published in part 1715k provides mortgage insurance on
5 of this title. Briefly, the statutes sub- single family or multifamily housing
ject to the Plan include the Davis- in approved urban renewal areas.
Bacon Act, including its extension to (v) Low or Moderate Income Hous-
Federal-aid highway legislation subject ing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures
to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes sub- mortgages on low-cost single family or
ject to the Plan by its original terms, multifamily housing.
statutes by which the Plan is expressly (vi) Housing for Elderly—Section
applied, such as the Contract Work 1715v provides mortgage insurance on
Hours Standards Act by virtue of sec- rental housing for elderly or handi-
tion 104(d) thereof. capped persons.
(b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject (vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w
to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 authorizes mortgage insurance on
are cited and briefly described in the nursing home facilities and major
remaining paragraphs of this section. equipment.
These descriptions are general in na- (viii) Experimental Housing—Section
ture and not intended to convey the 1715x provides mortgage insurance on
13
single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-

with experimental design of materials. walks, storm drainage facilities, and
(ix) War Housing Insurance—Section other installations or work.
1743 not active. (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facili-
(x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 in- ties—Subchapter LX-B authorizes
sures investment returns on multi- mortgage insurance for the financing
family housing. of construction and equipment, of fa-
(xi) Armed Services Housing—Sec- cilities for group practice of medicine,
tion 1748b to assist in relieving acute optometry, or dentistry.
shortage and urgent need for family (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z–7 au-
housing at or in areas adjacent to mili- thorizes mortgage insurance to cover
tary installations.
new and rehabilitated hospitals, in-
(xii) Defense Housing for Impacted
cluding initial equipment.
Areas—Section 1748h–2 provides mort-
gage insurance on single family or (4) Hospital Survey and Construction
multifamily housing for sale or rent Act, as amended by the Hospital and
primarily to military or civilian per- Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42
sonnel of the Armed Services, National U.S.C. 291e). The provisions of this Act
Aeronautics and Space Administration, cover construction contracts made by
or Atomic Energy Commission. State or local authorities or private in-
(xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Sec- stitutions under Federal grant-in-aid
tion 1750g provides for mortgage insur- programs for the construction of hos-
ance in critical defense housing areas. pitals and other medical facilities.
(xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C.
(h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for 1114(b)). The act provides grant-in-aid
nonprofit organizations to finance the funds for airport construction limited
purchase and rehabilitation of deterio- to general site preparation runways,
rating or substandard housing for sub- taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant
sequent resale to low-income home thereto, and fire, rescue, and mainte-
purchasers. There must be located on nance buildings. The act excludes con-
the property five or more single family struction intended for use as a public
dwellings of detached, semidetached, or parking facility for passenger auto-
row construction. mobiles and the cost of construction of
(xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section any part of an airport building except
1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insur- such of those buildings or parts of
ance to nonprofit organizations or pub- buildings to house facilities or activi-
lic bodies or agencies executed to fi- ties directly related to the safety of
nance sale of individual dwellings to persons at the airport.
lower income individuals or families.
(6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459).
Also includes the rehabilitation of such
Construction contracts awarded by
housing if it is deteriorating or sub-
standard for subsequent resale to lower local authorities financed with the as-
income home purchasers. sistance of loans and grants from the
(xvi) Rental Housing Assistance— Federal Government. The construction
Section 1715Z–1 authorizes mortgage programs are for slum clearance and
insurance and interest reduction pay- urban renewal which includes rehabili-
ments on behalf of owners of rental tation grants, neighborhood develop-
housing projects designed for occu- ment programs, neighborhood renewal
pancy by lower income families. Pay- plans, community renewal, demolition
ments are also authorized for certain projects, and assistance for blighted
State or locally aided projects. areas. See the Housing Act of 1964,
(xvii) Condominium Housing—Sec- paragraph (b)(21) of this section, con-
tion 1715y(d) provides mortgage insur- cerning financial assistance for low-
ance on property purchased for the de- rent housing for domestic farm labor.
velopment of building sites. This in- (7) School Survey and Construction Act
cludes waterlines and water supply in- of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This act provides
stallations, sewer lines and sewage dis- for a Federal grant-in-aid program to
posal installations, steam, gas, and assist in the construction of schools in
electrical lines and installations, federally affected areas.
14
(8) Defense Housing & Community Fa- 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act
cilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. provide for grants to assist public and
1592i). Inactive Program. nonprofit medical, dental, and similar
(9) United States Housing Act of 1937 schools for the construction, expan-
(42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute covers the sion, or renovation of teaching facili-
construction of low-rent public housing ties.
and slum clearance projects awarded (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Con-
by local authorities. These projects are struction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D),
financed with the assistance of loans 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes
and grants from the Federal Govern- Federal financial assistance in the con-
ment. The slum clearance is the demo- struction of centers for research on
lition and removal of buildings from mental retardation and related aspects
any slum area to be used for a low-rent of human development, of university-
housing project. affiliated facilities for the mentally re-
(10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 tarded and of facilities for the men-
U.S.C. App. 2281). This act provides for tally retarded.
Federal assistance to the several (15) Community Mental Health Centers
States and their political subdivisions Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). This act au-
in the field of civil defense which in- thorizes Federal grants for the con-
cludes procurement, construction, leas- struction of public and other nonprofit
ing, or renovating of materials and fa- community mental health centers.
cilities. (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of
(11) Delaware River Basin Compact 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This act authorizes
(sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This joint resolu- the grant or loan of Federal funds to
tion creates, by intergovernmental assist public and other nonprofit insti-
compact between the United States, tutions of higher education in financ-
Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and ing the construction, rehabilitation, or
Pennsylvania, a regional agency for improvement of academic and related
planning, conservation, utilization, de- facilities in undergraduate and grad-
velopment, management and control of uate schools.
the water and related sources of the (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963
Delaware River. (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act provides for
(12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. Federal grants to the various States
332a(c)). This act provides Federal for construction of area vocational
grants to a university, college, or other education school facilities.
appropriate public or nonprofit private (18) Library Services and Construction
agency or institution for part or all of Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). This act pro-
the cost of constructing a facility for vides for Federal assistance to the var-
research or for research and related ious States for the construction of pub-
purposes. Research and related pur- lic libraries.
poses means research, research train- (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of
ing, surveys, or demonstrations in the 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This act provides
field of education, or the dissemination for grants and loans to assist States
of information derived therefrom, or and local public bodies and agencies
all of such activities, including (but thereof in financing the acquisition,
without limitation) experimental construction, reconstruction, and im-
schools, except that such term does not provement of facilities and equipment
include research, research training, for use, by operation or lease or other-
surveys, or demonstrations in the field wise, in mass transportation service in
of sectarian instruction or the dissemi- urban areas and in coordinating such
nation of information derived there- service with highway and other trans-
from. Construction includes new build- portation in such areas.
ings, and the acquisition, expansion, (20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964
remodeling, replacement, and alter- (42 U.S.C. 2947). This act covers con-
ation of existing buildings and the struction which is financed with assist-
equipping of new buildings and existing ance of the Federal Government for the
buildings. following purposes:
(13) Health Professions Educational As- (i) Authorizes Federal assistance for
sistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), construction of projects, buildings and
15
works which will provide young men search and development of the com-
and women in rural and urban residen- mercial fisheries resources of the Na-
tial centers with education, vocational tion.
training, and useful work experience (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42
(Title I). U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act provides for
(ii) Authorizes financial assistance grants to assist in the construction of
for construction work planned and car- new facilities for collegiate, associate
ried out at the community level for degree, and diploma schools of nursing,
antipoverty programs (Title II): or replacement or rehabilitation of ex-
(a) Authorizes loans to low income isting facilities of such schools.
rural families by assisting them to ac- (24) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
quire or improve real estate or reduce cation Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848).
encumbrances or erect improvements The purpose of the act is to provide fi-
thereon, and to participate in coopera- nancial assistance to local educational
tive associations and/or to finance non- agencies serving areas with concentra-
agricultural enterprises which will en- tions of children from low-income fam-
able such families to supplement their ilies for construction in connection
income (Title III); with the expansion or improvement of
(b) Authorizes loans to local coopera- their educational programs.
tive associations furnishing essential (25) Federal Water Pollution Control
processing, purchasing, or marketing Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act
services, supplies, or facilities predomi- of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for fi-
nantly to low-income rural families nancial assistance to States or munici-
(Title III); palities for construction of facilities in
(c) Authorizes financial assistance to connection with the prevention and
States, political subdivisions of States, control of water pollution. This in-
public and nonprofit agencies, institu- cludes projects that will control the
tions, organizations, farm associations, discharge into any waters of untreated
or individuals in establishing housing, or inadequately treated sewage.
sanitation, education, and child day- (26) Appalachian Regional Development
care programs for migrants and other Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). Author-
seasonally employed agricultural em- izes Federal assistance in the construc-
ployees and their families (Title III). tion of an Appalachian development
(iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees highway system; construction of multi-
loans to small businesses for construc- county demonstration health facilities,
tion work (Title IV). hospitals, regional health, diagnostic
(iv) Authorizes the payment of the and treatment centers, and other fa-
cost of experimental, pilot, or dem- cilities for health; seal and fill voids in
onstration projects to foster State pro- abandoned mines and to rehabilitate
grams providing construction work ex- strip mine areas; construction of
perience or training for unemployed fa- school facilities for vocational edu-
thers and needy people (Title V). cation; and to assist in construction of
(21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. sewage treatment works.
1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). Provides fi- (27) National Technical Institute for the
nancial assistance for low-rent housing Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). Provides
for domestic farm labor. The Act fur- for financial assistance for institutions
ther provides for loans, through public of higher education for the establish-
or private agencies, where feasible, to ment, construction, including equip-
owners or tenants of property in urban ment and operation, of a National In-
renewal areas to finance rehabilitation stitution for the Deaf.
required to conform the property to ap- (28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C.
plicable code requirements or carry out 1701(q)(c)(3)). This act authorizes loans
the objectives of the urban renewal to nonprofit corporations to be used for
plan for the area. the construction of housing and related
(22) The Commercial Fisheries Research facilities for elderly families. Also, the
and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C. provisions of the act provide for reha-
779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial bilitation, alteration, conversion or
assistance to State agencies for con- improvement of existing structures
struction projects designed for the re- which are otherwise inadequate for
16
proposed dwellings used by such fami- thorizes loans to assist in financing the
lies. purchase or development of land for
(29) College Housing Act of 1950, as public works which will assist in the
amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). This act creation of long-term employment op-
provides for Federal loans to assist portunities in the area.
educational institutions in providing (ii) Loans for the purchase or devel-
housing and other educational facili- opment of land and facilities (including
ties for students and faculties. machinery and equipment) for indus-
(30) Housing and Urban Development trial or commercial usage within rede-
Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c–3, 3107). This velopment areas; guarantee of loans for
act provides for Federal assistance for working capital made to private bor-
the following purposes: rowers by private lending institutions
(i) Grants to States and local public in connection with direct loan projects;
bodies to assist in any construction and to contract to pay to, or on behalf
work to be carried out under the open- of, business entities locating in rede-
space land and urban beautification velopment areas, a portion of the inter-
provisions contained therein. It pro- est costs which they incur in financing
vides for parks and recreation areas, their expansions from private sources.
conservation of land and other natural (iii) Loans and grants to create eco-
resources, and historical and scenic nomic development centers within des-
purposes. ignated county economic development
(ii) Grants to local public bodies and districts.
agencies to finance specific projects for (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation
basic public water facilities (including Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). This act pro-
works for the storage, treatment, puri- vides for financial assistance for con-
fication, and distribution of water), struction activities in connection with
and for basic public sewer facilities research and development of different
(other than ‘‘treatment works’’ as de- forms of high-speed ground transpor-
fined in the Federal Water Pollution tation and demonstration projects re-
Control Act). lating to intercity rail passenger serv-
(iii) Grants to any local public body ice.
or agency to assist in financing neigh- (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke
borhood facilities. These facilities Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)).
must be necessary for carrying out a This act provides for grants to public
program of health, recreational, social, or nonprofit private universities, med-
or similar community service and lo- ical schools, research, institutions,
cated so as to be available for the use hospitals, and other public and non-
of the area’s low or moderate income profit agencies and institutions, or as-
residents. sociations thereof to assist in construc-
(31) National Foundation on the Arts tion and equipment of facilities in con-
and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. nection with research, training, dem-
954(k)). The act establishes the ‘‘Na- onstration of patient care, diagnostic
tional Foundation on the Arts and the and treatment related to heart disease,
Humanities’’ which may provide cancer, stroke, and other major dis-
matching grants to groups (nonprofit eases.
organizations and State and other pub- (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and
lic organizations) and to individuals Community Mental Health Centers Con-
engaged in creative and performing struction Act Amendments of 1965 (20
arts for the entire range of artistic ac- U.S.C. 618(g)). These provisions provide
tivity, including construction of nec- for grants to institutions of higher edu-
essary facilities. cation for construction of facilities for
(32) Public Works and Economic Devel- research or for research and related
opment Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). This purposes relating to education for men-
act provides for Federal assistance for tally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf,
the following purposes: speech impaired, visually handicapped,
(i) Grants for the acquisition or de- seriously emotionally disturbed, crip-
velopment of land or improvements for pled, or other health impaired children
public works or development facility who by reason thereof require special
usage in redevelopment areas. It au- education.
17
(36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act 1416). This act provides for Federal as-
Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). sistance for the following purposes:
This act authorizes grants to assist in (i) Grants to assist in the construc-
meeting the costs of construction of tion, rehabilitation, alteration, or re-
public or other nonprofit workshops pair of residential property only if such
and rehabilitation facilities. residential property is designed for res-
(37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal idential use for eight or more families
Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This act provides to enable city demonstration agencies
for financial assistance to public (Fed- to carry out comprehensive city dem-
eral, State, interstate, or local) au- onstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310).
thorities, agencies, and institutions, (ii) Amends the National Housing Act
private agencies and institutions, and (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of
individuals in the construction of fa- 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for
cilities for solid-waste disposal. The coverage.
term construction includes the instal- (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C.
lation of initial equipment. 1857j–3). This act provides for Federal
(38) Medical Library Assistance Act of assistance to public or nonprofit agen-
1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b–3(b)(3)). This act cies, institutions, and organizations
provides for grants to public or private and to individuals, and contracts with
non-profit agencies or institutions for public or private agencies, institutions,
the cost of construction of medical li- or persons for construction of research
brary facilities. and development facilities and dem-
(39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act onstration plants relating to the appli-
(38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The construction cation of preventing or controlling dis-
industry health and safety standards charges into the air of various types of
do not apply to this act since it is not pollutants.
subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 (46) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
of 1950. cation Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bi-
(40) National Capital Transportation lingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b–6).
Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). This act This act provides for Federal assist-
provides for Federal assistance to the ance to local educational agencies or
National Capital Transportation Agen- to an institution of higher education
cy for construction of a rail rapid tran- applying jointly with a local edu-
sit system and related facilities for the cational agency for minor remodeling
Nation’s Capital. projects in connection with bilingual
(41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. education programs to meet the special
82). The program under this legislation needs of children with limited English-
has expired. speaking ability in the United States.
(42) Model Secondary School for the (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amend-
Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This act pro- ments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). This
vides for funds to establish and oper- act authorizes Federal assistance to
ate, including construction and initial any public or nonprofit private agency
equipment of new buildings, expansion, or organization for the construction of
remodeling, and alteration of existing a center for vocational rehabilitation
buildings and equipment thereof, a of handicapped individuals who are
model secondary school for the deaf to both deaf and blind which shall be
serve the residents of the District of known as the National Center for Deaf-
Columbia and nearby States. Blind Youths and Adults. Construction
(43) Allied Health Professions Personnel includes new buildings and expansion,
Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. remodeling, alteration and renovation
295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for of existing buildings, and initial equip-
grants to assist in the construction of ment of such new, newly acquired, ex-
new facilities for training centers for panded, remodeled, altered, or ren-
allied health professions, or replace- ovated buildings.
ment or rehabilitation of existing fa- (48) National Visitor Center Facilities
cilities for such centers. Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). This act au-
(44) Demonstration Cities and Metro- thorizes agreements and leases with
politan Development Act of 1966 (42 the owner of property in the District of
U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. Columbia known as Union Station for
18
the use of all or a part of such property bility and desirability of such schools.
for a national visitor center to be The act still further provides grants to
known as the National Visitor Center. State boards, to colleges and univer-
The agreements and leases shall pro- sities, to public educational agencies,
vide for such alterations of the Union organizations or institutions to reduce
Station Building as necessary to pro- the cost of borrowing funds for the con-
vide adequate facilities for visitors. struction of residential schools and
They also provide for the construction dormitories.
of a parking facility, including nec- (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39
essary approaches and ramps. U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act provides for
(49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention construction, modification, alteration,
and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). repair, and other improvements of
This act provides for Federal grants to postal facilities located in leased build-
State, county, municipal, or other pub- ings.
lic agency or combination thereof for (54) Airport and Airway Development
the construction of facilities to be used Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–258, section
in connection with rehabilitation serv- 52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal
ices for the diagnosis, treatment, and financial assistance to States and lo-
rehabilitation of delinquent youths and calities for the construction, improve-
youths in danger of becoming delin- ment, or repair of public airports.
quent.
(55) (i) Public Law 91–230. This Act
(50) Housing and Urban Development
provides for federal financial assist-
Act of 1968 (including New Communities
ance to institutions of higher learning
Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act
for the construction of a National Cen-
provides for Federal assistance for the
ter on Educational Media and Mate-
following purposes:
rials for the Handicapped. The program
(i) Guarantees, and commitments to
under this statute expires on July 1,
guarantee, the bonds, debentures,
1971. Public Law 91–230, section 662(1).
notes, and other obligations issued by
new community developers to help fi- (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act
nance new community development (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). This Act pro-
projects. vides for financial assistance to States
(ii) Amends section 212(a) of the Na- for construction, expansion, remod-
tional Housing Act, adding section 236 eling, or alteration of facilities for the
for ‘‘Rental Housing for Lower Income education of handicapped children at
Families’’ and section 242 ‘‘Mortgage the preschool, elementary school, and
Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals’’ secondary school levels.
thereto. (56) Housing and Urban Development
(51) Public Health Service Act Amend- Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–609, section
ment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Re- 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to
habilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 States and local public agencies to help
U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). This act provides finance the development of open-space
for grants to a public and nonprofit pri- or other land in urban areas for open-
vate agency or organization for con- space uses. This Act becomes effective
struction projects consisting of any fa- on July 1, 1971.
cilities (including post-hospitalization (57) Developmental Disabilities Services
treatment facilities for the prevention and Facilities Construction Amendments
and treatment of alcoholism or treat- of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–517, section 135(a)(5)).
ment of narcotic addicts.) This Act authorizes grants to States
(52) Vocational Education Amendments for construction of facilities for the
of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This act pro- provision of services to persons with
vides for grants to States for the con- developmental disabilities who are un-
struction of area vocational education able to pay for such services.
school facilities. The act further pro- (58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970
vides grants to public educational (Pub. L. 91–518, section 405(d)). This stat-
agencies, organizations, or institutions ute provides that the National Rail-
for construction of residential schools road Passenger Corporation may con-
to provide vocational education for the struct physical facilities necessary to
purpose of demonstrating the feasi- intercity rail passenger operations
19
within the basic national rail pas- or dangerous to his health or safety’’ as
senger system designated by the Sec- these health and safety standards are
retary of Transportation. applied in the rules of the Secretary of
(c) VA and FHA housing. In the course Labor.
of the legislative development of sec- (c) The term subcontractor under sec-
tion 107, it was recognized that section tion 107 is considered to mean a person
107 would not apply to housing con- who agrees to perform any part of the
struction for which insurance was labor or material requirements of a
issued by the Federal Housing Author- contract for construction, alteration or
ity and Veterans’ Administration for repair. Cf. MacEvoy Co. v. United
individual home ownership. Concerning States, 322 U.S. 102, 108–9 (1944). A per-
construction under the National Hous- son who undertakes to perform a por-
ing Act, Reorganization Plan No. 14 of tion of a contract involving the fur-
1950 applies to construction which is nishing of supplies or materials will be
subject to the minimum wage require- considered a ‘‘subcontractor’’ under
ments of section 212(a) thereof (12 this part and section 107 if the work in
U.S.C. 1715c). question involves the performance of
construction work and is to be per-
§ 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory formed: (1) Directly on or near the con-
terms. struction site, or (2) by the employer
(a) The terms construction, alteration, for the specific project on a customized
and repair used in section 107 of the Act basis. Thus, a supplier of materials
are also used in section 1 of the Davis- which will become an integral part of
Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a), providing the construction is a ‘‘subcontractor’’
minimum wage protection on Federal if the supplier fabricates or assembles
construction contracts, and section 1 of the goods or materials in question spe-
the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), pro- cifically for the construction project
viding performance and payment bond and the work involved may be said to
protection on Federal construction be construction activity. If the goods
contracts. Similarly, the terms con- or materials in question are ordinarily
tractor and subcontractor are used in sold to other customers from regular
those statutes, as well as in Copeland inventory, the supplier is not a ‘‘sub-
(Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) contractor.’’ Generally, the furnishing
and the Contract Work Hours and Safe- of prestressed concrete beams and
ty Standards Act itself, which apply prestressed structural steel would be
concurrently with the Miller Act and considered manufacturing; therefore a
the Davis-Bacon Act on Federal con- supplier of such materials would not be
struction contracts and also apply to considered a ‘‘subcontractor.’’ An ex-
most federally assisted construction ample of material supplied ‘‘for the
contracts. The use of the same or iden- specific project on a customized basis’’
tical terms in these statutes which as that phrase is used in this section
apply concurrently with section 107 of would be ventilating ducts, fabricated
the Act have considerable precedential in a shop away from the construction
value in ascertaining the coverage of job site and specifically cut for the
section 107. project according to design specifica-
(b) It should be noted that section 1 tions. On the other hand, if a con-
of the Davis-Bacon Act limits min- tractor buys standard size nails from a
imum wage protection to laborers and foundry, the foundry would not be a
mechanics ‘‘employed directly’’ upon covered ‘‘subcontractor.’’ Ordinarily a
the ‘‘site of the work.’’ There is no contract for the supplying of construc-
comparable limitation in section 107 of tion equipment to a contractor would
the Act. Section 107 expressly requires not, in and of itself, be considered a
as a self-executing condition of each ‘‘subcontractor’’ for purposes of this
covered contract that no contractor or part.
subcontractor shall require ‘‘any la-
borer or mechanic employed in the per- § 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’
formance of the contract to work in types of performance.
surroundings or under working condi- (a) It is the intent of the Congress to
tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, provide safety and health protection of
20
Federal, federally financed, or feder- tract will be performed nor will any of
ally assisted construction. See, for ex- the materials, supplies, articles or
ample, H. Report No. 91–241, 91st Cong., equipment to be manufactured or fur-
first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear nished under said contract be manufac-
that when a Federal contract calls for tured or fabricated in any plants, fac-
mixed types of performance, such as tories, buildings, or surroundings or
both manufacturing and construction, under working conditions which are
section 107 would apply to the con- unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous
struction. By its express terms, section to the health and safety of employees
107 applies to a contract which is ‘‘for engaged in the performance of said
construction, alteration, and/or re- contract.’’ The rules of the Secretary
pair.’’ Such a contract is not required concerning these standards are pub-
to be exclusively for such services. The lished in 41 CFR part 50–204, and ex-
application of the section is not lim- press the Secretary of Labor’s interpre-
ited to contracts which permit an over- tation and application of section 1(e) of
all characterization as ‘‘construction the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act
contracts.’’ The text of section 107 is to certain particular working condi-
not so limited. tions. None of the described working
(b) When the mixed types of perform- conditions are intended to deal with
ances include both construction and construction activities, although such
manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) con- activities may conceivably be a part of
cerning the relationship between the a contract which is subject to the
Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
section 107. Nevertheless, such activities remain
subject to the general statutory duty
§ 1926.15 Relationship to the Service
Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public prescribed by section 1(e). Section
Contracts Act. 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act provides, among
(a) A contract for ‘‘construction’’ is other things, that the Act shall not
one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., apply to any work required to be done
41 CFR 1–1.208. Section 2(e) of the Serv- in accordance with the provisions of
ice Contract Act of 1965 requires as a the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts
condition of every Federal contract Act.
(and bid specification therefor) exceed-
ing $2,500, the ‘‘principal purpose’’ of § 1926.16 Rules of construction.
which is to furnish services to the
United States through the use of (a) The prime contractor and any
‘‘service employees,’’ that certain safe- subcontractors may make their own
ty and health standards be met. See 29 arrangements with respect to obliga-
CFR part 1925, which contains the De- tions which might be more appro-
partment rules concerning these stand- priately treated on a jobsite basis rath-
ards. Section 7 of the Service Contract er than individually. Thus, for exam-
Act provides that the Act shall not ple, the prime contractor and his sub-
apply to ‘‘any contract of the United contractors may wish to make an ex-
States or District of Columbia for con- press agreement that the prime con-
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- tractor or one of the subcontractors
cluding painting and decorating of pub- will provide all required first-aid or
lic buildings or public works.’’ It is toilet facilities, thus relieving the sub-
clear from the legislative history of contractors from the actual, but not
section 107 that no gaps in coverage be- any legal, responsibility (or, as the
tween the two statutes are intended. case may be, relieving the other sub-
(b) The Walsh-Healey Public Con- contractors from this responsibility).
tracts Act requires that contracts en- In no case shall the prime contractor
tered into by any Federal agency for be relieved of overall responsibility for
the manufacture or furnishing of mate- compliance with the requirements of
rials, supplies, articles, and equipment this part for all work to be performed
in any amount exceeding $10,000 must under the contract.
contain, among other provisions, a re- (b) By contracting for full perform-
quirement that ‘‘no part of such con- ance of a contract subject to section
21
107 of the Act, the prime contractor as- programs as may be necessary to com-
sumes all obligations prescribed as em- ply with this part.
ployer obligations under the standards (2) Such programs shall provide for
contained in this part, whether or not frequent and regular inspections of the
he subcontracts any part of the work. job sites, materials, and equipment to
(c) To the extent that a subcon- be made by competent persons des-
tractor of any tier agrees to perform ignated by the employers.
any part of the contract, he also as- (3) The use of any machinery, tool,
sumes responsibility for complying material, or equipment which is not in
with the standards in this part with re-
compliance with any applicable re-
spect to that part. Thus, the prime
quirement of this part is prohibited.
contractor assumes the entire responsi-
Such machine, tool, material, or equip-
bility under the contract and the sub-
contractor assumes responsibility with ment shall either be identified as un-
respect to his portion of the work. safe by tagging or locking the controls
With respect to subcontracted work, to render them inoperable or shall be
the prime contractor and any subcon- physically removed from its place of
tractor or subcontractors shall be operation.
deemed to have joint responsibility. (4) The employer shall permit only
(d) Where joint responsibility exists, those employees qualified by training
both the prime contractor and his sub- or experience to operate equipment and
contractor or subcontractors, regard- machinery.
less of tier, shall be considered subject (c) The standards contained in this
to the enforcement provisions of the part shall apply with respect to em-
Act. ployments performed in a workplace in
a State, the District of Columbia, the
Subpart C—General Safety and Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the
Health Provisions Virgin Islands, American Samoa,
Guam, Trust Territory of the Pacific
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours Islands, Wake Island, Outer Conti-
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); nental Shelf lands defined in the Outer
secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Continental Shelf Lands Act, Johnston
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Island, and the Canal Zone.
Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR
(d) (1) If a particular standard is spe-
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or
6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR cifically applicable to a condition,
part 1911. practice, means, method, operation, or
process, it shall prevail over any dif-
§ 1926.20 General safety and health ferent general standard which might
provisions. otherwise be applicable to the same
(a) Contractor requirements. (1) Sec- condition, practice, means, method, op-
tion 107 of the Act requires that it eration, or process.
shall be a condition of each contract (2) On the other hand, any standard
which is entered into under legislation shall apply according to its terms to
subject to Reorganization Plan Number any employment and place of employ-
14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in ment in any industry, even though par-
§ 1926.12, and is for construction, alter- ticular standards are also prescribed
ation, and/or repair, including painting for the industry to the extent that
and decorating, that no contractor or none of such particular standards ap-
subcontractor for any part of the con- plies.
tract work shall require any laborer or (e) In the event a standard protects
mechanic employed in the performance on its face a class of persons larger
of the contract to work in sur-
than employees, the standard shall be
roundings or under working conditions
applicable under this part only to em-
which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
ployees and their employment and
dangerous to his health or safety.
places of employment.
(b) Accident prevention responsibilities.
(1) It shall be the responsibility of the [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
employer to initiate and maintain such 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993]
22
§ 1926.21 Safety training and edu- cient atmosphere. Confined or enclosed

cation. spaces include, but are not limited to,
(a) General requirements. The Sec- storage tanks, process vessels, bins,
retary shall, pursuant to section 107(f) boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts,
of the Act, establish and supervise pro- sewers, underground utility vaults,
grams for the education and training of tunnels, pipelines, and open top spaces
employers and employees in the rec- more than 4 feet in depth such as pits,
ognition, avoidance and prevention of tubs, vaults, and vessels.
unsafe conditions in employments cov-
ered by the act. § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of
injuries. [Reserved]
(b) Employer responsibility. (1) The em-
ployer should avail himself of the safe- § 1926.23 First aid and medical atten-
ty and health training programs the tion.
Secretary provides.
(2) The employer shall instruct each First aid services and provisions for
employee in the recognition and avoid- medical care shall be made available
ance of unsafe conditions and the regu- by the employer for every employee
lations applicable to his work environ- covered by these regulations. Regula-
ment to control or eliminate any haz- tions prescribing specific requirements
ards or other exposure to illness or infor first aid, medical attention, and
jury. emergency facilities are contained in
(3) Employees required to handle or subpart D of this part.
use poisons, caustics, and other harm-
§ 1926.24 Fire protection and preven-
ful substances shall be instructed re- tion.
garding the safe handling and use, and
be made aware of the potential haz- The employer shall be responsible for
ards, personal hygiene, and personal the development and maintenance of
protective measures required. an effective fire protection and preven-
(4) In job site areas where harmful tion program at the job site through-
plants or animals are present, employ- out all phases of the construction, re-
ees who may be exposed shall be in- pair, alteration, or demolition work.
structed regarding the potential haz- The employer shall ensure the avail-
ards, and how to avoid injury, and the ability of the fire protection and sup-
first aid procedures to be used in the pression equipment required by subpart
event of injury. F of this part.
(5) Employees required to handle or
§ 1926.25 Housekeeping.
use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic
materials shall be instructed in the (a) During the course of construction,
safe handling and use of these mate- alteration, or repairs, form and scrap
rials and made aware of the specific re- lumber with protruding nails, and all
quirements contained in subparts D, F, other debris, shall be kept cleared from
and other applicable subparts of this work areas, passageways, and stairs, in
part. and around buildings or other struc-
(6)(i) All employees required to enter tures.
into confined or enclosed spaces shall (b) Combustible scrap and debris
be instructed as to the nature of the shall be removed at regular intervals
hazards involved, the necessary pre- during the course of construction. Safe
cautions to be taken, and in the use of means shall be provided to facilitate
protective and emergency equipment such removal.
required. The employer shall comply (c) Containers shall be provided for
with any specific regulations that the collection and separation of waste,
apply to work in dangerous or poten- trash, oily and used rags, and other
tially dangerous areas. refuse. Containers used for garbage and
(ii) For purposes of paragraph (b)(6)(i) other oily, flammable, or hazardous
of this section, confined or enclosed wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful
space means any space having a limited dusts, etc. shall be equipped with cov-
means of egress, which is subject to the ers. Garbage and other waste shall be
accumulation of toxic or flammable disposed of at frequent and regular in-
contaminants or has an oxygen defi- tervals.
23
§ 1926.26 Illumination. contract, except naval ship construc-

tion, is work subject to the Act.
Construction areas, aisles, stairs,
ramps, runways, corridors, offices, (b) Applicable safety and health stand-
shops, and storage areas where work is ards. For the purpose of work carried
in progress shall be lighted with either out under this section, the safety and
natural or artificial illumination. The health regulations in part 1915 of this
minimum illumination requirements title, Shipyard Employment, shall
for work areas are contained in subpart apply.
D of this part. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1926.27 Sanitation.
Health and sanitation requirements § 1926.31 Incorporation by reference.
for drinking water are contained in (a) The standards of agencies of the
subpart D of this part. U.S. Government, and organizations
which are not agencies of the U.S. Gov-
§ 1926.28 Personal protective equip-
ment. ernment which are incorporated by ref-
erence in this part, have the same force
(a) The employer is responsible for and effect as other standards in this
requiring the wearing of appropriate part. Only the mandatory provisions
personal protective equipment in all (i.e., provisions containing the word
operations where there is an exposure ‘‘shall’’ or other mandatory language)
to hazardous conditions or where this of standards incorporated by reference
part indicates the need for using such are adopted as standards under the Oc-
equipment to reduce the hazards to the cupational Safety and Health Act. The
employees. locations where these standards may
(b) Regulations governing the use, se- be examined are as follows:
lection, and maintenance of personal (1) Offices of the Occupational Safety
protective and lifesaving equipment and Health Administration, U.S. De-
are described under subpart E of this partment of Labor, Frances Perkins
part. Building, Washington, DC 20210.
§ 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. (2) The Regional and Field Offices of
the Occupational Safety and Health
(a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid Administration, which are listed in the
certification by an insurance company U.S. Government Manual.
or regulatory authority shall be (b) Any changes in the specifications,
deemed as acceptable evidence of safe standards and codes incorporated by
installation, inspection, and testing of reference in this part and an official
pressure vessels provided by the em- historic file of such changes are avail-
ployer. able at the offices referred to in para-
(b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the graph (a) of this section. All questions
employer shall be deemed to be in com- as to the applicability of such changes
pliance with the requirements of this should also be referred to these offices.
part when evidence of current and valid
certification by an insurance company [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
or regulatory authority attesting to 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996;
63 FR 33468, June 18, 1998]
the safe installation, inspection, and
testing is presented.
§ 1926.32 Definitions.
(c) Other requirements. Regulations
prescribing specific requirements for The following definitions shall apply
other types of pressure vessels and in the application of the regulations in
similar equipment are contained in this part:
subparts F and O of this part. (a) Act means section 107 of the Con-
tract Work Hours and Safety Stand-
§ 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repair- ards Act, commonly known as the Con-
ing. struction Safety Act (86 Stat. 96; 40
(a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repair- U.S.C. 333).
ing, alterations, and maintenance per- (b) ANSI means American National
formed on ships under Government Standards Institute.
24
(c) Approved means sanctioned, en- (k) Employer means contractor or

dorsed, accredited, certified, or accept- subcontractor within the meaning of
ed as satisfactory by a duly constituted the Act and of this part.
and nationally recognized authority or (l) Hazardous substance means a sub-
agency. stance which, by reason of being explo-
(d) Authorized person means a person sive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive,
approved or assigned by the employer oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise
to perform a specific type of duty or harmful, is likely to cause death or in-
duties or to be at a specific location or jury.
locations at the jobsite. (m) Qualified means one who, by pos-
(e) Administration means the Occupa- session of a recognized degree, certifi-
tional Safety and Health Administra- cate, or professional standing, or who
tion. by extensive knowledge, training, and
(f) Competent person means one who is experience, has successfully dem-
capable of identifying existing and pre- onstrated his ability to solve or resolve
dictable hazards in the surroundings or problems relating to the subject mat-
working conditions which are unsani- ter, the work, or the project.
tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- (n) Safety factor means the ratio of
ployees, and who has authorization to the ultimate breaking strength of a
take prompt corrective measures to member or piece of material or equip-
eliminate them. ment to the actual working stress or
safe load when in use.
(g) Construction work. For purposes of
this section, Construction work means (o) Secretary means the Secretary of
work for construction, alteration, and/ Labor.
or repair, including painting and deco- (p) SAE means Society of Automotive
rating. Engineers.
(h) Defect means any characteristic (q) Shall means mandatory.
or condition which tends to weaken or (r) Should means recommended.
reduce the strength of the tool, object, (s) Suitable means that which fits,
or structure of which it is a part. and has the qualities or qualifications
(i) Designated person means ‘‘author- to meet a given purpose, occasion, con-
ized person’’ as defined in paragraph (d) dition, function, or circumstance.
of this section. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(j) Employee means every laborer or 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993]
mechanic under the Act regardless of
the contractual relationship which § 1926.33 Access to employee exposure
may be alleged to exist between the la- and medical records.
borer and mechanic and the contractor NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
or subcontractor who engaged him. struction work under this section are iden-
‘‘Laborer and mechanic’’ are not de- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this
fined in the Act, but the identical chapter.
terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
(40 U.S.C. 276a), which provides for
minimum wage protection on Federal § 1926.34 Means of egress.
and federally assisted construction (a) General. In every building or
contracts. The use of the same term in structure exits shall be so arranged and
a statute which often applies concur- maintained as to provide free and un-
rently with section 107 of the Act has obstructed egress from all parts of the
considerable precedential value in building or structure at all times when
ascertaining the meaning of ‘‘laborer it is occupied. No lock or fastening to
and mechanic’’ as used in the Act. La- prevent free escape from the inside of
borer generally means one who per- any building shall be installed except
forms manual labor or who labors at an in mental, penal, or corrective institu-
occupation requiring physical strength; tions where supervisory personnel is
mechanic generally means a worker continually on duty and effective pro-
skilled with tools. See 18 Comp. Gen. visions are made to remove occupants
341. in case of fire or other emergency.
25
(b) Exit marking. Exits shall be cient number of persons to assist in the
marked by a readily visible sign. Ac- safe and orderly emergency evacuation
cess to exits shall be marked by readily of employees.
visible signs in all cases where the exit (2) The employer shall review the
or way to reach it is not immediately plan with each employee covered by
visible to the occupants. the plan at the following times:
(c) Maintenance and workmanship. (i) Initially when the plan is devel-
Means of egress shall be continually oped,
maintained free of all obstructions or (ii) Whenever the employee’s respon-
impediments to full instant use in the sibilities or designated actions under
case of fire or other emergency. the plan change, and
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] (iii) Whenever the plan is changed.
(3) The employer shall review with
§ 1926.35 Employee emergency action each employee upon initial assignment
plans. those parts of the plan which the em-
(a) Scope and application. This section ployee must know to protect the em-
applies to all emergency action plans ployee in the event of an emergency.
required by a particular OSHA stand- The written plan shall be kept at the
ard. The emergency action plan shall workplace and made available for em-
be in writing (except as provided in the ployee review. For those employers
last sentence of paragraph (e)(3) of this with 10 or fewer employees the plan
section) and shall cover those des- may be communicated orally to em-
ignated actions employers and employ- ployees and the employer need not
ees must take to ensure employee safe- maintain a written plan.
ty from fire and other emergencies. [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
(b) Elements. The following elements,
at a minimum, shall be included in the
plan:
Subpart D—Occupational Health
(1) Emergency escape procedures and and Environmental Controls
emergency escape route assignments;
(2) Procedures to be followed by em- AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
ployees who remain to operate critical Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
plant operations before they evacuate; U.S.C. 3701 et seq.); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(3) Procedures to account for all em-
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La-
ployees after emergency evacuation bor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
has been completed; 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
(4) Rescue and medical duties for 96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (62 FR 50017), or 5.2002
those employees who are to perform (67 FR 650008); as applicable; and 29 CFR part
them; 11.
(5) The preferred means of reporting Sections 1926.58, 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65
fires and other emergencies; and also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR
(6) Names or regular job titles of per- part 1911.
Section 1926.62 of 29 CFR also issued under
sons or departments who can be con-
section 1031 of the Housing and Community
tacted for further information or expla- Development Act of 1992 (42 U.S.C. 4853).
nation of duties under the plan. Section 1926.65 of 29 CFR also issued under
(c) Alarm system. (1) The employer section 126 of the Superfund Amendments
shall establish an employee alarm sys- and Reauthorization Act of 1986, as amended
tem which complies with § 1926.159. (29 U.S.C. 655 note), and 5 U.S.C. 553.
(2) If the employee alarm system is
used for alerting fire brigade members, § 1926.50 Medical services and first
or for other purposes, a distinctive sig- aid.
nal for each purpose shall be used. (a) The employer shall insure the
(d) Evacuation. The employer shall availability of medical personnel for
establish in the emergency action plan advice and consultation on matters of
the types of evacuation to be used in occupational health.
emergency circumstances. (b) Provisions shall be made prior to
(e) Training. (1) Before implementing commencement of the project for
the emergency action plan, the em- prompt medical attention in case of se-
ployer shall designate and train a suffi- rious injury.
26
(c) In the absence of an infirmary, aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 200
clinic, hospital, or physician, that is log, OSHA 101’s or other reports to identify
reasonably accessible in terms of time these unique problems. Consultation from
the local Fire/Rescue Department, appro-
and distance to the worksite, which is priate medical professional, or local emer-
available for the treatment of injured gency room may be helpful to employers in
employees, a person who has a valid these circumstances. By assessing the spe-
certificate in first-aid training from cific needs of their workplace, employers can
the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the Amer- ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies
ican Red Cross, or equivalent training are available. Employers should assess the
that can be verified by documentary specific needs of their worksite periodically
evidence, shall be available at the and augment the first aid kit appropriately.
If it is reasonably anticipated employees
worksite to render first aid. will be exposed to blood or other potentially
(d)(1) First aid supplies shall be eas- infectious materials while using first-aid
ily accessible when required. supplies, employers should provide personal
(2) The contents of the first aid kit protective equipment (PPE). Appropriate
shall be placed in a weatherproof con- PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields,
tainer with individual sealed packages masks and eye protection (see ‘‘Occupational
for each type of item, and shall be Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens’’, 29 CFR
checked by the employer before being 1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175).
sent out on each job and at least week- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
ly on each job to ensure that the ex- 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984;
pended items are replaced. 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998]
(e) Proper equipment for prompt
transportation of the injured person to § 1926.51 Sanitation.
a physician or hospital, or a commu-
nication system for contacting nec- (a) Potable water. (1) An adequate sup-
essary ambulance service, shall be pro- ply of potable water shall be provided
vided. in all places of employment.
(f) In areas where 911 is not available, (2) Portable containers used to dis-
the telephone numbers of the physi- pense drinking water shall be capable
cians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be of being tightly closed, and equipped
conspicuously posted. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
(g) Where the eyes or body of any from containers.
person may be exposed to injurious cor- (3) Any container used to distribute
rosive materials, suitable facilities for drinking water shall be clearly marked
quick drenching or flushing of the eyes as to the nature of its contents and not
and body shall be provided within the used for any other purpose.
(4) The common drinking cup is pro-
work area for immediate emergency
hibited.
use.
(5) Where single service cups (to be
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.50—FIRST AID KITS used but once) are supplied, both a san-
(NON-MANDATORY) itary container for the unused cups and
a receptacle for disposing of the used
First aid supplies are required to be easily cups shall be provided.
accessible under paragraph § 1926.50(d)(1). An (6) Potable water means water which
example of the minimal contents of a generic meets the quality standards prescribed
first aid kit is described in American Na-
tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1978 ‘‘Min-
in the U.S. Public Health Service
imum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type Drinking Water Standards, published
First-aid Kits’’. The contents of the kit list- in 42 CFR part 72, or water which is ap-
ed in the ANSI standard should be adequate proved for drinking purposes by the
for small work sites. When larger operations State or local authority having juris-
or multiple operations are being conducted diction.
at the same location, employers should de- (b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for
termine the need for additional first aid kits nonpotable water, such as water for in-
at the worksite, additional types of first aid dustrial or firefighting purposes only,
equipment and supplies and additional quan-
tities and types of supplies and equipment in
shall be identified by signs meeting the
the first aid kits. requirements of subpart G of this part,
In a similar fashion, employers who have to indicate clearly that the water is
unique or changing first-aid needs in their unsafe and is not to be used for drink-
workplace, may need to enhance their first- ing, washing, or cooking purposes.
27
(2) There shall be no cross-connec- in near proximity to the worksite and

tion, open or potential, between a sys- shall be so equipped as to enable em-
tem furnishing potable water and a ployees to remove such substances.
system furnishing nonpotable water. (2) General. Washing facilities shall
(c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1) be maintained in a sanitary condition.
Toilets shall be provided for employees (3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be
according to the following table: made available in all places of employ-
ment. The requirements of this sub-
TABLE D–1 division do not apply to mobile crews
Number of em-
or to normally unattended work loca-
Minimum number of facilities tions if employees working at these lo-
ployees
cations have transportation readily
20 or less .......... 1.
20 or more ......... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers. available to nearby washing facilities
200 or more ....... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers. which meet the other requirements of
this paragraph.
(2) Under temporary field conditions, (ii) Each lavatory shall be provided
provisions shall be made to assure not with hot and cold running water, or
less than one toilet facility is avail- tepid running water.
able. (iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing
(3) Job sites, not provided with a san- agents shall be provided.
itary sewer, shall be provided with one (iv) Individual hand towels or sec-
of the following toilet facilities unless tions thereof, of cloth or paper, warm
prohibited by local codes: air blowers or clean individual sections
(i) Privies (where their use will not of continuous cloth toweling, conven-
contaminate ground or surface water); ient to the lavatories, shall be pro-
(ii) Chemical toilets; vided.
(iii) Recirculating toilets; (4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are
(iv) Combustion toilets. required by a particular standard, the
(4) The requirements of this para- showers shall be provided in accord-
graph (c) for sanitation facilities shall ance with paragraphs (f)(4) (ii) through
not apply to mobile crews having (v) of this section.
transportation readily available to (ii) One shower shall be provided for
nearby toilet facilities. each 10 employees of each sex, or nu-
(d) Food handling. (1) All employees’ merical fraction thereof, who are re-
food service facilities and operations quired to shower during the same shift.
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- (iii) Body soap or other appropriate
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- cleansing agents convenient to the
tions in which they are located. showers shall be provided as specified
(2) All employee food service facili- in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section.
ties and operations shall be carried out (iv) Showers shall be provided with
in accordance with sound hygienic hot and cold water feeding a common
principles. In all places of employment discharge line.
where all or part of the food service is (v) Employees who use showers shall
provided, the food dispensed shall be be provided with individual clean tow-
wholesome, free from spoilage, and els.
shall be processed, prepared, handled, (g) Eating and drinking areas. No em-
and stored in such a manner as to be ployee shall be allowed to consume
protected against contamination. food or beverages in a toilet room nor
(e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- rial.
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, (h) Vermin control. Every enclosed
and lighted. workplace shall be so constructed,
(f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer equipped, and maintained, so far as
shall provide adequate washing facili- reasonably practicable, as to prevent
ties for employees engaged in the ap- the entrance or harborage of rodents,
plication of paints, coating, herbicides, insects, and other vermin. A con-
or insecticides, or in other operations tinuing and effective extermination
where contaminants may be harmful to program shall be instituted where their
the employees. Such facilities shall be presence is detected.
28
(i) Change rooms. Whenever employ- forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec-
ees are required by a particular stand- tion.
ard to wear protective clothing because (ii) Fe = (T1/L1)+(T2/L2)+ · · · + (Tn/Ln)
of the possibility of contamination
with toxic materials, change rooms Where:
equipped with storage facilities for Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor.
street clothes and separate storage fa- T = The period of noise exposure at any es-
cilities for the protective clothing sentially constant level.
shall be provided. L = The duration of the permissible noise ex-
posure at the constant level (from Table D–
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 2).
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993]
If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the
§ 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. exposure exceeds permissible levels.
(a) Protection against the effects of (iii) A sample computation showing
noise exposure shall be provided when an application of the formula in para-
the sound levels exceed those shown in graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as fol-
Table D–2 of this section when meas- lows. An employee is exposed at these
ured on the A-scale of a standard sound levels for these periods:
level meter at slow response.
(b) When employees are subjected to 110 db A 1⁄4 hour.
sound levels exceeding those listed in 100 db A 1⁄2 hour.
Table D–2 of this section, feasible ad- 90 db A 11⁄2 hours.
ministrative or engineering controls Fe = (1⁄4/1⁄2)+(1⁄2/2)+(11⁄2/8)
shall be utilized. If such controls fail to Fe = 0.500+0.25+0.188
reduce sound levels within the levels of Fe = 0.938
the table, personal protective equip-
ment as required in subpart E, shall be Since the value of Fe does not exceed
provided and used to reduce sound lev- unity, the exposure is within permis-
els within the levels of the table. sible limits.
(c) If the variations in noise level in- (e) Exposure to impulsive or impact
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second noise should not exceed 140 dB peak
or less, it is to be considered contin- sound pressure level.
uous.
(d)(1) In all cases where the sound § 1926.53 Ionizing radiation.
levels exceed the values shown herein, (a) In construction and related ac-
a continuing, effective hearing con- tivities involving the use of sources of
servation program shall be adminis-
ionizing radiation, the pertinent provi-
tered.
sions of the Nuclear Regulatory Com-
TABLE D–2—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES mission’s Standards for Protection
Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), re-
Sound level lating to protection against occupa-
Duration per day, hours dBA slow
response tional radiation exposure, shall apply.
(b) Any activity which involves the
8 ......................................................................... 90
6 ......................................................................... 92 use of radioactive materials or X-rays,
4 ......................................................................... 95 whether or not under license from the
3 ......................................................................... 97 Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall
2 ......................................................................... 100
11⁄2 ..................................................................... 102 be performed by competent persons
1 ......................................................................... 105 specially trained in the proper and safe
1⁄2 ....................................................................... 110
1⁄4 or less ...........................................................
operation of such equipment. In the
115
case of materials used under Commis-
(2)(i) When the daily noise exposure sion license, only persons actually li-
is composed of two or more periods of censed, or competent persons under di-
noise exposure of different levels, their rection and supervision of the licensee,
combined effect should be considered, shall perform such work.
rather than the individual effect of (c)–(r) [Reserved]
each. Exposure to different levels for NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
various periods of time shall be com- struction work under paragraphs (c) through
puted according to the formula set (r) of this section are identical to those set
29
forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of (3) Diffused reflected light: 21⁄2 watts
§ 1910.1096 of this chapter. per square centimeter.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (k) Laser unit in operation should be
1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; set up above the heads of the employ-
61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] ees, when possible.
§ 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. (l) Employees shall not be exposed to
microwave power densities in excess of
(a) Only qualified and trained em- 10 milliwatts per square centimeter.
ployees shall be assigned to install, ad-
just, and operate laser equipment. § 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts,
(b) Proof of qualification of the laser and mists.
equipment operator shall be available
(a) Exposure of employees to inhala-
and in possession of the operator at all
tion, ingestion, skin absorption, or
times.
contact with any material or substance
(c) Employees, when working in areas
at a concentration above those speci-
in which a potential exposure to direct
fied in the ‘‘Threshold Limit Values of
or reflected laser light greater than
Airborne Contaminants for 1970’’ of the
0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall
American Conference of Governmental
be provided with antilaser eye protec-
Industrial Hygienists, shall be avoided.
tion devices as specified in subpart E of
this part. See Appendix A to this section.
(d) Areas in which lasers are used (b) To achieve compliance with para-
shall be posted with standard laser graph (a) of this section, administra-
warning placards. tive or engineering controls must first
(e) Beam shutters or caps shall be be implemented whenever feasible.
utilized, or the laser turned off, when When such controls are not feasible to
laser transmission is not actually re- achieve full compliance, protective
quired. When the laser is left unat- equipment or other protective meas-
tended for a substantial period of time, ures shall be used to keep the exposure
such as during lunch hour, overnight, of employees to air contaminants with-
or at change of shifts, the laser shall be in the limits prescribed in this section.
turned off. Any equipment and technical measures
(f) Only mechanical or electronic used for this purpose must first be ap-
means shall be used as a detector for proved for each particular use by a
guiding the internal alignment of the competent industrial hygienist or
laser. other technically qualified person.
(g) The laser beam shall not be di- Whenever respirators are used, their
rected at employees. use shall comply with § 1926.103.
(h) When it is raining or snowing, or (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
when there is dust or fog in the air, the tion do not apply to the exposure of
operation of laser systems shall be pro- employees to airborne asbestos,
hibited where practicable; in any tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite
event, employees shall be kept out of dust. Whenever any employee is ex-
range of the area of source and target posed to airborne asbestos, tremolite,
during such weather conditions. anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the
(i) Laser equipment shall bear a label requirements of § 1910.1101 or § 1926.58 of
to indicate maximum output. this title shall apply.
(j) Employees shall not be exposed to (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
light intensities above: tion do not apply to the exposure of
(1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per employees to formaldehyde. Whenever
square centimeter; any employee is exposed to formalde-
(2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt hyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of
per square centimeter; this title shall apply.
30
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL

INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS’ THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Skin Designa-
Substance CAS No.d ppm a mg/m 3,b tion
Abate; see Temephos.

Acetaldehyde ......................................... 75–07–0 200 360 —
Acetic acid ............................................. 64–19–7 10 25 —
Acetic anhydride .................................... 108–24–7 5 20 —
Acetone ................................................. 67–64–1 1000 2400 —
Acetonitrile ............................................. 75–05–8 40 70 —
2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 53–96–3
Acetylene ............................................... 74–86–2 E
Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-
Dichloroethylene.
Acetylene tetrabromide ......................... 79–27–6 1 14 —
Acrolein ................................................. 107–02–8 0.1 0.25 —
Acrylamide ............................................. 79–06–1 — 0.3 X
Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 ............... 107–13–1
Aldrin ..................................................... 309–00–2 — 0.25 X
Allyl alcohol ........................................... 107–18–6 2 5 X
Allyl chloride .......................................... 107–05–1 1 3 —
Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) ...................... 106–92–3 (C)10 (C)45 —
Allyl propyl disulfide .............................. 2179–59–1 2 12 —
alpha-Alumina ....................................... 1344–28–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Respirable fraction ......................... — —
Alundum; see alpha-Alumina.
4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 ....... 92–67–1
2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine.
2-Aminopyridine .................................... 504–29–0 0.5 2 —
Ammonia ............................................... 7664–41–7 50 35 —
Ammonium sulfamate ........................... 7773–06–0
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... — 5 —
n-Amyl acetate ...................................... 628–63–7 100 525 —
sec-Amyl acetate ................................... 626–38–0 125 650 —
Aniline and homologs ............................ 62–53–3 5 19 X
Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) ....................... 29191–52–4 — 0.5 X
Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ....... 7440–36–0 — 0.5 —
ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ............ 86–88–4 — 0.3 —
Argon ..................................................... 7440–37–1 E
Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As);
see § 1926.1118 ................................ 7440–38–2 — — —
Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) .... 7440–38–2 — 0.5 —
Arsine .................................................... 7784–42–1 0.05 0.2 —
Asbestos; see 1926.58.
Azinphos-methyl .................................... 86–50–0 — 0.2 X
Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ..... 7440–39–3 — 0.5 —
Benzene g; see § 1926.1128 ................. 71–43–2
Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 .................. 92–87–5
p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone.
Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch
volatiles.
Benzoyl peroxide ................................... 94–36–0 — 5 —
Benzyl chloride ...................................... 100–44–7 1 5 —
Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as
Be) ..................................................... 7440–41–7 — 0.002 —
Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.
Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether.
Boron oxide ........................................... 1303–86–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Boron tribromide .................................... 10294–33–4 1 10 —
Boron trifluoride ..................................... 7637–07–2 (C)1 (C)3 —
31
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued
Skin Designa-
Bromine ................................................. 7726–95–6 0.1 0.7 —

Bromine pentafluoride ........................... 7789–30–2 0.1 0.7 —
Bromoform ............................................. 75–25–2 0.5 5 X
Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR
1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) .......... 106–99–0 STEL
1 ppm/5 ppm ...................... —
Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ......... 78–93–3 200 590 —
2-Butoxyethanol .................................... 111–76–2 50 240 X
n-Butyl-acetate ...................................... 123–86–4 150 710 —
sec-Butyl acetate ................................... 105–46–4 200 950 —
tert-Butyl acetate ................................... 540–88–5 200 950 —
n-Butyl alcohol ....................................... 71–36–3 100 300 —
sec-Butyl alcohol ................................... 78–92–2 150 450 —
tert-Butyl alcohol ................................... 75–65–0 100 300 —
Butylamine ............................................. 109–73–9 (C)5 (C)15 X
tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see
1926.1126 n ........................................ 1189–85–1
n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) .................. 2426–08–6 50 270 —
Butyl mercaptan .................................... 109–79–5 0.5 1.5 —
p-tert-Butyltoluene ................................. 98–51–1 10 60 —
Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 ........ 7440–43–9
Calcium carbonate ................................ 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Calcium oxide ........................................ 1305–78–8 — 5 —
Calcium sulfate ...................................... 7778–18–9
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Camphor, synthetic ............................... 76–22–2 — 2 —
Carbaryl (Sevin) .................................... 63–25–2 — 5 —
Carbon black ......................................... 1333–86–4 — 3.5 —
Carbon dioxide ...................................... 124–38–9 5000 9000 —
Carbon disulfide .................................... 75–15–0 20 60 X
Carbon monoxide .................................. 630–08–0 50 55 —
Carbon tetrachloride .............................. 56–23–5 10 65 X
Cellulose ................................................ 9004–34–6
Total dust ....................................... — —
Chlordane .............................................. 57–74–9 — 0.5 X
Chlorinated camphene .......................... 8001–35–2 — 0.5 X
Chlorinated diphenyl oxide .................... 55720–99–5 — 0.5 —
Chlorine ................................................. 7782–50–5 1 3 —
Chlorine dioxide .................................... 10049–04–4 0.1 0.3
Chlorine trifluoride ................................. 7790–91–2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
Chloroacetaldehyde .............................. 107–20–0 (C)1 (C)3 —
a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chlo-
ride) .................................................... 532–27–4 0.05 0.3 —
Chlorobenzene ...................................... 108–90–7 75 350 —
o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ........ 2698–41–1 0.05 0.4 —
Chlorobromomethane ............................ 74–97–5 200 1050 —
2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chlo-
roprene.
Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 53469–21–9 — 1 X
Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 11097–69–1 — 0.5 X
1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see
Epichlorohydrin.
2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene
chlorohydrin.
Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride.
Chloroform (Trichloromethane) ............. 67–66–3 (C)50 (C)240 —
32
Skin Designa-
bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see

§ 1926.1108 ....................................... 542–88–1
Chloromethyl methyl ether; see
§ 1926.1106 ....................................... 107–30–2
1-Chloro-1-nitropropane ........................ 600–25–9 20 100 —
Chloropicrin ........................................... 76–06–2 0.1 0.7 —
beta-Chloroprene .................................. 126–99–8 25 90 X
Chromium (II) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (III) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (VI) compounds; See
1926.1126 o.
Chromium metal and insol. salts (as
Cr) ...................................................... 7440–47–3 — 1 —
Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.
Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene solu-
ble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phen-
anthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65996–93–2 — 0.2 —
Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) .. 7440–48–4 — 0.1 —
Coke oven emissions; see § 1926.1129.
Copper ................................................... 7440–50–8
Fume (as Cu) ................................. — 0.1 —
Dusts and mists (as Cu) ................ — 1 —
Corundum; see Emery.
Cotton dust (raw) .................................. — 1
Crag herbicide (Sesone) ....................... 136–78–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Cresol, all isomers ................................ 1319–77–3 5 22 X
Crotonaldehyde ..................................... 123–73–9; 2 6
4170–30–3
Cumene ................................................. 98–82–8 50 245 X
Cyanides (as CN) .................................. Varies with — 5 X
Compound
Cyanogen .............................................. 460–19–5 10 — —
Cyclohexane .......................................... 110–82–7 300 1050 —
Cyclohexanol ......................................... 108–93–0 50 200 —
Cyclohexanone ...................................... 108–94–1 50 200 —
Cyclohexene .......................................... 110–83–8 300 1015 —
Cyclonite ................................................ 121–82–4 — 1.5 X
Cyclopentadiene .................................... 542–92–7 75 200 —
DDT, see
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane.
DDVP, see Dichlorvos.
2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 94–75–7 — 10 —
Decaborane ........................................... 17702–41–9 0.05 0.3 X
Demeton (Systox) ................................. 8065–48–3 — 0.1 X
Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-
2-pentanone) ..................................... 123–42–2 50 240 —
1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylene-
diamine.
Diazomethane ....................................... 334–88–3 0.2 0.4 —
Diborane ................................................ 19287–45–7 0.1 0.1 —
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP);
see § 1926.1144 ................................ 96–12–8 —
1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene
dibromide.
Dibutyl phosphate ................................. 107–66–4 1 5 —
Dibutyl phthalate ................................... 84–74–2 — 5 —
Dichloroacetylene .................................. 7572–29–4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
o-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 95–50–1 (C)50 (C)300 —
33
Skin Designa-
p-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 106–46–7 75 450 —

3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine; see
§ 1926.1107 ....................................... 91–94–1
Dichlorodifluoromethane ....................... 75–71–8 1000 4950 —
1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ..... 118–52–5 — 0.2 —
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50–29–3 — 1 X
1,1-Dichloroethane ................................ 75–34–3 100 400 —
1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene di-
chloride.
1,2-Dichloroethylene ............................. 540–59–0 200 790 —
Dichloroethyl ether ................................ 111–44–4 (C)15 (C)90 X
Dichloromethane; see Methylene chlo-
ride.
Dichloromonofluoromethane ................. 75–43–4 1000 4200 —
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane ..................... 594–72–9 (C)10 (C)60 —
1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene di-
chloride.
Dichlorotetrafluoroethane ...................... 76–14–2 1000 7000 —
Dichlorvos (DDVP) ................................ 62–73–7 — 1 X
Dieldrin .................................................. 60–57–1 — 0.25 X
Diethylamine .......................................... 109–89–7 25 75 —
2-Diethylaminoethanol ........................... 100–37–8 10 50 X
Diethylene triamine ............................... 111–40–0 (C)10 (C)42 X
Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether.
Difluorodibromomethane ....................... 75–61–6 100 860 —
Diglycidyl ether (DGE) .......................... 2238–07–5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 —
Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone.
Diisobutyl ketone ................................... 108–83–8 50 290 —
Diisopropylamine ................................... 108–18–9 5 20 X
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see
§ 1926.1115 ....................................... 60–11–7
Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal.
Dimethyl acetamide ............................... 127–19–5 10 35 X
Dimethylamine ....................................... 124–40–3 10 18 —
Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine.
Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) ... 121–69–7 5 25 X
Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene.
Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl
phosphate .......................................... 300–76–5 — 3 —
Dimethylformamide ............................... 68–12–2 10 30 X
2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see
Diisobutyl ketone.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine ........................... 57–14–7 0.5 1 X
Dimethylphthalate .................................. 131–11–3 — 5 —
Dimethyl sulfate ..................................... 77–78–3 1 5 X
Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ................. 1 X
(ortho) ............................................. 528–29–0
(meta) ............................................. 99–65–0
(para) .............................................. 100–25–4
Dinitro-o-cresol ...................................... 534–52–1 — 0.2 X
Dinitrotoluene ........................................ 25321–14–6 — 1.5 X
Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ................ 123–91–1 100 360 X
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ............................... 92–52–4 0.2 1 —
Diphenylamine ....................................... 122–39–4 — 10 —
Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate.
Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ............ 34590–94–8 100 600 X
Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate) ........................................... 117–81–7 — 5 —
Emery .................................................... 12415–34–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
34
Skin Designa-
Endosulfan ............................................ 115–29–7 — 0.1 X

Endrin .................................................... 72–20–8 — 0.1 X
Epichlorohydrin ...................................... 106–89–8 5 19 X
EPN ....................................................... 2104–64–5 — 0.5 X
1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene
oxide.
2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol.
Ethane ................................................... 74–84–0 E
Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan.
Ethanolamine ........................................ 141–43–5 3 6 —
2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ................ 110–80–5 200 740 X
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve ace-
tate) .................................................... 111–15–9 100 540 X
Ethyl acetate ......................................... 141–78–6 400 1400 —
Ethyl acrylate ......................................... 140–88–5 25 100 X
Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) .......................... 64–17–5 1000 1900 —
Ethylamine ............................................. 75–04–7 10 18 —
Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-
heptanone) ......................................... 541–85–5 25 130 —
Ethyl benzene ....................................... 100–41–4 100 435 —
Ethyl bromide ........................................ 74–96–4 200 890 —
Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) ......... 106–35–4 50 230 —
Ethyl chloride ......................................... 75–00–3 1000 2600 —
Ethyl ether ............................................. 60–29–7 400 1200 —
Ethyl formate ......................................... 109–94–4 100 300 —
Ethyl mercaptan .................................... 75–08–1 0.5 1 —
Ethyl silicate .......................................... 78–10–4 100 850 —
Ethylene ................................................ 74–85–1 E
Ethylene chlorohydrin ............................ 107–07–3 5 16 X
Ethylenediamine .................................... 107–15–3 10 25 —
Ethylene dibromide ............................... 106–93–4 (C)25 (C)190 X
Ethylene dichloride (1,2-
Dichloroethane) ................................. 107–06–2 50 200 —
Ethylene glycol dinitrate ........................ 628–96–6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X
Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see
Methyl cellosolve acetate.
Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 ........... 151–56–4
Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 .......... 75–21–8
Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-
Dichloroethane.
N-Ethylmorpholine ................................. 100–74–3 20 94 X
Ferbam .................................................. 14484–64–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Ferrovanadium dust .............................. 12604–58–9 — 1 —
Fibrous Glass.
Total dust ....................................... —
Fluorides (as F) ..................................... Varies with — 2.5 —
compound
Fluorine ................................................. 7782–41–4 0.1 0.2 —
Fluorotrichloromethane
(Trichlorofluoromethane) ................... 75–69–4 1000 5600 —
Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 ........... 50–00–0
Formic acid ............................................ 64–18–6 5 9 —
Furfural .................................................. 98–01–1 5 20 X
Furfuryl alcohol ...................................... 98–00–0 50 200 —
Gasoline ................................................ 8006–61–9 A3 —
Glycerin (mist) ....................................... 56–81–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Glycidol .................................................. 556–52–5 50 150 —
35
Skin Designa-
Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-

Ethoxyethanol.
Graphite, natural, respirable dust ......... 7782–42–5 (2) (2) (2)
Graphite, synthetic.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Guthion; see Azinphos methyl.
Gypsum ................................................. 13397–24–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Hafnium ................................................. 7440–58–6 — 0.5 —
Helium ................................................... 7440–59–7 E
Heptachlor ............................................. 76–44–8 — 0.5 X
Heptane (n-Heptane) ............................ 142–82–5 500 2000 —
Hexachloroethane ................................. 67–72–1 1 10 X
Hexachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–87–1 — 0.2 X
n-Hexane ............................................... 110–54–3 500 1800 —
2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) ..... 591–78–6 100 410 —
Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) .......... 108–10–1 100 410 —
sec-Hexyl acetate .................................. 108–84–9 50 300 —
Hydrazine .............................................. 302–01–2 1 1.3 X
Hydrogen ............................................... 1333–74–0 E
Hydrogen bromide ................................. 10035–10–6 3 10 —
Hydrogen chloride ................................. 7647–01–0 (C)5 (C)7 —
Hydrogen cyanide ................................. 74–90–8 10 11 X
Hydrogen fluoride (as F) ....................... 7664–39–3 3 2 —
Hydrogen peroxide ................................ 7722–84–1 1 1.4 —
Hydrogen selenide (as Se) ................... 7783–07–5 0.05 .02 —
Hydrogen sulfide ................................... 7783–06–4 10 15 —
Hydroquinone ........................................ 123–31–9 — 2 —
Indene ................................................... 95–13–6 10 45 —
Indium and compounds (as In) ............. 7440–74–6 — 0.1 —
Iodine ..................................................... 7553–56–2 (C)0.1 (C)1 —
Iron oxide fume ..................................... 1309–37–1 — 10 —
Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) .................... Varies with — 1 —
compound
Isoamyl acetate ..................................... 123–92–2 100 525 —
Isoamyl alcohol (primary and sec-
ondary) ............................................... 123–51–3 100 360 —
Isobutyl acetate ..................................... 110–19–0 150 700 —
Isobutyl alcohol ..................................... 78–83–1 100 300 —
Isophorone ............................................ 78–59–1 25 140 —
Isopropyl acetate ................................... 108–21–4 250 950 —
Isopropyl alcohol ................................... 67–63–0 400 980 —
Isopropylamine ...................................... 75–31–0 5 12 —
Isopropyl ether ...................................... 108–20–3 500 2100 —
Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ................ 4016–14–2 50 240 —
Kaolin .................................................... 1332–58–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Ketene ................................................... 463–51–4 0.5 0.9 —
Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 .. 7439–92–1
Limestone .............................................. 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Lindane .................................................. 58–89–9 — 0.5 X
Lithium hydride ...................................... 7580–67–8 — 0.025 —
L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) .......... 68476–85–7 1000 1800
Magnesite .............................................. 546–93–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Magnesium oxide fume ......................... 1309–48–4
36
Skin Designa-
Total particulate ............................. 15 — —

Malathion ............................................... 121–75–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 X
Maleic anhydride ................................... 108–31–6 0.25
Manganese compounds (as Mn) .......... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Manganese fume (as Mn) ..................... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Marble ................................................... 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ..... 7439–97–6 0.1 X
Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as
Hg) ..................................................... 7439–97–6 — 0.01 X
Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) ........................ 7439–97–6 — 0.1 X
Mesityl oxide ......................................... 141–79–7 25 100 —
Methane ................................................ 74–82–8 E
Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan.
Methoxychlor ......................................... 72–43–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) ... 109–86–4 25 80 X
2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl
cellosolve acetate) ............................. 110–49–6 25 120 X
Methyl acetate ....................................... 79–20–9 200 610 —
Methyl acetylene (Propyne) .................. 74–99–7 1000 1650 —
Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture
(MAPP) .............................................. 1000 1800 —
Methyl acrylate ...................................... 96–33–3 10 35 X
Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) ............. 109–87–5 1000 3100 —
Methyl alcohol ....................................... 67–56–1 200 260 —
Methylamine .......................................... 74–89–5 10 12 —
Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl iso-
butyl carbinol.
Methyl n-amyl ketone ............................ 110–43–0 100 465 —
Methyl bromide ...................................... 74–83–9 (C)20 (C)80 X
Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone.
Methyl cellosolve; see 2-
Methoxyethanol.
Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-
Methoxyethyl acetate.
Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052.
Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloro-
ethane) ............................................... 71–55–6 350 1900 —
Methylcyclohexane ................................ 108–87–2 500 2000 —
Methylcyclohexanol ............................... 25639–42–3 100 470 —
o-Methylcyclohexanone ......................... 583–60–8 100 460 X
Methylene chloride ................................ 75–09–2 500 1740 —
Methylenedianiline (MDA) ..................... 101–77–9
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Buta-
none.
Methyl formate ...................................... 107–31–3 100 250 —
Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydra-
zine) ................................................... 60–34–4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X
Methyl iodide ......................................... 74–88–4 5 28 X
Methyl isoamyl ketone .......................... 110–12–3 100 475 —
Methyl isobutyl carbinol ......................... 108–11–2 25 100 X
Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone.
Methyl isocyanate ................................. 624–83–9 0.02 0.05 X
Methyl mercaptan .................................. 74–93–1 0.5 1 —
Methyl methacrylate .............................. 80–62–6 100 410 —
Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone.
Methyl silicate ........................................ 681–84–5 (C)5 (C)30 —
alpha-Methyl styrene ............................. 98–83–9 (C)100 (C)480 —
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101–68–8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 —
37
Skin Designa-
Mica; see Silicates.

Molybdenum (as Mo) ............................ 7439–98–7
Soluble compounds ....................... — 5 —
Insoluble compounds.
Total dust .................................... — 15 —
Monomethyl aniline ............................... 100–61–8 2 9 X
Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hy-
drazine.
Morpholine ............................................. 110–91–8 20 70 X
Naphtha (Coal tar) ................................ 8030–30–6 100 400 —
Naphthalene .......................................... 91–20–3 10 50 —
alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 134–32–7
beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 91–59–8 —
Neon ...................................................... 7440–01–9 E
Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) .......................... 13463–39–3 0.001 0.007 —
Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds
(as Ni) ................................................ 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) ....... 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nicotine ................................................. 54–11–5 — 0.5 X
Nitric acid .............................................. 7697–37–2 2 5 —
Nitric oxide ............................................ 10102–43–9 25 30 —
p-Nitroaniline ......................................... 100–01–6 1 6 X
Nitrobenzene ......................................... 98–95–3 1 5 X
p-Nitrochlorobenzene ............................ 100–00–5 — 1 X
4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 ......... 92–93–3
Nitroethane ............................................ 79–24–3 100 310 —
Nitrogen ................................................. 7727–37–9 E
Nitrogen dioxide .................................... 10102–44–0 (C)5 (C)9 —
Nitrogen trifluoride ................................. 7783–54–2 10 29 —
Nitroglycerin .......................................... 55–63–0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X
Nitromethane ......................................... 75–52–5 100 250 —
1-Nitropropane ...................................... 108–03–2 25 90 —
2-Nitropropane ...................................... 79–46–9 25 90 —
N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see
§ 1926.1116 ....................................... 62–79–9 —
Nitrotoluene (all isomers) ...................... 5 30 X
o-isomer ......................................... 88–72–2;
m-isomer ........................................ 99–08–1;
p-isomer ......................................... 99–99–0
Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin.
Nitrous oxide ......................................... 10024–97–2 E
Octachloronaphthalene ......................... 2234–13–1 — 0.1 X
Octane ................................................... 111–65–9 400 1900 —
Oil mist, mineral .................................... 8012–95–1 — 5 —
Osmium tetroxide (as Os) ..................... 20816–12–0 — 0.002 —
Oxalic acid ............................................. 144–62–7 — 1 —
Oxygen difluoride .................................. 7783–41–7 0.05 0.1 —
Ozone .................................................... 10028–15–6 0.1 0.2 —
Paraquat, respirable dust ...................... 4685–14–7; — 0.5 X
1910–42–5;
2074–50–2
Parathion ............................................... 56–38–2 — 0.1 X
Particulates not otherwise regulated.
Total dust organic and inorganic ... — 15 —
PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and
54% chlorine).
Pentaborane .......................................... 19624–22–7 0.005 0.01 —
Pentachloronaphthalene ....................... 1321–64–8 — 0.5 X
Pentachlorophenol ................................ 87–86–5 — 0.5 X
Pentaerythritol ....................................... 115–77–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
38
Skin Designa-
Pentane ................................................. 109–66–0 500 1500 —

2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ..... 107–87–9 200 700 —
Perchloroethylene
(Tetrachloroethylene) ......................... 127–18–4 100 670 —
Perchloromethyl mercaptan .................. 594–42–3 0.1 0.8 —
Perchloryl fluoride ................................. 7616–94–6 3 13.5 —
Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber
Solvent) .............................................. A3 —
Phenol ................................................... 108–95–2 5 19 X
p-Phenylene diamine ............................ 106–50–3 — 0.1 X
Phenyl ether, vapor ............................... 101–84–8 1 7 —
Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor ... 1 7 —
Phenylethylene; see Styrene.
Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) .................. 122–60–1 10 60 —
Phenylhydrazine .................................... 100–63–0 5 22 X
Phosdrin (Mevinphos) ........................... 7786–34–7 — 0.1 X
Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) .............. 75–44–5 0.1 0.4 —
Phosphine ............................................. 7803–51–2 0.3 0.4 —
Phosphoric acid ..................................... 7664–38–2 — 1 —
Phosphorus (yellow) .............................. 7723–14–0 — 0.1 —
Phosphorus pentachloride .................... 10026–13–8 — 1 —
Phosphorus pentasulfide ....................... 1314–80–3 — 1 —
Phosphorus trichloride .......................... 7719–12–2 0.5 3 —
Phthalic anhydride ................................. 85–44–9 2 12 —
Picric acid .............................................. 88–89–1 — 0.1 X
Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) ....... 83–26–1 — 0.1 —
Plaster of Paris ...................................... 26499–65–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Platinum (as Pt) .................................... 7440–06–4
Metal .............................................. — — —
Soluble salts ................................... — 0.002 —
Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition
products ............................................. A2
Portland cement .................................... 65997–15–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... 5 —
Propane ................................................. 74–98–6 E
Propargyl alcohol .................................. 107–19–7 1 — X
beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 .. 57–57–8
n-Propyl acetate .................................... 109–60–4 200 840 —
n-Propyl alcohol .................................... 71–23–8 200 500 —
n-Propyl nitrate ...................................... 627–13–4 25 110 —
Propylene dichloride .............................. 78–87–5 75 350 —
Propylene imine .................................... 75–55–8 2 5 X
Propylene oxide .................................... 75–56–9 100 240 —
Propyne; see Methyl acetylene.
Pyrethrum .............................................. 8003–34–7 — 5 —
Pyridine ................................................. 110–86–1 5 15 —
Quinone ................................................. 106–51–4 0.1 0.4 —
RDX; see Cyclonite.
Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and in-
soluble compounds ............................ 7440–16–6 — 0.1 —
Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440–16–6 — 0.001 —
Ronnel ................................................... 299–84–3 — 10 —
Rotenone ............................................... 83–79–4 — 5 —
Rouge.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Selenium compounds (as Se) ............... 7782–49–2 — 0.2 —
Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) .............. 7783–79–1 0.05 0.4 —
Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926–00–8 (2) (2) (2)
39
Skin Designa-
Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth,

containing less than 1% crystalline
silica ................................................... 61790–53–2 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline cristobalite, respirable
dust .................................................... 14464–46–1 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline quartz, respirable dust 14808–60–7 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline tripoli (as quartz), res-
pirable dust ........................................ 1317–95–9 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline tridymite, respirable
dust .................................................... 15468–32–3 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, fused, respirable dust ................. 60676–86–0 (2) (2) (2)
Silicates (less than 1% crystalline sili-
ca).
Mica (respirable dust) .................... 12001–26–2 (2) (2) (2)
Soapstone, total dust ..................... (2) (2) (2)
Soapstone, respirable dust ............ (2) (2) (2)
Talc (containing asbestos); use as-
bestos limit; see 1926.58.
Talc (containing no asbestos), res-
pirable dust ................................. 14807–96–6 (2) (2) (2)
Tremolite, asbestiform; see
1926.58.
Silicon carbide ....................................... 409–21–2
Total dust ....................................... — —
Silver, metal and soluble compounds
(as Ag) ............................................... 7440–22–4 — 0.01 —
Soapstone; see Silicates.
Sodium fluoroacetate ............................ 62–74–8 — 0.05 X
Sodium hydroxide ................................. 1310–73–2 — 2 —
Starch .................................................... 9005–25–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Stibine ................................................... 7803–52–3 0.1 0.5 —
Stoddard solvent ................................... 8052–41–3 200 1150 —
Strychnine ............................................. 57–24–9 — 0.15 —
Styrene .................................................. 100–42–5 (C)100 (C)420 —
Sucrose ................................................. 57–50–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Sulfur dioxide ........................................ 7446–09–5 5 13 —
Sulfur hexafluoride ................................ 2551–62–4 1000 6000 —
Sulfuric acid ........................................... 7664–93–9 — 1 —
Sulfur monochloride .............................. 10025–67–9 1 6 —
Sulfur pentafluoride ............................... 5714–22–7 0.025 0.25 —
Sulfuryl fluoride ..................................... 2699–79–8 5 20 —
Systox, see Demeton.
2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic
acid) ................................................... 93–76–5 — 10 —
Talc; see Silicates—.
Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ........... 7440–25–7 — 5 —
TEDP (Sulfotep) .................................... 3689–24–5 — 0.2 X
Teflon decomposition products ............. A2
Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ........ 13494–80–9 — 0.1 —
Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) .............. 7783–80–4 0.02 0.2 —
Temephos ............................................. 3383–96–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ........ 107–49–3 — 0.05 X
Terphenyls ............................................. 26140–60–3 (C)1 (C)9 —
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane .. 76–11–9 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane .. 76–12–0 500 4170 —
40
Skin Designa-
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ..................... 79–34–5 5 35 X

Tetrachloroethylene; see
Perchloroethylene.
Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetra-
chloride.
Tetrachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–88–2 — 2 X
Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) ......................... 78–00–2 — 0.1 X
Tetrahydrofuran ..................................... 109–99–9 200 590 —
Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) ..................... 75–74–1 — 0.15 X
Tetramethyl succinonitrile ..................... 3333–52–6 0.5 3 X
Tetranitromethane ................................. 509–14–8 1 8 —
Tetryl (2,4,6-
Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) .......... 479–45–8 — 1.5 X
Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) .... 7440–28–0 — 0.1 X
Thiram ................................................... 137–26–8 — 5 —
Tin, inorganic compounds (except ox-
ides) (as Sn) ...................................... 7440–31–5 — 2 —
Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) ........... 7440–31–5 — 0.1 —
Tin oxide (as Sn) ................................... 21651–19–4 — — —
Total dust ....................................... — —
Titanium dioxide .................................... 13463–67–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Toluene ................................................. 108–88–3 200 750 —
Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) ............. 584–84–9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 —
o-Toluidine ............................................. 95–53–4 5 22 X
Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene.
Tremolite; see Silicates.
Tributyl phosphate ................................. 126–73–8 — 5 —
1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chlo-
roform.
1,1,2-Trichloroethane ............................ 79–00–5 10 45 X
Trichloroethylene ................................... 79–01–6 100 535 —
Trichloromethane; see Chloroform.
Trichloronaphthalene ............................. 1321–65–9 — 5 X
1,2,3-Trichloropropane .......................... 96–18–4 50 300 —
1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ...... 76–13–1 1000 7600 —
Triethylamine ......................................... 121–44–8 25 100 —
Trifluorobromomethane ......................... 75–63–8 1000 6100 —
Trimethyl benzene ................................. 25551–13–7 25 120 —
2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid.
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine;
see Tetryl.
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) .................... 118–96–7 — 1.5 X
Triorthocresyl phosphate ....................... 78–30–8 — 0.1 —
Triphenyl phosphate .............................. 115–86–6 — 3 —
Tungsten (as W) ................................... 7440–33–7
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 5 —
Soluble compounds ....................... — 1 —
Turpentine ............................................. 8006–64–2 100 560 —
Uranium (as U) ...................................... 7440–61–1
Soluble compounds ....................... — 0.2 —
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 0.2 —
Vanadium .............................................. 1314–62–1
Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ............ — (C)0.5 —
Fume (as V2 O5) ............................ — (C)0.1 —
Vegetable oil mist.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Vinyl benzene; see Styrene.
Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 ............ 75–01–4
Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile.
41
Skin Designa-
Vinyl toluene .......................................... 25013–15–4 100 480 —

Warfarin ................................................. 81–81–2 — 0.1 —
Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) .................. 1330–20–7 100 435 —
Xylidine .................................................. 1300–73–8 5 25 X
Yttrium ................................................... 7440–65–5 — 1 —
Zinc chloride fume ................................. 7646–85–7 — 1 —
Zinc oxide fume ..................................... 1314–13–2 — 5 —
Zinc oxide .............................................. 1314–13–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ............... 7440–67–7 — 5
MINERAL DUSTS
SILICA:
Crystalline
Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula .......... 250 (k)
%SiO2+5
Cristobalite.
Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth ...... 20
SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica)
Mica .............................................................................. 20
Portland cement ............................................................ 50
Soapstone ..................................................................... 20
Talc (non-asbestiform) .................................................. 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit .................................. --
Graphite (natural) ................................................................. 15
Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m3 whichever is the smaller) of total
dust <1% SiO2
[Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic,
and organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV’s
Appendix D]
Conversion factors.
mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles
per c.c.
Footnotes
1 [Reserved]
2 See Mineral Dusts Table.
3 Use Asbestos Limit § 1926.58.
4 See 1926.58.
* The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit.
** As determined from breathing-zone air samples.
a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 °C and 760 torr.
b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when listed with a
ppm entry, it is approximate.
c [Reserved]
d The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than
one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given—not CAS numbers for the individual
compounds.
e f [Reserved]
g For sectors excluded from § 1926.1128 the limit is 10 ppm TWA.
h i [Reserved]
j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques.
k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except in those in-
stances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable.
l [Reserved]
m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated.
n If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a ceiling of 0.1 mg/m3.
o If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1 mg/m3 (as CrO ) as an
3
8-hour TWA.
The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows:
A 1 [Reserved]
A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrolysis in alkaline solu-
tion, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure. No TLV is recommended pending
determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be minimal.
42
A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a single TLV for all
types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and additives should be determined
to arrive at the appropriate TLV.
E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within the require-
ments addressing explosion in part 1926.
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987;
58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619,
Jan. 10, 1997; 71 FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006]
§ 1926.56 Illumination. (b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex-

(a) General. Construction areas, haust ventilation when used as de-
ramps, runways, corridors, offices, scribed in (a) shall be designed to pre-
shops, and storage areas shall be light- vent dispersion into the air of dusts,
ed to not less than the minimum illu- fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in con-
mination intensities listed in Table D– centrations causing harmful exposure.
3 while any work is in progress: Such exhaust systems shall be so de-
signed that dusts, fumes, mists, vapors,
TABLE D–3—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES or gases are not drawn through the
IN FOOT-CANDLES work area of employees.
(c) Design and operation. Exhaust
Foot-candles Area or operation
fans, jets, ducts, hoods, separators, and
5 ........................ General construction area lighting. all necessary appurtenances, including
3 ........................ General construction areas, concrete
placement, excavation and waste areas,
refuse receptacles, shall be so designed,
accessways, active storage areas, load- constructed, maintained and operated
ing platforms, refueling, and field main- as to ensure the required protection by
tenance areas. maintaining a volume and velocity of
5 ........................ Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways,
and exitways. exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts,
5 ........................ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground fumes, vapors, or gases from said
work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 equipment or process, and to convey
foot-candles is required at tunnel and
shaft heading during drilling, mucking, them to suitable points of safe dis-
and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved posal, thereby preventing their disper-
cap lights shall be acceptable for use in sion in harmful quantities into the at-
the tunnel heading.)
10 ...................... General construction plant and shops mosphere where employees work.
(e.g., batch plants, screening plants, (d) Duration of operations. (1) The ex-
mechanical and electrical equipment haust system shall be in operation con-
rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts
and active storerooms, barracks or liv- tinually during all operations which it
ing quarters, locker or dressing rooms, is designed to serve. If the employee re-
mess halls, and indoor toilets and work- mains in the contaminated zone, the
rooms).
30 ...................... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. system shall continue to operate after
the cessation of said operations, the
(b) Other areas. For areas or oper- length of time to depend upon the indi-
ations not covered above, refer to the vidual circumstances and effectiveness
American National Standard A11.1– of the general ventilation system.
1965, R1970, Practice for Industrial (2) Since dust capable of causing dis-
Lighting, for recommended values of il- ability is, according to the best med-
lumination. ical opinion, of microscopic size, tend-
ing to remain for hours in suspension
§ 1926.57 Ventilation. in still air, it is essential that the ex-
(a) General. Whenever hazardous sub- haust system be continued in operation
stances such as dusts, fumes, mists, va- for a time after the work process or
pors, or gases exist or are produced in equipment served by the same shall
the course of construction work, their have ceased, in order to ensure the re-
concentrations shall not exceed the moval of the harmful elements to the
limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When required extent. For the same reason,
ventilation is used as an engineering employees wearing respiratory equip-
control method, the system shall be in- ment should not remove same imme-
stalled and operated according to the diately until the atmosphere seems
requirements of this section. clear.
43
(e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The fume from the air passing through the
air outlet from every dust separator, device.
and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or (x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in
gases collected by an exhaust or ven- sizes capable of passing through the
tilating system shall discharge to the upper respiratory system to reach the
outside atmosphere. Collecting sys- lower lung passages.
tems which return air to work area (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en-
may be used if concentrations which closure where the pieces to be cleaned
accumulate in the work area air do not are positioned on a rotating table and
result in harmful exposure to employ- are passed automatically through a se-
ees. Dust and refuse discharged from an ries of blast sprays.
exhaust system shall be disposed of in (xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible
such a manner that it will not result in application of an abrasive to a surface
harmful exposure to employees. by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres-
(f) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions sure, or centrifugal force.
applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra- (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting.
sive. A solid substance used in an abra- (i) Abrasives and the surface coatings
sive blasting operation. on the materials blasted are shattered
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- and pulverized during blasting oper-
pirator constructed so that it covers ations and the dust formed will contain
the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders particles of respirable size. The com-
to protect the wearer from rebounding position and toxicity of the dust from
abrasive. these sources shall be considered in
making an evaluation of the potential
(iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete
health hazards.
enclosure which rotates on an axis, or
(ii) The concentration of respirable
which has an internal moving tread to
dust or fume in the breathing zone of
tumble the parts, in order to expose
the abrasive-blasting operator or any
various surfaces of the parts to the ac-
other worker shall be kept below the
tion of an automatic blast spray.
levels specified in § 1926.55 or other per-
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete
tinent sections of this part.
enclosure in which blasting operations
(iii) Organic abrasives which are
are performed and where the operator
combustible shall be used only in auto-
works inside of the room to operate the
matic systems. Where flammable or ex-
blasting nozzle and direct the flow of
plosive dust mixtures may be present,
the abrasive material.
the construction of the equipment, in-
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure cluding the exhaust system and all
where the operator stands outside and electric wiring, shall conform to the
operates the blasting nozzle through an requirements of American National
opening or openings in the enclosure. Standard Installation of Blower and
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
it will not cause harm or discomfort to Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1–
an individual if it is inhaled for ex- 1961 (NFPA 91–1961), and subpart S of
tended periods of time. this part. The blast nozzle shall be
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com- bonded and grounded to prevent the
bination of devices for separating dust build up of static charges. Where flam-
from the air handled by an exhaust mable or explosive dust mixtures may
ventilation system. be present, the abrasive blasting enclo-
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A sure, the ducts, and the dust collector
system for removing contaminated air shall be constructed with loose panels
from a space, comprising two or more or explosion venting areas, located on
of the following elements (A) enclosure sides away from any occupied area, to
or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust col- provide for pressure relief in case of ex-
lecting equipment, (D) exhauster, and plosion, following the principles set
(E) discharge stack. forth in the National Fire Protection
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air Association Explosion Venting Guide.
purifying respirator, commonly re- NFPA 68–1954.
ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator, (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast-
which removes most of the dust or cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust
44
ventilated in such a way that a contin- (ii) In installations where the abra-
uous inward flow of air will be main- sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven-
tained at all openings in the enclosure tilation system for the blasting enclo-
during the blasting operation. sure shall not be relied upon for the re-
(A) All air inlets and access openings moval of fines from the spent abrasive
shall be baffled or so arranged that by instead of an abrasive separator. An
the combination of inward air flow and abrasive separator shall be provided for
baffling the escape of abrasive or dust the purpose.
particles into an adjacent work area (iii) The air exhausted from blast-
will be minimized and visible spurts of cleaning equipment shall be discharged
dust will not be observed. through dust collecting equipment.
(B) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi- Dust collectors shall be set up so that
cient to provide prompt clearance of the accumulated dust can be emptied
the dust-laden air within the enclosure and removed without contaminating
after the cessation of blasting. other working areas.
(C) Before the enclosure is opened, (5) Personal protective equipment. (i)
the blast shall be turned off and the ex- Employers must use only respirators
haust system shall be run for a suffi- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
cient period of time to remove the 84 for protecting employees from dusts
dusty air within the enclosure. produced during abrasive-blasting op-
(D) Safety glass protected by screen- erations.
ing shall be used in observation win- (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators
dows, where hard deep-cutting abra- shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting
sives are used. operators:
(E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles (A) When working inside of blast-
shall be installed in multiple sets at all cleaning rooms, or
small access openings where dust (B) When using silica sand in manual
might escape, and shall be inspected blasting operations where the nozzle
regularly and replaced when needed. and blast are not physically separated
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight from the operator in an exhaust venti-
when closed. lated enclosure, or
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms (C) Where concentrations of toxic
shall be operable from both inside and dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting
outside, except that where there is a may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or
small operator access door, the large other pertinent sections of this part
work access door may be closed or and the nozzle and blast are not phys-
opened from the outside only. ically separated from the operator in
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
construction, installation, inspection, (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter
and maintenance of exhaust systems respirators, commonly referred to as
shall conform to the principles and re- dust-filter respirators, may be used for
quirements set forth in American Na- short, intermittent, or occasional dust
tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
erning the Design and Operation of dust collectors, or unloading shipments
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and of sand at a receiving point when it is
ANSI Z33.1–1961. not feasible to control the dust by en-
(a) When dust leaks are noted, re- closure, exhaust ventilation, or other
pairs shall be made as soon as possible. means. The respirators used must be
(b) The static pressure drop at the ex- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
haust ducts leading from the equip- 84 for protection against the specific
ment shall be checked when the instal- type of dust encountered.
lation is completed and periodically (iv) A respiratory protection program
thereafter to assure continued satisfac- as defined and described in § 1926.103,
tory operation. Whenever an appre- shall be established wherever it is nec-
ciable change in the pressure drop indi- essary to use respiratory protective
cates a partial blockage, the system equipment.
shall be cleaned and returned to nor- (v) Operators shall be equipped with
mal operating condition. heavy canvas or leather gloves and
45
aprons or equivalent protection to pro- centered’’ consisting of a steel disc

tect them from the impact of abra- with a rim of organic-bonded material
sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to moulded around the periphery, or of
protect against foot injury where the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of
heavy pieces of work are handled. a steel disc with organic-bonded abra-
(A) Safety shoes shall conform to the sive teeth or inserts mechanically se-
requirements of American National cured around the periphery.
Standard for Men’s Safety-Toe Foot- (ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible,
wear, Z41.1–1967. coated bands used for grinding,
(B) Equipment for protection of the polishing, or buffing purposes.
eyes and face shall be supplied to the (iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex-
operator when the respirator design haust system piping that is connected
does not provide such protection and to directly to the hood or enclosure.
any other personnel working in the vi- (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon
cinity of abrasive blasting operations. which the part to be ground or polished
This equipment shall conform to the is placed.
requirements of § 1926.102. (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro-
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air tatable discs faced with abrasive mate-
for abrasive-blasting respirators must rials, artificial or natural, and used for
be free of harmful quantities of dusts, grinding or polishing on the side of the
mists, or noxious gases, and must meet assembled disc.
the requirements for supplied-air qual-
(vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres-
ity and use specified in 29 CFR
sure caused by air flowing into a duct
1910.134(i).
or hood. It is usually expressed in
(7) Operational procedures and general
inches of water gauge.
safety. Dust shall not be permitted to
(vii) Exhaust system. A system con-
accumulate on the floor or on ledges
sisting of branch pipes connected to
outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo-
hoods or enclosures, one or more head-
sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up
er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep-
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be
arating solid contaminants from the
kept clear of steel shot or similar abra-
air flowing in the system, and a dis-
sive which may create a slipping haz-
charge stack to outside.
ard.
(8) Scope. This paragraph applies to (viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv-
all operations where an abrasive is en rotatable grinding or abrasive
forcibly applied to a surface by pneu- wheels, except disc wheels as defined in
matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen- this standard, consisting of abrasive
trifugal force. It does not apply to particles held together by artificial or
steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or natural bonds and used for peripheral
hydraulic cleaning methods where grinding.
work is done without the aid of abra- (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe
sives. into which one or more branch pipes
(g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op- enter and which connects such branch
erations—(1) Definitions applicable to pipes to the remainder of the exhaust
this paragraph— system.
(i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Or- (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial
ganic-bonded wheels, the thickness of or complete enclosure around the
which is not more than one forty- wheel or disc through which air enters
eighth of their diameter for those up an exhaust system during operation.
to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc
diameter, and not more than one-six- grinder. A grinding machine carrying
tieth of their diameter for those larger two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial,
than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter, horizontal spindles upon the inside
used for a multitude of operations var- ends of which are mounted abrasive
iously known as cutting, cutting off, disc wheels used for grinding two sur-
grooving, slotting, coping, and joint- faces simultaneously.
ing, and the like. The wheels may be (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc
‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded grinder. A grinding machine carrying
abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel an abrasive disc wheel upon one or
46
both ends of a power-driven, rotatable in Table D–57.1 with a recommended

single horizontal spindle. minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per
(xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per
power-driven rotatable wheels com- minute in the main. The entry losses
posed all or in part of textile fabrics, from all hoods except the vertical-spin-
wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
coated with abrasives on the periphery velocity pressure for a straight takeoff
of the wheel for purposes of polishing, and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered
buffing, and light grinding. takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-
(xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv- spindle disc grinder hood is shown in
en rotatable grinding, polishing, or figure D–57.1 (following paragraph (g)
buffing wheel mounted in such manner of this section).
that it may be manually manipulated.
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power- TABLE D–57.1—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE
driven rotatable wheels made from CUTTING-OFF WHEELS
wire or bristles, and used for scratch Wheel Minimum
cleaning and brushing purposes. Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, exhaust
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- inches volume
(cm) (feet3/min.)
driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or
buffing wheel mounted in such a man- To 9 (22.86) ................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 220
ner that the wheel with its supporting Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 2 (5.08) 390
Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 3 (7.62) 500
framework can be manipulated over Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 4 (10.16) 610
stationary objects. Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 5 (12.7) 880
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki- Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
netic pressure in the direction of flow
necessary to cause a fluid at rest to For any wheel wider than wheel diame-
flow at a given velocity. It is usually ters shown in Table D–57.1, increase the
expressed in inches of water gauge. exhaust volume by the ratio of the new
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A width to the width shown.
grinding machine having a vertical, ro-
Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches (11.43
tatable power-driven spindle carrying a cm),
horizontal abrasive disc wheel.
then 4.5÷4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
(2) Application. Wherever dry grind-
ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all
formed, and employee exposure, with- buffing and polishing wheels mounted
out regard to the use of respirators, ex- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or
ceeds the permissible exposure limits special-purpose machines shall have
prescribed in § 1926.55 or other perti- not less than the minimum exhaust
nent sections of this part, a local ex- volume shown in Table D–57.2.
haust ventilation system shall be pro-
vided and used to maintain employee TABLE D–57.2—BUFFING AND POLISHING
exposures within the prescribed limits. WHEELS
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. Minimum
(i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width,
shall be used, and such hoods shall be volume
inches cm) (feet3/min.)
designed, located, and placed so that
the dust or dirt particles shall fall or To 9 (22.86) ................................... 2 (5.08) 300
be projected into the hoods in the di- Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 3 (7.62) 500
Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 4 (10.16) 610
rection of the air flow. No wheels, Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 5 (12.7) 740
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,040
in such manner and in such direction Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
as to cause the dust and dirt particles
to be thrown into the operator’s (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
breathing zone. zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall
(ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, be hooded to collect the dust or dirt
pedestals, benches, and special-purpose generated by the grinding operation
grinding machines and abrasive cut- and the hoods shall be connected to
ting-off wheels shall have not less than branch pipes having exhaust volumes
the minimum exhaust volumes shown as shown in Table D–57.3.
47
TABLE D–57.3—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE TABLE D–57.6—GRINDING AND POLISHING

DISC GRINDER BELTS
Exhaust Exhaust
Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume Belts width, inches (cm) volume
(ft.3/min.) (ft.3/min.)
Up to 12 (30.48) .................................................. 220 Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220

Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) ........................... 390 Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ................................... 300
Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) ............................. 610 Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ................................. 390
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ............................. 880 Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ............................... 500
Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ............................. 610
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ........................... 740
zontal double-spindle disc grinders
shall have a hood enclosing the grind- (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind-
ing chamber and the hood shall be con- ers. Where cradles are used for han-
nected to one or more branch pipes dling the parts to be ground, polished,
having exhaust volumes as shown in or buffed, requiring large partial enclo-
Table D–57.4. sures to house the complete operation,
a minimum average air velocity of 150
TABLE D–57.4—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE feet per minute shall be maintained
DISC GRINDER over the entire opening of the enclo-
Exhaust sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also
Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume be exhausted in the same manner as
(ft.3/min.)
provided for cradles. (See fig. D–57.3)
Up to 19 (48.26) .................................................. 610 (ix) Where the work is outside the
Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) ............................. 880
hood, air volumes must be increased as
Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) ............................... 1,200
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) ........................... 1,770 shown in American Standard Fun-
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) ....................... 6,280 damentals Governing the Design and
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems,
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods).
vertical single-spindle disc grinders (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys-
shall be encircled with hoods to remove tems for grinding, polishing, and buff-
the dust generated in the operation. ing operations should be designed in
The hoods shall be connected to one or accordance with American Standard
more branch pipes having exhaust vol- Fundamentals Governing the Design
umes as shown in Table D–57.5. and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys-
TABLE D–57.5—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC tems, Z9.2–1960.
GRINDER (ii) Exhaust systems for grinding,
polishing, and buffing operations shall
One-half or more Disc not cov- be tested in the manner described in
of disc covered ered
American Standard Fundamentals
Disc diameter, inches Ex- Ex- Governing the Design and Operation of
(cm) Num- haust Num- haust
ber 1 foot 3/ ber 1 foot3/ Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960.
min. min. (iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
Up to 20 (50.8) .......... 1 500 2 780 vided with suitable dust collectors.
Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to (5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It
76.2) ....................... 2 780 2 1,480 is the dual function of grinding and ab-
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to
134.62) ................... 2 1,770 4 3,530 rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro-
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 tect the operator from the hazards of
to 182.88) ............... 2 3,140 5 6,010 bursting wheels as well as to provide a
1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or means for the removal of dust and dirt
equal distribution provided by other means. generated. All hoods shall be not less
(vii) Grinding and polishing belts in structural strength than specified in
shall be provided with hoods to remove the American National Standard Safe-
dust and dirt generated in the oper- ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec-
ations and the hoods shall be connected tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1–1970.
to branch pipes having exhaust vol- (B) Due to the variety of work and
umes as shown in Table D–57.6. types of grinding machines employed,
48
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt- ing face of the enclosure shall not be
able to the particular machine in ques- less than 150 feet per minute.
tion, and such hoods shall be located as (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin-
close as possible to the operation. dle disc grinders shall be constructed
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, to conform as closely as possible to the
pedestals, and bench grinders shall be hood shown in figure D–57.6. It is essen-
designed in accordance with figure D– tial that there be a space between the
57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in back of the wheel and the hood, and a
the figure shall be kept in working space around the periphery of the
order and shall be adjusted within one- wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel pe- order to permit the suction to act
riphery at all times. around the wheel periphery. The open-
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be ing on the side of the disc shall be no
provided with exhaust booths as indi- larger than is required for the grinding
cated in figure D–57.3. operation, but must never be less than
twice the area of the branch outlet.
(iv) Portable grinding operations,
(viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
whenever the nature of the work per-
grinders shall have a hood encircling
mits, shall be conducted within a par- the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
tial enclosure. The opening in the en- lar to that illustrated in figure D–57.7.
closure shall be no larger than is actu- The openings for passing the work into
ally required in the operation and an the grinding chamber should be kept as
average face air velocity of not less small as possible, but must never be
than 200 feet per minute shall be main- less than twice the area of the branch
tained. outlets.
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- shall be encircled with a hood so con-
structed to conform as closely to figure structed that the heavy dust is drawn
D–57.4 as the nature of the work will off a surface of the disc and the lighter
permit. dust exhausted through a continuous
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op- slot at the top of the hood as shown in
erations shall be performed within a figure D–57.1.
partial enclosure similar to figure D– (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
57.5. The operator shall be positioned shall be constructed as close to the op-
outside the working face of the opening eration as possible. The hood should
of the enclosure. The face opening of extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
the enclosure should not be any greater (2.54 cm) wide openings should be pro-
in area than that actually required for vided on either side. Figure D–57.8
the performance of the operation and shows a typical hood for a belt oper-
the average air velocity into the work- ation.
49
Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex-

hausted at Note
4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. ft3/min
.................................... 20 (50.8) 1 41⁄4 (10.795) 500 When one-half or more of the disc
can be hooded, use exhaust
ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140
.................................... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over

disc, use exhaust ducts as
shown at left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 5 1⁄2 (13.97) 1,480
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530
72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch (1.27 cm) slot width.
50
EC30OC91.000
Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of

Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter inches (centi- 4,500 ft/
Width, Max meters) E min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 4 1⁄2 500
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
51
EC30OC91.001
FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS
NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as

much as possible
52
EC30OC91.002
STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of
Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter inches E 4,500 ft/
Width, Max min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 5 1⁄2 740
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 6 1⁄2 1.040
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
53
EC30OC91.003
FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for

tapered takeoff
54
EC30OC91.004
Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex-

Exhaust E, hausted at
dia. inches 4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. (cm) ft3/min
12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220

Over 12 (30.48) ........................................................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
55
EC30OC91.005
Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 (48.26) 1 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ................. 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust
ducts should be as near heaviest
grinding as possible.
Over 25 (63.5) ................... 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200
Over 30 (76.2) ................... 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ............... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
56
EC30OC91.006
FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for mable and Combustible Materials,
tapered takeoff NFPA No. 33–1969).
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a
Exhaust room in which spray-finishing oper-
Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume.
ft.1/min ations not conducted in a spray booth
are performed separately from other
Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ............................................ 300
areas.
5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) .......................................... 390 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-
7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ........................................ 500 imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...................................... 610 ity of air movement which must be
11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) .................................... 740 maintained in order to meet minimum
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min specified requirements for health and
main. safety.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65
velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (2) Location and application. Spray
booths or spray rooms are to be used to
(6) Scope. This paragraph (g), pre- enclose or confine all operations.
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
sures and systems in removing dust, cated as provided in sections 201
dirt, fumes, and gases generated through 206 of the Standard for Spray
through the grinding, polishing, or Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.
als. (3) Design and construction of spray
(h) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) signed and constructed in accordance
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- with § 1926.66(b) (1) through (4) and (6)
ishing operations are employment of through (10) (see sections 301–304 and
methods wherein organic or inorganic 306–310 of the Standard for Spray Fin-
materials are utilized in dispersed form ishing Using Flammable and Combus-
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969), for
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of general construction specifications.
deposit may involve either automatic, For a more detailed discussion of fun-
manual, or electrostatic deposition but damentals relating to this subject, see
do not include metal spraying or met- ANSI Z9.2–1960
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller (A) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ment, and other sources of ignition
spray washing and degreasing as con- shall conform to the requirements of
ducted in self-contained washing and § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310
degreasing machines or systems. and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
fined and described in § 1926.66(a). (See bustible Materials NFPA No. 33–1969.)
sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- (B) In no case shall combustible ma-
ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- terial be used in the construction of a
57
EC30OC91.007
spray booth and supply or exhaust duct concrete, masonry, or other material
connected to it. having similar properties.
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (A) Tanks shall be provided with
be less than 61⁄2 feet (1.976 m) high and weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to
shall be maintained clear of obstruc- prevent sludge and floating paint from
tion from any work location in the entering the pump suction box. Means
booth to a booth exit or open booth for automatically maintaining the
front. In booths where the open front is proper water level shall also be pro-
the only exit, such exits shall be not vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be
less than 3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In submerged. They shall terminate at
booths having multiple exits, such least one pipe diameter above the safe-
exits shall not be less than 2 feet (0.608 ty overflow level of the tank.
m) wide, provided that the maximum (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as
distance from the work location to the to discourage accumulation of haz-
exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less. Where ardous deposits.
booth exits are provided with doors, (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and
such doors shall open outward from the headers shall be adequately sized to in-
booth. sure sufficient water flow to provide ef-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and ficient operation of the water chamber.
dry-type overspray collectors shall (4) Design and construction of spray
conform to the requirements of rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
§ 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
ishing Using Flammable and Combus- terial.
tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.) (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
(A) Overspray filters shall be in- combustible fire doors and shutters.
stalled and maintained in accordance (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), ventilated so that the atmosphere in
(see section 305 of the Standard for the breathing zone of the operator
Spray Finishing Using Flammable and shall be maintained in accordance with
Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33– the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii)
1969), and shall only be in a location of this section.
easily accessible for inspection, clean- (iv) Spray rooms used for production
ing, or replacement. spray-finishing operations shall con-
(B) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray
pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths.
stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions
tion, it is permissible to operate the of § 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the
booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using
(iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials,
booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 33–1969), and in accordance
within which intimate contact of con- with the following:
taminated air and cleaning water or (A) Where a fan plenum is used to
other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the
heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential
(B) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im-
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean-
vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall
and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para-
removal of particulate matter from the graph (h)(5)(iii) of this section.
exhaust air stream. (B) [Reserved]
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths
non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con-
used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.
58
(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors

inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet
shall be sealed if there is a possibility (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for
of infiltration of harmful quantities of ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in di-
noxious gases, fumes, or mists from ameter, but the distance between
areas through which ductwork passes. cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
(B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na-
accordance with volume flow require- tional Standard Z9.1–1951.) A clean-out
ments and provide design air require- door or doors shall be provided for serv-
ments at the spray booth. icing the fan, and where necessary, a
(C) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- drain shall be provided.
quately supported throughout its (F) Where ductwork passes through a
length to sustain at least its own combustible roof or wall, the roof or
weight plus any negative pressure wall shall be protected at the point of
which is exerted upon it under normal penetration by open space or fire-resis-
operating conditions. tive material between the duct and the
(iii) [Reserved] roof or wall. When ducts pass through
(A) Exhaust ductwork shall be ade- firewalls, they shall be provided with
quately supported throughout its automatic fire dampers on both sides of
length to sustain its weight plus any the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
normal accumulation in interior dur- steel plates may be used in lieu of
ing normal operating conditions and automatic fire dampers for ducts not
any negative pressure exerted upon it. exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diame-
(B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized ter.
in accordance with good design prac- (G) Ductwork used for ventilating
tice which shall include consideration any process covered in this standard
of fan capacity, length of duct, number shall not be connected to ducts ven-
of turns and elbows, variation in size, tilating any other process or any chim-
volume, and character of materials ney or flue used for conveying any
being exhausted. See American Na- products of combustion.
tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
details and explanation concerning ele- (i) Except where a spray booth has an
ments of design. adequate air replacement system, the
(C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel velocity of air into all openings of a
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, spray booth shall be not less than that
riveted, or welded. For other than steel specified in Table D–57.7 for the oper-
construction, equivalent securing of ating conditions specified. An adequate
joints shall be provided. air replacement system is one which
(D) Circumferential joints in duct- introduces replacement air upstream
work shall be substantially fastened or above the object being sprayed and
together and lapped in the direction of is so designed that the velocity of air
airflow. At least every fourth joint in the booth cross section is not less
shall be provided with connecting than that specified in Table D–57.7
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- when measured upstream or above the
lent fastening security. object being sprayed.
TABLE D–57.7—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS
Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Crossdraft,
Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth f.p.m. Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 50–75
without operator.
................. 100 small booth .................... 75–125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75–125
................. 150 small booth .................... 125–175

Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125–175
................. 200 small booth .................... 150–250

NOTES:
59
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued
total air volume exhausted through a
Lower ex-
spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet plosive
per gallon
solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of of vapor of limit in per-
Solvent cent by
the lower explosive limit of the solvent liquid at 70 volume of
°F (21.11
being sprayed. An example of the meth- air at 70 °F
°C). (21.11 °C)
od of calculating this volume is given
below. Benzene ........................................ 36.8 1 1.4
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7

Example: To determine the lower explosive Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4
limits of the most common solvents used in Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1
spray finishing, see Table D–57.8. Column 1 Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7
Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2 1 1.1
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the
1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5
vent will be diminished by the quantity of Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
solids and nonflammables contained in the Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
finish. Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1

To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3
Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5
plosive limit, apply the following formula: Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) ..... 22.4 0.9
Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Sol-
Dilution volume required per gallon of vent—Stoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0
solvent=4 (100–LEL) (cubic feet of Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8
vapor per gallon)÷ LEL Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1
Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1
Using toluene as the solvent. Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
(1) LEL of toluene from Table D–57.8, col- Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
umn 2, is 1.4 percent.
Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from
Table D–57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per 1 At 212 °F (100 °C).
gallon.
(3) Dilution volume required =
(iii)(A) When an operator is in a
booth downstream of the object being
4 (100–1.4) 30.4÷ 1.4=8,564 cubic feet. sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of other type of respirator approved by
required ventilation, multiply the dilution NIOSH under 42 CFR Part 84 for the
volume required per gallon of solvent by the material being sprayed should be used
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per by the operator.
minute. (B) Where downdraft booths are pro-
vided with doors, such doors shall be
TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF closed when spray painting.
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
Lower ex- free of contamination from adjacent
Cubic feet
per gallon plosive industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
limit in per-
Solvent of vapor of cent by stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
liquid at 70
°F (21.11 volume of spray booth or room in quantities
air at 70 °F
°C). equal to the volume of air exhausted
(21.11 °C)
through the spray booth.
Column 1 Column 2 (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-
Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 ceives make-up air through self-closing
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the
60
booth or room is in use for spraying. sources of heat may be employed to

The velocity of air through such doors, meet this requirement.
dampers, or louvers shall not exceed (C) No means of heating make-up air
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- shall be located in a spray booth.
teristics are such that the required air (D) Where make-up air is heated by
flow through the booth will be pro- coal or oil, the products of combustion
vided, higher velocities through the shall not be allowed to mix with the
doors, dampers, or louvers may be make-up air, and the products of com-
used. bustion shall be conducted outside the
(iii) (A) Where the air supply to a building through a flue terminating at
spray booth or room is filtered, the fan a point remote from all points where
static pressure shall be calculated on make-up air enters the building.
the assumption that the filters are (E) Where make-up air is heated by
dirty to the extent that they require gas, and the products of combustion
cleaning or replacement. are not mixed with the make-up air but
(B) The rating of filters shall be gov- are conducted through an independent
erned by test data supplied by the man- flue to a point outside the building re-
ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage mote from all points where make-up
shall be installed to show the pressure air enters the building, it is not nec-
drop across the filters. This gage shall essary to comply with paragraph
be marked to show the pressure drop at (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section.
which the filters require cleaning or re- (F) Where make-up air to any manu-
placement. Filters shall be replaced or ally operated spray booth or room is
cleaned whenever the pressure drop heated by gas and the products of com-
across them becomes excessive or bustion are allowed to mix with the
whenever the air flow through the face supply air, the following precautions
of the booth falls below that specified must be taken:
in Table D–57.7. (1) The gas must have a distinctive
(iv) (A) Means for heating make-up and strong enough odor to warn work-
air to any spray booth or room, before men in a spray booth or room of its
or at the time spraying is normally presence if in an unburned state in the
performed, shall be provided in all make-up air.
places where the outdoor temperature (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
may be expected to remain below 55 °F. to the make-up air heater burners
(12.77 °C.) for appreciable periods of must not exceed that which would
time during the operation of the booth yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
except where adequate and safe means million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
of radiant heating for all operating per- p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
sonnel affected is provided. The re- mixture if the unburned gas upon the
placement air during the heating sea- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
sons shall be maintained at not less with all of the make-up air supplied.
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) at the point of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
entry into the spray booth or spray the mixture of heated air and products
room. When otherwise unheated make- of combustion from the plenum cham-
up air would be at a temperature of ber housing the gas burners to the
more than 10 °F. below room tempera- spray booth or room.
ture, its temperature shall be regulated (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
Z9.2–1960. fine all spray finishing operations cov-
(B) As an alternative to an air re- ered by this paragraph (h). This para-
placement system complying with the graph does not apply to the spraying of
preceding section, general heating of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
the building in which the spray room or similar structures, nor to small
or booth is located may be employed portable spraying apparatus not used
provided that all occupied parts of the repeatedly in the same location.
building are maintained at not less (i) Open surface tanks—(1) General. (i)
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) when the exhaust This paragraph applies to all oper-
system is in operation or the general ations involving the immersion of ma-
heating system supplemented by other terials in liquids, or in the vapors of
61
such liquids, for the purpose of clean- Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34–
ing or altering the surface or adding to 1966, National Fire Protection Associa-
or imparting a finish thereto or chang- tion. Where the tank contains a mix-
ing the character of the materials, and ture of liquids, other than organic sol-
their subsequent removal from the liq- vents, whose effects are additive, the
uid or vapor, draining, and drying. hygienic standard of the most toxic
These operations include washing, elec- component (for example, the one hav-
troplating, anodizing, pickling, ing the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m.3) shall
quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, be used, except where such substance
dressing, bleaching, degreasing, alka- constitutes an insignificantly small
line cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digest- fraction of the mixture. For mixtures
ing, and other similar operations. of organic solvents, their combined ef-
(ii) Except where specific construc- fect, rather than that of either individ-
tion specifications are prescribed in ually, shall determine the hazard po-
this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, tential. In the absence of information
blowers, and all other exhaust system to the contrary, the effects shall be
parts, components, and supports there- considered as additive. If the sum of
of shall be so constructed as to meet the ratios of the airborne concentra-
conditions of service and to facilitate tion of each contaminant to the toxic
maintenance and shall conform in con- concentration of that contaminant ex-
struction to the specifications con- ceeds unity, the toxic concentration
tained in American National Standard shall be considered to have been ex-
Fundamentals Governing the Design ceeded. (See Note A to paragraph
and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- (i)(2)(v) of this section.)
tems, Z9.2–1960. (v) Hazard potential shall be deter-
(2) Classification of open-surface tank mined from Table D–57.9, with the
operations. (i) Open-surface tank oper- value indicating greater hazard being
ations shall be classified into 16 class- used. When the hazardous material
es, numbered A–1 to D–4, inclusive. may be either a vapor with a
(ii) Determination of class. Class is de- threshhold limit value (TLV) in p.p.m.
termined by two factors, hazard poten- or a mist with a TLV in mg./m.3, the
tial designated by a letter from A to D, TLV indicating the greater hazard shall
inclusive, and rate of gas, vapor, or be used (for example, A takes prece-
mist evolution designated by a number dence over B or C; B over C; C over D).
from 1 to 4, inclusive (for example, B.3). NOTE A:
(iii) Hazard potential is an index, on (c1÷TLV1)+(c2÷TLV2)+(c3÷TLV3)+; . .
a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the .(cN÷TLVN)1
severity of the hazard associated with Where:
the substance contained in the tank be- c = Concentration measured at the operation
cause of the toxic, flammable, or explo- in p.p.m.
sive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist
produced therefrom. The toxic hazard TABLE D–57.9—DETERMINATION OF HAZARD
is determined from the concentration, POTENTIAL
measured in parts by volume of a gas Toxicity group
or vapor, per million parts by volume
of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in mil- Hazard potential Gas or Mist (mg./ Flash point in
vapor
ligrams of mist per cubic meter of air m 3) degrees F. (C.)
(p.p.m.)
(mg./m.3), below which ill effects are
A .......................... 0–10 0–0.1 ..........................
unlikely to occur to the exposed work- B .......................... 11–100 0.11–1.0 Under 100
er. The concentrations shall be those in (37.77)
§ 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of C .......................... 101–500 1.1–10 100 200
(37.77–93.33)
this part. D .......................... Over 500 Over 10 Over 200
(iv) The relative fire or explosion (93.33)
hazard is measured in degrees Fahr-
enheit in terms of the closed-cup flash (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evo-
point of the substance in the tank. De- lution is a numerical index, on a scale
tailed information on the prevention of of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the
fire hazards in dip tanks may be found relative capacity of the tank to
in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the
62
relative energy with which it is pro- (D) The extent that the tank gases or
jected or carried upwards from the produces mist in an arbitrary scale—
tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table
(A) The temperature of the liquid in D–57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon
the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; electrochemical or mechanical proc-
(B) The number of degrees Fahr- esses, the effects of which have to be
enheit that this temperature is below individually evaluated for each instal-
the boiling point of the liquid in de- lation (see Table D–57.10, Note 3).
grees Fahrenheit; (vii) Rate of evolution shall be deter-
(C) The relative evaporation of the mined from Table D–57.10. When evapo-
liquid in still air at room temperature ration and gassing yield different rates,
in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, the lowest numerical value shall be
slow, or nil; and used.
TABLE D–57.10—DETERMINATION OF RATE OF GAS, VAPOR, OR MIST EVOLUTION 1
Liquid temperature, Degrees below boil-
Rate Relative evaporation 2 Gassing 3
°F. (C.) ing point
1 ................................ Over 200 (93.33) 0–20 Fast ...................................... High.

2 ................................ 150–200 (65.55– 21–50 Medium ................................ Medium.
93.33)
3 ................................ 94–149 (34.44–65) 51–100 Slow ..................................... Low.
4 ................................ Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil ........................................ Nil.
1 In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level thermostat is used to pre-
vent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of vapor evolution from the tank into the work-
room is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carry-
out of vapors from excessively fast action, dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other
materials, or improper heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When
operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a rate of 2 or 1 is in-
dicated, depending upon observed conditions.
2 Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0–3 hours; Medium: 3–12 hours;
Slow: 12–50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours.
3 Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface of the liquid
in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.
(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of

used to control potential exposures to hoods which
workers as defined in paragraph (A) Project over the entire tank;
(i)(2)(iii) of this section, it shall be ade- (B) Are fixed in position in such a lo-
quate to reduce the concentration of cation that the head of the workman,
the air contaminant to the degree that in all his normal operating positions
a hazard to the worker does not exist. while working at the tank, is in front
Methods of ventilation are discussed in
of all hood openings; and
American National Standard Fun-
damentals Governing the Design and (C) Are completely enclosed on at
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, least two sides, shall be considered to
Z9.2–1960. be exhausted through an enclosing
(4) Control requirements. (i) Control hood.
velocities shall conform to Table D– (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet
57.11 in all cases where the flow of air per minute necessary to be exhausted
past the breathing or working zone of through an enclosing hood shall be not
the operator and into the hoods is unless than the product of the control ve-
disturbed by local environmental con- locity times the net area of all open-
ditions, such as open windows, wall ings in the enclosure through which air
fans, unit heaters, or moving machin- can flow into the hood.
ery.
63
TABLE D–57.11—CONTROL VELOCITIES IN FEET PER MINUTE (F.P.M.) FOR UNDISTURBED LOCATIONS
Enclosing hood Canopy hood 2
Lateral ex-
Class One open Two open haust 1 Three Four open
side sides open sides sides
B–1 and A–2 ........................................................................... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use
A–3 2, B–1, B–2, and C–1 ....................................................... 75 100 100 125 175
A–3, C–2, and D–1 3 ............................................................... 65 90 75 100 150
B–4 2, C–3, and D–2 3 ............................................................. 50 75 50 75 125
A–4, C–4, D–3 3, and D–4 4 .................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
1 See Table D–57.12 for computation of ventilation rate.
2 Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes.
3 Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class.
4 General room ventilation required.
(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42
hoods which do not project over the en- inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is de-
tire tank, and in which the direction of sirable to reduce the amount of air re-
air movement into the hood or hoods is moved from the workroom, air supply
substantially horizontal, shall be con- slots or orifices shall be provided along
sidered to be laterally exhausted. The the side or the center of the tank oppo-
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute site from the exhaust slots. The design
necessary to be laterally exhausted per of such systems shall meet the fol-
square foot of tank area in order to
lowing criteria:
maintain the required control velocity
shall be determined from Table D–57.12 (1) The supply air volume plus the en-
for all variations in ratio of tank width trained air shall not exceed 50 percent
(W) to tank length $(L). The total of the exhaust volume.
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute (2) The velocity of the supply air-
required to be exhausted per tank shall stream as it reaches the effective con-
be not less than the product of the area trol area of the exhaust slot shall be
of tank surface times the cubic feet per less than the effective velocity over
minute per square foot of tank area, the exhaust slot area.
determined from Table D–57.12.
TABLE D–57.12—MINIMUM VENTILATION RATE IN CUBIC FEET OF AIR PER MINUTE PER SQUARE
FOOT OF TANK AREA FOR LATERAL EXHAUST
C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at fol-
Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D– lowing ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)).1, 2
57.11)
0.0–0.09 0.1–0.24 0.25–0.49 0.5–0.99 1.0–2.0
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle.2
Also for a manifold along tank centerline.3
50 ............................................................................................ 50 60 75 90 100
75 ............................................................................................ 75 90 110 130 150
100 .......................................................................................... 100 125 150 175 200
150 .......................................................................................... 150 190 225 260 300
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.
50 ............................................................................................ 75 90 100 110 125

75 ............................................................................................ 110 130 150 170 190
100 .......................................................................................... 150 175 200 225 250
150 .......................................................................................... 225 260 300 340 375
1 It is not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0.
It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to 1/2 the circumference, use
W/L=1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L=0.5.
2 Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is wide. If the exhaust
hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly baffled.
3 Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel sides of a
tank.
Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the hood face is
set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The surface area of tanks can fre-
quently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized systems) by using covers extending from the upper
edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.
64
(3) The vertical height of the receiv- the liquid in the tank to minimize mist
ing exhaust hood, including any baffle, formation, or any combination thereof,
shall not be less than one-quarter the may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor
width of the tank. control means for open-surface tank
(4) The supply airstream shall not be operations, provided that they effec-
allowed to impinge on obstructions be- tively reduce the concentrations of
tween it and the exhaust slot in such a hazardous materials in the vicinity of
manner as to significantly interfere the worker below the limits set in ac-
with the performance of the exhaust cordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this
hood. section.
(5) Since most failure of push-pull (7) System design. (i) The equipment
systems result from excessive supply for exhausting air shall have sufficient
air volumes and pressures, methods of capacity to produce the flow of air re-
measuring and adjusting the supply air quired in each of the hoods and open-
shall be provided. When satisfactory ings of the system.
control has been achieved, the adjust- (ii) The capacity required in para-
able features of the hood shall be fixed graph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be
so that they will not be altered. obtained when the airflow producing
(iv) All tanks exhausted by means of equipment is operating against the fol-
hoods which project over the entire lowing pressure losses, the sum of
tank, and which do not conform to the which is the static pressure:
definition of enclosing hoods, shall be (A) Entrance losses into the hood.
considered to be overhead canopy (B) Resistance to airflow in branch
hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet pipe including bends and trans-
per minute necessary to be exhausted formations.
through a canopy hood shall be not less (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe.
than the product of the control veloc- (D) Resistance to airflow in main
ity times the net area of all openings pipe including bends and trans-
between the bottom edges of the hood formations.
and the top edges of the tank. (E) Resistance of mechanical equip-
(v) The rate of vapor evolution (in- ment; that is, filters, washers, con-
cluding steam or products of combus- densers, absorbers, etc., plus their en-
tion) from the process shall be esti- trance and exit losses.
mated. If the rate of vapor evolution is (F) Resistance in outlet duct and dis-
equal to or greater than 10 percent of charge stack.
the calculated exhaust volume re- (iii) Two or more operations shall not
quired, the exhaust volume shall be in- be connected to the same exhaust sys-
creased in equal amount. tem where either one or the combina-
(5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. tion of the substances removed may
Wherever spraying or other mechanical constitute a fire, explosion, or chem-
means are used to disperse a liquid ical reaction hazard in the duct sys-
above an open-surface tank, control tem. Traps or other devices shall be
must be provided for the airborne provided to insure that condensate in
spray. Such operations shall be en- ducts does not drain back into any
closed as completely as possible. The tank.
inward air velocity into the enclosure (iv) The exhaust system, consisting
shall be sufficient to prevent the dis- of hoods, ducts, air mover, and dis-
charge of spray into the workroom. charge outlet, shall be designed in ac-
Mechanical baffles may be used to help cordance with American National
prevent the discharge of spray. Spray Standard Fundamentals Governing the
painting operations are covered by Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
paragraph (h) of this section. Systems, Z9.2–1960, or the manual, In-
(6) Control means other than ventila- dustrial Ventilation, published by the
tion. Tank covers, foams, beads, chips, American Conference of Governmental
or other materials floating on the tank Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and
surface so as to confine gases, mists, or pressure loss data provided by the man-
vapors to the area under the cover or ufacturer of any air cleaning device
to the foam, bead, or chip layer; or sur- shall be included in the design calcula-
face tension depressive agents added to tions.
65
(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow (ii) All persons required to work in
shall be maintained at all times during such a manner that their feet may be-
which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted come wet shall be provided with rubber
from the tank, and at all times the or other impervious boots or shoes,
tank, the draining, or the drying area rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes suffi-
is in operation or use. When the system cient to keep feet dry.
is first installed, the airflow from each (iii) All persons required to handle
hood shall be measured by means of a work wet with a liquid other than
pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and water shall be provided with gloves im-
corrective action taken if the flow is pervious to such a liquid and of a
less than that required. When the prop- length sufficient to prevent entrance of
er flow is obtained, the hood static liquid into the tops of the gloves. The
pressure shall be measured and re- interior of gloves shall be kept free
corded. At intervals of not more than 3 from corrosive or irritating contami-
months operation, or after a prolonged nants.
shutdown period, the hoods and duct (iv) All persons required to work in
system shall be inspected for evidence such a manner that their clothing may
of corrosion or damage. In any case become wet shall be provided with such
where the airflow is found to be less aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other
than required, it shall be increased to garments made of rubber, or of other
the required value. (Information on air- materials impervious to liquids other
flow and static pressure measurement than water, as are required to keep
and calculations may be found in their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend
American National Standard Funda- well below the top of boots to prevent
mental Governing the Design and Oper- liquid splashing into the boots. Provi-
ation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2– sion of dry, clean, cotton clothing
1960, or in the manual, Industrial Ven- along with rubber shoes or short boots
tilation, published by the American and an apron impervious to liquids
Conference of Governmental Industrial other than water shall be considered a
satisfactory substitute where small
Hygienists.)
parts are cleaned, plated, or acid
(ii) The exhaust system shall dis-
dipped in open tanks and rapid work is
charge to the outer air in such a man-
required.
ner that the possibility of its effluent (v) Whenever there is a danger of
entering any building is at a minimum. splashing, for example, when additions
Recirculation shall only be through a are made manually to the tanks, or
device for contaminant removal which when acids and chemicals are removed
will prevent the creation of a health from the tanks, the employees so en-
hazard in the room or area to which gaged shall be required to wear either
the air is recirculated. tight-fitting chemical goggles or an ef-
(iii) A volume of outside air in the fective face shield. See § 1926.102.
range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the (vi) When, during the emergencies
exhaust volume shall be provided to specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this
each room having exhaust hoods. The section, employees must be in areas
outside air supply shall enter the work- where concentrations of air contami-
room in such a manner as not to be nants are greater than the limits set
detrimental to any exhaust hood. The by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section
airflow of the makeup air system shall or oxygen concentrations are less than
be measured on installation. Corrective 19.5 percent, they must use respirators
action shall be taken when the airflow that reduce their exposure to a level
is below that required. The makeup air below these limits or that provide ade-
shall be uncontaminated. quate oxygen. Such respirators must
(9) Personal protection. (i) All employ- also be provided in marked, quickly-ac-
ees working in and around open-surface cessible storage compartments built
tank operations must be instructed as for this purpose when the possibility
to the hazards of their respective jobs, exists of accidental release of haz-
and in the personal protection and first ardous concentrations of air contami-
aid procedures applicable to these haz- nants. Respirators must be approved by
ards. NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected
66
by a competent industrial hygienist or type of construction and by frequent

other technically-qualified source, and flushing. They shall be firm, sound, and
used in accordance with 29 CFR of the design and construction to mini-
1926.103. mize the possibility of tripping.
(vii) Near each tank containing a liq- (ii) Before cleaning the interior of
uid which may burn, irritate, or other- any tank, the contents shall be drained
wise be harmful to the skin if splashed off, and the cleanout doors shall be
upon the worker’s body, there shall be opened where provided. All pockets in
a supply of clean cold water. The water tanks or pits, where it is possible for
pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding hazardous vapors to collect, shall be
25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided ventilated and cleared of such vapors.
with a quick opening valve and at least (iii) Tanks which have been drained
48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller to permit employees to enter for the
than three-fourths inch, so that no purposes of cleaning, inspection, or
time may be lost in washing off liquids maintenance may contain atmospheres
from the skin or clothing. Alter- which are hazardous to life or health,
natively, deluge showers and eye through the presence of flammable or
flushes shall be provided in cases where toxic air contaminants, or through the
harmful chemicals may be splashed on absence of sufficient oxygen. Before
parts of the body. employees shall be permitted to enter
(viii) Operators with sores, burns, or any such tank, appropriate tests of the
other skin lesions requiring medical atmosphere shall be made to determine
treatment shall not be allowed to work
if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii)
at their regular operations until so au-
of this section are exceeded, or if the
thorized by a physician. Any small
oxygen concentration is less than 19.5
skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open
percent.
sores which are found or reported shall
be treated by a properly designated (iv) If the tests made in accordance
person so that chances of exposures to with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this sec-
the chemicals are removed. Workers tion indicate that the atmosphere in
exposed to chromic acids shall have a the tank is unsafe, before any em-
periodic examination made of the nos- ployee is permitted to enter the tank,
trils and other parts of the body, to de- the tank shall be ventilated until the
tect incipient ulceration. hazardous atmosphere is removed, and
(ix) Sufficient washing facilities, in- ventilation shall be continued so as to
cluding soap, individual towels, and prevent the occurrence of a hazardous
hot water, shall be provided for all per- atmosphere as long as an employee is
sons required to use or handle any liq- in the tank.
uids which may burn, irritate, or oth- (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue
erwise be harmful to the skin, on the work, it is necessary to enter a tank
basis of at least one basin (or its equiv- which may contain a hazardous atmos-
alent) with a hot water faucet for every phere, suitable respirators, such as
10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). self-contained breathing apparatus;
(x) Locker space or equivalent cloth- hose mask with blower, if there is a
ing storage facilities shall be provided possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a
to prevent contamination of street gas mask, selected and operated in ac-
clothing. cordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of
(xi) First aid facilities specific to the this section, shall be used. If a con-
hazards of the operations conducted taminant in the tank can cause derma-
shall be readily available. titis, or be absorbed through the skin,
(10) Special precautions for cyanide. the employee entering the tank shall
Dikes or other arrangements shall be also wear protective clothing. At least
provided to prevent the possibility of one trained standby employee, with
intermixing of cyanide and acid in the suitable respirator, shall be present in
event of tank rupture. the nearest uncontaminated area. The
(11) Inspection, maintenance, and in- standby employee must be able to com-
stallation. (i) Floors and platforms municate with the employee in the
around tanks shall be prevented from tank and be able to haul him out of the
becoming slippery both by original tank with a lifeline if necessary.
67
(vi) Maintenance work requiring the vapors of such liquids, for the pur-
welding or open flame, where toxic pose of cleaning or altering their sur-
metal fumes such as cadmium, chro- faces, or adding or imparting a finish
mium, or lead may be evolved, shall be thereto, or changing the character of
done only with sufficient local exhaust the materials, and their subsequent re-
ventilation to prevent the creation of a moval from the liquids or vapors,
health hazard, or be done with res- draining, and drying. Such operations
pirators selected and used in accord- include washing, electroplating, anod-
ance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this izing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dip-
section. Welding, or the use of open ping, tanning, dressing, bleaching,
flames near any solvent cleaning degreasing, alkaline cleaning, strip-
equipment shall be permitted only ping, rinsing, digesting, and other simi-
after such equipment has first been lar operations, but do not include mol-
thoroughly cleared of solvents and va- ten materials handling operations, or
pors. surface coating operations.
(12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any (ii) Molten materials handling oper-
vapor degreasing tank equipped with a ations means all operations, other than
condenser or vapor level thermostat, welding, burning, and soldering oper-
the condenser or thermostat shall keep ations, involving the use, melting,
the level of vapors below the top edge smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys,
of the tank by a distance at least equal salts, or other similar substances in
to one-half the tank width, or at least the molten state. Such operations also
36 inches (0.912 m), whichever is short- include heat treating baths, descaling
er. baths, die casting stereotyping, gal-
(ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for vanizing, tinning, and similar oper-
heating vapor degreasing tanks, the ations.
combustion chamber shall be of tight (iii) Surface coating operations means
construction, except for such openings all operations involving the applica-
as the exhaust flue, and those that are tion of protective, decorative, adhe-
necessary for supplying air for combus- sive, or strengthening coating or im-
tion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resist- pregnation to one or more surfaces, or
ant construction and shall extend to into the interstices of any object or
the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is material, by means of spraying, spread-
used on this flue, a draft diverter shall ing, flowing, brushing, roll coating,
be used. Special precautions must be pouring, cementing, or similar means;
taken to prevent solvent fumes from and any subsequent draining or drying
entering the combustion air of this or operations, excluding open-tank oper-
any other heater when chlorinated or ations.
fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for
example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
used. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993;
61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8,
(iii) Heating elements shall be so de-
1998]
signed and maintained that their sur-
face temperature will not cause the § 1926.58 [Reserved]
solvent or mixture to decompose, break
down, or be converted into an excessive § 1926.59 Hazard communication.
quantity of vapor.
(iv) Tanks or machines of more than NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this section are iden-
4 square feet (0.368 m2) of vapor area, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this
used for solvent cleaning or vapor chapter.
degreasing, shall be equipped with suit-
able cleanout or sludge doors located [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
near the bottom of each tank or still.
These doors shall be so designed and § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
gasketed that there will be no leakage (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
of solvent when they are closed. tion applies to all construction work as
(13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) ap- defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which
plies to all operations involving the there is exposure to MDA, including
immersion of materials in liquids, or in but not limited to the following:
68
(i) Construction, alteration, repair, ployer shall maintain records of the

maintenance, or renovation of struc- initial monitoring results or objective
tures, substrates, or portions thereof, data supporting that exemption and
that contain MDA; the basis for the employer’s reliance on
(ii) Installation or the finishing of the data, as provided in the record-
surfaces with products containing keeping provision of paragraph (o) of
MDA; this section.
(iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at (b) Definitions. For the purpose of this
construction sites; and section, the following definitions shall
(iv) Transportation, disposal, stor- apply:
age, or containment of MDA or prod- Action level means a concentration of
ucts containing MDA on the site or lo- airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an eight (8)-
cation at which construction activities hour time-weighted average.
are performed. Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this sectional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
tion does not apply to the processing, ment of Labor, or designee.
use, and handling of products con-
Authorized person means any person
taining MDA where initial monitoring
specifically authorized by the employer
indicates that the product is not capa-
whose duties require the person to
ble of releasing MDA in excess of the
enter a regulated area, or any person
action level under the expected condi-
entering such an area as a designated
tions of processing, use, and handling
representative of employees for the
which will cause the greatest possible
purpose of exercising the right to ob-
release; and where no ‘‘dermal exposure
serve monitoring and measuring proce-
to MDA’’ can occur.
dures under paragraph (p) of this sec-
(3) Except as provided in paragraph
tion, or any other person authorized by
(a)(7) of this section, this section does
the Act or regulations issued under the
not apply to the processing, use, and
Act.
handling of products containing MDA
Container means any barrel, bottle,
where objective data are reasonably re-
can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel,
lied upon which demonstrate the prod-
storage tank, commercial packaging or
uct is not capable of releasing MDA
the like, but does not include piping
under the expected conditions of proc-
systems.
essing, use, and handling which will
cause the greatest possible release; and Decontamination area means an area
where no ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ outside of but as near as practical to
can occur. the regulated area, consisting of an
(4) Except as provided in paragraph equipment storage area, wash area, and
(a)(7) of this section, this section does clean change area, which is used for
not apply to the storage, transpor- the decontamination of workers, mate-
tation, distribution or sale of MDA in rials, and equipment contaminated
intact containers sealed in such a man- with MDA.
ner as to contain the MDA dusts, va- Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where
pors, or liquids, except for the provi- employees are engaged in the handling,
sions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph application or use of mixtures or mate-
(e) of this section. rials containing MDA, with any of the
(5) Except as provided in paragraph following non-airborne forms of MDA:
(a)(7) of this section, this section does (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or
not apply to materials in any form flaked mixtures containing MDA in
which contain less than 0.1% MDA by concentrations greater than 0.1% by
weight or volume. weight or volume; and
(6) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Materials other than ‘‘finished ar-
(a)(7) of this section, this section does ticles’’ containing MDA in concentra-
not apply to ‘‘finished articles con- tions greater than 0.1% by weight or
taining MDA.’’ volume.
(7) Where products containing MDA Director means the Director of the
are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) National Institute for Occupational
through (a)(6) of this section, the em- Safety and Health, U.S. Department of
69
Health and Human Services, or des- diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical

ignee. Abstract Service Registry number 101–
Emergency means any occurrence 77–9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or
such as, but not limited to, equipment solid. The definition also includes the
failure, rupture of containers, or fail- salts of MDA.
ure of control equipment which results Regulated Areas means areas where
in an unexpected and potentially haz- airborne concentrations of MDA exceed
ardous release of MDA. or can reasonably be expected to ex-
Employee exposure means exposure to ceed, the permissible exposure limits,
MDA which would occur if the em- or where ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’
ployee were not using respirators or can occur.
protective work clothing and equip- STEL means short term exposure
ment. limit as determined by any 15-minute
Finished article containing MDA is de- sample period.
fined as a manufactured item: (c) Permissible exposure limits. The em-
(i) Which is formed to a specific ployer shall assure that no employee is
shape or design during manufacture; exposed to an airborne concentration
(ii) Which has end use function(s) de- of MDA in excess of ten parts per bil-
pendent in whole or part upon its shape lion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weight-
or design during end use; and ed average and a STEL of one hundred
(iii) Where applicable, is an item
parts per billion (100 ppb).
which is fully cured by virtue of having
(d) Communication among employers.
been subjected to the conditions (tem-
On multi-employer worksites, an em-
perature, time) necessary to complete
the desired chemical reaction. ployer performing work involving the
Historical monitoring data means mon- application of MDA or materials con-
itoring data for construction jobs that taining MDA for which establishment
meet the following conditions: of one or more regulated areas is re-
(i) The data upon which judgments quired shall inform other employers on
are based are scientifically sound and the site of the nature of the employer’s
were collected using methods that are work with MDA and of the existence of,
sufficiently accurate and precise; and requirements pertaining to, regu-
(ii) The processes and work practices lated areas.
that were in use when the historical (e) Emergency situations—(1) Written
monitoring data were obtained are es- plan. (i) A written plan for emergency
sentially the same as those to be used situations shall be developed for each
during the job for which initial moni- construction operation where there is a
toring will not be performed; possibility of an emergency. The plan
(iii) The characteristics of the MDA- shall include procedures where the em-
containing material being handled ployer identifies emergency escape
when the historical monitoring data routes for his employees at each con-
were obtained are the same as those on struction site before the construction
the job for which initial monitoring operation begins. Appropriate portions
will not be performed; of the plan shall be implemented in the
(iv) Environmental conditions pre- event of an emergency.
vailing when the historical monitoring (ii) The plan shall specifically pro-
data were obtained are the same as vide that employees engaged in cor-
those on the job for which initial moni- recting emergency conditions shall be
toring will not be performed; and equipped with the appropriate personal
(v) Other data relevant to the oper- protective equipment and clothing as
ations, materials, processing, or em- required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this
ployee exposures covered by the excep- section until the emergency is abated.
tion are substantially similar. The (iii) The plan shall specifically in-
data must be scientifically sound, the clude provisions for alerting and evacu-
characteristics of the MDA containing ating affected employees as well as the
material must be similar and the envi- applicable elements prescribed in 29
ronmental conditions comparable. CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, ‘‘Emer-
4,4′Methylenedianiline or MDA means gency action plans’’ and ‘‘Fire preven-
the chemical; 4,4′- tion plans,’’ respectively.
70
(2) Alerting employees. Where there is monitoring for each such employee at
the possibility of employee exposure to least every six (6) months.
MDA due to an emergency, means shall (ii) If the monitoring required by
be developed to promptly alert employ- paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals
ees who have the potential to be di- employee exposure above the PELs, the
rectly exposed. Affected employees not employer shall repeat such monitoring
engaged in correcting emergency con- for each such employee at least every
ditions shall be evacuated immediately three (3) months.
in the event that an emergency occurs. (iii) Employers who are conducting
Means shall also be developed for alert- MDA operations within a regulated
ing other employees who may be ex- area can forego periodic monitoring if
posed as a result of the emergency. the employees are all wearing supplied-
(f) Exposure monitoring—(1) General. air respirators while working in the
(i) Determinations of employee expo- regulated area.
sure shall be made from breathing zone (iv) The employer may alter the mon-
air samples that are representative of itoring schedule from every three
each employee’s exposure to airborne months to every six months for any
MDA over an eight (8) hour period. De- employee for whom two consecutive
termination of employee exposure to measurements taken at least 7 days
the STEL shall be made from breathing apart indicate that the employee expo-
zone air samples collected over a 15 sure has decreased to below the PELs
minute sampling period. but above the action level.
(ii) Representative employee expo- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
sure shall be determined on the basis of initial monitoring required by para-
one or more samples representing full graph (f)(2) of this section reveals em-
shift exposure for each shift for each ployee exposure to be below the action
job classification in each work area level, the employer may discontinue
the monitoring for that employee, ex-
where exposure to MDA may occur.
cept as otherwise required by para-
(iii) Where the employer can docu-
graph (f)(5) of this section.
ment that exposure levels are equiva-
(ii) If the periodic monitoring re-
lent for similar operations in different quired by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
work shifts, the employer shall only be tion reveals that employee exposures,
required to determine representative as indicated by at least two consecu-
employee exposure for that operation tive measurements taken at least 7
during one shift. days apart, are below the action level
(2) Initial monitoring. Each employer the employer may discontinue the
who has a workplace or work operation monitoring for that employee, except
covered by this standard shall perform as otherwise required by paragraph
initial monitoring to determine accu- (f)(5) of this section.
rately the airborne concentrations of (5) Additional monitoring. The em-
MDA to which employees may be ex- ployer shall institute the exposure
posed unless: monitoring required under paragraphs
(i) The employer can demonstrate, on (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section when
the basis of objective data, that the there has been a change in production
MDA-containing product or material process, chemicals present, control
being handled cannot cause exposures equipment, personnel, or work prac-
above the standard’s action level, even tices which may result in new or addi-
under worst-case release conditions; or tional exposures to MDA, or when the
(ii) The employer has historical mon- employer has any reason to suspect a
itoring or other data demonstrating change which may result in new or ad-
that exposures on a particular job will ditional exposures.
be below the action level. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring
(3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level
frequency. (i) If the monitoring required of 95 percent, to within plus or minus
by paragraph (f)(2) of this section re- 25 percent for airborne concentrations
veals employee exposure at or above of MDA.
the action level, but at or below the (7) Employee notification of monitoring
PELs, the employer shall repeat such results. (i) The employer must, as soon
71
as possible but no later than 5 working drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
days after the receipt of the results of apply cosmetics in regulated areas.
any monitoring performed under this (h) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
section, notify each affected employee neering controls and work practices and
of these results either individually in respirators. (i) The employer shall use
writing or by posting the results in an one or any combination of the fol-
appropriate location that is accessible lowing control methods to achieve
to employees. compliance with the permissible expo-
(ii) The written notification required sure limits prescribed by paragraph (c)
by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section of this section:
shall contain the corrective action
(A) Local exhaust ventilation
being taken by the employer or any
other protective measures which have equipped with HEPA filter dust collec-
been implemented to reduce the em- tion systems;
ployee exposure to or below the PELs, (B) General ventilation systems;
wherever the PELs are exceeded. (C) Use of workpractices; or
(8) Visual monitoring. The employer (D) Other engineering controls such
shall make routine inspections of em- as isolation and enclosure that the As-
ployee hands, face and forearms poten- sistant Secretary can show to be fea-
tially exposed to MDA. Other potential sible.
dermal exposures reported by the em- (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering
ployee must be referred to the appro- controls and work practices ‘‘which
priate medical personnel for observa- can be instituted are not sufficient to
tion. If the employer determines that reduce employee exposure to or below
the employee has been exposed to MDA the PELs, the employer shall use them
the employer shall: to reduce employee exposure to the
(i) Determine the source of exposure; lowest levels achievable by these con-
(ii) Implement protective measures trols and shall supplement them by the
to correct the hazard; and
use of respiratory protective devices
(iii) Maintain records of the correc-
which comply with the requirements of
tive actions in accordance with para-
graph (o) of this section. paragraph (i) of this section.
(g) Regulated areas—(1) Establish- (2) Special Provisions. For workers en-
ment—(i) Airborne exposures. The em- gaged in spray application methods,
ployer shall establish regulated areas respiratory protection must be used in
where airborne concentrations of MDA addition to feasible engineering con-
exceed or can reasonably be expected trols and work practices to reduce em-
to exceed, the permissible exposure ployee exposure to or below the PELs.
limits. (3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall
(ii) Dermal exposures. Where employ- not be used to remove MDA, unless the
ees are subject to ‘‘dermal exposure to compressed air is used in conjunction
MDA’’ the employer shall establish with an enclosed ventilation system
those work areas as regulated areas. designed to capture the dust cloud cre-
(2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall ated by the compressed air.
be demarcated from the rest of the (4) Employee rotation. The employer
workplace in a manner that minimizes shall not use employee rotation as a
the number of persons potentially ex- means of compliance with the exposure
posed. limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas this section.
shall be limited to authorized persons.
(5) Compliance program. (i) The em-
(4) Personal protective equipment and
clothing. Each person entering a regu- ployer shall establish and implement a
lated area shall be supplied with, and written program to reduce employee
required to use, the appropriate per- exposure to or below the PELs by
sonal protective clothing and equip- means of engineering and work prac-
ment in accordance with paragraphs (i) tice controls, as required by paragraph
and (j) of this section. (h)(1) of this section, and by use of res-
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer piratory protection where permitted
shall ensure that employees do not eat, under this section.
72
(ii) Upon request this written pro- given the option of using a positive-
gram shall be furnished for examina- pressure respirator, or a supplied-air
tion and copying to the Assistant Sec- respirator operated in the continuous-
retary, the Director, affected employ- flow or pressure-demand mode.
ees and designated employee represent- (j) Protective work clothing and equip-
atives. The employer shall review and, ment—(1) Provision and use. Where em-
as necessary, update such plans at ployees are subject to dermal exposure
least once every 12 months to make to MDA, where liquids containing MDA
certain they reflect the current status can be splashed into the eyes, or where
of the program. airborne concentrations of MDA are in
(i) Respiratory protection—(1) General. excess of the PEL, the employer shall
For employees who use respirators re- provide, at no cost to the employee,
quired by this section, the employer and ensure that the employee uses, ap-
must provide respirators that comply propriate protective work clothing and
with the requirements of this para- equipment which prevent contact with
graph. Respirators must be used dur- MDA such as, but not limited to:
ing: (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-
(i) Periods necessary to install or im- body work clothing;
plement feasible engineering and work- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot
practice controls. coverings; and
(ii) Work operations, such as mainte-
(iii) Face shields, chemical goggles;
nance and repair activities and spray-
or
application processes, for which engi-
(iv) Other appropriate protective
neering and work-practice controls are
equipment which comply with 29 CFR
not feasible.
1910.133.
(iii) Work operations for which fea-
sible engineering and work-practice (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
controls are not yet sufficient to re- ployer shall ensure that, at the end of
duce employee exposure to or below the their work shift, employees remove
PELs. MDA-contaminated protective work
(iv) Emergencies. clothing and equipment that is not
(2) Respirator program. The employer routinely removed throughout the day
must implement a respiratory protec- in change areas provided in accordance
tion program in accordance with 29 with the provisions in paragraph (k) of
CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except this section.
(d)(1)(iii), and (f) through (m). (ii) The employer shall ensure that,
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers during their work shift, employees re-
must: move all other MDA-contaminated pro-
(A) Select, and provide to employees, tective work clothing or equipment be-
the appropriate respirators specified in fore leaving a regulated area.
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iii) The employer shall ensure that
1910.134. no employee takes MDA-contaminated
(B) Provide HEPA filters for powered work clothing or equipment out of the
and non-powered air-purifying res- decontamination areas, except those
pirators. employees authorized to do so for the
(C) For escape, provide employees purpose of laundering, maintenance, or
with one of the following respirator op- disposal.
tions: Any self-contained breathing ap- (iv) MDA-contaminated work cloth-
paratus with a full facepiece or hood ing or equipment shall be placed and
operated in the positive-pressure or stored and transported in sealed, im-
continuous-flow mode; or a full face- permeable bags, or other closed imper-
piece air-purifying respirator. meable containers.
(D) Provide a combination HEPA fil- (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated
ter and organic vapor canister or car- protective work clothing or equipment
tridge with air-purifying respirators which are to be taken out of decon-
when MDA is in liquid form or used as tamination areas or the workplace for
part of a process requiring heat. cleaning, maintenance, or disposal,
(ii) An employee who cannot use a shall bear labels warning of the hazards
negative-pressure respirator must be of MDA.
73
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The meable, labeled bags and containers for
employer shall provide the employee the containment and disposal of con-
with clean protective clothing and taminated protective clothing and
equipment. The employer shall ensure equipment.
that protective work clothing or equip- (2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible,
ment required by this paragraph is shower facilities shall be provided
cleaned, laundered, repaired, or re- which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3)
placed at intervals appropriate to wherever the possibility of employee
maintain its effectiveness. exposure to airborne levels of MDA in
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the excess of the permissible exposure
removal of MDA from protective work limit exists.
clothing or equipment by blowing, (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA
shaking, or any methods which allow occurs, the employer shall ensure that
MDA to re-enter the workplace. materials spilled or deposited on the
(iii) The employer shall ensure that skin are removed as soon as possible by
laundering of MDA-contaminated methods which do not facilitate the
clothing shall be done so as to prevent dermal absorption of MDA.
the release of MDA in the workplace. (3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or
(iv) Any employer who gives MDA- beverages are consumed at the work-
contaminated clothing to another per- site and employees are exposed to MDA
son for laundering shall inform such the employer shall provide clean lunch
person of the requirement to prevent areas were MDA levels are below the
the release of MDA. action level and where no dermal expo-
(v) The employer shall inform any sure to MDA can occur.
person who launders or cleans protec- (ii) The employer shall ensure that
tive clothing or equipment contami- employees wash their hands and faces
nated with MDA of the potentially with soap and water prior to eating,
harmful effects of exposure. drinking, smoking, or applying cos-
(4) Visual Examination. (i) The em- metics.
ployer shall ensure that employees’ (iii) The employer shall ensure that
work clothing is examined periodically employees do not enter lunch facilities
for rips or tears that may occur during with contaminated protective work
performance of work. clothing or equipment.
(ii) When rips or tears are detected, (l) Communication of hazards to em-
the protective equipment or clothing ployees—(1) Signs and labels. (i) The em-
shall be repaired and replaced imme- ployer shall post and maintain legible
diately. signs demarcating regulated areas and
(k) Hygiene facilities and practices—(1) entrances or accessways to regulated
General. (i) The employer shall provide areas that bear the following legend:
decontamination areas for employees DANGER
required to work in regulated areas or MDA
required by paragraph (j)(1) of this sec- MAY CAUSE CANCER
tion to wear protective clothing. Excep- LIVER TOXIN
tion: In lieu of the decontamination AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
area requirement specified in para- RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTH-
graph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the em- ING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN
THIS AREA
ployer may permit employees engaged
in small scale, short duration oper- (ii) The employer shall ensure that
ations, to clean their protective cloth- labels or other appropriate forms of
ing or dispose of the protective cloth- warning are provided for containers of
ing before such employees leave the MDA within the workplace. The labels
area where the work was performed. shall comply with the requirements of
(ii) Change areas. The employer shall 29 CFR 1910.1200(f) and shall include
ensure that change areas are equipped one of the following legends:
with separate storage facilities for pro- (A) For pure MDA
tective clothing and street clothing, in DANGER
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e). CONTAINS MDA
(iii) Equipment area. The equipment MAY CAUSE CANCER
area shall be supplied with imper- LIVER TOXIN
74
(B) For mixtures containing MDA (5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and
DANGER
other methods of dry clean-up of MDA
CONTAINS MDA may be used where HEPA filtered
CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not
CAUSE CANCER feasible or practical.
LIVER TOXIN (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con-
(2) Material safety data sheets (MSDS). tainers, equipment, and clothing con-
Employers shall obtain or develop, and taminated with MDA shall be collected
shall provide access to their employ- and disposed of in a manner to prevent
ees, to a material safety data sheet the re-entry of MDA into the work-
(MSDS) for MDA. place.
(3) Information and training. (i) The (n) Medical surveillance—(1) General.
employer shall provide employees with (i) The employer shall make available
information and training on MDA, in a medical surveillance program for em-
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(h), at ployees exposed to MDA under the fol-
the time of initial assignment and at lowing circumstances:
least annually thereafter. (A) Employees exposed at or above
(ii) In addition to the information re- the action level for 30 or more days per
quired under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the em- year;
ployer shall: (B) Employees who are subject to
(A) Provide an explanation of the dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more
contents of this section, including ap- days per year;
pendices A and B of this section, and (C) Employees who have been exposed
indicate to employees where a copy of in an emergency situation;
the standard is available; (D) Employees whom the employer,
(B) Describe the medical surveillance based on results from compliance with
program required under paragraph (n) paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has rea-
of this section, and explain the infor- son to believe are being dermally ex-
mation contained in appendix C of this posed; and
section; and (E) Employees who show signs or
(C) Describe the medical removal symptoms of MDA exposure.
provision required under paragraph (n) (ii) The employer shall ensure that
of this section. all medical examinations and proce-
(4) Access to training materials. (i) The dures are performed by or under the su-
employer shall make readily available pervision of a licensed physician at a
to all affected employees, without cost, reasonable time and place, and pro-
all written materials relating to the vided without cost to the employee.
employee training program, including (2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150
a copy of this regulation. days of the effective date of this stand-
(ii) The employer shall provide to the ard, or before the time of initial assign-
Assistant Secretary and the Director, ment, the employer shall provide each
upon request, all information and employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i)
training materials relating to the em- of this section with a medical examina-
ployee information and training pro- tion including the following elements:
gram. (A) A detailed history which in-
(m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces cludes:
shall be maintained as free as prac- (1) Past work exposure to MDA or
ticable of visible accumulations of any other toxic substances;
MDA. (2) A history of drugs, alcohol, to-
(2) The employer shall institute a bacco, and medication routinely taken
program for detecting MDA leaks, (duration and quantity); and
spills, and discharges, including reg- (3) A history of dermatitis, chemical
ular visual inspections of operations skin sensitization, or previous hepatic
involving liquid or solid MDA. disease.
(3) All leaks shall be repaired and liq- (B) A physical examination which in-
uid or dust spills cleaned up promptly. cludes all routine physical examina-
(4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA tion parameters, skin examination, and
may not be cleaned by the use of com- examination for signs of liver disease.
pressed air. (C) Laboratory tests including:
75
(1) Liver function tests and (2) Uri- physician, no additional testing is re-
nalysis. quired.
(D) Additional tests as necessary in (5) Additional examinations. Where the
the opinion of the physician. employee develops signs and symptoms
(ii) No initial medical examination is associated with exposure to MDA, the
required if adequate records show that employer shall provide the employee
the employee has been examined in ac- with an additional medical examina-
cordance with the requirements of this tion including liver function tests. Re-
section within the previous six months peat liver function tests shall be con-
prior to the effective date of this stand- ducted on the advice of the physician.
ard or prior to the date of initial as- If the results of the tests are normal,
signment. tests must be repeated two to three
(3) Periodic examinations. (i) The em- weeks from the initial testing. If the
ployer shall provide each employee results of the second set of tests are
covered by this section with a medical normal and on the advice of the physi-
examination at least annually fol- cian, no additional testing is required.
lowing the initial examination. These (6) Multiple physician review mecha-
periodic examinations shall include at nism. (i) If the employer selects the ini-
least the following elements: tial physician who conducts any med-
(A) A brief history regarding any new ical examination or consultation pro-
exposure to potential liver toxins, vided to an employee under this sec-
changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol tion, and the employee has signs or
intake, and the appearance of physical symptoms of occupational exposure to
signs relating to the liver, and the MDA (which could include an abnormal
skin; liver function test), and the employee
(B) The appropriate tests and exami- disagrees with the opinion of the exam-
nations including liver function tests ining physician, and this opinion could
and skin examinations; and affect the employee’s job status, the
(C) Appropriate additional tests or employee may designate an appro-
examinations as deemed necessary by priate and mutually acceptable second
the physician. physician:
(ii) If in the physician’s opinion the (A) To review any findings, deter-
results of liver function tests indicate minations or recommendations of the
an abnormality, the employee shall be initial physician; and
removed from further MDA exposure in (B) To conduct such examinations,
accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of consultations, and laboratory tests as
this section. Repeat liver function the second physician deems necessary
tests shall be conducted on advice of to facilitate this review.
the physician. (ii) The employer shall promptly no-
(4) Emergency examinations. If the em- tify an employee of the right to seek a
ployer determines that the employee second medical opinion after each oc-
has been exposed to a potentially haz- casion that an initial physician con-
ardous amount of MDA in an emer- ducts a medical examination or con-
gency situation under paragraph (e) of sultation pursuant to this section. The
this section, the employer shall provide employer may condition its participa-
medical examinations in accordance tion in, and payment for, the multiple
with paragraphs (n)(3) (i) and (ii) of physician review mechanism upon the
this section. If the results of liver func- employee doing the following within
tion testing indicate an abnormality, fifteen (15) days after receipt of the
the employee shall be removed in ac- foregoing notification, or receipt of the
cordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this initial physician’s written opinion,
section. Repeat liver function tests whichever is later:
shall be conducted on the advice of the (A) The employee informing the em-
physician. If the results of the tests are ployer that he or she intends to seek a
normal, tests must be repeated two to second medical opinion, and
three weeks from the initial testing. If (B) The employee initiating steps to
the results of the second set of tests make an appointment with a second
are normal and on the advice of the physician.
76
(iii) If the findings, determinations, (A) The occupationally pertinent re-

or recommendations of the second phy- sults of the medical examination and
sician differ from those of the initial tests;
physician, then the employer and the (B) The physician’s opinion con-
employee shall assure that efforts are cerning whether the employee has any
made for the two physicians to resolve detected medical conditions which
any disagreement. would place the employee at increased
(iv) If the two physicians have been risk of material impairment of health
unable to quickly resolve their dis- from exposure to MDA;
agreement, then the employer and the (C) The physician’s recommended
employee through their respective phy- limitations upon the employee’s expo-
sicians shall designate a third physi- sure to MDA or upon the employee’s
cian: use of protective clothing or equipment
(A) To review any findings, deter- and respirators; and
(D) A statement that the employee
minations, or recommendations of the
has been informed by the physician of
prior physicians; and
the results of the medical examination
(B) To conduct such examinations, and any medical conditions resulting
consultations, laboratory tests, and from MDA exposure which require fur-
discussions with the prior physicians ther explanation or treatment.
as the third physician deems necessary (ii) The written opinion obtained by
to resolve the disagreement of the the employer shall not reveal specific
prior physicians. findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
(v) The employer shall act consistent cupational exposures.
with the findings, determinations, and (9) Medical removal—(i) Temporary
recommendations of the second physi- medical removal of an employee—(A)
cian, unless the employer and the em- Temporary removal resulting from occupa-
ployee reach a mutually acceptable tional exposure. The employee shall be
agreement. removed from work environments in
(7) Information provided to the exam- which exposure to MDA is at or above
ining physician. (i) The employer shall the action level or where dermal expo-
provide the following information to sure to MDA may occur, following an
the examining physician: initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of
(A) A copy of this regulation and its this section), periodic examinations
appendices; (paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an
(B) A description of the affected em- emergency situation (paragraph (n)(4)
ployee’s duties as they relate to the of this section), or an additional exam-
employee’s potential exposure to MDA; ination (paragraph (n)(5) of this sec-
(C) The employee’s current actual or tion) in the following circumstances:
representative MDA exposure level; (1) When the employee exhibits signs
and/or symptoms indicative of acute
(D) A description of any personal pro-
exposure to MDA; or
tective equipment used or to be used;
(2) When the examining physician de-
and
termines that an employee’s abnormal
(E) Information from previous em- liver function tests are not associated
ployment related medical examina- with MDA exposure but that the abnor-
tions of the affected employee. malities may be exacerbated as a re-
(ii) The employer shall provide the sult of occupational exposure to MDA.
foregoing information to a second phy- (B) Temporary removal due to a final
sician under this section upon request medical determination. (1) The employer
either by the second physician, or by shall remove an employee from work
the employee. having an exposure to MDA at or above
(8) Physician’s written opinion. (i) For the action level or where the potential
each examination under this section, for dermal exposure exists on each oc-
the employer shall obtain, and provide casion that a final medical determina-
the employee with a copy of, the exam- tion results in a medical finding, deter-
ining physician’s written opinion with- mination, or opinion that the employee
in 15 days of its receipt. The written has a detected medical condition which
opinion shall include the following: places the employee at increased risk
77
of material impairment to health from (A) Removal. The employer may re-
exposure to MDA. move the employee from exposure to
(2) For the purposes of this section, MDA, provide special protective meas-
the phrase ‘‘final medical determina- ures to the employee, or place limita-
tion’’ shall mean the outcome of the tions upon the employee, consistent
physician review mechanism used pur- with the medical findings, determina-
suant to the medical surveillance pro- tions, or recommendations of the phy-
visions of this section. sician who has reviewed the employee’s
(3) Where a final medical determina- health status.
tion results in any recommended spe- (B) Return. The employer may return
cial protective measures for an em- the employee to his or her former job
ployee, or limitations on an employee’s status, and end any special protective
exposure to MDA, the employer shall measures provided to the employee,
implement and act consistent with the consistent with the medical findings,
recommendation. determinations, or recommendations of
(ii) Return of the employee to former job any of the physicians who have re-
status. (A) The employer shall return viewed the employee’s health status,
an employee to his or her former job with two exceptions:
status: (1) If the initial removal, special pro-
(1) When the employee no longer tection, or limitation of the employee
shows signs or symptoms of exposure resulted from a final medical deter-
to MDA, or upon the advice of the phy- mination which differed from the find-
sician. ings, determinations, or recommenda-
(2) When a subsequent final medical tions of the initial physician; or
determination results in a medical
(2) The employee has been on re-
finding, determination, or opinion that
moval status for the preceding six
the employee no longer has a detected
months as a result of exposure to MDA,
medical condition which places the em-
then the employer shall await a final
ployee at increased risk of material
medical determination.
impairment to health from exposure to
MDA. (v) Medical removal protection bene-
(B) For the purposes of this section, fits—(A) Provisions of medical removal
the requirement that an employer re- protection benefits. The employer shall
turn an employee to his or her former provide to an employee up to six (6)
job status is not intended to expand months of medical removal protection
upon or restrict any rights an em- benefits on each occasion that an em-
ployee has or would have had, absent ployee is removed from exposure to
temporary medical removal, to a spe- MDA or otherwise limited pursuant to
cific job classification or position this section.
under the terms of a collective bar- (B) Definition of medical removal pro-
gaining agreement. tection benefits. For the purposes of this
(iii) Removal of other employee special section, the requirement that an em-
protective measure or limitations. The ployer provide medical removal protec-
employer shall remove any limitations tion benefits means that the employer
placed on an employee or end any spe- shall maintain the earnings, seniority,
cial protective measures provided to an and other employment rights and bene-
employee pursuant to a final medical fits of an employee as though the em-
determination when a subsequent final ployee had not been removed from nor-
medical determination indicates that mal exposure to MDA or otherwise lim-
the limitations or special protective ited.
measures are no longer necessary. (C) Follow-up medical surveillance dur-
(iv) Employer options pending a final ing the period of employee removal or lim-
medical determination. Where the physi- itations. During the period of time that
cian review mechanism used pursuant an employee is removed from normal
to the medical surveillance provisions exposure to MDA or otherwise limited,
of this section, has not yet resulted in the employer may condition the provi-
a final medical determination with re- sion of medical removal protection
spect to an employee, the employer benefits upon the employee’s participa-
shall act as follows: tion in follow-up medical surveillance
78
made available pursuant to this sec- (4) Where the employer acts pursuant
tion. to a final medical determination which
(D) Workers’ compensation claims. If a permits the return of the employee to
removed employee files a claim for his or her former job status despite
workers’ compensation payments for a what would otherwise be an unaccept-
MDA-related disability, then the em- able liver function test, later questions
ployer shall continue to provide med- concerning removing the employee
ical removal protection benefits pend- again shall be decided by a final med-
ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- ical determination. The employer need
tent that an award is made to the em- not automatically remove such an em-
ployee for earnings lost during the pe- ployee pursuant to the MDA removal
riod of removal, the employer’s med- criteria provided by this section.
ical removal protection obligation (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of
shall be reduced by such amount. The an employee. Where an employer, al-
employer shall receive no credit for though not required by this section to
workers’ compensation payments re- do so, removes an employee from expo-
ceived by the employee for treatment- sure to MDA or otherwise places limi-
related expenses. tations on an employee due to the ef-
(E) Other credits. The employer’s obli- fects of MDA exposure on the employ-
gation to provide medical removal pro- ee’s medical condition, the employer
tection benefits to a removed employee shall provide medical removal protec-
shall be reduced to the extent that the tion benefits to the employee equal to
employee receives compensation for that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v) of
earnings lost during the period of re- this section.
moval either from a publicly or em- (o) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data
ployer-funded compensation program, for exempted operations. (i) Where the
or receives income from employment employer has relied on objective data
with any employer made possible by that demonstrate that products made
virtue of the employee’s removal. from or containing MDA are not capa-
(F) Employees who do not recover with- ble of releasing MDA or do not present
in the 6 months of removal. The em- a dermal exposure problem under the
ployer shall take the following meas- expected conditions of processing, use,
ures with respect to any employee re- or handling to exempt such operations
moved from exposure to MDA: from the initial monitoring require-
(1) The employer shall make avail- ments under paragraph (f)(2) of this
able to the employee a medical exam- section, the employer shall establish
ination pursuant to this section to ob- and maintain an accurate record of ob-
tain a final medical determination jective data reasonably relied upon in
with respect to the employee; support of the exemption.
(2) The employer shall assure that
(ii) The record shall include at least
the final medical determination ob-
the following information:
tained indicates whether or not the
(A) The product qualifying for ex-
employee may be returned to his or her
emption;
former job status, and, if not, what
steps should be taken to protect the (B) The source of the objective data;
employee’s health; (C) The testing protocol, results of
(3) Where the final medical deter- testing, and/or analysis of the material
mination has not yet been obtained, or for the release of MDA;
once obtained indicates that the em- (D) A description of the operation ex-
ployee may not yet be returned to his empted and how the data support the
or her former job status, the employer exemption; and
shall continue to provide medical re- (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
moval protection benefits to the em- ations, materials, processing, or em-
ployee until either the employee is re- ployee exposures covered by the ex-
turned to former job status, or a final emption.
medical determination is made that (iii) The employer shall maintain
the employee is incapable of ever safe- this record for the duration of the em-
ly returning to his or her former job ployer’s reliance upon such objective
status; and data.
79
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) (C) Sampling and analytical methods
Where the employer has relied on his- used and evidence of their accuracy;
torical monitoring data that dem- (D) Number, duration, and results of
onstrate that exposures on a particular samples taken;
job will be below the action level to ex- (E) Type of protective devices worn,
empt such operations from the initial if any; and
monitoring requirements under para- (F) Name, social security number,
graph (f)(2) of this section, the em- and exposure of the employees whose
ployer shall establish and maintain an exposures are represented.
accurate record of historical moni- (iii) The employer shall maintain
toring data reasonably relied upon in this record for at least thirty (30)
support of the exception. years, in accordance with 29 CFR
(ii) The record shall include informa- 1910.33.
tion that reflect the following condi- (5) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
tions: ployer shall establish and maintain an
(A) The data upon which judgments accurate record for each employee sub-
are based are scientifically sound and ject to medical surveillance by para-
were collected using methods that are graph (n) of this section, in accordance
sufficiently accurate and precise; with 29 CFR 1910.33.
(B) The processes and work practices (ii) The record shall include at least
that were in use when the historical the following information:
monitoring data were obtained are es- (A) The name and social security
sentially the same as those to be used number of the employee;
during the job for which initial moni- (B) A copy of the employee’s medical
toring will not be performed; examination results, including the
(C) The characteristics of the MDA- medical history, questionnaire re-
containing material being handled sponses, results of any tests, and physi-
when the historical monitoring data cian’s recommendations.
were obtained are the same as those on (C) Physician’s written opinions;
the job for which initial monitoring (D) Any employee medical com-
will not be performed; plaints related to exposure to MDA;
(D) Environmental conditions pre- and
vailing when the historical monitoring (E) A copy of the information pro-
data were obtained are the same as vided to the physician as required by
those on the job for which initial moni- paragraph (n) of this section.
toring will not be performed; and (iii) The employer shall ensure that
(E) Other data relevant to the oper- this record is maintained for the dura-
ations, materials, processing, or em- tion of employment plus thirty (30)
ployee exposures covered by the excep- years, in accordance with 29 CFR
tion. 1910.33.
(iii) The employer shall maintain (iv) A copy of the employee’s medical
this record for the duration of the em- removal and return to work status.
ployer’s reliance upon such historical (6) Training records. The employer
monitoring data. shall maintain all employee training
(3) The employer may utilize the records for one (1) year beyond the last
services of competent organizations date of employment.
such as industry trade associations and (7) Availability. (i) The employer,
employee associations to maintain the upon written request, shall make all
records required by this section. records required to be maintained by
(4) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- this section available to the Assistant
ployer shall keep an accurate record of Secretary and the Director for exam-
all measurements taken to monitor ination and copying.
employee exposure to MDA. (ii) The employer, upon request, shall
(ii) This record shall include at least make any exposure records required by
the following information: paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section
(A) The date of measurement; available for examination and copying
(B) The operation involving exposure to affected employees, former employ-
to MDA; ees, designated representatives, and
80
the Assistant Secretary, in accordance identical to those set forth in Appendix A to

with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)–(e) and (g)–(i). § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
(iii) The employer, upon request,
shall make employee medical records APPENDIX B TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE
required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of TECHNICAL GUIDELINES, MDA
this section available for examination NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
and copying to the subject employee, struction work under this Appendix B are
anyone having the specific written con- identical to those set forth in Appendix B to
sent of the subject employee, and the § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
Assistant Secretary, in accordance
with 29 CFR 1910.33. APPENDIX C TO § 1926.60—MEDICAL
(8) Transfer of records. (i) The em- SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES FOR MDA
ployer shall comply with the require- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
ments concerning transfer of records struction work under this Appendix C are
set forth in 29 CFR 1910.33(h). identical to those set forth in Appendix C to
(ii) Whenever the employer ceases to § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
do business and there is no successor
employer to receive and retain the APPENDIX D TO § 1926.60—SAMPLING AND
records for the prescribed period, the ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR MDA
employer shall notify the Director at MONITORING AND MEASUREMENT
least 90 days prior to disposal and, PROCEDURES
upon request, transmit them to the Di-
rector. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this Appendix D are
(p) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
identical to those set forth in Appendix D to
ployee observation. The employer shall § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
provide affected employees, or their
designated representatives, an oppor- [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57
tunity to observe the measuring or FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
monitoring of employee exposure to 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296,
Jan. 8, 1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR
MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph
1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71
(f) of this section. FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006]
(2) Observation procedures. When ob-
servation of the measuring or moni- § 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings,
toring of employee exposure to MDA placards and labels.
requires entry into areas where the use
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
of protective clothing and equipment
or respirators is required, the employer tical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this
shall provide the observer with per- chapter.
sonal protective clothing and equip-
ment or respirators required to be worn [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
by employees working in the area, as-
sure the use of such clothing and equip- § 1926.62 Lead.
ment or respirators, and require the (a) Scope. This section applies to all
observer to comply with all other ap- construction work where an employee
plicable safety and health procedures. may be occupationally exposed to lead.
(q) Appendices. The information con- All construction work excluded from
tained in appendices A, B, C, and D of coverage in the general industry stand-
this section is not intended, by itself, ard for lead by 29 CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is
to create any additional obligations covered by this standard. Construction
not otherwise imposed by this standard work is defined as work for construc-
nor detract from any existing obligation, alteration and/or repair, including
tion. painting and decorating. It includes
but is not limited to the following:
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE (1) Demolition or salvage of struc-
DATA SHEET, FOR 4–4′ tures where lead or materials con-
METHYLENEDIANILINE taining lead are present;
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (2) Removal or encapsulation of ma-
struction work under this Appendix A are terials containing lead;
81
(3) New construction, alteration, re- (3) When respirators are used to limit
pair, or renovation of structures, sub- employee exposure as required under
strates, or portions thereof, that con- paragraph (c) of this section and all the
tain lead, or materials containing lead; requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and
(4) Installation of products con- (f) of this section have been met, em-
taining lead; ployee exposure may be considered to
(5) Lead contamination/emergency be at the level provided by the protec-
cleanup; tion factor of the respirator for those
(6) Transportation, disposal, storage, periods the respirator is worn. Those
or containment of lead or materials periods may be averaged with exposure
containing lead on the site or location levels during periods when respirators
at which construction activities are are not worn to determine the employ-
performed, and ee’s daily TWA exposure.
(7) Maintenance operations associ- (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General.
ated with the construction activities (i) Each employer who has a workplace
described in this paragraph. or operation covered by this standard
(b) Definitions. shall initially determine if any em-
Action level means employee expo- ployee may be exposed to lead at or
sure, without regard to the use of res- above the action level.
pirators, to an airborne concentration (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d)
of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic of this section, employee exposure is
meter of air (30 µg/m3) calculated as an that exposure which would occur if the
8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). employee were not using a respirator.
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- (iii) With the exception of moni-
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- toring under paragraph (d)(3), where
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- monitoring is required under this sec-
ment of Labor, or designee. tion, the employer shall collect per-
Competent person means one who is sonal samples representative of a full
capable of identifying existing and pre- shift including at least one sample for
dictable lead hazards in the sur- each job classification in each work
roundings or working conditions and area either for each shift or for the
who has authorization to take prompt shift with the highest exposure level.
corrective measures to eliminate them. (iv) Full shift personal samples shall
Director means the Director, National be representative of the monitored em-
Institute for Occupational Safety and ployee’s regular, daily exposure to
Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of lead.
Health and Human Services, or des- (2) Protection of employees during as-
ignee. sessment of exposure. (i) With respect to
Lead means metallic lead, all inor- the lead related tasks listed in para-
ganic lead compounds, and organic lead graph (d)(2)(i) of this section, where
soaps. Excluded from this definition lead is present, until the employer per-
are all other organic lead compounds. forms an employee exposure assess-
This section means this standard. ment as required in paragraph (d) of
(c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The this section and documents that the
employer shall assure that no em- employee performing any of the listed
ployee is exposed to lead at concentra- tasks is not exposed above the PEL,
tions greater than fifty micrograms per the employer shall treat the employee
cubic meter of air (50 µg/m3) averaged as if the employee were exposed above
over an 8-hour period. the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10)
(2) If an employee is exposed to lead times the PEL, and shall implement
for more than 8 hours in any work day employee protective measures pre-
the employees’ allowable exposure, as a scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
time weighted average (TWA) for that section. The tasks covered by this re-
day, shall be reduced according to the quirement are:
following formula:
(A) Where lead containing coatings
Allowable employee exposure (in µg/m3) or paint are present: Manual demoli-
= 400 divided by hours worked in the tion of structures (e.g, dry wall), man-
day. ual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun
82
applications, and power tool cleaning ployee were exposed to lead in excess of
with dust collection systems; 2,500 µg/m3 and shall implement em-
(B) Spray painting with lead paint. ployee protective measures as pre-
(ii) In addition, with regard to tasks scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where section. Where the employer does es-
the employee has any reason to believe tablish that the employee is exposed to
that an employee performing the task levels of lead below 2,500 µg/m3, the em-
may be exposed to lead in excess of the ployer may provide the exposed em-
PEL, until the employer performs an ployee with the appropriate respirator
employee exposure assessment as re- prescribed for use at such lower expo-
quired by paragraph (d) of this section sures, in accordance with Table I of
and documents that the employee’s this section. Interim protection as de-
lead exposure is not above the PEL the scribed in this paragaraph is required
employer shall treat the employee as if where lead containing coatings or
the employee were exposed above the paint are present on structures when
PEL and shall implememt employee performing:
protective measures as prescribed in (A) Abrasive blasting,
paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. (B) Welding,
(iii) With respect to the tasks listed (C) Cutting, and
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section, (D) Torch burning.
where lead is present, until the em- (v) Until the employer performs an
ployer performs an employee exposure employee exposure assessment as re-
assessment as required in paragraph (d) quired under paragraph (d) of this sec-
of this section, and documents that the tion and determines actual employee
employee performing any of the listed exposure, the employer shall provide to
tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 µg/ employees performing the tasks de-
m3, the employer shall treat the em- scribed in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii),
ployee as if the employee were exposed (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section
to lead in excess of 500 µg/m3 and shall with interim protection as follows:
implement employee protective meas- (A) Appropriate respiratory protec-
ures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) tion in accordance with paragraph (f)
of this section. Where the employer of this section.
does establish that the employee is ex- (B) Appropriate personal protective
posed to levels of lead below 500 µg/m3, clothing and equipment in accordance
the employer may provide the exposed with paragraph (g) of this section.
employee with the appropriate res- (C) Change areas in accordance with
pirator prescribed for such use at such paragraph (i)(2) of this section.
lower exposures, in accordance with (D) Hand washing facilities in accord-
Table 1 of this section. The tasks cov- ance with paragraph (i)(5) of this sec-
ered by this requirement are: tion.
(A) Using lead containing mortar; (E) Biological monitoring in accord-
lead burning ance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this sec-
(B) Where lead containing coatings or tion, to consist of blood sampling and
paint are present: rivet busting; power analysis for lead and zinc
tool cleaning without dust collection protoporphyrin levels, and
systems; cleanup activities where dry (F) Training as required under para-
expendable abrasives are used; and ab- graph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding
rasive blasting enclosure movement 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication;
and removal. training as required under paragraph
(iv) With respect to the tasks listed (1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use
in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section, of respirators; and training in accord-
where lead is present, until the em- ance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety train-
ployer performs an employee exposure ing and education.
assessment as required in paragraph (d) (3) Basis of initial determination. (i)
of this section and documents that the Except as provided under paragraphs
employee performing any of the listed (d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section
tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of the employer shall monitor employee
2,500 µg/m3 (50×PEL), the employer exposures and shall base initial deter-
shall treat the employee as if the em- minations on the employee exposure
83
monitoring results and any of the fol- (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this section shows
lowing, relevant considerations: the possibility of any employee expo-
(A) Any information, observations, or sure at or above the action level the
calculations which would indicate em- employer shall conduct monitoring
ployee exposure to lead; which is representative of the exposure
(B) Any previous measurements of for each employee in the workplace
airborne lead; and who is exposed to lead.
(C) Any employee complaints of (ii) Where the employer has pre-
symptoms which may be attributable viously monitored for lead exposure,
to exposure to lead. and the data were obtained within the
(ii) Monitoring for the initial deter- past 12 months during work operations
mination where performed may be lim- conducted under workplace conditions
ited to a representative sample of the
closely resembling the processes, type
exposed employees who the employer
of material, control methods, work
reasonably believes are exposed to the
practices, and environmental condi-
greatest airborne concentrations of
tions used and prevailing in the em-
lead in the workplace.
(iii) Where the employer has pre- ployer’s current operations, the em-
viously monitored for lead exposures, ployer may rely on such earlier moni-
and the data were obtained within the toring results to satisfy the require-
past 12 months during work operations ments of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this sec-
conducted under workplace conditions tion if the sampling and analytical
closely resembling the processes, type methods meet the accuracy and con-
of material, control methods, work fidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of
practices, and environmental condi- this section.
tions used and prevailing in the em- (5) Negative initial determination.
ployer’s current operations, the em- Where a determination, conducted
ployer may rely on such earlier moni- under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of
toring results to satisfy the require- this section is made that no employee
ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) is exposed to airborne concentrations
of this section if the sampling and ana- of lead at or above the action level the
lytical methods meet the accuracy and employer shall make a written record
confidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of of such determination. The record shall
this section. include at least the information speci-
(iv) Where the employer has objec- fied in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this sec-
tive data, demonstrating that a par- tion and shall also include the date of
ticular product or material containing determination, location within the
lead or a specific process, operation or worksite, and the name and social se-
activity involving lead cannot result in curity number of each employee mon-
employee exposure to lead at or above itored.
the action level during processing, use,
(6) Frequency. (i) If the initial deter-
or handling, the employer may rely
mination reveals employee exposure to
upon such data instead of imple-
be below the action level further expo-
menting initial monitoring.
(A) The employer shall establish and sure determination need not be re-
maintain an accurate record docu- peated except as otherwise provided in
menting the nature and relevancy of paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
objective data as specified in paragraph (ii) If the initial determination or
(n)(4) of this section, where used in as- subsequent determination reveals em-
sessing employee exposure in lieu of ployee exposure to be at or above the
exposure monitoring. action level but at or below the PEL
(B) Objective data, as described in the employer shall perform monitoring
paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is in accordance with this paragraph at
not permitted to be used for exposure least every 6 months. The employer
assessment in connection with para- shall continue monitoring at the re-
graph (d)(2) of this section. quired frequency until at least two
(4) Positive initial determination and consecutive measurements, taken at
initial monitoring. (i) Where a deter- least 7 days apart, are below the action
mination conducted under paragraphs level at which time the employer may
84
discontinue monitoring for that em- (9) Accuracy of measurement. The em-
ployee except as otherwise provided in ployer shall use a method of moni-
paragraph (d)(7) of this section. toring and analysis which has an accu-
(iii) If the initial determination re- racy (to a confidence level of 95%) of
veals that employee exposure is above not less than plus or minus 25 percent
the PEL the employer shall perform for airborne concentrations of lead
monitoring quarterly. The employer equal to or greater than 30 µg/m3.
shall continue monitoring at the re- (e) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
quired frequency until at least two neering and work practice controls. The
consecutive measurements, taken at employer shall implement engineering
least 7 days apart, are at or below the and work practice controls, including
PEL but at or above the action level at administrative controls, to reduce and
which time the employer shall repeat maintain employee exposure to lead to
monitoring for that employee at the or below the permissible exposure limit
frequency specified in paragraph to the extent that such controls are
(d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as oth- feasible. Wherever all feasible engi-
erwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of neering and work practices controls
this section. The employer shall con- that can be instituted are not suffi-
tinue monitoring at the required fre- cient to reduce employee exposure to
quency until at least two consecutive or below the permissible exposure limit
measurements, taken at least 7 days prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec-
apart, are below the action level at tion, the employer shall nonetheless
which time the employer may dis- use them to reduce employee exposure
continue monitoring for that employee to the lowest feasible level and shall
except as otherwise provided in para- supplement them by the use of res-
graph (d)(7) of this section. piratory protection that complies with
the requirements of paragraph (f) of
(7) Additional exposure assessments.
this section.
Whenever there has been a change of
(2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to
equipment, process, control, personnel
commencement of the job each em-
or a new task has been initiated that
ployer shall establish and implement a
may result in additional employees
written compliance program to achieve
being exposed to lead at or above the compliance with paragraph (c) of this
action level or may result in employees section.
already exposed at or above the action (ii) Written plans for these compli-
level being exposed above the PEL, the ance programs shall include at least
employer shall conduct additional the following:
monitoring in accordance with this (A) A description of each activity in
paragraph. which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment
(8) Employee notification. (i) The em- used, material involved, controls in
ployer must, as soon as possible but no place, crew size, employee job respon-
later than 5 working days after the re- sibilities, operating procedures and
ceipt of the results of any monitoring maintenance practices;
performed under this section, notify (B) A description of the specific
each affected employee of these results means that will be employed to achieve
either individually in writing or by compliance and, where engineering
posting the results in an appropriate controls are required engineering plans
location that is accessible to employ- and studies used to determine methods
ees. selected for controlling exposure to
(ii) Whenever the results indicate lead;
that the representative employee expo- (C) A report of the technology consid-
sure, without regard to respirators, is ered in meeting the PEL;
at or above the PEL the employer shall (D) Air monitoring data which docu-
include in the written notice a statements the source of lead emissions;
ment that the employees exposure was (E) A detailed schedule for implemen-
at or above that level and a description tation of the program, including docu-
of the corrective action taken or to be mentation such as copies of purchase
taken to reduce exposure to below that orders for equipment, construction
level. contracts, etc.;
85
(F) A work practice program which (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General.

includes items required under para- For employees who use respirators re-
graphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section quired by this section, the employer
and incorporates other relevant work must provide respirators that comply
practices such as those specified in with the requirements of this para-
paragraph (e)(5) of this section; graph. Respirators must be used dur-
(G) An administrative control sched- ing:
ule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this (i) Periods when an employee’s expo-
section, if applicable; sure to lead exceeds the PEL.
(H) A description of arrangements (ii) Work operations for which engi-
made among contractors on multi-con- neering and work-practice controls are
tractor sites with respect to informing not sufficient to reduce employee expo-
affected employees of potential exposures to or below the PEL.
sure to lead and with respect to respon- (iii) Periods when an employee re-
sibility for compliance with this sec- quests a respirator.
tion as set-forth in § 1926.16. (iv) Periods when respirators are re-
(I) Other relevant information. quired to provide interim protection of
(iii) The compliance program shall employees while they perform the op-
provide for frequent and regular inspec- erations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
tions of job sites, materials, and equip- this section.
ment to be made by a competent per- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em-
son. ployer must implement a respiratory
protection program in accordance with
(iv) Written programs shall be sub-
29 CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except
mitted upon request to any affected
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m).
employee or authorized employee rep-
(ii) If an employee has breathing dif-
resentatives, to the Assistant Sec-
ficulty during fit testing or respirator
retary and the Director, and shall be
use, the employer must provide the em-
available at the worksite for examina-
ployee with a medical examination in
tion and copying by the Assistant Sec-
accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)
retary and the Director.
of this section to determine whether or
(v) Written programs must be revised
not the employee can use a respirator
and updated at least annually to re-
while performing the required duty.
flect the current status of the program.
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers
(3) Mechanical ventilation. When ven- must:
tilation is used to control lead expo- (A) Select, and provide to employees,
sure, the employer shall evaluate the the appropriate respirators specified in
mechanical performance of the system paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR
in controlling exposure as necessary to 1910.134.
maintain its effectiveness. (B) Provide employees with a full
(4) Administrative controls. If adminis- facepiece respirator instead of a half
trative controls are used as a means of mask respirator for protection against
reducing employees TWA exposure to lead aerosols that may cause eye or
lead, the employer shall establish and skin irritation at the use concentra-
implement a job rotation schedule tions.
which includes: (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered
(i) Name or identification number of and non-powered air-purifying res-
each affected employee; pirators.
(ii) Duration and exposure levels at (ii) The employer must provide a
each job or work station where each af- powered air-purifying respirator when
fected employee is located; and an employee chooses to use such a res-
(iii) Any other information which pirator and it will provide adequate
may be useful in assessing the reli- protection to the employee.
ability of administrative controls to (g) Protective work clothing and equip-
reduce exposure to lead. ment—(1) Provision and use. Where an
(5) The employer shall ensure that, to employee is exposed to lead above the
the extent relevant, employees follow PEL without regard to the use of res-
good work practices such as described pirators, where employees are exposed
in Appendix B of this section. to lead compounds which may cause
86
skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arse- Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead.
nate, lead azide), and as interim pro- Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking.
tection for employees performing tasks Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in
accordance with applicable local, state, or
as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this
federal regulations.
section, the employer shall provide at
no cost to the employee and assure (viii) The employer shall prohibit the
that the employee uses appropriate removal of lead from protective cloth-
protective work clothing and equip- ing or equipment by blowing, shaking,
ment that prevents contamination of or any other means which disperses
the employee and the employee’s gar- lead into the air.
ments such as, but not limited to: (h) Housekeeping—(1) All surfaces
(i) Coveralls or similar full-body shall be maintained as free as prac-
work clothing; ticable of accumulations of lead.
(ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or dispos- (2) Clean-up of floors and other sur-
able shoe coverlets; and faces where lead accumulates shall
(iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or wherever possible, be cleaned by
other appropriate protective equip- vacuuming or other methods that min-
ment which complies with § 1910.133 of imize the likelihood of lead becoming
this chapter. airborne.
(2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The (3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping,
employer shall provide the protective and brushing may be used only where
clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of vacuuming or other equally effective
this section in a clean and dry condi- methods have been tried and found not
tion at least weekly, and daily to em- to be effective.
ployees whose exposure levels without (4) Where vacuuming methods are se-
regard to a respirator are over 200 µg/ lected, the vacuums shall be equipped
m3 of lead as an 8-hour TWA. with HEPA filters and used and
(ii) The employer shall provide for emptied in a manner which minimizes
the cleaning, laundering, and disposal the reentry of lead into the workplace.
of protective clothing and equipment (5) Compressed air shall not be used
required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec- to remove lead from any surface unless
tion. the compressed air is used in conjunc-
(iii) The employer shall repair or re- tion with a ventilation system de-
place required protective clothing and signed to capture the airborne dust cre-
equipment as needed to maintain their ated by the compressed air.
effectiveness. (i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1)
(iv) The employer shall assure that The employer shall assure that in areas
all protective clothing is removed at where employees are exposed to lead
the completion of a work shift only in above the PEL without regard to the
change areas provided for that purpose use of respirators, food or beverage is
as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this not present or consumed, tobacco prod-
section. ucts are not present or used, and cos-
(v) The employer shall assure that metics are not applied.
contaminated protective clothing (2) Change areas. (i) The employer
which is to be cleaned, laundered, or shall provide clean change areas for
disposed of, is placed in a closed con- employees whose airborne exposure to
tainer in the change area which pre- lead is above the PEL, and as interim
vents dispersion of lead outside the protection for employees performing
container. tasks as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
(vi) The employer shall inform in this section, without regard to the use
writing any person who cleans or laun- of respirators.
ders protective clothing or equipment (ii) The employer shall assure that
of the potentially harmful effects of exchange areas are equipped with sepa-
posure to lead. rate storage facilities for protective
(vii) The employer shall assure that work clothing and equipment and for
the containers of contaminated protec- street clothes which prevent cross-con-
tive clothing and equipment required tamination.
by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section (iii) The employer shall assure that
are labeled as follows: employees do not leave the workplace
87
wearing any protective clothing or cordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and

equipment that is required to be worn (j)(3) of this section for all employees
during the work shift. who are or may be exposed by the em-
(3) Showers. (i) The employer shall ployer at or above the action level for
provide shower facilities, where fea- more than 30 days in any consecutive
sible, for use by employees whose air- 12 months;
borne exposure to lead is above the (iii) The employer shall assure that
PEL. all medical examinations and proce-
(ii) The employer shall assure, where dures are performed by or under the su-
shower facilities are available, that pervision of a licensed physician.
employees shower at the end of the (iv) The employer shall make avail-
work shift and shall provide an ade- able the required medical surveillance
quate supply of cleansing agents and including multiple physician review
towels for use by affected employees. under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost
(4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer to employees and at a reasonable time
shall provide lunchroom facilities or and place.
eating areas for employees whose air- (2) Biological monitoring—(i) Blood lead
borne exposure to lead is above the and ZPP level sampling and analysis.
PEL, without regard to the use of res- The employer shall make available bio-
pirators. logical monitoring in the form of blood
(ii) The employer shall assure that sampling and analysis for lead and zinc
lunchroom facilities or eating areas protoporphyrin levels to each employee
are as free as practicable from lead covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and
contamination and are readily acces- (ii) of this section on the following
sible to employees. schedule:
(iii) The employer shall assure that (A) For each employee covered under
employees whose airborne exposure to paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at
lead is above the PEL, without regard least every 2 months for the first 6
to the use of a respirator, wash their months and every 6 months thereafter;
hands and face prior to eating, drink- (B) For each employee covered under
ing, smoking or applying cosmetics. paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this sec-
(iv) The employer shall assure that tion whose last blood sampling and
employees do not enter lunchroom fa- analysis indicated a blood lead level at
cilities or eating areas with protective or above 40 µg/dl, at least every two
work clothing or equipment unless sur- months. This frequency shall continue
face lead dust has been removed by until two consecutive blood samples
vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other and analyses indicate a blood lead level
cleaning method that limits dispersion below 40 µg/dl; and
of lead dust. (C) For each employee who is re-
(5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The em- moved from exposure to lead due to an
ployer shall provide adequate elevated blood lead level at least
handwashing facilities for use by em- monthly during the removal period.
ployees exposed to lead in accordance (ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests.
with 29 CFR 1926.51(f). Whenever the results of a blood lead
(ii) Where showers are not provided level test indicate that an employee’s
the employer shall assure that employ- blood lead level exceeds the numerical
ees wash their hands and face at the criterion for medical removal under
end of the work-shift. paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the
(j) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i) employer shall provide a second (fol-
The employer shall make available ini- low-up) blood sampling test within two
tial medical surveillance to employees weeks after the employer receives the
occupationally exposed on any day to results of the first blood sampling test.
lead at or above the action level. Ini- (iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sam-
tial medical surveillance consists of bi- pling and analysis. Blood lead level
ological monitoring in the form of sampling and analysis provided pursu-
blood sampling and analysis for lead ant to this section shall have an accu-
and zinc protoporphyrin levels. racy (to a confidence level of 95 per-
(ii) The employer shall institute a cent) within plus or minus 15 percent
medical surveillance program in ac- or 6 µg/dl, whichever is greater, and
88
shall be conducted by a laboratory ap- (A) A detailed work history and a

proved by OSHA. medical history, with particular atten-
(iv) Employee notification. (A) Within tion to past lead exposure (occupa-
five working days after the receipt of tional and non-occupational), personal
biological monitoring results, the em- habits (smoking, hygiene), and past
ployer shall notify each employee in gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal,
writing of his or her blood lead level; cardiovascular, reproductive and neu-
and rological problems;
(B) The employer shall notify each (B) A thorough physical examination,
employee whose blood lead level ex- with particular attention to teeth,
ceeds 40 µg/dl that the standard re- gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal,
quires temporary medical removal renal, cardiovascular, and neurological
with Medical Removal Protection ben- systems. Pulmonary status should be
efits when an employee’s blood lead evaluated if respiratory protection will
level exceeds the numerical criterion be used;
for medical removal under paragraph (C) A blood pressure measurement;
(k)(1)(i) of this section. (D) A blood sample and analysis
(3) Medical examinations and consulta- which determines:
tions—(i) Frequency. The employer shall (1) Blood lead level;
make available medical examinations (2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter-
and consultations to each employee minations, red cell indices, and exam-
covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of ination of peripheral smear mor-
this section on the following schedule: phology;
(A) At least annually for each em- (3) Zinc protoporphyrin;
ployee for whom a blood sampling test (4) Blood urea nitrogen; and,
conducted at any time during the pre- (5) Serum creatinine;
ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead (E) A routine urinalysis with micro-
level at or above 40 µg/dl; scopic examination; and
(B) As soon as possible, upon notifi- (F) Any laboratory or other test rel-
cation by an employee either that the evant to lead exposure which the exam-
employee has developed signs or symp- ining physician deems necessary by
toms commonly associated with lead sound medical practice.
intoxication, that the employee desires (iii) Multiple physician review mecha-
medical advice concerning the effects nism. (A) If the employer selects the
of current or past exposure to lead on initial physician who conducts any
the employee’s ability to procreate a medical examination or consultation
healthy child, that the employee is provided to an employee under this sec-
pregnant, or that the employee has tion, the employee may designate a
demonstrated difficulty in breathing second physician:
during a respirator fitting test or dur- (1) To review any findings, deter-
ing use; and minations or recommendations of the
(C) As medically appropriate for each initial physician; and
employee either removed from expo- (2) To conduct such examinations,
sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining consultations, and laboratory tests as
material impairment to health, or oth- the second physician deems necessary
erwise limited pursuant to a final med- to facilitate this review.
ical determination. (B) The employer shall promptly no-
(ii) Content. The content of medical tify an employee of the right to seek a
examinations made available pursuant second medical opinion after each oc-
to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)–(C) of this sec- casion that an initial physician con-
tion shall be determined by an exam- ducts a medical examination or con-
ining physician and, if requested by an sultation pursuant to this section. The
employee, shall include pregnancy employer may condition its participa-
testing or laboratory evaluation of tion in, and payment for, the multiple
male fertility. Medical examinations physician review mechanism upon the
made available pursuant to paragraph employee doing the following within
(j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include fifteen (15) days after receipt of the
the following elements: foregoing notification, or receipt of the
89
initial physician’s written opinion, (6) All prior written medical opinions
whichever is later: concerning the employee in the em-
(1) The employee informing the employer’s possession or control.
ployer that he or she intends to seek a (B) The employer shall provide the
second medical opinion, and foregoing information to a second or
(2) The employee initiating steps to third physician conducting a medical
make an appointment with a second examination or consultation under this
physician. section upon request either by the sec-
(C) If the findings, determinations or ond or third physician, or by the em-
recommendations of the second physi- ployee.
cian differ from those of the initial (v) Written medical opinions. (A) The
physician, then the employer and the employer shall obtain and furnish the
employee shall assure that efforts are employee with a copy of a written med-
made for the two physicians to resolve ical opinion from each examining or
any disagreement. consulting physician which contains
(D) If the two physicians have been only the following information:
unable to quickly resolve their dis- (1) The physician’s opinion as to
agreement, then the employer and the whether the employee has any detected
employee through their respective phy- medical condition which would place
sicians shall designate a third physi- the employee at increased risk of ma-
cian: terial impairment of the employee’s
(1) To review any findings, deter- health from exposure to lead;
minations or recommendations of the (2) Any recommended special protec-
prior physicians; and tive measures to be provided to the em-
ployee, or limitations to be placed
(2) To conduct such examinations,
upon the employee’s exposure to lead;
consultations, laboratory tests and dis-
cussions with the prior physicians as (3) Any recommended limitation
the third physician deems necessary to upon the employee’s use of respirators,
including a determination of whether
resolve the disagreement of the prior
the employee can wear a powered air
physicians.
purifying respirator if a physician de-
(E) The employer shall act consistent termines that the employee cannot
with the findings, determinations and wear a negative pressure respirator;
recommendations of the third physi- and
cian, unless the employer and the em-
(4) The results of the blood lead de-
ployee reach an agreement which is terminations.
otherwise consistent with the rec-
(B) The employer shall instruct each
ommendations of at least one of the
examining and consulting physician to:
three physicians.
(1) Not reveal either in the written
(iv) Information provided to examining
opinion or orally, or in any other
and consulting physicians. (A) The em- means of communication with the em-
ployer shall provide an initial physi- ployer, findings, including laboratory
cian conducting a medical examination results, or diagnoses unrelated to an
or consultation under this section with employee’s occupational exposure to
the following information: lead; and
(1) A copy of this regulation for lead (2) Advise the employee of any med-
including all Appendices; ical condition, occupational or non-
(2) A description of the affected em- occupational, which dictates further
ployee’s duties as they relate to the medical examination or treatment.
employee’s exposure; (vi) Alternate physician determination
(3) The employee’s exposure level or mechanisms. The employer and an em-
anticipated exposure level to lead and ployee or authorized employee rep-
to any other toxic substance (if appli- resentative may agree upon the use of
cable); any alternate physician determination
(4) A description of any personal pro- mechanism in lieu of the multiple phy-
tective equipment used or to be used; sician review mechanism provided by
(5) Prior blood lead determinations; paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of this section so
and long as the alternate mechanism is as
90
expeditious and protective as the re- (iii) Return of the employee to former
quirements contained in this para- job status. (A) The employer shall re-
graph. turn an employee to his or her former
(4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall job status:
assure that any person whom he re- (1) For an employee removed due to a
tains, employs, supervises or controls blood lead level at or above 50 µg/dl
does not engage in prophylactic chela- when two consecutive blood sampling
tion of any employee at any time. tests indicate that the employee’s
(ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic che- blood lead level is at or below 40 µg/dl;
lation is to be performed by any person (2) For an employee removed due to a
in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, final medical determination, when a
the employer shall assure that it be subsequent final medical determina-
done under the supervision of a lition results in a medical finding, deter-
censed physician in a clinical setting mination, or opinion that the employee
with thorough and appropriate medical no longer has a detected medical condi-
monitoring and that the employee is tion which places the employee at in-
notified in writing prior to its occur- creased risk of material impairment to
rence. health from exposure to lead.
(k) Medical removal protection—(1) (B) For the purposes of this section,
Temporary medical removal and return of the requirement that an employer re-
an employee—(i) Temporary removal due turn an employee to his or her former
to elevated blood lead level. The em- job status is not intended to expand
ployer shall remove an employee from upon or restrict any rights an em-
work having an exposure to lead at or ployee has or would have had, absent
above the action level on each occasion temporary medical removal, to a spe-
that a periodic and a follow-up blood cific job classification or position
sampling test conducted pursuant to under the terms of a collective bar-
this section indicate that the employ- gaining agreement.
ee’s blood lead level is at or above 50 (iv) Removal of other employee special
µg/dl; and, protective measure or limitations. The
(ii) Temporary removal due to a final employer shall remove any limitations
medical determination. (A) The employer placed on an employee or end any spe-
shall remove an employee from work cial protective measures provided to an
having an exposure to lead at or above employee pursuant to a final medical
the action level on each occasion that determination when a subsequent final
a final medical determination results medical determination indicates that
in a medical finding, determination, or the limitations or special protective
opinion that the employee has a de- measures are no longer necessary.
tected medical condition which places (v) Employer options pending a final
the employee at increased risk of ma- medical determination. Where the mul-
terial impairment to health from expo- tiple physician review mechanism, or
sure to lead. alternate medical determination mech-
(B) For the purposes of this section, anism used pursuant to the medical
the phrase final medical determination surveillance provisions of this section,
means the written medical opinion on has not yet resulted in a final medical
the employees’ health status by the ex- determination with respect to an em-
amining physician or, where relevant, ployee, the employer shall act as fol-
the outcome of the multiple physician lows:
review mechanism or alternate medical (A) Removal. The employer may re-
determination mechanism used pursu- move the employee from exposure to
ant to the medical surveillance provi- lead, provide special protective meas-
sions of this section. ures to the employee, or place limita-
(C) Where a final medical determinations upon the employee, consistent
tion results in any recommended spe- with the medical findings, determina-
cial protective measures for an em- tions, or recommendations of any of
ployee, or limitations on an employee’s the physicians who have reviewed the
exposure to lead, the employer shall employee’s health status.
implement and act consistent with the (B) Return. The employer may return
recommendation. the employee to his or her former job
91
status, end any special protective ical removal protection benefits pend-
measures provided to the employee, ing disposition of the claim. To the ex-
and remove any limitations placed tent that an award is made to the em-
upon the employee, consistent with the ployee for earnings lost during the pe-
medical findings, determinations, or riod of removal, the employer’s med-
recommendations of any of the physi- ical removal protection obligation
cians who have reviewed the employ- shall be reduced by such amount. The
ee’s health status, with two exceptions. employer shall receive no credit for
(1) If the initial removal, special pro- workers’ compensation payments re-
tection, or limitation of the employee ceived by the employee for treatment-
resulted from a final medical deter- related expenses.
mination which differed from the find- (v) Other credits. The employer’s obli-
ings, determinations, or recommenda- gation to provide medical removal pro-
tions of the initial physician or; tection benefits to a removed employee
(2) If the employee has been on re- shall be reduced to the extent that the
moval status for the preceding eight- employee receives compensation for
een months due to an elevated blood earnings lost during the period of re-
lead level, then the employer shall moval either from a publicly or em-
await a final medical determination. ployer-funded compensation program,
(2) Medical removal protection bene- or receives income from employment
fits—(i) Provision of medical removal pro- with another employer made possible
tection benefits. The employer shall pro- by virtue of the employee’s removal.
vide an employee up to eighteen (18) (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of
months of medical removal protection an employee. Where an employer, al-
benefits on each occasion that an em- though not required by this section to
ployee is removed from exposure to do so, removes an employee from expo-
lead or otherwise limited pursuant to sure to lead or otherwise places limita-
this section. tions on an employee due to the effects
(ii) Definition of medical removal proof lead exposure on the employee’s
tection benefits. For the purposes of this medical condition, the employer shall
section, the requirement that an em- provide medical removal protection
ployer provide medical removal protec- benefits to the employee equal to that
tion benefits means that, as long as the required by paragraph (k)(2) (i) and (ii)
job the employee was removed from of this section.
continues, the employer shall maintain (l) Employee information and training—
the total normal earnings, seniority (1) General. (i) The employer shall com-
and other employment rights and bene- municate information concerning lead
fits of an employee, including the em- hazards according to the requirements
ployee’s right to his or her former job of OSHA’s Hazard Communication
status as though the employee had not Standard for the construction indus-
been medically removed from the em- try, 29 CFR 1926.59, including but not
ployee’s job or otherwise medically limited to the requirements concerning
limited. warning signs and labels, material safe-
(iii) Follow-up medical surveillance ty data sheets (MSDS), and employee
during the period of employee removal or information and training. In addition,
limitation. During the period of time employers shall comply with the fol-
that an employee is medically removed lowing requirements:
from his or her job or otherwise medi- (ii) For all employees who are subject
cally limited, the employer may condi- to exposure to lead at or above the ac-
tion the provision of medical removal tion level on any day or who are sub-
protection benefits upon the employ- ject to exposure to lead compounds
ee’s participation in follow-up medical which may cause skin or eye irritation
surveillance made available pursuant (e.g. lead arsenate, lead azide), the em-
to this section. ployer shall provide a training program
(iv) Workers’ compensation claims. If a in accordance with paragraph (l)(2) of
removed employee files a claim for this section and assure employee par-
workers’ compensation payments for a ticipation.
lead-related disability, then the em- (iii) The employer shall provide the
ployer shall continue to provide med- training program as initial training
92
prior to the time of job assignment or (m) Signs—(1) General. (i) The em-
prior to the start up date for this re- ployer may use signs required by other
quirement, whichever comes last. statutes, regulations or ordinances in
(iv) The employer shall also provide addition to, or in combination with,
the training program at least annually signs required by this paragraph.
for each employee who is subject to (ii) The employer shall assure that no
lead exposure at or above the action statement appears on or near any sign
level on any day. required by this paragraph which con-
(2) Training program. The employer tradicts or detracts from the meaning
shall assure that each employee is of the required sign.
trained in the following: (2) Signs. (i) The employer shall post
(i) The content of this standard and the following warning signs in each
its appendices; work area where an employees expo-
sure to lead is above the PEL.
(ii) The specific nature of the oper-
ations which could result in exposure WARNING
to lead above the action level; LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
(iii) The purpose, proper selection, NO SMOKING OR EATING
fitting, use, and limitations of res-
pirators; (ii) The employer shall assure that
(iv) The purpose and a description of signs required by this paragraph are il-
the medical surveillance program, and luminated and cleaned as necessary so
the medical removal protection pro- that the legend is readily visible.
gram including information concerning (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure assess-
the adverse health effects associated ment. (i) The employer shall establish
with excessive exposure to lead (with and maintain an accurate record of all
particular attention to the adverse re- monitoring and other data used in con-
productive effects on both males and ducting employee exposure assess-
females and hazards to the fetus and ments as required in paragraph (d) of
additional precautions for employees this section.
who are pregnant); (ii) Exposure monitoring records
shall include:
(v) The engineering controls and
(A) The date(s), number, duration, lo-
work practices associated with the em-
cation and results of each of the sam-
ployee’s job assignment including
ples taken if any, including a descrip-
training of employees to follow rel-
tion of the sampling procedure used to
evant good work practices described in
determine representative employee ex-
Appendix B of this section;
posure where applicable;
(vi) The contents of any compliance (B) A description of the sampling and
plan in effect; analytical methods used and evidence
(vii) Instructions to employees that of their accuracy;
chelating agents should not routinely (C) The type of respiratory protective
be used to remove lead from their bod- devices worn, if any;
ies and should not be used at all except (D) Name, social security number,
under the direction of a licensed physi- and job classification of the employee
cian; and monitored and of all other employees
(viii) The employee’s right of access whose exposure the measurement is in-
to records under 29 CFR 1910.20. tended to represent; and
(3) Access to information and training (E) The environmental variables that
materials. (i) The employer shall make could affect the measurement of em-
readily available to all affected employee exposure.
ployees a copy of this standard and its (iii) The employer shall maintain
appendices. monitoring and other exposure assess-
(ii) The employer shall provide, upon ment records in accordance with the
request, all materials relating to the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
employee information and training (2) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
program to affected employees and ployer shall establish and maintain an
their designated representatives, and accurate record for each employee sub-
to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- ject to medical surveillance as required
rector. by paragraph (j) of this section.
93
(ii) This record shall include: particular product or material con-

(A) The name, social security num- taining lead or a specific process, oper-
ber, and description of the duties of the ation, or activity involving lead cannot
employee; release dust or fumes in concentrations
(B) A copy of the physician’s written at or above the action level under any
opinions; expected conditions of use. Objective
(C) Results of any airborne exposure data can be obtained from an industry-
monitoring done on or for that em- wide study or from laboratory product
ployee and provided to the physician; test results from manufacturers of lead
and containing products or materials. The
(D) Any employee medical com- data the employer uses from an indus-
plaints related to exposure to lead. try-wide survey must be obtained
(iii) The employer shall keep, or as- under workplace conditions closely re-
sure that the examining physician sembling the processes, types of mate-
keeps, the following medical records: rial, control methods, work practices
(A) A copy of the medical examina- and environmental conditions in the
tion results including medical and employer’s current operations.
work history required under paragraph (ii) The employer shall maintain the
(j) of this section; record of the objective data relied upon
(B) A description of the laboratory for at least 30 years.
procedures and a copy of any standards (5) Availability. The employer shall
or guidelines used to interpret the test make available upon request all
results or references to that informa- records required to be maintained by
tion; paragraph (n) of this section to affected
(C) A copy of the results of biological employees, former employees, and
monitoring. their designated representatives, and
(iv) The employer shall maintain or to the Assistant Secretary and the Di-
assure that the physician maintains
rector for examination and copying.
medical records in accordance with the
(6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever
provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
the employer ceases to do business, the
(3) Medical removals. (i) The employer
shall establish and maintain an accu- successor employer shall receive and
rate record for each employee removed retain all records required to be main-
from current exposure to lead pursuant tained by paragraph (n) of this section.
to paragraph (k) of this section. (ii) Whenever the employer ceases to
(ii) Each record shall include: do business and there is no successor
(A) The name and social security employer to receive and retain the
number of the employee; records required to be maintained by
(B) The date of each occasion that this section for the prescribed period,
the employee was removed from cur- these records shall be transmitted to
rent exposure to lead as well as the the Director.
corresponding date on which the em- (iii) At the expiration of the reten-
ployee was returned to his or her tion period for the records required to
former job status; be maintained by this section, the em-
(C) A brief explanation of how each ployer shall notify the Director at
removal was or is being accomplished; least 3 months prior to the disposal of
and such records and shall transmit those
(D) A statement with respect to each records to the Director if requested
removal indicating whether or not the within the period.
reason for the removal was an elevated (iv) The employer shall also comply
blood lead level. with any additional requirements in-
(iii) The employer shall maintain volving transfer of records set forth in
each medical removal record for at 29 CFR 1910.33(h).
least the duration of an employee’s em- (o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
ployment. ployee observation. The employer shall
(4) Objective data for exemption from re- provide affected employees or their
quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For designated representatives an oppor-
purposes of this section, objective data tunity to observe any monitoring of
are information demonstrating that a employee exposure to lead conducted
94
pursuant to paragraph (d) of this sec- sites, and maintenance operations associated
tion. with construction activities.
(2) Observation procedures. (i) When- D. Permissible exposure: The permissible ex-
posure limit (PEL) set by the standard is 50
ever observation of the monitoring of
micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50
employee exposure to lead requires µg/m3), averaged over an 8-hour workday.
entry into an area where the use of res- E. Action level: The interim final standard
pirators, protective clothing or equip- establishes an action level of 30 micrograms
ment is required, the employer shall of lead per cubic meter of air (30 µg/m3), aver-
provide the observer with and assure aged over an 8-hour workday. The action
the use of such respirators, clothing level triggers several ancillary provisions of
and equipment, and shall require the the standard such as exposure monitoring,
medical surveillance, and training.
observer to comply with all other ap-
plicable safety and health procedures. II. Health Hazard Data
(ii) Without interfering with the
A. Ways in which lead enters your body.
monitoring, observers shall be entitled When absorbed into your body in certain
to: doses, lead is a toxic substance. The object of
(A) Receive an explanation of the the lead standard is to prevent absorption of
measurement procedures; harmful quantities of lead. The standard is
(B) Observe all steps related to the intended to protect you not only from the
monitoring of lead performed at the immediate toxic effects of lead, but also
place of exposure; and from the serious toxic effects that may not
become apparent until years of exposure
(C) Record the results obtained or re-
have passed. Lead can be absorbed into your
ceive copies of the results when re- body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion
turned by the laboratory. (eating). Lead (except for certain organic
(p) Appendices. The information con- lead compounds not covered by the standard,
tained in the appendices to this section such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed
is not intended by itself, to create any through your skin. When lead is scattered in
additional obligations not otherwise the air as a dust, fume respiratory tract. In-
imposed by this standard nor detract halation of airborne lead is generally the
most important source of occupational lead
from any existing obligation.
absorption. You can also absorb lead through
your digestive system if lead gets into your
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.62—SUBSTANCE
mouth and is swallowed. If you handle food,
DATA SHEET FOR OCCUPATIONAL EX- cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up
POSURE TO LEAD which have lead on them or handle them
with hands contaminated with lead, this will
I. Substance Identification
contribute to ingestion. A significant por-
A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a heavy tion of the lead that you inhale or ingest
metal at room temperature and pressure and gets into your blood stream. Once in your
is a basic chemical element. It can combine blood stream, lead is circulated throughout
with various other substances to form nu- your body and stored in various organs and
merous lead compounds. body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly fil-
B. Compounds covered by the standard: The tered out of your body and excreted, but
word lead when used in this interim final some remains in the blood and other tissues.
standard means elemental lead, all inorganic As exposure to lead continues, the amount
lead compounds and a class of organic lead stored in your body will increase if you are
compounds called lead soaps. This standard absorbing more lead than your body is ex-
does not apply to other organic lead com- creting. Even though you may not be aware
pounds. of any immediate symptoms of disease, this
C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in several lead stored in your tissues can be slowly
different occupations in the construction in- causing irreversible damage, first to indi-
dustry, including demolition or salvage of vidual cells, then to your organs and whole
structures where lead or lead-containing ma- body systems.
terials are present; removal or encapsulation B. Effects of overexposure to lead—(1) Short
of lead-containing materials, new construc- term (acute) overexposure. Lead is a potent,
tion, alteration, repair, or renovation of systemic poison that serves no known useful
structures that contain lead or materials function once absorbed by your body. Taken
containing lead; installation of products con- in large enough doses, lead can kill you in a
taining lead. In addition, there are construc- matter of days. A condition affecting the
tion related activities where exposure to brain called acute encephalopathy may arise
lead may occur, including transportation, which develops quickly to seizures, coma,
disposal, storage, or containment of lead or and death from cardiorespiratory arrest. A
materials containing lead on construction short term dose of lead can lead to acute
95
encephalopathy. Short term occupational ex- ents either one of whom were exposed to ex-
posures of this magnitude are highly un- cess lead levels are more likely to have birth
usual, but not impossible. Similar forms of defects, mental retardation, behavioral dis-
encephalopathy may, however, arise from ex- orders or die during the first year of child-
tended, chronic exposure to lower doses of hood. Overexposure to lead also disrupts the
lead. There is no sharp dividing line between blood-forming system resulting in decreased
rapidly developing acute effects of lead, and hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that
chronic effects which take longer to acquire. carries oxygen to the cells) and ultimately
Lead adversely affects numerous body sys- anemia. Anemia is characterized by weak-
tems, and causes forms of health impairment ness, pallor and fatigability as a result of de-
and disease which arise after periods of expo- creased oxygen carrying capacity in the
sure as short as days or as long as several blood.
years. (3) Health protection goals of the standard.
(2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Chron- Prevention of adverse health effects for most
ic overexposure to lead may result in severe workers from exposure to lead throughout a
damage to your blood-forming, nervous, uri- working lifetime requires that a worker’s
nary and reproductive systems. Some com- blood lead level (BLL, also expressed as PbB)
mon symptoms of chronic overexposure in- be maintained at or below forty micrograms
clude loss of appetite, metallic taste in the per deciliter of whole blood (40 µg/dl). The
mouth, anxiety, constipation, nausea, pallor, blood lead levels of workers (both male and
excessive tiredness, weakness, insomnia, female workers) who intend to have children
headache, nervous irritability, muscle and should be maintained below 30 µg/dl to mini-
joint pain or soreness, fine tremors, numb- mize adverse reproductive health effects to
ness, dizziness, hyperactivity and colic. In the parents and to the developing fetus. The
lead colic there may be severe abdominal measurement of your blood lead level (BLL)
pain. Damage to the central nervous system is the most useful indicator of the amount of
in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead
particular is one of the most severe forms of levels are most often reported in units of
lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal, milligrams (mg) or micrograms (µg) of lead
form of encephalopathy may be preceded by (1 mg=1000 µg) per 100 grams (100g), 100 milli-
vomiting, a feeling of dullness progressing to liters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. These
drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, rest- three units are essentially the same. Some-
lessness, irritability, tremor, and convul- time BLLs are expressed in the form of mg%
sions. It may arise suddenly with the onset or µg%. This is a shorthand notation for 100g,
of seizures, followed by coma, and death. 100 ml, or dl. (References to BLL measure-
There is a tendency for muscular weakness ments in this standard are expressed in the
to develop at the same time. This weakness form of µg/dl.)
may progress to paralysis often observed as BLL measurements show the amount of
a characteristic ‘‘wrist drop’’ or ‘‘foot drop’’ lead circulating in your blood stream, but do
and is a manifestation of a disease to the not give any information about the amount
nervous system called peripheral neurop- of lead stored in your various tissues. BLL
athy. Chronic overexposure to lead also re- measurements merely show current absorp-
sults in kidney disease with few, if any, tion of lead, not the effect that lead is hav-
symptoms appearing until extensive and ing on your body or the effects that past lead
most likely permanent kidney damage has exposure may have already caused. Past re-
occurred. Routine laboratory tests reveal the search into lead-related diseases, however,
presence of this kidney disease only after has focused heavily on associations between
about two-thirds of kidney function is lost. BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your
When overt symptoms of urinary dysfunc- BLL is an important indicator of the likeli-
tion arise, it is often too late to correct or hood that you will gradually acquire a lead-
prevent worsening conditions, and progres- related health impairment or disease.
sion to kidney dialysis or death is possible. Once your blood lead level climbs above 40
Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the re- µg/dl, your risk of disease increases. There is
productive systems of both men and women. a wide variability of individual response to
Overexposure to lead may result in decreased lead, thus it is difficult to say that a par-
sex drive, impotence and sterility in men. ticular BLL in a given person will cause a
Lead can alter the structure of sperm cells particular effect. Studies have associated
raising the risk of birth defects. There is evi- fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150
dence of miscarriage and stillbirth in women µg/dl. Other studies have shown other forms
whose husbands were exposed to lead or who of diseases in some workers with BLLs well
were exposed to lead themselves. Lead expo- below 80 µg/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indi-
sure also may result in decreased fertility, cator of the risks to your health, but one
and abnormal menstrual cycles in women. other factor is also extremely important.
The course of pregnancy may be adversely This factor is the length of time you have
affected by exposure to lead since lead had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an
crosses the placental barrier and poses risks elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large
to developing fetuses. Children born of par- quantities of lead are being gradually stored
96
in your organs and tissues (body burden). deal with this situation, the standard con-
The greater your overall body burden, the tains a formula which reduces your permis-
greater the chances of substantial perma- sible exposure when you are exposed more
nent damage. The best way to prevent all than 8 hours. For example, if you are exposed
forms of lead-related impairments and dis- to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum per-
eases—both short term and long term—is to mitted average exposure would be 40 µg/m3.
maintain your BLL below 40 µg/dl. The provi-
sions of the standard are designed with this II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D)
end in mind. If lead is present in your workplace in any
Your employer has prime responsibility to quantity, your employer is required to make
assure that the provisions of the standard an initial determination of whether any em-
are complied with both by the company and ployee’s exposure to lead exceeds the action
by individual workers. You, as a worker, level (30 µg/m3 averaged over an 8-hour day).
however, also have a responsibility to assist Employee exposure is that exposure which
your employer in complying with the stand- would occur if the employee were not using
ard. You can play a key role in protecting a respirator. This initial determination re-
your own health by learning about the lead quires your employer to monitor workers’
hazards and their control, learning what the exposures unless he or she has objective data
standard requires, following the standard which can demonstrate conclusively that no
where it governs your own actions, and see- employee will be exposed to lead in excess of
ing that your employer complies with provi- the action level. Where objective data is used
sions governing his or her actions. in lieu of actual monitoring the employer
(4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health must establish and maintain an accurate
problems. You should immediately notify record, documenting its relevancy in assess-
your employer if you develop signs or symp- ing exposure levels for current job condi-
toms associated with lead poisoning or if you tions. If such objective data is available, the
desire medical advice concerning the effects employer need proceed no further on em-
of current or past exposure to lead or your ployee exposure assessment until such time
ability to have a healthy child. You should that conditions have changed and the deter-
also notify your employer if you have dif- mination is no longer valid.
ficulty breathing during a respirator fit test Objective data may be compiled from var-
or while wearing a respirator. In each of ious sources, e.g., insurance companies and
these cases, your employer must make avail- trade associations and information from sup-
able to you appropriate medical examina- pliers or exposure data collected from simi-
tions or consultations. These must be pro- lar operations. Objective data may also com-
vided at no cost to you and at a reasonable prise previously-collected sampling data in-
time and place. The standard contains a pro- cluding area monitoring. If it cannot be de-
cedure whereby you can obtain a second termined through using objective data that
opinion by a physician of your choice if your worker exposure is less than the action level,
employer selected the initial physician. your employer must conduct monitoring or
must rely on relevant previous personal sam-
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.62—EMPLOYEE pling, if available. Where monitoring is re-
STANDARD SUMMARY quired for the initial determination, it may
be limited to a representative number of em-
This appendix summarizes key provisions ployees who are reasonably expected to have
of the interim final standard for lead in con- the highest exposure levels. If your employer
struction that you as a worker should be- has conducted appropriate air sampling for
come familiar with. lead in the past 12 months, he or she may use
I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)— these results, provided they are applicable to
Paragraph (C) the same employee tasks and exposure condi-
tions and meet the requirements for accu-
The standard sets a permissible exposure racy as specified in the standard. As with ob-
limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of lead per jective data, if such results are relied upon
cubic meter of air (50 µg/m3), averaged over for the initial determination, your employer
an 8-hour workday which is referred to as a must establish and maintain a record as to
time-weighted average (TWA). This is the the relevancy of such data to current job
highest level of lead in air to which you may conditions.
be permissibly exposed over an 8-hour work- If there have been any employee com-
day. However, since this is an 8-hour aver- plaints of symptoms which may be attrib-
age, short exposures above the PEL are per- utable to exposure to lead or if there is any
mitted so long as for each 8-hour work day other information or observations which
your average exposure does not exceed this would indicate employee exposure to lead,
level. This interim final standard, however, this must also be considered as part of the
takes into account the fact that your daily initial determination.
exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical If this initial determination shows that a
8-hour workday as the result of overtime or reasonable possibility exists that any em-
other alterations in your work schedule. To ployee may be exposed, without regard to
97
respirators, over the action level, your em- III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph (E)
ployer must set up an air monitoring pro-
Your employer is required to assure that
gram to determine the exposure level rep-
no employee is exposed to lead in excess of
resentative of each employee exposed to lead the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final
at your workplace. In carrying out this air standard for lead in construction requires
monitoring program, your employer is not employers to institute engineering and work
required to monitor the exposure of every practice controls including administrative
employee, but he or she must monitor a rep- controls to the extent feasible to reduce em-
resentative number of employees and job ployee exposure to lead. Where such controls
types. Enough sampling must be done to en- are feasible but not adequate to reduce expo-
able each employee’s exposure level to be sures below the PEL they must be used none-
reasonably represent full shift exposure. In theless to reduce exposures to the lowest
addition, these air samples must be taken level that can be accomplished by these
under conditions which represent each em- means and then supplemented with appro-
ployee’s regular, daily exposure to lead. priate respiratory protection.
Sampling performed in the past 12 months Your employer is required to develop and
may be used to determine exposures above implement a written compliance program
the action level if such sampling was con- prior to the commencement of any job where
ducted during work activities essentially employee exposures may reach the PEL as
similar to present work conditions. an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard
The standard lists certain tasks which may identifies the various elements that must be
likely result in exposures to lead in excess of included in the plan. For example, employers
the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in ex- are required to include a description of oper-
cess of 50 times the PEL. If you are per- ations in which lead is emitted, detailing
forming any of these tasks, your employer other relevant information about the oper-
must provide you with appropriate res- ation such as the type of equipment used,
piratory protection, protective clothing and the type of material involved, employee job
equipment, change areas, hand washing fa- responsibilities, operating procedures and
cilities, biological monitoring, and training maintenance practices. In addition, your em-
until such time that an exposure assessment ployer’s compliance plan must specify the
is conducted which demonstrates that your means that will be used to achieve compli-
exposure level is below the PEL. ance and, where engineering controls are re-
If you are exposed to lead and air sampling quired, include any engineering plans or
is performed, your employer is required to studies that have been used to select the
notify you in writing within 5 working days control methods. If administrative controls
of the air monitoring results which represent involving job rotation are used to reduce em-
your exposure. If the results indicate that ployee exposure to lead, the job rotation
your exposure exceeds the PEL (without re- schedule must be included in the compliance
gard to your use of a respirator), then your plan. The plan must also detail the type of
employer must also notify you of this in protective clothing and equipment, including
writing, and provide you with a description respirators, housekeeping and hygiene prac-
of the corrective action that has been taken tices that will be used to protect you from
or will be taken to reduce your exposure. the adverse effects of exposure to lead.
Your exposure must be rechecked by moni- The written compliance program must be
toring, at least every six months if your ex- made available, upon request, to affected
posure is at or over the action level but employees and their designated representa-
below the PEL. Your employer may dis- tives, the Assistant Secretary and the Direc-
continue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive tor.
measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, Finally, the plan must be reviewed and up-
are at or below the action level. Air moni- dated at least every 6 months to assure it re-
toring must be repeated every 3 months if flects the current status in exposure control.
you are exposed over the PEL. Your em-
IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph (F)
ployer must continue monitoring for you at
this frequency until 2 consecutive measure- Your employer is required to provide and
ments, taken at least 7 days apart, are below assure your use of respirators when your ex-
the PEL but above the action level, at which posure to lead is not controlled below the
time your employer must repeat monitoring PEL by other means. The employer must pay
of your exposure every six months and may the cost of the respirator. Whenever you re-
discontinue monitoring only after your expo- quest one, your employer is also required to
sure drops to or below the action level. How- provide you a respirator even if your air ex-
ever, whenever there is a change of equip- posure level is not above the PEL. You
ment, process, control, or personnel or a new might desire a respirator when, for example,
type of job is added at your workplace which you have received medical advice that your
may result in new or additional exposure to lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you
lead, your employer must perform additional may intend to have children in the near fu-
monitoring. ture, and want to reduce the level of lead in
98
your body to minimize adverse reproductive during a fit test or while using a respirator,
effects. While respirators are the least satis- your employer must make a medical exam-
factory means of controlling your exposure, ination available to you to determine wheth-
they are capable of providing significant pro- er you can safely wear a respirator. The re-
tection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, sult of this examination may be to give you
cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they a positive pressure respirator (which reduces
stop providing adequate protection. breathing resistance) or to provide alter-
Your employer is required to select res- native means of protection.
pirators from the types listed in Table I of
the Respiratory Protection section of the V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment—
standard (§ 1926.62 (f)). Any respirator chosen Paragraph (G)
must be approved by the National Institute If you are exposed to lead above the PEL
for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) as an 8-hour TWA, without regard to your
under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. This use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to
respirator selection table will enable your lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead
employer to choose a type of respirator that azide which can cause skin and eye irrita-
will give you a proper amount of protection tion, your employer must provide you with
based on your airborne lead exposure. Your protective work clothing and equipment ap-
employer may select a type of respirator propriate for the hazard. If work clothing is
that provides greater protection than that provided, it must be provided in a clean and
required by the standard; that is, one rec- dry condition at least weekly, and daily if
ommended for a higher concentration of lead your airborne exposure to lead is greater
than is present in your workplace. For exam- than 200 µg/m3. Appropriate protective work
ple, a powered air-purifying respirator clothing and equipment can include cover-
(PAPR) is much more protective than a typ- alls or similar full-body work clothing,
ical negative pressure respirator, and may gloves, hats, shoes or disposable shoe cover-
also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR lets, and face shields or vented goggles. Your
has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean employer is required to provide all such
the air, and a power source that continu- equipment at no cost to you. In addition,
ously blows filtered air into your breathing your employer is responsible for providing
zone. Your employer might make a PAPR repairs and replacement as necessary, and
available to you to ease the burden of having also is responsible for the cleaning, laun-
to wear a respirator for long periods of time. dering or disposal of protective clothing and
The standard provides that you can obtain a equipment.
PAPR upon request. The interim final standard requires that
Your employer must also start a Res- your employer assure that you follow good
piratory Protection Program. This program work practices when you are working in
must include written procedures for the areas where your exposure to lead may ex-
proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and ceed the PEL. With respect to protective
maintenance of respirators. clothing and equipment, where appropriate,
Your employer must ensure that your res- the following procedures should be observed
pirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of prior to beginning work:
a respirator facepiece is critical to your pro- 1. Change into work clothing and shoe cov-
tection from airborne lead. Obtaining a prop- ers in the clean section of the designated
er fit on each employee may require your changing areas;
employer to make available several different 2. Use work garments of appropriate pro-
types of respirator masks. To ensure that tective gear, including respirators before en-
your respirator fits properly and that face- tering the work area; and
piece leakage is minimal, your employer 3. Store any clothing not worn under pro-
must give you either a qualitative or quan- tective clothing in the designated changing
titative fit test as specified in Appendix A of area.
the Respiratory Protection standard located Workers should follow these procedures
at 29 CFR 1910.134. upon leaving the work area:
You must also receive from your employer 1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated
proper training in the use of respirators. protective work clothing while it is still
Your employer is required to teach you how being worn. At no time may lead be removed
to wear a respirator, to know why it is need- from protective clothing by any means
ed, and to understand its limitations. which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead
The standard provides that if your res- into the air;
pirator uses filter elements, you must be 2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in
given an opportunity to change the filter ele- the work area;
ments whenever an increase in breathing re- 3. Remove protective clothing and gear in
sistance is detected. You also must be per- the dirty area of the designated changing
mitted to periodically leave your work area area. Remove protective coveralls by care-
to wash your face and respirator facepiece fully rolling down the garment to reduce ex-
whenever necessary to prevent skin irrita- posure to dust.
tion. If you ever have difficulty in breathing 4. Remove respirators last; and
99
5. Wash hands and face. Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be
Workers should follow these procedures entered with protective clothing or equip-
upon finishing work for the day (in addition ment unless surface dust has been removed
to procedures described above): by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other
1. Where applicable, place disposal cover- cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed
alls and shoe covers with the abatement above the PEL must wash both their hands
waste; and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking
2. Contaminated clothing which is to be or applying cosmetics.
cleaned, laundered or disposed of must be All of the facilities and hygiene practices
placed in closed containers in the change just discussed are essential to minimize ad-
room. ditional sources of lead absorption from in-
3. Clean protective gear, including res- halation or ingestion of lead that may accu-
pirators, according to standard procedures; mulate on you, your clothes, or your posses-
4. Wash hands and face again. If showers sions. Strict compliance with these provi-
are available, take a shower and wash hair. sions can virtually eliminate several sources
If shower facilities are not available at the of lead exposure which significantly con-
work site, shower immediately at home and tribute to excessive lead absorption.
wash hair.
VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph (J)
VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H) The medical surveillance program is part
Your employer must establish a house- of the standard’s comprehensive approach to
keeping program sufficient to maintain all the prevention of lead-related disease. Its
surfaces as free as practicable of accumula- purpose is to supplement the main thrust of
tions of lead dust. Vacuuming is the pre- the standard which is aimed at minimizing
ferred method of meeting this requirement, airborne concentrations of lead and sources
and the use of compressed air to clean floors of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can
and other surfaces is generally prohibited determine if the other provisions of the
unless removal with compressed air is done standard have affectively protected you as
in conjunction with ventilation systems de- an individual. Compliance with the stand-
signed to contain dispersal of the lead dust. ard’s provision will protect most workers
Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but
may not be used except where vacuuming or may not be satisfactory to protect individual
other equally effective methods have been workers (1) who have high body burdens of
tried and do not work. Vacuums must be lead acquired over past years, (2) who have
used equipped with a special filter called a additional uncontrolled sources of non-occu-
high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter pational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit un-
and emptied in a manner which minimizes usual variations in lead absorption rates, or
the reentry of lead into the workplace. (4) who have specific non-work related med-
ical conditions which could be aggravated by
VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices— lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In
Paragraph (I) addition, control systems may fail, or hy-
The standard requires that hand washing giene and respirator programs may be inad-
facilities be provided where occupational ex- equate. Periodic medical surveillance of indi-
posure to lead occurs. In addition, change vidual workers will help detect those fail-
areas, showers (where feasible), and ures. Medical surveillance will also be impor-
lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made tant to protect your reproductive ability-re-
available to workers exposed to lead above gardless of whether you are a man or woman.
the PEL. Your employer must assure that All medical surveillance required by the
except in these facilities, food and beverage interim final standard must be performed by
is not present or consumed, tobacco products or under the supervision of a licensed physi-
are not present or used, and cosmetics are cian. The employer must provide required
not applied, where airborne exposures are medical surveillance without cost to employ-
above the PEL. Change rooms provided by ees and at a reasonable time and place. The
your employer must be equipped with sepa- standard’s medical surveillance program has
rate storage facilities for your protective two parts—periodic biological monitoring
clothing and equipment and street clothes to and medical examinations. Your employer’s
avoid cross-contamination. After showering, obligation to offer you medical surveillance
no required protective clothing or equipment is triggered by the results of the air moni-
worn during the shift may be worn home. It toring program. Full medical surveillance
is important that contaminated clothing or must be made available to all employees who
equipment be removed in change areas and are or may be exposed to lead in excess of
not be worn home or you will extend your the action level for more than 30 days a year
exposure and expose your family since lead and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl.
from your clothing can accumulate in your Initial medical surveillance consisting of
house, car, etc. blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc
100
protoporphyrin must be provided to all em- medical removal protection provisions of the
ployees exposed at any time (1 day) above standard. (See Part IX, below.)
the action level. The standard specifies the minimum con-
Biological monitoring under the standard tent of pre-assignment and annual medical
must be provided at least every 2 months for examinations. The content of other types of
the first 6 months and every 6 months there- medical examinations and consultations is
after until your blood lead level is below 40 left up to the sound discretion of the exam-
µg/dl. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a ining physician. Pre-assignment and annual
very useful blood test which measures an ad- medical examinations must include (1) a de-
verse metabolic effect of lead on your body tailed work history and medical history; (2)
and is therefore an indicator of lead toxicity. a thorough physical examination, including
If your BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl the moni- an evaluation of your pulmonary status if
toring frequency must be increased from you will be required to use a respirator; (3) a
every 6 months to at least every 2 months blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series
and not reduced until two consecutive BLLs of laboratory tests designed to check your
indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/dl. blood chemistry and your kidney function.
Each time your BLL is determined to be over In addition, at any time upon your request,
40 µg/dl, your employer must notify you of a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will
this in writing within five working days of be made (microscopic examination of a
his or her receipt of the test results. The em- sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be
ployer must also inform you that the stand- given.
ard requires temporary medical removal The standard does not require that you
with economic protection when your BLL ex- participate in any of the medical procedures,
ceeds 50 µg/dl. (See Discussion of Medical Re- tests, etc. which your employer is required
moval Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime to make available to you. Medical surveil-
your BLL exceeds 50 µg/dl your employer lance can, however, play a very important
must make available to you within two role in protecting your health. You are
weeks of receipt of these test results a sec- strongly encouraged, therefore, to partici-
ond follow-up BLL test to confirm your BLL. pate in a meaningful fashion. The standard
If the two tests both exceed 50 µg/dl, and you contains a multiple physician review mecha-
are temporarily removed, then your em- nism which will give you a chance to have a
ployer must make successive BLL tests physician of your choice directly participate
available to you on a monthly basis during in the medical surveillance program. If you
the period of your removal. are dissatisfied with an examination by a
Medical examinations beyond the initial physician chosen by your employer, you can
one must be made available on an annual select a second physician to conduct an inde-
basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl pendent analysis. The two doctors would at-
at any time during the preceding year and tempt to resolve any differences of opinion,
you are being exposed above the airborne ac- and select a third physician to resolve any
tion level of 30 µg/m3 for 30 or more days per firm dispute. Generally your employer will
year. The initial examination will provide choose the physician who conducts medical
information to establish a baseline to which surveillance under the lead standard-unless
subsequent data can be compared. you and your employer can agree on the
An initial medical examination to consist choice of a physician or physicians. Some
of blood sampling and analysis for lead and companies and unions have agreed in ad-
zinc protoporphyrin must also be made avail- vance, for example, to use certain inde-
able (prior to assignment) for each employee pendent medical laboratories or panels of
being assigned for the first time to an area physicians. Any of these arrangements are
where the airborne concentration of lead acceptable so long as required medical sur-
equals or exceeds the action level at any veillance is made available to workers.
time. In addition, a medical examination or The standard requires your employer to
consultation must be made available as soon provide certain information to a physician to
as possible if you notify your employer that aid in his or her examination of you. This in-
you are experiencing signs or symptoms formation includes (1) the standard and its
commonly associated with lead poisoning or appendices, (2) a description of your duties as
that you have difficulty breathing while they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3)
wearing a respirator or during a respirator your exposure level or anticipated exposure
fit test. You must also be provided a medical level, (4) a description of any personal pro-
examination or consultation if you notify tective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood
your employer that you desire medical ad- lead level results, and (6) prior written med-
vice concerning the effects of current or past ical opinions concerning you that the em-
exposure to lead on your ability to procreate ployer has. After a medical examination or
a healthy child. consultation the physician must prepare a
Finally, appropriate follow-up medical ex- written report which must contain (1) the
aminations or consultations may also be pro- physician’s opinion as to whether you have
vided for employees who have been tempo- any medical condition which places you at
rarily removed from exposure under the increased risk of material impairment to
101
health from exposure to lead, (2) any rec- are occupationally exposed to lead, or the
ommended special protective measures to be use of these drugs to routinely lower blood
provided to you, (3) any blood lead level de- lead levels to predesignated concentrations
terminations, and (4) any recommended limi- believed to be ‘‘safe’’. It should be empha-
tation on your use of respirators. This last sized that where an employer takes a worker
element must include a determination of who has no symptoms of lead poisoning and
whether you can wear a powered air puri- has chelation carried out by a physician (ei-
fying respirator (PAPR) if you are found un- ther inside or outside of a hospital) solely to
able to wear a negative pressure respirator. reduce the worker’s blood lead level, that
The medical surveillance program of the will generally be considered prophylactic
interim lead standard may at some point in chelation. The use of a hospital and a physi-
time serve to notify certain workers that cian does not mean that prophylactic chela-
they have acquired a disease or other adverse tion is not being performed. Routine chela-
medical condition as a result of occupational tion to prevent increased or reduce current
lead exposure. If this is true, these workers blood lead levels is unacceptable whatever
might have legal rights to compensation the setting.
from public agencies, their employers, firms The standard allows the use of ‘‘thera-
that supply hazardous products to their em- peutic’’ or ‘‘diagnostic’’ chelation if adminis-
ployers, or other persons. Some states have tered under the supervision of a licensed
laws, including worker compensation laws, physician in a clinical setting with thorough
that disallow a worker who learns of a job- and appropriate medical monitoring. Thera-
related health impairment to sue, unless the peutic chelation responds to severe lead poi-
worker sues within a short period of time soning where there are marked symptoms.
after learning of the impairment. (This pe- Diagnostic chelation involved giving a pa-
riod of time may be a matter of months or tient a dose of the drug then collecting all
years.) An attorney can be consulted about urine excreted for some period of time as an
these possibilities. It should be stressed that aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning.
OSHA is in no way trying to either encour- In cases where the examining physician de-
age or discourage claims or lawsuits. How- termines that chelation is appropriate, you
ever, since results of the standard’s medical must be notified in writing of this fact before
surveillance program can significantly affect such treatment. This will inform you of a po-
the legal remedies of a worker who has ac- tentially harmful treatment, and allow you
quired a job-related disease or impairment, to obtain a second opinion.
it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of
this. IX. Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph
The medical surveillance section of the (K)
standard also contains provisions dealing Excessive lead absorption subjects you to
with chelation. Chelation is the use of cer- increased risk of disease. Medical removal
tain drugs (administered in pill form or in- protection (MRP) is a means of protecting
jected into the body) to reduce the amount you when, for whatever reasons, other meth-
of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience ods, such as engineering controls, work prac-
accumulated by the medical and scientific tices, and respirators, have failed to provide
communities has largely confirmed the effec- the protection you need. MRP involves the
tiveness of this type of therapy for the treat- temporary removal of a worker from his or
ment of very severe lead poisoning. On the her regular job to a place of significantly
other hand, it has also been established that lower exposure without any loss of earnings,
there can be a long list of extremely harmful seniority, or other employment rights or
side effects associated with the use of benefits. The purpose of this program is to
chelating agents. The medical community cease further lead absorption and allow your
has balanced the advantages and disadvan- body to naturally excrete lead which has pre-
tages resulting from the use of chelating viously been absorbed. Temporary medical
agents in various circumstances and has es- removal can result from an elevated blood
tablished when the use of these agents is ac- lead level, or a medical opinion. For up to 18
ceptable. The standard includes these ac- months, or for as long as the job the em-
cepted limitations due to a history of abuse ployee was removed from lasts, protection is
of chelation therapy by some lead compa- provided as a result of either form of re-
nies. The most widely used chelating agents moval. The vast majority of removed work-
are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2 EDTA), ers, however, will return to their former jobs
Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate), long before this eighteen month period ex-
and d-penicillamine (pencillamine or pires.
Cupramine). You may also be removed from exposure
The standard prohibits ‘‘prophylactic che- even if your blood lead level is below 50 µg/
lation’’ of any employee by any person the dl if a final medical determination indicates
employer retains, supervises or controls. Pro- that you temporarily need reduced lead ex-
phylactic chelation is the routine use of posure for medical reasons. If the physician
chelating or similarly acting drugs to pre- who is implementing your employers med-
vent elevated blood levels in workers who ical program makes a final written opinion
102
recommending your removal or other special from these other sources. This is also true if
protective measures, your employer must you obtain other employment during the
implement the physician’s recommendation. time you are laid off with MRP benefits.
If you are removed in this manner, you may The standard also covers situations where
only be returned when the doctor indicates an employer voluntarily removes a worker
that it is safe for you to do so. from exposure to lead due to the effects of
The standard does not give specific in- lead on the employee’s medical condition,
structions dealing with what an employer even though the standard does not require
must do with a removed worker. Your job as- removal. In these situations MRP benefits
signment upon removal is a matter for you, must still be provided as though the stand-
your employer and your union (if any) to ard required removal. Finally, it is impor-
work out consistent with existing procedures tant to note that in all cases where removal
for job assignments. Each removal must be is required, respirators cannot be used as a
accomplished in a manner consistent with substitute. Respirators may be used before
existing collective bargaining relationships. removal becomes necessary, but not as an al-
Your employer is given broad discretion to ternative to a transfer to a low exposure job,
implement temporary removals so long as no or to a lay-off with MRP benefits.
attempt is made to override existing agree-
ments. Similarly, a removed worker is pro- X. Employee Information and Training—
vided no right to veto an employer’s choice Paragraph (L)
which satisfies the standard.
In most cases, employers will likely trans- Your employer is required to provide an in-
fer removed employees to other jobs with formation and training program for all em-
sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively, ployees exposed to lead above the action
a worker’s hours may be reduced so that the level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation
time weighted average exposure is reduced, from lead compounds such as lead arsenate
or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no or lead azide. The program must train these
other alternative is feasible. employees regarding the specific hazards as-
In all of these situation, MRP benefits sociated with their work environment, pro-
must be provided during the period of re- tective measures which can be taken, includ-
moval—i.e., you continue to receive the ing the contents of any compliance plan in
same earnings, seniority, and other rights effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (in-
and benefits you would have had if you had cluding their reproductive systems), and
not been removed. Earnings includes more their rights under the standard. All employ-
than just your base wage; it includes over- ees must be trained prior to initial assign-
time, shift differentials, incentives, and ment to areas where there is a possibility of
other compensation you would have earned if exposure over the action level.
you had not been removed. During the period This training program must also be pro-
of removal you must also be provided with vided at least annually thereafter unless fur-
appropriate follow-up medical surveillance. ther exposure above the action level will not
If you were removed because your blood lead occur.
level was too high, you must be provided
with a monthly blood test. If a medical opin- XI. Signs—Paragraph (M)
ion caused your removal, you must be pro- The standard requires that the following
vided medical tests or examinations that the warning sign be posted in work areas where
doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do the exposure to lead exceeds the PEL:
not participate in this follow up medical sur-
veillance, you may lose your eligibility for WARNING
MRP benefits. LEAD WORK AREA
When you are medically eligible to return POISON
to your former job, your employer must re-
turn you to your ‘‘former job status.’’ This NO SMOKING OR EATING
means that you are entitled to the position, These signs are to be posted and main-
wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if tained in a manner which assures that the
you had not been removed. If you would still legend is readily visible.
be in your old job if no removal had occurred
XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N)
that is where you go back. If not, you are re-
turned consistent with whatever job assign- Your employer is required to keep all
ment discretion your employer would have records of exposure monitoring for airborne
had if no removal had occurred. MRP only lead. These records must include the name
seeks to maintain your rights, not expand and job classification of employees meas-
them or diminish them. ured, details of the sampling and analytical
If you are removed under MRP and you are techniques, the results of this sampling, and
also eligible for worker compensation or the type of respiratory protection being
other compensation for lost wages, your em- worn by the person sampled. Such records
ployer’s MRP benefits obligation is reduced are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your
by the amount that you actually receive employer is also required to keep all records
103
of biological monitoring and medical exam- Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210:
ination results. These records must include Telephone (202) 219–4667.
the names of the employees, the physician’s B. Additional information about the stand-
written opinion, and a copy of the results of ard, its enforcement, and your employer’s
the examination. Medical records must be compliance can be obtained from the nearest
preserved and maintained for the duration of OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone
employment plus 30 years. However, if the directory under United States Government/
employee’s duration of employment is less Department of Labor.
than one year, the employer need not retain
that employee’s medical records beyond the APPENDIX C TO § 1926.62—MEDICAL
period of employment if they are provided to SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES
the employee upon termination of employ-
ment. Introduction
Recordkeeping is also required if you are The primary purpose of the Occupational
temporarily removed from your job under Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so
the medical removal protection program. far as possible, safe and healthful working
This record must include your name and so- conditions for every working man and
cial security number, the date of your re- woman. The interim final occupational
moval and return, how the removal was or is health standard for lead in construction is
being accomplished, and whether or not the designed to protect workers exposed to inor-
reason for the removal was an elevated blood ganic lead including metallic lead, all inor-
lead level. Your employer is required to keep ganic lead compounds and organic lead
each medical removal record only for as long soaps.
as the duration of an employee’s employ- Under this interim final standard occupa-
ment. tional exposure to inorganic lead is to be
The standard requires that if you request limited to 50 µg/m3 (micrograms per cubic
to see or copy environmental monitoring, meter) based on an 8 hour time-weighted av-
blood lead level monitoring, or medical re- erage (TWA). This permissible exposure limit
moval records, they must be made available (PEL) must be achieved through a combina-
to you or to a representative that you au- tion of engineering, work practice and ad-
thorize. Your union also has access to these ministrative controls to the extent feasible.
records. Medical records other than BLL’s Where these controls are in place but are
must also be provided upon request to you, found not to reduce employee exposures to or
to your physician or to any other person below the PEL, they must be used nonethe-
whom you may specifically designate. Your less, and supplemented with respirators to
union does not have access to your personal meet the 50 µg/m3 exposure limit.
medical records unless you authorize their The standard also provides for a program
access. of biological monitoring for employees ex-
posed to lead above the action level at any
XIII. Observation of Monitoring—Paragraph time, and additional medical surveillance for
(O) all employees exposed to levels of inorganic
lead above 30 µg/m3 (TWA) for more than 30
When air monitoring for lead is performed
days per year and whose BLL exceeds 40 µg/
at your workplace as required by this stand-
dl.
ard, your employer must allow you or some-
The purpose of this document is to outline
one you designate to act as an observer of
the medical surveillance provisions of the in-
the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an
terim standard for inorganic lead in con-
explanation of the measurement procedure,
struction, and to provide further information
and to record the results obtained. Since re-
to the physician regarding the examination
sults will not normally be available at the
and evaluation of workers exposed to inor-
time of the monitoring, observers are enti-
ganic lead.
tled to record or receive the results of the
Section 1 provides a detailed description of
monitoring when returned by the laboratory.
the monitoring procedure including the re-
Your employer is required to provide the ob-
quired frequency of blood testing for exposed
server with any personal protective devices
workers, provisions for medical removal pro-
required to be worn by employees working in
tection (MRP), the recommended right of the
the area that is being monitored. The em-
employee to a second medical opinion, and
ployer must require the observer to wear all
notification and recordkeeping requirements
such equipment and to comply with all other
of the employer. A discussion of the require-
applicable safety and health procedures.
ments for respirator use and respirator mon-
XIV. For Additional Information itoring and OSHA’s position on prophylactic
chelation therapy are also included in this
A. A copy of the interim standard for lead section.
in construction can be obtained free of Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and
charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and
of Publications, room N–3101, United States effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic
104
pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse ef- signment to an area in which airborne lead
fects on both male and female reproductive concentrations reach or exceed the 30 µg/m3
capacity and on the fetus are also discussed. for more than 30 days per year. In addition,
Section 3 outlines the recommended med- a medical examination must be provided as
ical evaluation of the worker exposed to in- soon as possible after notification by an em-
organic lead, including details of the medical ployee that the employee has developed
history, physical examination, and rec- signs or symptoms commonly associated
ommended laboratory tests, which are based with lead intoxication, that the employee
on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in desires medical advice regarding lead expo-
Section 2. sure and the ability to procreate a healthy
Section 4 provides detailed information child, or that the employee has dem-
concerning the laboratory tests available for onstrated difficulty in breathing during a
the monitoring of exposed workers. Included respirator fitting test or during respirator
also is a discussion of the relative value of use. An examination is also to be made avail-
each test and the limitations and pre- able to each employee removed from expo-
cautions which are necessary in the interpre- sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining mate-
tation of the laboratory results. rial impairment to health, or otherwise lim-
ited or specially protected pursuant to med-
I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Re- ical recommendations.
quirements for Workers Exposed to Inorganic Results of biological monitoring or the rec-
Lead ommendations of an examining physician
Under the interim final standard for inor- may necessitate removal of an employee
ganic lead in the construction industry, ini- from further lead exposure pursuant to the
tial medical surveillance consisting of bio- standard’s medical removal protection
logical monitoring to include blood lead and (MRP) program. The object of the MRP pro-
ZPP level determination shall be provided to gram is to provide temporary medical re-
employees exposed to lead at or above the moval to workers either with substantially
action level on any one day. In addition, a elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at
program of biological monitoring is to be risk of sustaining material health impair-
made available to all employees exposed ment from continued substantial exposure to
above the action level at any time and addi- lead.
tional medical surveillance is to be made Under the standard’s ultimate worker re-
available to all employees exposed to lead moval criteria, a worker is to be removed
above 30 µg/m3 TWA for more than 30 days from any work having an eight hour TWA
each year and whose BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl. exposure to lead of 30 µg/m3 when his or her
This program consists of periodic blood sam- blood lead level reaches 50 µg/dl and is con-
pling and medical evaluation to be per- firmed by a second follow-up blood lead level
formed on a schedule which is defined by pre- performed within two weeks after the em-
vious laboratory results, worker complaints ployer receives the results of the first blood
or concerns, and the clinical assessment of sampling test. Return of the employee to his
the examining physician. or her job status depends on a worker’s blood
Under this program, the blood lead level lead level declining to 40 µg/dl.
(BLL) of all employees who are exposed to As part of the interim standard, the em-
lead above 30 µg/m3 for more than 30 days per ployer is required to notify in writing each
year or whose blood lead is above 40 µg/dl but employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40
exposed for no more than 30 days per year is µg/dl. In addition each such employee is to be
to be determined at least every two months informed that the standard requires medical
for the first six months of exposure and removal with MRP benefits, discussed below,
every six months thereafter. The frequency when an employee’s blood lead level exceeds
is increased to every two months for employ- the above defined limit.
ees whose last blood lead level was 40 µg/dl or In addition to the above blood lead level
above. For employees who are removed from criterion, temporary worker removal may
exposure to lead due to an elevated blood also take place as a result of medical deter-
lead, a new blood lead level must be meas- minations and recommendations. Written
ured monthly. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) medical opinions must be prepared after
measurement is strongly recommended on each examination pursuant to the standard.
each occasion that a blood lead level meas- If the examining physician includes a med-
urement is made. ical finding, determination or opinion that
An annual medical examination and con- the employee has a medical condition which
sultation performed under the guidelines dis- places the employee at increased risk of ma-
cussed in Section 3 is to be made available to terial health impairment from exposure to
each employee exposed above 30 µg/m3 for lead, then the employee must be removed
more than 30 days per year for whom a blood from exposure to lead at or above 30 µg/m3.
test conducted at any time during the pre- Alternatively, if the examining physician
ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level recommends special protective measures for
at or above 40 µg/dl. Also, an examination is an employee (e.g., use of a powered air puri-
to be given to all employees prior to their as- fying respirator) or recommends limitations
105
on an employee’s exposure to lead, then the equipment used, blood lead levels, and all
employer must implement these rec- prior written medical opinions regarding the
ommendations. employee in the employer’s possession or
Recommendations may be more stringent control. The employer must also obtain from
than the specific provisions of the standard. the physician and provide the employee with
The examining physician, therefore, is given a written medical opinion containing blood
broad flexibility to tailor special protective lead levels, the physicians’s opinion as to
procedures to the needs of individual em- whether the employee is at risk of material
ployees. This flexibility extends to the eval- impairment to health, any recommended
uation and management of pregnant workers protective measures for the employee if fur-
and male and female workers who are plan- ther exposure is permitted, as well as any
ning to raise children. Based on the history, recommended limitations upon an employ-
physical examination, and laboratory stud- ee’s use of respirators.
ies, the physician might recommend special Employers must instruct each physician
protective measures or medical removal for not to reveal to the employer in writing or
an employee who is pregnant or who is plan- in any other way his or her findings, labora-
ning to conceive a child when, in the physi- tory results, or diagnoses which are felt to
cian’s judgment, continued exposure to lead be unrelated to occupational lead exposure.
at the current job would pose a significant They must also instruct each physician to
risk. The return of the employee to his or advise the employee of any occupationally or
her former job status, or the removal of spe- non-occupationally related medical condi-
cial protections or limitations, depends upon tion requiring further treatment or evalua-
the examining physician determining that tion.
the employee is no longer at increased risk The standard provides for the use of res-
of material impairment or that special meas- pirators where engineering and other pri-
ures are no longer needed. mary controls are not effective. However,
During the period of any form of special the use of respirator protection shall not be
protection or removal, the employer must used in lieu of temporary medical removal
maintain the worker’s earnings, seniority, due to elevated blood lead levels or findings
and other employment rights and benefits that an employee is at risk of material
(as though the worker had not been removed) health impairment. This is based on the nu-
for a period of up to 18 months or for as long merous inadequacies of respirators including
as the job the employee was removed from skin rash where the facepiece makes contact
lasts if less than 18 months. This economic with the skin, unacceptable stress to breath-
protection will maximize meaningful worker ing in some workers with underlying
participation in the medical surveillance cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in
program, and is appropriate as part of the providing adequate fit, the tendency for res-
employer’s overall obligation to provide a pirators to create additional hazards by
safe and healthful workplace. The provisions interfering with vision, hearing, and mobil-
of MRP benefits during the employee’s re- ity, and the difficulties of assuring the max-
moval period may, however, be conditioned imum effectiveness of a complicated work
upon participation in medical surveillance. practice program involving respirators. Res-
The lead standard provides for a multiple pirators do, however, serve a useful function
physician review in cases where the em- where engineering and work practice con-
ployee wishes a second opinion concerning trols are inadequate by providing supple-
potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an mentary, interim, or short-term protection,
employee wishes a second opinion, he or she provided they are properly selected for the
can make an appointment with a physician environment in which the employee will be
of his or her choice. This second physician working, properly fitted to the employee,
will review the findings, recommendations or maintained and cleaned periodically, and
determinations of the first physician and worn by the employee when required.
conduct any examinations, consultations or In its interim final standard on occupa-
tests deemed necessary in an attempt to tional exposure to inorganic lead in the con-
make a final medical determination. If the struction industry, OSHA has prohibited pro-
first and second physicians do not agree in phylactic chelation. Diagnostic and thera-
their assessment they must try to resolve peutic chelation are permitted only under
their differences. If they cannot reach an the supervision of a licensed physician with
agreement then they must designate a third appropriate medical monitoring in an ac-
physician to resolve the dispute. ceptable clinical setting. The decision to ini-
The employer must provide examining and tiate chelation therapy must be made on an
consulting physicians with the following spe- individual basis and take into account the
cific information: A copy of the lead regula- severity of symptoms felt to be a result of
tions and all appendices, a description of the lead toxicity along with blood lead levels,
employee’s duties as related to exposure, the ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as ap-
exposure level or anticipated level to lead propriate. EDTA and penicillamine which
and any other toxic substances (if applica- are the primary chelating agents used in the
ble), a description of personal protective therapy of occupational lead poisoning have
106
significant potential side effects and their margins of safety will be improved in future
use must be justified on the basis of expected years. The provisions of the lead standard
benefits to the worker. Unless frank and se- are founded on two prime medical judg-
vere symptoms are present, therapeutic che- ments: First, the prevention of adverse
lation is not recommended, given the oppor- health effects from exposure to lead through-
tunity to remove a worker from exposure out a working lifetime requires that worker
and allow the body to naturally excrete ac- blood lead levels be maintained at or below
cumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the che- 40 µg/dl and second, the blood lead levels of
lation mobilization test using CA-EDTA has workers, male or female, who intend to par-
limited applicability. According to some in- ent in the near future should be maintained
vestigators, the test can differentiate be- below 30 µg/dl to minimize adverse reproduc-
tween lead-induced and other nephropathies. tive health effects to the parents and devel-
The test may also provide an estimation of oping fetus. The adverse effects of lead on re-
the mobile fraction of the total body lead production are being actively researched and
burden. OSHA encourages the physician to remain
Employers are required to assure that ac- abreast of recent developments in the area to
curate records are maintained on exposure best advise pregnant workers or workers
assessment, including environmental moni- planning to conceive children.
toring, medical surveillance, and medical re- The spectrum of health effects caused by
moval for each employee. Exposure assess- lead exposure can be subdivided into five de-
ment records must be kept for at least 30 velopmental stages: Normal, physiological
years. Medical surveillance records must be changes of uncertain significance,
kept for the duration of employment plus 30 pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms
years except in cases where the employment (morbidity), and mortality. Within this proc-
was less than one year. If duration of em- ess there are no sharp distinctions, but rath-
ployment is less than one year, the employer er a continuum of effects. Boundaries be-
need not retain this record beyond the term tween categories overlap due to the wide var-
of employment if the record is provided to iation of individual responses and exposures
the employee upon termination of employ- in the working population. OSHA’s develop-
ment. Medical removal records also must be ment of the lead standard focused on
maintained for the duration of employment. pathophysiological changes as well as later
All records required under the standard must stages of disease.
1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest
be made available upon request to the As-
demonstrated effect of lead involves its abil-
sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational
ity to inhibit at least two enzymes of the
Safety and Health and the Director of the
heme synthesis pathway at very low blood
National Institute for Occupational Safety
levels. Inhibition of delta aminolevulinic
and Health. Employers must also make envi-
acid dehydrase (ALA-D) which catalyzes the
ronmental and biological monitoring and
conversion of delta-aminolevulinic acid
medical removal records available to af-
(ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a
fected employees and to former employees or
blood lead level below 20 µg/dl. At a blood
their authorized employee representatives. lead level of 40 µg/dl, more than 20% of the
Employees or their specifically designated population would have 70% inhibition of
representatives have access to their entire ALA-D. There is an exponential increase in
medical surveillance records. ALA excretion at blood lead levels greater
In addition, the standard requires that the than 40 µg/dl.
employer inform all workers exposed to lead Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also in-
at or above 30 µg/m3 of the provisions of the hibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of
standard and all its appendices, the purpose ferrochelatase leads to increased free eryth-
and description of medical surveillance and rocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood
provisions for medical removal protection if which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc
temporary removal is required. An under- protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50
standing of the potential health effects of µg/dl or greater, nearly 100% of the popu-
lead exposure by all exposed employees along lation will have an increase in FEP. There is
with full understanding of their rights under also an exponential relationship between
the lead standard is essential for an effective blood lead levels greater than 40 µg/dl and
monitoring program. the associated ZPP level, which has led to
the development of the ZPP screening test
II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead
for lead exposure.
Although the toxicity of lead has been While the significance of these effects is
known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the subject to debate, it is OSHA’s position that
complex relationship between lead exposure these enzyme disturbances are early stages
and human response is still being refined. of a disease process which may eventually
Significant research into the toxic prop- result in the clinical symptoms of lead poi-
erties of lead continues throughout the soning. Whether or not the effects do
world, and it should be anticipated that our progress to the later stages of clinical dis-
understanding of thresholds of effects and ease, disruption of these enzyme processes
107
over a working lifetime is considered to be a and hand in the most active upper extrem-
material impairment of health. ity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or,
One of the eventual results of lead-induced much less commonly, foot drop.
inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis In addition to slowing of nerve conduction,
pathway is anemia which can be asymp- electromyographical studies in patients with
tomatic if mild but associated with a wide blood lead levels greater than 50 µg/dl have
array of symptoms including dizziness, fa- demonstrated a decrease in the number of
tigue, and tachycardia when more severe. acting motor unit potentials, an increase in
Studies have indicated that lead levels as the duration of motor unit potentials, and
low as 50 µg/dl can be associated with a defi- spontaneous pathological activity including
nite decreased hemoglobin, although most fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether
cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as these effects occur at levels of 40 µg/dl is un-
shortened red-cell survival times, occur at determined.
lead levels exceeding 80 µg/dl. Inhibited he- While the peripheral neuropathies can oc-
moglobin synthesis is more common in casionally be reversed with therapy, again
chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte such recovery is not assured particularly in
life span is more common in acute cases. the more severe neuropathies and often im-
In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a provement is only partial. The lack of re-
reticulocytosis along with the presence of versibility is felt to be due in part to seg-
basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts, mental demyelination.
although none of the above are 3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect
pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia. the gastrointestinal system producing ab-
2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has dominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain, con-
been found to have toxic effects on both the stipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia,
central and peripheral nervous systems. The nausea and vomiting. Lead colic rarely de-
earliest stages of lead-induced central nerv- velops at blood lead levels below 80 µg/dl.
ous system effects first manifest themselves 4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of
in the form of behavioral disturbances and the most serious health effects of lead poi-
central nervous system symptoms including soning. In the early stages of disease nuclear
irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other inclusion bodies can frequently be identified
sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, head- in proximal renal tubular cells. Renal func-
ache, poor memory, tremor, depression, and tion remains normal and the changes in this
apathy. With more severe exposure, symp- stage are probably reversible. With more ad-
toms can progress to drowsiness, stupor, hal- vanced disease there is progressive intersti-
lucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma. tial fibrosis and impaired renal function.
The most severe and acute form of lead Eventually extensive interstitial fibrosis en-
poisoning which usually follows ingestion or sues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and
inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end
encephalopathy which may arise precipi- stage kidney disease. Azotemia can be pro-
tously with the onset of intractable seizures, gressive, eventually resulting in frank ure-
coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death mia necessitating dialysis. There is occa-
within 48 hours. sionally associated hypertension and
While there is disagreement about what ex- hyperuricemia with or without gout.
posure levels are needed to produce the ear- Early kidney disease is difficult to detect.
liest symptoms, most experts agree that The urinalysis is normal in early lead
symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and
levels of 60 µg/dl whole blood and therefore serum creatinine increase only when two-
recommend a 40 µg/dl maximum. The central thirds of kidney function is lost. Measure-
nervous system effects frequently are not re- ment of creatinine clearance can often de-
versible following discontinued exposure or tect earlier disease as can other methods of
chelation therapy and when improvement measurement of glomerular filtration rate.
does occur, it is almost always only partial. An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has
The peripheral neuropathy resulting from been used to differentiate between lead-in-
lead exposure characteristically involves duced and other nephropathies, but this pro-
only motor function with minimal sensory cedure is not widely accepted. A form of
damage and has a marked predilection for Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria,
the extensor muscles of the most active ex- glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indi-
tremity. The peripheral neuropathy can cating severe injury to the proximal renal
occur with varying degrees of severity. The tubules is occasionally seen in children.
earliest and mildest form which can be de- 5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead
tected in workers with blood lead levels as can have serious effects on reproductive
low as 50 µg/dl is manifested by slowing of function in both males and females. In male
motor nerve conduction velocity often with- workers exposed to lead there can be a de-
out clinical symptoms. With progression of crease in sexual drive, impotence, decreased
the neuropathy there is development of pain- ability to produce healthy sperm, and ste-
less extensor muscle weakness usually in- rility. Malformed sperm (teratospermia), de-
volving the extensor muscles of the fingers creased number of sperm (hypospermia), and
108
sperm with decreased motility renal axis, but again these effects have not
(asthenospermia) can all occur. been well defined.
Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood
lead levels of 53 µg/dl and hypospermia and III. Medical Evaluation
asthenospermia at 41 µg/dl. Furthermore, The most important principle in evalu-
there appears to be a dose-response relation- ating a worker for any occupational disease
ship for teratospermia in lead exposed work- including lead poisoning is a high index of
ers. suspicion on the part of the examining physi-
Women exposed to lead may experience cian. As discussed in Section 2, lead can af-
menstrual disturbances including fect numerous organ systems and produce a
dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenor- wide array of signs and symptoms, most of
rhea. Following exposure to lead, women which are non-specific and subtle in nature
have a higher frequency of sterility, pre- at least in the early stages of disease. Unless
mature births, spontaneous miscarriages, serious concern for lead toxicity is present,
and stillbirths. many of the early clues to diagnosis may
Germ cells can be affected by lead and easily be overlooked.
cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm The crucial initial step in the medical
cells before conception and result in failure evaluation is recognizing that a worker’s
to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth employment can result in exposure to lead.
defects. The worker will frequently be able to define
Infants of mothers with lead poisoning exposures to lead and lead containing mate-
have a higher mortality during the first year rials but often will not volunteer this infor-
and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower mation unless specifically asked. In other
growth, and nervous system disorders. situations the worker may not know of any
Lead can pass through the placental bar- exposures to lead but the suspicion might be
rier and lead levels in the mother’s blood are raised on the part of the physician because of
comparable to concentrations of lead in the the industry or occupation of the worker.
umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental pas- Potential occupational exposure to lead and
sage becomes detectable at 12–14 weeks of its compounds occur in many occupations in
gestation and increases until birth. the construction industry, including demoli-
There is little direct data on damage to the tion and salvaging operations, removal or
fetus from exposure to lead but it is gen- encapsulation of materials containing lead,
construction, alteration, repair or renova-
erally assumed that the fetus and newborn
tion of structures containing lead, transpor-
would be at least as susceptible to neuro-
tation, disposal, storage or containment of
logical damage as young children. Blood lead
lead or lead-containing materials on con-
levels of 50–60 µg/dl in children can cause sig-
struction sites, and maintenance operations
nificant neurobehavioral impairments and
associated with construction activities.
there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood
Once the possibility for lead exposure is
levels as low as 25 µg/dl. Given the overall
raised, the focus can then be directed toward
body of literature concerning the adverse
eliciting information from the medical his-
health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels tory, physical exam, and finally from labora-
that the blood lead level in children should tory data to evaluate the worker for poten-
be maintained below 30 µg/dl with a popu- tial lead toxicity.
lation mean of 15 µg/dl. Blood lead levels in A complete and detailed work history is
the fetus and newborn likewise should not important in the initial evaluation. A listing
exceed 30 µg/dl. of all previous employment with information
Because of lead’s ability to pass through on job description, exposure to fumes or
the placental barrier and also because of the dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic
demonstrated adverse effects of lead on re- substances, a description of any personal
productive function in both the male and fe- protective equipment used, and previous
male as well as the risk of genetic damage of medical surveillance should all be included
lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA rec- in the worker’s record. Where exposure to
ommends a 30 µg/dl maximum permissible lead is suspected, information concerning
blood lead level in both males and females on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eat-
who wish to bear children. ing habits in work areas, laundry procedures,
6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research and use of any protective clothing or res-
continue on the effects of lead on the human piratory protection equipment should be
body. Hypertension has frequently been noted. A complete work history is essential
noted in occupationally exposed individuals in the medical evaluation of a worker with
although it is difficult to assess whether this suspected lead toxicity, especially when long
is due to lead’s adverse effects on the kidney term effects such as neurotoxicity and
or if some other mechanism is involved. Vas- nephrotoxicity are considered.
cular and electrocardiographic changes have The medical history is also of fundamental
been detected but have not been well charac- importance and should include a listing of
terized. Lead is thought to impair thyroid all past and current medical conditions, cur-
function and interfere with the pituitary-ad- rent medications including proprietary drug
109
intake, previous surgeries and hospitaliza- and coordination should be examined along
tions, allergies, smoking history, alcohol with close observation for tremor. A detailed
consumption, and also non-occupational lead evaluation of peripheral nerve function in-
exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery). cluding careful sensory and motor function
Also known childhood exposures should be testing is warranted. Strength testing par-
elicited. Any previous history of ticularly of extensor muscle groups of all ex-
hematological, neurological, gastro- tremities is of fundamental importance.
intestinal, renal, psychological, gyneco- Cranial nerve evaluation should also be in-
logical, genetic, or reproductive problems cluded in the routine examination.
should be specifically noted. The abdominal examination should include
A careful and complete review of systems auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal
must be performed to assess both recognized bruits and palpation for organomegaly,
complaints and subtle or slowly acquired masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness.
symptoms which the worker might not ap- Cardiovascular examination should evalu-
preciate as being significant. The review of ate possible early signs of congestive heart
symptoms should include the following: failure. Pulmonary status should be ad-
1. General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased dressed particularly if respirator protection
appetite. is contemplated.
2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat As part of the medical evaluation, the in-
(HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or terim lead standard requires the following
decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or laboratory studies:
tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa,
1. Blood lead level
or metallic taste in mouth.
2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determina-
3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath,
tions, red cell indices, and examination of
cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthop-
the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red
nea.
4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting, blood cell morphology
heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or 3. Blood urea nitrogen
diarrhea. 4. Serum creatinine
5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia, 5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic ex-
weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of mem- amination.
ory, confusion, hallucinations, 6. A zinc protoporphyrin level.
incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in In addition to the above, the physician is
hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty authorized to order any further laboratory
in climbing stairs, or seizures. or other tests which he or she deems nec-
6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability, essary in accordance with sound medical
abnormal blood loss, melena. practice. The evaluation must also include
7. Reproductive (male and female and pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation
spouse where relevant)—history of infer- of male fertility if requested by the em-
tility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal ployee. Additional tests which are probably
menstrual periods, history of miscarriages, not warranted on a routine basis but may be
stillbirths, or children with birth defects. appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels
8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic
pains. acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in
The physical examination should empha- the urine, and dark-field illumination for de-
size the neurological, gastrointestinal, and tection of basophilic stippling in red blood
cardiovascular systems. The worker’s weight cells.
and blood pressure should be recorded and If an anemia is detected further studies in-
the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation cluding a careful examination of the periph-
characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead eral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for oc-
line on the gingiva. It should be noted, how- cult blood, serum iron, total iron binding ca-
ever, that the lead line may not be present pacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vita-
even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hy- min B12 and folate may be of value in at-
giene is practiced. tempting to identify the cause of the ane-
The presence of pallor on skin examination mia.
may indicate an anemia which, if severe, If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected,
might also be associated with a tachycardia. nerve conduction studies are warranted both
If an anemia is suspected, an active search for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any
for blood loss should be undertaken includ- therapy.
ing potential blood loss through the gastro- If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour
intestinal tract. urine collection for creatinine clearance,
A complete neurological examination protein, and electrolytes may be indicated.
should include an adequate mental status Elevated uric acid levels may result from
evaluation including a search for behavioral lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric
and psychological disturbances, memory acid level might be performed.
testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia, An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may
hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait be obtained as deemed appropriate.
110
Sophisticated and highly specialized test- marily due to individual variability in uri-
ing should not be done routinely and where nary excretion capacity as well as the tech-
indicated should be under the direction of a nical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour
specialist. urine collections. In addition, workers with
renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or
IV. Laboratory Evaluation some other cause, may have decreased lead
The blood lead level at present remains the clearance and consequently urine lead levels
single most important test to monitor lead may underestimate the true lead burden.
exposure and is the test used in the medical Therefore, urine lead levels should not be
surveillance program under the lead stand- used as a routine test.
ard to guide employee medical removal. The The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the
ZPP has several advantages over the blood blood lead determination, measures an ad-
lead level. Because of its relatively recent verse metabolic effect of lead and as such is
development and the lack of extensive data a better indicator of lead toxicity than the
concerning its interpretation, the ZPP cur- level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP re-
rently remains an ancillary test. flects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to
This section will discuss the blood lead 4 months, and therefore is a better indicator
level and ZPP in detail and will outline their of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more
relative advantages and disadvantages. time than the blood lead to read signifi-
Other blood tests currently available to cantly elevated levels; the return to normal
evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed. after discontinuing lead exposure is also
The blood lead level is a good index of cur- slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is sim-
rent or recent lead absorption when there is pler, faster, and less expensive to perform
no anemia present and when the worker has and no contamination is possible. Many in-
not taken any chelating agents. However, vestigators believe it is the most reliable
blood lead levels along with urinary lead lev- means of monitoring chronic lead absorp-
els do not necessarily indicate the total body tion.
burden of lead and are not adequate meas- Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhi-
ures of past exposure. One reason for this is bition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which
that lead has a high affinity for bone and up catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule
to 90% of the body’s total lead is deposited into the protoporphyrin molecule, which
there. A very important component of the then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted
total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue into the molecule then zinc, having a greater
(liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place
the lead body burden, the biologically active of the iron, forming ZPP.
lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead An elevation in the level of circulating
levels since it is a function of the dynamics ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as
of lead absorption, distribution, deposition 20–30 µg/dl in some workers. Once the blood
in bone and excretion. Following discontinu- lead level has reached 40 µg/dl there is more
ation of exposure to lead, the excess body marked rise in the ZPP value from its nor-
burden is only slowly mobilized from bone mal range of less than 100 µg/dl100 ml. In-
and other relatively stable body stores and creases in blood lead levels beyond 40 µg/100
excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead g are associated with exponential increases
level may only represent recent heavy expo- in ZPP.
sure to lead without a significant total body Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over
excess and likewise a low blood lead level short time spans, ZPP levels remain rel-
does not exclude an elevated total body bur- atively stable. ZPP is measured directly in
den of lead. red blood cells and is present for the cell’s
Also due to its correlation with recent ex- entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP
posures, the blood lead level may vary con- level in blood reflects the average ZPP pro-
siderably over short time intervals. duction over the previous 3–4 months and
To minimize laboratory error and erro- consequently the average lead exposure dur-
neous results due to contamination, blood ing that time interval.
specimens must be carefully collected after It is recommended that a hematocrit be de-
thorough cleaning of the skin with appro- termined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 µg/
priate methods using lead-free blood con- 100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a
tainers and analyzed by a reliable labora- significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is
tory. Under the standard, samples must be in excess of 100 µg/100 ml and not associated
analyzed in laboratories which are approved with abnormal elevations in blood lead lev-
by OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atom- els, the laboratory should be checked to be
ic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic sure that blood leads were determined using
stripping voltammetry or any method which atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic
meets the accuracy requirements set forth stripping voltammetry, or any method which
by the standard. meets the accuracy requirements set forth
The determination of lead in urine is gen- by the standard by an OSHA approved lab-
erally considered a less reliable monitoring oratory which is experienced in lead level de-
technique than analysis of whole blood pri- terminations. Repeat periodic blood lead
111
studies should be obtained in all individuals physician has a primary responsibility for
with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that evaluating potential lead toxicity in the
an associated elevated blood lead level has worker. It is only through a careful and de-
not been missed due to transient fluctua- tailed medical and work history, a complete
tions in blood leads. physical examination and appropriate lab-
ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spec- oratory testing that an accurate assessment
trum with a peak at 594 nm which is detect- can be made. Many of the adverse health ef-
able with a hematofluorimeter. The fects of lead toxicity are either irreversible
hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable or only partially reversible and therefore
and can provide on-site, instantaneous re- early detection of disease is very important.
sults for workers who can be frequently test- This document outlines the medical moni-
ed via a finger prick. toring program as defined by the occupa-
However, careful attention must be given tional safety and health standard for inor-
to calibration and quality control proce- ganic lead. It reviews the adverse health ef-
dures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP cor- fects of lead poisoning and describes the im-
relations and the ZPP levels which are asso- portant elements of the history and physical
ciated with the adverse health effects dis- examinations as they relate to these adverse
cussed in Section 2 are the major limitations effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory
of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate testing for evaluating lead exposure and tox-
ZPP levels with environmental exposure and icity is presented.
there is some variation of response with age It is hoped that this review and discussion
and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to will give the physician a better under-
be an important diagnostic test for the early standing of the OSHA standard with the ulti-
detection of lead toxicity and its value will mate goal of protecting the health and well-
increase as more data is collected regarding being of the worker exposed to lead under his
its relationship to other manifestations of or her care.
lead poisoning.
Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) [58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58
in the urine are also used as a measure of FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan.
ALA are believed to result from the inhibi- 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191,
tion of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid Aug. 24, 2006]
dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is rel-
atively easy to perform, inexpensive, and § 1926.64 Process safety management
rapid, the disadvantages include variability of highly hazardous chemicals.
in results, the necessity to collect a com-
Purpose. This section contains re-
plete 24 hour urine sample which has a spe-
cific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the quirements for preventing or mini-
fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of mizing the consequences of cata-
light. strophic releases of toxic, reactive,
The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the flammable, or explosive chemicals.
urine can also be helpful in identifying lead These releases may result in toxic, fire
intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine or explosion hazards.
concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II,
(a) Application. (1) This section ap-
porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The
most important increase, however, is that of plies to the following:
coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000 (i) A process which involves a chem-
µg/l in the urine in lead poisoned individuals, ical at or above the specified threshold
but its correlation with blood lead levels and quantities listed in Appendix A to this
ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. In- section;
creases in urinary porphyrins are not diag- (ii) A process which involves a flam-
nostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in mable liquid or gas (as defined in
porphyria, some liver diseases, and in pa-
§ 1926.59(c) of this part) on site in one
tients with high reticulocyte counts.
Summary. The Occupational Safety and location, in a quantity of 10,000 pounds
Health Administration’s interim standard (4535.9 kg) or more except for:
for inorganic lead in the construction indus- (A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for
try places significant emphasis on the med- workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g.,
ical surveillance of all workers exposed to propane used for comfort heating, gaso-
levels of inorganic lead above 30 µg/m3 TWA. line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels
The physician has a fundamental role in this are not a part of a process containing
surveillance program, and in the operation of
another highly hazardous chemical
the medical removal protection program.
Even with adequate worker education on covered by this standard;
the adverse health effects of lead and appro- (B) Flammable liquids stored in at-
priate training in work practices, personal mospheric tanks or transferred which
hygiene and other control measures, the are kept below their normal boiling
112
point without benefit of chilling or re- chemicals, or combination of these ac-

frigeration. tivities. For purposes of this definition,
(2) This section does not apply to: any group of vessels which are inter-
(i) Retail facilities; connected and separate vessels which
(ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv- are located such that a highly haz-
icing operations; or, ardous chemical could be involved in a
(iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa- potential release shall be considered a
cilities. single process.
(b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank Replacement in kind means a replace-
means a storage tank which has been ment which satisfies the design speci-
designed to operate at pressures from fication.
atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds Trade secret means any confidential
per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa). formula, pattern, process, device, infor-
Boiling point means the boiling point mation or compilation of information
of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds that is used in an employer’s business,
per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 and that gives the employer an oppor-
mm.). For the purposes of this section, tunity to obtain an advantage over
where an accurate boiling point is un- competitors who do not know or use it.
available for the material in question, Appendix D contained in § 1926.59 sets
or for mixtures which do not have a out the criteria to be used in evalu-
constant boiling point, the 10 percent ating trade secrets.
point of a distillation performed in ac- (c) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
cordance with the Standard Method of ers shall develop a written plan of ac-
Test for Distillation of Petroleum tion regarding the implementation of
Products, ASTM D-86-62, may be used the employee participation required by
as the boiling point of the liquid. this paragraph.
Catastrophic release means a major (2) Employers shall consult with em-
uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo- ployees and their representatives on
sion, involving one or more highly haz- the conduct and development of proc-
ardous chemicals, that presents serious ess hazards analyses and on the devel-
danger to employees in the workplace. opment of the other elements of proc-
Facility means the buildings, con- ess safety management in this stand-
tainers or equipment which contain a ard.
process. (3) Employers shall provide to em-
Highly hazardous chemical means a ployees and their representatives ac-
substance possessing toxic, reactive, cess to process hazard analyses and to
flammable, or explosive properties and all other information required to be de-
specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this veloped under this standard.
section. (d) Process safety information. In ac-
Hot work means work involving elec- cordance with the schedule set forth in
tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em-
similar flame or spark-producing oper- ployer shall complete a compilation of
ations. written process safety information be-
Normally unoccupied remote facility fore conducting any process hazard
means a facility which is operated, analysis required by the standard. The
maintained or serviced by employees compilation of written process safety
who visit the facility only periodically information is to enable the employer
to check its operation and to perform and the employees involved in oper-
necessary operating or maintenance ating the process to identify and under-
tasks. No employees are permanently stand the hazards posed by those proc-
stationed at the facility. Facilities esses involving highly hazardous
meeting this definition are not contig- chemicals. This process safety informa-
uous with, and must be geographically tion shall include information per-
remote from all other buildings, proc- taining to the hazards of the highly
esses or persons. hazardous chemicals used or produced
Process means any activity involving by the process, information pertaining
a highly hazardous chemical including to the technology of the process, and
any use, storage, manufacturing, han- information pertaining to the equip-
dling, or the on-site movement of such ment in the process.
113
(1) Information pertaining to the haz- nized and generally accepted good engi-
ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in neering practices.
the process. This information shall con- (iii) For existing equipment designed
sist of at least the following: and constructed in accordance with
(i) Toxicity information; codes, standards, or practices that are
(ii) Permissible exposure limits; no longer in general use, the employer
(iii) Physical data; shall determine and document that the
(iv) Reactivity data: equipment is designed, maintained, in-
(v) Corrosivity data; spected, tested, and operating in a safe
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability manner.
data; and (e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent employer shall perform an initial proc-
mixing of different materials that ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation)
could foreseeably occur. on processes covered by this standard.
NOTE: Material Safety Data Sheets meet- The process hazard analysis shall be
ing the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59(g) appropriate to the complexity of the
may be used to comply with this require-
process and shall identify, evaluate,
ment to the extent they contain the infor-
mation required by this subparagraph. and control the hazards involved in the
(2) Information pertaining to the tech- process. Employers shall determine and
nology of the process. (i) Information document the priority order for con-
concerning the technology of the proc- ducting process hazard analyses based
ess shall include at least the following: on a rationale which includes such con-
(A) A block flow diagram or sim- siderations as extent of the process
plified process flow diagram (see Ap- hazards, number of potentially affected
pendix B to this section); employees, age of the process, and op-
(B) Process chemistry; erating history of the process. The
(C) Maximum intended inventory; process hazard analysis shall be con-
(D) Safe upper and lower limits for ducted as soon as possible, but not
such items as temperatures, pressures, later than the following schedule:
flows or compositions; and, (i) No less than 25 percent of the ini-
(E) An evaluation of the con- tial process hazards analyses shall be
sequences of deviations, including completed by May 26, 1994;
those affecting the safety and health of (ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini-
employees. tial process hazards analyses shall be
(ii) Where the original technical in- completed by May 26, 1995;
formation no longer exists, such infor- (iii) No less than 75 percent of the
mation may be developed in conjunc- initial process hazards analyses shall
tion with the process hazard analysis be completed by May 26, 1996;
in sufficient detail to support the anal- (iv) All initial process hazards anal-
ysis. yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997.
(3) Information pertaining to the equip- (v) Process hazards analyses com-
ment in the process. (i) Information per- pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet
taining to the equipment in the process the requirements of this paragraph are
shall include: acceptable as initial process hazards
(A) Materials of construction; analyses. These process hazard anal-
(B) Piping and instrument diagrams yses shall be updated and revalidated,
(P&ID’s); based on their completion date, in ac-
(C) Electrical classification; cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this
(D) Relief system design and design standard.
basis; (2) The employer shall use one or
(E) Ventilation system design; more of the following methodologies
(F) Design codes and standards em- that are appropriate to determine and
ployed; evaluate the hazards of the process
(G) Material and energy balances for being analyzed.
processes built after May 26, 1992; and, (i) What-If;
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, (ii) Checklist;
detection or suppression systems). (iii) What-If/Checklist;
(ii) The employer shall document (iv) Hazard and Operability Study
that equipment complies with recog- (HAZOP);
114
(v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis dated by a team meeting the require-
(FMEA); ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec-
(vi) Fault-Tree Analysis; or tion, to assure that the process hazard
(vii) An appropriate equivalent meth- analysis is consistent with the current
odology. process.
(3) The process hazard analysis shall (7) Employers shall retain process
address: hazards analyses and updates or re-
(i) The hazards of the process; validations for each process covered by
(ii) The identification of any previous this section, as well as the documented
incident which had a likely potential resolution of recommendations de-
for catastrophic consequences in the scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
workplace; tion for the life of the process.
(iii) Engineering and administrative (f) Operating procedures. (1) The em-
controls applicable to the hazards and ployer shall develop and implement
their interrelationships such as appro- written operating procedures that pro-
priate application of detection meth- vide clear instructions for safely con-
odologies to provide early warning of ducting activities involved in each cov-
releases. (Acceptable detection meth- ered process consistent with the proc-
ods might include process monitoring ess safety information and shall ad-
and control instrumentation with dress at least the following elements.
alarms, and detection hardware such as
(i) Steps for each operating phase:
hydrocarbon sensors.);
(A) Initial startup;
(iv) Consequences of failure of engi-
neering and administrative controls; (B) Normal operations;
(v) Facility siting; (C) Temporary operations;
(vi) Human factors; and (D) Emergency shutdown including
(vii) A qualitative evaluation of a the conditions under which emergency
range of the possible safety and health shutdown is required, and the assign-
effects of failure of controls on employment of shutdown responsibility to
ees in the workplace. qualified operators to ensure that
(4) The process hazard analysis shall emergency shutdown is executed in a
be performed by a team with expertise safe and timely manner.
in engineering and process operations, (E) Emergency operations;
and the team shall include at least one (F) Normal shutdown; and,
employee who has experience and (G) Startup following a turnaround,
knowledge specific to the process being or after an emergency shutdown.
evaluated. Also, one member of the (ii) Operating limits:
team must be knowledgeable in the (A) Consequences of deviation; and
specific process hazard analysis meth- (B) Steps required to correct or avoid
odology being used. deviation.
(5) The employer shall establish a
(iii) Safety and health consider-
system to promptly address the team’s
ations:
findings and recommendations; assure
(A) Properties of, and hazards pre-
that the recommendations are resolved
sented by, the chemicals used in the
in a timely manner and that the reso-
process;
lution is documented; document what
actions are to be taken; complete ac- (B) Precautions necessary to prevent
tions as soon as possible; develop a exposure, including engineering con-
written schedule of when these actions trols, administrative controls, and per-
are to be completed; communicate the sonal protective equipment;
actions to operating, maintenance and (C) Control measures to be taken if
other employees whose work assign- physical contact or airborne exposure
ments are in the process and who may occurs;
be affected by the recommendations or (D) Quality control for raw materials
actions. and control of hazardous chemical in-
(6) At least every five (5) years after ventory levels; and,
the completion of the initial process (E) Any special or unique hazards.
hazard analysis, the process hazard (iv) Safety systems and their func-
analysis shall be updated and revali- tions.
115
(2) Operating procedures shall be (3) Training documentation. The em-

readily accessible to employees who ployer shall ascertain that each em-
work in or maintain a process. ployee involved in operating a process
(3) The operating procedures shall be has received and understood the train-
reviewed as often as necessary to as- ing required by this paragraph. The
sure that they reflect current oper- employer shall prepare a record which
ating practice, including changes that contains the identity of the employee,
result from changes in process chemi- the date of training, and the means
cals, technology, and equipment, and used to verify that the employee under-
changes to facilities. The employer stood the training.
shall certify annually that these oper- (h) Contractors—(1) Application. This
ating procedures are current and accu- paragraph applies to contractors per-
rate. forming maintenance or repair, turn-
(4) The employer shall develop and around, major renovation, or specialty
implement safe work practices to pro- work on or adjacent to a covered proc-
vide for the control of hazards during ess. It does not apply to contractors
operations such as lockout/tagout; con- providing incidental services which do
fined space entry; opening process not influence process safety, such as
equipment or piping; and control over janitorial work, food and drink serv-
entrance into a facility by mainte- ices, laundry, delivery or other supply
nance, contractor, laboratory, or other services.
support personnel. These safe work (2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The
practices shall apply to employees and
employer, when selecting a contractor,
contractor employees.
shall obtain and evaluate information
(g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i) regarding the contract employer’s safe-
Each employee presently involved in ty performance and programs.
operating a process, and each employee
(ii) The employer shall inform con-
before being involved in operating a
tract employers of the known potential
newly assigned process, shall be
fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards
trained in an overview of the process
related to the contractor’s work and
and in the operating procedures as
the process.
specified in paragraph (f) of this sec-
tion. The training shall include empha- (iii) The employer shall explain to
sis on the specific safety and health contract employers the applicable pro-
hazards, emergency operations includ- visions of the emergency action plan
ing shutdown, and safe work practices required by paragraph (n) of this sec-
applicable to the employee’s job tasks. tion.
(ii) In lieu of initial training for (iv) The employer shall develop and
those employees already involved in implement safe work practices con-
operating a process on May 26, 1992, an sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec-
employer may certify in writing that tion, to control the entrance, presence
the employee has the required knowl- and exit of contract employers and
edge, skills, and abilities to safely contract employees in covered process
carry out the duties and responsibil- areas.
ities as specified in the operating pro- (v) The employer shall periodically
cedures. evaluate the performance of contract
(2) Refresher training. Refresher train- employers in fulfilling their obliga-
ing shall be provided at least every tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of
three years, and more often if nec- this section.
essary, to each employee involved in (vi) The employer shall maintain a
operating a process to assure that the contract employee injury and illness
employee understands and adheres to log related to the contractor’s work in
the current operating procedures of the process areas.
process. The employer, in consultation (3) Contract employer responsibilities.
with the employees involved in oper- (i) The contract employer shall assure
ating the process, shall determine the that each contract employee is trained
appropriate frequency of refresher in the work practices necessary to safe-
training. ly perform his/her job.
116
(ii) The contract employer shall as- (i) Pressure vessels and storage
sure that each contract employee is in- tanks;
structed in the known potential fire, (ii) Piping systems (including piping
explosion, or toxic release hazards re- components such as valves);
lated to his/her job and the process, (iii) Relief and vent systems and de-
and the applicable provisions of the vices;
emergency action plan. (iv) Emergency shutdown systems;
(iii) The contract employer shall doc- (v) Controls (including monitoring
ument that each contract employee devices and sensors, alarms, and inter-
has received and understood the train- locks) and,
ing required by this paragraph. The (vi) Pumps.
contract employer shall prepare a (2) Written procedures. The employer
record which contains the identity of shall establish and implement written
the contract employee, the date of procedures to maintain the on-going
training, and the means used to verify integrity of process equipment.
that the employee understood the (3) Training for process maintenance
training. activities. The employer shall train each
(iv) The contract employer shall as- employee involved in maintaining the
sure that each contract employee fol- on-going integrity of process equip-
lows the safety rules of the facility in- ment in an overview of that process
cluding the safe work practices re- and its hazards and in the procedures
quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- applicable to the employee’s job tasks
tion. to assure that the employee can per-
(v) The contract employer shall ad- form the job tasks in a safe manner.
vise the employer of any unique haz- (4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec-
ards presented by the contract employ- tions and tests shall be performed on
er’s work, or of any hazards found by process equipment.
the contract employer’s work. (ii) Inspection and testing procedures
shall follow recognized and generally
(i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The
accepted good engineering practices.
employer shall perform a pre-startup
(iii) The frequency of inspections and
safety review for new facilities and for
tests of process equipment shall be con-
modified facilities when the modifica-
sistent with applicable manufacturers’
tion is significant enough to require a
recommendations and good engineering
change in the process safety informa-
practices, and more frequently if deter-
tion.
mined to be necessary by prior oper-
(2) The pre-startup safety review ating experience.
shall confirm that prior to the intro- (iv) The employer shall document
duction of highly hazardous chemicals each inspection and test that has been
to a process: performed on process equipment. The
(i) Construction and equipment is in documentation shall identify the date
accordance with design specifications; of the inspection or test, the name of
(ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, the person who performed the inspec-
and emergency procedures are in place tion or test, the serial number or other
and are adequate; identifier of the equipment on which
(iii) For new facilities, a process haz- the inspection or test was performed, a
ard analysis has been performed and description of the inspection or test
recommendations have been resolved performed, and the results of the in-
or implemented before startup; and spection or test.
modified facilities meet the require- (5) Equipment deficiencies. The em-
ments contained in management of ployer shall correct deficiencies in
change, paragraph (l). equipment that are outside acceptable
(iv) Training of each employee in- limits (defined by the process safety in-
volved in operating a process has been formation in paragraph (d) of this sec-
completed. tion) before further use or in a safe and
(j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica- timely manner when necessary means
tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of are taken to assure safe operation.
this section apply to the following (6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con-
process equipment: struction of new plants and equipment,
117
the employer shall assure that equip- (5) If a change covered by this para-
ment as it is fabricated is suitable for graph results in a change in the oper-
the process application for which they ating procedures or practices required
will be used. by paragraph (f) of this section, such
(ii) Appropriate checks and inspec- procedures or practices shall be up-
tions shall be performed to assure that dated accordingly.
equipment is installed properly and (m) Incident investigation. (1) The em-
consistent with design specifications ployer shall investigate each incident
and the manufacturer’s instructions. which resulted in, or could reasonably
(iii) The employer shall assure that have resulted in a catastrophic release
maintenance materials, spare parts and of highly hazardous chemical in the
equipment are suitable for the process workplace.
application for which they will be used. (2) An incident investigation shall be
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer initiated as promptly as possible, but
shall issue a hot work permit for hot not later than 48 hours following the
work operations conducted on or near a incident.
covered process. (3) An incident investigation team
(2) The permit shall document that shall be established and consist of at
the fire prevention and protection re- least one person knowledgeable in the
quirements in 29 CFR 1926.352 have process involved, including a contract
been implemented prior to beginning employee if the incident involved work
the hot work operations; it shall indi- of the contractor, and other persons
cate the date(s) authorized for hot with appropriate knowledge and experi-
work; and identify the object on which ence to thoroughly investigate and
hot work is to be performed. The per- analyze the incident.
mit shall be kept on file until comple- (4) A report shall be prepared at the
tion of the hot work operations. conclusion of the investigation which
(l) Management of change. (1) The em- includes at a minimum:
ployer shall establish and implement (i) Date of incident;
written procedures to manage changes (ii) Date investigation began;
(except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to (iii) A description of the incident;
process chemicals, technology, equip- (iv) The factors that contributed to
ment, and procedures; and, changes to the incident; and,
facilities that affect a covered process. (v) Any recommendations resulting
(2) The procedures shall assure that from the investigation.
the following considerations are ad- (5) The employer shall establish a
dressed prior to any change: system to promptly address and resolve
(i) The technical basis for the pro- the incident report findings and rec-
posed change; ommendations. Resolutions and correc-
(ii) Impact of change on safety and tive actions shall be documented.
health; (6) The report shall be reviewed with
(iii) Modifications to operating pro- all affected personnel whose job tasks
cedures; are relevant to the incident findings in-
(iv) Necessary time period for the cluding contract employees where ap-
change; and, plicable.
(v) Authorization requirements for (7) Incident investigation reports
the proposed change. shall be retained for five years.
(3) Employees involved in operating a (n) Emergency planning and re-
process and maintenance and contract sponse. The employer shall establish
employees whose job tasks will be af- and implement an emergency action
fected by a change in the process shall plan for the entire plant in accordance
be informed of, and trained in, the with the provisions of 29 CFR 1926.35(a).
change prior to start-up of the process In addition, the emergency action plan
or affected part of the process. shall include procedures for handling
(4) If a change covered by this para- small releases. Employers covered
graph results in a change in the process under this standard may also be sub-
safety information required by para- ject to the hazardous waste and emer-
graph (d) of this section, such informa- gency response provisions contained in
tion shall be updated accordingly. 29 CFR 1926.65(a), (p) and (q).
118
(o) Compliance audits. (1) Employers APPENDIX A TO § 1926.64—LIST OF HIGH-

shall certify that they have evaluated LY HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS
compliance with the provisions of this AND REACTIVES (MANDATORY)
section at least every three years to This Appendix contains a listing of toxic
verify that the procedures and prac- and reactive highly hazardous chemicals
tices developed under the standard are which present a potential for a catastrophic
adequate and are being followed. event at or above the threshold quantity.
(2) The compliance audit shall be
conducted by at least one person Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
knowledgeable in the process.
Acetaldehyde ......................... 75-07-0 2500
(3) A report of the findings of the Acrolein (2-Propenal) ............ 107-02-8 150
audit shall be developed. Acrylyl Chloride ..................... 814-68-6 250
(4) The employer shall promptly de- Allyl Chloride ......................... 107-05-1 1000
termine and document an appropriate Allylamine .............................. 107-11-9 1000
response to each of the findings of the Alkylaluminums ..................... Varies 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous ............ 7664-41-7 10000
compliance audit, and document that Ammonia solutions (greater
deficiencies have been corrected. than 44% ammonia by
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) weight) ............................... 7664-41-7 15000
most recent compliance audit reports. Ammonium Perchlorate ......... 7790-98-9 500
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall Ammonium Permanganate ... 7787-36-2 7500
Arsine (also called Arsenic
make all information necessary to Hydride) ............................. 7784-42-1 100
comply with the section available to Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ........ 542-88-1 100
those persons responsible for compiling Boron Trichloride ................... 10294-34-5 2500
the process safety information (re- Boron Trifluoride .................... 7637-07-2 250
quired by paragraph (d) of this section), Bromine ................................. 7726-95-6 1500
those assisting in the development of Bromine Chloride .................. 13863-41-7 1500
Bromine Pentafluoride ........... 7789-30-2 2500
the process hazard analysis (required Bromine Trifluoride ................ 7787-71-5 15000
by paragraph (e) of this section), those 3-Bromopropyne (also called
responsible for developing the oper- Propargyl Bromide) ............ 106-96-7 100
ating procedures (required by para- Butyl Hydroperoxide (Ter-
graph (f) of this section), and those in- tiary) ................................... 75-91-2 5000
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614-45-9 7500
volved in incident investigations (re-
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phos-
quired by paragraph (m) of this sec- gene) .................................. 75-44-5 100
tion), emergency planning and response * Carbonyl Fluoride ............... 353-50-4 2500
(paragraph (n) of this section) and com- Cellulose Nitrate (concentra-
pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this tion greater than 12.6% ni-
section) without regard to possible trogen ................................. 9004-70-0 2500
Chlorine ................................. 7782-50-5 1500
trade secret status of such informa- Chlorine Dioxide .................... 10049-04-4 1000
tion. Chlorine Pentrafluoride ......... 13637-63-3 1000
(2) Nothing in this paragraph shall Chlorine Trifluoride ................ 7790-91-2 1000
preclude the employer from requiring Chlorodiethylaluminum (also
the persons to whom the information is called Diethylaluminum
made available under paragraph (p)(1) Chloride) ............................ 96-10-6 5000
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97-00-7 5000
of this section to enter into confiden- Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .... 107-30-2 500
tiality agreements not to disclose the Chloropicrin ........................... 76-06-2 500
information as set forth in 29 CFR Chloropicrin and Methyl Bro-
1926.59. mide mixture ...................... None 1500
(3) Subject to the rules and proce- Chloropicrin and Methyl Chlo-
ride mixture ........................ None 1500
dures set forth in 29 CFR 1926.59(i) (1) Cumene Hydroperoxide ........ 80-15-9 5000
through (12), employees and their des- Cyanogen .............................. 460-19-5 2500
ignated representatives shall have ac- Cyanogen Chloride ............... 506-77-4 500
cess to trade secret information con- Cyanuric Fluoride .................. 675-14-9 100
tained within the process hazard anal- Diacetyl Peroxide (concentra-
ysis and other documents required to tion greater than 70%) ....... 110-22-5 5000
Diazomethane ....................... 334-88-3 500
be developed by this standard. Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............... 94-36-0 7500
Diborane ................................ 19287-45-7 100
119
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .... 110-05-4 5000 Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100-01-6 5000
Dichloro Acetylene ................ 7572-29-4 250 Nitromethane ......................... 75-52-5 2500
Dichlorosilane ........................ 4109-96-0 2500 Nitrogen Dioxide .................... 10102-44-0 250
Diethylzinc ............................. 557-20-0 10000 Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO(2);
Diisopropyl N2O4; N2O3) ..................... 10102-44-0 250
Peroxydicarbonate ............. 105-64-6 7500 Nitrogen Tetroxide (also
Dilauroyl Peroxide ................. 105-74-8 7500 called Nitrogen Peroxide) .. 10544-72-6 250
Dimethyldichlorosilane .......... 75-78-5 1000 Nitrogen Trifluoride ................ 7783-54-2 5000
Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ........ 57-14-7 1000 Nitrogen Trioxide ................... 10544-73-7 250
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ... 124-40-3 2500 Oleum (65% to 80% by
2,4-Dinitroaniline ................... 97-02-9 5000 weight; also called Fuming
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide Sulfuric Acid) ..................... 8014-94-7 1000
(also Methyl Ethyl Ketone Osmium Tetroxide ................. 20816-12-0 100
Peroxide; concentration Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine
greater than 60%) .............. 1338-23-4 5000 Monoxide) .......................... 7783-41-7 100
Ethyl Nitrite ............................ 109-95-5 5000 Ozone .................................... 10028-15-6 100
Ethylamine ............................. 75-04-7 7500 Pentaborane .......................... 19624-22-7 100
Ethylene Fluorohydrin ........... 371-62-0 100 Peracetic Acid (concentration
Ethylene Oxide ...................... 75-21-8 5000 greater 60% Acetic Acid;
Ethyleneimine ........................ 151-56-4 1000 also called Peroxyacetic
Fluorine ................................. 7782-41-4 1000 Acid) ................................... 79-21-0 1000
Formaldehyde (Formalin) ...... 50-00-0 1000 Perchloric Acid (concentration
Furan ..................................... 110-00-9 500 greater than 60% by
Hexafluoroacetone ................ 684-16-2 5000 weight) ............................... 7601-90-3 5000
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647-01-0 5000 Perchloromethyl Mercaptan .. 594-42-3 150
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664-39-3 1000 Perchloryl Fluoride ................ 7616-94-6 5000
Hydrogen Bromide ................ 10035-10-6 5000 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentra-
Hydrogen Chloride ................ 7647-01-0 5000 tion greater than 60% Ace-
Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhy- tic Acid; also called Per-
drous .................................. 74-90-8 1000 acetic Acid) ........................ 79-21-0 1000
Hydrogen Fluoride ................. 7664-39-3 1000 Phosgene (also called Car-
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by bonyl Chloride) .................. 75-44-5 100
weight or greater) .............. 7722-84-1 7500 Phosphine (Hydrogen
Hydrogen Selenide ................ 7783-07-5 150 Phosphide) ......................... 7803-51-2 100
Hydrogen Sulfide ................... 7783-06-4 1500 Phosphorus Oxychloride
Hydroxylamine ....................... 7803-49-8 2500 (also called Phosphoryl
Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............... 13463-40-6 250 Chloride) ............................ 10025-87-3 1000
Isopropylamine ...................... 75-31-0 5000 Phosphorus Trichloride ......... 7719-12-2 1000
Ketene ................................... 463-51-4 100 Phosphoryl Chloride (also
Methacrylaldehyde ................ 78-85-3 1000 called Phosphorus
Methacryloyl Chloride ............ 920-46-7 150 Oxychloride) ....................... 10025-87-3 1000
Methacryloyloxyethyl Propargyl Bromide ................ 106-96-7 100
Isocyanate ......................... 30674-80-7 100 Propyl Nitrate ........................ 627-3-4 2500
Methyl Acrylonitrile ................ 126-98-7 250 Sarin ...................................... 107-44-8 100
Methylamine, Anhydrous ....... 74-89-5 1000 Selenium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-79-1 1000
Methyl Bromide ..................... 74-83-9 2500 Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ... 7803-52-3 500
Methyl Chloride ..................... 74-87-3 15000 Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) ............ 7446-09-5 1000
Methyl Chloroformate ............ 79-22-1 500 Sulfur Pentafluoride ............... 5714-22-7 250
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide Sulfur Tetrafluoride ................ 7783-60-0 250
(concentration greater than Sulfur Trioxide (also called
60%) .................................. 1338-23-4 5000 Sulfuric Anhydride) ............ 7446-11-9 1000
Methyl Fluoroacetate ............. 453-18-9 100 Sulfuric Anhydride (also
Methyl Fluorosulfate .............. 421-20-5 100 called Sulfur Trioxide) ........ 7446-11-9 1000
Methyl Hydrazine .................. 60-34-4 100 Tellurium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-80-4 250
Methyl Iodide ......................... 74-88-4 7500 Tetrafluoroethylene ............... 116-14-3 5000
Methyl Isocyanate ................. 624-83-9 250 Tetrafluorohydrazine ............. 10036-47-2 5000
Methyl Mercaptan .................. 74-93-1 5000 Tetramethyl Lead .................. 75-74-1 1000
Methyl Vinyl Ketone .............. 79-84-4 100 Thionyl Chloride .................... 7719-09-7 250
Methyltrichlorosilane .............. 75-79-6 500 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Sil-
Nickel Carbonly (Nickel ane ..................................... 1558-25-4 100
Tetracarbonyl) .................... 13463-39-3 150 Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Sil-
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight ane ..................................... 27137-85-5 2500
or greater) .......................... 7697-37-2 500 Trichlorosilane ....................... 10025-78-2 5000
Nitric Oxide ............................ 10102-43-9 250 Trifluorochloroethylene .......... 79-38-9 10000
120
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount

necessary to be covered by this standard.)
Trimethyoxysilane ................. 2487-90-3 1500
* Chemical Abstract Service Number
121
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.64—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)
122
EC30OC91.008</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.64—COMPLIANCE could expose employees and others to serious

GUIDELINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS hazards. An effective process safety manage-
FOR PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT ment program requires a systematic ap-
(NONMANDATORY) proach to evaluating the whole process.
Using this approach the process design, proc-
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory ess technology, operational and maintenance
guideline to assist employers and employees activities and procedures, nonroutine activi-
in complying with the requirements of this ties and procedures, emergency preparedness
section, as well as provides other helpful rec- plans and procedures, training programs, and
ommendations and information. Examples other elements which impact the process are
presented in this appendix are not the only all considered in the evaluation. The various
means of achieving the performance goals in lines of defense that have been incorporated
the standard. This appendix neither adds nor into the design and operation of the process
detracts from the requirements of the stand- to prevent or mitigate the release of haz-
ard. ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and
1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- strengthened to assure their effectiveness at
ment. The major objective of process safety each level. Process safety management is the
management of highly hazardous chemicals
proactive identification, evaluation and
is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous
chemicals especially into locations which
123
EC30OC91.009</GPH>
mitigation or prevention of chemical re- tigations required by the process safety man-
leases that could occur as a result of failures agement program. Many employers, under
in process, procedures or equipment. their safety and health programs, have al-
The process safety management standard ready established means and methods to
targets highly hazardous chemicals that keep employees and their representatives in-
have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health
incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt
employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their
gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational
possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form
control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees
need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the
periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by
tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become
plement and maintain an effective process a significant ally in helping the employer to
safety management program as envisioned in implement and maintain an effective process
the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is safety management program for all employ-
required by the Clean Air Act Amendments ees.
as is the Environmental Protection Agency’s 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and
Risk Management Plan. Employers, who accurate written information concerning
merge the two sets of requirements into process chemicals, process technology, and
their process safety management program, process equipment is essential to an effective
will better assure full compliance with each process safety management program and to a
as well as enhancing their relationship with process hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
the local community. mation will be a necessary resource to a va-
While OSHA believes process safety man- riety of users including the team that will
agement will have a positive effect on the perform the process hazards analysis as re-
safety of employees in workplaces and also quired under paragraph (e); those developing
offers other potential benefits to employers the training programs and the operating pro-
(increased productivity), smaller businesses cedures; contractors whose employees will be
which may have limited resources available working with the process; those conducting
to them at this time, might consider alter- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
native avenues of decreasing the risks asso- preparedness planners; and insurance and en-
ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at forcement officials.
their workplaces. One method which might The information to be compiled about the
be considered is the reduction in the inven- chemicals, including process intermediates,
tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac-
reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- curate assessment of the fire and explosion
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe-
strophic incident. Also, employers including ty and health hazards to workers, and the
small employers may be able to establish corrosion and erosion effects on the process
more efficient inventory control by reducing equipment and monitoring tools. Current
the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals material safety data sheet (MSDS) informa-
on site below the established threshold quan- tion can be used to help meet this require-
tities. This reduction can be accomplished ment which must be supplemented with
by ordering smaller shipments and maintain- process chemistry information including
ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef- runaway reaction and over pressure hazards
ficient and safe operation. When reduced in- if applicable.
ventory is not feasible, then the employer Process technology information will be a
might consider dispersing inventory to sev- part of the process safety information pack-
eral locations on site. Dispersing storage age and it is expected that it will include
into locations where a release in one loca- diagrams of the type shown in Appendix B of
tion will not cause a release in another loca- this section as well as employer established
tion is a practical method to also reduce the criteria for maximum inventory levels for
risk or potential for catastrophic incidents. process chemicals; limits beyond which
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety would be considered upset conditions; and a
Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act qualitative estimate of the consequences or
Amendments states that employers are to results of deviation that could occur if oper-
consult with their employees and their rep- ating beyond the established process limits.
resentatives regarding the employers efforts Employers are encouraged to use diagrams
in the development and implementation of which will help users understand the process.
the process safety management program ele- A block flow diagram is used to show the
ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 major process equipment and inter-
also requires employers to train and educate connecting process flow lines and show flow
their employees and to inform affected em- rates, stream composition, temperatures,
ployees of the findings from incident inves- and pressures when necessary for clarity.
124
The block flow diagram is a simplified dia- 4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard
gram. analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process
Process flow diagrams are more complex hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor-
and will show all main flow streams includ- tant elements of the process safety manage-
ing valves to enhance the understanding of ment program. A PHA is an organized and
the process, as well as pressures and tem- systematic effort to identify and analyze the
peratures on all feed and product lines with- significance of potential hazards associated
in all major vessels, in and out of headers with the processing or handling of highly
and heat exchangers, and points of pressure hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor-
and temperature control. Also, materials of mation which will assist employers and em-
construction information, pump capacities ployees in making decisions for improving
and pressure heads, compressor horsepower safety and reducing the consequences of un-
and vessel design pressures and temperatures wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana-
dition, major components of control loops lyzing potential causes and consequences of
are usually shown along with key utilities fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam-
on process flow diagrams. mable chemicals and major spills of haz-
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&Ids) ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip-
may be the more appropriate type of dia- ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac-
grams to show some of the above details and tions (routine and nonroutine), and external
to display the information for the piping de- factors that might impact the process. These
signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are considerations assist in determining the haz-
to be used to describe the relationships be- ards and potential failure points or failure
tween equipment and instrumentation as modes in a process.
well as other relevant information that will
The selection of a PHA methodology or
enhance clarity. Computer software pro-
technique will be influenced by many factors
grams which do P&Ids or other diagrams
useful to the information package, may be including the amount of existing knowledge
used to help meet this requirement. about the process. Is it a process that has
been operated for a long period of time with
The information pertaining to process
equipment design must be documented. In little or no innovation and extensive experi-
other words, what were the codes and stand- ence has been generated with its use? Or, is
ards relied on to establish good engineering it a new process or one which has been
practice. These codes and standards are pub- changed frequently by the inclusion of inno-
lished by such organizations as the American vative features? Also, the size and com-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, American plexity of the process will influence the deci-
Petroleum Institute, American National sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology
Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
tion Association, American Society for Test- certain limitations. For example, the check-
ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler list methodology works well when the proc-
and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- ess is very stable and no changes are made,
sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American but it is not as effective when the process
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa- has undergone extensive change. The check-
tion, and model building code groups. list may miss the most recent changes and
In addition, various engineering societies consequently the changes would not be eval-
issue technical reports which impact process uated. Another limitation to be considered
design. For example, the American Institute concerns the assumptions made by the team
of Chemical Engineers has published tech- or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
nical reports on topics such as two phase judgement and the assumptions made during
flow for venting devices. This type of tech- the study need to be documented and under-
nically recognized report would constitute stood by the team and reviewer and kept for
good engineering practice. a future PHA.
For existing equipment designed and con- The team conducting the PHA need to un-
structed many years ago in accordance with derstand the methodology that is going to be
the codes and standards available at that used. A PHA team can vary in size from two
time and no longer in general use today, the people to a number of people with varied
employer must document which codes and operational and technical backgrounds.
standards were used and that the design and Some team members may only be a part of
construction along with the testing, inspec- the team for a limited time. The team leader
tion and operation are still suitable for the needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper
intended use. Where the process technology implementation of the PHA methodology
requires a design which departs from the ap- that is to be used and should be impartial in
plicable codes and standards, the employer the evaluation. The other full or part time
must document that the design and con- team members need to provide the team with
struction is suitable for the intended pur- expertise in areas such as process tech-
pose. nology, process design, operating procedures
125
and practices, including how the work is ac- less data, P&IDs, and process information is
tually performed, alarms, emergency proce- needed to perform a process hazard analysis.
dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce- Many small businesses have processes that
dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in- are not unique, such as cold storage lockers
cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro- or water treatment facilities. Where em-
curement of parts and supplies, safety and ployer associations have a number of mem-
health, and any other relevant subject as the bers with such facilities, a generic PHA,
need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques-
must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each
The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par-
knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli-
tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them.
ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc-
bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer
leader needs to be able to manage the team must set up a priority system of which PHAs
and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz-
able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined
side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety
a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should
the recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po-
The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest
involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing
for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a
a process involving a series of unit oper- chemical release, the number of potentially
ations of varying sizes, complexities, and affected employees, the operating history of
ages may use different methodologies and the process such as the frequency of chem-
team members for each operation. Then the ical releases, the age of the process and any
conclusions can be integrated into one final other relevant factors. These factors would
study and evaluation. A more specific exam- suggest a ranking order and would suggest
ple is the use of a checklist PHA for a stand- either using a weighing factor system or a
ard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process
custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby
representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im-
there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility.
other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap-
documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth-
batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In-
might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers’ Center for
is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see Appendix D).
moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper-
neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per-
plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi-
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col-
being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to
PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech-
the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ-
PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that
continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process
rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as
such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper-
ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent
each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in
the final results. the process and that the operating param-
Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures
covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and
esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are
pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions
at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe-
anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly.
gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific
ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to
process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the
time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc-
less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the
126
applicable safety precautions and should within the process area, such as nonroutine
contain appropriate information on safety tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards
implications. For example, the operating of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating
procedures addressing operating parameters personnel in accordance with established
will contain operating instructions about procedures and to those performing the ac-
pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow tual tasks. When the work is completed, op-
rates, what to do when an upset condition erating personnel should be informed to pro-
occurs, what alarms and instruments are vide closure on the job.
pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ-
other subjects. Another example of using oping maintenance and contractor employees,
erating instructions to properly implement involved with highly hazardous chemicals
operating procedures is in starting up or need to fully understand the safety and
shutting down the process. In these cases, health hazards of the chemicals and proc-
different parameters will be required from esses they work with for the protection of
those of normal operation. These operating themselves, their fellow employees and the
instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- citizens of nearby communities. Training
tinctions between startup and normal oper- conducted in compliance with 1926.59, the
ations such as the appropriate allowances for Hazard Communication standard, will help
heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- employees to be more knowledgeable about
ating parameters. Also the operating in- the chemicals they work with as well as fa-
structions need to describe the proper meth- miliarize them with reading and under-
od for increasing the temperature of the unit standing MSDS. However, additional train-
until the normal operating temperature pa- ing in subjects such as operating procedures
rameters are achieved. and safety work practices, emergency evacu-
Computerized process control systems add ation and response, safety procedures, rou-
complexity to operating instructions. These tine and nonroutine work authorization ac-
operating instructions need to describe the tivities, and other areas pertinent to process
logic of the software as well as the relation- safety and health will need to be covered by
ship between the equipment and the control an employer’s training program.
system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to In establishing their training programs,
the operator. employers must clearly define the employees
Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be
important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set-
The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to
the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives
operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that
ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn-
derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in
ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training
and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be
ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod-
addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe
changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under
ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com-
procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac-
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance.
and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are
sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening,
the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper-
ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control
brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by
evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or
dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types
All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and
coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the
erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the
must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper-
dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment
process is shutdown in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the
change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course,
be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic
Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in
must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while
ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences
such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happens if they do not follow
ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other
personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-
127
job training can also be very effective for knowledge of work activities involving con-
teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im- tract employees working on or adjacent to
portant information. An effective training covered processes. Injury and illness logs of
program will allow the employee to fully both the employer’s employees and contract
participate in the training process and to employees allow an employer to have full
practice their skill or knowledge. knowledge of process injury and illness expe-
Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa-
their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing
essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and
being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations.
by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their
methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors
be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten-
gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space
evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi-
the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi-
derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on
were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system
pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac-
the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected
pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization
training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con-
vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit
sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination
who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work
received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well
sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em-
process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit
language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether
used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of
information. the owner.
Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes,
sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im-
and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the
updated training. For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point
are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc-
must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the
stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa-
tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com-
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro-
ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff
ployee’s absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup.
influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal
7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu-
tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as-
that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper-
will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param-
that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters.
complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut-
promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc.,
ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes
ty performance on the job is not known to other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’ made to
the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the
to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs
rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well
tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If
ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut-
the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training
certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as
welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou-
riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some
does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of
work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec-
does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA
Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as
for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on
must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.
128
9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need ety for Testing and Material, American Pe-
to review their maintenance programs and troleum Institute, National Fire Protection
schedules to see if there are areas where Association, American National Standards
‘‘breakdown’’ maintenance is used rather Institute, American Society of Mechanical
than an on-going mechanical integrity pro- Engineers, and other groups, provide infor-
gram. Equipment used to process, store, or mation to help establish an effective testing
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro-
be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies.
tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide
such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such
ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor
the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires,
ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground-
program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in-
egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip-
tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand-
spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo-
nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency
personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the
acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both
test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered
tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and
meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not
strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is
The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing
available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes.
process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items
cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal-
up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec-
venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and
overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf-
such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro-
are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies.
prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed
lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state or local government inspectors
tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However,
or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures
designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con-
tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is
ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees
occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to
defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en-
program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive
these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac-
fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use and application of
The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may
integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over-
egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand-
strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard.
This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to
age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con-
systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in-
emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in-
and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal-
egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro-
equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical
which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain
scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense
various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to
parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those
ers data or the employer’s experience with which control or mitigate a release. ‘‘As
the parts, which would then influence the in- built’’ drawings, together with certifications
spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and
ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified
standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu-
tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need
129
to be properly inspected in the field for use changes in production rates, raw materials,
of proper materials and procedures and to as- experimentation, equipment unavailability,
sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do new equipment, new product development,
the job. The use of appropriate gaskets, change in catalyst and changes in operating
packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld- conditions to improve yield or quality.
ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also, Equipment changes include among others
procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip-
need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange-
bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and
pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish
problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical
audits of the equipment supplier’s facilities
changes and mechanical changes.
to better assure proper purchases of required
equipment which is suitable for its intended Temporary changes have caused a number
service. Any changes in equipment that may of catastrophes over the years, and employ-
become necessary will need to go through ers need to establish ways to detect tem-
the management of change procedures. porary changes as well as those that are per-
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- manent. It is important that a time limit for
tine work which is conducted in process temporary changes be established and mon-
areas needs to be controlled by the employer itored since, without control, these changes
in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- may tend to become permanent. Temporary
fied involving the work that is to be accom- changes are subject to the management of
plished must be communicated to those change provisions. In addition, the manage-
doing the work, but also to those operating ment of change procedures are used to insure
personnel whose work could affect the safety that the equipment and procedures are re-
of the process. A work authorization notice turned to their original or designed condi-
or permit must have a procedure that de- tions at the end of the temporary change.
scribes the steps the maintenance super- Proper documentation and review of these
visor, contractor representative or other per- changes is invaluable in assuring that the
son needs to follow to obtain the necessary safety and health considerations are being
clearance to get the job started. The work incorporated into the operating procedures
authorization procedures need to reference and the process.
and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or
procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing
fined space entry procedures and hot work
of changes through the management of
authorizations. This procedure also needs to
change procedures. A typical change form
provide clear steps to follow once the job is
may include a description and the purpose of
completed in order to provide closure for
the change, the technical basis for the
those that need to know the job is now com-
change, safety and health considerations,
pleted and equipment can be returned to nor-
mal. documentation of changes for the operating
11. Managing Change. To properly manage procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec-
changes to process chemicals, technology, tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica-
equipment and facilities, one must define tion, training and communications, pre-
what is meant by change. In this process startup inspection, duration if a temporary
safety management standard, change in- change, approvals and authorization. Where
cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- the impact of the change is minor and well
dures, raw materials and processing condi- understood, a check list reviewed by an au-
tions other than ‘‘replacement in kind.’’ thorized person with proper communication
These changes need to be properly managed to others who are affected may be sufficient.
by identifying and reviewing them prior to However, for a more complex or significant
implementation of the change. For example, design change, a hazard evaluation procedure
the operating procedures contain the oper- with approvals by operations, maintenance,
ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- and safety departments may be appropriate.
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw
tance of operating within these limits. While materials, operating procedures, mechanical
the operator must have the flexibility to integrity programs, electrical classifica-
maintain safe operation within the estab- tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re-
lished parameters, any operation outside of visions can be made permanent when the
these parameters requires review and ap- drawings and procedure manuals are up-
proval by a written management of change dated. Copies of process changes need to be
procedure. kept in an accessible location to ensure that
Management of change covers such as design changes are available to operating
changes in process technology and changes personnel as well as to PHA team members
to equipment and instrumentation. Changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up-
in process technology can result from dated.
130
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves- ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary
tigation is the process of identifying the un- lines of defense they plan to have and then
derlying causes of incidents and imple- develop the necessary plans and procedures,
menting steps to prevent similar events from and appropriately train employees in their
occurring. The intent of an incident inves- emergency duties and responsibilities and
tigation is for employers to learn from past then implement these lines of defense.
experiences and thus avoid repeating past Employers at a minimum must have an
mistakes. The incidents for which OSHA ex- emergency action plan which will facilitate
pects employers to become aware and to in- the prompt evacuation of employees when an
vestigate are the types of events which re- unwanted release of highly hazardous chem-
sult in or could reasonably have resulted in ical. This means that the employer will have
a catastrophic release. Some of the events a plan that will be activated by an alarm
are sometimes referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ system to alert employees when to evacuate
meaning that a serious consequence did not and, that employees who are physically im-
occur, but could have. paired, will have the necessary support and
Employers need to develop in-house capa- assistance to get them to the safe zone as
bility to investigate incidents that occur in well. The intent of these requirements is to
their facilities. A team needs to be assem- alert and move employees to a safe zone
bled by the employer and trained in the tech- quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing
niques of investigation including how to con- alarms are to be avoided. The use of process
duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- control centers or similar process buildings
mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- in the process area as safe areas is discour-
ciplinary team is better able to gather the aged. Recent catastrophes have shown that a
facts of the event and to analyze them and large life loss has occurred in these struc-
develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- tures because of where they have been sited
pened, and why. Team members should be se- and because they are not necessarily de-
lected on the basis of their training, knowl- signed to withstand over-pressures from
edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- shockwaves resulting from explosions in the
fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- process area.
ployees in the process area where the inci- Unwanted incidental releases of highly
dent occurred should be consulted, inter- hazardous chemicals in the process area
viewed or made a member of the team. Their must be addressed by the employer as to
knowledge of the events form a significant what actions employees are to take. If the
set of facts about the incident which oc- employer wants employees to evacuate the
curred. The report, its findings and rec- area, then the emergency action plan will be
ommendations are to be shared with those activated. For outdoor processes where wind
who can benefit from the information. The direction is important for selecting the safe
cooperation of employees is essential to an route to a refuge area, the employer should
effective incident investigation. The focus of place a wind direction indicator such as a
the investigation should be to obtain facts, wind sock or pennant at the highest point
and not to place blame. The team and the in- that can be seen throughout the process
vestigation process should clearly deal with area. Employees can move in the direction of
all involved individuals in a fair, open and cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to
consistent manner. the refuge area by knowing the wind direc-
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer tion.
must address what actions employees are to If the employer wants specific employees
take when there is an unwanted release of in the release area to control or stop the
highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- minor emergency or incidental release, these
paredness or the employer’s tertiary (third) actions must be planned for in advance and
lines of defense are those that will be relied procedures developed and implemented.
on along with the secondary lines of defense Preplanning for handling incidental releases
when the primary lines of defense which are for minor emergencies in the process area
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to needs to be done, appropriate equipment for
stop the release. Employers will need to de- the hazards must be provided, and training
cide if they want employees to handle and conducted for those employees who will per-
stop small or minor incidental releases. form the emergency work before they re-
Whether they wish to mobilize the available spond to handle an actual release. The em-
resources at the plant and have them ployer’s training program, including the
brought to bear on a more significant re- Hazard Communication standard training is
lease. Or whether employers want their em- to address the training needs for employees
ployees to evacuate the danger area and who are expected to handle incidental or
promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone minor releases.
area, and allow the local community emer- Preplanning for releases that are more se-
gency response organizations to handle the rious than incidental releases is another im-
release. Or whether the employer wants to portant line of defense to be used by the em-
use some combination of these actions. Em- ployer. When a serious release of a highly
ployers will need to select how many dif- hazardous chemical occurs, the employer
131
through preplanning will have determined in tion of emergency response equipment, mu-
advance what actions employees are to take. tual aid information, and access to meteoro-
The evacuation of the immediate release logical or weather condition data and any
area and other areas as necessary would be dispersion modeling data.
accomplished under the emergency action 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- select a trained individual or assemble a
sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control trained team of people to audit the process
team, a hazardous materials team, or use safety management system and program. A
employees to render aid to those in the im- small process or plant may need only one
mediate release area and control or mitigate knowledgeable person to conduct an audit.
the incident, these actions are covered by The audit is to include an evaluation of the
1926.65, the Hazardous Waste Operations and design and effectiveness of the process safety
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) stand- management system and a field inspection of
ard. If outside assistance is necessary, such the safety and health conditions and prac-
as through mutual aid agreements between tices to verify that the employer’s systems
employers or local government emergency are effectively implemented. The audit
response organizations, these emergency re- should be conducted or lead by a person
sponders are also covered by HAZWOPER. knowledgeable in audit techniques and who
The safety and health protections required is impartial towards the facility or area
for emergency responders are the responsi- being audited. The essential elements of an
bility of their employers and of the on-scene audit program include planning, staffing,
incident commander. conducting the audit, evaluation and correc-
Responders may be working under very tive action, follow-up and documentation.
hazardous conditions and therefore the ob- Planning in advance is essential to the suc-
jective is to have them competently led by cess of the auditing process. Each employer
an on-scene incident commander and the needs to establish the format, staffing,
commander’s staff, properly equipped to do scheduling and verification methods prior to
their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be
to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a
respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re-
ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard.
munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members
sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well.
better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could
and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro-
community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor-
agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure
plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are
Agency’s Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format
One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will
cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct
nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for
erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation
tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements.
an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem-
control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program.
area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex-
the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should
would serve as the major communication be familiar with the processes and with au-
link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures.
mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on
as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under
cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly
emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to
network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc-
by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem-
portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con-
network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications,
munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance,
also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or
community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The
fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide
reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as
agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com-
phone list, SARA Title III reports and mate- pared to what is written.
rial safety data sheets, emergency plans and An effective audit includes a review of the
procedures manual, a listing with the loca- relevant documentation and process safety
132
information, inspection of the physical fa- cluding an explanation where no action is
cilities, and interviews with all levels of taken on a finding, needs to be documented
plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce- as to what was done and why.
dure and checklist developed in the It is important to assure that each defi-
preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- ciency identified is addressed, the corrective
tematically analyze compliance with the action to be taken noted, and the audit per-
provisions of the standard and any other cor- son or team responsible be properly docu-
porate policies that are relevant. For exam- mented by the employer. To control the cor-
ple, the audit team will review all aspects of rective action process, the employer should
the training program as part of the overall consider the use of a tracking system. This
audit. The team will review the written tracking system might include periodic sta-
training program for adequacy of content, tus reports shared with affected levels of
frequency of training, effectiveness of train- management, specific reports such as com-
ing in terms of its goals and objectives as pletion of an engineering study, and a final
well as to how it fits into meeting the stand-
implementation report to provide closure for
ard’s requirements, documentation, etc.
audit findings that have been through man-
Through interviews, the team can determine
agement of change, if appropriate, and then
the employee’s knowledge and awareness of
shared with affected employees and manage-
the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer-
ment. This type of tracking system provides
gency response assignments, etc. During the
inspection, the team can observe actual the employer with the status of the correc-
practices such as safety and health policies, tive action. It also provides the documenta-
procedures, and work authorization prac- tion required to verify that appropriate cor-
tices. This approach enables the team to rective actions were taken on deficiencies
identify deficiencies and determine where identified in the audit.
corrective actions or improvements are nec-
essary. APPENDIX D TO § 1926.64—SOURCES OF
An audit is a technique used to gather suf- FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDA-
ficient facts and information, including sta- TORY)
tistical information, to verify compliance
with standards. Auditors should select as 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety,
part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- American Institute of Chemical Engineers,
cient to give a degree of confidence that the 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017,
audit reflects the level of compliance with (212) 705-7319.
the standard. The audit team, through this 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro-
systematic analysis, should document areas cedures,’’ American Institute of Chemical
which require corrective action as well as Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York,
those areas where the process safety man- NY 10017.
agement system is effective and working in 3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Management
an effective manner. This provides a record of Chemical Process Safety,’’ Center for
of the audit procedures and findings, and Chemical Process Safety of the American In-
serves as a baseline of operation data for fu- stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
ture audits. It will assist future auditors in Street, New York, NY 10017.
determining changes or trends from previous 4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem-
audits. ical Industry,’’ Chemical Manufacturers As-
Corrective action is one of the most impor-
sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
tant parts of the audit. It includes not only
20037.
addressing the identified deficiencies, but
also planning, followup, and documentation. 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’
The corrective action process normally be- Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M
gins with a management review of the audit Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
findings. The purpose of this review is to de- 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’
termine what actions are appropriate, and to American Petroleum Institute (API Rec-
establish priorities, timetables, resource al- ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W.,
locations and requirements and responsibil- Washington, DC 20005.
ities. In some cases, corrective action may 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor Safe-
involve a simple change in procedure or ty Performance,’’ American Petroleum Insti-
minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API,
cern. Management of change procedures need 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
to be used, as appropriate, even for what 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association
may seem to be a minor change. Many of the (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep-
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W.,
some may require engineering studies or in- Washington, DC 20037.
depth review of actual procedures and prac- 9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety Per-
tices. There may be instances where no ac- formance,’’ Report A- 3, The Business Round-
tion is necessary and this is a valid response table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av-
to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes
133
criteria to evaluate contractor safety per- ardous substances has been
formance and criteria to enhance contractor ascertained);
safety performance). (ii) Corrective actions involving
10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for Con- clean-up operations at sites covered by
tractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas Chemical
Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402
the Resource Conservation and Recov-
Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701-1534. ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process Indus- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
tries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
Butterworth; London 1983. sites recognized by Federal, state, local
12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Manage- or other governmental bodies as uncon-
ment Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. Department of trolled hazardous waste sites;
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- (iv) Operations involving hazardous
ministration. wastes that are conducted at treat-
13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the Chem-
ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
ical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De-
partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av- and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
enue, N.W., Washington, DC 20210. cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ June to implement RCRA regulations; and
1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (v) Emergency response operations
(EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency for releases of, or substantial threats of
Response, Washington, DC 20460. releases of, hazardous substances with-
15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- out regard to the location of the haz-
ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely
ard.
Hazardous Substances,’’ December 1987; U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
Federal Emergency Management Adminis- part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. suant to their terms to hazardous
16. ‘‘Accident Investigation...A New Ap- waste and emergency response oper-
proach,’’ 1983, National Safety Council; 444 ations whether covered by this section
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611- or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
3991. the provision more protective of em-
17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi-
ployee safety and health shall apply
fication Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow
Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674.
without regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e)(1).
18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May 1988, (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan erations within the scope of paragraphs
48674. (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
tion must comply with all paragraphs
[58 FR 35115, June 30, 1993]
of this section except paragraphs (p)
§ 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and (q).
and emergency response. (iii) Operations within the scope of
paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
(a) Scope, application, and definitions—
must comply only with the require-
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol-
ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
lowing operations, unless the employer
can demonstrate that the operation NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions
does not involve employee exposure or of paragraph (p) of this section cover any
the reasonable possibility for employee treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper-
ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265
exposure to safety or health hazards:
or by state law authorized under RCRA, and
(i) Clean-up operations required by a required to have a permit or interim status
governmental body, whether Federal, from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from
state, local or other involving haz- a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
ardous substances that are conducted (B) Employers who are not required to
at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites have a permit or interim status because they
(including, but not limited to, the are conditionally exempt small quantity
EPA’s National Priority Site List generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera-
tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex-
(NPL), state priority site lists, sites
emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
recommended for the EPA NPL, and 264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are
initial investigations of government not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
identified sites which are conducted be- (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers
fore the presence or absence of haz- who are required by the EPA or state agency
134
to have their employees engage in emer- substance. Responses to incidental re-
gency response or who direct their employ- leases of hazardous substances where
ees to engage in emergency response are cov-
the substance can be absorbed, neutral-
ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec- ized, or otherwise controlled at the
tion. Excepted employers who are not re- time of release by employees in the im-
quired to have employees engage in emer- mediate release area, or by mainte-
gency response, who direct their employees nance personnel are not considered to
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies be emergency responses within the
and who meet the requirements of paragraph
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the
scope of this standard. Responses to re-
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. leases of hazardous substances where
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat- there is no potential safety or health
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
sponse operations in that area shall comply exposure) are not considered to be
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other emergency responses.
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor-
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- Facility means (A) any building,
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of structure, installation, equipment, pipe
this section. Compliance with the require- or pipeline (including any pipe into a
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall sewer or publicly owned treatment
be deemed to be in compliance with the re- works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec-
poundment, ditch, storage container,
tion.
motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
(iv) Emergency response operations craft, or (B) any site or area where a
for releases of, or substantial threats of hazardous substance has been depos-
releases of, hazardous substances which ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) otherwise come to be located; but does
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must not include any consumer product in
only comply with the requirements of consumer use or any water-borne ves-
paragraph (q) of this section. sel.
(3) Definitions—Buddy system means a Hazardous materials response
system of organizing employees into
(HAZMAT) team means an organized
work groups in such a manner that
group of employees, designated by the
each employee of the work group is
designated to be observed by at least employer, who are expected to perform
one other employee in the work group. work to handle and control actual or
The purpose of the buddy system is to potential leaks or spills of hazardous
provide rapid assistance to employees substances requiring possible close ap-
in the event of an emergency. proach to the substance. The team
Clean-up operation means an oper- members perform responses to releases
ation where hazardous substances are or potential releases of hazardous sub-
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- stances for the purpose of control or
tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in stabilization of the incident. A
any other manner processed or handled HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
with the ultimate goal of making the is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
site safer for people or the environ- team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
ment. be a separate component of a fire bri-
Decontamination means the removal gade or fire department.
of hazardous substances from employ- Hazardous substance means any sub-
ees and their equipment to the extent stance designated or listed under para-
necessary to preclude the occurrence of graphs (A) through (D) of this defini-
foreseeable adverse health affects. tion, exposure to which results or may
Emergency response or responding to result in adverse affects on the health
emergencies means a response effort by or safety of employees:
employees from outside the immediate
(A) Any substance defined under sec-
release area or by other designated re-
tion 101(14) of CERCLA;
sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence (B) Any biological agent and other
which results, or is likely to result, in disease-causing agent which after re-
an uncontrolled release of a hazardous lease into the environment and upon
135
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- Oxygen deficiency means that con-

similation into any person, either di- centration of oxygen by volume below
rectly from the environment or indi- which atmosphere supplying res-
rectly by ingestion through food piratory protection must be provided.
chains, will or may reasonably be an- It exists in atmospheres where the per-
ticipated to cause death, disease, be- centage of oxygen by volume is less
havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic than 19.5 percent oxygen.
mutation, physiological malfunctions Permissible exposure limit means the
(including malfunctions in reproduc- exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
tion) or physical deformations in such sible exposure limit specified either in
persons or their offspring; § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. other pertinent sections of this part.
Department of Transportation as haz- Published exposure level means the ex-
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH
and appendices; and Recommendations for Occupational
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- Health Standards’’ dated 1986 incor-
fined. porated by reference, or if none is spec-
Hazardous waste means—(A) A waste ified, the exposure limits published in
or combination of wastes as defined in the standards specified by the Amer-
40 CFR 261.3, or ican Conference of Governmental In-
dustrial Hygienists in their publication
(B) Those substances defined as haz-
‘‘Threshold Limit Values and Biologi-
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8.
cal Exposure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated
Hazardous waste operation means any 1987 incorporated by reference.
operation conducted within the scope Post emergency response means that
of this standard. portion of an emergency response per-
Hazardous waste site or Site means formed after the immediate threat of a
any facility or location within the release has been stabilized or elimi-
scope of this standard at which haz- nated and clean-up of the site has
ardous waste operations take place. begun. If post emergency response is
Health hazard means a chemical, mix- performed by an employer’s own em-
ture of chemicals or a pathogen for ployees who were part of the initial
which there is statistically significant emergency response, it is considered to
evidence based on at least one study be part of the initial response and not
conducted in accordance with estab- post emergency response. However, if a
lished scientific principles that acute group of an employer’s own employees,
or chronic health effects may occur in separate from the group providing ini-
exposed employees. The term health tial response, performs the clean-up op-
hazard includes chemicals which are eration, then the separate group of em-
carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic ployees would be considered to be per-
agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, forming post-emergency response and
corrosives, sensitizers, heptaotoxins, subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents tion.
which act on the hematopoietic sys- Qualified person means a person with
tem, and agents which damage the specific training, knowledge and expe-
lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous mem- rience in the area for which the person
branes. It also includes stress due to has the responsibility and the author-
temperature extremes. Further defini- ity to control.
tion of the terms used above can be Site safety and health supervisor (or of-
found in appendix A to 29 CFR 1926.59. ficial) means the individual located on
IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life a hazardous waste site who is respon-
or health means an atmospheric con- sible to the employer and has the au-
centration of any toxic, corrosive or thority and knowledge necessary to
asphyxiant substance that poses an im- implement the site safety and health
mediate threat to life or would cause plan and verify compliance with appli-
irreversible or delayed adverse health cable safety and health requirements.
effects or would interfere with an indi- Small quantity generator means a gen-
vidual’s ability to escape from a dan- erator of hazardous wastes who in any
gerous atmosphere. calendar month generates no more
136
than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of (G) Any necessary interface between
hazardous waste in that month. general program and site specific ac-
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, tivities.
means an area identified as an uncon- (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations
trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- created during initial site preparation
ernmental body, whether Federal, or during hazardous waste operations
state, local or other where an accumu- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate
lation of hazardous substances creates to prevent accidental collapse in ac-
a threat to the health and safety of in- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
dividuals or the environment or both. 1926.
Some sites are found on public lands (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
such as those created by former munic-
An employer who retains contractor or
ipal, county or state landfills where il-
sub-contractor services for work in
legal or poorly managed waste disposal
has taken place. Other sites are found hazardous waste operations shall in-
on private property, often belonging to form those contractors, sub-contrac-
generators or former generators of haz- tors, or their representatives of the
ardous substance wastes. Examples of site emergency response procedures
such sites include, but are not limited and any potential fire, explosion,
to, surface impoundments, landfills, health, safety or other hazards of the
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- hazardous waste operation that have
mal operations at TSD sites are not been identified by the employer, in-
covered by this definition. cluding those identified in the employ-
(b) Safety and health program. er’s information program.
(v) Program availability. The written
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs
developed and implemented to meet other
safety and health program shall be
Federal, state, or local regulations are con- made available to any contractor or
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- subcontractor or their representative
ment if they cover or are modified to cover who will be involved with the haz-
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- ardous waste operation; to employees;
ditional or separate safety and health pro- to employee designated representa-
gram is not required by this paragraph.
tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de- sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
velop and implement a written safety agencies with regulatory authority
and health program for their employ- over the site.
ees involved in hazardous waste oper- (2) Organizational structure part of the
ations. The program shall be designed site program—(i) The organizationa1
to identify, evaluate, and control safe- structure part of the program shall es-
ty and health hazards, and provide for tablish the specific chain of command
emergency response for hazardous and specify the overall responsibilities
waste operations.
of supervisors and employees. It shall
(ii) The written safety and health include, at a minimum, the following
program shall incorporate the fol-
elements:
lowing:
(A) A general supervisor who has the
(A) An organizational structure;
responsibility and authority to direct
(B) A comprehensive workplan;
all hazardous waste operations.
(C) A site-specific safety and health
(B) A site safety and health super-
plan which need not repeat the employ-
visor who has the responsibility and
er’s standard operating procedures re-
quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this authority to develop and implement
section; the site safety and health plan and
(D) The safety and health training verify compliance.
program; (C) All other personnel needed for
(E) The medical surveillance pro- hazardous waste site operations and
gram; emergency response and their general
(F) The employer’s standard oper- functions and responsibilities.
ating procedures for safety and health; (D) The lines of authority, responsi-
and bility, and communication.
137
(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require-

shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program
essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section.
waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni-
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi-
site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in-
workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including
dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra-
site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip-
sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used.
and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord-
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re-
address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in
which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this
procedures available elsewhere. section.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan
(H) An emergency response plan
shall define work tasks and objectives
meeting the requirements of paragraph
and identify the methods for accom-
(l) of this section for safe and effective
plishing those tasks and objectives.
responses to emergencies, including
(iii) The comprehensive workplan
the necessary PPE and other equip-
shall establish personnel requirements
ment.
for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures.
shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program
the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph
of this section. (j) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro-
the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity,
tion. and at such other times as necessary to
(vi) The comprehensive workplan ensure that employees are apprised of
shall provide for the implementation of the site safety and health plan and
the medical surveillance program de- that this plan is being followed. The in-
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. formation and data obtained from site
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan characterization and analysis work re-
part of the program—(i) General. The site quired in paragraph (c) of this section
safety and health plan, which must be shall be used to prepare and update the
kept on site, shall address the safety site safety and health plan.
and health hazards of each phase of site (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
operation and include the requirements health plan. Inspections shall be con-
and procedures for employee protec- ducted by the site safety and health su-
tion. pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
(ii) Elements. The site safety and vidual, another individual who is
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- knowledgeable in occupational safety
dress the following: and health, acting on behalf of the em-
(A) A safety and health risk or haz- ployer as necessary to determine the
ard analysis for each site task and op- effectiveness of the site safety and
eration found in the workplan. health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
(B) Employee training assignments fectiveness of the site safety and
to assure compliance with paragraph health plan shall be corrected by the
(e) of this section. employer.
(C) Personal protective equipment to (c) Site characterization and analysis—
be used by employees for each of the (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall
site tasks and operations being con- be evaluated in accordance with this
ducted as required by the personal pro- paragraph to identify specific site haz-
tective equipment program in para- ards and to determine the appropriate
graph (g)(5) of this section. safety and health control procedures
138
needed to protect employees from the (5) Personal protective equipment. Per-
identified hazards. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- be provided and used during initial site
nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- entry in accordance with the following
tics shall be performed prior to site requirements:
entry by a qualified person in order to (i) Based upon the results of the pre-
aid in the selection of appropriate em- liminary site evaluation, an ensemble
ployee protection methods prior to site of PPE shall be selected and used dur-
entry. Immediately after initial site ing initial site entry which will provide
entry, a more detailed evaluation of protection to a level of exposure below
the site’s specific characteristics shall permissible exposure limits and pub-
be performed by a qualified person in lished exposure levels for known or sus-
order to further identify existing site pected hazardous substances and
hazards and to further aid in the selec- health hazards, and which will provide
tion of the appropriate engineering protection against other known and
controls and personal protective equip-
suspected hazards identified during the
ment for the tasks to be performed.
preliminary site evaluation. If there is
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected no permissible exposure limit or pub-
conditions that may pose inhalation or
lished exposure level, the employer
skin absorption hazards that are imme-
may use other published studies and in-
diately dangerous to life or health
formation as a guide to appropriate
(IDLH), or other conditions that may
cause death or serious harm, shall be personal protective equipment.
identified during the preliminary sur- (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
vey and evaluated during the detailed breathing apparatus is not used as part
survey. Examples of such hazards in- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
clude, but are not limited to, confined piratory protection is warranted by the
space entry, potentially explosive or potential hazards identified during the
flammable situations, visible vapor preliminary site evaluation, an escape
clouds, or areas where biological indi- self-contained breathing apparatus of
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- at least five minute’s duration shall be
tion are located. carried by employees during initial site
(4) Required information. The fol- entry.
lowing information to the extent avail- (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
able shall be obtained by the employer tion does not produce sufficient infor-
prior to allowing employees to enter a mation to identify the hazards or sus-
site: pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
(i) Location and approximate size of providing protection equivalent to
the site. Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(ii) Description of the response activ- imum protection, and direct reading
ity and/or the job task to be performed. instruments shall be used as appro-
(iii) Duration of the planned em- priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ployee activity. (See appendix B for a description of
(iv) Site topography and accessibility Level B hazards and the recommenda-
by air and roads. tions for Level B protective equip-
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- ment.)
pected at the site. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- been identified, the appropriate PPE
stance dispersion. shall be selected and used in accord-
(vii) Present status and capabilities ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
of emergency response teams that (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
would provide assistance to hazardous toring shall be conducted during initial
waste clean-up site employees at the site entry when the site evaluation
time of an emergency. produces information that shows the
(viii) Hazardous substances and potential for ionizing radiation or
health hazards involved or expected at IDLH conditions, or when the site in-
the site, and their chemical and phys- formation is not sufficient reasonably
ical properties. to eliminate these possible conditions:
139
(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control
struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees
izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site
(ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in
priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be
(i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of
tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation
that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor-
(combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available.
oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program.
(iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a
actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site
gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys-
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including
gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres-
where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific
hazardous substances and health haz- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em-
ards have been established, the risks ployees working on site (such as but
associated with these substances shall not limited to equipment operators,
be identified. Employees who will be general laborers and others) exposed to
working on the site shall be informed hazardous substances, health hazards,
of any risks that have been identified. or safety hazards and their supervisors
In situations covered by the Hazard and management responsible for the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR site shall receive training meeting the
1926.59, training required by that stand- requirements of this paragraph before
ard need not be duplicated. they are permitted to engage in haz-
ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO (c)(7). Risks to consider include, pose them to hazardous substances,
but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex-
posure limits and published exposure levels. shall receive review training as speci-
(b) IDLH concentrations. fied in this paragraph.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an
present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall
be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
ployees prior to the commencement of ment;
their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em-
may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz-
the hazard communication standard for ards;
this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls
(d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site;
priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require-
implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp-
sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate
clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and
140
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by

through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and
health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe-
(b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as-
(3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not
workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and
general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em-
sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro-
removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con-
pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard
hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques.
ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers
hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min-
(6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi-
and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a
successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor.
and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who
graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon-
tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi-
tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per-
supervisor as having successfully com-
missible exposure limits and published
exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ-
not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each
indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has
ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not
developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph
24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
experience under the direct supervision ations.
of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz-
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may
become general site workers or who are expose them to hazardous substances
required to wear respirators, shall have shall be trained in how to respond to
the additional 16 hours and two days of such expected emergencies.
training necessary to total the training (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
(4) Management and supervisor train- and managers and supervisors specified
ing. On-site management and super- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
visors directly responsible for, or who receive eight hours of refresher train-
supervise employees engaged in, haz- ing annually on the items specified in
ardous waste operations shall receive paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
40 hours initial training, and three section, any critique of incidents that
days of supervised field experience (the have occurred in the past year that can
training may be reduced to 24 hours serve as training examples of related
and one day if the only area of their re- work, and other relevant topics.
141
(9) Equivalent training. Employers ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of

who can show by documentation or cer- this section on the following schedules:
tification that an employee’s work ex- (i) For employees covered under
perience and/or training has resulted in paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and
training equivalent to that training re- (f)(2)(iv):
quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (A) Prior to assignment;
(e)(4) of this section shall not be re- (B) At least once every twelve
quired to provide the initial training months for each employee covered un-
requirements of those paragraphs to less the attending physician believes a
such employees and shall provide a longer interval (not greater than bien-
copy of the certification or documenta- nially) is appropriate;
tion to the employee upon request. (C) At termination of employment or
However, certified employees or em- reassignment to an area where the em-
ployees with equivalent training new ployee would not be covered if the em-
to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination
specific training before site entry and within the last six months;
have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee
training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi-
ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz-
ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or
from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or
experience. exposed above the permissible exposure
(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in
Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation;
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
(2) Employees covered. The medical
have been injured, received a health
surveillance program shall be insti-
impairment, developed signs or symp-
tuted by the employer for the following
toms which may have resulted from ex-
employees:
posure to hazardous substances result-
(i) All employees who are or may be ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
exposed to hazardous substances or posed during an emergency incident to
health hazards at or above the permis- hazardous substances at concentra-
sible exposure limits or, if there is no tions above the permissible exposure
permissible exposure limit, above the limits or the published exposure levels
published exposure levels for these sub- without the necessary personal protec-
stances, without regard to the use of tive equipment being used:
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (A) As soon as possible following the
(ii) All employees who wear a res- emergency incident or development of
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as signs or symptoms;
required by § 1926.103; (B) At additional times, if the exam-
(iii) All employees who are injured, ining physician determines that follow-
become ill or develop signs or symp- up examinations or consultations are
toms due to possible overexposure in- medically necessary.
volving hazardous substances or health (4) Content of medical examinations and
hazards from an emergency response or consultations. (i) Medical examinations
hazardous waste operation; and required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work
(3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in
and consultations. Medical examina- the employee’s file) with special em-
tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han-
available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and
142
health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam-
including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the
quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee.
perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee
pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of
(ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination
tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re-
to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat-
shall be determined by the attending ment.
physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by
pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures.
should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate
(5) Examination bv a physician and record of the medical surveillance re-
costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section
procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be
under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33.
occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph
provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information:
able time and place. (A) The name and social security
number of the employee;
(6) Information provided to the physi-
(B) Physician’s written opinions, rec-
cian. The employer shall provide one
ommended limitations, and results of
copy of this standard and its appen-
examinations and tests;
dices to the attending physician, and in
(C) Any employee medical com-
addition the following for each em-
plaints related to exposure to haz-
ployee:
ardous substances;
(i) A description of the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro-
duties as they relate to the employee’s vided to the examining physician by
exposures. the employer, with the exception of the
(ii) The employee’s exposure levels or standard and its appendices.
anticipated exposure levels. (g) Engineering controls, work prac-
(iii) A description of any personal tices, and personal protective equipment
protective equipment used or to be for employee protection. Engineering
used. controls, work practices, personal pro-
(iv) Information from previous med- tective equipment, or a combination of
ical examinations of the employee these shall be implemented in accord-
which is not readily available to the ance with this paragraph to protect
examining physician. employees from exposure to hazardous
(v) Information required by § 1926.103. substances and safety and health haz-
(7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The ards.
employer shall obtain and furnish the (1) Engineering controls, work practices
employee with a copy of a written and PPE for substances regulated either
opinion from the attending physician in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
containing the following: other pertinent sections of this part. (i)
(A) The physician’s opinion as to Engineering controls and work prac-
whether the employee has any detected tices shall be instituted to reduce and
medical conditions which would place maintain employee exposure to or
the employee at increased risk of ma- below the permissible exposure limits
terial impairment of the employee’s for substances regulated either in
health from work in hazardous waste § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of
operations or emergency response, or this part, except to the extent that
from respirator use. such controls and practices are not fea-
(B) The physician’s recommended sible.
limitations upon the employee’s as- NOTE TO (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls
signed work. which may be feasible include the use of
143
pressurized cabs or control booths on equip- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained
ment, and/or the use of remotely operated breathing apparatus, or positive pres-
material handling equipment. Work prac- sure air-line respirators equipped with
tices which may be feasible are removing all
an escape air supply, shall be used
non-essential employees from potential ex-
posure during opening of drums, wetting when chemical exposure levels present
down dusty operations and locating employ- will create a substantial possibility of
ees upwind of possible hazards. immediate death, immediate serious
(ii) Whenever engineering controls and illness or injury, or impair the ability
work practices are not feasible or not re- to escape.
quired, any reasonable combination of engi- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical
neering controls, work practices and PPE protective suits (protection equivalent
shall be used to reduce and maintain em-
ployee exposures to or below the permissible
to Level A protection as recommended
exposure limits or dose limits for substances in appendix B) shall be used in condi-
regulated either in § 1926.55 or other perti- tions where skin absorption of a haz-
nent sections of this part. ardous substance may result in a sub-
(iii) The employer shall not implement a stantial possibility of immediate
schedule of employee rotation as a means of death, immediate serious illness or in-
compliance with permissible exposure limits jury, or impair the ability to escape.
or dose limits except when there is no other (v) The level of protection provided
feasible way of complying with the airborne
or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation.
by PPE selection shall be increased
(iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be when additional information on site
followed. conditions indicates that increased
protection is necessary to reduce em-
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, ployee exposures below permissible ex-
and PPE for substances not regulated ei- posure limits and published exposure
ther in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, levels for hazardous substances and
or in other pertinent sections of this part. health hazards. (See appendix B for
An appropriate combination of engi- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
neering controls, work practices and
personal protective equipment shall be NOTE TO (g)(3): The level of employee pro-
used to reduce and maintain employee tection provided may be decreased when ad-
ditional information or site conditions show
exposure to or below published expo-
that decreased protection will not result in
sure levels for hazardous substances hazardous exposures to employees.
and health hazards not regulated either
in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or (vi) Personal protective equipment
in other pertinent sections of this part. shall be selected and used to meet the
The employer may use the published requirements of subpart E of this part
literature and MSDS as a guide in and additional requirements specified
making the employer’s determination in this section.
as to what level of protection the em- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
ployer believes is appropriate for haz- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
ardous substances and health hazards suits shall protect employees from the
for which there is no permissible expo- particular hazards which are identified
sure limit or published exposure limit. during site characterization and anal-
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- ysis.
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(PPE) shall be selected and used which be capable of maintaining positive air
will protect employees from the haz- pressure. (See appendix A for a test
ards and potential hazards they are method which may be used to evaluate
likely to encounter as identified during this requirement.)
the site characterization and analysis. (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(ii) Personal protective equipment be capable of preventing inward test
selection shall be based on an evalua- gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
tion of the performance characteristics (See appendix A for a test method
of the PPE relative to the require- which may be used to evaluate this re-
ments and limitations of the site, the quirement.)
task-specific conditions and duration, (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE)
and the hazards and potential hazards program. A written personal protective
identified at the site. equipment program, which is part of
144
the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam-
gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments.
of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni-
of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos-
plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam-
gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or
below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures
and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo-
the manufacturer of a piece of equip- sure limits or published exposure levels
ment and are attached to the plan, since prior monitoring. Situations
they need not be rewritten into the where it shall be considered whether
plan as long as they adequately address the possibility that exposures have
the procedure or element. risen are as follows:
(i) PPE selection based upon site haz- (i) When work begins on a different
ards, portion of the site.
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than
equipment, those previously identified are being
(iii) Work mission duration, handled.
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper-
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work-
dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any
the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences;
(x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed;
priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em-
(h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and
health hazards likely to be present
ance with this paragraph where there
above permissible exposure limits or
may be a question of employee expo-
published exposure levels by using per-
sure to hazardous concentrations of
sonal sampling frequently enough to
hazardous substances in order to assure
characterize employee exposures. If the
proper selection of engineering con-
employees likely to have the highest
trols, work practices and personal pro-
exposure are over permissible exposure
tective equipment so that employees
limits or published exposure limits,
are not exposed to levels which exceed
then monitoring shall continue to de-
permissible exposure limits, or pub-
termine all employees likely to be
lished exposure levels if there are no
above those limits. The employer may
permissible exposure limits, for haz-
utilize a representative sampling ap-
ardous substances.
proach by documenting that the em-
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to
ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
identify and quantify airborne levels of
toring are based on the criteria stated
hazardous substances and safety and
above.
health hazards in order to determine
the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO (h): It is not required to monitor
tection needed on site. employees engaged in site characterization
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, operations covered by paragraph (c) of this
section.
representative air monitoring shall be
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers
tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro-
sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employer’s
els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in
rial’s dose limits or other dangerous paragraph (b) of this section, to inform
145
employees, contractors, and sub- (ix) Drums and containers that can-
contractors (or their representative) not be moved without rupture, leakage,
actually engaged in hazardous waste or spillage shall be emptied into a
operations of the nature, level and de- sound container using a device classi-
gree of exposure likely as a result of fied for the material being transferred.
participation in such hazardous waste (x) A ground-penetrating system or
operations. Employees, contractors and other type of detection system or de-
subcontractors working outside of the vice shall be used to estimate the loca-
operations part of a site are not cov- tion and depth of buried drums or con-
ered by this standard. tainers.
(j) Handling drums and containers—(1) (xi) Soil or covering material shall be
General. (i) Hazardous substances and removed with caution to prevent drum
contaminated soils, liquids, and other or container rupture.
residues shall be handled, transported, (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment
labeled, and disposed of in accordance meeting the requirements of subpart F
with this paragraph. of this part shall be on hand and ready
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- for use to control incipient fires.
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- (2) Opening drums and containers. The
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- following procedures shall be followed
tions for the wastes that they contain. in areas where drums or containers are
(iii) When practical, drums and con- being opened:
tainers shall be inspected and their in-
(i) Where an airline respirator system
tegrity shall be assured prior to being
is used, connections to the source of air
moved. Drums or containers that can-
supply shall be protected from con-
not be inspected before being moved
tamination and the entire system shall
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur-
be protected from physical damage.
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind
(ii) Employees not actually involved
other drums, stacked several tiers high
in opening drums or containers shall be
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac-
kept a safe distance from the drums or
cessible location and inspected prior to
containers being opened.
further handling.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or
shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being
ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall
identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and
(v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened
to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci-
container movement. dental explosion.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container
containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip-
the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment
of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion-
with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier.
tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being
tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to
er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition.
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be
ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re-
spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate
health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the
(b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers
mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury.
tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon
being transferred. or work from drums or containers.
146
(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- Transportation regulations. Employers and

rial handiing equipment used to trans- their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21
fer drums and containers shall be se- and 173.50.
lected, positioned and operated to min- (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition
imize sources of ignition related to the to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
equipment from igniting vapors re- of this section, the following pre-
leased from ruptured drums or con- cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
tainers. in handling laboratory waste packs
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con-
(lab packs):
tainers containing radioactive wastes
shall not be handled until such time as (i) Lab packs shall be opened only
their hazard to employees is properly when necessary and then only by an in-
assessed. dividual knowledgeable in the inspec-
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- tion, classification, and segregation of
imum, the following special pre- the containers within the pack accord-
cautions shall be taken when drums ing to the hazards of the wastes.
and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on
of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be
are handled: handled as a shock-sensitive waste
(i) All non-essential employees shall until the contents are identified.
be evacuated from the area of transfer. (7) Sampling of drum and container
(ii) Material handling equipment contents. Sampling of containers and
shall be provided with explosive con- drums shall be done in accordance with
tainment devices or protective shields a sampling procedure which is part of
to protect equipment operators from the site safety and health plan devel-
exploding containers. oped for and available to employees
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- and others at the specific worksite.
ble of being perceived above sur- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
rounding light and noise conditions and containers shall be identified and
shall be used to signal the commence- classified prior to packaging for ship-
ment and completion of explosive ment.
waste handling activities. (ii) Drum or container staging areas
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e.,
shall be kept to the minimum number
portable radios, hand signals, tele-
necessary to identify and classify ma-
phones, as appropriate) shall be main-
terials safely and prepare them for
tained between the employee-in-charge
transport.
of the immediate handling area and
both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes.
time as the handling operation is com- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
pleted. Communication equipment or shall be permitted only after a thor-
methods that could cause shock sen- ough characterization of the materials
sitive materials to explode shall not be has been completed.
used. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
(v) Drums and containers under pres- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- substances shall be handled in a man-
ing, shall not be moved until such time ner similar to that for drums and con-
as the cause for excess pressure is de- tainers, taking into consideration the
termined and appropriate containment size of the tank or vault.
procedures have been implemented to (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
protect employees from explosive relief procedures as described in the employ-
of the drum. er’s safety and health plan shall be fol-
(vi) Drums and containers containing lowed whenever employees must enter
packaged laboratory wastes shall be a tank or vault.
considered to contain shock-sensitive (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro-
or explosive materials until they have cedures for all phases of decontamina-
been characterized. tion shall be developed and imple-
CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes mented in accordance with this para-
may be prohibited under U.S. Department of graph.
147
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where
decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi-
veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and
and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami-
or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and
where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR
ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre-
(ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then
shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing
ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used.
stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at
contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1)
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with
tamination shall be decontaminated or § 1926.35 of this part.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures
tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe-
change rooms. ty and health plan.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid.
cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures.
ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow-
tially harmful effects of exposures to up.
hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
148
(3) Procedures for handling emergency TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION

incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES—Continued
ments for the emergency response plan
Foot-
required in paragraph (1)(2) of this sec- can- Area or operations
tion, the following elements shall be dles
included for emergency response plans: 5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work
(A) Site topography, layout, and pre- areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is
vailing weather conditions. required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
(B) Procedures for reporting inci- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
dents to local, state, and federal gov- able for use in the tunnel heading.)
ernmental agencies. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or
(ii) The emergency response plan living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
shall be a separate section of the Site areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.)
Safety and Health Plan. 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
(iii) The emergency response plan
shall be compatible and integrated (n) Sanitation at temporary work-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade-
gency response plans of local, state, quate supply of potable water shall be
and federal agencies. provided on the site.
(iv) The emergency response plan (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of pense drinking water shall be capable
the overall training program for site of being tightly closed, and equipped
operations. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
(v) The site emergency response plan from containers.
shall be reviewed periodically and, as (iii) Any container used to distribute
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- drinking water shall be clearly marked
rent with new or changing site condi- as to the nature of its contents and not
tions or information. used for any other purpose.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall (iv) Where single service cups (to be
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR used but once) are supplied, both a san-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- itary container for the unused cups and
gency situation; to stop work activities a receptacle for disposing of the used
if necessary; to lower background noise cups shall be provided.
in order to speed communication; and (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
to begin emergency procedures. nonpotable water, such as water for
firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
(vii) Based upon the information
fied to indicate clearly that the water
available at time of the emergency, the
is unsafe and is not to be used for
employer shall evaluate the incident
drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
and the site response capabilities and
poses.
proceed with the appropriate steps to
(ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
implement the site emergency response
tion, open or potential, between a sys-
plan.
tem furnishing potable water and a
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to
system furnishing nonpotable water.
employees shall be lighted to not less
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
than the minimum illumination inten-
provided for employees according to
sities listed in the following Table D–
the following Table D–65.2.
65.1 while any work is in progress:
TABLE D–65.2—TOILET FACILITIES
TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

can- Area or operations More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
dles nal per 40 employees.
More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
5 ........ General site areas. nal per 50 employees.
3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active
storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and
field maintenance areas.
(ii) Under temporary field conditions,
5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and provisions shall be made to assure that
exitways. at least one toilet facility is available.
149
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- the worksite, shall provide employees
vided with a sanitary sewer shall be with a clean area where they can re-
provided with the following toilet fa- move, store, and put on street clothing.
cilities unless prohibited by local The second area, with an exit to the
codes: worksite, shall provide employees with
(A) Chemical toilets; an area where they can put on, remove
(B) Recirculating toilets; and store work clothing and personal
(C) Combustion toilets; or protective equipment.
(D) Flush toilets. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall
(iv) The requirements of this para- be located in areas where exposures are
graph for sanitation facilities shall not below the permissible exposure limits
apply to mobile crews having transpor- and published exposure levels. If this
tation readily available to nearby toi- cannot be accomplished, then a ven-
let facilities. tilation system shall be provided that
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities will supply air that is below the per-
shall be provided with entrance locks missible exposure limits and published
controlled from inside the facility. exposure levels.
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site.
tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef-
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip-
and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz-
shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part
ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program
may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is
cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained.
the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or
are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in-
and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams,
which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air
enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site
substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated
(7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives.
hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new
duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be-
months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large
the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec-
change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu-
posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as
health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef-
waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made
(i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request.
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain operations conducted under
1926.51(f)(4). the Resource Conservation and Recovery
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers con-
and shall meet the requirements of 29 ducting operations at treatment, stor-
CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall con- age and disposal (TSD) facilities speci-
sist of two separate change areas sepa- fied in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this sec-
rated by the shower area required in tion shall provide and implement the
paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One programs specified in this paragraph.
change area, with an exit leading off See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’ to
150
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for stances at TSD operations to enable

employers not covered.)’’. the employees to perform their as-
(1) Safety and health program. The em- signed duties and functions in a safe
ployer shall develop and implement a and healthful manner so as not endan-
written safety and health program for ger themselves or other employees. The
employees involved in hazardous waste initial training shall be for 24 hours
operations that shall be available for and refresher training shall be for eight
inspection by employees, their rep- hours annually. Employees who have
resentatives and OSHA personnel. The received the initial training required
program shall be designed to identify, by this paragraph shall be given a writ-
evaluate and control safety and health ten certificate attesting that they have
hazards in their facilities for the pur- successfully completed the necessary
pose of employee protection, to provide training.
for emergency response meeting the re- (ii) Current employees. Employers who
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this can show by an employee’s previous
section and to address as appropriate work experience and/or training that
site analysis, engineering controls, the employee has had training equiva-
maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by
waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as
new technologies. meeting the initial training require-
(2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em-
The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes
ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59 as might have already received from ac-
part of the employer’s safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em-
gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
NOTE TO 1926.65: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually.
ardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applica- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
ble to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily
(3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach-
employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to
a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience
this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com-
(4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the
ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional
decontamination procedure meeting skills.
the requirements of paragraph (k) of (8) Emergency response program—(i)
this section. Emergency response plan. An emergency
(5) New technology program. The em- response plan shall be developed and
ployer shall develop and implement implemented by all employers. Such
procedures meeting the requirements plans need not duplicate any of the
of paragraph (o) of this section for in- subjects fully addressed in the employ-
troducing new and innovative equip- er’s contingency planning required by
ment into the workplace. permits, such as those issued by the
(6) Material handling program. Where U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
employees will be handling drums or cy, provided that the contingency plan
containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response
and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em-
through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployers safety and health program re-
as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec-
prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate
(7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo-
ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and
plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ-
part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency
health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of
to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an
151
emergency action plan complying with ness training to recognize that an emer-
§ 1926.35 of this part. gency response situation exists and they
(ii) Elements of an emergency response have been instructed to call the designated
outside fully-trained emergency response
plan. The employer shall develop an
team for assistance.
emergency response plan for emer-
gencies which shall address, as a min- (B) Employee members of TSD facil-
imum, the following areas to the ex- ity emergency response organizations
tent that they are not addressed in any shall be trained to a level of com-
specific program required in this para- petence in the recognition of health
graph: and safety hazards to protect them-
(A) Pre-emergency planning and co- selves and other employees. This would
ordination with outside parties. include training in the methods used to
(B) Personnel roles, lines of author- minimize the risk from safety and
ity, and communication. health hazards; in the safe use of con-
(C) Emergency recognition and pre- trol equipment; in the selection and
vention. use of appropriate personal protective
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- equipment; in the safe operating proce-
uge. dures to be used at the incident scene;
(E) Site security and control. in the techniques of coordination with
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- other employees to minimize risks; in
dures. the appropriate response to over expo-
(G) Decontamination procedures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(H) Emergency medical treatment themselves and other employees; and
and first aid. in the recognition of subsequent symp-
(I) Emergency alerting and response toms which may result from over expo-
procedures. sures.
(J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that
up. each covered employee has attended
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by
operating procedures the employer has the employer.
established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency
protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan
cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
Exception #1: An employer need not train all section, the following elements shall be
employees to the degree specified if the included for emergency response plans
employer divides the work force in a man- to the extent that they do not repeat
ner such that a sufficient number of em- any information already contained in
ployees who have responsibility to control the emergency response plan:
emergencies have the training specified, (1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
and all other employees, who may first re-
vailing weather conditions.
spond to an emergency incident, have suffi-
cient awareness training to recognize that (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
an emergency response situation exists and to local, state, and federal govern-
that they are instructed in that case to mental agencies.
summon the fully trained employees and (B) The emergency response plan
not attempt control activities for which shall be compatible and integrated
they are not trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer-
Exception #2: An employer need not train all gency response plans of local, state,
employees to the degree specified if ar-
and federal agencies.
rangements have been made in advance for
an outside fully-trained emergency re- (C) The emergency response plan
sponse team to respond in a reasonable pe- shall be rehearsed regularly as part of
riod and all employees, who may come to the overall training program for site
the incident first, have sufficient aware- operations.
152
(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that
shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere:
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties.
tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication.
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- vention.
gency situation; to stop work activities
(iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
if necessary; to lower background noise
in order to speed communication; and uge.
to begin emergency procedures. (v) Site security and control.
(F) Based upon the information avail- (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
able at time of the emergency, the em- dures.
ployer shall evaluate the incident and (vii) Decontamination.
the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid.
plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plan. procedures.
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow-
substance releases. This paragraph cov- up.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
gaged in emergency response no matter
(xii) Emergency response organiza-
where it occurs except that it does not
tions may use the local emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through sponse plan or the state emergency re-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- sponse plan or both, as part of their
gency response organizations who have emergency response plan to avoid du-
developed and implemented programs plication. Those items of the emer-
equivalent to this paragraph for han- gency response plan that are being
dling releases of hazardous substances properly addressed by the SARA Title
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- III plans may be substituted into their
fund Amendments and Reauthorization emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and gether for the employer and employee’s
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, use.
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have (3) Procedures for handling emergency
met the requirements of this para- response. (i) The senior emergency re-
graph. sponse official responding to an emer-
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency shall become the individual in
gency response plan shall be developed charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
and implemented to handle anticipated mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
emergencies prior to the commence- sponders and their communications
ment of emergency response oper- shall be coordinated and controlled
ations. The plan shall be in writing and through the individual in charge of the
available for inspection and copying by ICS assisted by the senior official
employees, their representatives and
present for each employer.
OSHA personnel. Employers who will
evacuate their employees from the NOTE TO (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an
danger area when an emergency occurs, emergency response is the most senior offi-
and who do not permit any of their em- cial on the site who has the responsibility
ployees to assist in handling the emer- for controlling the operations at the site.
gency, are exempt from the require- Initially it is the senior officer on the first-
ments of this paragraph if they provide due piece of responding emergency apparatus
an emergency action plan in accord- to arrive on the incident scene. As more sen-
ior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire
ance with § 1926.35 of this part.
chief, state law enforcement official, site co-
(2) Elements of an emergency response ordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the
plan. The employer shall develop an line of authority which has been previously
emergency response plan for emer- established.
gencies which shall address, as a min-
153
(ii) The individual in charge of the (viii) When activities are judged by
ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- the safety official to be an IDLH condi-
sible, all hazardous substances or con- tion and/or to involve an imminent
ditions present and shall address as ap- danger condition, the safety official
propriate site analysis, use of engineer- shall have the authority to alter, sus-
ing controls, maximum exposure lim- pend, or terminate those activities.
its, hazardous substance handling pro- The safety official shall immediately
cedures, and use of any new tech- inform the individual in charge of the
nologies. ICS of any actions needed to be taken
(iii) Based on the hazardous sub- to correct these hazards at the emer-
stances and/or conditions present, the gency scene.
individual in charge of the ICS shall (ix) After emergency operations have
implement appropriate emergency op- terminated, the individual in charge of
erations, and assure that the personal the ICS shall implement appropriate
protective equipment worn is appro- decontamination procedures.
priate for the hazards to be encoun-
(x) When deemed necessary for meet-
tered. However, personal protective
ing the tasks at hand, approved self-
equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
contained compressed air breathing ap-
the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1926.97
paratus may be used with approved cyl-
when worn while performing fire fight-
inders from other approved self-con-
ing operations beyond the incipient
tained compressed air breathing appa-
stage for any incident.
ratus provided that such cylinders are
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency
of the same capacity and pressure rat-
response and exposed to hazardous sub-
ing. All compressed air cylinders used
stances presenting an inhalation haz-
with self-contained breathing appa-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall
wear positive pressure self-contained ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
breathing apparatus while engaged in Transportation and National Institute
emergency response, until such time for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
that the individual in charge of the ICS teria.
determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s
piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the
hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as
(v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging
ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily
gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup-
or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be
hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an
forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who
ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz-
shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene,
tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em-
with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However,
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini-
support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their
also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re-
and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall in-
(vii) The individual in charge of the clude instruction in the wearing of ap-
ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip-
who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in-
being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per-
response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety
bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the
and to provide direction with respect employer’s own employees shall be
to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of
emergency at hand. these personnel.
154
(5) Specialist employees. Employees Transportation’s Emergency Response

who, in the course of their regular job Guidebook.
duties, work with and are trained in (F) The ability to realize the need for
the hazards of specific hazardous sub- additional resources, and to make ap-
stances, and who will be called upon to propriate notifications to the commu-
provide technical advice or assistance nication center.
at a hazardous substance release inci- (ii) First responder operations level.
dent to the individual in charge, shall First responders at the operations level
receive training or demonstrate com- are individuals who respond to releases
petency in the area of their specializa- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
tion annually. stances as part of the initial response
(6) Training. Training shall be based to the site for the purpose of protecting
on the duties and function to be per- nearby persons, property, or the envi-
formed by each responder of an emer- ronment from the effects of the re-
gency response organization. The skill lease. They are trained to respond in a
and knowledge levels required for all defensive fashion without actually try-
new responders, those hired after the ing to stop the release. Their function
effective date of this standard, shall be is to contain the release from a safe
conveyed to them through training be- distance, keep it from spreading, and
fore they are permitted to take part in prevent exposures. First responders at
actual emergency operations on an in- the operational level shall have re-
cident. Employees who participate, or
ceived at least eight hours of training
are expected to participate, in emer-
or have had sufficient experience to ob-
gency response, shall be given training
jectively demonstrate competency in
in accordance with the following para-
the following areas in addition to those
graphs:
listed for the awareness level and the
(i) First responder awareness level. employer shall so certify:
First responders at the awareness level
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
are individuals who are likely to wit-
and risk assessment techniques.
ness or discover a hazardous substance
release and who have been trained to (B) Know how to select and use prop-
initiate an emergency response se- er personal protective equipment pro-
quence by notifying the proper authori- vided to the first responder operational
ties of the release. They would take no level.
further action beyond notifying the au- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
thorities of the release. First respond- ardous materials terms.
ers at the awareness level shall have (D) Know how to perform basic con-
sufficient training or have had suffi- trol, containment and/or confinement
cient experience to objectively dem- operations within the capabilities of
onstrate competency in the following the resources and personal protective
areas: equipment available with their unit.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (E) Know how to implement basic de-
ardous substances are, and the risks as- contamination procedures.
sociated with them in an incident. (F) An understanding of the relevant
(B) An understanding of the potential standard operating procedures and ter-
outcomes associated with an emer- mination procedures.
gency created when hazardous sub- (iii) Hazardous materials technician.
stances are present. Hazardous materials technicians are
(C) The ability to recognize the pres- individuals who respond to releases or
ence of hazardous substances in an potential releases for the purpose of
emergency. stopping the release. They assume a
(D) The ability to identify the haz- more aggressive role than a first re-
ardous substances, if possible. sponder at the operations level in that
(E) An understanding of the role of they will approach the point of release
the first responder awareness indi- in order to plug, patch or otherwise
vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stop the release of a hazardous sub-
sponse plan including site security and stance. Hazardous materials techni-
control and the U.S. Department of cians shall have received at least 24
155
hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper
sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protec-
tion have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz-
areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist.
(A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and
ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques.
(B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized
fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine-
unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili-
vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro-
(C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available.
signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple-
System. ment decontamination procedures.
(D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site
er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan.
tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological
ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be-
(E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior.
sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci-
(F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume
trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,
the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
(A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary
emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc-
(B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of
fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they
unknown materials by using advanced are to teach.
survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em-
(C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance
sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
156
shall receive annual refresher training sonal protective equipment and decon-
of sufficient content and duration to tamination procedures. All equipment
maintain their competencies, or shall to be used in the performance of the
demonstrate competency in those areas clean-up work shall be in serviceable
at least yearly. condition and shall have been inspected
(ii) A statement shall be made of the prior to use.
training or competency, and if a state-
APPENDICES TO § 1926.65—HAZARDOUS WASTE
ment of competency is made, the em-
OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
ployer shall keep a record of the meth-
odology used to demonstrate com- NOTE: The following appendices serve as
petency. non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ-
(9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ees and employers in complying with the ap-
propriate requirements of this section. How-
tion. (i) Members of an organized and
ever § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain
designated HAZMAT team and haz- circumstances the use of Level A and Level
ardous materials specialists shall re- B PPE protection.
ceive a baseline physical examination
and be provided with medical surveil- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.65—PERSONAL
lance as required in paragraph (f) of PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
this section. This appendix sets forth the non-manda-
(ii) Any emergency response employ- tory examples of tests which may be used to
ees who exhibits signs or symptoms evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii)
which may have resulted from exposure and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
to hazardous substances during the agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
course of an emergency incident, either A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
immediately or subsequently, shall be suit pressure test
provided with medical consultation as
1.0—Scope
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
section. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
(10) Chemical protective clothing. protective suit material, seams, and closures
Chemical protective clothing and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
equipment to be used by organized and sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
designated HAZMAT team members, or tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
to be used by hazardous materials spe- protective suit to be evaluated.
cialists, shall meet the requirements of 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this permeation, penetration, and degradation by
specific hazardous substances is not deter-
section.
mined by this test method.
(11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.0—Definition of terms
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
gency response, if it is determined that suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
it is necessary to remove hazardous which is constructed of protective clothing
substances, health hazards, and mate- materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head,
rials contaminated with them (such as arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
contaminated soil or other elements of wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at-
the natural environment) from the site tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
of the incident, the employer con-
bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots.
ducting the clean-up shall comply with 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
one of the following: material or combination of materials used in
(i) Meet all of the requirements of an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- lating parts of the body from direct contact
tion; or with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on eous chemicals.
plant property using plant or work- 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this
place employees, such employees shall test method, the limited flow of a gas under
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
have completed the training require-
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and
ments of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, time interval.
1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appro- 3.0—Summary of test method
priate safety and health training made 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and
necessary by the tasks that they are modified for the test. The test apparatus is
expected to be performed such as per- attached to the suit to permit inflation to
157
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure.
moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes,
sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the
itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit
is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the
after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop.
4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than
4.1 Source of compressed air. 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- the three-minute test period, the suit fails
ing a pressure measurement device with a the test and shall be removed from service.
sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. 7.0—Retest Procedure
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks
tape. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. brushing or wiping the entire suit (including
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de-
seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve
vice.
joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu-
5.0—Safety Precautions
tion. Observe the suit for the formation of
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor-
soap bubbles, which is an indication of a
rect pressure safety devices required for the
leak. Repair all identified leaks.
source of compressed air used.
6.0—Test Procedure 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- Test procedure 6.0.
form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.0—Report
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
moved for the test, that component shall be
sure they are positioned correctly and se-
replaced and a second test conducted with
cured tightly before putting the suit back
another component removed to permit a
into service. Special care should be taken to
complete test of the ensemble.
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A)
is not blocked.
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup-
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no Care should also be exercised to assure
case shall they be less than: (A)=three inches that the inside and outside of the suit is
water gauge; and (B)=two inches water completely dry before it is put into storage.
gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
no less than 80 percent of the test pressure suit qualitative leak test
(B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20
percent of the test pressure (B). 1.0—Scope
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one protective suit integrity by detecting inward
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- fications are made to the suit to carry out
158
this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas-
vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the
entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive
meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re-
determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during
methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning
for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the
usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the
the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver-
2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv-
which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face
materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the
wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change
tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately.
bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies
2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am-
material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight).
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi-
lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the
TECP suit. 5.0—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.0—Summary of recommended practice 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
OH) required to generate the test atmos- tection. The person conducting the test shall
phere is determined using the directions out- review the MSDS for aqueous ammonia.
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person 5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
side the enclosed test room. The con- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is only the person wearing the totally-encap-
taken by the suited individual into the test sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
two-minute evaporation period is observed sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
before the test room concentration is meas- positive pressure supplied air respirator
ured, using a high range ammonia length of available to enter the test area should the
stain detector tube. When the ammonia suited individual need assistance.
vapor reaches a concentration of between 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi-
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual vidual must be used during this test. Visual
starts a standardized exercise protocol to contact is the simplest but other methods
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is using communication devices are acceptable.
completed, the test room concentration is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to
measured again. The suited individual exits allow the exercise protocol to be carried out
159
and then to be ventilated to allow for easy centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are
after the test(s) are completed. started.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the
screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol
and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed:
participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head
with at least 15 raising motions completed in
6.0—TEST PROCEDURE one minute.
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with
foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a
Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- one-minute period.
liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10
lution per cubic foot of test area volume to complete motions of the arms from above
determine the approximate volume of con- the head to touching of the toes in a one-
centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- minute period.
erate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply standing and squatting motions in a one-
of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place minute period.
it into a closed plastic container. 6.8 If at any time during the test the col-
6.1.3 Place the container, several high orimetric indicating paper should change
range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump colors, the test should be stopped and section
in the clean test pan and locate it near the 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.9 After completion of the test exercise,
vidual has easy access to these supplies. the test area concentration should be meas-
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, ured again using the high range colorimetric
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip detector tube.
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside 6.10 Exit the test area.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator per or other appropriate suit penetration
strip with distilled water. Care shall be should be used to determine the ammonia
taken not to contaminate the detector part concentration in the suit with the low range
of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en-
to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading.
this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement
strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration
respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
the test. and the respirator removed.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building.
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower
be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be
test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria.
challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in-
6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in-
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- suit is suitable for emergency response and
tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- field use.
monia. A small mixing fan can be used near
7.0—Retest procedures
the evaporation pan to increase the evapo-
ration rate of the ammonia solution. 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for
6.6 After two minutes a determination of leaks by following the pressure test in test A
the ammonia concentration within the above.
chamber should be made using the high 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0.
160
8.0—Report or skin contact); and the performance of the
PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar-
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating
rier to these hazards. The amount of protec-
chemical protective suit tested by this prac-
tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe-
tice shall have the following information re-
corded. cific. That is, protective equipment mate-
8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- rials will protect well against some haz-
tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- ardous substances and poorly, or not at all,
rial of construction, and unique suit fea- against others. In many instances, protec-
tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. tive equipment materials cannot be found
8.1.2 General description of test room which will provide continuous protection
used for test. from the particular hazardous substance. In
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of these cases the breakthrough time of the
ammonia detector strips and color change protective material should exceed the work
data. durations.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- Other factors in this selection process to
piration date of the length of stain ammonia be considered are matching the PPE to the
detector tubes. The brand name and model of employee’s work requirements and task-spe-
the sampling pump should also be recorded. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate-
If another type of ammonia detector is used, rials, such as tear strength and seam
it should be identified along with its min- strength, should be considered in relation to
imum detection limit for ammonia. the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two relation to heat stress and task duration are
test area concentrations, their average, the a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some
interior suit concentration, and the cal- cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro-
culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex-
shall be recorded as an additional test. pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be ment.
specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ The more that is known about the hazards
and the date of the test. Any detectable am- at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of tion becomes. As more information about
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- the hazards and conditions at the site be-
cates the suit has failed this test. When comes available, the site supervisor can
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
level of detection is possible and it should be the level of PPE protection to match the
specified as the pass fail criteria. tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an em-
CAUTION ployer can use to begin the selection of the
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- formation may suggest the use of combina-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
into service. Special care should be taken to tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
is not blocked. should be cautioned that the listing below
Care should also be exercised to assure does not fully address the performance of the
that the inside and outside of the suit is specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
completely dry before it is put into storage. cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.65—GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained.
This appendix sets forth information about Part A. Personal protective equipment is
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- divided into four categories based on the de-
tion levels which may be used to assist em- gree of protection afforded. (See Part B of
ployers in complying with the PPE require- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ments of this section. els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
As required by the standard, PPE must be I. Level A— To be selected when the great-
selected which will protect employees from est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec-
the specific hazards which they are likely to tion is required.
encounter during their work on-site. The following constitute Level A equip-
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- ment; it may be used as appropriate;
plex process which should take into consider- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-
ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or
volved in this process are identification of positive pressure supplied air respirator with
the hazards, or suspected hazards; their escape SCBA, approved by the National In-
routes of potential hazard to employees (institute for Occupational Safety and Health
halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye (NIOSH).
161
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec- 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos-
tive suit. able). 1
3. Coveralls.1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash
4. Long underwear.1 goggles*.
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Escape mask. 1
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 8. Face shield. 1
shank. Part B. The types of hazards for which lev-
8. Hard hat (under suit).1 els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and are described below:
boots (depending on suit construction, may I. Level A—Level A protection should be
be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). used when:
II. Level B—The highest level of res- 1. The hazardous substance has been iden-
piratory protection is necessary but a lesser tified and requires the highest level of pro-
level of skin protection is needed. tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory
The following constitute Level B equip- system based on either the measured (or po-
ment; it may be used as appropriate. tential for) high concentration of atmos-
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- site operations and work functions involve a
tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- high potential for splash, immersion, or ex-
cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing ticulates of materials that are harmful to
(overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; skin or capable of being absorbed through
one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- the skin;
posable chemical-resistant overalls). 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
3. Coveralls. 1 to the skin are known or suspected to be
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. present, and skin contact is possible; or
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 3. Operations are being conducted in con-
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
toe and shank. sence of conditions requiring Level A have
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant not yet been determined.
(disposable).1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be
8. Hard hat. 1 used when:
9. [Reserved] 1. The type and atmospheric concentration
10. Face shield. 1 of substances have been identified and re-
III. Level C—The concentration(s) and quire a high level of respiratory protection,
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and but less skin protection;
the criteria for using air purifying res- 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
pirators are met. percent oxygen; or
The following constitute Level C equip- 3. The presence of incompletely identified
ment; it may be used as appropriate. vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
pirators (NIOSH approved). vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; skin or capable of being absorbed through
disposable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin.
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
8. Hard hat. 1 III. Level C—Level C protection should be
9. Escape mask. 1 used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid
IV. Level D—A work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad-
minimal protection, used for nuisance con- versely affect or be absorbed through any ex-
tamination only. posed skin;
The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been
ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an
1. Coveralls.
air-purifying respirator is available that can
2. Gloves. 1
remove the contaminants; and
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying
and shank.
respirators are met.
IV. Level D—Level D protection should be
1 Optional, as applicable. used when:
162
1. The atmosphere contains no known haz- ty and health of employees at the site, and
ard; and the relationships with contractors or support
2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- services as to what each employer’s safety
mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- and health responsibilities are for their em-
halation of or contact with hazardous levels ployees on the site. Each contractor on the
of any chemicals. site needs to have its own safety and health
program so structured that it will smoothly
NOTE: As stated before, combinations of
interface with the program of the site coor-
personal protective equipment other than
dinator or principal contractor.
those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro-
Also those employers involved with treat-
tection may be more appropriate and may be
ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as
used to provide the proper level of protec-
covered in paragraph (p) must have imple-
tion.
mented a safety and health program for their
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical
employees. This program is to include the
protective clothing, it should be noted that
hazard communication program required in
the National Fire Protection Association
paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in
(NFPA) has developed standards on chemical
paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the
protective clothing. The standards that have
employers comprehensive overall safety and
been adopted by include:
health program. This program is to be in
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective
writing.
Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies
Each site or workplace safety and health
(EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
program will need to include the following:
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-
(1) Policy statements of the line of authority
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
and accountability for implementing the
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth-
program, the objectives of the program and
ing).
the role of the site safety and health super-
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-
visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-
methods for the development of procedures
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em-
performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules,
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices
protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su-
are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed
chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work
standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.65—COMPLIANCE anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
GUIDELINES tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
nator or the employer’s representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those
purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site.
tion of employees at the site and will be an Accidents on the site or workplace should
extension of the employer’s overall safety be investigated to provide information on
and health program. The program will need how such occurrences can be avoided in the
to be developed before work begins on the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
site and implemented as work proceeds as the site or workplace, they will need to be
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- investigated to determine what needs to be
cilitate coordination and communication of done to prevent this incident from occurring
safety and health issues among personnel re- again. Such information will need to be used
sponsible for the various activities which as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro-
will take place at the site. It will provide the gram and the information turned into posi-
overall means for planning and imple- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re-
menting the needed safety and health train- ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints
ing and job orientation of employees who relating to safety and health issues involved
will be working at the site. The program will with site or workplace activities is also a
provide the means for identifying and con- feedback mechanism that can be used effec-
trolling worksite hazards and the means for tively to improve the program and may serve
monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- in part as an evaluative tool(s).
gram will need to cover the responsibilities For the development and implementation
and authority of the site coordinator or the of the program to be the most effective, pro-
employer’s manager on the site for the safe- fessional safety and health personnel should
163
be used. Certified Safety Professionals, ical surveillance program, the standard oper-
Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- ating procedures for the hazardous materials
istered Professional Safety Engineers are team including the use of plugging and
good examples of professional stature for patching equipment and other subject areas.
safety and health managers who will admin- Officers and leaders who may be expected
ister the employer’s program. to be in charge at an incident should be fully
2. Training. The training programs for em- knowledgeable of their company’s incident
ployees subject to the requirements of para- command system. They should know where
graph (e) of this standard should address: the and how to obtain additional assistance and
safety and health hazards employees should be familiar with the local district’s emer-
expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up gency response plan and the state emergency
sites; what control measures or techniques response plan.
are effective for those hazards; what moni- Specialist employees such as technical ex-
toring procedures are effective in character- perts, medical experts or environmental ex-
izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts that work with hazardous materials in
tive employer’s safety and health program; their regular jobs, who may be sent to the
what a site safety and health plan should in- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer
clude; hands on training with personal pro- or governmental agency to advise and assist
tective equipment and clothing they may be the person in charge of the incident should
expected to use; the contents of the OSHA have training on an annual basis. Their
standard relevant to the employee’s duties training should include the care and use of
and function; and, employee’s responsibil- personal protective equipment including res-
ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su-
pirators; knowledge of the incident com-
pervisors will need training in their respon-
mand system and how they are to relate to
sibilities under the safety and health pro-
it; and those areas needed to keep them cur-
gram and its subject areas such as the spill
rent in their respective field as it relates to
containment program, the personal protec-
safety and health involving specific haz-
tive equipment program, the medical sur-
ardous substances.
veillance program, the emergency response
plan and other areas. Those skilled support personnel, such as
The training programs for employees sub- employees who work for public works depart-
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of ments or equipment operators who operate
this standard should address: the employers bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
safety and health program elements impact- may be called to the incident scene to pro-
ing employees; the hazard communication vide emergency support assistance, should
program; the medical surveillance program; have at least a safety and health briefing be-
the hazards and the controls for such hazards fore entering the area of potential or actual
that employees need to know for their job exposure. These skilled support personnel,
duties and functions. All require annual re- who have not been a part of the emergency
fresher training. response plan and do not meet the training
The training programs for employees cov- requirements, should be made aware of the
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of hazards they face and should be provided all
this standard should address those com- necessary protective clothing and equipment
petencies required for the various levels of required for their tasks.
response such as: the hazards associated with There are two National Fire Protection As-
hazardous substances; hazard identification sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard
and awareness; notification of appropriate for Professional Competence of Responders
persons; the need for and use of personal pro- to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA
tective equipment including respirators; the 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding
decontamination procedures to be used; to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are
preplanning activities for hazardous sub- excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
stance incidents including the emergency partments and other emergency response or-
reponse plan; company standard operating ganizations in developing their training pro-
procedures for hazardous substance emer- gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
gency responses; the use of the incident com- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
mand system and other subjects. Hands-on responder awareness level, first responder
training should be stressed whenever pos- operations level, hazmat technicians, and
sible. Critiques done after an incident which hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for
include an evaluation of what worked and the officer corp who will be in charge of haz-
what did not and how could the incident be ardous substance incidents.
better handled the next time may be counted 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro-
as training time. cedures should be tailored to the specific
For hazardous materials specialists (usu- hazards of the site, and may vary in com-
ally members of hazardous materials teams), plexity and number of steps, depending on
the training should address the care, use and/ the level of hazard and the employee’s expo-
or testing of chemical protective clothing insure to the hazard. Decontamination proce-
cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- dures and PPE decontamination methods
164
will vary depending upon the specific sub- the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal-
stance, since one procedure or method may function of the PPE. To accomplish these
not work for all substances. Evaluation of goals, a comprehensive PPE program should
decontamination methods and procedures include hazard identification, medical moni-
should be performed, as necessary, to assure toring, environmental surveillance, selec-
that employees are not exposed to hazards tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination
by re-using PPE. References in appendix D of PPE and its associated training.
may be used for guidance in establishing an The written PPE program should include
effective decontamination program. In addi- policy statements, procedures, and guide-
tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy lines. Copies should be made available to all
Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- employees, and a reference copy should be
ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- made available at the worksite. Technical
tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST data on equipment, maintenance manuals,
M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing relevant regulations, and other essential in-
an effective decontamination program. formation should also be collected and main-
4. Emergency response plans. States, along tained.
with designated districts within the states, 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph
will be developing or have developed local 1926.65(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation
emergency response plans. These state and of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
district plans should be utilized in the emer- to effectively control and manage operations
gency response plans called for in the stand- at an emergency incident. The individual in
ard. Each employer should assure that its charge of the ICS is the senior official re-
emergency response plan is compatible with sponding to the incident. The ICS is not
the local plan. The major reference being much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap-
used to aid in developing the state and local
proach used for many years by the fire serv-
district plans is the Hazardous Materials
ice. During large complex fires involving sev-
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur-
eral companies and many pieces of appa-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from
ratus, a command post would be established.
the U.S. Department of Transportation,
This enabled one individual to be in charge of
CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service
managing the incident, rather than having
Emergency Management Handbook may also
several officers from different companies
be used as resources.
making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
Employers involved with treatment, stor-
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous decisions. The individual in charge of the
waste, which have the required contingency command post would delegate responsibility
plan called for by their permit, would not for performing various tasks to subordinate
need to duplicate the same planning ele- officers. Additionally, all communications
ments. Those items of the emergency re- were routed through the command post to
sponse plan that are properly addressed in reduce the number of radio transmissions
the contingency plan may be substituted and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
into the emergency response plan required in tactics, and all decisions were made by one
1926.65 or otherwise kept together for em- individual.
ployer and employee use. The ICS is a very similar system, except it
5. Personal protective equipment programs. is implemented for emergency response to
The purpose of personal protective clothing all incidents, both large and small, that in-
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate volve hazardous substances.
individuals from the chemical, physical, and For a small incident, the individual in
biologic hazards that may be encountered at charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
a hazardous substance site. of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
As discussed in appendix B, no single com- delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
bination of protective equipment and cloth- ample, in response to a small incident, the
ing is capable of protecting against all haz- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- to normal command activities, may become
tion with other protective methods and its the safety officer and may designate only
effectiveness evaluated periodically. one employee (with proper equipment) as a
The use of PPE can itself create significant back-up to provide assistance if needed.
worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical OSHA does recommend, however, that at
and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back-
sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed
given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue.
should be selected that provide an adequate To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the
level of protection. However, over-protec- following scenario might develop during a
tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- small incident, such as an overturned tank
ardous and should be avoided where possible. truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program The first responding senior officer would
should be to protect the wearer from safety implement and take command of the ICS.
and health hazards, and to prevent injury to That person would size-up the incident and
165
determine if additional personnel and appa- ter; standard operating procedures and safe
ratus were necessary; would determine what work practices; medical assistance and
actions to take to control the leak; and, de- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con-
termine the proper level of personal protec- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination
tive equipment. If additional assistance is procedures and area; and other relevant
not needed, the individual in charge of the areas. This plan should be a part of the em-
ICS would implement actions to stop and ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex-
control the leak using the fewest number of tension of it to the specific site.
personnel that can effectively accomplish 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers
the tasks. The individual in charge of the handling hazardous substances may be ex-
ICS then would designate himself as the safe-
posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio-
ty officer and two other employees as a
logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a
back-up in case rescue may become nec-
medical surveillance program is essential to
essary. In this scenario, decontamination
procedures would not be necessary. assess and monitor workers’ health and fit-
A large complex incident may require ness for employment in hazardous waste op-
many employees and difficult, time-con- erations and during the course of work; to
suming efforts to control. In these situa- provide emergency and other treatment as
tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will needed; and to keep accurate records for fu-
want to delegate different tasks to subordi- ture reference.
nates in order to maintain a span of control The Occupational Safety and Health Guid-
that will keep the number of subordinates, ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
that are reporting, to a manageable level. ties developed by the National Institute for
Delegation of task at large incidents may Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
be by location, where the incident scene is the Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
divided into sectors, and subordinate officers istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard
coordinate activities within the sector that (USCG), and the Environmental Protection
they have been assigned. Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- cellent example of the types of medical test-
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- ing that should be done as part of a medical
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- surveillance program.
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources Programs. Where hazardous substances may
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; be released by spilling from a container that
safety; and, site control (integrate activities will expose employees to the hazards of the
with police for crowd and traffic control). materials, the employer will need to imple-
Also for a large incident, the individual in ment a program to contain and control the
charge of the ICS will designate several em- spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number
as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
of safety officers to monitor conditions and
earth, are traditional techniques which have
recommend safety precautions.
proven to be effective over the years. How-
Therefore, no matter what size or com-
ever, in recent years new products have come
plexity an incident may be, by implementing
an ICS there will be one individual in charge into the marketplace, the use of which com-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- plement and increase the effectiveness of
tions; and, all actions, and communications these traditional methods. These new prod-
are coordinated through one central point of ucts also provide emergency responders and
command. Such a system should reduce con- others with additional tools or agents to use
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
nate actions, and should facilitate effective These agents can be rapidly applied over a
management of the incident. large area and can be uniformly applied or
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
and security of response personnel and oth- thus improving the workers’ ability to con-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- trol spilled material. These application tech-
dent site should be of primary concern to the niques enhance the intimate contact be-
incident commander. The use of a site safety tween the agent and the spilled material al-
and control plan could greatly assist those in lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
charge of assuring the safety and health of quickest control of the spilled material.
employees on the site. Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled
A comprehensive site safety and control materials, to suppress vapor generation from
plan should include the following: summary spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe-
analysis of hazards on the site and a risk cial agents, which when applied as rec-
analysis of those hazards; site map or ommended by the manufacturer, will react
sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- in a controlled manner with the spilled ma-
tion or decontamination zone, work or hot terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or
zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the
nications; command post or command cen- spilled material.
166
There are several modern methods and de- follow the employer’s established standard
vices for use by emergency response per- operating procedures for spill control. All in-
sonnel or others involved with spill control volved workers need to be trained in the es-
efforts to safely apply spill control agents to tablished operating procedures; in the use
control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in
clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such
lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work.
devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things
to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part
allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat-
out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or
spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of
apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control
a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a
The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR
rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
ardous substance spills. By directing the
agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1926.65—REFERENCES
spill, the reactant solid will automatically The following references may be consulted
create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of for further information on the subject of this
the material. Clean-up of hazardous substandard:
stances is greatly improved when solidifying 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu-
agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz-
vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ardous Waste Sites.
applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A—
uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and
sorb them, which results in materials which Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous
are less hazardous and easier to handle, Waste Site Activities.
transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu-
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175.
protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration,
The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986.
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and
for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically.
portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
having to step into the untreated spilled ma- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
terial. Some of these systems can be re- Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
charged in the field to provide coverage of sion, December 1984.
larger spill areas than the design limits of a 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
single charged applicator unit. Some of the Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
more effective agents can solidify the liquid U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
flammable hazardous substances and at the fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 Hazardous Response Support Division, April
°F so the resulting substance may be handled 1985.
as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
larly § 261.21). ardous Response Support Division, Environ-
All workers performing hazardous sub- mental Response Team; November 1984.
stance spill control work are expected to 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
wear the proper protective clothing and Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
equipment for the materials present and to National Institute for Occupational Safety
167
and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety programs must be developed on the basis of
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. a needs assessment of the hazardous waste
Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response op-
Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985. eration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- It is noted that the legal requirements are
ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- set forth in the regulatory text of § 1926.65.
ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ The guidance set forth here presents a highly
006; September 1985. effective program that in the areas covered
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous would meet or exceed the regulatory require-
Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul-
ments. In addition, other approaches could
letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human
meet the regulatory requirements.
Services, Public Health Service, Centers for
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- Suggested General Criteria
pational Safety and Health; December 1982. Definitions:
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- Competent means possessing the skills,
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; knowledge, experience, and judgment to per-
U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- form assigned tasks or activities satisfac-
ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis- torily as determined by the employer.
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- Demonstration means the showing by actual
tional Safety and Health; October 1984. use of equipment or procedures.
14. Fire Service Emergency Management Hands-on training means training in a sim-
Handbook, International Association of Fire ulated work environment that permits each
Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, student to have experience performing tasks,
Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985. making decisions, or using equipment appro-
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De- priate to the job assignment for which the
partment of Transportation, Washington, training is being conducted.
DC, 1987. Initial training means training required
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- prior to beginning work.
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, Lecture means an interactive discourse
Federal Emergency Management Agency, with a class lead by an instructor.
Washington, DC, July 1986. Proficient means meeting a stated level of
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. achievement.
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National Site-specific means individual training di-
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch rected to the operations of a specific job site.
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
Training hours means the number of hours
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na-
devoted to lecture, learning activities, small
tional Fire Protection Association,
group work sessions, demonstration, evalua-
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
tions, or hands-on experience.
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec-
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- Suggested Core Criteria:
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. 1. Training facility. The training facility
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- should have available sufficient resources,
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, equipment, and site locations to perform di-
DC 20037, 1986. dactic and hands-on training when appro-
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection cient organization, support staff, and serv-
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. ices to conduct training in each of the
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together courses offered.
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation 2. Training Director. Each training program
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, should be under the direction of a training
Washington, DC, May 1983. director who is responsible for the program.
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and The Training Director should have a min-
Industry, Federal Emergency Management imum of two years of employee education ex-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August perience.
1987. 3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem
competent on the basis of previous docu-
APPENDIX TO § 1926.65—TRAINING CURRICULUM
mented experience in their area of instruc-
GUIDELINES
tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the-
The following non-mandatory general cri- trainer’’ program specific to the topics they
teria may be used for assistance in devel- will teach, and an evaluation of instruc-
oping site-specific training curriculum used tional competence by the Training Director.
to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR Instructors should be required to maintain
1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and professional competency by participating in
29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These continuing education or professional devel-
are generic guidelines and they are not pre- opment programs or by completing success-
sented as a complete training curriculum for fully an annual refresher course and having
any specific employer. Site-specific training an annual review by the Training Director.
168
The annual review by the Training Direc- riculum and any update should be approved
tor should include observation of an instruc- by the Training Director.
tor’s delivery, a review of those observations The proficiency assessment methods, re-
with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- gardless of the approach or combination of
structor or class evaluations completed by approaches used, should be justified, docu-
the students during the previous year. ment and approved by the Training Director.
4. Course materials. The Training Director The proficiency of those taking the addi-
should approve all course materials to be tional courses for supervisors should be eval-
used by the training provider. Course mate- uated and document by using proficiency as-
rials should be reviewed and updated at least sessment methods acceptable to the Training
annually. Materials and equipment should be Director. These proficiency assessment
in good working order and maintained prop- methods must reflect the additional respon-
erly. sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in
All written and audio-visual materials in hazardous waste operations or emergency re-
training curricula should be peer reviewed by sponse.
technically competent outside reviewers or 8. Course certificate. Written documentation
by a standing advisory committee. should be provided to each student who sat-
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- isfactorily completes the training course.
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- The documentation should include:
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, a. Student’s name.
chemical/environmental engineering, em- b. Course title.
ployee education, or emergency response. c. Course date.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be d. Statement that the student has success-
a employee experienced in the work activi- fully completed the course.
ties to which the training is directed.
e. Name and address of the training pro-
5. Students. The program for accepting stu-
vider.
dents should include:
f. An individual identification number for
a. Assurance that the student is or will be
the certificate.
involved in work where chemical exposures
g. List of the levels of personal protective
are likely and that the student possesses the
skills necessary to perform the work. equipment used by the student to complete
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- the course.
ance. This documentation may include a certifi-
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- nated card with a photograph of the student
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- and the above information. When such
tective equipment should have the following course certificate cards are used, the indi-
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or vidual identification number for the training
Level D personal protective equipment the certificate should be shown on the card.
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
For Level A or Level B personal protective maintain records listing the dates courses
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per were presented, the names of the individual
instructor. course attenders, the names of those stu-
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should dents successfully completing each course,
be evaluated and documented by the use of a and the number of training certificates
written assessment and a skill demonstra- issued to each successful student. These
tion selected and developed by the Training records should be maintained for a minimum
Director and training staff. The assessment of five years after the date an individual par-
and demonstration should evaluate the ticipated in a training program offered by
knowledge and individual skills developed in the training provider. These records should
the course of training. The level of minimum be available and provided upon the student’s
achievement necessary for proficiency shall request or as mandated by law.
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- 10. Program quality control. The Training
tor. Director should conduct or direct an annual
If a written test is used, there should be a written audit of the training program. Pro-
minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is gram modifications to address deficiencies, if
used in combination with a skills demonstra- any, should be documented, approved, and
tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be implemented by the training provider. The
used. If a skills demonstration is used, the audit and the program modification docu-
tasks chosen and the means to rate success- ments should be maintained at the training
ful completion should be fully documented facility.
by the Training Director. Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
The content of the written test or of the Factors listed here are suggested criteria
skill demonstration shall be relevant to the for determining the quality and appropriate-
objectives of the course. The written test ness of employee health and safety training
and skill demonstration should be updated as for hazardous waste operations and emer-
necessary to reflect changes in the cur- gency response.
169
A. Training Plan. Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili-
Adequacy and appropriateness of the train- ties and resources for supporting the train-
ing program’s curriculum development, ining program should be considered, including,
structor training, distribution of course ma- 1. Space and equipment to conduct the
terials, and direct student training should be training.
considered, including 2. Facilities for representative hands-on
1. The duration of training, course content, training.
and course schedules/agendas;
3. In the case of multiple-site programs,
2. The different training requirements of
equipment and facilities at the satellite cen-
the various target populations, as specified
ters.
in the appropriate generic training cur-
riculum; 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
3. The process for the development of cur- quality control and evaluations program to
riculum, which includes appropriate tech- account for instructor performance.
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
gram pretesting. quality control and evaluation program to
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction back, updating, and corrective action.
methods; 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, ciplines and expertise being used within the
progress, and performance during the train- quality control and evaluation program.
ing. 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
B. Program management, Training Director, role of student evaluations to provide feed-
staff, and consultants. back for training program improvement.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per- D. Quality control and evaluation.
formance and delivering an effective training
Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
program should be considered, including
control and evaluation plans for training
1. Demonstration of the training director’s
leadership in assuring quality of health and programs should be considered, including:
safety training. 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
2. Demonstration of the competency of the competent outside reviewers to give overall
staff to meet the demands of delivering high policy guidance;
quality hazardous waste employee health 2. Clear and adequate definition of the
and safety training. composition and active programmatic role of
3. Organization charts establishing clear the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
lines of authority. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the the advisory committee or outside reviewers’
relationship of the training staff to the over- meetings or written communication.
all program. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
5. Evidence that the training organiza- quality control and evaluations program to
tional structure suits the needs of the train- account for instructor performance.
ing program. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the quality control and evaluation program to
training methods used by the instructors.
ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by
back, updating, and corrective action.
the training director and staff to the train-
ing program. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to ciplines and expertise being used within the
students. quality control and evaluation program.
9. Availability and commitment of the 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
training program of adequate human and role of student evaluations to provide feed-
equipment resources in the areas of back for training program improvement.
a. Health effects, E. Students
b. Safety, Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro-
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), gram for accepting students should be con-
d. Operational procedures, sidered, including
e. Employee protection practices/proce-
1. Assurance that the student already pos-
dures.
10. Appropriateness of management con- sess the necessary skills for their job, includ-
trols. ing necessary documentation.
11. Adequacy of the organization and ap- 2. Appropriateness of methods the program
propriate resources assigned to assure appro- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of
priate training. satisfactorily completing training.
12. In the case of multiple-site training 3. Review and compliance with any medical
programs, adequacy of satellite centers man- clearance policy.
agement. F. Institutional Environment and Administra-
C. Training facilities and resources. tive Support
170
The adequacy and appropriateness of the (3) The content of an effective site safety
institutional environment and administra- and health plan consistent with the require-
tive support system for the training program ments of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii).
should be considered, including (4) Emergency response plan and proce-
1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29
ment to the employee training program. CFR 1926.65(l).
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- (5) Adequate illumination.
ministrative structure and administrative (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip-
support. ment.
(7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz-
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions ard-communication standard (29 CFR
Key questions for evaluating the quality 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29
and appropriateness of an overall training CFR 1910.147).
program should include the following: (8) Review of other applicable standards in-
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- cluding but not limited to those in the con-
ed? struction standards (29 CFR Part 1926).
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
tives? and employees under applicable OSHA and
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- EPA laws.
able? b. Technical knowledge.
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, (1) Type of potential exposures to chem-
demonstration, and hands-on training? ical, biological, and radiological hazards;
5. Is the program providing quality em- types of human responses to these hazards
ployee health and safety training that fully and recognition of those responses; prin-
meets the intent of regulatory requirements? ciples of toxicology and information about
6. What are the program’s main strengths? acute and chronic hazards; health and safety
7. What are the program’s main weak- considerations of new technology.
nesses? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
8. What is recommended to improve the cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
program? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
9. Are instructors instructing according to ical and chemical properties.
their training outlines? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
cals.
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap-
(4) General safety hazards such as but not
propriate for the program content?
limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
11. Is the course material current and rel-
ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
evant to the target group?
ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines ards, and hazards associated with working in
The following training curriculum guide- hot and cold temperature extremes.
lines are for those operations specifically (5) Review and knowledge of confined space
identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- (6) Work practices to minimize employee
structors, training certification, and similar risk from site hazards.
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
ations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
in the preceding section and are not re-ad- nology or safety procedures.
dressed in each of the generic guidelines. (8) Review and demonstration of com-
Basic core requirements for training pro- petency with air sampling and monitoring
grams that are addressed include equipment that may be used in a site moni-
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations toring program.
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, (9) Container sampling procedures and
and disposal facilities. safeguarding; general drum and container
3. Emergency Response. handling procedures including special re-
quirement for laboratory waste packs,
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and
shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
Site-specific Training
wastes.
1. Off-site training. (10) The elements of a spill control pro-
Minimum training course content for haz- gram.
ardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR (11) Proper use and limitations of material
1926.65(e), should include the following topics handling equipment.
or procedures: (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep-
a. Regulatory knowledge. aration of containers for shipping and trans-
(1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core port.
elements of an occupational safety and (13) Methods of communication including
health program. those used while wearing respiratory protec-
(2) The content of a medical surveillance tion.
program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f). c. Technical skills.
171
(1) Selection, use maintenance, and limita- with information and training prior to ini-
tions of personal protective equipment in- tial assignment into their work area, as fol-
cluding the components and procedures for lows:
carrying out a respirator program to comply (1) The requirements of the hazard commu-
with 29 CFR 1910.134. nication program including the location and
(2) Instruction in decontamination pro- availability of the written program, required
grams including personnel, equipment, and lists of hazardous chemicals, and material
hardware; hands-on training including level safety data sheets.
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- (2) Activities and locations in their work
contamination lines; field activities includ- area where hazardous substance may be
ing the donning and doffing of protective present.
equipment to a level commensurate with the (3) Methods and observations that may be
employee’s anticipated job function and reused to detect the present or release of a haz-
sponsibility and to the degree required by ardous chemical in the work area (such as
potential hazards. monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
hazard coding systems. smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
d. Additional suggested items. and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
(1) A laminated, dated card or certificate vices that record chemical releases.
with photo, denoting limitations and level of (4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
protection for which the employee is trained stances known or potentially present in the
should be issued to those students success- work area.
fully completing a course. (5) The measures employees can take to
(2) Attendance should be required at all help protect themselves from work-site haz-
training modules, with successful comple- ards, including specific procedures the em-
tion of exercises and a final written or oral ployer has implemented.
examination with at least 50 questions.
(6) An explanation of the labeling system
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program
and material safety data sheets and how em-
should be devoted to hands-on exercises.
ployees can obtain and use appropriate haz-
(4) A curriculum should be established for
ard information.
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29
(7) The elements of the confined space pro-
CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such
gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
courses directed toward those areas of pre-
toring requirements, communication proce-
vious training that need improvement or re-
dures, emergency response, and applicable
emphasis.
lock-out procedures.
(5) A curriculum should be established for
b. The employer should provide hazardous
the required 8-hour training for supervisors.
waste employees information and training
Demonstrated competency in the skills and
and should provide a review and access to
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course
the site safety and plan as follows:
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train-
ing. (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
2. Refresher training. sponsible for site safety and health.
The 8-hour annual refresher training re- (2) Safety and health hazards present on
quired in 29 CFR 1926.65(e)(8) should be con- the site.
ducted by qualified training providers. Re- (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
fresher training should include at a min- tations of personal protective equipment
imum the following topics and procedures: specific to the site.
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant (4) Work practices by which the employee
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- can minimize risks from hazards.
propriate, using reports by the students on (5) Safe use of engineering controls and
their work experiences. equipment available on site.
(b) Update on developments with respect to (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
material covered in the 40-hour course. lished to minimize employee contact with
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- hazardous substances, including:
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (A) Employee decontamination,
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas (B) Clothing decontamination, and
as appropriate. (C) Equipment decontamination.
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE (7) Elements of the site emergency re-
or decontamination equipment or proce- sponse plan, including:
dures. Review of new developments in per- (A) Pre-emergency planning.
sonal protective equipment. (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority
(f) Review of newly developed air and con- and communication.
taminant monitoring equipment. (C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
3. On-site training. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
a. The employer should provide employees (E) Site security and control.
engaged in hazardous waste site activities (F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
172
(G) Decontamination procedures not cov- dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-
ered by the site safety and health plan. working surface hazards.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures.
aid. (e) Work practices to minimize employee
(I) Emergency equipment and procedures risk from workplace hazards.
for handling emergency incidents. (f) Emergency response plan and proce-
c. The employer should provide hazardous dures including first aid meeting the require-
waste employees information and training ments of paragraph (p)(8).
on personal protective equipment used at the (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex-
site, such as the following: posure to hazardous waste and various type
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- of waste streams, including the materials
ticipated site hazards. handling program and spill containment pro-
(2) PPE limitations of materials and con- gram.
struction; limitations during temperature (h) A review of hazard communication pro-
extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
medical considerations; use and limitations 1910.1200.
of respirator equipment as well as docu- (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
1910.134. 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
during, and after use. ardous substance including known syner-
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. gistic interactions.
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- (j) A review of decontamination programs
cedures. and procedures meeting the requirements of
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4).
(k) A review of an employer’s requirements
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita-
to implement a training program and its ele-
tions.
ments.
d. The employer should instruct the em-
(l) A review of the criteria and programs
ployee about the site medical surveillance
for proper selection and use of personal pro-
program relative to the particular site, in-
tective equipment, including respirators.
cluding
(m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs
to 29 CFR 1926.65.
that have been adapted for the site.
(n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to
monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site.
health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic (o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site. and EPA laws.
(4) Maintenance and availability of (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
records. of competency with equipment to illustrate
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- the basic equipment principles that may be
dures to be followed when signs and symp- used during the performance of work duties,
toms of exposures are recognized. including the donning and doffing of PPE.
e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con-
and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests.
with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for
erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi-
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities.
1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide
quired in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information
the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training
29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following
ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics:
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (a) The Emergency response plan and pro-
not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- cedures including first aid.
diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous
ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- waste handling procedures including the ma-
ards. terials handling program and elements of the
(c) General safety hazards including those spill containment program, location of spill
associated with electrical hazards, powered response kits or equipment, and the names of
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce- those trained to respond to releases.
173
(c) The hazardous communication program Emergency response organizations are re-
meeting the requirements of 29 CFR quired to consider the topics listed in
1910.1200. § 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organiza-
(d) A review of the employer’s medical sur- tions may use some or all of the following
veillance program including the recognition topics to supplement those mandatory topics
of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel- when developing their response training pro-
evant hazardous substance including known grams. Many of the topics would require an
synergistic interactions. interaction between the response provider
(e) A review of the employer’s decon- and the individuals responsible for the site
tamination program and procedures. where the response would be expected.
(f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including:
program and the parties responsible for that (A) Nature of hazardous substances
program. present,
(g) A review of the employer’s personal (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
protective equipment program including the ognition, including presentations on biology,
proper selection and use of PPE based upon chemistry, and physics.
specific site hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- monitoring, and risk assessment.
dressing potential safety and health hazards. (3) Safe work practices and general site
This may include, as appropriate, biological safety.
and radiological exposures, fire and explo-
(4) Engineering controls and hazardous
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical
waste operations.
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered
(5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz-
ating procedures.
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-
working surface hazards. (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- tices.
ment on site. (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re- self-rescue.
sponsible for safety and health. (8) Safe use of field equipment.
(9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
C. Emergency response training.
tation of hazardous substances.
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR
(10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
1926.65(q) are directed toward private sector
protective equipment.
emergency responders. Therefore, the guide-
(11) Safe sampling techniques.
lines provided in this portion of the appendix
are directed toward that employee popu- (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
lation. However, they also impact indirectly ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
through State OSHA or USEPA regulations cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
some public sector emergency responders. compensations and liability.
Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (13) Medical monitoring requirements.
portion of the appendix may be applied to (14) Community relations.
both employee populations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
States with OSHA state plans must cover (1) First responder awareness level.
their employees with regulations at least as (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. petency in performing the applicable skills
Public employees in states without approved of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
state OSHA programs covering hazardous (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
waste operations and emergency response partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re-
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
311, a regulation virtually identical to with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60.
§ 1926.65. (C) Review of the principles and practices
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix for analyzing an incident to determine both
and therefore not an enforceable standard, the hazardous substances present and the
OSHA recommends that those employers, basic hazard and response information for
employees or volunteers in public sector each hazardous substance present.
emergency response organizations outside (D) Review of procedures for implementing
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- actions consistent with the local emergency
lowing criteria in developing their own response plan, the organization’s standard
training programs. A unified approach to operating procedures, and the current edi-
training at the community level between tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no-
emergency response organizations covered tification procedures and follow-up commu-
by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- nications.
rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an (E) Review of the expected hazards includ-
effective community response to the release ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
or potential release of hazardous substances space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
in the community. equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
a. General considerations. and walking-working surface hazards.
174
(F) Awareness and knowledge of the com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petencies for the First Responder at the and chemical properties, the likely behavior
Awareness Level covered in the National of the hazardous substance and its container,
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. the types of hazardous substance transpor-
472, Professional Competence of Responders to tation containers and vehicles involved in
Hazardous Materials Incidents. the release, the appropriate strategy for ap-
(2) First responder operations level. proaching release sites and containing the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- release.
petency in performing the applicable skills (D) Review of procedures for implementing
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). continuing response actions consistent with
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- the local emergency response plan, the orga-
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- nization’s standard operating procedures,
sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer mate- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in-
rial safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ cluding extended emergency notification
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts procedures and follow-up communications.
and other relevant sources of information (E) Review of the principles and practice
addressing hazardous substance releases. Fa- for proper selection and use of personal pro-
miliarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR tective equipment.
1926.60. (F) Review of the principles and practices
(C) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
for analyzing an incident to determine the tamination and medical surveillance sta-
hazardous substances present, the likely be- tions and procedures.
havior of the hazardous substance and its (G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
container, the types of hazardous substance ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
transportation containers and vehicles, the space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
types and selection of the appropriate defen- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
sive strategy for containing the release. and walking-working surface hazards.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
continuing response actions consistent with petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
the local emergency response plan, the orga- nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
nization’s standard operating procedures, tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
cluding extended emergency notification Materials Incidents.
procedures and follow-up communications. (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
(E) Review of the principles and practice (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
for proper selection and use of personal pro- petency in performing the applicable skills
tective equipment. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(F) Review of the principles and practice of (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
personnel and equipment decontamination. use of written and electronic information
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- relative to response decision making includ-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered of Transportation’s Emergency Response
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer material
and walking-working surface hazards. safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC,
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- shipper or manufacturer contacts, computer
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- data bases and response models, and other
erations Level covered in the National Fire relevant sources of information addressing
Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, hazardous substance releases. Familiariza-
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- tion with 29 CFR 1926.60.
ardous Materials Incidents. (C) Review of the principles and practices
(3) Hazardous materials technician. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petency in performing the applicable skills and chemical properties, and the likely be-
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). havior of the hazardous substance and its
(B) Hands-on experience with written and container, vessel, or vehicle.
electronic information relative to response (D) Review of the principles and practices
decision making including but not limited to for identification of the types of hazardous
the U.S. Department of Transportation’s substance transportation containers, vessels
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- and vehicles involved in the release; select-
facturer material safety data sheets, ing and using the various types of equipment
CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufac- available for plugging or patching transpor-
turer contacts, computer data bases and re- tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga-
sponse models, and other relevant sources of nizing and directing the use of multiple
information addressing hazardous substance teams of hazardous material technicians and
releases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60. selecting the appropriate strategy for ap-
(C) Review of the principles and practices proaching release sites and containing or
for analyzing an incident to determine the stopping the release.
175
(E) Review of procedures for implementing (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to
continuing response actions consistent with the conditions of the response and to notify
the local emergency response plan, the orga- higher levels of response when required by
nization’s standard operating procedures, in- the changes to the response plan.
cluding knowledge of the available public
and private response resources, establish- [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59
ment of an incident command post, direction FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
of hazardous material technician teams, and 1996]
extended emergency notification procedures
and follow-up communications. § 1926.66 Criteria for design and con-
(F) Review of the principles and practice struction of spray booths.
for proper selection and use of personal pro-
tective equipment. (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
(G) Review of the principles and practices tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated
of establishing exposure zones and proper de- powders shall mean any powdered ma-
contamination, monitoring and medical sur- terial used as a coating material which
veillance stations and procedures. shall be fluidized within a container by
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined passing air uniformly from below. It is
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered common practice to fluidize such mate-
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, rials to form a fluidized powder bed and
and walking-working surface hazards. then dip the part to be coated into the
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com- bed in a manner similar to that used in
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em-
liquid dipping. Such beds are also used
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec-
tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- as sources for powder spray operations.
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous (2) Spraying area. Any area in which
Materials Incidents. dangerous quantities of flammable va-
(5) Incident commander. pors or mists, or combustible residues,
The incident commander is the individual
dusts, or deposits are present due to
who, at any one time, is responsible for and
in control of the response effort. This indi- the operation of spraying processes.
vidual is the person responsible for the direc- (3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated
tion and coordination of the response effort. structure provided to enclose or accom-
An incident commander’s position should be modate a spraying operation to confine
occupied by the most senior, appropriately and limit the escape of spray, vapor,
trained individual present at the response
site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by
and residue, and to safely conduct or
the level of response provided, the position direct them to an exhaust system.
may be occupied by many individuals during (4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray
a particular response as the need for greater booth equipped with a water washing
authority, responsibility, or training in- system designed to minimize dusts or
creases. It is possible for the first responder residues entering exhaust ducts and to
at the awareness level to assume the duties
of incident commander until a more senior permit the recovery of overspray fin-
and appropriately trained individual arrives ishing material.
at the response site. (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not
Therefore, any emergency responder ex- equipped with a water washing system
pected to perform as an incident commander as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of
section. A dry spray booth may be
the position at the level of response they will
be providing including the following: equipped with
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- (i) Distribution or baffle plates to
stance incident to determine the magnitude promote an even flow of air through
of the response problem. the booth or cause the deposit of
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- overspray before it enters the exhaust
propriate response plan within the capabili-
ties of available personnel and equipment.
duct; or
(C) Ability to implement a response to fa- (ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize
vorably change the outcome of the incident dusts; or
in a manner consistent with the local emer- (iii) Overspray dry filters to mini-
gency response plan and the organization’s mize dusts or residues entering exhaust
standard operating procedures.
ducts; or
(D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the
emergency response to ensure that the re- (iv) Overspray dry filter rolls de-
sponse objectives are being met safely, effec- signed to minimize dusts or residues
tively, and efficiently. entering exhaust ducts; or
176
(v) Where dry powders are being (5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex-
sprayed, with powder collection sys- haust air filters). In conventional dry
tems so arranged in the exhaust to cap- type spray booths, overspray dry filters
ture oversprayed material. or filter rolls, if installed, shall con-
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding form to the following:
powder coating material which is aer- (i) The spraying operations except
ated from below so as to form an air- electrostatic spraying operations shall
supported expanded cloud of such ma- be so designed, installed and main-
terial through which the preheated obtained that the average air velocity
ject to be coated is immersed and over the open face of the booth (or
transported. booth cross section during spraying op-
(7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con- erations) shall be not less than 100 lin-
tainer holding powder coating material ear feet per minute. Electrostatic
which is aerated from below so as to spraying operations may be conducted
form an air-supported expanded cloud with an air velocity over the open face
of such material which is electrically of the booth of not less than 60 linear
charged with a charge opposite to the feet per minute, or more, depending on
charge of the object to be coated; such the volume of the finishing material
object is transported, through the con- being applied and its flammability and
tainer immediately above the charged explosion characteristics. Visible
and aerated materials in order to be gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac-
coated. tivated devices shall be installed to in-
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved dicate or insure that the required air
and listed by a nationally recognized velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
testing laboratory. shall be inspected to insure proper re-
(9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in para- placement of filter media.
graph (a)(8) of this section. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
(b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. rolls shall be immediately removed to
Spray booths shall be substantially a safe, well-detached location or placed
constructed of steel, securely and rig- in a water-filled metal container and
idly supported, or of concrete or ma- disposed of at the close of the day’s op-
sonry except that aluminum or other eration unless maintained completely
substantial noncombustible material in water.
may be used for intermittent or low (iii) The location of filters in a spray
volume spraying. Spray booths shall be booth shall be so as to not reduce the
designed to sweep air currents toward effective booth enclosure of the arti-
the exhaust outlet. cles being sprayed.
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of (iv) Space within the spray booth on
spray booths shall be smooth and con- the downstream and upstream sides of
tinuous without edges and otherwise filters shall be protected with approved
designed to prevent pocketing of resi- automatic sprinklers.
dues and facilitate cleaning and wash- (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be
ing without injury. used when applying a spray material
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray known to be highly susceptible to spon-
booth and operator’s working area, if taneous heating and ignition.
combustible, shall be covered with non- (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
combustible material of such character be noncombustible or of a type having
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and a combustibility not in excess of class
removal of residues. 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab-
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
tribution or baffle plates, if installed shall not be alternately used for dif-
to promote an even flow of air through ferent types of coating materials,
the booth or cause the deposit of where the combination of materials
overspray before it enters the exhaust may be conducive to spontaneous igni-
duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- tion.
rial and readily removable or acces- (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth
sible on both sides for cleaning. Such having a frontal area larger than 9
plates shall not be located in exhaust square feet shall have a metal deflector
ducts. or curtain not less than 2 1⁄2 inches (5.35
177
cm) deep installed at the upper outer not be located in a spraying area where
edge of the booth over the opening. deposits of combustible residues may
(7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are readily accumulate.
arranged to carry work into or out of (4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir-
spray booths, the openings therefor ing and equipment shall conform to the
shall be as small as practical. provisions of this paragraph and shall
(8) Separation of operations. Each otherwise be in accordance with sub-
spray booth shall be separated from part S of this part.
other operations by not less than 3 feet (5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless
(0.912 m), or by a greater distance, or specifically approved for locations con-
by such partition or wall as to reduce taining both deposits of readily ignit-
the danger from juxtaposition of haz- able residue and explosive vapors, there
ardous operations. See also paragraph shall be no electrical equipment in any
(c)(1) of this section. spraying area, whereon deposits of
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so combustible residues may readily accu-
installed that all portions are readily mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit
accessible for cleaning. A clear space of or in boxes or fittings containing no
not less than 3 feet (0.912 m) on all taps, splices, or terminal connections.
sides shall be kept free from storage or (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical
combustible construction. wiring and equipment not subject to
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas deposits of combustible residues but lo-
are illuminated through glass panels or cated in a spraying area as herein de-
other transparent materials, only fixed fined shall be of explosion-proof type
lighting units shall be used as a source approved for Class I, group D locations
of illumination. Panels shall effec- and shall otherwise conform to the pro-
tively isolate the spraying area from visions of subpart S of this part, for
the area in which the lighting unit is Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
located, and shall be of a noncombus- tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and
tible material of such a nature or so other equipment outside of but within
protected that breakage will be un- 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area,
likely. Panels shall be so arranged that and not separated therefrom by parti-
normal accumulations of residue on tions, shall not produce sparks under
the exposed surface of the panel will normal operating conditions and shall
not be raised to a dangerous tempera- otherwise conform to the provisions of
ture by radiation or conduction from subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi-
the source of illumination. sion 2 Hazardous Locations.
(c) Electrical and other sources of igni- (7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of,
tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spray-
equipment, open flames and other ing area, and not separated therefrom
sources of ignition shall conform to the by a partition, shall be totally enclosed
requirements of this paragraph, except to prevent the falling of hot particles
as follows: and shall be protected from mechanical
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- injury by suitable guards or by loca-
form to the requirements of paragraphs tion.
(e) and (f) of this section; (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- lamps shall not be used in any spraying
ratus shall conform to the require- area during spraying operations. Port-
ments of paragraph (g) of this section; able electric lamps, if used during
(iii) [Reserved] cleaning or repairing operations, shall
(iv) Powder coating equipment shall be of the type approved for hazardous
conform to the requirements of para- Class I locations.
graph (c)(1) of this section. (9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping
no open flame or spark producing systems conveying flammable or com-
equipment in any spraying area nor bustible liquids or aerated solids shall
within 20 feet (6.08 m) thereof, unless be properly electrically grounded in an
separated by a partition. effective and permanent manner.
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven-
ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall tilating and exhaust systems shall be
178
in accordance with the Standard for (7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor be constructed of steel and shall be
Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, where ap- substantially supported. Exhaust ducts
plicable and shall also conform to the without dampers are preferred; how-
provisions of this section. ever, if dampers are installed, they
(2) General. All spraying areas shall shall be maintained so that they will
be provided with mechanical ventila- be in a full open position at all times
tion adequate to remove flammable va- the ventilating system is in operation.
pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected
tion and to confine and control com- against mechanical damage and have a
bustible residues so that life is not en- clearance from unprotected combus-
dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall tible construction or other combustible
be kept in operation at all times while material of not less than 18 inches
spraying operations are being con- (45.72 cm).
ducted and for a sufficient time there- (ii) If combustible construction is
after to allow vapors from drying coat- provided with the following protection
ed articles and drying finishing mate- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches
rial residue to be exhausted. (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray to the distances indicated:
booth shall have an independent ex- (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch as- 12 inches (30.48
bestos mill board. cm).
haust duct system discharging to the (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch as- 9 inches (22.86
exterior of the building, except that bestos mill board spaced out 1 inch cm).
multiple cabinet spray booths in which (2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers.
identical spray finishing material is (c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch 3 inches (7.62
rockwool batts reinforced with wire cm).
used with a combined frontal area of mesh or the equivalent.
not more than 18 square feet may have (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
a common exhaust. If more than one proved automatic sprinkler system,
properly maintained, the clearance re-
fan serves one booth, all fans shall be quired in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this sec-
so interconnected that one fan cannot tion may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24
operate without all fans being oper- cm).
ated. (8) Discharge clearance. Unless the
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro- spray booth exhaust duct terminal is
tating element shall be nonferrous or from a water-wash spray booth, the
nonsparking or the casing shall consist terminal discharge point shall be not
of or be lined with such material. less than 6 feet from any combustible
There shall be ample clearance be- exterior wall or roof nor discharge in
tween the fan-rotating element and the the direction of any combustible con-
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, struction or unprotected opening in
necessary allowance being made for or- any noncombustible exterior wall with-
dinary expansion and loading to pre- in 25 feet (7.6 m).
vent contact between moving parts and (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades spray operations shall not be directed
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- so that it will contaminate makeup air
ciently heavy to maintain perfect being introduced into the spraying area
alignment even when the blades of the or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
erably to have bearings outside the exhausted from spray operations shall
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of not be recirculated.
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated (10) Access doors. When necessary to
from the outside duct. facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors be provided with an ample number of
driving exhaust fans shall not be placed access doors.
inside booths or ducts. See also para- (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings
graph (c) of this section. to rooms containing spray finishing op-
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the erations shall be adequate for the effi-
duct or booth unless the belt and pul- cient operation of exhaust fans and
ley within the duct or booth are thor- shall be so located as to minimize the
oughly enclosed. creation of dead air pockets.
179
(12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed suitable sign indicating this safe dis-
articles shall be dried only in spaces tance shall be conspicuously posted
provided with adequate ventilation to near the assembly.
prevent the formation of explosive va- (7) Conveyors required. Goods being
pors. In the event adequate and reliable painted using this process are to be
ventilation is not provided such drying supported on conveyors. The conveyors
spaces shall be considered a spraying shall be so arranged as to maintain
area. safe distances between the goods and
(e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1) the electrodes or electrostatic atom-
Conformance. Where installation and izing heads at all times. Any irregu-
use of electrostatic spraying equip- larly shaped or other goods subject to
ment is used, such installation and use possible swinging or movement shall be
shall conform to all other paragraphs rigidly supported to prevent such
of this section, and shall also conform swinging or movement which would re-
to the requirements of this paragraph. duce the clearance to less than that
(2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa- specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sec-
ratus and devices used in connection tion.
with coating operations shall be of ap- (8) Prohibition. This process is not ac-
proved types. ceptable where goods being coated are
(3) Location. Transformers, power manipulated by hand. When finishing
packs, control apparatus, and all other materials are applied by electrostatic
electrical portions of the equipment, equipment which is manipulated by
with the exception of high-voltage hand, see paragraph (f) of this section
grids, electrodes, and electrostatic for applicable requirements.
atomizing heads and their connections, (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap-
shall be located outside of the spraying paratus shall be equipped with auto-
area, or shall otherwise conform to the matic controls which will operate with-
requirements of paragraph (c) of this out time delay to disconnect the power
section. supply to the high voltage transformer
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of
static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions:
quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or
tions and shall be effectively insulated failure of ventilating equipment from
from the ground. Electrodes and elec- any cause.
trostatic atomizing heads which are (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car-
permanently attached to their bases, rying goods through the high voltage
supports, or reciprocators, shall be field.
deemed to comply with this section. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an
Insulators shall be nonporous and non- imminent ground at any point on the
combustible. high voltage system.
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage (iv) Reduction of clearance below
leads to electrodes shall be properly in- that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this
sulated and protected from mechanical section.
injury or exposure to destructive (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc-
chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing ing, railings, or guards shall be so
heads shall be effectively and perma- placed about the equipment that they,
nently supported on suitable insulators either by their location or character or
and shall be effectively guarded both, assure that a safe isolation of the
against accidental contact or ground- process is maintained from plant stor-
ing. An automatic means shall be pro- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc-
vided for grounding the electrode sys- ing, and guards shall be of conducting
tem when it is electrically deenergized material, adequately grounded.
for any reason. All insulators shall be (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic
kept clean and dry. atomization is used the spraying area
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall shall be so ventilated as to insure safe
be maintained between goods being conditions from a fire and health
painted and electrodes or electrostatic standpoint.
atomizing heads or conductors of at (12) Fire protection. All areas used for
least twice the sparking distance. A spraying, including the interior of the
180
booth, shall be protected by automatic nently installed warning regarding the

sprinklers where this protection is necessity for this grounding feature.
available. Where this protection is not (7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects
available, other approved automatic being painted or coated shall be main-
extinguishing equipment shall be pro- tained in metallic contact with the
vided. conveyor or other grounded support.
(f) Electrostatic hand spraying equip- Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in-
ment—(1) Application. This paragraph sure this contact and areas of contact
shall apply to any equipment using shall be sharp points or knife edges
electrostatically charged elements for where possible. Points of support of the
the atomization and/or, precipitation object shall be concealed from random
of materials for coatings on articles, or spray where feasible and where the ob-
for other similar purposes in which the jects being sprayed are supported from
atomizing device is hand held and ma- a conveyor, the point of attachment to
nipulated during the spraying oper- the conveyor shall be so located as to
ation. not collect spray material during nor-
(2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand mal operation.
spraying equipment shall conform with (8) Interlocks. The electrical equip-
the other provisions of this section. ment shall be so interlocked with the
(3) Equipment approval and specifica- ventilation of the spraying area that
tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- the equipment cannot be operated un-
ratus and devices used in connection less the ventilation fans are in oper-
with coating operations shall be of ap- ation.
proved types. The high voltage circuits (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper-
shall be designed so as to not produce ation shall take place within a spray
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite area which is adequately ventilated to
any vapor-air mixtures nor result in remove solvent vapors released from
appreciable shock hazard upon coming the operation.
in contact with a grounded object (g) Drying, curing, or fusion appa-
under all normal operating conditions. ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing,
The electrostatically charged exposed or fusion apparatus in connection with
elements of the handgun shall be capa- spray application of flammable and
ble of being energized only by a switch combustible finishes shall conform to
which also controls the coating mate- the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,
rial supply. NFPA 86A–1969, where applicable and
(4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- shall also conform with the following
formers, powerpacks, control appa- requirements of this paragraph.
ratus, and all other electrical portions (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray
of the equipment, with the exception of booths, rooms, or other enclosures used
the handgun itself and its connections for spraying operations shall not alter-
to the power supply shall be located nately be used for the purpose of dry-
outside of the spraying area or shall ing by any arrangement which will
otherwise conform to the requirements cause a material increase in the sur-
of paragraph (c) of this section. face temperature of the spray booth,
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of room, or enclosure.
the spraying gun shall be electrically (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
connected to ground by a metallic con- as specifically provided in paragraph
nection and to be so constructed that (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
the operator in normal operating posi- fusion units utilizing a heating system
tion is in intimate electrical contact having open flames or which may
with the grounded handle. produce sparks shall not be installed in
(6) Grounding-general. All electrically a spraying area, but may be installed
conductive objects in the spraying area adjacent thereto when equipped with
shall be adequately grounded. This re- an interlocked ventilating system ar-
quirement shall apply to paint con- ranged to:
tainers, wash cans, and any other ob- (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying
jects or devices in the area. The equip- space before the heating system can be
ment shall carry a prominent perma- started;
181
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at Subpart E—Personal Protective

any source of ignition; and Life Saving Equipment
(iii) Automatically shut down the
heating system in the event of failure
of the ventilating system. AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
and Safety Standards Act (Construction
(4) Alternate use permitted. Auto-
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, and 8 of
mobile refinishing spray booths or en- the Occupational Safety and Health Act of
closures, otherwise installed and main- 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La-
tained in full conformity with this sec- bor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
tion, may alternately be used for dry- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
ing with portable electrical infrared 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR
drying apparatus when conforming part 11.
with the following:
(i) Interior (especially floors) of § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protec-
spray enclosures shall be kept free of tive equipment.
overspray deposits. (a) Application. Protective equipment,
(ii) During spray operations, the dry- including personal protective equip-
ing apparatus and electrical connec- ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem-
tions and wiring thereto shall not be ities, protective clothing, respiratory
located within spray enclosure nor in devices, and protective shields and bar-
any other location where spray resi- riers, shall be provided, used, and
dues may be deposited thereon. maintained in a sanitary and reliable
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- condition wherever it is necessary by
ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- reason of hazards of processes or envi-
tem of the spray enclosure shall be ronment, chemical hazards, radio-
equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- logical hazards, or mechanical irri-
ranged that: tants encountered in a manner capable
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be of causing injury or impairment in the
operated while the drying apparatus is function of any part of the body
inside the spray enclosure. through absorption, inhalation or
(b) The spray enclosure will be physical contact.
purged of spray vapors for a period of (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where
not less than 3 minutes before the dry- employees provide their own protective
ing apparatus can be energized. equipment, the employer shall be re-
(c) The ventilating system will main- sponsible to assure its adequacy, in-
tain a safe atmosphere within the en- cluding proper maintenance, and sani-
closure during the drying process and tation of such equipment.
the drying apparatus will automati- (c) Design. All personal protective
cally shut off in the event of failure of equipment shall be of safe design and
the ventilating system. construction for the work to be per-
(iv) All electrical wiring and equip- formed.
ment of the drying apparatus shall con-
form with the applicable sections of [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993]
subpart S of this part. Only equipment
of a type approved for Class I, Division § 1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
2 hazardous locations shall be located Safety-toe footwear for employees
within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor shall meet the requirements and speci-
level. All metallic parts of the drying fications in American National Stand-
apparatus shall be properly electrically ard for Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear,
bonded and grounded. Z41.1–1967.
(v) The drying apparatus shall con- [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993]
tain a prominently located, perma-
nently attached warning sign indi- §§ 1926.97–1926.98 [Reserved]
cating that ventilation should be main-
tained during the drying period and § 1926.100 Head protection.
that spraying should not be conducted (a) Employees working in areas
in the vicinity that spray will deposit where there is a possible danger of head
on apparatus. injury from impact, or from falling or
[58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993] flying objects, or from electrical shock
182
and burns, shall be protected by protec- ations present potential eye or face in-
tive helmets. jury from physical, chemical, or radi-
(b) Helmets for the protection of em- ation agents.
ployees against impact and penetration (2) Eye and face protection equip-
of falling and flying objects shall meet ment required by this Part shall meet
the specifications contained in Amer- the requirements specified in American
ican National Standards Institute, National Standards Institute, Z87.1–
Z89.1–1969, Safety Requirements for In- 1968, Practice for Occupational and
dustrial Head Protection. Educational Eye and Face Protection.
(c) Helmets for the head protection of (3) Employees whose vision requires
employees exposed to high voltage the use of corrective lenses in spec-
electrical shock and burns shall meet tacles, when required by this regula-
the specifications contained in Amer- tion to wear eye protection, shall be
ican National Standards Institute, protected by goggles or spectacles of
Z89.2–1971. one of the following types:
(i) Spectacles whose protective lenses
§ 1926.101 Hearing protection. provide optical correction;
(a) Wherever it is not feasible to re- (ii) Goggles that can be worn over
duce the noise levels or duration of ex- corrective spectacles without dis-
posures to those specified in Table D–2, turbing the adjustment of the spec-
Permissible Noise Exposures, in tacles;
§ 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be (iii) Goggles that incorporate correc-
provided and used. tive lenses mounted behind the protec-
(b) Ear protective devices inserted in tive lenses.
the ear shall be fitted or determined in- (4) Face and eye protection equip-
dividually by competent persons. ment shall be kept clean and in good
(c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable repair. The use of this type equipment
protective device. with structural or optical defects shall
be prohibited.
§ 1926.102 Eye and face protection. (5) Table E–1 shall be used as a guide
(a) General. (1) Employees shall be in the selection of face and eye protec-
provided with eye and face protection tion for the hazards and operations
equipment when machines or oper- noted.
EC30OC91.011</GPH>
183
EC30OC91.010</GPH>
*Non-side shield spectacles are avail- **See Table E–2, in paragraph (b) of
able for limited hazard use requiring this section, Filter Lens Shade Num-
only frontal protection. bers for Protection Against Radiant
Energy.
APPLICATIONS
Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre-
Operation Hazards ferred protection
Acetylene—Burning, Sparks, harmful rays, molten 7, 8, 9.

Acetylene—Cutting, metal, flying particles.
Acetylene—Welding.
Chemical Handling .................... Splash, acid burns, fumes ...... 2, 10 (For severe exposure add 10 over 2).
Chipping .................................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.
Electric (arc) welding ................ Sparks, intense rays, molten 9, 11, (11 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses, advis-
metal. able).
Furnace operations ................... Glare, heat, molten metal ....... 7, 8, 9 (For severe exposure add 10).
Grinding—Light ......................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Grinding—Heavy ....................... Flying particles ........................ 1 , 3, 7A, 8A (For severe exposure add 10).
Laboratory ................................. Chemical splash, glass break- 2 (10 when in combination with 4, 5, 6).
age.
Machining .................................. Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Molten metals ........................... Heat, glare, sparks, splash ..... 7, 8, (10 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses).
Spot welding ............................. Flying particles, sparks ........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
(6) Protectors shall meet the fol- in welding. Shades more dense than
lowing minimum requirements: those listed may be used to suit the in-
(i) They shall provide adequate pro- dividual’s needs.
tection against the particular hazards
for which they are designed. TABLE E–2—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR
(ii) They shall be reasonably com- PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY
fortable when worn under the des- Shade
Welding operation
ignated conditions. number
(iii) They shall fit snugly and shall Shielded metal-arc welding 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-, 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-
not unduly interfere with the move- inch diameter electrodes .................................. 10
ments of the wearer. Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-
(iv) They shall be durable. , 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch diameter electrodes .................. 11
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-,
(v) They shall be capable of being dis- 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch diameter electrodes .................... 12
infected. Shielded metal-arc welding 3⁄16-, 7⁄32-, 1⁄4-inch
(vi) They shall be easily cleanable. diameter electrodes ......................................... 12
5⁄16-, 3⁄8-inch diameter electrodes ........................ 14
(7) Every protector shall be distinctly Atomic hydrogen welding .................................... 10–14
marked to facilitate identification Carbon-arc welding ............................................. 14
only of the manufacturer. Soldering .............................................................. 2
Torch brazing ....................................................... 3 or 4
(8) When limitations or precautions Light cutting, up to 1 inch .................................... 3 or 4
are indicated by the manufacturer, Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ..................... 4 or 5
they shall be transmitted to the user Heavy cutting, over 6 inches ............................... 5 or 6
Gas welding (light), up to 1⁄8-inch ....................... 4 or 5
and care taken to see that such limita- Gas welding (medium), 1⁄8-inch to 1⁄2-inch .......... 5 or 6
tions and precautions are strictly ob- Gas welding (heavy), over 1⁄2-inch ...................... 6 or 8
served.
(b) Protection against radiant energy— (2) Laser protection. (i) Employees
(1) Selection of shade numbers for welding whose occupation or assignment re-
filter. Table E–2 shall be used as a guide quires exposure to laser beams shall be
for the selection of the proper shade furnished suitable laser safety goggles
numbers of filter lenses or plates used which will protect for the specific
184
wavelength of the laser and be of opti- inch manila or equivalent, with a min-
cal density (O.D.) adequate for the en- imum breaking strength of 5,400
ergy involved. Table E–3 lists the max- pounds, shall be used.
imum power or energy density for (d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a
which adequate protection is afforded minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equiva-
by glasses of optical densities from 5 lent, with a maximum length to pro-
through 8. vide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet.
TABLE E–3—SELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS The rope shall have a nominal breaking
strength of 5,400 pounds.
Attenuation (e) All safety belt and lanyard hard-
Intensity, CW max-
imum power den- Optical density ware shall be drop forged or pressed
sity (watts/cm2) (O.D.) Attenuation factor
steel, cadmium plated in accordance
10¥2 5 10 5 with type 1, Class B plating specified in
10¥1 6 10 6 Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Sur-
1.0 7 10 7 face shall be smooth and free of sharp
10.0 8 10 8
edges.
(f) All safety belt and lanyard hard-
Output levels falling between lines in
this table shall require the higher opti- ware, except rivets, shall be capable of
cal density. withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000
(ii) All protective goggles shall bear pounds without cracking, breaking, or
a label identifying the following data: taking a permanent deformation.
(a) The laser wavelengths for which
use is intended; § 1926.105 Safety nets.
(b) The optical density of those wave- (a) Safety nets shall be provided
lengths; when workplaces are more than 25 feet
(c) The visible light transmission. above the ground or water surface, or
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, other surfaces where the use of ladders,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993] scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary
floors, safety lines, or safety belts is
§ 1926.103 Respiratory protection. impractical.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (b) Where safety net protection is re-
struction work under this section are iden- quired by this part, operations shall
tical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of not be undertaken until the net is in
this chapter. place and has been tested.
[63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998] (c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond
the edge of the work surface where em-
§ 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and ployees are exposed and shall be in-
lanyards.
stalled as close under the work surface
(a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lan- as practical but in no case more than
yards shall be used only for employee 25 feet below such work surface. Nets
safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, shall be hung with sufficient clearance
or lanyard actually subjected to in- to prevent user’s contact with the sur-
service loading, as distinguished from faces or structures below. Such clear-
static load testing, shall be imme-
ances shall be determined by impact
diately removed from service and shall
load testing.
not be used again for employee safe-
guarding. (2) It is intended that only one level
(b) Lifelines shall be secured above of nets be required for bridge construc-
the point of operation to an anchorage tion.
or structural member capable of sup- (d) The mesh size of nets shall not ex-
porting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 ceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets
pounds. shall meet accepted performance
(c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling op- standards of 17,500 foot-pounds min-
erations, or in areas where the lifeline imum impact resistance as determined
may be subjected to cutting or abra- and certified by the manufacturers,
sion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch and shall bear a label of proof test.
wire core manila rope. For all other Edge ropes shall provide a minimum
lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4- breaking strength of 5,000 pounds.
185
(e) Forged steel safety hooks or Subpart F—Fire Protection and

shackles shall be used to fasten the net Prevention
to its supports.
(f) Connections between net panels AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
shall develop the full strength of the and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333);
net. secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
§ 1926.106 Working over or near water. Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or
(a) Employees working over or near 6–96 (62 FR 111) as applicable; and 29 CFR
water, where the danger of drowning part 1911.
exists, shall be provided with U.S.
Coast Guard-approved life jacket or § 1926.150 Fire protection.
buoyant work vests. (a) General requirements. (1) The em-
(b) Prior to and after each use, the ployer shall be responsible for the de-
buoyant work vests or life preservers velopment of a fire protection program
shall be inspected for defects which to be followed throughout all phases of
would alter their strength or buoy- the construction and demolition work,
ancy. Defective units shall not be used. and he shall provide for the firefighting
(c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of equipment as specified in this subpart.
line shall be provided and readily avail- As fire hazards occur, there shall be no
able for emergency rescue operations. delay in providing the necessary equip-
Distance between ring buoys shall not ment.
exceed 200 feet. (2) Access to all available firefighting
(d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall equipment shall be maintained at all
times.
be immediately available at locations
(3) All firefighting equipment, pro-
where employees are working over or
vided by the employer, shall be con-
adjacent to water.
spicuously located.
§ 1926.107 Definitions applicable to (4) All firefighting equipment shall
this subpart. be periodically inspected and main-
tained in operating condition. Defec-
(a) Contaminant means any material tive equipment shall be immediately
which by reason of its action upon, replaced.
within, or to a person is likely to cause (5) As warranted by the project, the
physical harm. employer shall provide a trained and
(b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable equipped firefighting organization
for supporting one person. One end is (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate pro-
fastened to a safety belt or harness and tection to life.
the other end is secured to a substan- (b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or
tial object or a safety line. permanent water supply, of sufficient
(c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for volume, duration, and pressure, re-
supporting one person, to which a lan- quired to properly operate the fire-
yard or safety belt (or harness) is at- fighting equipment shall be made
tached. available as soon as combustible mate-
rials accumulate.
(d) O.D. means optical density and
(2) Where underground water mains
refers to the light refractive character-
are to be provided, they shall be in-
istics of a lens.
stalled, completed, and made available
(e) Radiant energy means energy that for use as soon as practicable.
travels outward in all directions from (c) Portable firefighting equipment—(1)
its sources. Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (i)
(f) Safety belt means a device, usually A fire extinguisher, rated not less than
worn around the waist which, by rea- 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000
son of its attachment to a lanyard and square feet of the protected building
lifeline or a structure, will prevent a area, or major fraction thereof. Travel
worker from falling. distance from any point of the pro-
tected area to the nearest fire extin-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979]
guisher shall not exceed 100 feet.
186
(ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less
with two fire pails may be substituted than 10B, shall be provided within 50
for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rat- feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of
ing. flammable or combustible liquids or 5
(iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type pounds of flammable gas are being used
hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in on the jobsite. This requirement does
length and equipped with a nozzle, may not apply to the integral fuel tanks of
be substituted for a 2A-rated fire extin- motor vehicles.
guisher, providing it is capable of dis-
(vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other
charging a minimum of 5 gallons per
minute with a minimum hose stream toxic vaporizing liquid fire extin-
range of 30 feet horizontally. The gar- guishers are prohibited.
den-type hose lines shall be mounted (viii) Portable fire extinguishers
on conventional racks or reels. The shall be inspected periodically and
number and location of hose racks or maintained in accordance with Mainte-
reels shall be such that at least one nance and Use of Portable Fire Extin-
hose stream can be applied to all points guishers, NFPA No. 10A–1970.
in the area. (ix) Fire extinguishers which have
(iv) One or more fire extinguishers, been listed or approved by a nationally
rated not less than 2A, shall be pro- recognized testing laboratory, shall be
vided on each floor. In multistory used to meet the requirements of this
buildings, at least one fire extinguisher subpart.
shall be located adjacent to stairway. (x) Table F–1 may be used as a guide
(v) Extinguishers and water drums, for selecting the appropriate portable
subject to freezing, shall be protected
fire extinguishers.
from freezing.
(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One may be substituted for a fire extin-
hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, guisher rated not more than 2A in the
with a nozzle capable of discharging designated area provided that the hose
water at 25 gallons or more per minute, line can reach all points in the area.
187
EC30OC91.012</GPH>
(ii) If fire hose connections are not (f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit
compatible with local firefighting stairways, required for the completed
equipment, the contractor shall pro- buildings, shall be given construction
vide adapters, or equivalent, to permit priority. Fire doors, with automatic
connections. closing devices, shall be hung on open-
(iii) During demolition involving ings as soon as practicable.
combustible materials, charged hose (2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in
lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank buildings undergoing alterations or
trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall demolition until operations necessitate
be made available. their removal.
(d) Fixed firefighting equipment—(1) [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Sprinkler protection. (i) If the facility 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993;
being constructed includes the instal- 61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
lation of automatic sprinkler protec-
tion, the installation shall closely fol- § 1926.151 Fire prevention.
low the construction and be placed in (a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wir-
service as soon as applicable laws per- ing and equipment for light, heat, or
mit following completion of each story. power purposes shall be installed in
(ii) During demolition or alterations, compliance with the requirements of
existing automatic sprinkler installa- subpart K of this part.
tions shall be retained in service as (2) Internal combustion engine pow-
long as reasonable. The operation of ered equipment shall be so located that
sprinkler control valves shall be per- the exhausts are well away from com-
mitted only by properly authorized bustible materials. When the exhausts
persons. Modification of sprinkler sys- are piped to outside the building under
tems to permit alterations or addi- construction, a clearance of at least 6
tional demolition should be expedited inches shall be maintained between
so that the automatic protection may such piping and combustible material.
be returned to service as quickly as (3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or
possible. Sprinkler control valves shall in the vicinity of operations which con-
be checked daily at close of work to as- stitute a fire hazard, and shall be con-
certain that the protection is in serv- spicuously posted: ‘‘No Smoking or
ice. Open Flame.’’
(2) Standpipes. In all structures in (4) Portable battery powered lighting
which standpipes are required, or equipment, used in connection with the
where standpipes exist in structures storage, handling, or use of flammable
being altered, they shall be brought up gases or liquids, shall be of the type ap-
as soon as applicable laws permit, and proved for the hazardous locations.
shall be maintained as construction (5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and
progresses in such a manner that they steam lines or hoses, when used in the
are always ready for fire protection cleaning or ventilation of tanks and
use. The standpipes shall be provided vessels that contain hazardous con-
with Siamese fire department connec- centrations of flammable gases or va-
tions on the outside of the structure, at pors, shall be bonded to the tank or
the street level, which shall be con- vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not
spicuously marked. There shall be at be attached or detached in hazardous
least one standard hose outlet at each concentrations of flammable gases or
floor. vapors.
(e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm (b) Temporary buildings. (1) No tem-
system, e.g., telephone system, siren, porary building shall be erected where
etc., shall be established by the emit will adversely affect any means of
ployer whereby employees on the site exit.
and the local fire department can be (2) Temporary buildings, when lo-
alerted for an emergency. cated within another building or struc-
(2) The alarm code and reporting in- ture, shall be of either noncombustible
structions shall be conspicuously post- construction or of combustible con-
ed at phones and at employee en- struction having a fire resistance of
trances. not less than 1 hour.
188
(3) Temporary buildings, located (4) Material shall be piled to mini-

other than inside another building and mize the spread of fire internally and
not used for the storage, handling, or to permit convenient access for fire-
use of flammable or combustible liq- fighting. Stable piling shall be main-
uids, flammable gases, explosives, or tained at all times. Aisle space shall be
blasting agents, or similar hazardous maintained to safely accommodate the
occupancies, shall be located at a dis- widest vehicle that may be used within
tance of not less than 10 feet from an- the building for firefighting purposes.
other building or structure. Groups of (5) Clearance of at least 36 inches
temporary buildings, not exceeding shall be maintained between the top
2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for level of the stored material and the
the purposes of this part, be considered sprinkler deflectors.
a single temporary building. (6) Clearance shall be maintained
(c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible around lights and heating units to pre-
materials shall be piled with due re- vent ignition of combustible materials.
gard to the stability of piles and in no (7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be
case higher than 20 feet. maintained around the path of travel
(2) Driveways between and around of fire doors unless a barricade is pro-
combustible storage piles shall be at vided, in which case no clearance is
least 15 feet wide and maintained free needed. Material shall not be stored
from accumulation of rubbish, equip- within 36 inches of a fire door opening.
ment, or other articles or materials. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Driveways shall be so spaced that a 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986]
maximum grid system unit of 50 feet
by 150 feet is produced. § 1926.152 Flammable and combustible
(3) The entire storage site shall be liquids.
kept free from accumulation of unnec- (a) General requirements. (1) Only ap-
essary combustible materials. Weeds proved containers and portable tanks
and grass shall be kept down and a reg- shall be used for storage and handling
ular procedure provided for the peri- of flammable and combustible liquids.
odic cleanup of the entire area. Approved safety cans or Department of
(4) When there is a danger of an un- Transportation approved containers
derground fire, that land shall not be shall be used for the handling and use
used for combustible or flammable of flammable liquids in quantities of 5
storage. gallons or less, except that this shall
(5) Method of piling shall be solid not apply to those flammable liquid
wherever possible and in orderly and materials which are highly viscid (ex-
regular piles. No combustible material tremely hard to pour), which may be
shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet used and handled in original shipping
of a building or structure. containers. For quantities of one gal-
(6) Portable fire extinguishing equip- lon or less, the original container may
ment, suitable for the fire hazard in- be used, for storage, use and handling
volved, shall be provided at convenient, of flammable liquids.
conspicuously accessible locations in (2) Flammable or combustible liquids
the yard area. Portable fire extin- shall not be stored in areas used for
guishers, rated not less than 2A, shall exits, stairways, or normally used for
be placed so that maximum travel dis- the safe passage of people.
tance to the nearest unit shall not ex- (b) Indoor storage of flammable and
ceed 100 feet. combustible liquids. (1) No more than 25
(d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall gallons of flammable or combustible
not obstruct, or adversely affect, liquids shall be stored in a room out-
means of exit. side of an approved storage cabinet.
(2) All materials shall be stored, han- For storage of liquefied petroleum gas,
dled, and piled with due regard to their see § 1926.153.
fire characteristics. (2) Quantities of flammable and com-
(3) Noncompatible materials, which bustible liquid in excess of 25 gallons
may create a fire hazard, shall be seg- shall be stored in an acceptable or ap-
regated by a barrier having a fire re- proved cabinet meeting the following
sistance of at least 1 hour. requirements:
189
(i) Acceptable wooden storage cabi- NFPA No. 80–1970, for Class E or F
nets shall be constructed in the fol- openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nomi-
lowing manner, or equivalent: The bot- nal thickness may be used for shelving,
tom, sides, and top shall be constructed racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor over-
of an exterior grade of plywood at least lay, and similar installations.
1 inch in thickness, which shall not (iii) Materials which will react with
break down or delaminate under stand- water and create a fire hazard shall not
ard fire test conditions. All joints shall be stored in the same room with flam-
be rabbeted and shall be fastened in mable or combustible liquids.
two directions with flathead wood (iv) Storage in inside storage rooms
screws. When more than one door is shall comply with Table F–2 following:
used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap
of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges TABLE F–2
shall be mounted in such a manner as Total al-
to not lose their holding capacity due lowable
Fire protection Fire resist- quantities
to loosening or burning out of the Maximum size
provided ance gals./sq.
screws when subjected to fire. Such ft./floor
area
cabinets shall be painted inside and out
with fire retardant paint. Yes ................ 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 10
(ii) Approved metal storage cabinets No .................. 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 4
Yes ................ 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 5
will be acceptable. No .................. 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 2
(iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in con- NOTE: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray,
spicuous lettering, ‘‘Flammable—Keep carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally rec-
Fire Away.’’ ognized testing laboratory for this purpose.
(3) Not more than 60 gallons of flam- (v) Electrical wiring and equipment
mable or 120 gallons of combustible liq- located in inside storage rooms shall be
uids shall be stored in any one storage approved for Class I, Division 1, Haz-
cabinet. Not more than three such ardous Locations. For definition of
cabinets may be located in a single Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
storage area. Quantities in excess of tions, see § 1926.449.
this shall be stored in an inside storage (vi) Every inside storage room shall
room. be provided with either a gravity or a
(4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be mechanical exhausting system. Such
constructed to meet the required fire- system shall commence not more than
resistive rating for their use. Such con- 12 inches above the floor and be de-
struction shall comply with the test signed to provide for a complete
specifications set forth in Standard change of air within the room at least
Methods of Fire Test of Building Con- 6 times per hour. If a mechanical ex-
struction and Material, NFPA 251–1969. hausting system is used, it shall be
(ii) Where an automatic extin- controlled by a switch located outside
guishing system is provided, the sys- of the door. The ventilating equipment
tem shall be designed and installed in and any lighting fixtures shall be oper-
an approved manner. Openings to other ated by the same switch. An electric
rooms or buildings shall be provided pilot light shall be installed adjacent
with noncombustible liquid-tight to the switch if flammable liquids are
raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in dispensed within the room. Where grav-
height, or the floor in the storage area ity ventilation is provided, the fresh
shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- air intake, as well as the exhausting
rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- outlet from the room, shall be on the
vided with approved self-closing fire exterior of the building in which the
doors. The room shall be liquid-tight room is located.
where the walls join the floor. A per- (vii) In every inside storage room
missible alternate to the sill or ramp is there shall be maintained one clear
an open-grated trench, inside of the aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers
room, which drains to a safe location. over 30 gallons capacity shall not be
Where other portions of the building or stacked one upon the other.
other buildings are exposed, windows (viii) Flammable and combustible
shall be protected as set forth in the liquids in excess of that permitted in
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, inside storage rooms shall be stored
190
outside of buildings in accordance with (7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660

paragraph (c) of this section. gallons, shall have emergency venting
(5) Quantity. The quantity of flam- and other devices, as required by chap-
mable or combustible liquids kept in ters II and III of The Flammable and
the vicinity of spraying operations Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30–
shall be the minimum required for op- 1969.
erations and should ordinarily not ex- (d) Fire control for flammable or com-
ceed a supply for 1 day or one shift. bustible liquid storage. (1) At least one
Bulk storage of portable containers of portable fire extinguisher, having a
flammable or combustible liquids shall rating of not less than 20–B units, shall
be in a separate, constructed building be located outside of, but not more
detached from other important build- than 10 feet from, the door opening
ings or cut off in a standard manner. into any room used for storage of more
(c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Stor- than 60 gallons of flammable or com-
age of containers (not more than 60 bustible liquids.
gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gal- (2) At least one portable fire extin-
lons in any one pile or area. Piles or guisher having a rating of not less than
groups of containers shall be separated 20–B units shall be located not less
by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet,
containers shall not be nearer than 20 from any flammable liquid storage
feet to a building. area located outside.
(2) Within 200 feet of each pile of con- (3) When sprinklers are provided,
tainers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide they shall be installed in accordance
access way to permit approach of fire with the Standard for the Installation
control apparatus. of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13–1969.
(3) The storage area shall be graded (4) At least one portable fire extin-
in a manner to divert possible spills guisher having a rating of not less than
away from buildings or other expo- 20–B:C units shall be provided on all
sures, or shall be surrounded by a curb tank trucks or other vehicles used for
or earth dike at least 12 inches high. transporting and/or dispensing flam-
When curbs or dikes are used, provi- mable or combustible liquids.
sions shall be made for draining off ac- (e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in
cumulations of ground or rain water, which flammable or combustible liq-
or spills of flammable or combustible uids are transferred at one time, in
liquids. Drains shall terminate at a quantities greater than 5 gallons from
safe location and shall be accessible to one tank or container to another tank
operation under fire conditions. or container, shall be separated from
(4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) other operations by 25-feet distance or
Portable tanks shall not be nearer than by construction having a fire resist-
20 feet from any building. Two or more ance of at least 1 hour. Drainage or
portable tanks, grouped together, hav- other means shall be provided to con-
ing a combined capacity in excess of trol spills. Adequate natural or me-
2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5- chanical ventilation shall be provided
foot-clear area. Individual portable to maintain the concentration of flam-
tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be mable vapor at or below 10 percent of
separated by a 5-foot-clear area. the lower flammable limit.
(ii) Within 200 feet of each portable (2) Transfer of flammable liquids
tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide ac- from one container to another shall be
cess way to permit approach of fire done only when containers are elec-
control apparatus. trically interconnected (bonded).
(5) Storage areas shall be kept free of (3) Flammable or combustible liquids
weeds, debris, and other combustible shall be drawn from or transferred into
material not necessary to the storage. vessels, containers, or tanks within a
(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 building or outside only through a
gallons, shall be provided with emer- closed piping system, from safety cans,
gency venting and other devices, as re- by means of a device drawing through
quired by chapters III and IV of NFPA the top, or from a container, or port-
30–1969, The Flammable and Combus- able tanks, by gravity or pump,
tible Liquids Code. through an approved self-closing valve.
191
Transferring by means of air pressure servicing fuel systems for internal

on the container or portable tanks is combustion engines, receiving or dis-
prohibited. pensing of flammable or combustible
(4) The dispensing units shall be pro- liquids.
tected against collision damage. (9) Conspicuous and legible signs pro-
(5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for hibiting smoking shall be posted.
flammable liquids shall be of an ap- (10) The motors of all equipment
proved type. being fueled shall be shut off during
(f) Handling liquids at point of final the fueling operation.
use. (1) Flammable liquids shall be kept (11) Each service or fueling area shall
in closed containers when not actually be provided with at least one fire extin-
in use. guisher having a rating of not less than
(2) Leakage or spillage of flammable 20–B:C located so that an extinguisher
or combustible liquids shall be disposed will be within 75 feet of each pump, dis-
of promptly and safely. penser, underground fill pipe opening,
(3) Flammable liquids may be used and lubrication or service area.
only where there are no open flames or (h) Scope. This section applies to the
other sources of ignition within 50 feet handling, storage, and use of flam-
of the operation, unless conditions war- mable and combustible liquids with a
rant greater clearance. flashpoint below 200 °F (93.33 °C). This
(g) Service and refueling areas. (1) section does not apply to:
Flammable or combustible liquids (1) Bulk transportation of flammable
shall be stored in approved closed con- and combustible liquids; and
tainers, in tanks located underground, (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel
or in aboveground portable tanks. oil tanks and containers connected
(2) The tank trucks shall comply with oil burning equipment.
with the requirements covered in the (i) Tank storage—(1) Design and con-
Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flam- struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (A)
mable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA Tanks shall be built of steel except as
No. 385–1966. provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B)
(3) The dispensing hose shall be an through (E) of this section.
approved type. (B) Tanks may be built of materials
(4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an other than steel for installation under-
approved automatic-closing type with- ground or if required by the properties
out a latch-open device. of the liquid stored. Tanks located
(5) Underground tanks shall not be above ground or inside buildings shall
abandoned. be of noncombustible construction.
(6) Clearly identified and easily ac- (C) Tanks built of materials other
cessible switch(es) shall be provided at than steel shall be designed to speci-
a location remote from dispensing de- fications embodying principles recog-
vices to shut off the power to all dis- nized as good engineering design for
pensing devices in the event of an the material used.
emergency. (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be
(7)(i) Heating equipment of an ap- used for storing flammable or combus-
proved type may be installed in the lu- tible liquids having a gravity of 40° API
brication or service area where there is or heavier. Concrete tanks with special
no dispensing or transferring of flam- lining may be used for other services
mable liquids, provided the bottom of provided the design is in accordance
the heating unit is at least 18 inches with sound engineering practice.
above the floor and is protected from (E) [Reserved]
physical damage. (F) Special engineering consideration
(ii) Heating equipment installed in shall be required if the specific gravity
lubrication or service areas, where of the liquid to be stored exceeds that
flammable liquids are dispensed, shall of water or if the tanks are designed to
be of an approved type for garages, and contain flammable or combustible liq-
shall be installed at least 8 feet above uids at a liquid temperature below 0 °F.
the floor. (ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved]
(8) There shall be no smoking or open (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv-
flames in the areas used for fueling, eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or
192
constructed by use of a combination of for the Design and Construction of

these methods. Filler metal used in Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage
brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
alloy having a melting point above 1000 (2) The principles of the Code for
°F. and below that of the metal joined. Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII
(iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmos- of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves-
pheric tanks shall be built in accord- sels Code, 1968.
ance with acceptable good standards of (C) Atmospheric tanks built accord-
design. Atmospheric tanks may be ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,
built in accordance with: requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A)
(1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., of this section and shall be limited to
Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting
Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and conditions.
Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, This paragraph may be used for oper-
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g.
for Flammable and Combustible Liq- (D) Pressure vessels may be used as
uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or low-pressure tanks.
No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks (v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal
for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963. operating pressure of the vessel shall
(2) American Petroleum Institute not exceed the design pressure of the
Standards No. 12A, Specification for vessel.
Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, (B) Pressure vessels shall be built in
Seventh Edition, September 1951, or accordance with the Code for Unfired
No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the
Storage, Third Edition, 1966. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(3) American Petroleum Institute 1968.
Standards No. 12B, Specification for (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion.
Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh When tanks are not designed in accord-
Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1, ance with the American Petroleum In-
March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for stitute, American Society of Mechan-
Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev- ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’
enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if
Specification for Small Welded Produc- corrosion is anticipated beyond that
tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. provided for in the design formulas
Tanks built in accordance with these used, additional metal thickness or
standards shall be used only as produc- suitable protective coatings or linings
tion tanks for storage of crude petro- shall be provided to compensate for the
leum in oil-producing areas. corrosion loss expected during the de-
(B) Tanks designed for underground sign life of the tank.
service not exceeding 2,500 gallons (2) Installation of outside aboveground
(9,462.5 L) capacity may be used above- tanks. (i) [Reserved]
ground. (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure aboveground tanks. (A) The distance be-
vessels may be used as atmospheric tween any two flammable or combus-
tanks. tible liquid storage tanks shall not be
(D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m).
used for the storage of a flammable or (B) Except as provided in paragraph
combustible liquid at a temperature at (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance
or above its boiling point. between any two adjacent tanks shall
(iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The nor- not be less than one-sixth the sum of
mal operating pressure of the tank their diameters. When the diameter of
shall not exceed the design pressure of one tank is less than one-half the di-
the tank. ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis-
(B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built tance between the two tanks shall not
in accordance with acceptable stand- be less than one-half the diameter of
ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may the smaller tank.
be built in accordance with: (C) Where crude petroleum in con-
(1) American Petroleum Institute junction with production facilities are
Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules located in noncongested areas and have
193
capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other
(3,000 barrels), the distance between accepted standard; or (3) shall be at
such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet least as large as the filling or with-
(0.912 m). drawal connection, whichever is larger
(D) Where unstable flammable or but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175
combustible liquids are stored, the dis- cm) nominal inside diameter.
tance between such tanks shall not be (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
less than one-half the sum of their di- vessels shall be adequately vented to
ameters. prevent development of pressure or
(E) When tanks are compacted in vacuum, as a result of filling or
three or more rows or in an irregular emptying and atmospheric tempera-
pattern, greater spacing or other ture changes, from exceeding the de-
means shall be provided so that inside sign pressure of the tank or vessel.
tanks are accessible for firefighting Protection shall also be provided to
purposes. prevent overpressure from any pump
(F) The minimum separation between discharging into the tank or vessel
a liquefied petroleum gas container when the pump discharge pressure can
and a flammable or combustible liquid exceed the design pressure of the tank
storage tank shall be 20 feet (6.08 m), or vessel.
except in the case of flammable or (D) If any tank or pressure vessel has
combustible liquid tanks operating at more than one fill or withdrawal con-
pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or nection and simultaneous filling or
equipped with emergency venting withdrawal can be made, the vent size
which will permit pressures to exceed shall be based on the maximum antici-
2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions pated simultaneous flow.
of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of (E) Unless the vent is designed to
this section shall apply. Suitable limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or
means shall be taken to prevent the ac- less, the outlet of vents and vent drains
cumulation of flammable or combus- shall be arranged to discharge in such
tible liquids under adjacent liquefied a manner as to prevent localized over-
petroleum gas containers such as by di- heating of any part of the tank in the
version curbs or grading. When flam- event vapors from such vents are ig-
mable or combustible liquid storage nited.
tanks are within a diked area, the liq- (F) Tanks and pressure vessels stor-
uefied petroleum gas containers shall ing Class IA liquids shall be equipped
be outside the diked area and at least with venting devices which shall be
10 feet (3.04 m) away from the center- normally closed except when venting
line of the wall of the diked area. The to pressure or vacuum conditions.
foregoing provisions shall not apply Tanks and pressure vessels storing
when liquefied petroleum gas con- Class IB and IC liquids shall be
tainers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or less equipped with venting devices which
capacity are installed adjacent to fuel shall be normally closed except when
oil supply tanks of 550 gallons (2,081.75 venting under pressure or vacuum con-
L) or less capacity. ditions, or with approved flame arrest-
(iii) [Reserved] ers.
(iv) Normal venting for aboveground Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls. (84 m3)
tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage tanks capacity or less containing crude pe-
shall be adequately vented to prevent troleum in crude-producing areas; and,
the development of vacuum or pressure outside aboveground atmospheric
sufficient to distort the roof of a cone tanks under 1,000 gallons (3,785 L) ca-
roof tank or exceeding the design pres- pacity containing other than Class IA
sure in the case of other atmospheric flammable liquids may have open
tanks, as a result of filling or vents. (See paragraph (i)(2)(vi)(B) of
emptying, and atmospheric tempera- this section.)
ture changes. (G) Flame arresters or venting de-
(B) Normal vents shall be sized either vices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F)
in accordance with: (1) The American of this section may be omitted for
Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 Class IB and IC liquids where condi-
(1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low- tions are such that their use may, in
194
case of obstruction, result in tank tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads

damage. if horizontal. If unstable liquids are
(v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex- stored, the effects of heat or gas result-
posure for aboveground tanks. (A) Every ing from polymerization, decomposi-
aboveground storage tank shall have tion, condensation, or self-reactivity
some form of construction or device shall be taken into account. The total
that will relieve excessive internal capacity of both normal and emergency
pressure caused by exposure fires. venting devices shall be not less than
(B) In a vertical tank the construc- that derived from Table F–10 except as
tion referred to in paragraph provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or
(i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the (F) of this section. Such device may be
form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a a self-closing manhole cover, or one
weak roof-to-shell seam, or other ap- using long bolts that permit the cover
proved pressure relieving construction. to lift under internal pressure, or an
The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be additional or larger relief valve or
constructed to fail preferential to any valves. The wetted area of the tank
other seam. shall be calculated on the basis of 55
(C) Where entire dependence for percent of the total exposed area of a
emergency relief is placed upon pres- sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the
sure relieving devices, the total vent- total exposed area of a horizontal tank
ing capacity of both normal and emer- and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above
gency vents shall be enough to prevent grade of the exposed shell area of a
rupture of the shell or bottom of the vertical tank.
TABLE F–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET (METERS) FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)]
Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H)
20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596)
40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436)
50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192)
60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892)
70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536)
80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712)
90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776)
100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and
120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over
140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704)
180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320)
200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908)
(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- (E) The total emergency relief vent-
signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the ing capacity for any specific stable liq-
total rate of venting shall be deter- uid may be determined by the fol-
mined in accordance with Table F–10, lowing formula:
except that when the exposed wetted V = 1337÷L√ M
area of the surface is greater than 2,800
square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour
venting shall be calculated by the fol- from Table F–10.
lowing formula: L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific
liquid in B.t.u. per pound.
CFH = 1,107A0.82 M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
Where: (F) The required airflow rate of para-
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet graph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section
(meters) of free air per hour. may be multiplied by the appropriate
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet factor listed in the following schedule
(m2). when protection is provided as indi-
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on cated. Only one factor may be used for
Q=21,000A0.82. any one tank.
195
0.5 for drainage in accordance with para- other obstructions and shall be at least
graph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks 5 feet (1.52 m) from building openings.
over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area.
(C) When tank vent piping is
0.3 for approved water spray.
0.3 for approved insulation.
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
0.15 for approved water spray with approved to discharge, within the pressure limi-
insulation. tations of the system, the vapors they
may be required to handle when
(G) The outlet of all vents and vent manifolded tanks are subject to the
drains on tanks equipped with emer- same fire exposure.
gency venting to permit pressures ex- (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to aboveground tanks—(A) Drainage and
discharge in such a way as to prevent diked areas. The area surrounding a
localized overheating of any part of the
tank or a group of tanks shall be pro-
tank, in the event vapors from such
vided with drainage as in paragraph
vents are ignited.
(i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be
(H) Each commercial tank venting diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this
device shall have stamped on it the
section, to prevent accidental dis-
opening pressure, the pressure at which
charge of liquid from endangering ad-
the valve reaches the full open posi-
joining property or reaching water-
tion, and the flow capacity at the lat-
ways.
ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet
(meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55 (B) Drainage. Where protection of ad-
°C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a. joining property or waterways is by
means of a natural or manmade drain-
(I) The flow capacity of tank venting
age system, such systems shall comply
devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller
in nominal pipe size shall be deter- with the following:
mined by actual test of each type and (1) [Reserved]
size of vent. These flow tests may be (2) The drainage system shall termi-
conducted by the manufacturer if cer- nate in vacant land or other area or in
tified by a qualified impartial observer, an impounding basin having a capacity
or may be conducted by an outside not smaller than that of the largest
agency. The flow capacity of tank tank served. This termination area and
venting devices larger than 12 inches the route of the drainage system shall
(30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including be so located that, if the flammable or
manhole covers with long bolts or combustible liquids in the drainage
equivalent, may be calculated provided system are ignited, the fire will not se-
that the opening pressure is actually riously expose tanks or adjoining prop-
measured, the rating pressure and cor- erty.
responding free orifice area are stated, (C) Diked areas. Where protection of
the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears on the adjoining property or waterways is ac-
nameplate, and the computation is complished by retaining the liquid
based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap- around the tank by means of a dike,
plied to the rated orifice area. the volume of the diked area shall
(vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. comply with the following require-
(A) Vent piping shall be constructed in ments:
accordance with paragraph (c) of this (1) Except as provided in paragraph
section. (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volu-
(B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks metric capacity of the diked area shall
storing Class I liquids are adjacent to not be less than the greatest amount of
buildings or public ways, they shall be liquid that can be released from the
located so that the vapors are released largest tank within the diked area, as-
at a safe point outside of buildings and suming a full tank. The capacity of the
not less than 12 feet (3.648 m) above the diked area enclosing more than one
adjacent ground level. In order to aid tank shall be calculated by deducting
their dispersion, vapors shall be dis- the volume of the tanks other than the
charged upward or horizontally away largest tank below the height of the
from closely adjacent walls. Vent out- dike.
lets shall be located so that flammable (2) For a tank or group of tanks with
vapors will not be trapped by eaves or fixed roofs containing crude petroleum
196
with boilover characteristics, the volu- ports that the loads carried by the lat-
metric capacity of the diked area shall ter cannot be transmitted to the tank.
be not less than the capacity of the The distance from any part of a tank
largest tank served by the enclosure, storing Class I liquids to the nearest
assuming a full tank. The capacity of wall of any basement or pit shall be
the diked enclosure shall be calculated not less than 1 foot (0.304 m), and to
by deducting the volume below the any property line that may be built
height of the dike of all tanks within upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912 m). The
the enclosure. distance from any part of a tank stor-
(3) Walls of the diked area shall be of ing Class II or Class III liquids to the
earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry nearest wall of any basement, pit or
designed to be liquidtight and to with- property line shall be not less than 1
stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen foot (0.304 m).
walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height (ii) Depth and cover. Underground
shall have a flat section at the top not tanks shall be set on firm foundations
less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The and surrounded with at least 6 inches
slope of an earthen wall shall be con- (15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert mate-
sistent with the angle of repose of the rials such as clean sand, earth, or grav-
material of which the wall is con- el well tamped in place. The tank shall
structed. be placed in the hole with care since
(4) The walls of the diked area shall dropping or rolling the tank into the
be restricted to an average height of 6 hole can break a weld, puncture or
feet (1.824 m) above interior grade. damage the tank, or scrape off the pro-
(5) [Reserved] tective coating of coated tanks. Tanks
(6) No loose combustible material, shall be covered with a minimum of 2
empty or full drum or barrel, shall be feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be cov-
permitted within the diked area. ered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m)
(viii) Tank openings other than vents of earth, on top of which shall be
for aboveground tanks. placed a slab of reinforced concrete not
(A)–(C) [Reserved] less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick.
(D) Openings for gaging shall be pro- When underground tanks are, or are
vided with a vaportight cap or cover. likely to be, subject to traffic, they
(E) For Class IB and Class IC liquids shall be protected against damage from
other than crude oils, gasolines, and vehicles passing over them by at least
asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18
signed and installed as to minimize the inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth,
possibility of generating static elec- plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced
tricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of as-
tank shall terminate within 6 inches phaltic concrete. When asphaltic or re-
(15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank inforced concrete paving is used as part
and shall be installed to avoid exces- of the protection, it shall extend at
sive vibration. least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally be-
(F) Filling and emptying connections yond the outline of the tank in all di-
which are made and broken shall be lo- rections.
cated outside of buildings at a location (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion
free from any source of ignition and protection for the tank and its piping
not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from shall be provided by one or more of the
any building opening. Such connection following methods:
shall be closed and liquidtight when (A) Use of protective coatings or
not in use. The connection shall be wrappings;
properly identified. (B) Cathodic protection; or,
(3) Installation of underground tanks— (C) Corrosion resistant materials of
(i) Location. Excavation for under- construction.
ground storage tanks shall be made (iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrange-
with due care to avoid undermining of ment of vents for Class I liquids. Vent
foundations of existing structures. Un- pipes from tanks storing Class I liquids
derground tanks or tanks under build- shall be so located that the discharge
ings shall be so located with respect to point is outside of buildings, higher
existing building foundations and sup- than the fill pipe opening, and not less
197
than 12 feet (3.648 m) above the adja- nal inside diameter, the outlet shall be
cent ground level. Vent pipes shall dis- provided with a vacuum and pressure
charge only upward in order to disperse relief device or there shall be an ap-
vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or proved flame arrester located in the
less in nominal inside diameter shall vent line at the outlet or within the
not be obstructed by devices that will approved distance from the outlet.
cause excessive back pressure. Vent (B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be
pipe outlets shall be so located that vented through piping adequate in size
flammable vapors will not enter build- to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid
ing openings, or be trapped under eaves at the fill opening while the tank is
or other obstructions. If the vent pipe being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less
is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside
greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nomi- diameter.
TABLE F–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS
Pipe length 1
Maximum flow GPM (L)
50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)
Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)

100 (378.5) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
200 (757) ......................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
300 (1,135.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81)
400 (1,514) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
500 (1,892.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
600 (2,271) ...................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
700 (2,649.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
800 (3,028) ...................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
900 (3,406.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1,000 (3,785) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1 Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.
(C) Location and arrangement of (v) Tank openings other than vents. (A)
vents for Class II or Class III liquids. Connections for all tank openings shall
Vent pipes from tanks storing Class II be vapor or liquid tight.
or Class III flammable liquids shall ter- (B) Openings for manual gaging, if
minate outside of the building and independent of the fill pipe, shall be
higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent provided with a liquid-tight cap or
outlets shall be above normal snow cover. If inside a building, each such
level. They may be fitted with return opening shall be protected against liq-
bends, coarse screens or other devices uid overflow and possible vapor release
to minimize ingress of foreign mate- by means of a spring loaded check
rial. valve or other approved device.
(D) Vent piping shall be constructed (C) Fill and discharge lines shall
in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) enter tanks only through the top. Fill
of this section. Vent pipes shall be so lines shall be sloped toward the tank.
laid as to drain toward the tank with- (D) For Class IB and Class IC liquids
out sags or traps in which liquid can other than crude oils, gasolines, and
collect. They shall be located so that asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
they will not be subjected to physical signed and installed as to minimize the
damage. The tank end of the vent pipe possibility of generating static elec-
shall enter the tank through the top. tricity by terminating within 6 inches
(E) When tank vent piping is (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as (E) Filling and emptying connections
to discharge, within the pressure limi- which are made and broken shall be lo-
tations of the system, the vapors they cated outside of buildings at a location
may be required to handle when free from any source of ignition and
manifolded tanks are filled simulta- not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from
neously. any building opening. Such connection
shall be closed and liquidtight when
198
not in use. The connection shall be tected against liquid overflow and pos-
properly identified. sible vapor release by means of a spring
(4) Installation of tanks inside of build- loaded check valve or other approved
ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be device.
permitted inside of buildings except as (E) For Class IB and Class IC liquids
provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or other than crude oils, gasolines, and
(i) of this section. asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of signed and installed as to minimize the
buildings shall be as provided in para- possibility of generating static elec-
graphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv) tricity by terminating within 6 inches
of this section, except that emergency (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.
venting by the use of weak roof seams (F) The fill pipe inside of the tank
on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents shall be installed to avoid excessive vi-
shall discharge vapors outside the bration of the pipe.
buildings. (G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be located outside of buildings at a loca-
constructed in accordance with para- tion free from any source of ignition
graph (c) of this section. and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. from any building opening. The inlet of
(A) Connections for all tank openings the fill pipe shall be closed and
shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are
liquidtight when not in use. The fill
covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this
connection shall be properly identified.
section.
(H) Tanks inside buildings shall be
(B) Each connection to a tank inside
equipped with a device, or other means
of buildings through which liquid can
shall be provided, to prevent overflow
normally flow shall be provided with
into the building.
an internal or an external valve lo-
cated as close as practical to the shell (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor-
of the tank. Such valves, when exter- age for all tank locations—(i) General.
nal, and their connections to the tank Tank supports shall be installed on
shall be of steel except when the chem- firm foundations. Tank supports shall
ical characteristics of the liquid stored be of concrete, masonry, or protected
are incompatible with steel. When ma- steel. Single wood timber supports (not
terials other than steel are necessary, cribbing) laid horizontally may be used
they shall be suitable for the pressures, for outside aboveground tanks if not
structural stresses, and temperatures more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
involved, including fire exposures. their lowest point.
(C) Flammable or combustible liquid (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or
tanks located inside of buildings, ex- exposed piling shall be protected by
cept in one-story buildings designed materials having a fire resistance rat-
and protected for flammable or coming of not less than 2 hours, except that
bustible liquid storage, shall be pro- steel saddles need not be protected if
vided with an automatic-closing heat- less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
actuated valve on each withdrawal con- their lowest point. Water spray protec-
nection below the liquid level, except tion or its equivalent may be used in
for connections used for emergency dis- lieu of fire-resistive materials to pro-
posal, to prevent continued flow in the tect supports.
event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup-
This function may be incorporated in porting structure for tanks such as
the valve required in paragraph spheres shall receive special engineer-
(i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a sep- ing consideration.
arate valve, shall be located adjacent (iv) Load distribution. Every tank
to the valve required in paragraph shall be so supported as to prevent the
(i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. excessive concentration of loads on the
(D) Openings for manual gaging, if supporting portion of the shell.
independent of the fill pipe (see para- (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on
graph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall the ground or on foundations made of
be provided with a vaportight cap or concrete, masonry, piling, or steel.
cover. Each such opening shall be pro- Tank foundations shall be designed to
199
minimize the possibility of uneven set- with liquids is impracticable because of

tling of the tank and to minimize cor- the character of their contents, their
rosion in any part of the tank resting use, or for other reasons, each tank
on the foundation. shall be safeguarded against movement
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo- when empty and submerged by high
cated in an area that may be subjected ground water or flood waters by an-
to flooding, the applicable precautions choring, weighting with concrete or
outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- other approved solid loading material,
served. or securing by other means. Each such
(A) No aboveground vertical storage tank shall be so constructed and in-
tank containing a flammable or com- stalled that it will safely resist exter-
bustible liquid shall be located so that nal pressures due to high ground water
the allowable liquid level within the or flood waters.
tank is below the established max- (G) At locations where there is an
imum flood stage, unless the tank is ample and dependable water supply
provided with a guiding structure such available, underground tanks con-
as described in paragraphs (i)(5)(vi) taining flammable or combustible liq-
(M), (N), and (O) of this section. uids, so installed that more than 70
(B) Independent water supply facili- percent of their storage capacity will
ties shall be provided at locations be submerged at the maximum flood
where there is no ample and dependable stage, shall be so anchored, weighted,
public water supply available for load- or secured by other means, as to pre-
ing partially empty tanks with water. vent movement of such tanks when
(C) In addition to the preceding re- filled with flammable or combustible
quirements, each tank so located that liquids, and submerged by flood waters
more than 70 percent, but less than 100 to the established flood stage.
percent, of its allowable liquid storage (H) Pipe connections below the allow-
capacity will be submerged at the es-
able liquid level in a tank shall be pro-
tablished maximum flood stage, shall
vided with valves or cocks located as
be safeguarded by one of the following
closely as practicable to the tank shell.
methods: Tank shall be raised, or its
Such valves and their connections to
height shall be increased, until its top
tanks shall be of steel or other mate-
extends above the maximum flood
rial suitable for use with the liquid
stage a distance equivalent to 30 per-
being stored. Cast iron shall not be per-
cent or more of its allowable liquid
mitted.
storage capacity: Provided, however,
That the submerged part of the tank (I) At locations where an independent
shall not exceed two and one-half times water supply is required, it shall be en-
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to tirely independent of public power and
the foregoing, adequate noncombus- water supply. Independent source of
tible structural guides, designed to per- water shall be available when flood wa-
mit the tank to float vertically with- ters reach a level not less than 10 feet
out loss of product, shall be provided. (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest
(D) Each horizontal tank so located tank on a property.
that more than 70 percent of its stor- (J) The self-contained power and
age capacity will be submerged at the pumping unit shall be so located or so
established flood stage, shall be an- designed that pumping into tanks may
chored, attached to a foundation of be carried on continuously throughout
concrete or of steel and concrete, of the rise in flood waters from a level 10
sufficient weight to provide adequate feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to
load for the tank when filled with flam- the level of the potential flood stage.
mable or combustible liquid and sub- (K) Capacity of the pumping unit
merged by flood waters to the estab- shall be such that the rate of rise of
lished flood stage, or adequately se- water in all tanks shall be equivalent
cured by other means. to the established potential average
(E) [Reserved] rate of rise of flood waters at any
(F) At locations where there is no stage.
ample and dependable water supply, or (L) Each independent pumping unit
where filling of underground tanks shall be tested periodically to insure
200
that it is in satisfactory operating con- or combustible liquids is such as to re-

dition. quire compliance with the foregoing re-
(M) Structural guides for holding quirements, in order to assure the fol-
floating tanks above their foundations lowing:
shall be so designed that there will be (1) That all flammable or combus-
no resistance to the free rise of a tank, tible liquid storage tanks are in com-
and shall be constructed of noncombus- pliance with these requirements and so
tible material. maintained.
(N) The strength of the structure (2) That detailed printed instructions
shall be adequate to resist lateral of what to do in flood emergencies are
movement of a tank subject to a hori- properly posted.
zontal force in any direction equivalent (3) That station operators and other
to not less than 25 pounds per square employees depended upon to carry out
foot (1.05 kg m2) acting on the pro- such instructions are thoroughly in-
jected vertical cross-sectional area of formed as to the location and operation
the tank. of such valves and other equipment
(O) Where tanks are situated on ex- necessary to effect these requirements.
posed points or bends in a shoreline (vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub-
where swift currents in flood waters ject to earthquakes, the tank supports
will be present, the structures shall be and connections shall be designed to
designed to withstand a unit force of resist damage as a result of such
not less than 50 pounds per square foot shocks.
(2.1 kg m2). (6) Sources of ignition. In locations
(P) The filling of a tank to be pro- where flammable vapors may be
tected by water loading shall be start- present, precautions shall be taken to
ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- prevent ignition by eliminating or con-
gerous flood stage. The rate of filling trolling sources of ignition. Sources of
shall be at least equal to the rate of ignition may include open flames,
rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- lightning, smoking, cutting and weld-
lished average potential rate of rise). ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat,
(Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the sparks (static, electrical, and mechan-
water pumps shall be available at all ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical
times to insure adequate power to fill and physical-chemical reactions, and
all tankage with water. radiant heat.
(R) All valves on connecting pipe- (7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks,
lines shall be closed and locked in whether shop built or field erected,
closed position when water loading has shall be strength tested before they are
been completed. placed in service in accordance with
(S) Where structural guides are pro- the applicable paragraphs of the code
vided for the protection of floating under which they were built. The
tanks, all rigid connections between American Society of Mechanical Engi-
tanks and pipelines shall be discon- neers (ASME) code stamp, American
nected and blanked off or blinded be- Petroleum Institute (API) monogram,
fore the floodwaters reach the bottom or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab-
of the tank, unless control valves and oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi-
their connections to the tank are of a dence of compliance with this strength
type designed to prevent breakage be- test. Tanks not marked in accordance
tween the valve and the tank shell. with the above codes shall be strength
(T) All valves attached to tanks tested before they are placed in service
other than those used in connection in accordance with good engineering
with water loading operations shall be principles and reference shall be made
closed and locked. to the sections on testing in the codes
(U) If a tank is equipped with a swing listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A),
line, the swing pipe shall be raised to (iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this section.
and secured at its highest position. (ii) Strength. When the vertical
(V) Inspections. The Assistant Sec- length of the fill and vent pipes is such
retary or his designated representative that when filled with liquid the static
shall make periodic inspections of all head imposed upon the bottom of the
plants where the storage of flammable tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch
201
(68.94 kPa), the tank and related piping (iii) Definitions. As used in this para-
shall be tested hydrostatically to a graph, piping systems consist of pipe,
pressure equal to the static head thus tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets,
imposed. valves, fittings, the pressure con-
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the taining parts of other components such
strength test called for in paragraphs as expansion joints and strainers, and
(i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all devices which serve such purposes as
tanks and connections shall be tested mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib-
for tightness. Except for underground uting, metering, or controlling flow.
tanks, this tightness test shall be made (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit-
at operating pressure with air, inert tings—(i) Required materials. Materials
gas, or water prior to placing the tank for piping, valves, or fittings shall be
in service. In the case of field-erected steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron,
tanks the strength test may be consid- except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2)
ered to be the test for tank tightness. (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
Underground tanks and piping, before (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than
being covered, enclosed, or placed in steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron
use, shall be tested for tightness may be used underground, or if re-
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at quired by the properties of the flam-
not less than 3 pounds per square inch mable or combustible liquid handled.
(20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds Material other than steel, nodular iron,
per square inch (34.47 kPa). or malleable iron shall be designed to
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- specifications embodying principles
tions shall be corrected in an accept- recognized as good engineering prac-
able manner before the tank is placed tices for the material used.
in service. Mechanical caulking is not (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit-
permitted for correcting leaks in weld- tings may have combustible or non-
ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the combustible linings.
roof. (iv) Low-melting materials. When low-
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- melting point materials such as alu-
erated at pressures below their design minum and brass or materials that
pressure may be tested by the applica- soften on fire exposure such as plastics,
ble provisions of paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or or non-ductile materials such as cast
(ii) of this section, based upon the pres- iron, are necessary, special consider-
sure developed under full emergency ation shall be given to their behavior
venting of the tank. on fire exposure. If such materials are
(j) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- used in above ground piping systems or
eral—(i) Design. The design (including inside buildings, they shall be suitably
selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so
sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from
systems containing flammable or com- the failure of these materials could not
bustible liquids shall be suitable for unduly expose persons, important
the expected working pressures and buildings or structures or can be read-
structural stresses. Conformity with ily controlled by remote valves.
the applicable provisions of Pressure (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made
Piping, ANSI B31 series and the provi- liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints
sions of this paragraph, shall be consid- or approved connectors shall be used.
ered prima facie evidence of compli- Threaded joints and connections shall
ance with the foregoing provisions. be made up tight with a suitable lubri-
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does cant or piping compound. Pipe joints
not apply to any of the following: dependent upon the friction character-
(A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas istics of combustible materials for me-
wells and any piping connected directly chanical continuity of piping shall not
thereto. be used inside buildings. They may be
(B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or used outside of buildings above or
portable or stationary engines. below ground. If used above ground, the
(C) Piping within the scope of any ap- piping shall either be secured to pre-
plicable boiler and pressures vessel vent disengagement at the fitting or
code. the piping system shall be so designed
202
that any spill resulting from such dis- feet (6.08 m) from any activity involv-
engagement could not unduly expose ing fixed sources of ignition.
persons, important buildings or struc- (ii) Dispensing shall be by approved
tures, and could be readily controlled dispensing units with or without inte-
by remote valves. gral pumps and may be located on open
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be piers, wharves, or floating docks or on
substantially supported and protected shore or on piers of the solid fill type.
against physical damage and excessive (iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto-
stresses arising from settlement, vibra- matic-closing without a hold-open
tion, expansion, or contraction. latch.
(5) Protection against corrosion. All (2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and
piping for flammable or combustible pumps not integral with the dispensing
liquids, both aboveground and under- unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of
ground, where subject to external cor- the solid fill type, except as provided in
rosion, shall be painted or otherwise paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this
protected. section.
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall con-
(ii) Where shore location would re-
tain a sufficient number of valves to
quire excessively long supply lines to
operate the system properly and to
dispensers, tanks may be installed on a
protect the plant. Piping systems in
pier provided that applicable portions
connection with pumps shall contain a
sufficient number of valves to control of paragraph (b) of this section relative
properly the flow of liquid in normal to spacing, diking, and piping are com-
operation and in the event of physical plied with and the quantity so stored
damage. Each connection to pipelines, does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L)
by which equipments such as tankcars aggregate capacity.
or tank vehicles discharge liquids by (iii) Shore tanks supplying marine
means of pumps into storage tanks, service stations may be located above
shall be provided with a check valve for ground, where rock ledges or high
automatic protection against backflow water table make underground tanks
if the piping arrangement is such that impractical.
backflow from the system is possible. (iv) Where tanks are at an elevation
(7) Testing. All piping before being which would produce gravity head on
covered, enclosed, or placed in use the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 shall be equipped with a pressure con-
percent of the maximum anticipated trol valve positioned adjacent to and
pressure of the system, or pneumati- outside the tank block valve specified
cally tested to 110 percent of the max- in § 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so ad-
imum anticipated pressure of the sys- justed that liquid cannot flow by grav-
tem, but not less than 5 pounds per ity from the tank in case of piping or
square inch gage at the highest point hose failure.
of the system. This test shall be main- (3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore
tained for a sufficient time to complete tanks and dispensing units shall be as
visual inspection of all joints and con- described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this
nections, but for at least 10 minutes. section, except that, where dispensing
(k) Marine service stations—(1) Dis- is from a floating structure, suitable
pensing. (i) The dispensing area shall be lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
located away from other structures so may be employed between the shore
as to provide room for safe ingress and piping and the piping on the floating
egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing structure as made necessary by change
units shall in all cases be at least 20 in water level or shoreline.
TABLE F–19—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—SERVICE STATIONS
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Underground tank:
Fill opening ...................................................... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is
within the Division 1 or 2 classified area.
203
TABLE F–19—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—SERVICE STATIONS—Continued

Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within a hori-

zontal radius of 10 feet (3.04 m) from a loose fill connection
and within a horizontal radius of 5 feet (1.52 m) from a tight
fill connection.
Vent—Discharging upward .............................. 1 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of open end of vent, extending in all
directions.
2 Area between 3 feet (0.912 m) and 5 feet (1.52 m) of open
end of vent, extending in all directions.
Dispenser:
Pits ................................................................... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is
within the Division 1 or 2 classified area.
Dispenser enclosure ........................................ 1 The area 4 feet (1.216 m) vertically above base within the en-
closure and 18 inches (45.72 cm) horizontally in all direc-
tions.
Outdoor ............................................................ 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within 20 feet
(6.08 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
Indoor:
With mechanical ventilation ............................. 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade or floor level within
20 feet (6.08 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
With gravity ventilation .................................... 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade or floor level within
25 feet (7.6 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
Remote pump—Outdoor ................................. 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level if any part is within a
horizontal distance of 10 feet (3.04 m) from any edge of
pump.
2 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of any edge of pump, extending in all
directions. Also up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade
level within 10 feet (3.04 m) horizontally from any edge of
pump.
Remote pump—Indoor .................................... 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Within 5 feet (1.52 m) of any edge of pump, extending in all
directions. Also up to 3 feet (3.04 m) above floor or grade
level within 25 feet (6.08 m) horizontally from any edge of
pump.
Lubrication or service room ............................. 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Area up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above floor or grade level
within entire lubrication room.
Dispenser for Class I liquids ........................... 2 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of any fill or dispensing point, extend-
ing in all directions.
Special enclosure inside building per 1 Entire enclosure.
§ 1910.106(f)(1)(ii).
Sales, storage and rest rooms ........................ (1 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of a
Division 1 area, the entire room shall be classified as Divi-
sion 1.
1 Ordinary.
(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut propelled craft, and shall include all fa-
off the supply from shore shall be pro- cilities used in connection therewith.
vided in each pipeline at or near the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
approach to the pier and at the shore
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986;
end of each pipeline adjacent to the
58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June
point where flexible hose is attached. 18, 1998]
(iii) Piping shall be located so as to
be protected from physical damage. § 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas
(iv) Piping handling Class I liquids (LP-Gas).
shall be grounded to control stray cur-
rents. (a) Approval of equipment and systems.
(4) Definition; as used in this section: (1) Each system shall have containers,
Marine service station shall mean that valves, connectors, manifold valve as-
portion of a property where flammable semblies, and regulators of an approved
or combustible liquids used as fuels are type.
stored and dispensed from fixed equip-
ment on shore, piers, wharves, or float-
ing docks into the fuel tanks of self-
204
(2) All cylinders shall meet the De- (2) Filling of portable containers or
partment of Transportation specifica- containers mounted on skids from stor-
tion identification requirements pub- age containers shall be performed not
lished in 49 CFR Part 178, Shipping less than 50 feet from the nearest build-
Container Specifications. ing.
(3) Definition. As used in this section, (f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP-
Containers—All vessels, such as tanks, Gas consuming appliances shall be ap-
cylinders, or drums, used for transpor- proved types.
tation or storing liquefied petroleum (2) Any appliance that was originally
gases. manufactured for operation with a gas-
(b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. eous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in
Welding is prohibited on containers. good condition, may be used with LP-
(c) Container valves and container ac- Gas only after it is properly converted,
cessories. (1) Valves, fittings, and acces- adapted, and tested for performance
sories connected directly to the con- with LP-Gas before the appliance is
tainer, including primary shut off placed in use.
valves, shall have a rated working pres- (g) Containers and regulating equip-
sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be ment installed outside of buildings or
of material and design suitable for LP- structures. Containers shall be upright
Gas service. upon firm foundations or otherwise
firmly secured. The possible effect on
(2) Connections to containers, except
the outlet piping of settling shall be
safety relief connections, liquid level
guarded against by a flexible connec-
gauging devices, and plugged openings,
tion or special fitting.
shall have shutoff valves located as (h) Containers and equipment used in-
close to the container as practicable. side of buildings or structures. (1) When
(d) Safety devices. (1) Every container operational requirements make port-
and every vaporizer shall be provided able use of containers necessary, and
with one or more approved safety relief their location outside of buildings or
valves or devices. These valves shall be structures is impracticable, containers
arranged to afford free vent to the and equipment shall be permitted to be
outer air with discharge not less than 5 used inside of buildings or structures in
feet horizontally away from any open- accordance with paragraphs (h)(2)
ing into a building which is below such through (11) of this section.
discharge. (2) Containers in use means connected
(2) Shutoff valves shall not be infor use.
stalled between the safety relief device (3) Systems utilizing containers hav-
and the container, or the equipment or ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2
piping to which the safety relief device pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca-
is connected, except that a shutoff pacity) shall be equipped with excess
valve may be used where the arrange- flow valves. Such excess flow valves
ment of this valve is such that full re- shall be either integral with the con-
quired capacity flow through the safety tainer valves or in the connections to
relief device is always afforded. the container valve outlets.
(3) Container safety relief devices and (4) Regulators shall be either directly
regulator relief vents shall be located connected to the container valves or to
not less than 5 feet in any direction manifolds connected to the container
from air openings into sealed combus- valves. The regulator shall be suitable
tion system appliances or mechanical for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fit-
ventilation air intakes. tings connecting containers to pressure
(e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel con- regulator inlets shall be designed for at
tainers for trucks or motor vehicles least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.
from bulk storage containers shall be (5) Valves on containers having water
performed not less than 10 feet from capacity greater than 50 pounds (nomi-
the nearest masonry-walled building, nal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be
or not less than 25 feet from the near- protected from damage while in use or
est building or other construction and, storage.
in any event, not less than 25 feet from (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall
any building opening. not be used.
205
(7) Hose shall be designed for a work- ant heat application from the heater
ing pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. De- onto the containers. Blower and radi-
sign, construction, and performance of ant type heaters shall not be directed
hose, and hose connections shall have toward any LP-Gas container within 20
their suitability determined by listing feet.
by a nationally recognized testing (14) If two or more heater-container
agency. The hose length shall be as units, of either the integral or non-
short as practicable. Hoses shall be integral type, are located in an
long enough to permit compliance with unpartitioned area on the same floor,
spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) the container or containers of each
through (13) of this section, without unit shall be separated from the con-
kinking or straining, or causing hose tainer or containers of any other unit
to be so close to a burner as to be dam- by at least 20 feet.
aged by heat. (15) When heaters are connected to
(8) Portable heaters, including sala- containers for use in an unpartitioned
manders, shall be equipped with an ap- area on the same floor, the total water
proved automatic device to shut off the capacity of containers, manifolded to-
flow of gas to the main burner, and gether for connection to a heater or
pilot if used, in the event of flame fail- heaters, shall not be greater than 735
ure. Such heaters, having inputs above pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca-
50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa-
with either a pilot, which must be rated by at least 20 feet.
lighted and proved before the main (16) Storage of containers awaiting
burner can be turned on, or an elec- use shall be in accordance with para-
trical ignition system. graphs (j) and (k) of this section.
(i) Multiple container systems. (1)
NOTE: The provisions of this subparagraph
do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500 Valves in the assembly of multiple con-
B.t.u. per hour input when used with container systems shall be arranged so
tainers having a maximum water capacity of that replacement of containers can be
21⁄2 pounds. made without shutting off the flow of
gas in the system. This provision is not
(9) Container valves, connectors, reg-
to be construed as requiring an auto-
ulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing
matic changeover device.
shall not be used as structural supports
(2) Heaters shall be equipped with an
for heaters.
approved regulator in the supply line
(10) Containers, regulating equip-
between the fuel cylinder and the heat-
ment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose
er unit. Cylinder connectors shall be
shall be located to minimize exposure
provided with an excess flow valve to
to high temperatures or physical dam-
minimize the flow of gas in the event
age.
(11) Containers having a water capac- the fuel line becomes ruptured.
(3) Regulators and low-pressure relief
ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1
devices shall be rigidly attached to the
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for
cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting
use shall stand on a firm and substan-
standards, the building walls, or other-
tially level surface and, when nec-
wise rigidly secured, and shall be so in-
essary, shall be secured in an upright
stalled or protected from the elements.
position.
(j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage
(12) The maximum water capacity of
of LPG within buildings is prohibited.
individual containers shall be 245
(k) Storage outside of buildings. (1)
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca-
Storage outside of buildings, for con-
pacity).
tainers awaiting use, shall be located
(13) For temporary heating, heaters
from the nearest building or group of
(other than integral heater-container
buildings, in accordance with the fol-
units) shall be located at least 6 feet
lowing:
from any LP-Gas container. This shall
not prohibit the use of heaters specifi- TABLE F–3
cally designed for attachment to the
container or to a supporting standard, Quantity of LP-Gas stored Distance
(feet)
provided they are designed and in-
stalled so as to prevent direct or radi- 500 lbs. or less .................................................... 0
206
TABLE F–3—Continued ance with these rules subject to the fol-

lowing provisions:
Distance
Quantity of LP-Gas stored (i) If they are to be used at a given
(feet)
general location for a temporary period
501 to 6,000 lbs ................................................... 10
6,001 to 10,000 lbs .............................................. 20 not to exceed 6 months they need not
Over 10,000 lbs ................................................... 25 have fire-resisting foundations or sad-
dles but shall have adequate ferrous
(2) Containers shall be in a suitable metal supports.
ventilated enclosure or otherwise pro- (ii) They shall not be located with
tected against tampering. the outside bottom of the container
(l) Fire protection. Storage locations shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above
shall be provided with at least one ap- the surface of the ground unless fire-re-
proved portable fire extinguisher hav- sisting supports are provided.
ing a rating of not less than 20–B:C.
(iii) The bottom of the skids shall not
(m) Systems utilizing containers other
be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more
than DOT containers—(1) Application.
than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the out-
This paragraph applies specifically to
systems utilizing storage containers side bottom of the container shell.
other than those constructed in accord- (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings,
ance with DOT specifications. Para- and the like, having communication
graph (b) of this section applies to this with the interior of the container, shall
paragraph unless otherwise noted in be protected against physical damage.
paragraph (b) of this section. (v) When not permanently located on
(2) Design pressure and classification of fire-resisting foundations, piping con-
storage containers. Storage containers nections shall be sufficiently flexible
shall be designed and classified in ac- to minimize the possibility of breakage
cordance with Table F–31. or leakage of connections if the con-
tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise
TABLE F–31 displaced.
Minimum design pressure of con- (vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage skids, shall be secured to the container
For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME in accordance with the code or rules
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200, under which the container is designed
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
tainer and built (with a minimum factor of
lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi- safety of four) to withstand loading in
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- any direction equal to four times the
69) tions of API-ASME weight of the container and attach-
Code 3
ments when filled to the maximum per-
1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
missible loaded weight.
100 100 100 125
125 125 125 156 (4) Field welding where necessary
150 150 150 187 shall be made only on saddle plates or
175 175 175 219 brackets which were applied by the
2 200 215 200 250
manufacturer of the tank.
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au-
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947. (n) When LP-Gas and one or more
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
other gases are stored or used in the
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of
the container type designation when constructed under 1949 same area, the containers shall be
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). marked to identify their content.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of
the container type designation when constructed under: (1) Marking shall be in compliance with
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, American National Standard Z48.1–
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME 1954, ‘‘Method of Marking Portable
Code. Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
not authorized after July 1, 1961. the Material Contained.’’
(o) Damage from vehicles. When dam-
(3) Containers with foundations at-
tached (portable or semiportable b con- age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular
tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’ traffic is a possibility, precautions
or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the against such damage shall be taken.
industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be de- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
signed, installed, and used in accord- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993]
207
§ 1926.154 Temporary heating devices. with a primary safety control to stop

(a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be the flow of fuel in the event of flame
supplied in sufficient quantities to failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed
maintain the health and safety of shall not be considered a primary safe-
workmen. Where natural means of ty control.
fresh air supply is inadequate, mechan- (2) Heaters designed for barometric
ical ventilation shall be provided. or gravity oil feed shall be used only
(2) When heaters are used in confined with the integral tanks.
spaces, special care shall be taken to (3) [Reserved]
provide sufficient ventilation in order (4) Heaters specifically designed and
to ensure proper combustion, maintain approved for use with separate supply
the health and safety of workmen, and tanks may be directly connected for
limit temperature rise in the area. gravity feed, or an automatic pump,
(b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Tem- from a supply tank.
porary heating devices shall be in-
§ 1926.155 Definitions applicable to
stalled to provide clearance to combus- this subpart.
tible material not less than the
amount shown in Table F–4. (a) Approved, for the purpose of this
(2) Temporary heating devices, which subpart, means equipment that has
are listed for installation with lesser been listed or approved by a nationally
clearances than specified in Table F–4, recognized testing laboratory such as
may be installed in accordance with Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or
their approval. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or
Federal agencies such as Bureau of
TABLE F–4 Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which
issue approvals for such equipment.
Minimum clearance, (inches)
(b) Closed container means a container
Heating appliances Chimney so sealed by means of a lid or other de-
Sides Rear con-
nector vice that neither liquid nor vapor will
escape from it at ordinary tempera-
Room heater, circulating
type .................................. 12 12 18
tures.
Room heater, radiant type .. 36 36 18 (c) Combustible liquids mean any liq-
uid having a flash point at or above 140
(3) Heaters not suitable for use on °F. (60 °C.), and below 200 °F. (93.4 °C.).
wood floors shall not be set directly (d) Combustion means any chemical
upon them or other combustible mate- process that involves oxidation suffi-
rials. When such heaters are used, they cient to produce light or heat.
shall rest on suitable heat insulating (e) Fire brigade means an organized
material or at least 1-inch concrete, or group of employees that are knowl-
equivalent. The insulating material edgeable, trained, and skilled in the
shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or safe evacuation of employees during
more in all directions. emergency situations and in assisting
(4) Heaters used in the vicinity of in fire fighting operations.
combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or (f) Fire resistance means so resistant
similar coverings shall be located at to fire that, for specified time and
least 10 feet from the coverings. The under conditions of a standard heat in-
coverings shall be securely fastened to tensity, it will not fail structurally and
prevent ignition or upsetting of the will not permit the side away from the
heater due to wind action on the cov- fire to become hotter than a specified
ering or other material. temperature. For purposes of this part,
(c) Stability. Heaters, when in use, fire resistance shall be determined by
shall be set horizontally level, unless the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
otherwise permitted by the manufac- Building Construction and Materials,
turer’s markings. NFPA 251–1969.
(d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel (g) Flammable means capable of being
salamanders are prohibited in buildings easily ignited, burning intensely, or
and on scaffolds. having a rapid rate of flame spread.
(e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable (h) Flammable liquids means any liq-
liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped uid having a flash point below 140 °F.
208
and having a vapor pressure not ex- Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
ceeding 40 pounds per square inch (ab- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 3–2000 (65 FR
solute) at 100 °F. 50017) as applicable, 29 CFR part 1911.
(i) Flash point of the liquid means the
§ 1926.200 Accident prevention signs
temperature at which it gives off vapor and tags.
sufficient to form an ignitable mixture
with the air near the surface of the liq- (a) General. Signs and symbols re-
uid or within the vessel used as deter- quired by this subpart shall be visible
mined by appropriate test procedure at all times when work is being per-
and apparatus as specified below. formed, and shall be removed or cov-
(1) The flash point of liquids having a ered promptly when the hazards no
viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Uni- longer exist.
versal Second(s) at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) and (b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs (see
a flash point below 175 °F. (79.4 °C.) Figure G–1) shall be used only where an
shall be determined in accordance with immediate hazard exists.
the Standard Method of Test for Flash (2) Danger signs shall have red as the
Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM predominating color for the upper
D–56–69. panel; black outline on the borders;
(2) The flash point of liquids having a and a white lower panel for additional
viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Sec- sign wording.
ond(s) or more at 175 °F. (79.4 °C.) or (c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs
higher shall be determined in accord- (see Figure G–2) shall be used only to
ance with the Standard Method of Test warn against potential hazards or to
for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens caution against unsafe practices.
Closed Tester, ASTM D–93–69. (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as
(j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and the predominating color; black upper
LP Gas mean and include any material panel and borders: yellow lettering of
which is composed predominantly of ‘‘caution’’ on the black panel; and the
any of the following hydrocarbons, or lower yellow panel for additional sign
mixtures of them, such as propane, pro- wording. Black lettering shall be used
pylene, butane (normal butane or iso- for additional wording.
butane), and butylenes.
(k) Portable tank means a closed con-
tainer having a liquid capacity more
than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended
for fixed installation.
(l) Safety can means an approved
closed container, of not more than 5
gallons capacity, having a flash-arrest-
ing screen, spring-closing lid and spout
cover and so designed that it will safe-
ly relieve internal pressure when sub-
jected to fire exposure.
(m) Vapor pressure means the pres-
sure, measured in pounds per square
inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile
liquid as determined by the ‘‘Standard
Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of
Petroleum Products (Reid Method).’’ (3) Standard color of the background
(ASTM D–323–58). shall be yellow; and the panel, black
with yellow letters. Any letters used
Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and against the yellow background shall be
Barricades black. The colors shall be those of
opaque glossy samples as specified in
Table 1 of American National Standard
and Safety Standards Act (Construction Z53.1–1967.
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); sections 4, 6, 8, (d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when re-
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 quired, shall be lettered in legible red
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s letters, not less than 6 inches high, on
209
EC30OC91.013</GPH>
a white field and the principal stroke Telephone: 1–800–231–3475; FAX: (540)
of the letters shall be at least three- 368–1722; www.atssa.com; Institute of
fourths inch in width. Transportation Engineers, 1099 14th
(e) Safety instruction signs. Safety in- Street, NW., Suite 300 West, Wash-
struction signs, when used, shall be ington, DC 20005–3438; FAX: (202) 289–
white with green upper panel with 7722; www.ite.org; and American Asso-
white letters to convey the principal ciation of State Highway and Trans-
message. Any additional wording on portation Officials; www.aashto.org;
the sign shall be black letters on the Telephone: 1–800–231–3475; FAX: 1–800–
white background. 525–5562. Electronic copies of the
(f) Directional signs. Directional signs, MUTCD 2000 are available for
other than automotive traffic signs downloading at http://
specified in paragraph (g) of this sec- mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium.
tion, shall be white with a black panel Electronic copies of the 1988 Edition
and a white directional symbol. Any MUTCD, Revision 3, are available for
additional wording on the sign shall be downloading at http://www.osha.gov/doc/
black letters on the white background. highwaylworkzones. Both documents
(g) Traffic signs. (1) Construction are available for inspection at the
areas shall be posted with legible traf- OSHA Docket Office, Room N2625, U.S.
fic signs at points of hazard. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
(2) All traffic control signs or devices Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210 or
used for protection of construction at the National Archives and Records
workers shall conform to Part VI of Administration (NARA). For informa-
the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control tion on the availability of this mate-
Devices (AMUTCD’’), 1988 Edition, Re- rial at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go
vision 3, September 3, 1993, FHWA-SA– to: http://www.archives.gov/
94–027 or Part VI of the Manual on Uni- federallregister/
form Traffic Control Devices, Millen- codeloflfederallregulations/
nium Edition, December 2000, FHWA, ibrllocations.html.
which are incorporated by reference. (h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Acci-
The Director of the Federal Register dent prevention tags shall be used as a
approves this incorporation by ref- temporary means of warning employ-
erence in accordance with 5 U.S.C. ees of an existing hazard, such as defec-
552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. You may ob- tive tools, equipment, etc. They shall
tain a copy of the Millennium Edition not be used in place of, or as a sub-
from the following organizations: stitute for, accident prevention signs.
American Traffic Safety Services Asso- (2) Specifications for accident pre-
ciation, 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite vention tags similar to those in Table
100, Fredericksburg, VA 22406–1022; G–1 shall apply.
210
(i) Additional rules. American Na- rules not specifically prescribed in this
tional Standards Institute (ANSI) subpart.
Z35.1–1968, Specifications for Accident
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Prevention Signs, and Z35.2–1968, Speci- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993;
fications for Accident Prevention Tags, 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr.
contain rules which are additional to 9, 2004]
the rules prescribed in this section.
The employer shall comply with ANSI § 1926.201 Signaling.
Z35.1–1968 and Z35.2–1968 with respect to (a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers
and the use of flaggers, including warn-
ing garments worn by flaggers shall
conform to Part VI of the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (1988
Edition, Revision 3 or the Millennium
211
EC30OC91.014</GPH>
Edition), which are incorporated by (2) Maximum safe load limits of

reference in § 1926.200(g)(2). floors within buildings and structures,
(b) Crane and hoist signals. Regula- in pounds per square foot, shall be con-
tions for crane and hoist signaling will spicuously posted in all storage areas,
be found in applicable American Na- except for floor or slab on grade. Max-
tional Standards Institute standards. imum safe loads shall not be exceeded.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Aisles and passageways shall be
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, kept clear to provide for the free and
2002] safe movement of material handling
equipment or employees. Such areas
§ 1926.202 Barricades. shall be kept in good repair.
Barricades for protection of employ- (4) When a difference in road or work-
ees shall conform to Part VI of the ing levels exist, means such as ramps,
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De- blocking, or grading shall be used to
vices (1988 Edition, Revision 3 or Mil- ensure the safe movement of vehicles
lennium Edition), which are incor- between the two levels.
porated by reference in § 1926.200(g)(2). (b) Material storage. (1) Material
stored inside buildings under construc-
[67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002]
tion shall not be placed within 6 feet of
§ 1926.203 Definitions applicable to any hoistway or inside floor openings,
this subpart. nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall
which does not extend above the top of
(a) Barricade means an obstruction to
the material stored.
deter the passage of persons or vehi-
(2) Each employee required to work
cles.
(b) Signs are the warnings of hazard, on stored material in silos, hoppers,
temporarily or permanently affixed or tanks, and similar storage areas shall
placed, at locations where hazards be equipped with personal fall arrest
exist. equipment meeting the requirements
(c) Signals are moving signs, provided of subpart M of this part.
by workers, such as flaggers, or by de- (3) Noncompatible materials shall be
vices, such as flashing lights, to warn segregated in storage.
of possible or existing hazards. (4) Bagged materials shall be stacked
(d) Tags are temporary signs, usually by stepping back the layers and cross-
attached to a piece of equipment or keying the bags at least every 10 bags
part of a structure, to warn of existing high.
or immediate hazards. (5) Materials shall not be stored on
scaffolds or runways in excess of sup-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, plies needed for immediate operations.
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12,
(6) Brick stacks shall not be more
2002]
than 7 feet in height. When a loose
brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet,
Subpart H—Materials Handling, it shall be tapered back 2 inches in
Storage, Use, and Disposal every foot of height above the 4-foot
level.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (7) When masonry blocks are stacked
and Safety Standards Act (Construction higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- tapered back one-half block per tier
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 above the 6-foot level.
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR (8) Lumber:
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (50 FR 9033), (i) Used lumber shall have all nails
as applicable. Section 1926.250 also issued withdrawn before stacking.
under 29 CFR Part 1911. (ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level
and solidly supported sills.
§ 1926.250 General requirements for (iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to
storage. be stable and self-supporting.
(a) General. (1) All materials stored in (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20
tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked, feet in height provided that lumber to
interlocked, or otherwise secured to be handled manually shall not be
prevent sliding, falling or collapse. stacked more than 16 feet high.
212
(9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar (5) Scope. This section applies to
stock, and other cylindrical materials, slings used in conjunction with other
unless racked, shall be stacked and material handling equipment for the
blocked so as to prevent spreading or movement of material by hoisting, in
tilting. employments covered by this part. The
(c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall types of slings covered are those made
be kept free from accumulation of ma- from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal
terials that constitute hazards from mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope
tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor- (conventional three strand construc-
age. Vegetation control will be exer- tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly-
cised when necessary. ester, and polypropylene).
(d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port- (6) Inspections. Each day before being
able and powered dockboards shall be used, the sling and all fastenings and
strong enough to carry the load im- attachments shall be inspected for
posed on them. damage or defects by a competent per-
(2) Portable dockboards shall be se- son designated by the employer. Addi-
cured in position, either by being an- tional inspections shall be performed
chored or equipped with devices which during sling use, where service condi-
will prevent their slipping. tions warrant. Damaged or defective
(3) Handholds, or other effective slings shall be immediately removed
means, shall be provided on portable from service.
dockboards to permit safe handling. (b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy
steel chain slings shall have perma-
(4) Positive protection shall be pro-
nently affixed durable identification
vided to prevent railroad cars from
stating size, grade, rated capacity, and
being moved while dockboards or
sling manufacturer.
bridge plates are in position.
(2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, shaped links, welded or mechanical
1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; coupling links, or other attachments,
54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30, when used with alloy steel chains, shall
1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. have a rated capacity at least equal to
13, 1996]
that of the chain.
§ 1926.251 Rigging equipment for ma- (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or
terial handling. makeshift fasteners, formed from
bolts, rods, etc., or other such attach-
(a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for ments, shall not be used.
material handling shall be inspected (4) Rated capacity (working load
prior to use on each shift and as nec- limit) for alloy steel chain slings shall
essary during its use to ensure that it conform to the values shown in Table
is safe. Defective rigging equipment H–1.
shall be removed from service. (5) Whenever wear at any point of
(2) Rigging equipment shall not be any chain link exceeds that shown in
loaded in excess of its recommended Table H–2, the assembly shall be re-
safe working load, as prescribed in Ta- moved from service.
bles H–1 through H–20 in this subpart, (6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the
following § 1926.252(e) for the specific inspection required by other para-
equipment. graphs of this section, a thorough peri-
(3) Rigging equipment, when not in odic inspection of alloy steel chain
use, shall be removed from the imme- slings in use shall be made on a regular
diate work area so as not to present a basis, to be determined on the basis of
hazard to employees. (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity
(4) Special custom design grabs, of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
hooks, clamps, or other lifting acces- being made; and (D) experience gained
sories, for such units as modular pan- on the service life of slings used in
els, prefabricated structures and simi- similar circumstances. Such inspec-
lar materials, shall be marked to indi- tions shall in no event be at intervals
cate the safe working loads and shall greater than once every 12 months.
be proof-tested prior to use to 125 per- (ii) The employer shall make and
cent of their rated load. maintain a record of the most recent
213
month in which each alloy steel chain (8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall
sling was thoroughly inspected, and have the loads balanced to prevent slip-
shall make such record available for page.
examination. (9) Slings shall be padded or pro-
(c) Wire rope. (1) Tables H–3 through tected from the sharp edges of their
H–14 shall be used to determine the loads.
safe working loads of various sizes and (10) Hands or fingers shall not be
classifications of improved plow steel placed between the sling and its load
wire rope and wire rope slings with var- while the sling is being tightened
ious types of terminals. For sizes, clas- around the load.
sifications, and grades not included in (11) Shock loading is prohibited.
these tables, the safe working load rec- (12) A sling shall not be pulled from
ommended by the manufacturer for under a load when the load is resting
specific, identifiable products shall be on the sling.
followed, provided that a safety factor (13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable
of not less than 5 is maintained. laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall
(2) Protruding ends of strands in have a minimum clear length of wire
splices on slings and bridles shall be rope 10 times the component rope di-
covered or blunted. ameter between splices, sleeves or end
(3) Wire rope shall not be secured by fittings.
knots, except on haul back lines on
(ii) Braided slings shall have a min-
scrapers.
imum clear length of wire rope 40 times
(4) The following limitations shall
the component rope diameter between
apply to the use of wire rope:
the loops or end fittings.
(i) An eye splice made in any wire
rope shall have not less than three full (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
tucks. However, this requirement shall grommets and endless slings shall have
not operate to preclude the use of an- a minimum circumferential length of
other form of splice or connection 96 times their body diameter.
which can be shown to be as efficient (14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
and which is not otherwise prohibited. core wire rope slings of all grades shall
(ii) Except for eye splices in the ends be permanently removed from service
of wires and for endless rope slings, if they are exposed to temperatures in
each wire rope used in hoisting or low- excess of 200 °F (93.33 °C). When
ering, or in pulling loads, shall consist nonfiber core wire rope slings of any
of one continuous piece without knot grade are used at temperatures above
or splice. 400 °F (204.44 °C) or below minus 60 °F
(iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, (15.55 °C), recommendations of the sling
or bull wires shall not be formed by manufacturer regarding use at that
wire rope clips or knots. temperature shall be followed.
(iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in (15) End attachments. (i) Welding of
any length of eight diameters, the end attachments, except covers to
total number of visible broken wires thimbles, shall be performed prior to
exceeds 10 percent of the total number the assembly of the sling.
of wires, or if the rope shows other (ii) All welded end attachments shall
signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or not be used unless proof tested by the
defect. manufacturer or equivalent entity at
(5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are twice their rated capacity prior to ini-
used to form eyes, Table H–20 shall be tial use. The employer shall retain a
used to determine the number and certificate of the proof test, and make
spacing of clips. it available for examination.
(i) When used for eye splices, the U- (d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber—
bolt shall be applied so that the ‘‘U’’ (1) General. When using natural or syn-
section is in contact with the dead end thetic fiber rope slings, Tables H–15, 16,
of the rope. 17, and 18 shall apply.
(6) Slings shall not be shortened with (2) All splices in rope slings provided
knots or bolts or other makeshift de- by the employer shall be made in ac-
vices. cordance with fiber rope manufacturers
(7) Sling legs shall not be kinked. recommendations.
214
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall tucks, and short splices shall consist of
contain at least three full tucks, and at least eight full tucks, four on each
short splices shall contain at least six side of the center line.
full tucks (three on each side of the (iii) Strand end tails shall not be
centerline of the splice). trimmed flush with the surface of the
(ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye rope immediately adjacent to the full
splices shall contain at least four full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber
tucks, and short splices shall contain rope and both eye and short splices.
at least eight full tucks (four on each For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
side of the centerline of the splice). diameter, the tail shall project at least
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be six rope diameters beyond the last full
trimmed short (flush with the surface tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
of the rope) immediately adjacent to diameter and larger, the tail shall
the full tucks. This precaution applies project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) be-
to both eye and short splices and all yond the last full tuck. Where a pro-
types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes jecting tail interferes with the use of
under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall the sling, the tail shall be tapered and
project at least six rope diameters be- spliced into the body of the rope using
yond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes at least two additional tucks (which
1-inch diameter and larger, the tails will require a tail length of approxi-
shall project at least 6 inches beyond mately six rope diameters beyond the
the last full tuck. In applications last full tuck).
where the projecting tails may be ob- (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a
jectionable, the tails shall be tapered minimum clear length of rope between
and spliced into the body of the rope eye splices equal to 10 times the rope
using at least two additional tucks diameter.
(which will require a tail length of ap- (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of
proximately six rope diameters beyond splices.
the last full tuck). (vi) Clamps not designed specifically
(iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall for fiber ropes shall not be used for
be sufficiently large to provide an in- splicing.
cluded angle of not greater than 60° at (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall
the splice when the eye is placed over be of such size to provide an included
the load or support. angle of not greater than 60 degrees at
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of the splice when the eye is placed over
splices. the load or support.
(3) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- (5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings
ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- shall not be used if end attachments in
cept for wet frozen slings, may be used contact with the rope have sharp edges
in a temperature range from minus 20 or projections.
°F (¥28.88 °C) to plus 180 °F (82.2 °C)
(6) Removal from service. Natural and
without decreasing the working load
synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
limit. For operations outside this tem-
mediately removed from service if any
perature range and for wet frozen
of the following conditions are present:
slings, the sling manufacturer’s rec-
(i) Abnormal wear.
ommendations shall be followed.
(4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings (ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
shall not be used unless they have been (iii) Broken or cut fibers.
spliced in accordance with the fol- (iv) Variations in the size or round-
lowing minimum requirements and in ness of strands.
accordance with any additional rec- (v) Discoloration or rotting.
ommendations of the manufacturer: (vi) Distortion of hardware in the
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall sling.
consist of at least three full tucks, and (e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester,
short splices shall consist of at least and polypropylene). (1) The employer
six full tucks, three on each side of the shall have each synthetic web sling
splice center line. marked or coded to show:
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye (i) Name or trademark of manufac-
splices shall consist of at least four full turer.
215
(ii) Rated capacities for the type of (7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn-
hitch. thetic web slings of polyester and
(iii) Type of material. nylon shall not be used at tempera-
(2) Rated capacity shall not be ex- tures in excess of 180 °F (82.2 °C). Poly-
ceeded. propylene web slings shall not be used
(3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall at temperatures in excess of 200 °F
be of uniform thickness and width and (93.33 °C).
selvage edges shall not be split from (8) Removal from service. Synthetic
the webbing’s width. web slings shall be immediately re-
(4) Fittings. Fittings shall be: moved from service if any of the fol-
(i) Of a minimum breaking strength lowing conditions are present:
equal to that of the sling; and (i) Acid or caustic burns;
(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could (ii) Melting or charring of any part of
in any way damage the webbing. the sling surface;
(5) Attachment of end fittings to web- (iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts;
bing and formation of eyes. Stitching (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or
shall be the only method used to at- (v) Distortion of fittings.
tach end fittings to webbing and to (f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Table H–19
form eyes. The thread shall be in an shall be used to determine the safe
even pattern and contain a sufficient working loads of various sizes of shack-
number of stitches to develop the full les, except that higher safe working
breaking strength of the sling. loads are permissible when rec-
(6) Environmental conditions. When ommended by the manufacturer for
synthetic web slings are used, the fol- specific, identifiable products, provided
lowing precautions shall be taken: that a safety factor of not less than 5 is
(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used maintained.
where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or (2) The manufacturer’s recommenda-
liquids of acids or phenolics are tions shall be followed in determining
present. the safe working loads of the various
(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web sizes and types of specific and identifi-
slings shall not be used where fumes, able hooks. All hooks for which no ap-
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of plicable manufacturer’s recommenda-
caustics are present. tions are available shall be tested to
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- twice the intended safe working load
tings shall not be used where fumes, before they are initially put into use.
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of The employer shall maintain a record
caustics are present. of the dates and results of such tests.
TABLE H–1—RATED CAPACITY (WORKING LOAD LIMIT), FOR ALLOY STEEL CHAIN SLINGS 1
Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), Pounds
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses] (2)
Single Double sling vertical angle (1) Triple and quadruple sling
branch vertical angle (1)
Chain size (inches) sling— 30° 45° 60°
90° 30° 45° 60°
(60°) (45°) (30°)
loading (60°) (45°) (30°)
⁄ .............................................................................
14 3,250 5,560 4,550 3,250 8,400 6,800 4,900
⁄ .............................................................................
38 6,600 11,400 9,300 6,600 17,000 14,000 9,900
⁄ .............................................................................
12 11,250 19,500 15,900 11,250 29,000 24,000 17,000
5⁄8 ............................................................................. 16,500 28,500 23,300 16,500 43,000 35,000 24,500
3⁄4 ............................................................................. 23,000 39,800 32,500 23,000 59,500 48,500 34,500
7⁄8 ............................................................................. 28,750 49,800 40,600 28,750 74,500 61,000 43,000
1 .............................................................................. 38,750 67,100 54,800 38,750 101,000 82,000 58,000
11⁄8 ........................................................................... 44,500 77,000 63,000 44,500 115,500 94,500 66,500
11⁄4 ........................................................................... 57,500 99,500 81,000 57,500 149,000 121,500 86,000
13⁄8 ........................................................................... 67,000 116,000 94,000 67,000 174,000 141,000 100,500
11⁄2 ........................................................................... 80,000 138,000 112,500 80,000 207,000 169,000 119,500
13⁄4 ........................................................................... 100,000 172,000 140,000 100,000 258,000 210,000 150,000
1 Other grades of proof tested steel chain include Proof Coil, BBB Coil and Hi-Test Chain. These grades are not recommended
for overhead lifting and therefore are not covered by this code.
(1) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading measured as the included angle between the inclined leg and the
vertical.
(2) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading between the inclined leg and the horizontal plane of the load.
216
TABLE H–2—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT TABLE H–2—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT

ANY POINT OF LINK ANY POINT OF LINK—Continued
Maximum Maximum
Chain size (inches) allowable Chain size (inches) allowable
wear (inch) wear (inch)
⁄
14 ......................................................................... ⁄
3 64 1 ........................................................................... ⁄
3 16
⁄
38 ......................................................................... ⁄
5 64 11⁄8 ....................................................................... ⁄
7 32
1⁄2 ......................................................................... 7⁄64 11⁄4 ....................................................................... ⁄

14
5⁄8 13⁄8 ....................................................................... ⁄9 32

......................................................................... 9⁄64
3⁄4
11⁄2 ....................................................................... ⁄5 16
......................................................................... 5⁄32
7⁄8
13⁄4 ....................................................................... 11⁄32
......................................................................... 11⁄64
TABLE H–3—RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with Fiber Core (FC)
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1

Dia. Constr.
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.37 0.38 0.41 0.99 1.0 1.1
⁄
5 16 6×19 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.57 0.59 0.64 1.5 1.6 1.7
38 ⁄ 6×19 1.1 1.1 1.2 0.80 0.85 0.91 2.1 2.2 2.4
⁄
7 16 6×19 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.9 3.0 3.3
12 ⁄ 6×19 1.8 2.0 2.1 1.4 1.5 1.6 3.7 3.9 4.3
⁄
9 16 6×19 2.3 2.5 2.7 1.7 1.9 2.0 4.6 5.0 5.4
58⁄ 6×19 2.8 3.1 3.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 5.6 6.2 6.7
34⁄ 6×19 3.9 4.4 4.8 2.9 3.3 3.6 7.8 8.8 9.5
78⁄ 6×19 5.1 5.9 6.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 10.0 12.0 13.0
1 6×19 6.7 7.7 8.4 5.0 5.8 6.3 13.0 15.0 17.0
1 1⁄8 6×19 8.4 9.5 10.0 6.3 7.1 7.9 17.0 19.0 21.0
1 ⁄4
1 6×37 9.8 11.0 12.0 7.4 8.3 9.2 20.0 22.0 25.0
1 3⁄8 6×37 12.0 13.0 15.0 8.9 10.0 11.0 24.0 27.0 30.0
1 1⁄2 6×37 14.0 16.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 13.0 28.0 32.0 35.0
1 5⁄8 6×37 16.0 18.0 21.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 33.0 37.0 41.0
1 3⁄4 6×37 19.0 21.0 24.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 38.0 43.0 48.0
2 6×37 25.0 28.0 31.0 18.0 21.0 23.0 49.0 55.0 62.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope.
HT=Hand Tucked Splice and Hidden Tuck Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use values in HT columns.
MS=Mechanical Splice.
S=Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.

6×19 AND 6×37 CLASSIFICATION IMPROVED PLOW STEEL GRADE ROPE WITH INDEPENDENT WIRE ROPE CORE (IWRC)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1

Dia. Constr.
(inches)
HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.44 1.0 1.1 1.2
⁄
5 16 6×19 0.81 0.87 0.92 0.61 0.65 0.69 1.6 1.7 1.8
38 ⁄ 6×19 1.1 1.2 1.3 0.86 0.93 0.98 2.3 2.5 2.6
⁄
7 16 6×19 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.1 3.4 3.5
12 ⁄ 6×19 2.0 2.2 2.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 3.9 4.4 4.6
⁄
9 16 6×19 2.5 2.7 2.9 1.8 2.1 2.2 4.9 5.5 5.8
⁄
58 6×19 3.0 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.5 2.7 6.0 6.8 7.2
⁄
34 6×19 4.2 4.9 5.1 3.1 3.6 3.8 8.4 9.7 10.0
⁄
78 6×19 5.5 6.6 6.9 4.1 4.9 5.2 11.0 13.0 14.0
1 6×19 7.2 8.5 9.0 5.4 6.4 6.7 14.0 17.0 18.0
1 1⁄8 6×19 9.0 10.0 11.0 6.8 7.8 8.5 18.0 21.0 23.0
1 1⁄4 6×37 10.0 12.0 13.0 7.9 9.2 9.9 21.0 24.0 26.0
1 3⁄8 6×37 13.0 15.0 16.0 9.6 11.0 12.0 25.0 29.0 32.0
1 1⁄2 6×37 15.0 17.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 14.0 30.0 35.0 38.0
1 5⁄8 6×37 18.0 20.0 22.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 35.0 41.0 44.0
1 3⁄4 6×37 20.0 24.0 26.0 15.0 18.0 19.0 41.0 47.0 51.0
2 6×37 26.0 30.0 33.0 20.0 23.0 25.0 53.0 61.0 66.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope.
HT=Hand Tucked Splice: For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use Table H–3 values in HT column.
217
S=Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
TABLE H–5—RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE TABLE H–5—RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE
LEG SLINGS LEG SLINGS—Continued
Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade
Rope Rope
7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
Dia. Vertical Dia. Vertical
Constr. Vertical Choker Constr. Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1 (inches) basket 1
⁄
14 7×7×7 0.50 0.38 1.0 78 ⁄ 2 7×6×19 5.0 3.8 10.0
⁄
38 7×7×7 1.1 0.81 2.2 1 2 7×6×19 6.4 4.8 13.0
⁄
12 7×7×7 1.8 1.4 3.7 1 ⁄
18 2 7×6×19 7.7 5.8 15.0
5⁄8 7×7×7 2.8 2.1 5.5 1 ⁄4
1 2 7×6×19 9.2 6.9 18.0
3⁄4 7×7×7 3.8 2.9 7.6
15⁄16 2 7×6×19 10.0 7.5 20.0
5⁄8 7×7×19 2.9 2.2 5.8
1 3⁄8 2 7×6×19 11.0 8.2 22.0
3⁄4 7×7×19 4.1 3.0 8.1
1 1⁄2 2 7×6×19 13.0 9.6 26.0
7⁄8 7×7×19 5.4 4.0 11.0
1 7×7×19 6.9 5.1 14.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio in 10 or great-
1 1⁄8 7×7×19 8.2 6.2 16.0 er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of
1 ⁄4
1 7×7×19 9.9 7.4 20.0 the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope.
3⁄4 2 7×6×19 3.8 2.8 7.6 2 IWRC.

8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
Component ropes Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
Basket vertical
Vertical Choker to 30° 1
Diameter (inches) Constr.
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part
⁄ .........................................................................................
3 32 6×7 0.42 0.32 0.32 0.24 0.74 0.55
⁄ ...........................................................................................
18 6×7 0.76 0.57 0.57 0.42 1.3 0.98
⁄ .........................................................................................
3 16 6×7 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.94 2.9 2.2
3⁄32 ......................................................................................... 7×7 0.51 0.39 0.38 0.29 0.89 0.67
1⁄8 ........................................................................................... 7×7 0.95 0.71 0.71 0.53 1.6 1.2
3⁄16 ......................................................................................... 7×7 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.2 3.6 2.7
3⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.98 3.0 2.2
1⁄4 ........................................................................................... 6×19 3.1 2.3 2.3 1.7 5.3 4.0
5⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 4.8 3.6 3.6 2.7 8.3 6.2
3⁄8 ........................................................................................... 6×19 6.8 5.1 5.1 3.8 12.0 8.9
7⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 9.3 6.9 6.9 5.2 16.0 12.0
1⁄2 ........................................................................................... 6×19 12.0 9.0 9.0 6.7 21.0 15.0
9⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 15.0 11.0 11.0 8.5 26.0 20.0
5⁄8 ........................................................................................... 6×19 19.0 14.0 14.0 10.0 32.0 24.0
3⁄4 ........................................................................................... 6×19 27.0 20.0 20.0 15.0 46.0 35.0
7⁄8 ........................................................................................... 6×19 36.0 27.0 27.0 20.0 62.0 47.0
1 ............................................................................................ 6×19 47.0 35.0 35.0 26.0 81.0 61.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the
sling is bent. d=Diameter of component rope.
TABLE H–7—RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)
2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings

Dia. Constr. 30° 1 (60°) 2 45° angle 60° 1 (30°) 2 30° 1 (60°) 2 45° angle 60° 1 (30°) 2
(inches)
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.85 0.88 0.70 0.72 0.49 0.51 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.74 0.7
⁄
5 16 6×19 1.3 1.4 1.1 1.1 0.76 0.79 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.1 1.2
38 ⁄ 6×19 1.8 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 2.8 2.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.7
⁄
7 16 6×19 2.5 2.6 2.0 2.2 1.4 1.5 3.7 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.1 2.3
12 ⁄ 6×19 3.2 3.4 2.6 2.8 1.8 2.0 4.8 5.1 3.9 4.2 2.8 3.0
⁄
9 16 6×19 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.5 2.3 2.5 6.0 6.5 4.9 5.3 3.4 3.7
218
TABLE H–7—RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS—Continued

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)

(inches)
⁄
58 6×19 4.8 5.3 4.0 4.4 2.8 3.1 7.3 8.0 5.9 6.5 4.2 4.6
⁄
34 6×19 6.8 7.6 5.5 6.2 3.9 4.4 10.0 11.0 8.3 9.3 5.8 6.6
⁄
78 6×19 8.9 10.0 7.3 8.4 5.1 5.9 13.0 15.0 11.0 13.0 7.7 8.9
1 6×19 11.0 13.0 9.4 11.0 6.7 7.7 17.0 20.0 14.0 16.0 10.0 11.0
1 1⁄8 6×19 14.0 16.0 12.0 13.0 8.4 9.5 22.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 13.0 14.0
1 1⁄4 6×37 17.0 19.0 14.0 16.0 9.8 11.0 25.0 29.0 21.0 23.0 15.0 17.0
1 3⁄8 6×37 20.0 23.0 17.0 19.0 12.0 13.0 31.0 35.0 25.0 28.0 18.0 20.0
1 1⁄2 6×37 24.0 27.0 20.0 22.0 14.0 16.0 36.0 41.0 30.0 33.0 21.0 24.0
1 5⁄8 6×37 28.0 32.0 23.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0
1 3⁄4 6×37 33.0 37.0 27.0 30.0 19.0 21.0 49.0 56.0 40.0 45.0 28.0 32.0
2 6×37 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 64.0 72.0 52.0 59.0 37.0 41.0
HT=Hand Tucked Splice.
1 Vertical angles.
2 Horizontal angles.

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)

(inches)
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.92 0.97 0.75 0.79 0.53 0.56 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.2 0.79 0.84
⁄
5 16 6×19 1.4 1.5 1.1 1.2 1.81 0.87 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3
38 ⁄ 6×19 2.0 2.1 1.6 1.8 1.1 1.2 3.0 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 1.9
⁄
7 16 6×19 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.5 1.7 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5
12 ⁄ 6×19 3.4 3.8 2.8 3.1 2.0 2.2 5.1 5.7 4.2 4.6 3.0 3.3
⁄
9 16 6×19 4.3 4.8 3.5 3.9 2.5 2.7 6.4 7.1 5.2 5.8 3.7 4.1
58⁄ 6×19 5.2 5.9 4.2 4.8 3.0 3.4 7.8 8.8 6.4 7.2 4.5 5.1
34⁄ 6×19 7.3 8.4 5.9 6.9 4.2 4.9 11.0 13.0 8.9 10.0 6.3 7.3
78⁄ 6×19 9.6 11.0 7.8 9.3 5.5 6.6 14.0 17.0 12.0 14.0 8.3 9.9
1 6×19 12.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 7.2 8.5 19.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 11.0 13.0
1 ⁄8
1 6×19 16.0 18.0 13.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 23.0 27.0 19.0 22.0 13.0 16.0
1 ⁄4
1 6×37 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 27.0 32.0 22.0 26.0 16.0 18.0
1 3⁄8 6×37 22.0 25.0 18.0 21.0 13.0 15.0 33.0 38.0 27.0 31.0 19.0 22.0
1 1⁄2 6×37 26.0 30.0 21.0 25.0 15.0 17.0 39.0 45.0 32.0 37.0 23.0 26.0
1 5⁄8 6×37 31.0 35.0 25.0 29.0 18.0 20.0 46.0 53.0 38.0 43.0 27.0 31.0
1 3⁄4 6×37 35.0 41.0 29.0 33.0 20.0 24.0 53.0 61.0 43.0 50.0 31.0 35.0
2 6×37 46.0 53.0 37.0 43.0 26.0 30.0 68.0 79.0 56.0 65.0 40.0 46.0
HT=Hand Tucked Splice.
1 Vertical angles.

Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
2-leg bridle sling 3-leg bridle sling

Dia. (inches) Constr. 30° 1 45° 60° 1 30° 1 45° 60° 1
(60°) 2 angle (30°) 2 (60°) 2 angle (30°) 2
⁄
14 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 0.87 0.71 0.50 1.3 1.1 0.75
⁄
38 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 1.9 1.5 1.1 2.8 2.3 1.6
⁄
12 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 3.2 2.6 1.8 4.8 3.9 2.8
5⁄8 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 4.8 3.9 2.8 7.2 5.9 4.2
3⁄4 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.1 5.7
219
TABLE H–9—RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS—Continued

Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
2-leg bridle sling 3-leg bridle sling

Dia. (inches) Constr. 30° 1 45° 60° 1 30° 1 45° 60° 1
(60°) 2 angle (30°) 2 (60°) 2 angle (30°) 2
⁄ ...................................
58 7×7×19 ....................................................... 5.0 4.1 2.9 7.5 6.1 4.3
⁄ ...................................
34 7×7×19 ....................................................... 7.0 5.7 4.1 10.0 8.6 6.1
⁄ ...................................
78 7×7×19 ....................................................... 9.3 7.6 5.4 14.0 11.0 8.1
1 .................................... 7×7×19 ....................................................... 12.0 9.7 6.9 18.0 14.0 10.0
11⁄8 ................................. 7×7×19 ....................................................... 14.0 12.0 8.2 21.0 17.0 12.0
11⁄4 ................................. 7×7×19 ....................................................... 17.0 14.0 9.9 26.0 21.0 15.0
3⁄4 ................................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.0 5.7
7⁄8 ................................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 8.7 7.1 5.0 13.0 11.0 7.5
1 .................................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 11.0 9.0 6.4 17.0 13.0 9.6
11⁄8 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 13.0 11.0 7.7 20.0 16.0 11.0
11⁄4 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 16.0 13.0 9.2 24.0 20.0 14.0
15⁄16 ............................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 17.0 14.0 10.0 26.0 21.0 15.0
13⁄8 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 19.0 15.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 16.0
11⁄2 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 22.0 18.0 13.0 33.0 27.0 19.0
1 Vertical angles.

8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

(inches)
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part
⁄
3 32 6×7 0.74 0.55 0.60 0.45 0.42 0.32 1.1 0.83 0.90 0.68 0.64 0.48
18 ⁄ 6×7 1.3 0.98 1.1 0.80 0.76 0.57 2.0 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.1 0.85
⁄
3 16 6×7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.7 2.5 1.9
⁄
3 32 7×7 0.89 0.67 0.72 0.55 0.51 0.39 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.82 0.77 0.58
18 ⁄ 7×7 1.6 1.2 1.3 1.0 0.95 0.71 2.5 1.8 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.1
⁄
3 16 7×7 3.6 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.1 1.5 5.4 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.1 2.3
⁄
3 16 6×19 3.0 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.5 3.4 3.7 2.8 2.6 1.9
14 ⁄ 6×19 5.3 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.1 2.3 8.0 6.0 6.5 4.9 4.6 3.4
⁄
5 16 6×19 8.3 6.2 6.7 5.0 4.8 3.6 12.0 9.3 10.0 7.6 7.1 5.4
38 ⁄ 6×19 12.0 8.9 9.7 7.2 6.8 5.1 18.0 13.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 7.7
⁄
7 16 6×19 16.0 12.0 13.0 9.8 9.3 6.9 24.0 18.0 20.0 15.0 14.0 10.0
12 ⁄ 6×19 21.0 15.0 17.0 13.0 12.0 9.0 31.0 23.0 25.0 19.0 18.0 13.0
⁄
9 16 6×19 26.0 20.0 21.0 16.0 15.0 11.0 39.0 29.0 32.0 24.0 23.0 17.0
58 ⁄ 6×19 32.0 24.0 26.0 20.0 19.0 14.0 48.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 28.0 21.0
34 ⁄ 6×19 46.0 35.0 38.0 28.0 27.0 20.0 69.0 52.0 56.0 42.0 40.0 30.0
78 ⁄ 6×19 62.0 47.0 51.0 38.0 36.0 27.0 94.0 70.0 76.0 57.0 54.0 40.0
1 6×19 81.0 61.0 66.0 50.0 47.0 35.0 22.0 91.0 99.0 74.0 70.0 53.0
1 Vertical angles.
TABLE H–11—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND TABLE H–11—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND
LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED—Continued
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)

14 ⁄ 7×19 0.85 0.64 1.7 ⁄

7 16 7×19 2.6 1.9 5.2
5 16⁄ 7×19 1.3 1.0 2.6 12 ⁄ 7×19 3.3 2.5 6.7
38 ⁄ 7×19 1.9 1.4 3.8 ⁄
9 16 7×19 4.2 3.1 8.4
220
TABLE H–11—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND TABLE H–13—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND
LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED—Continued LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINT
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)

14 ⁄ 2 6×19 0.92 0.69 1.8
⁄58 7×19 5.2 3.9 10.00
38 ⁄ 2 6×19 2.0 1.5 4.1
⁄34 7×19 7.4 5.6 15.0
7⁄8
1⁄2 2 6×19 3.6 2.7 7.2
7×19 10.0 7.5 20.0
5⁄8 2 6×19 5.6 4.2 11.0
1 7×19 13.0 9.7 26.0 3⁄4 2 6×19 8.0 6.0 16.0
1 1⁄8 7×19 16.0 12.0 32.0 7⁄8 2 6×19 11.0 8.1 21.0
1 1⁄4 7×37 18.0 14.0 37.0 2 6×19
1 14.0 10.0 28.0
1 3⁄8 7×37 22.0 16.0 44.0 1 ⁄8
1 2 6×19 18.0 13.0 35.0
1 1⁄2 7×37 26.0 19.0 52.0 1 ⁄4
1 2 6×37 21.0 15.0 41.0
1 3⁄8 2 6×37 25.0 19.0 50.0
1 Thesevalues only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater
1 1⁄2 2 6×37 29.0 22.0 59.0
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent.
d=Diameter of rope body. 1 These
values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent.
TABLE H–12—RATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE d=Diameter of rope body.
2 IWRC.
LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED
7×6×7 and 7×6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade TABLE H–14—RATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE
Rope
7×7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINT
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade
Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel
Grade Rope
Dia. Vertical
Constr. Vertical Choker Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
(inches) basket 1
Dia. Vertical
38 ⁄ 7×6×7 1.3 0.95 2.5 Constr. Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1
⁄
9 16 7×6×7 2.8 2.1 5.6
58 ⁄ 7×6×7 3.8 2.8 7.6 14 ⁄ 7×7×7 0.83 0.62 1.6
38 ⁄ 7×7×7 1.6 1.2 3.2 38 ⁄ 7×7×7 1.8 1.3 3.5
⁄
9 16 7×7×7 3.5 2.6 6.9 12 ⁄ 7×7×7 3.0 2.3 6.1
5⁄8 7×7×7 4.5 3.4 9.1
58 ⁄ 7×7×7 4.5 3.4 9.0
3⁄4 7×7×7 6.3 4.7 12.0
58 ⁄ 7×6×19 3.9 3.0 7.9 5⁄8 7×7×19 4.7 3.5 9.5
34 ⁄ 7×6×19 5.1 3.8 10.0 3⁄4 7×7×19 6.7 5.0 13.0
⁄
15 16 7×6×19 7.9 5.9 16.0 7⁄8 7×7×19 8.9 6.6 18.0
1 1⁄8 7×6×19 11.0 8.4 22.0 1 7×7×19 11.0 8.5 22.0
1 ⁄16
5 7×6×19 15.0 11.0 30.0 1 1⁄8 7×7×19 14.0 10.0 28.0
1 1⁄2 7×6×19 19.0 14.0 39.0 1 ⁄4
1 7×7×19 17.0 12.0 33.0
111⁄16 7×6×19 24.0 18.0 49.0 3⁄4 2 7×6×19 6.2 4.7 12.0
7⁄8 2 7×6×19 8.3 6.2 16.0
1 7⁄8 7×6×19 30.0 22.0 60.0
1 2 7×6×19 10.0 7.9 21.0
2 1⁄4 7×6×19 42.0 31.0 84.0
1 ⁄8
1 2 7×6×19 13.0 9.7 26.0
2 5⁄8 7×6×19 56.0 42.0 112.0 2 7×6×19
1 1⁄4 16.0 12.0 31.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater 1 3⁄8 2 7×6×19 18.0 14.0 37.0
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body is 1 1⁄2 2 7×6×19 22.0 16.0 43.0
bent. d=Diameter of cable body.
1 These values only apply when the D/d value is 5 or great-
er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body
is bent. d=Diameter of cable body.
2 IWRC.
221
VerDate Aug<31>2005
TABLE H–15—MANILA ROPE SLINGS
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
14:00 Jul 31, 2007

Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=5)
Rope di- Nominal Minimum Eye and eye sling Endless sling
§ 1926.251
ameter weight per breaking
nominal in 100 ft. in strength Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal
inches pounds in pounds Vertical Choker Vertical Choker
Jkt 211115
hitch hitch hitch hitch
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 7.5 2,650 550 250 1,100 900 750 550 950 500 1,900 1,700 1,400 950
9 16
⁄ 10.4 3,450 700 350 1,400 1,200 1,000 700 1,200 600 2,500 2,200 1,800 1,200
58
⁄ 13.3 4,400 900 450 1,800 1,500 1,200 900 1,600 800 3,200 2,700 2,200 1,600
PO 00000
3 ⁄4 16.7 5,400 1,100 550 2,200 1,900 1,500 1,100 2,000 950 3,900 3,400 2,800 2,000
13⁄16 19.5 6,500 1,300 650 2,600 2,300 1,800 1,300 2,300 1,200 4,700 4,100 3,300 2,300
7 ⁄8 22.5 7,700 1,500 750 3,100 2,700 2,200 1,500 2,800 1,400 5,600 4,800 3,900 2,800
1 27.0 9,000 1,800 900 3,600 3,100 2,600 1,800 3,200 1,600 6,500 5,600 4,600 3,200
1
1 ⁄16 31.3 10,500 2,100 1,100 4,200 3,600 3,000 2,100 3,800 1,900 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800
Frm 00232
11⁄8 36.0 12,000 2,400 1,200 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 4,300 2,200 8,600 7,500 6,100 4,300
11⁄4 41.7 13,500 2,700 1,400 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700 4,900 2,400 9,700 8,400 6,900 4,900
15⁄16 47.9 15,000 3,000 1,500 6,000 5,200 4,300 3,000 5,400 2,700 11,000 9,400 7,700 5,400
11⁄2 59.9 18,500 3,700 1,850 7,400 6,400 5,200 3,700 6,700 3,300 13,500 11,500 9,400 6,700
15⁄8 74.6 22,500 4,500 2,300 9,000 7,800 6,400 4,500 8,100 4,100 16,000 14,000 11,500 8,000
Fmt 8010
13⁄4 89.3 26,500 5,300 2,700 10,500 9,200 7,500 5,300 9,500 4,800 19,000 16,500 13,500 9,500
2 107.5 31,000 6,200 3,100 12,500 10,500 8,800 6,200 11,000 5,600 22,500 19,500 16,000 11,000
222
21⁄3 125.0 36,000 7,200 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,200 13,000 6,500 26,000 22,500 18,500 13,000
21⁄4 146.0 41,000 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,000 11,500 8,200 15,000 7,400 29,500 25,500 21,000 15,000
21⁄2 166.7 46.500 9,300 4,700 18,500 16,000 13,000 9,300 16,500 8,400 33,500 29,000 23,500 16,500
Sfmt 8002
25⁄8 190.8 52,000 10,500 5,200 21,000 18,000 14,500 10,500 18,500 9,500 37,500 32,500 26,500 18,500
TABLE H–16—NYLON ROPE SLINGS


Y:\SGML\211115.XXX
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 6.5 6,080 700 350 1,400 1,200 950 700 1,200 600 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200
9 16
⁄ 8.3 7,600 850 400 1,700 1,500 1,200 850 1,500 750 3,000 2,600 2,200 1,500
211115
58 ⁄ 10.5 9,880 1,100 550 2,200 1,900 1,600 1,100 2,000 1,000 4,000 3,400 2,800 2,000
34 ⁄ 14.5 13,490 1,500 750 3,000 2,600 2,100 1,500 2,700 1,400 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700
13 16
⁄ 17.0 16,150 1,800 900 3,600 3,100 2,600 1,800 3,200 1,600 6,400 5,600 4,600 3,200
78
⁄ 20.0 19,000 2,100 1,100 4,200 3,700 3,000 2,100 3,800 1,900 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800
1 26.0 23,750 2,600 1,300 5,300 4,600 3,700 2,600 4,800 2,400 9,500 8,200 6,700 4,800
29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
11⁄16 29.0 27,360 3,000 1,500 6,100 5,300 4,300 3,000 5,500 2,700 11,000 9,500 7,700 5,500
VerDate Aug<31>2005
11⁄8 34.0 31,350 3,500 1,700 7,000 6,000 5,000 3,500 6,300 3,100 12,500 11,000 8,900 6,300
11⁄4 40.0 35,625 4,000 2,000 7,900 6,900 5,600 4,000 7,100 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,100
14:00 Jul 31, 2007

15⁄16 45.0 40,850 4,500 2,300 9,100 7,900 6,400 4,500 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,000 12,000 8,200
11⁄2 55.0 50,350 5,600 2,800 11,000 9,700 7,900 5,600 10,000 5,000 20,000 17,500 14,000 10,000
15⁄8 68.0 61,750 6,900 3,400 13,500 12,000 9,700 6,900 12,500 6,200 24,500 21,500 17,500 12,500
13⁄4 83.0 74,100 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,500 11,500 8,200 15,000 7,400 29,500 27,500 21,000 15,000
2 95.0 87,400 9,700 4,900 19,500 17,000 13,500 9,700 17,500 8,700 35,000 30,500 24,500 17,500
Jkt 211115
21⁄8 109.0 100,700 11,000 5,600 22,500 19,500 16,000 11,000 20,000 10,000 40,500 35,000 28,500 20,000
1
2 ⁄4 129.0 118,750 13,000 6,600 26,500 23,000 18,500 13,000 24,000 12,000 47,500 41,000 33,500 24,000
21⁄2 149.0 133,000 15,000 7,400 29,500 25,500 21,000 15,000 26,500 13,500 53,000 46,000 37,500 26,500
25⁄8 168.0 153,900 17,100 8,600 34,000 29,500 24,000 17,000 31,000 15,500 61,500 53,500 43,500 31,000
PO 00000
TABLE H–17—POLYESTER ROPE SLINGS
Frm 00233
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
Fmt 8010
12 ⁄ 8.0 6,080 700 350 1,400 1,200 950 700 1,200 600 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200
223
9 16
⁄ 10.2 7,600 850 400 1,700 1,500 1,200 850 1,500 750 3,000 2,600 2,200 1,500
58 ⁄ 13.0 9,500 1,100 550 2,100 1,800 1,500 1,100 1,900 950 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900
34 ⁄ 17.5 11,875 1,300 650 2,600 2,300 1,900 1,300 2,400 1,200 4,800 4,100 3,400 2,400
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor
Sfmt 8002
13 16
⁄ 21.0 14,725 1,600 800 3,300 2,800 2,300 1,600 2,900 1,500 5,900 5,100 4,200 2,900
78 ⁄ 25.0 17,100 1,900 950 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900 3,400 1,700 6,800 5,900 4,800 3,400
1 30.5 20,900 2,300 1,200 4,600 4,000 3,300 2,300 4,200 2,100 8,400 7,200 5,900 4,200
1 16
1 ⁄ 34.5 24,225 2,700 1,300 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700 4,800 2,400 9,700 8,400 6,900 4,800
11⁄8 40.0 28,025 3,100 1,600 6,200 5,400 4,400 3,100 5,600 2,800 11,000 9,700 7,900 5,600
11⁄4 46.3 31,540 3,500 1,800 7,000 6,100 5,000 3,500 6,300 3,200 12,500 11,000 8,900 6,300
15⁄16 52.5 35,625 4,000 2,000 7,900 6,900 5,600 4,000 7,100 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,100
11⁄2 66.8 44,460 4,900 2,500 9,900 8,600 7,000 4,900 8,900 4,400 18,000 15,500 12,500 8,900
15⁄8 82.0 54,150 6,000 3,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000 11,000 5,400 21,500 19,000 15,500 11,000
Y:\SGML\211115.XXX
13⁄4 98.0 64,410 7,200 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,200 13,000 6,400 26,000 22,500 18,000 13,000
2 118.0 76,000 8,400 4,200 17,000 14,500 12,000 8,400 15,000 7,600 30,500 26,500 21,500 15,000
21⁄8 135.0 87,400 9,700 4,900 19,500 17,000 13,500 9,700 17,500 8,700 35,000 30,500 24,500 17,500
21⁄4 157.0 101,650 11,500 5,700 22,500 19,500 16,000 11,500 20,500 10,000 40,500 35,000 29,000 20,500
211115
21⁄2 181.0 115,900 13,000 6,400 26,000 22,500 18,000 13,000 23,000 11,500 46,500 40,000 33,000 23,000
25⁄8 205.0 130,150 14,500 7,200 29,000 25,000 20,500 14,500 26,000 13,000 52,000 45,000 37,000 26,000
§ 1926.251
VerDate Aug<31>2005
TABLE H–18—POLYPROPYLENE ROPE SLINGS
14:00 Jul 31, 2007

Rope di- Nominal Minimum
§ 1926.251
Eye and eye sling Endless sling
Jkt 211115
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 4.7 3,990 650 350 1,300 1,200 950 650 1,200 600 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200
9 16
⁄ 6.1 4,845 800 400 1,600 1,400 1,100 800 1,500 750 2,900 2,500 2,100 1,500
PO 00000
58 ⁄ 7.5 5,890 1,000 500 2,000 1,700 1,400 1,000 1,800 900 3,500 3,100 2,500 1,800
34 ⁄ 10.7 8,075 1,300 700 2,700 2,300 1,900 1,300 2,400 1,200 4,900 4,200 3,400 2,400
13 16
⁄ 12.7 9,405 1,600 800 3,100 2,700 2,200 1,600 2,800 1,400 5,600 4,900 4,000 2,800
78 ⁄ 15.0 10,925 1,800 900 3,600 3,200 2,600 1,800 3,300 1,600 6,600 5,700 4,600 3,300
1 18.0 13,300 2,200 1,100 4,400 3,800 3,100 2,200 4,000 2,000 8,000 6,900 5,600 4,000
Frm 00234
1 16
1 ⁄ 20.4 15,200 2,500 1,300 5,100 4,400 3,600 2,500 4,600 2,300 9,100 7,900 6,500 4,600
11⁄8 23.7 17,385 2,900 1,500 5,800 5,000 4,100 2,900 5,200 2,600 10,500 9,000 7,400 5,200
11⁄4 27.0 19,950 3,300 1,700 6,700 5,800 4,700 3,300 6,000 3,000 12,000 10,500 8,500 6,000
15⁄16 30.5 22,325 3,700 1,900 7,400 6,400 5,300 3,700 6,700 3,400 13,500 11,500 9,500 6,700
11⁄2 38.5 28,215 4,700 2,400 9,400 8,100 6,700 4,700 8,500 4,200 17,000 14,500 12,000 8,500
Fmt 8010
15⁄8 47.5 34,200 5,700 2,900 11,500 9,900 8,100 5,700 10,500 5,100 20,500 18,000 14,500 10,500
224
13⁄4 57.0 40,850 6,800 3,400 13,500 12,000 9,600 6,800 12,500 6,100 24,500 21,000 17,500 12,500
2 69.0 49,400 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,500 11,500 8,200 15,000 7,400 29,500 25,500 21,000 15,000
21⁄8 80.0 57,950 9,700 4,800 19,500 16,500 13,500 9,700 17,500 8,700 35,000 30,100 24,500 17,500
Sfmt 8002
21⁄4 92.0 65,550 11,000 5,500 22,000 19,000 15,500 11,000 19,500 9,900 39,500 34,000 28,000 19,500
21⁄2 107.0 76,000 12,500 6,300 25,500 22,000 18,000 12,500 23,000 11,500 45,500 39,500 32,500 23,000
25⁄8 120.0 85,500 14,500 7,100 28,500 24,500 20,000 14,500 25,500 13,000 51,500 44,500 36,500 25,500
Y:\SGML\211115.XXX
211115
29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
TABLE H–19—SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR (d) Disposal of waste material or de-
SHACKLES bris by burning shall comply with local
[In tons of 2,000 pounds] fire regulations.
(e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and
Pin diame- Safe work-
Material size (inches ter (inches) ing load flammable liquids shall be kept in fire
resistant covered containers until re-
⁄ ...................................................
12 58⁄ 1.4
⁄ ...................................................
58 34⁄ 2.2
moved from worksite.
⁄ ...................................................
34 78⁄ 3.2
7⁄8 ...................................................
1 .....................................................
1
1 1⁄8
4.3
5.6
Subpart I—Tools—Hand and
11⁄8 ................................................. 1 ⁄4
1 6.7 Power
11⁄4 ................................................. 1 3⁄8 8.2
13⁄8 ................................................. 1 1⁄2 10.0
11⁄2 ................................................. 1 5⁄8 11.9 AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
13⁄4 ................................................. 2 16.2 pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
2 ..................................................... 2 1⁄4 21.2 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
TABLE H–20—NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR
BOLT WIRE ROPE CLIPS part 1911. Section 1926.307 also issued under 5
Number of clips U.S.C. 553.
Minimum
Improved plow steel, rope spacing
diameter (inches) Drop Other (inches) § 1926.300 General requirements.
forged material
(a) Condition of tools. All hand and
⁄ .....................................
12 3 4 3
⁄ .....................................
58 3 4 3 3⁄4
power tools and similar equipment,
⁄ .....................................
34 4 5 4 ⁄2
1 whether furnished by the employer or
7⁄8 ..................................... 4 5 5 1⁄4 the employee, shall be maintained in a
1 ....................................... 5 6 6 safe condition.
11⁄8 ................................... 6 6 6 3⁄4
11⁄4 ................................... 6 7 7 1⁄2 (b) Guarding. (1) When power operated
13⁄8 ................................... 7 7 8 1⁄4 tools are designed to accommodate
11⁄2 ................................... 7 8 9 guards, they shall be equipped with
such guards when in use.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993] sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels,
chains, or other reciprocating, rotating
§ 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. or moving parts of equipment shall be
(a) Whenever materials are dropped guarded if such parts are exposed to
more than 20 feet to any point lying contact by employees or otherwise cre-
outside the exterior walls of the build- ate a hazard. Guarding shall meet the
ing, an enclosed chute of wood, or requirements as set forth in American
equivalent material, shall be used. For National Standards Institute, B15.1–
the purpose of this paragraph, an en- 1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechan-
closed chute is a slide, closed in on all ical Power-Transmission Apparatus.
sides, through which material is moved (3) Types of guarding. One or more
from a high place to a lower one. methods of machine guarding shall be
(b) When debris is dropped through provided to protect the operator and
holes in the floor without the use of other employees in the machine area
chutes, the area onto which the mate- from hazards such as those created by
rial is dropped shall be completely en- point of operation, ingoing nip points,
closed with barricades not less than 42 rotating parts, flying chips and sparks.
inches high and not less than 6 feet Examples of guarding methods are—
back from the projected edge of the barrier guards, two-hand tripping de-
opening above. Signs warning of the vices, electronic safety devices, etc.
hazard of falling materials shall be (4) Point of operation guarding. (i)
posted at each level. Removal shall not Point of operation is the area on a ma-
be permitted in this lower area until chine where work is actually performed
debris handling ceases above. upon the material being processed.
(c) All scrap lumber, waste material, (ii) The point of operation of ma-
and rubbish shall be removed from the chines whose operation exposes an em-
immediate work area as the work pro- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
gresses. guarding device shall be in conformity
225
with any appropriate standards there-

for, or, in the absence of applicable spe-
cific standards, shall be so designed
and constructed as to prevent the oper-
ator from having any part of his body
in the danger zone during the operating
cycle.
(iii) Special handtools for placing and Figure I–1 Figure I–2
removing material shall be such as to Correct
permit easy handling of material with- Showing adjustable tongue giving required
out the operator placing a hand in the angle protection for all sizes of wheel used.
danger zone. Such tools shall not be in
lieu of other guarding required by this
section, but can only be used to supple-
ment protection provided.
(iv) The following are some of the
machines which usually require point
of operation guarding:
(a) Guillotine cutters. Figure I–3 Figure I–4
(b) Shears. Correct
(c) Alligator shears. Showing movable guard with opening small
(d) Power presses. enough to give required protection for the
smallest size wheel used.
(e) Milling machines.
(f) Power saws.
(g) Jointers.
(h) Portable power tools.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the pe-
riphery of the blades of a fan is less
than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or Figure I–5 Figure I–6
working level, the blades shall be
Incorrect
guarded. The guard shall have openings
Showing movable guard with size of opening
no larger than 1/2 inch (1.27 cm). correct for full size wheel but too large for
(6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- smaller wheel.
chines designed for a fixed location
(8) Bench and floor stands. The angu-
shall be securely anchored to prevent
lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
walking or moving.
riphery and sides for safety guards used
(7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin- on machines known as bench and floor
ery—exposure adjustment. Safety guards stands should not exceed 90° or one-
of the types described in paragraphs (b) fourth of the periphery. This exposure
(8) and (9) of this section, where the op- shall begin at a point not more than 65°
erator stands in front of the opening, above the horizontal plane of the wheel
shall be constructed so that the periph- spindle. (See Figures I–7 and I–8 and
eral protecting member can be ad- paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) ER07MR96.003</GPH>
justed to the constantly decreasing di-

ameter of the wheel. The maximum an-
gular exposure above the horizontal
plane of the wheel spindle as specified
in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this sec-
ER07MR96.002</GPH>
tion shall never be exceeded, and the

distance between the wheel periphery
and the adjustable tongue or the end of
the peripheral member at the top shall Figure I–7 Figure I–8
never exceed 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm). (See
ER07MR96.001</GPH>
Wherever the nature of the work requires

Figures I–1 through I–6.) contact with the wheel below the hori-
zontal plane of the spindle, the exposure
226
ER07MR96.000</GPH>
shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I–9 and I– accomplished by a single motion of the
10.) same finger or fingers that turn it on.
(3) All other hand-held powered tools,
such as circular saws, chain saws, and
percussion tools without positive ac-
cessory holding means, shall be
equipped with a constant pressure
switch that will shut off the power
when the pressure is released.
(4) The requirements of this para-
Figure I–9 Figure I–10 graph shall become effective on July
15, 1972.
(9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum (5) Exception: This paragraph does
angular exposure of the grinding wheel not apply to concrete vibrators, con-
periphery and sides for safety guards
crete breakers, powered tampers, jack
used on cylindrical grinding machines
hammers, rock drills, and similar hand
shall not exceed 180°. This exposure
operated power tools.
shall begin at a point not more than 65°
above the horizontal plane of the wheel [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
spindle. (See Figures I–11 and I–12 and 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993;
paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) 61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1926.301 Hand tools.

(a) Employers shall not issue or per-
mit the use of unsafe hand tools.
(b) Wrenches, including adjustable,
pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall
not be used when jaws are sprung to
the point that slippage occurs.
Figure I–11 Figure I–12 (c) Impact tools, such as drift pins,
(c) Personal protective equipment. Em- wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free
ployees using hand and power tools and of mushroomed heads.
exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, (d) The wooden handles of tools shall
abrasive, and splashing objects, or ex- be kept free of splinters or cracks and
posed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, shall be kept tight in the tool.
vapors, or gases shall be provided with
the particular personal protective § 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
equipment necessary to protect them (a) Electric power-operated tools. (1)
from the hazard. All personal protec- Electric power operated tools shall ei-
tive equipment shall meet the require- ther be of the approved double-insu-
ments and be maintained according to lated type or grounded in accordance
subparts D and E of this part. with subpart K of this part.
(d) Switches. (1) All hand-held pow- (2) The use of electric cords for hoist-
ered platen sanders, grinders with ing or lowering tools shall not be per-
wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers, mitted.
planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, (b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneu-
shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with matic power tools shall be secured to
blade shanks one-fourth of an inch the hose or whip by some positive
wide or less may be equipped with only means to prevent the tool from becom-
a positive ‘‘on-off’’ control. ing accidentally disconnected.
(2) All hand-held powered drills, tap- (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be
pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, securely installed and maintained on
vertical, and angle grinders with pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to
wheels greater than 2 inches in diame- prevent attachments from being acci-
ter, disc sanders, belt sanders, recipro- dentally expelled.
cating saws, saber saws, and other (3) All pneumatically driven nailers,
similar operating powered tools shall staplers, and other similar equipment
be equipped with a momentary contact provided with automatic fastener feed,
ER07MR96.005</GPH>
‘‘on-off’’ control and may have a lock- which operate at more than 100 p.s.i.
on control provided that turnoff can be pressure at the tool shall have a safety
227
ER07MR96.004</GPH>
device on the muzzle to prevent the (d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid
tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the used in hydraulic powered tools shall
muzzle is in contact with the work sur- be fire-resistant fluids approved under
face. Schedule 30 of the U.S. Bureau of
(4) Compressed air shall not be used Mines, Department of the Interior, and
for cleaning purposes except where re- shall retain its operating characteris-
duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then tics at the most extreme temperatures
only with effective chip guarding and to which it will be exposed.
personal protective equipment which (2) The manufacturer’s safe operating
meets the requirements of subpart E of pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, fil-
this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does ters, and other fittings shall not be ex-
not apply for concrete form, mill scale ceeded.
and similar cleaning purposes. (e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only em-
(5) The manufacturer’s safe operating ployees who have been trained in the
pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters, operation of the particular tool in use
and other fittings shall not be exceed- shall be allowed to operate a powder-
ed, actuated tool.
(6) The use of hoses for hoisting or (2) The tool shall be tested each day
lowering tools shall not be permitted. before loading to see that safety de-
(7) All hoses exceeding 1⁄2-inch inside vices are in proper working condition.
diameter shall have a safety device at The method of testing shall be in ac-
the source of supply or branch line to cordance with the manufacturer’s rec-
reduce pressure in case of hose failure. ommended procedure.
(8) Airless spray guns of the type (3) Any tool found not in proper
which atomize paints and fluids at high working order, or that develops a de-
pressures (1,000 pounds or more per fect during use, shall be immediately
square inch) shall be equipped with removed from service and not used
automatic or visible manual safety de- until properly repaired.
vices which will prevent pulling of the (4) Personal protective equipment
trigger to prevent release of the paint shall be in accordance with subpart E
or fluid until the safety device is of this part.
manually released.
(5) Tools shall not be loaded until
(9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut just prior to the intended firing time.
which will prevent high pressure, high Neither loaded nor empty tools are to
velocity release, while the nozzle tip is
be pointed at any employees. Hands
removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which
shall be kept clear of the open barrel
will prevent the tip from coming into
end.
contact with the operator, or other
equivalent protection, shall be pro- (6) Loaded tools shall not be left un-
vided. attended.
(10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. (7) Fasteners shall not be driven into
The blast cleaning nozzles shall be very hard or brittle materials includ-
equipped with an operating valve which ing, but not limited to, cast iron,
must be held open manually. A support glazed tile, surface-hardened steel,
shall be provided on which the nozzle glass block, live rock, face brick, or
may be mounted when it is not in use. hollow tile.
(c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel pow- (8) Driving into materials easily pen-
ered tools shall be stopped while being etrated shall be avoided unless such
refueled, serviced, or maintained, and materials are backed by a substance
fuel shall be transported, handled, and that will prevent the pin or fastener
stored in accordance with subpart F of from passing completely through and
this part. creating a flying missile hazard on the
(2) When fuel powered tools are used other side.
in enclosed spaces, the applicable re- (9) No fastener shall be driven into a
quirements for concentrations of toxic spalled area caused by an unsatisfac-
gases and use of personal protective tory fastening.
equipment, as outlined in subparts D (10) Tools shall not be used in an ex-
and E of this part, shall apply. plosive or flammable atmosphere.
228
(11) All tools shall be used with the shall be strong enough to withstand
correct shield, guard, or attachment the effect of a bursting wheel.
recommended by the manufacturer. (2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders
(12) Powder-actuated tools used by shall be provided with work rests
employees shall meet all other applica- which are rigidly supported and readily
ble requirements of American National adjustable. Such work rests shall be
Standards Institute, A10.3–1970, Safety kept at a distance not to exceed one-
Requirements for Explosive-Actuated eighth inch from the surface of the
Fastening Tools. wheel.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Cup type wheels used for external
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] grinding shall be protected by either a
revolving cup guard or a band type
§ 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. guard in accordance with the provi-
(a) Power. All grinding machines sions of the American National Stand-
shall be supplied with sufficient power ards Institute, B7.1–1970 Safety Code
to maintain the spindle speed at safe for the Use, Care, and Protection of Ab-
levels under all conditions of normal rasive Wheels. All other portable abra-
operation. sive wheels used for external grinding,
(b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines shall be provided with safety guards
shall be equipped with safety guards in (protection hoods) meeting the require-
conformance with the requirements of ments of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec-
American National Standards Insti- tion, except as follows:
tute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the Use, (i) When the work location makes it
Care and Protection of Abrasive impossible, a wheel equipped with safe-
Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this sec- ty flanges, as described in paragraph
tion. (c)(6) of this section, shall be used;
(2) Guard design. The safety guard (ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in
shall cover the spindle end, nut, and diameter which are securely mounted
flange projections. The safety guard on the end of a steel mandrel are used.
shall be mounted so as to maintain
(4) Portable abrasive wheels used for
proper alignment with the wheel, and
internal grinding shall be provided
the strength of the fastenings shall ex-
with safety flanges (protection flanges)
ceed the strength of the guard, except:
meeting the requirements of paragraph
(i) Safety guards on all operations
(c)(6) of this section, except as follows:
where the work provides a suitable
measure of protection to the operator, (i) When wheels 2 inches or less in di-
may be so constructed that the spindle ameter which are securely mounted on
end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; the end of a steel mandrel are used;
and where the nature of the work is (ii) If the wheel is entirely within the
such as to entirely cover the side of the work being ground while in use.
wheel, the side covers of the guard may (5) When safety guards are required,
be omitted; and they shall be so mounted as to main-
(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer tain proper alignment with the wheel,
flange may be exposed on machines de- and the guard and its fastenings shall
signed as portable saws. be of sufficient strength to retain frag-
(c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor ments of the wheel in case of acci-
stand and bench mounted abrasive dental breakage. The maximum angu-
wheels, used for external grinding, lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
shall be provided with safety guards riphery and sides shall not exceed 180°.
(protection hoods). The maximum an- (6) When safety flanges are required,
gular exposure of the grinding wheel they shall be used only with wheels de-
periphery and sides shall be not more signed to fit the flanges. Only safety
than 90°, except that when work re- flanges, of a type and design and prop-
quires contact with the wheel below erly assembled so as to ensure that the
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the pieces of the wheel will be retained in
angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. case of accidental breakage, shall be
In either case, the exposure shall begin used.
not more than 65° above the horizontal (7) All abrasive wheels shall be close-
plane of the spindle. Safety guards ly inspected and ring-tested before
229
mounting to ensure that they are free the feed rolls or other moving parts
from cracks or defects. covered or guarded so as to protect the
(8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on operator from hazardous points.
the spindle and shall not be forced on. (d) Guarding. All portable, power-
The spindle nut shall be tightened only driven circular saws shall be equipped
enough to hold the wheel in place. with guards above and below the base
(9) All employees using abrasive plate or shoe. The upper guard shall
wheels shall be protected by eye pro- cover the saw to the depth of the teeth,
tection equipment in accordance with except for the minimum arc required
the requirements of subpart E of this to permit the base to be tilted for bevel
part, except when adequate eye protec- cuts. The lower guard shall cover the
tion is afforded by eye shields which saw to the depth of the teeth, except
are permanently attached to the bench for the minimum arc required to allow
or floor stand. proper retraction and contact with the
(d) Other requirements. All abrasive work. When the tool is withdrawn from
wheels and tools used by employees the work, the lower guard shall auto-
shall meet other applicable require- matically and instantly return to the
ments of American National Standards covering position.
Institute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the (e) Personal protective equipment. All
Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive personal protective equipment pro-
Wheels. vided for use shall conform to subpart
(e) Work rests. On offhand grinding E of this part.
machines, work rests shall be used to (f) Other requirements. All wood-
support the work. They shall be of working tools and machinery shall
rigid construction and designed to be meet other applicable requirements of
adjustable to compensate for wheel American National Standards Insti-
wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted tute, 01.1–1961, Safety Code for Wood-
closely to the wheel with a maximum working Machinery.
opening of 1⁄8 inch (0.3175 cm) to pre- (g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood
vent the work from being jammed be- shall completely enclose the upper por-
tween the wheel and the rest, which tion of the blade down to a point that
may cause wheel breakage. The work will include the end of the saw arbor.
rest shall be securely clamped after The upper hood shall be constructed in
each adjustment. The adjustment shall such a manner and of such material
not be made with the wheel in motion. that it will protect the operator from
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc.,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] and will deflect sawdust away from the
operator. The sides of the lower ex-
§ 1926.304 Woodworking tools. posed portion of the blade shall be
(a) Disconnect switches. All fixed guarded to the full diameter of the
power driven woodworking tools shall blade by a device that will automati-
be provided with a disconnect switch cally adjust itself to the thickness of
that can either be locked or tagged in the stock and remain in contact with
the off position. stock being cut to give maximum pro-
(b) Speeds. The operating speed shall tection possible for the operation being
be etched or otherwise permanently performed.
marked on all circular saws over 20 (h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1)
inches in diameter or operating at over Each circular crosscut table saw shall
10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any be guarded by a hood which shall meet
saw so marked shall not be operated at all the requirements of paragraph (i)(1)
a speed other than that marked on the of this section for hoods for circular
blade. When a marked saw is reten- ripsaws.
sioned for a different speed, the mark- (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular
ing shall be corrected to show the new hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a
speed. hood which shall completely enclose
(c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding de- that portion of the saw above the table
vices shall be installed on machines and that portion of the saw above the
whenever the nature of the work will material being cut. The hood and
permit. Feeder attachments shall have mounting shall be arranged so that the
230
hood will automatically adjust itself to (b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe-
the thickness of and remain in contact cial work, when sent out and when re-
with the material being cut but it shall turned,
not offer any considerable resistance to (c) For a jack subjected to abnormal
insertion of material to saw or to pas- load or shock, immediately before and
sage of the material being sawed. The immediately thereafter.
hood shall be made of adequate (v) Repair or replacement parts shall
strength to resist blows and strains in- be examined for possible defects.
cidental to reasonable operation, ad- (vi) Jacks which are out of order
justing, and handling, and shall be so shall be tagged accordingly, and shall
designed as to protect the operator not be used until repairs are made.
from flying splinters and broken saw [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
teeth. It shall be made of material that 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
is soft enough so that it will be un- 58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993]
likely to cause tooth breakage. The
hood shall be so mounted as to insure § 1926.306 Air receivers.
that its operation will be positive, reli- (a) General requirements—(1) Applica-
able, and in true alignment with the tion. This section applies to compressed
saw; and the mounting shall be ade- air receivers, and other equipment used
quate in strength to resist any reason- in providing and utilizing compressed
able side thrust or other force tending air for performing operations such as
to throw it out of line. cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
ping. On the other hand, however, this
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; section does not deal with the special
61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996] problems created by using compressed
air to convey materials nor the prob-
§ 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, lems created when men work in com-
screw, and hydraulic. pressed air as in tunnels and caissons.
(a) General requirements. (1) The man- This section is not intended to apply to
ufacturer’s rated capacity shall be leg- compressed air machinery and equip-
ibly marked on all jacks and shall not ment used on transportation vehicles
be exceeded. such as steam railroad cars, electric
(2) All jacks shall have a positive railway cars, and automotive equip-
stop to prevent overtravel. ment.
(2) New and existing equipment. (i) All
(b) [Reserved]
new air receivers installed after the ef-
(c) Blocking. When it is necessary to fective date of these regulations shall
provide a firm foundation, the base of be constructed in accordance with the
the jack shall be blocked or cribbed. 1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and
Where there is a possibility of slippage Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII.
of the metal cap of the jack, a wood (ii) All safety valves used shall be
block shall be placed between the cap constructed, installed, and maintained
and the load. in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler
(d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i) and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII
After the load has been raised, it shall Edition 1968.
be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise se- (b) Installation and equipment require-
cured at once. ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers
(ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez- shall be so installed that all drains,
ing temperatures shall be supplied with handholes, and manholes therein are
an adequate antifreeze liquid. easily accessible. Under no cir-
(iii) All jacks shall be properly lubri- cumstances shall an air receiver be
cated at regular intervals. buried underground or located in an in-
(iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly inaccessible place.
spected at times which depend upon (2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and
the service conditions. Inspections valve shall be installed at the lowest
shall be not less frequent than the fol- point of every air receiver to provide
lowing: for the removal of accumulated oil and
(a) For constant or intermittent use water. Adequate automatic traps may
at one locality, once every 6 months, be installed in addition to drain valves.
231
The drain valve on the air receiver of nip-point belt and pulley guards are
shall be opened and the receiver com- required, provided the guard shall ex-
pletely drained frequently and at such tend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond
intervals as to prevent the accumula- the rim of the pulley on the in-running
tion of excessive amounts of liquid in and off-running sides of the belt and at
the receiver. least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- rim and face of the pulley in all other
ceiver shall be equipped with an indi- directions.
cating pressure gage (so located as to (4) This section covers the principal
be readily visible) and with one or features with which power trans-
more spring-loaded safety valves. The mission safeguards shall comply.
total relieving capacity of such safety (b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels.
valves shall be such as to prevent pres- Flywheels located so that any part is 7
sure in the receiver from exceeding the
feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or
maximum allowable working pressure
platform shall be guarded in accord-
of the receiver by more than 10 per-
ance with the requirements of this sub-
cent.
paragraph:
(ii) No valve of any type shall be
placed between the air receiver and its (i) With an enclosure of sheet, per-
safety valve or valves. forated, or expanded metal, or woven
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety wire;
valves, indicating devices and control- (ii) With guard rails placed not less
ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than
cated, and installed so that they can- 20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When
not be readily rendered inoperative by flywheel extends into pit or is within 12
any means, including the elements. inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested toeboard shall also be provided;
frequently and at regular intervals to (iii) When the upper rim of flywheel
determine whether they are in good op- protrudes through a working floor, it
erating condition. shall be entirely enclosed or sur-
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] rounded by a guardrail and toeboard.
(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5
§ 1926.307 Mechanical power-trans- feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where
mission apparatus. the preceding methods cannot be ap-
(a) General requirements. (1) This sec- plied, the following may be used: A
tion covers all types and shapes of disk attached to the flywheel in such
power-transmission belts, except the manner as to cover the spokes of the
following when operating at two hun- wheel on the exposed side and present a
dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or smooth surface and edge, at the same
less: (i) Flat belts 1 inch (2.54 cm) or time providing means for periodic in-
less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches spection. An open space, not exceeding
(5.08 cm) or less in width which are free 4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left
from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii) between the outside edge of the disk
round belts 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) or less in and the rim of the wheel if desired, to
diameter; and (iv) single strand V- facilitate turning the wheel over.
belts, the width of which is thirteen Where a disk is used, the keys or other
thirty-seconds (13⁄32) inch or less. dangerous projections not covered by
(2) Vertical and inclined belts (para- disk shall be cut off or covered. This
graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if subdivision does not apply to flywheels
not more than 21⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) wide with solid web centers.
and running at a speed of less than one (v) Adjustable guard to be used for
thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if starting engine or for running adjust-
free from metal lacings or fastenings ment may be provided at the flywheel
may be guarded with a nip-point belt of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for
and pulley guard. jack bar will be permitted.
(3) For the Textile Industry, because (vi) Wherever flywheels are above
of the presence of excessive deposits of working areas, guards shall be in-
lint, which constitute a serious fire stalled having sufficient strength to
hazard, the sides and face sections only hold the weight of the flywheel in the
232
event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail- unless guarded by nonrotating caps or

ure. safety sleeves.
(2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up
and connecting rods, when exposed to or covered.
contact, shall be guarded in accordance (5) Power-transmission apparatus lo-
with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec- cated in basements. All mechanical
tion, or by a guardrail as described in power transmission apparatus located
paragraph (o)(5) of this section. in basements, towers, and rooms used
(3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. exclusively for power transmission
Tail rods or extension piston rods shall equipment shall be guarded in accord-
be guarded in accordance with para- ance with this section, except that the
graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by requirements for safeguarding belts,
a guardrail on sides and end, with a pulleys, and shafting need not be com-
clearance of not less than 15 (38.1 cm) plied with when the following require-
nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when ments are met:
rod is fully extended. (i) The basement, tower, or room oc-
(c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each cupied by transmission equipment is
continuous line of shafting shall be se- locked against unauthorized entrance.
cured in position against excessive end- (ii) The vertical clearance in passage-
ways between the floor and power
wise movement.
transmission beams, ceiling, or any
(ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par-
other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in.
ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be
(1.672 m).
securely held in position against end- (iii) The intensity of illumination
wise thrust. conforms to the requirements of ANSI
(2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All A11.1–1965 (R–1970).
exposed parts of horizontal shafting 7 (iv) [Reserved]
feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (v) The route followed by the oiler is
working platform, excepting runways protected in such manner as to prevent
used exclusively for oiling, or running accident.
adjustments, shall be protected by a (d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any
stationary casing enclosing shafting parts of which are 7 feet (2.128 m) or
completely or by a trough enclosing less from the floor or working plat-
sides and top or sides and bottom of form, shall be guarded in accordance
shafting as location requires. with the standards specified in para-
(ii) Shafting under bench machines graphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pul-
shall be enclosed by a stationary cas- leys serving as balance wheels (e.g.,
ing, or by a trough at sides and top or punch presses) on which the point of
sides and bottom, as location requires. contact between belt and pulley is
The sides of the trough shall come more than 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) from the
within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of floor or platform may be guarded with
the underside of table, or if shafting is a disk covering the spokes.
located near floor within 6 inches (15.24 (2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the
cm) of floor. In every case the sides of distance to the nearest fixed pulley,
trough shall extend at least 2 inches clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of
(5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protu- the belt used, a guide shall be provided
berance. to prevent the belt from leaving the
(3) Guarding vertical and inclined pulley on the side where insufficient
shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting clearance exists.
7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (ii) [Reserved]
working platform, excepting mainte- (3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with
nance runways, shall be enclosed with cracks, or pieces broken out of rims,
a stationary casing in accordance with shall not be used.
requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) (4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to
of this section. operate at rim speed in excess of manu-
(4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting facturers normal recommendations
shaft ends shall present a smooth edge shall be specially designed and care-
and end and shall not project more fully balanced for the speed at which
than one-half the diameter of the shaft they are to operate.
233
(e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1) ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this
Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where section.
both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall
(2.128 m) or less from the floor level, be arranged in such a manner that a
the guard shall extend to at least 15 minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m)
inches (38.1 cm) above the belt or to a is maintained between belt and floor at
standard height except that where both any point outside of guard.
runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches (4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run-
(106.68 cm) or less from the floor, the ning over a lower pulley more than 7
belt shall be fully enclosed. feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform
(ii) In powerplants or power-develop- shall be guarded at the bottom in the
ment rooms, a guardrail may be used same manner as horizontal overhead
in lieu of the guard required by para- belts, if conditions are as stated in
graph (e)(1)(i) of this section. paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this
(2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over- section.
head horizontal belts, with lower parts (5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt
7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or and pulley shall be equipped with a belt
platform, shall be guarded on sides and shifter so constructed as to adequately
bottom in accordance with paragraph guard the nip point of the belt and pul-
(o)(3) of this section. ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does
(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more not adequately guard the nip point of
than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or plat- the belt and pulley, the nip point shall
form shall be guarded for their entire be further protected by means of a
length under the following conditions: vertical guard placed in front of the
(a) If located over passageways or pulley and extending at least to the top
work places and traveling 1,800 feet or of the largest step of the cone.
more per minute. (ii) If the belt is of the endless type
or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt
(b) If center to center distance be-
shifter is not desired, the belt will be
tween pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m) or
considered guarded if the nip point of
more.
the belt and pulley is protected by a
(c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or
nip point guard located in front of the
more in width.
cone extending at least to the top of
(iii) Where the upper and lower runs the largest step of the cone, and formed
of horizontal belts are so located that to show the contour of the cone in
passage of persons between them would order to give the nip point of the belt
be possible, the passage shall be either: and pulley the maximum protection.
(a) Completely barred by a guardrail (iii) If the cone is located less than 3
or other barrier in accordance with feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working
paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; platform, the cone pulley and belt shall
or be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912
(b) Where passage is regarded as nec- m) regardless of whether the belt is
essary, there shall be a platform over endless or laced with rawhide.
the lower run guarded on either side by (6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended
a railing completely filled in with wire counterbalanced tighteners and all
mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar- parts thereof shall be of substantial
rier. The upper run shall be so guarded construction and securely fastened; the
as to prevent contact therewith either bearings shall be securely capped.
by the worker or by objects carried by Means must be provided to prevent
him. In powerplants only the lower run tightener from falling, in case the belt
of the belt need be guarded. breaks.
(iv) Overhead chain and link belt (ii) Where suspended counterweights
drives are governed by the same rules are used and not guarded by location,
as overhead horizontal belts and shall they shall be so encased as to prevent
be guarded in the same manner as accident.
belts. (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1)
(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord-
Vertical and inclined belts shall be en- ance with one of the following meth-
closed by a guard conforming to stand- ods:
234
(i) By a complete enclosure; or ter where they are within the plane of
(ii) By a standard guard as described the rim of the pulley.
in paragraph (o) of this section, at (2) It is recommended, however, that
least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6 no projecting setscrews or oilcups be
inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point used in any revolving pulley or part of
of the gears; or machinery.
(iii) By a band guard covering the (i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars.
face of gear and having flanges ex- All revolving collars, including split
tended inward beyond the root of the collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws
teeth on the exposed side or sides. or bolts used in collars shall not
Where any portion of the train of gears project beyond the largest periphery of
guarded by a band guard is less than 6 the collar.
feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk (2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be
guard or a complete enclosure to the so constructed as to present no hazard
height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be re- from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv-
quired. ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews
(2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph will, however, be permitted where they
(f)(1) of this section does not apply to are covered with safety sleeves or
hand-operated gears used only to ad- where they are used parallel with the
just machine parts and which do not shafting and are countersunk or else do
not extend beyond the flange of the
continue to move after hand power is
coupling.
removed. However, the guarding of
(j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All
these gears is highly recommended.
drip cups and pans shall be securely
(3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket fastened.
wheels and chains shall be enclosed un- (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou-
less they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m) plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards.
above the floor or platform. Where the Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch
drive extends over other machine or pulleys having projecting parts, where
working areas, protection against fall- such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128
ing shall be provided. This subpara- m) or less above the floor or working
graph does not apply to manually oper- platform, shall be enclosed by a sta-
ated sprockets. tionary guard constructed in accord-
(4) Openings for oiling. When frequent ance with this section. A ‘‘U’’ type
oiling must be done, openings with guard is permissible.
hinged or sliding self-closing covers (2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a
shall be provided. All points not read- guardrail, preferably with toeboard,
ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes may be used instead of the guard re-
if lubricant is to be added while ma- quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec-
chinery is in motion. tion, provided such a room is occupied
(g) Guarding friction drives. The driv- only by engine room attendants.
ing point of all friction drives when ex- (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers,
posed to contact shall be guarded, all poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt
arm or spoke friction drives and all shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on
web friction drives with holes in the all new installations made on or after
web shall be entirely enclosed, and all August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with
projecting belts on friction drives a permanent belt shifter provided with
where exposed to contact shall be mechanical means to prevent belt from
guarded. creeping from loose to tight pulley. It
(h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec- is recommended that old installations
tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, be changed to conform to this rule.
and other projections in revolving (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles
parts shall be removed or made flush or shall be rounded and be located as far
guarded by metal cover. This subpara- as possible from danger of accidental
graph does not apply to keys or contact, but within easy reach of the
setscrews within gear or sprocket cas- operator. Where belt shifters are not
ings or other enclosures, nor to keys, directly located over a machine or
setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft.
less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diame- 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level.
235
(2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The (3) Guards for horizontal overhead
use of belt poles as substitutes for me- belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead
chanical shifters is not recommended. belts shall run the entire length of the
(3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys belt and follow the line of the pulley to
or idlers are not practicable, belt the ceiling or be carried to the nearest
perches in form of brackets, rollers, wall, thus enclosing the belt effec-
etc., shall be used to keep idle belts tively. Where belts are so located as to
away from the shafts. make it impracticable to carry the
(4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne- guard to wall or ceiling, construction
cessity must be shifted by hand and of guard shall be such as to enclose
belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor completely the top and bottom runs of
or working platform which are not belt and the face of pulleys.
guarded in accordance with this sec- (ii) [Reserved]
tion shall not be fastened with metal in (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be
any case, nor with any other fastening provided for the ceiling rafters or over-
which by construction or wear will head floor beams, where such is nec-
constitute an accident hazard. essary, to sustain safely the weight and
(m) Standard guards—general require- stress likely to be imposed by the
ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard condi- guard. The interior surface of all
tions shall be secured by the use of the guards, by which is meant the surface
following materials. Expanded metal, of the guard with which a belt will
perforated or solid sheet metal, wire come in contact, shall be smooth and
mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron free from all projections of any char-
pipe securely fastened to floor or to acter, except where construction de-
frame of machine. mands it; protruding shallow round-
head rivets may be used. Overhead belt
(ii) All metal should be free from
guards shall be at least one-quarter
burrs and sharp edges.
wider than belt which they protect, ex-
(2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex- cept that this clearance need not in
panded metal, sheet or perforated any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on
metal, and wire mesh shall be securely each side. Overhead rope drive and
fastened to frame. block and roller-chain-drive guards
(n) [Reserved] shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24
(o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum cm) wider than the drive on each side.
requirements. The materials and dimen- In overhead silent chain-drive guards
sions specified in this paragraph shall where the chain is held from lateral
apply to all guards, except horizontal displacement on the sprockets, the side
overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain clearances required on drives of 20 inch
guards more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above (50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not
floor, or platform. less than 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm) from the
(i) [Reserved] nearest moving chain part, and on
(a) All guards shall be rigidly braced drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers
every 3 feet (0.912 m) or fractional part a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) from
of their height to some fixed part of the nearest moving chain part.
machinery or building structure. (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope
Where guard is exposed to contact with and chain drives. Overhead-rope and
moving equipment additional strength chain-drive guard construction shall
may be necessary. conform to the rules for overhead-belt
(2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may guard.
be used in the woodworking and chem- (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard-
ical industries, in industries where the rail shall be 42 inches (106.68 cm) in
presence of fumes or where manufac- height, with midrail between top rail
turing conditions would cause the and floor.
rapid deterioration of metal guards; (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8
also in construction work and in loca- feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be per-
tions outdoors where extreme cold or manent and substantial, smooth, and
extreme heat make metal guards and free from protruding nails, bolts, and
railings undesirable. In all other indus- splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall
tries, wood guards shall not be used. be 11⁄4 inches (3.175 cm) inside diameter,
236
or larger. If made of metal shapes or pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
bars, their section shall be equal in U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
strength to that of 11⁄2 (3.81 cm) by 11⁄2 Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable.
(3.81 cm) by 3⁄16 inch angle iron. If made
of wood, the posts shall be two by four § 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting.
(2 × 4) inches or larger. The upper rail
shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches, or (a) Transporting, moving, and storing
two one by four (1 × 4) strips, one at the compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro-
top and one at the side of posts. The tection caps shall be in place and se-
midrail may be one by four (1 × 4) cured.
inches or more. Where panels are fitted (2) When cylinders are hoisted, they
with expanded metal or wire mesh the shall be secured on a cradle,
middle rails may be omitted. Where slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be
guard is exposed to contact with mov- hoisted or transported by means of
ing equipment, additional strength magnets or choker slings.
may be necessary. (3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt-
(iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16 ing and rolling them on their bottom
cm) or more in height, of wood, metal, edges. They shall not be intentionally
or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch dropped, struck, or permitted to strike
(2.54 cm) mesh. each other violently.
(p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All (4) When cylinders are transported by
power-transmission equipment shall be powered vehicles, they shall be secured
inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 in a vertical position.
days and be kept in good working con- (5) Valve protection caps shall not be
dition at all times. used for lifting cylinders from one
(2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept vertical position to another. Bars shall
in alignment, free from rust and excess not be used under valves or valve pro-
oil or grease. tection caps to pry cylinders loose
(ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water
flammable vapors or flammable liquids shall be used to thaw cylinders loose.
exist, the hazard of static sparks from (6) Unless cylinders are firmly se-
shafting shall be carefully considered. cured on a special carrier intended for
(3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in this purpose, regulators shall be re-
alignment and properly adjusted. moved and valve protection caps put in
(4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in- place before cylinders are moved.
spected to make certain that all sup- (7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain,
porting bolts and screws are tight and or other steadying device shall be used
to keep cylinders from being knocked
that supports of hanger boxes are ad-
over while in use.
justed properly.
(8) When work is finished, when cyl-
(5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in
inders are empty, or when cylinders are
proper alignment to prevent belts from
moved at any time, the cylinder valve
running off.
shall be closed.
(6) Care of belts.
(9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be
(i) [Reserved]
secured in an upright position at all
(ii) Inspection shall be made of belts,
times except, if necessary, for short pe-
lacings, and fasteners and such equip-
riods of time while cylinders are actu-
ment kept in good repair.
ally being hoisted or carried.
(7) Lubrication. The regular oilers
(10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall
shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma-
be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or
chinery shall be oiled when not in mo-
combustible materials (especially oil
tion, wherever possible.
or grease), a minimum distance of 20
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993, as amended at 69 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar-
FR 31882, June 8, 2004] rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having
a fire-resistance rating of at least one-
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting half hour.
(11) Inside of buildings, cylinders
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours shall be stored in a well-protected,
and Safety Standards Act (Construction well-ventilated, dry location, at least
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible
237
materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl- opened slightly and closed imme-
inders should be stored in definitely as- diately. (This action is generally
signed places away from elevators, termed ‘‘cracking’’ and is intended to
stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage clear the valve of dust or dirt that
places shall be located where cylinders might otherwise enter the regulator.)
will not be knocked over or damaged The person cracking the valve shall
by passing or falling objects, or subject stand to one side of the outlet, not in
to tampering by unauthorized persons. front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl-
Cylinders shall not be kept in inder shall not be cracked where the
unventilated enclosures such as lockers gas would reach welding work, sparks,
and cupboards. flame, or other possible sources of igni-
(12) The in-plant handling, storage, tion.
and utilization of all compressed gases
(2) The cylinder valve shall always be
in cylinders, portable tanks, rail
opened slowly to prevent damage to
tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks
the regulator. For quick closing, valves
shall be in accordance with Compressed
on fuel gas cylinders shall not be
Gas Association Pamphlet P–1–1965.
(b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders opened more than 11⁄2 turns. When a
shall be kept far enough away from the special wrench is required, it shall be
actual welding or cutting operation so left in position on the stem of the valve
that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not while the cylinder is in use so that the
reach them. When this is impractical, fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in
fire resistant shields shall be provided. case of an emergency. In the case of
(2) Cylinders shall be placed where manifolded or coupled cylinders, at
they cannot become part of an elec- least one such wrench shall always be
trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be available for immediate use. Nothing
struck against a cylinder to strike an shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl-
arc. inder, when in use, which may damage
(3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed the safety device or interfere with the
with valve end up whenever they are in quick closing of the valve.
use. They shall not be placed in a loca- (3) Fuel gas shall not be used from
tion where they would be subject to cylinders through torches or other de-
open flame, hot metal, or other sources vices which are equipped with shutoff
of artificial heat. valves without reducing the pressure
(4) Cylinders containing oxygen or through a suitable regulator attached
acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be to the cylinder valve or manifold.
taken into confined spaces. (4) Before a regulator is removed
(c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl- from a cylinder valve, the cylinder
inders, whether full or empty, shall not valve shall always be closed and the
be used as rollers or supports. gas released from the regulator.
(2) No person other than the gas sup-
(5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas
plier shall attempt to mix gases in a
cylinder. No one except the owner of cylinder is opened, there is found to be
the cylinder or person authorized by a leak around the valve stem, the valve
him, shall refill a cylinder. No one shall be closed and the gland nut tight-
shall use a cylinder’s contents for pur- ened. If this action does not stop the
poses other than those intended by the leak, the use of the cylinder shall be
supplier. All cylinders used shall meet discontinued, and it shall be properly
the Department of Transportation re- tagged and removed from the work
quirements published in 49 CFR part area. In the event that fuel gas should
178, subpart C, Specification for Cyl- leak from the cylinder valve, rather
inders. than from the valve stem, and the gas
(3) No damaged or defective cylinder cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall
shall be used. be properly tagged and removed from
(d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall the work area. If a regulator attached
thoroughly instruct employees in the to a cylinder valve will effectively stop
safe use of fuel gas, as follows: a leak through the valve seat, the cyl-
(1) Before a regulator to a cylinder inder need not be removed from the
valve is connected, the valve shall be work area.
238
(6) If a leak should develop at a fuse 300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in
plug or other safety device, the cyl- doubtful condition, shall not be used.
inder shall be removed from the work (5) Hose couplings shall be of the type
area. that cannot be unlocked or discon-
(e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1) nected by means of a straight pull
Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall without rotary motion.
bear the name of the substance they (6) Boxes used for the storage of gas
contain in letters at least 1-inch high hose shall be ventilated.
which shall be either painted on the (7) Hoses, cables, and other equip-
manifold or on a sign permanently at- ment shall be kept clear of passage-
tached to it. ways, ladders and stairs.
(2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds (g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip
shall be placed in safe, well ventilated, openings shall be cleaned with suitable
and accessible locations. They shall cleaning wires, drills, or other devices
not be located within enclosed spaces. designed for such purpose.
(2) Torches in use shall be inspected
(3) Manifold hose connections, in-
at the beginning of each working shift
cluding both ends of the supply hose for leaking shutoff valves, hose cou-
that lead to the manifold, shall be such plings, and tip connections. Defective
that the hose cannot be interchanged torches shall not be used.
between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds (3) Torches shall be lighted by fric-
and supply header connections. Adapt- tion lighters or other approved devices,
ers shall not be used to permit the and not by matches or from hot work.
interchange of hose. Hose connections (h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and
shall be kept free of grease and oil. fuel gas pressure regulators, including
(4) When not in use, manifold and their related gauges, shall be in proper
header hose connections shall be working order while in use.
capped. (i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cyl-
(5) Nothing shall be placed on top of inders and fittings shall be kept away
a manifold, when in use, which will from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder
damage the manifold or interfere with caps and valves, couplings, regulators,
the quick closing of the valves. hose, and apparatus shall be kept free
(f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen from oil or greasy substances and shall
hose shall be easily distinguishable not be handled with oily hands or
from each other. The contrast may be gloves. Oxygen shall not be directed at
made by different colors or by surface oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within
characteristics readily distinguishable a fuel oil or other storage tank or ves-
by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel sel.
gas hoses shall not be interchangeable. (j) Additional rules. For additional de-
A single hose having more than one gas tails not covered in this subpart, appli-
passage shall not be used. cable technical portions of American
(2) When parallel sections of oxygen National Standards Institute, Z49.1–
and fuel gas hose are taped together, 1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting,
not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches shall apply.
shall be covered by tape. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(3) All hose in use, carrying 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
acetylene, oxygen, natural or manufac- 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]
tured fuel gas, or any gas or substance
which may ignite or enter into combus- § 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.
tion, or be in any way harmful to em- (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only
ployees, shall be inspected at the be- manual electrode holders which are
ginning of each working shift. Defec- specifically designed for arc welding
tive hose shall be removed from serv- and cutting, and are of a capacity capa-
ice. ble of safely handling the maximum
(4) Hose which has been subject to rated current required by the elec-
flashback, or which shows evidence of trodes, shall be used.
severe wear or damage, shall be tested (2) Any current-carrying parts pass-
to twice the normal pressure to which ing through the portion of the holder
it is subject, but in no case less than which the arc welder or cutter grips in
239
his hand, and the outer surfaces of the Minimum Federal Safety Standards for
jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu- Gas Pipelines, shall apply.
lated against the maximum voltage en- (3) When a structure or pipeline is
countered to ground. employed as a ground return circuit, it
(b) Welding cables and connectors. (1) shall be determined that the required
All arc welding and cutting cables shall electrical contact exists at all joints.
be of the completely insulated, flexible The generation of an arc, sparks, or
type, capable of handling the max- heat at any point shall cause rejection
imum current requirements of the of the structures as a ground circuit.
work in progress, taking into account (4) When a structure or pipeline is
the duty cycle under which the arc continuously employed as a ground re-
welder or cutter is working. turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded,
(2) Only cable free from repair or and periodic inspections shall be con-
splices for a minimum distance of 10 ducted to ensure that no condition of
feet from the cable end to which the electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir-
electrode holder is connected shall be tue of such use.
used, except that cables with standard (5) The frames of all arc welding and
insulated connectors or with splices cutting machines shall be grounded ei-
whose insulating quality is equal to ther through a third wire in the cable
that of the cable are permitted. containing the circuit conductor or
through a separate wire which is
(3) When it becomes necessary to con-
grounded at the source of the current.
nect or splice lengths of cable one to
Grounding circuits, other than by
another, substantial insulated connec-
means of the structure, shall be
tors of a capacity at least equivalent to
checked to ensure that the circuit be-
that of the cable shall be used. If con-
tween the ground and the grounded
nections are effected by means of cable
power conductor has resistance low
lugs, they shall be securely fastened to-
enough to permit sufficient current to
gether to give good electrical contact,
flow to cause the fuse or circuit break-
and the exposed metal parts of the lugs
er to interrupt the current.
shall be completely insulated.
(6) All ground connections shall be
(4) Cables in need of repair shall not inspected to ensure that they are me-
be used. When a cable, other than the chanically strong and electrically ade-
cable lead referred to in paragraph quate for the required current.
(b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to (d) Operating instructions. Employers
the extent of exposing bare conductors, shall instruct employees in the safe
the portion thus exposed shall be pro- means of arc welding and cutting as
tected by means of rubber and friction follows:
tape or other equivalent insulation. (1) When electrode holders are to be
(c) Ground returns and machine left unattended, the electrodes shall be
grounding. (1) A ground return cable removed and the holders shall be so
shall have a safe current carrying ca- placed or protected that they cannot
pacity equal to or exceeding the speci- make electrical contact with employ-
fied maximum output capacity of the ees or conducting objects.
arc welding or cutting unit which it (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be
services. When a single ground return dipped in water; to do so may expose
cable services more than one unit, its the arc welder or cutter to electric
safe current-carrying capacity shall shock.
equal or exceed the total specified (3) When the arc welder or cutter has
maximum output capacities of all the occasion to leave his work or to stop
units which it services. work for any appreciable length of
(2) Pipelines containing gases or time, or when the arc welding or cut-
flammable liquids, or conduits con- ting machine is to be moved, the power
taining electrical circuits, shall not be supply switch to the equipment shall
used as a ground return. For welding be opened.
on natural gas pipelines, the technical (4) Any faulty or defective equipment
portions of regulations issued by the shall be reported to the supervisor.
Department of Transportation, Office (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional re-
of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR Part 192, quirements.
240
(e) Shielding. Whenever practicable, escaping through leaking or improp-

all arc welding and cutting operations erly closed torch valves, the gas supply
shall be shielded by noncombustible or to the torch shall be positively shut off
flameproof screens which will protect at some point outside the enclosed
employees and other persons working space whenever the torch is not to be
in the vicinity from the direct rays of used or whenever the torch is left unat-
the arc. tended for a substantial period of time,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, such as during the lunch period. Over-
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] night and at the change of shifts, the
torch and hose shall be removed from
§ 1926.352 Fire prevention. the confined space. Open end fuel gas
(a) When practical, objects to be and oxygen hoses shall be immediately
welded, cut, or heated shall be moved removed from enclosed spaces when
to a designated safe location or, if the they are disconnected from the torch
objects to be welded, cut, or heated or other gas-consuming device.
cannot be readily moved, all movable (h) Except when the contents are
fire hazards in the vicinity shall be being removed or transferred, drums,
taken to a safe place, or otherwise pro- pails, and other containers which con-
tected. tain or have contained flammable liq-
(b) If the object to be welded, cut, or uids shall be kept closed. Empty con-
heated cannot be moved and if all the tainers shall be removed to a safe area
fire hazards cannot be removed, posi- apart from hot work operations or open
tive means shall be taken to confine flames.
the heat, sparks, and slag, and to pro- (i) Drums containers, or hollow
tect the immovable fire hazards from structures which have contained toxic
them. or flammable substances shall, before
(c) No welding, cutting, or heating welding, cutting, or heating is under-
shall be done where the application of taken on them, either be filled with
flammable paints, or the presence of water or thoroughly cleaned of such
other flammable compounds, or heavy substances and ventilated and tested.
dust concentrations creates a hazard. For welding, cutting and heating on
(d) Suitable fire extinguishing equip- steel pipelines containing natural gas,
ment shall be immediately available in the pertinent portions of regulations
the work area and shall be maintained issued by the Department of Transpor-
in a state of readiness for instant use. tation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49
(e) When the welding, cutting, or CFR Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety
heating operation is such that normal Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall
fire prevention precautions are not suf- apply.
ficient, additional personnel shall be (j) Before heat is applied to a drum,
assigned to guard against fire while the container, or hollow structure, a vent
actual welding, cutting, or heating op- or opening shall be provided for the re-
eration is being performed, and for a lease of any built-up pressure during
sufficient period of time after comple- the application of heat.
tion of the work to ensure that no pos-
sibility of fire exists. Such personnel § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection
shall be instructed as to the specific in welding, cutting, and heating.
anticipated fire hazards and how the (a) Mechanical ventilation. For pur-
firefighting equipment provided is to poses of this section, mechanical ven-
be used. tilation shall meet the following re-
(f) When welding, cutting, or heating quirements:
is performed on walls, floors, and ceil- (1) Mechanical ventilation shall con-
ings, since direct penetration of sparks sist of either general mechanical ven-
or heat transfer may introduce a fire tilation systems or local exhaust sys-
hazard to an adjacent area, the same tems.
precautions shall be taken on the oppo- (2) General mechanical ventilation
site side as are taken on the side on shall be of sufficient capacity and so
which the welding is being performed. arranged as to produce the number of
(g) For the elimination of possible air changes necessary to maintain
fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas welding fumes and smoke within safe
241
limits, as defined in subpart D of this ting, or heating in any enclosed spaces

part. involving the metals specified in this
(3) Local exhaust ventilation shall subparagraph shall be performed with
consist of freely movable hoods in- either general mechanical or local ex-
tended to be placed by the welder or haust ventilation meeting the require-
burner as close as practicable to the ments of paragraph (a) of this section:
work. This system shall be of sufficient (i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals
capacity and so arranged as to remove or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma-
fumes and smoke at the source and terials;
keep the concentration of them in the (ii) Lead base metals;
breathing zone within safe limits as de- (iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate-
fined in subpart D of this part. rials;
(4) Contaminated air exhausted from (iv) Chromium-bearing metals or
a working space shall be discharged metals coated with chromium-bearing
into the open air or otherwise clear of materials.
the source of intake air. (2) Welding, cutting, or heating in
(5) All air replacing that withdrawn any enclosed spaces involving the met-
shall be clean and respirable. als specified in this subparagraph shall
(6) Oxygen shall not be used for ven- be performed with local exhaust ven-
tilation purposes, comfort cooling, tilation in accordance with the require-
blowing dust from clothing, or for ments of paragraph (a) of this section,
cleaning the work area. or employees shall be protected by air
(b) Welding, cutting, and heating in line respirators in accordance with the
confined spaces. (1) Except as provided requirements of subpart E of this part:
in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and (i) Metals containing lead, other than
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, either as an impurity, or metals coated with
general mechanical or local exhaust lead-bearing materials;
ventilation meeting the requirements (ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium-
of paragraph (a) of this section shall be coated base metals;
provided whenever welding, cutting, or (iii) Metals coated with mercury-
heating is performed in a confined bearing metals;
space. (iv) Beryllium-containing base or
(2) When sufficient ventilation can- filler metals. Because of its high tox-
not be obtained without blocking the icity, work involving beryllium shall
means of access, employees in the con- be done with both local exhaust ven-
fined space shall be protected by air tilation and air line respirators.
line respirators in accordance with the (3) Employees performing such oper-
requirements of subpart E of this part, ations in the open air shall be pro-
and an employee on the outside of such tected by filter-type respirators in ac-
a confined space shall be assigned to cordance with the requirements of sub-
maintain communication with those part E of this part, except that employ-
working within it and to aid them in ees performing such operations on be-
an emergency. ryllium-containing base or filler met-
(3) Lifelines. Where a welder must als shall be protected by air line res-
enter a confined space through a man- pirators in accordance with the re-
hole or other small opening, means quirements of subpart E of this part.
shall be provided for quickly removing (4) Other employees exposed to the
him in case of emergency. When safety same atmosphere as the welders or
belts and lifelines are used for this pur- burners shall be protected in the same
pose they shall be so attached to the manner as the welder or burner.
welder’s body that his body cannot be (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1)
jammed in a small exit opening. An at- Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding
tendant with a pre-planned rescue pro- process involves the production of
cedure shall be stationed outside to ob- ultra-violet radiation of intensities of 5
serve the welder at all times and be ca- to 30 times that produced during
pable of putting rescue operations into shielded metal-arc welding, the decom-
effect. position of chlorinated solvents by ul-
(c) Welding, cutting, or heating of met- traviolet rays, and the liberation of
als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut- toxic fumes and gases, employees shall
242
not be permitted to engage in, or be ex- § 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heat-
posed to the process until the following ing in way of preservative coatings.
special precautions have been taken: (a) Before welding, cutting, or heat-
(i) The use of chlorinated solvents ing is commenced on any surface cov-
shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless ered by a preservative coating whose
shielded, from the exposed arc, and sur- flammability is not known, a test shall
faces prepared with chlorinated sol- be made by a competent person to de-
vents shall be thoroughly dry before termine its flammability. Preservative
welding is permitted on such surfaces. coatings shall be considered to be high-
(ii) Employees in the area not pro- ly flammable when scrapings burn with
tected from the arc by screening shall extreme rapidity.
be protected by filter lenses meeting (b) Precautions shall be taken to pre-
the requirements of subpart E of this vent ignition of highly flammable
part. When two or more welders are ex- hardened preservative coatings. When
posed to each other’s arc, filter lens coatings are determined to be highly
goggles of a suitable type, meeting the flammable, they shall be stripped from
requirements of subpart E of this part, the area to be heated to prevent igni-
shall be worn under welding helmets. tion.
Hand shields to protect the welder (c) Protection against toxic preserva-
against flashes and radiant energy tive coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all
shall be used when either the helmet is surfaces covered with toxic preserva-
lifted or the shield is removed. tives shall be stripped of all toxic coat-
(iii) Welders and other employees ings for a distance of at least 4 inches
who are exposed to radiation shall be from the area of heat application, or
suitably protected so that the skin is the employees shall be protected by air
covered completely to prevent burns line respirators, meeting the require-
and other damage by ultraviolet rays. ments of subpart E of this part.
Welding helmets and hand shields shall (2) In the open air, employees shall be
be free of leaks and openings, and free protected by a respirator, in accord-
of highly reflective surfaces. ance with requirements of subpart E of
(iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld- this part.
ing is being performed on stainless (d) The preservative coatings shall be
steel, the requirements of paragraph removed a sufficient distance from the
(c)(2) of this section shall be met to area to be heated to ensure that the
protect against dangerous concentra- temperature of the unstripped metal
tions of nitrogen dioxide. will not be appreciably raised. Artifi-
cial cooling of the metal surrounding
(e) General welding, cutting, and heat-
the heating area may be used to limit
ing. (1) Welding, cutting, and heating,
the size of the area required to be
not involving conditions or materials
cleaned.
described in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of
this section, may normally be done
without mechanical ventilation or res- Subpart K—Electrical
piratory protective equipment, but
where, because of unusual physical or AUTHORITY: Sections 6 and 8 of the Occupa-
atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac- tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
cumulation of contaminants exists, U.S.C. 655 and 657); sec. 107, Contract Work
Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.
suitable mechanical ventilation or res- 333); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 9–83 (48
piratory protective equipment shall be FR 35736) or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable;
provided. 29 CFR part 1911.
(2) Employees performing any type of
SOURCE: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless
welding, cutting, or heating shall be otherwise noted.
protected by suitable eye protective
equipment in accordance with the re- GENERAL
quirements of subpart E of this part.
§ 1926.400 Introduction.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; This subpart addresses electrical
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] safety requirements that are necessary
243
for the practical safeguarding of em- (b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402
ployees involved in construction work through 1926.408 do not cover installa-
and is divided into four major divisions tions used for the generation, trans-
and applicable definitions as follows: mission, and distribution of electric
(a) Installation safety requirements. In- energy, including related communica-
stallation safety requirements are con- tion, metering, control, and trans-
tained in §§ 1926.402 through 1926.408. In- formation installations. (However,
cluded in this category are electric these regulations do cover portable and
equipment and installations used to vehicle-mounted generators used to
provide electric power and light on provide power for equipment used at
jobsites. the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part
(b) Safety-related work practices. Safe- for the construction of power distribu-
ty-related work practices are contained tion and transmission lines.
in §§ 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to § 1926.403 General requirements.
covering the hazards arising from the
use of electricity at jobsites, these reg- (a) Approval. All electrical conduc-
ulations also cover the hazards arising tors and equipment shall be approved.
from the accidental contact, direct or (b) Examination, installation, and use
of equipment—(1) Examination. The em-
indirect, by employees with all ener-
ployer shall ensure that electrical
gized lines, above or below ground,
equipment is free from recognized haz-
passing through or near the jobsite.
ards that are likely to cause death or
(c) Safety-related maintenance and en- serious physical harm to employees.
vironmental considerations. Safety-re- Safety of equipment shall be deter-
lated maintenance and environmental mined on the basis of the following
considerations are contained in considerations:
§§ 1926.431 and 1926.432. (i) Suitability for installation and
(d) Safety requirements for special use in conformity with the provisions
equipment. Safety requirements for spe- of this subpart. Suitability of equip-
cial equipment are contained in ment for an identified purpose may be
§ 1926.441. evidenced by listing, labeling, or cer-
(e) Definitions. Definitions applicable tification for that identified purpose.
to this subpart are contained in (ii) Mechanical strength and dura-
§ 1926.449. bility, including, for parts designed to
enclose and protect other equipment,
§ 1926.401 [Reserved] the adequacy of the protection thus
provided.
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS (iii) Electrical insulation.
(iv) Heating effects under conditions
§ 1926.402 Applicability. of use.
(a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through (v) Arcing effects.
1926.408 contain installation safety re- (vi) Classification by type, size, volt-
quirements for electrical equipment age, current capacity, specific use.
and installations used to provide elec- (vii) Other factors which contribute
tric power and light at the jobsite. to the practical safeguarding of em-
These sections apply to installations, ployees using or likely to come in con-
both temporary and permanent, used tact with the equipment.
on the jobsite; but these sections do (2) Installation and use. Listed, la-
not apply to existing permanent instal- beled, or certified equipment shall be
lations that were in place before the installed and used in accordance with
construction activity commenced. instructions included in the listing, la-
beling, or certification.
NOTE: If the electrical installation is made (c) Interrupting rating. Equipment in-
in accordance with the National Electrical
tended to break current shall have an
Code ANSI/NFPA 70–1984, exclusive of For-
mal Interpretations and Tentative Interim
interrupting rating at system voltage
Amendments, it will be deemed to be in com- sufficient for the current that must be
pliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, ex- interrupted.
cept for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) (d) Mounting and cooling of equip-
(E), (F), (G), and (J). ment—(1) Mounting. Electric equipment
244
shall be firmly secured to the surface branch circuit, at its disconnecting

on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs means or overcurrent device, shall be
driven into holes in masonry, concrete, legibly marked to indicate its purpose,
plaster, or similar materials shall not unless located and arranged so the pur-
be used. pose is evident. These markings shall
(2) Cooling. Electrical equipment be of sufficient durability to withstand
which depends upon the natural cir- the environment involved.
culation of air and convection prin- (i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This
ciples for cooling of exposed surfaces paragraph applies to equipment oper-
shall be installed so that room air flow ating at 600 volts, nominal, or less.
over such surfaces is not prevented by (1) Working space about electric equip-
walls or by adjacent installed equipment. Sufficient access and working
ment. For equipment designed for floor space shall be provided and maintained
mounting, clearance between top sur- about all electric equipment to permit
faces and adjacent surfaces shall be ready and safe operation and mainte-
provided to dissipate rising warm air. nance of such equipment.
Electrical equipment provided with (i) Working clearances. Except as re-
ventilating openings shall be installed quired or permitted elsewhere in this
so that walls or other obstructions do subpart, the dimension of the working
not prevent the free circulation of air space in the direction of access to live
through the equipment. parts operating at 600 volts or less and
(e) Splices. Conductors shall be likely to require examination, adjust-
spliced or joined with splicing devices ment, servicing, or maintenance while
designed for the use or by brazing, alive shall not be less than indicated in
welding, or soldering with a fusible Table K–1. In addition to the dimen-
metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall sions shown in Table K–1, workspace
first be so spliced or joined as to be me- shall not be less than 30 inches (762
chanically and electrically secure mm) wide in front of the electric equip-
without solder and then soldered. All ment. Distances shall be measured
splices and joints and the free ends of from the live parts if they are exposed,
conductors shall be covered with an in- or from the enclosure front or opening
sulation equivalent to that of the con- if the live parts are enclosed. Walls
ductors or with an insulating device constructed of concrete, brick, or tile
designed for the purpose. are considered to be grounded. Working
(f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric space is not required in back of assem-
equipment which in ordinary operation blies such as dead-front switchboards
produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten or motor control centers where there
metal shall be enclosed or separated are no renewable or adjustable parts
and isolated from all combustible ma- such as fuses or switches on the back
terial. and where all connections are acces-
(g) Marking. Electrical equipment sible from locations other than the
shall not be used unless the manufac- back.
turer’s name, trademark, or other de-
scriptive marking by which the organi- TABLE K–1—WORKING CLEARANCES
zation responsible for the product may
be identified is placed on the equip- Minimum clear distance
for conditions1
ment and unless other markings are Nominal voltage to ground
provided giving voltage, current, watt- (a) (b) (c)
age, or other ratings as necessary. The Feet2 Feet2 Feet2
marking shall be of sufficient dura- 0–150 ......................................... 3 3 3
bility to withstand the environment in- 151–600 ..................................... 3 31⁄2 4
volved. 1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live
(h) Identification of disconnecting parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other
side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides
means and circuits. Each disconnecting effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or in-
means required by this subpart for mo- sulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con-
sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
tors and appliances shall be legibly grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on
marked to indicate its purpose, unless both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in Con-
dition (a)] with the operator between.
located and arranged so the purpose is 2 Note: For International System of Units (SI): one
evident. Each service, feeder, and foot=0.3048m.
245
(ii) Clear spaces. Working space re- (j) Over 600 volts, nominal—(1) General.
quired by this subpart shall not be used Conductors and equipment used on cir-
for storage. When normally enclosed cuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal,
live parts are exposed for inspection or shall comply with all applicable provi-
servicing, the working space, if in a sions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of
passageway or general open space, this section and with the following pro-
shall be guarded. visions which supplement or modify
(iii) Access and entrance to working those requirements. The provisions of
space. At least one entrance shall be paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this
provided to give access to the working section do not apply to equipment on
space about electric equipment. the supply side of the service conduc-
(iv) Front working space. Where there
tors.
are live parts normally exposed on the
front of switchboards or motor control (2) Enclosure for electrical installations.
centers, the working space in front of Electrical installations in a vault,
such equipment shall not be less than 3 room, closet or in an area surrounded
feet (914 mm). by a wall, screen, or fence, access to
(v) Headroom. The minimum head- which is controlled by lock and key or
room of working spaces about service other equivalent means, are considered
equipment, switchboards, panelboards, to be accessible to qualified persons
or motor control centers shall be 6 feet only. A wall, screen, or fence less than
3 inches (1.91 m). 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not consid-
(2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as ered adequate to prevent access unless
required or permitted elsewhere in this it has other features that provide a de-
subpart, live parts of electric equip- gree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot
ment operating at 50 volts or more (2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all
shall be guarded against accidental buildings, rooms or enclosures con-
contact by cabinets or other forms of taining exposed live parts or exposed
enclosures, or by any of the following conductors operating at over 600 volts,
means: nominal, shall be kept locked or shall
(A) By location in a room, vault, or be under the observation of a qualified
similar enclosure that is accessible person at all times.
only to qualified persons.
(i) Installations accessible to qualified
(B) By partitions or screens so ar-
persons only. Electrical installations
ranged that only qualified persons will
having exposed live parts shall be ac-
have access to the space within reach
of the live parts. Any openings in such cessible to qualified persons only and
partitions or screens shall be so sized shall comply with the applicable provi-
and located that persons are not likely sions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section.
to come into accidental contact with (ii) Installations accessible to unquali-
the live parts or to bring conducting fied persons. Electrical installations
objects into contact with them. that are open to unqualified persons
(C) By location on a balcony, gallery, shall be made with metal-enclosed
or platform so elevated and arranged as equipment or shall be enclosed in a
to exclude unqualified persons. vault or in an area, access to which is
(D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed
more above the floor or other working switchgear, unit substations, trans-
surface and so installed as to exclude formers, pull boxes, connection boxes,
unqualified persons. and other similar associated equipment
(ii) In locations where electric equip- shall be marked with appropriate cau-
ment would be exposed to physical tion signs. If equipment is exposed to
damage, enclosures or guards shall be physical damage from vehicular traffic,
so arranged and of such strength as to guards shall be provided to prevent
prevent such damage. such damage. Ventilating or similar
(iii) Entrances to rooms and other openings in metal-enclosed equipment
guarded locations containing exposed
shall be designed so that foreign ob-
live parts shall be marked with con-
jects inserted through these openings
spicuous warning signs forbidding un-
qualified persons to enter. will be deflected from energized parts.
246
2 NOTE: For SI units: one foot=0.3048 m.
(3) Workspace about equipment. Suffi-
cient space shall be provided and main- (ii) Lighting outlets and points of con-
tained about electric equipment to per- trol. The lighting outlets shall be so ar-
mit ready and safe operation and main- ranged that persons changing lamps or
tenance of such equipment. Where en- making repairs on the lighting system
ergized parts are exposed, the min- will not be endangered by live parts or
imum clear workspace shall not be less other equipment. The points of control
than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (meas- shall be so located that persons are not
ured vertically from the floor or plat- likely to come in contact with any live
form), or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide part or moving part of the equipment
(measured parallel to the equipment). while turning on the lights.
The depth shall be as required in Table (iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts.
K–2. The workspace shall be adequate Unguarded live parts above working
to permit at least a 90-degree opening space shall be maintained at elevations
of doors or hinged panels. not less than specified in Table K–3.
(i) Working space. The minimum clear
working space in front of electric TABLE K–3—ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED
equipment such as switchboards, con- ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE
trol panels, switches, circuit breakers,
motor controllers, relays, and similar Nominal voltage between Minimum elevation
phases
equipment shall not be less than speci-
fied in Table K–2 unless otherwise spec- 601–7,500 .............................. 8 feet 6 inches.1
7,501–35,000 ......................... 9 feet.
ified in this subpart. Distances shall be
Over 35kV .............................. 9 feet+0.37 inches per kV
measured from the live parts if they above 35kV.
are exposed, or from the enclosure 1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch=25.4 mm; one foot=0.3048
front or opening if the live parts are m.
enclosed. However, working space is
not required in back of equipment such (4) Entrance and access to workspace.
as deadfront switchboards or control At least one entrance not less than 24
assemblies where there are no renew- inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches
able or adjustable parts (such as fuses (1.98 m) high shall be provided to give
or switches) on the back and where all access to the working space about elec-
connections are accessible from loca- tric equipment. On switchboard and
tions other than the back. Where rear control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22
access is required to work on de-ener- m) in width, there shall be one en-
gized parts on the back of enclosed trance at each end of such board where
equipment, a minimum working space practicable. Where bare energized parts
of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall at any voltage or insulated energized
be provided. parts above 600 volts are located adja-
cent to such entrance, they shall be
TABLE K–2—MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORK- guarded.
ING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIP- [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
MENT FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Conditions1
Nominal voltage to ground § 1926.404 Wiring design and protec-
(a) (b) (c) tion.
Feet2 Feet2 Feet2 (a) Use and identification of grounded
601 to 2,500 .............................. 3 4 5 and grounding conductors—(1) Identifica-
2,501 to 9,000 ........................... 4 5 6 tion of conductors. A conductor used as
9,001 to 25,000 ......................... 5 6 9
25,001 to 75 kV ......................... 6 8 10
a grounded conductor shall be identifi-
Above 75kV ............................... 8 10 12 able and distinguishable from all other
1Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live conductors. A conductor used as an
parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other equipment grounding conductor shall
side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides be identifiable and distinguishable
effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or
insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con- from all other conductors.
sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of con- (2) Polarity of connections. No ground-
crete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. ed conductor shall be attached to any
(c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not
guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator be- terminal or lead so as to reverse des-
tween. ignated polarity.
247
(3) Use of grounding terminals and de- plug, except cord sets and receptacles
vices. A grounding terminal or ground- which are fixed and not exposed to
ing-type device on a receptacle, cord damage, shall be visually inspected be-
connector, or attachment plug shall fore each day’s use for external defects,
not be used for purposes other than such as deformed or missing pins or in-
grounding. sulation damage, and for indications of
(b) Branch circuits—(1) Ground-fault possible internal damage. Equipment
protection—(i) General. The employer found damaged or defective shall not
shall use either ground fault circuit in- be used until repaired.
terrupters as specified in paragraph (D) The following tests shall be per-
(b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured formed on all cord sets, receptacles
equipment grounding conductor pro- which are not a part of the permanent
gram as specified in paragraph wiring of the building or structure, and
(b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect em- cord- and plug-connected equipment re-
ployees on construction sites. These required to be grounded:
quirements are in addition to any (1) All equipment grounding conduc-
other requirements for equipment tors shall be tested for continuity and
grounding conductors. shall be electrically continuous.
(ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. (2) Each receptacle and attachment
All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20- cap or plug shall be tested for correct
ampere receptacle outlets on construc- attachment of the equipment ground-
tion sites, which are not a part of the ing conductor. The equipment ground-
permanent wiring of the building or ing conductor shall be connected to its
structure and which are in use by em- proper terminal.
ployees, shall have approved ground- (E) All required tests shall be per-
fault circuit interrupters for personnel formed:
protection. Receptacles on a two-wire, (1) Before first use;
single-phase portable or vehicle- (2) Before equipment is returned to
mounted generator rated not more service following any repairs;
than 5kW, where the circuit conductors (3) Before equipment is used after
of the generator are insulated from the any incident which can be reasonably
generator frame and all other grounded suspected to have caused damage (for
surfaces, need not be protected with example, when a cord set is run over);
ground-fault circuit interrupters. and
(iii) Assured equipment grounding con- (4) At intervals not to exceed 3
ductor program. The employer shall es- months, except that cord sets and re-
tablish and implement an assured ceptacles which are fixed and not ex-
equipment grounding conductor proposed to damage shall be tested at in-
gram on construction sites covering all tervals not exceeding 6 months.
cord sets, receptacles which are not a (F) The employer shall not make
part of the building or structure, and available or permit the use by employ-
equipment connected by cord and plug ees of any equipment which has not
which are available for use or used by met the requirements of this paragraph
employees. This program shall comply (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
with the following minimum require- (G) Tests performed as required in
ments: this paragraph shall be recorded. This
(A) A written description of the pro- test record shall identify each recep-
gram, including the specific procedures tacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-con-
adopted by the employer, shall be nected equipment that passed the test
available at the jobsite for inspection and shall indicate the last date it was
and copying by the Assistant Secretary tested or the interval for which it was
and any affected employee. tested. This record shall be kept by
(B) The employer shall designate one means of logs, color coding, or other ef-
or more competent persons (as defined fective means and shall be maintained
in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the pro- until replaced by a more current
gram. record. The record shall be made avail-
(C) Each cord set, attachment cap, able on the jobsite for inspection by
plug and receptacle of cord sets, and the Assistant Secretary and any af-
any equipment connected by cord and fected employee.
248
(2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall (A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished
have an ampere rating not less than grade, sidewalks, or from any platform
the load to be served and shall comply or projection from which they might be
with the following: reached.
(i) Single receptacles. A single recep- (B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas sub-
tacle installed on an individual branch ject to vehicular traffic other than
circuit shall have an ampere rating of truck traffic.
not less than that of the branch cir- (C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other
cuit. than those specified in paragraph
(ii) Two or more receptacles. Where (c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are sub-
connected to a branch circuit sup- ject to truck traffic.
plying two or more receptacles or out- (D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public
lets, receptacle ratings shall conform streets, alleys, roads, and driveways.
to the values listed in Table K–4. (iii) Clearance from building openings.
(iii) Receptacles used for the connection Conductors shall have a clearance of at
of motors. The rating of an attachment least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows,
plug or receptacle used for cord- and doors, fire escapes, or similar loca-
plug-connection of a motor to a branch tions. Conductors run above the top
circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at level of a window are considered to be
125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if out of reach from that window and,
individual overload protection is omit- therefore, do not have to be 3 feet (914
ted. mm) away.
(iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors
TABLE K–4—RECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR above roof space accessible to employ-
VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS ees on foot shall have a clearance from
the highest point of the roof surface of
Receptacle
Circuit rating amperes rating amperes not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical
clearance for insulated conductors, not
15 ................................................................... Not over 15. less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or di-
20 ................................................................... 15 or 20.
30 ................................................................... 30. agonal clearance for covered conduc-
40 ................................................................... 40 or 50. tors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57 m)
50 ................................................................... 50. for bare conductors, except that:
(A) Where the roof space is also ac-
(c) Outside conductors and lamps—(1) cessible to vehicular traffic, the
600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs vertical clearance shall not be less
(c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this sec- than 18 feet (5.49 m), or
tion apply to branch circuit, feeder, (B) Where the roof space is not nor-
and service conductors rated 600 volts, mally accessible to employees on foot,
nominal, or less and run outdoors as fully insulated conductors shall have a
open conductors. vertical or diagonal clearance of not
(i) Conductors on poles. Conductors less than 3 feet (914 mm), or
supported on poles shall provide a hori- (C) Where the voltage between con-
zontal climbing space not less than the ductors is 300 volts or less and the roof
following: has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102
(A) Power conductors below commu- mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clear-
nication conductors—30 inches (762 ance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet
mm) . (914 mm), or
(B) Power conductors alone or above (D) Where the voltage between con-
communication conductors: 300 volts or ductors is 300 volts or less and the con-
less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 ductors do not pass over more than 4
volts—30 inches (762 mm). feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of
(C) Communication conductors below the roof and they are terminated at a
power conductors: with power conduc- through-the-roof raceway or support,
tors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 the clearance from roofs shall be at
mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches least 18 inches (457 mm).
(762 mm). (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps
(ii) Clearance from ground. Open con- for outdoor lighting shall be located
ductors shall conform to the following below all live conductors, trans-
minimum clearances: formers, or other electric equipment,
249
unless such equipment is controlled by disconnecting means shall be installed

a disconnecting means that can be so that the fuse or thermal cutout can
locked in the open position or unless be disconnected from its supply with-
adequate clearances or other safe- out disrupting service to equipment
guards are provided for relamping oper- and circuits unrelated to those pro-
ations. tected by the overcurrent device.
(d) Services—(1) Disconnecting means— (iv) Location in or on premises. Over-
(i) General. Means shall be provided to current devices shall be readily acces-
disconnect all conductors in a building sible. Overcurrent devices shall not be
or other structure from the service-en- located where they could create an em-
trance conductors. The disconnecting ployee safety hazard by being exposed
means shall plainly indicate whether it to physical damage or located in the
is in the open or closed position and vicinity of easily ignitible material.
shall be installed at a readily acces- (v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts.
sible location nearest the point of en- Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so
trance of the service-entrance conduc- located or shielded that employees will
tors. not be burned or otherwise injured by
(ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. their operation.
Each service disconnecting means shall (vi) Circuit breakers—(A) Circuit
simultaneously disconnect all breakers shall clearly indicate whether
ungrounded conductors. they are in the open (off) or closed (on)
(2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The position.
following additional requirements (B) Where circuit breaker handles on
apply to services over 600 volts, nomi- switchboards are operated vertically
nal. rather than horizontally or
(i) Guarding. Service-entrance con- rotationally, the up position of the
ductors installed as open wires shall be handle shall be the closed (on) position.
guarded to make them accessible only (C) If used as switches in 120-volt, flu-
to qualified persons. orescent lighting circuits, circuit
(ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of breakers shall be marked ‘‘SWD.’’
high voltage shall be posted where un- (2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders
authorized employees might come in and branch circuits over 600 volts,
contact with live parts. nominal, shall have short-circuit pro-
(e) Overcurrent protection—(1) 600 tection.
volts, nominal, or less. The following re- (f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1)
quirements apply to overcurrent pro- through (f)(11) of this section contain
tection of circuits rated 600 volts, grounding requirements for systems,
nominal, or less. circuits, and equipment.
(i) Protection of conductors and equip- (1) Systems to be grounded. The fol-
ment. Conductors and equipment shall lowing systems which supply premises
be protected from overcurrent in ac- wiring shall be grounded:
cordance with their ability to safely (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire
conduct current. Conductors shall have DC systems shall have their neutral
sufficient ampacity to carry the load. conductor grounded.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for (ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC
motor-running overload protection, systems operating at over 50 volts
overcurrent devices shall not interrupt through 300 volts between conductors
the continuity of the grounded con- shall be grounded unless they are rec-
ductor unless all conductors of the cir- tifier-derived from an AC system com-
cuit are opened simultaneously. plying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii),
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section.
cutouts. Except for devices provided for (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC
current-limiting on the supply side of circuits of less than 50 volts shall be
the service disconnecting means, all grounded if they are installed as over-
cartridge fuses which are accessible to head conductors outside of buildings or
other than qualified persons and all if they are supplied by transformers
fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits and the transformer primary supply
over 150 volts to ground shall be pro- system is ungrounded or exceeds 150
vided with disconnecting means. This volts to ground.
250
(iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal

AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts parts of equipment and the equipment
shall be grounded under any of the fol- grounding conductor terminals of the
lowing conditions, unless exempted by receptacles are bonded to the generator
paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section: frame.
(A) If the system can be so grounded (ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under
that the maximum voltage to ground the following conditions the frame of a
on the ungrounded conductors does not vehicle may serve as the grounding
exceed 150 volts; electrode for a system supplied by a
(B) If the system is nominally rated generator located on the vehicle:
480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which
(A) The frame of the generator is
the neutral is used as a circuit con-
ductor; bonded to the vehicle frame, and
(C) If the system is nominally rated (B) The generator supplies only
240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which equipment located on the vehicle and/
the midpoint of one phase is used as a or cord- and plug-connected equipment
circuit conductor; or through receptacles mounted on the
(D) If a service conductor is vehicle or on the generator, and
uninsulated. (C) The noncurrent-carrying metal
(v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts parts of equipment and the equipment
to 1000 volts are not required to be grounding conductor terminals of the
grounded if the system is separately receptacles are bonded to the generator
derived and is supplied by a trans- frame, and
former that has a primary voltage rat- (D) The system complies with all
ing less than 1000 volts, provided all of other provisions of this section.
the following conditions are met: (iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neu-
(A) The system is used exclusively tral conductor shall be bonded to the
for control circuits, generator frame if the generator is a
(B) The conditions of maintenance
component of a separately derived sys-
and supervision assure that only quali-
tem. No other conductor need be bond-
fied persons will service the installa-
tion, ed to the generator frame.
(C) Continuity of control power is re- (4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC
quired, and premises wiring systems the identified
(D) Ground detectors are installed on conductor shall be grounded.
the control system. (5) Grounding connections—(i) Ground-
(2) Separately derived systems. Where ed system. For a grounded system, a
paragraph (f)(1) of this section requires grounding electrode conductor shall be
grounding of wiring systems whose used to connect both the equipment
power is derived from generator, trans- grounding conductor and the grounded
former, or converter windings and has circuit conductor to the grounding
no direct electrical connection, includ- electrode. Both the equipment ground-
ing a solidly connected grounded cir- ing conductor and the grounding elec-
cuit conductor, to supply conductors trode conductor shall be connected to
originating in another system, para- the grounded circuit conductor on the
graph (f)(5) of this section shall also supply side of the service disconnecting
apply. means, or on the supply side of the sys-
(3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- tem disconnecting means or overcur-
erators—(i) Portable generators. Under rent devices if the system is separately
the following conditions, the frame of a derived.
portable generator need not be ground-
(ii) Ungrounded systems. For an
ed and may serve as the grounding
electrode for a system supplied by the ungrounded service-supplied system,
generator: the equipment grounding conductor
(A) The generator supplies only shall be connected to the grounding
equipment mounted on the generator electrode conductor at the service
and/or cord- and plug-connected equip- equipment. For an ungrounded sepa-
ment through receptacles mounted on rately derived system, the equipment
the generator, and
251
grounding conductor shall be con- equipment and accessible to qualified

nected to the grounding electrode con- persons only;
ductor at, or ahead of, the system dis- (2) Metal frames of electrically heat-
connecting means or overcurrent de- ed appliances which are permanently
vices. and effectively insulated from ground;
(6) Grounding path. The path to and
ground from circuits, equipment, and (3) The cases of distribution appa-
enclosures shall be permanent and con- ratus such as transformers and capaci-
tinuous. tors mounted on wooden poles at a
(7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above
to be grounded—(i) Supports and enclo- ground or grade level.
sures for conductors. Metal cable trays, (iv) Equipment connected by cord and
metal raceways, and metal enclosures plug. Under any of the conditions de-
for conductors shall be grounded, ex- scribed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A)
cept that: through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, ex-
(A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves posed noncurrent-carrying metal parts
that are used to protect cable assem- of cord- and plug-connected equipment
blies from physical damage need not be which may become energized shall be
grounded; and grounded:
(B) Metal enclosures for conductors (A) If in a hazardous (classified) loca-
added to existing installations of open tion (see § 1926.407).
wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non- (B) If operated at over 150 volts to
metallic-sheathed cable need not be ground, except for guarded motors and
grounded if all of the following condi- metal frames of electrically heated ap-
tions are met: pliances if the appliance frames are
(1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m); permanently and effectively insulated
(2) Enclosures are free from probable from ground.
contact with ground, grounded metal,
(C) If the equipment is one of the
metal laths, or other conductive mate-
types listed in paragraphs
rials; and
(f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of
(3) Enclosures are guarded against
this section. However, even though the
employee contact.
equipment may be one of these types,
(ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal
it need not be grounded if it is exempt-
enclosures for service equipment shall
ed by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6).
be grounded.
(iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncur- (1) Hand held motor-operated tools;
rent-carrying metal parts of fixed (2) Cord- and plug-connected equip-
equipment which may become ener- ment used in damp or wet locations or
gized shall be grounded under any of by employees standing on the ground
the following conditions: or on metal floors or working inside of
(A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically metal tanks or boilers;
or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground (3) Portable and mobile X-ray and as-
or grounded metal objects and subject sociated equipment;
to employee contact. (4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
(B) If located in a wet or damp loca- or conductive locations; and
tion and subject to employee contact. (5) Portable hand lamps.
(C) If in electrical contact with (6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
metal. or conductive locations need not be
(D) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- grounded if supplied through an iso-
tion. lating transformer with an ungrounded
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed
metal-sheathed, or grounded metal or labeled portable tools and appli-
raceway wiring method. ances protected by a system of double
(F) If equipment operates with any insulation, or its equivalent, need not
terminal at over 150 volts to ground; be grounded. If such a system is em-
however, the following need not be ployed, the equipment shall be distinc-
grounded: tively marked to indicate that the tool
(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit or appliance utilizes a system of double
breakers used for other than service insulation.
252
(v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first elec-
parts of the following nonelectrical trode.
equipment shall be grounded: Frames (11) Grounding of systems and circuits
and tracks of electrically operated of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)—(i)
cranes; frames of nonelectrically driv- General. If high voltage systems are
en elevator cars to which electric con- grounded, they shall comply with all
ductors are attached; hand-operated applicable provisions of paragraphs
metal shifting ropes or cables of elec- (f)(1) through (f)(10) of this section as
tric elevators, and metal partitions, supplemented and modified by this
grill work, and similar metal enclo- paragraph (f)(11).
sures around equipment of over IkV be- (ii) Grounding of systems supplying
tween conductors. portable or mobile equipment. Systems
(8) Methods of grounding equipment— supplying portable or mobile high volt-
(i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent- age equipment, other than substations
carrying metal parts of fixed equip- installed on a temporary basis, shall
ment, if required to be grounded by comply with the following:
this subpart, shall be grounded by an (A) Portable and mobile high voltage
equipment grounding conductor which equipment shall be supplied from a sys-
is contained within the same raceway, tem having its neutral grounded
cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses through an impedance. If a delta-con-
the circuit conductors. For DC circuits
nected high voltage system is used to
only, the equipment grounding con-
supply the equipment, a system neu-
ductor may be run separately from the
tral shall be derived.
circuit conductors.
(ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying
used for grounding fixed or movable metal parts of portable and mobile
equipment shall have capacity to con- equipment shall be connected by an
duct safely any fault current which equipment grounding conductor to the
may be imposed on it. point at which the system neutral im-
(iii) Equipment considered effectively pedance is grounded.
grounded. Electric equipment is consid- (C) Ground-fault detection and relay-
ered to be effectively grounded if it is ing shall be provided to automatically
secured to, and in electrical contact de-energize any high voltage system
with, a metal rack or structure that is component which has developed a
provided for its support and the metal ground fault. The continuity of the
rack or structure is grounded by the equipment grounding conductor shall
method specified for the noncurrent- be continuously monitored so as to de-
carrying metal parts of fixed equip- energize automatically the high volt-
ment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this sec- age feeder to the portable equipment
tion. Metal car frames supported by upon loss of continuity of the equip-
metal hoisting cables attached to or ment grounding conductor.
running over metal sheaves or drums of (D) The grounding electrode to which
grounded elevator machines are also the portable or mobile equipment sys-
considered to be effectively grounded. tem neutral impedance is connected
(9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are shall be isolated from and separated in
used to assure electrical continuity, the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m)
they shall have the capacity to conduct from any other system or equipment
any fault current which may be im- grounding electrode, and there shall be
posed. no direct connection between the
(10) Made electrodes. If made elec- grounding electrodes, such as buried
trodes are used, they shall be free from pipe, fence or like objects.
nonconductive coatings, such as paint (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non-
or enamel; and, if practicable, they current-carrying metal parts of port-
shall be embedded below permanent able equipment and fixed equipment in-
moisture level. A single electrode con- cluding their associated fences,
sisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has housings, enclosures, and supporting
a resistance to ground greater than 25 structures shall be grounded. However,
ohms shall be augmented by one addi- equipment which is guarded by loca-
tional electrode installed no closer tion and isolated from ground need not
253
be grounded. Additionally, pole-mount- tors shall be run as multiconductor

ed distribution apparatus at a height cord or cable assemblies or open con-
exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above ground ductors, or shall be run in raceways.
or grade level need not be grounded. All conductors shall be protected by
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54
overcurrent devices at their ampacity.
FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, Runs of open conductors shall be lo-
1996] cated where the conductors will not be
subject to physical damage, and the
§ 1926.405 Wiring methods, compo- conductors shall be fastened at inter-
nents, and equipment for general vals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No
use. branch-circuit conductors shall be laid
(a) Wiring methods. The provisions of on the floor. Each branch circuit that
this paragraph do not apply to conduc- supplies receptacles or fixed equipment
tors which form an integral part of shall contain a separate equipment
equipment such as motors, controllers, grounding conductor if the branch cir-
motor control centers and like equip- cuit is run as open conductors.
ment. (C) Receptacles shall be of the
(1) General requirements—(i) Electrical grounding type. Unless installed in a
continuity of metal raceways and enclo- complete metallic raceway, each
sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and branch circuit shall contain a separate
other metal enclosures for conductors equipment grounding conductor, and
shall be metallically joined together all receptacles shall be electrically
into a continuous electric conductor connected to the grounding conductor.
and shall be so connected to all boxes, Receptacles for uses other than tem-
fittings, and cabinets as to provide ef- porary lighting shall not be installed
fective electrical continuity. on branch circuits which supply tem-
(ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems porary lighting. Receptacles shall not
of any type shall be installed in ducts be connected to the same ungrounded
used to transport dust, loose stock or conductor of multiwire circuits which
flammable vapors. No wiring system of supply temporary lighting.
any type shall be installed in any duct (D) Disconnecting switches or plug
used for vapor removal or in any shaft connectors shall be installed to permit
containing only such ducts. the disconnection of all ungrounded
(2) Temporary wiring—(i) Scope. The conductors of each temporary circuit.
provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this (E) All lamps for general illumina-
section apply to temporary electrical tion shall be protected from accidental
power and lighting wiring methods contact or breakage. Metal-case sock-
which may be of a class less than would ets shall be grounded.
be required for a permanent installa- (F) Temporary lights shall not be
tion. Except as specifically modified in suspended by their electric cords unless
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all cords and lights are designed for this
other requirements of this subpart for means of suspension.
permanent wiring shall apply to tem- (G) Portable electric lighting used in
porary wiring installations. Temporary wet and/or other conductive locations,
wiring shall be removed immediately as for example, drums, tanks, and ves-
upon completion of construction or the sels, shall be operated at 12 volts or
purpose for which the wiring was in- less. However, 120-volt lights may be
stalled. used if protected by a ground-fault cir-
(ii) General requirements for temporary cuit interrupter.
wiring—(A) Feeders shall originate in a (H) A box shall be used wherever a
distribution center. The conductors change is made to a raceway system or
shall be run as multiconductor cord or a cable system which is metal clad or
cable assemblies or within raceways; metal sheathed.
or, where not subject to physical dam- (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be
age, they may be run as open conduc- protected from damage. Sharp corners
tors on insulators not more than 10 feet and projections shall be avoided. Flexi-
(3.05 m) apart. ble cords and cables may pass through
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in doorways or other pinch points, if pro-
a power outlet or panelboard. Conduc- tection is provided to avoid damage.
254
(J) Extension cord sets used with the box cover and shall be readily visi-
portable electric tools and appliances ble and legible.
shall be of three-wire type and shall be (c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife
designed for hard or extra-hard usage. switches shall be so connected that the
Flexible cords used with temporary and blades are dead when the switch is in
portable lights shall be designed for the open position. Single-throw knife
hard or extra-hard usage. switches shall be so placed that gravity
will not tend to close them. Single-
NOTE: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/
NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400–4, lists throw knife switches approved for use
various types of flexible cords, some of which in the inverted position shall be pro-
are noted as being designed for hard or extra- vided with a locking device that will
hard usage. Examples of these types of flexi- ensure that the blades remain in the
ble cords include hard service cord (types S, open position when so set. Double-
ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord throw knife switches may be mounted
(types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO). so that the throw will be either
(iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring vertical or horizontal. However, if the
over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, bar- throw is vertical, a locking device shall
riers, or other effective means shall be be provided to ensure that the blades
provided to prevent access of other remain in the open position when so
than authorized and qualified per- set.
sonnel. (d) Switchboards and panelboards.
(b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings—(1) Switchboards that have any exposed
Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or live parts shall be located in perma-
fittings. Conductors entering boxes, nently dry locations and accessible
cabinets, or fittings shall be protected only to qualified persons. Panelboards
from abrasion, and openings through shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout
which conductors enter shall be effec- boxes, or enclosures designed for the
tively closed. Unused openings in cabi- purpose and shall be dead front. How-
nets, boxes, and fittings shall also be ever, panelboards other than the dead
effectively closed. front externally-operable type are per-
(2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, mitted where accessible only to quali-
junction boxes, and fittings shall be fied persons. Exposed blades of knife
provided with covers. If metal covers switches shall be dead when open.
are used, they shall be grounded. In en- (e) Enclosures for damp or wet loca-
ergized installations each outlet box tions—(1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes.
shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes,
canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having and panelboard enclosures in damp or
holes through which flexible cord pend- wet locations shall be installed so as to
ants pass shall be provided with bush- prevent moisture or water from enter-
ings designed for the purpose or shall ing and accumulating within the enclo-
have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on sures. In wet locations the enclosures
which the cords may bear. shall be weatherproof.
(3) Pull and junction boxes for systems (2) Switches and circuit breakers.
over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to Switches, circuit breakers, and switch-
other requirements in this section for boards installed in wet locations shall
pull and junction boxes, the following be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.
shall apply to these boxes for systems (f) Conductors for general wiring. All
over 600 volts, nominal: conductors used for general wiring
(i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall shall be insulated unless otherwise per-
provide a complete enclosure for the mitted in this subpart. The conductor
contained conductors or cables. insulation shall be of a type that is
(ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable for the voltage, operating tem-
covers securely fastened in place. Un- perature, and location of use. Insulated
derground box covers that weigh over conductors shall be distinguishable by
100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this require- appropriate color or other means as
ment. Covers for boxes shall be perma- being grounded conductors,
nently marked ‘‘HIGH VOLTAGE.’’ ungrounded conductors, or equipment
The marking shall be on the outside of grounding conductors.
255
(g) Flexible cords and cables—(1) Use of insulation, outer sheath properties,
flexible cords and cables—(i) Permitted and usage characteristics of the cord
uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be being spliced.
suitable for conditions of use and loca- (iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall
tion. Flexible cords and cables shall be be connected to devices and fittings so
used only for: that strain relief is provided which will
(A) Pendants; prevent pull from being directly trans-
(B) Wiring of fixtures; mitted to joints or terminal screws.
(C) Connection of portable lamps or (v) Cords passing through holes. Flexi-
appliances; ble cords and cables shall be protected
(D) Elevator cables; by bushings or fittings where passing
(E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
through holes in covers, outlet boxes,
(F) Connection of stationary equip-
or similar enclosures.
ment to facilitate their frequent inter-
change; (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nomi-
(G) Prevention of the transmission of nal. Multiconductor portable cable for
noise or vibration; or use in supplying power to portable or
(H) Appliances where the fastening mobile equipment at over 600 volts,
means and mechanical connections are nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger
designed to permit removal for mainte- conductors employing flexible strand-
nance and repair. ing. Cables operated at over 2000 volts
(ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used shall be shielded for the purpose of con-
as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(C), fining the voltage stresses to the insu-
(g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this sec- lation. Grounding conductors shall be
tion, the flexible cord shall be equipped provided. Connectors for these cables
with an attachment plug and shall be shall be of a locking type with provi-
energized from a receptacle outlet. sions to prevent their opening or clos-
(iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary ing while energized. Strain relief shall
for a use permitted in paragraph be provided at connections and termi-
(g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords nations. Portable cables shall not be
and cables shall not be used: operated with splices unless the splices
(A) As a substitute for the fixed wir- are of the permanent molded, vulcan-
ing of a structure; ized, or other equivalent type. Termi-
(B) Where run through holes in walls, nation enclosures shall be marked with
ceilings, or floors; a high voltage hazard warning, and ter-
(C) Where run through doorways, minations shall be accessible only to
windows, or similar openings, except as authorized and qualified personnel.
permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(1) of (i) Fixture wires—(1) General. Fixture
this section; wires shall be suitable for the voltage,
(D) Where attached to building sur- temperature, and location of use. A fix-
faces; or ture wire which is used as a grounded
(E) Where concealed behind building conductor shall be identified.
walls, ceilings, or floors. (2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may
(2) Identification, splices, and termi- be used:
nations—(i) Identification. A conductor
(i) For installation in lighting, fix-
of a flexible cord or cable that is used
tures and in similar equipment where
as a grounded conductor or an equip-
enclosed or protected and not subject
ment grounding conductor shall be dis-
tinguishable from other conductors. to bending or twisting in use; or
(ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures
SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall to the branch-circuit conductors sup-
not be used unless durably marked on plying the fixtures.
the surface with the type designation, (3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires
size, and number of conductors. shall not be used as branch-circuit con-
(iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be ductors except as permitted for Class 1
used only in continuous lengths with- power-limited circuits.
out splice or tap. Hard service flexible (j) Equipment for general use—(1)
cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps,
if spliced so that the splice retains the and receptacles—(i) Live parts. Fixtures,
256
lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and re- circuits having different voltages, fre-
ceptacles shall have no live parts nor- quencies, or types of current (ac or dc)
mally exposed to employee contact. on the same premises shall be of such
However, rosettes and cleat-type design that the attachment plugs used
lampholders and receptacles located at on these circuits are not interchange-
least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may able.
have exposed parts. (ii) Damp and wet locations. A recep-
(ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders, tacle installed in a wet or damp loca-
rosettes, and receptacles shall be se- tion shall be designed for the location.
curely supported. A fixture that weighs (3) Appliances—(i) Live parts. Appli-
more than 6 pounds (2.72 kg) or exceeds ances, other than those in which the
16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension current-carrying parts at high tem-
shall not be supported by the screw peratures are necessarily exposed, shall
shell of a lampholder. have no live parts normally exposed to
(iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps employee contact.
shall be wired with flexible cord and an (ii) Disconnecting means. A means
attachment plug of the polarized or shall be provided to disconnect each
grounding type. If the portable lamp appliance.
uses an Edison-based lampholder, the (iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be
grounded conductor shall be identified marked with its rating in volts and
and attached to the screw shell and the amperes or volts and watts.
identified blade of the attachment (4) Motors. This paragraph applies to
plug. In addition, portable handlamps motors, motor circuits, and control-
shall comply with the following: lers.
(A) Metal shell, paperlined (i) In sight from. If specified that one
lampholders shall not be used; piece of equipment shall be ‘‘in sight
(B) Handlamps shall be equipped with from’’ another piece of equipment, one
a handle of molded composition or shall be visible and not more than 50
other insulating material; feet (15.2 m) from the other.
(C) Handlamps shall be equipped with (ii) Disconnecting means—(A) A dis-
a substantial guard attached to the connecting means shall be located in
lampholder or handle; sight from the controller location. The
(D) Metallic guards shall be grounded controller disconnecting means for
by the means of an equipment ground- motor branch circuits over 600 volts,
ing conductor run within the power nominal, may be out of sight of the
supply cord. controller, if the controller is marked
(iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the with a warning label giving the loca-
screw-shell type shall be installed for tion and identification of the dis-
use as lampholders only. Lampholders connecting means which is to be locked
installed in wet or damp locations shall in the open position.
be of the weatherproof type. (B) The disconnecting means shall
(v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet disconnect the motor and the con-
or damp locations shall be identified troller from all ungrounded supply con-
for the purpose and shall be installed ductors and shall be so designed that
so that water cannot enter or accumu- no pole can be operated independently.
late in wireways, lampholders, or other (C) If a motor and the driven machin-
electrical parts. ery are not in sight from the controller
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- location, the installation shall comply
tachment plugs (caps)—(i) Configuration. with one of the following conditions:
Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- (1) The controller disconnecting
tachment plugs shall be constructed so means shall be capable of being locked
that no receptacle or cord connector in the open position.
will accept an attachment plug with a (2) A manually operable switch that
different voltage or current rating than will disconnect the motor from its
that for which the device is intended. source of supply shall be placed in
However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle sight from the motor location.
or cord connector may accept a 15-am- (D) The disconnecting means shall
pere attachment plug of the same volt- plainly indicate whether it is in the
age rating. Receptacles connected to open (off) or closed (on) position.
257
(E) The disconnecting means shall be (B) Where live parts of motors or con-
readily accessible. If more than one trollers operating at over 150 volts to
disconnect is provided for the same ground are guarded against accidental
equipment, only one need be readily contact only by location, and where ad-
accessible. justment or other attendance may be
(F) An individual disconnecting necessary during the operation of the
means shall be provided for each apparatus, insulating mats or plat-
motor, but a single disconnecting forms shall be provided so that the at-
means may be used for a group of mo- tendant cannot readily touch live parts
tors under any one of the following unless standing on the mats or plat-
conditions: forms.
(1) If a number of motors drive spe- (5) Transformers—(i) Application. The
cial parts of a single machine or piece following paragraphs cover the instal-
of apparatus, such as a metal or wood- lation of all transformers, except:
working machine, crane, or hoist; (A) Current transformers;
(2) If a group of motors is under the (B) Dry-type transformers installed
protection of one set of branch-circuit as a component part of other appa-
protective devices; or ratus;
(C) Transformers which are an inte-
(3) If a group of motors is in a single
gral part of an X-ray, high frequency,
room in sight from the location of the
or electrostatic-coating apparatus;
disconnecting means.
(D) Transformers used with Class 2
(iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline
ground-fault protection. Motors, motor- lighting, electric discharge lighting,
control apparatus, and motor branch- and power-limited fire-protective sig-
circuit conductors shall be protected naling circuits.
against overheating due to motor over- (ii) Operating voltage. The operating
loads or failure to start, and against voltage of exposed live parts of trans-
short-circuits or ground faults. These former installations shall be indicated
provisions do not require overload pro- by warning signs or visible markings
tection that will stop a motor where a on the equipment or structure.
shutdown is likely to introduce addi- (iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry-
tional or increased hazards, as in the type, high fire point liquid-insulated,
case of fire pumps, or where continued and askarel-insulated transformers in-
operation of a motor is necessary for a stalled indoors and rated over 35 kV
safe shutdown of equipment or process shall be in a vault.
and motor overload sensing devices are (iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they
connected to a supervised alarm. present a fire hazard to employees, oil-
(iv) Protection of live parts—all insulated transformers installed in-
voltages—(A) Stationary motors having doors shall be in a vault.
commutators, collectors, and brush (v) Fire protection. Combustible mate-
rigging located inside of motor end rial, combustible buildings and parts of
brackets and not conductively con- buildings, fire escapes, and door and
nected to supply circuits operating at window openings shall be safeguarded
more than 150 volts to ground need not from fires which may originate in oil-
have such parts guarded. Exposed live insulated transformers attached to or
parts of motors and controllers oper- adjacent to a building or combustible
ating at 50 volts or more between ter- material.
minals shall be guarded against acci- (vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer
dental contact by any of the following: vaults shall be constructed so as to
(1) By installation in a room or en- contain fire and combustible liquids
closure that is accessible only to quali- within the vault and to prevent unau-
fied persons; thorized access. Locks and latches
(2) By installation on a balcony, gal- shall be so arranged that a vault door
lery, or platform, so elevated and ar- can be readily opened from the inside.
ranged as to exclude unqualified per- (vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct
sons; or system foreign to the vault installa-
(3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or tion shall not enter or pass through a
more above the floor. transformer vault.
258
(viii) Material storage. Materials shall (B) The additional disconnect may be
not be stored in transformer vaults. omitted if a monorail hoist or hand-
(6) Capacitors—(i) Drainage of stored propelled crane bridge installation
charge. All capacitors, except surge ca- meets all of the following:
pacitors or capacitors included as a (1) The unit is floor controlled;
component part of other apparatus, (2) The unit is within view of the
shall be provided with an automatic power supply disconnecting means; and
means of draining the stored charge
(3) No fixed work platform has been
and maintaining the discharged state
provided for servicing the unit.
after the capacitor is disconnected
from its source of supply. (2) Control. A limit switch or other
(ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated device shall be provided to prevent the
over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply load block from passing the safe upper
with the following additional require- limit of travel of any hoisting mecha-
ments: nism.
(A) Isolating or disconnecting switch- (3) Clearance. The dimension of the
es (with no interrupting rating) shall working space in the direction of ac-
be interlocked with the load inter- cess to live parts which may require
rupting device or shall be provided examination, adjustment, servicing, or
with prominently displayed caution maintenance while alive shall be a
signs to prevent switching load cur- minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm).
rent. Where controls are enclosed in cabi-
(B) For series capacitors the proper nets, the door(s) shall open at least 90
switching shall be assured by use of at degrees or be removable, or the instal-
least one of the following: lation shall provide equivalent access.
(1) Mechanically sequenced isolating (4) Grounding. All exposed metal
and bypass switches, parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists
(2) Interlocks, or and accessories including pendant con-
(3) Switching procedure prominently trols shall be metallically joined to-
displayed at the switching location.
gether into a continuous electrical con-
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 ductor so that the entire crane or hoist
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] will be grounded in accordance with
§ 1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than
§ 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment
and installations. removable accessories or attachments,
having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces
(a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph shall be considered to be electrically
applies to the installation of electric connected to each other through the
equipment and wiring used in connec- bearing surfaces for grounding pur-
tion with cranes, monorail hoists, poses. The trolley frame and bridge
hoists, and all runways. frame shall be considered as elec-
(1) Disconnecting means—(i) Runway
trically grounded through the bridge
conductor disconnecting means. A readily
and trolley wheels and its respective
accessible disconnecting means shall
tracks unless conditions such as paint
be provided between the runway con-
or other insulating materials prevent
tact conductors and the power supply.
(ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this
monorail hoists. A disconnecting means, case a separate bonding conductor
capable of being locked in the open po- shall be provided.
sition, shall be provided in the leads (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving
from the runway contact conductors or walks—(1) Disconnecting means. Ele-
other power supply on any crane or vators, escalators, and moving walks
monorail hoist. shall have a single means for dis-
(A) If this additional disconnecting connecting all ungrounded main power
means is not readily accessible from supply conductors for each unit.
the crane or monorail hoist operating (2) Control panels. If control panels
station, means shall be provided at the are not located in the same space as
operating station to open the power the drive machine, they shall be lo-
circuit to all motors of the crane or cated in cabinets with doors or panels
monorail hoist. capable of being locked closed.
259
(c) Electric welders—disconnecting ered individually in determining its

means—(1) Motor-generator, AC trans- classification. These hazardous (classi-
former, and DC rectifier arc welders. A fied) locations are assigned six designa-
disconnecting means shall be provided tions as follows:
in the supply circuit for each motor-
Class I, Division 1
generator arc welder, and for each AC Class I, Division 2
transformer and DC rectifier arc welder Class II, Division 1
which is not equipped with a dis- Class II, Division 2
connect mounted as an integral part of Class III, Division l
the welder. Class III, Division 2
(2) Resistance welders. A switch or cir- For definitions of these locations see
cuit breaker shall be provided by which § 1926.449. All applicable requirements
each resistance welder and its control in this subpart apply to all hazardous
equipment can be isolated from the (classified) locations, unless modified
supply circuit. The ampere rating of by provisions of this section.
this disconnecting means shall not be (b) Electrical installations. Equipment,
less than the supply conductor wiring methods, and installations of
ampacity. equipment in hazardous (classified) lo-
(d) X-Ray equipment—(1) Disconnecting cations shall be approved as intrinsi-
means—(i) General. A disconnecting cally safe or approved for the haz-
means shall be provided in the supply ardous (classified) location or safe for
circuit. The disconnecting means shall the hazardous (classified) location. Re-
be operable from a location readily ac- quirements for each of these options
cessible from the X-ray control. For are as follows:
equipment connected to a 120-volt (1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and
branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a associated wiring approved as intrinsi-
grounding-type attachment plug cap cally safe is permitted in any haz-
and receptacle of proper rating may ardous (classified) location included in
serve as a disconnecting means. its listing or labeling.
(ii) More than one piece of equipment. (2) Approved for the hazardous (classi-
If more than one piece of equipment is fied) location—(i) General. Equipment
operated from the same high-voltage shall be approved not only for the class
circuit, each piece or each group of of location but also for the ignitible or
equipment as a unit shall be provided combustible properties of the specific
with a high-voltage switch or equiva- gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be
lent disconnecting means. This dis- present.
connecting means shall be constructed,
enclosed, or located so as to avoid con- NOTE: NFPA 70, the National Electrical
tact by employees with its live parts. Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, va-
(2) Control—Radiographic and pors, and dusts by ‘‘Groups’’ characterized by
their ignitible or combustible properties.
fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and
fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be (ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be
effectively enclosed or shall have inter- used unless it is marked to show the
locks that deenergize the equipment class, group, and operating tempera-
automatically to prevent ready access ture or temperature range, based on
to live current-carrying parts. operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for
which it is approved. The temperature
§ 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) loca- marking shall not exceed the ignition
tions. temperature of the specific gas, vapor,
(a) Scope. This section sets forth re- or dust to be encountered. However,
quirements for electric equipment and the following provisions modify this
wiring in locations which are classified marking requirement for specific
depending on the properties of the equipment:
flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or (A) Equipment of the non-heat-pro-
combustible dusts or fibers which may ducing type (such as junction boxes,
be present therein and the likelihood conduit, and fitting) and equipment of
that a flammable or combustible con- the heat-producing type having a max-
centration or quantity is present. Each imum temperature of not more than
room, section or area shall be consid- 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not
260
have a marked operating temperature § 1926.408 Special systems.

or temperature range. (a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal.
(B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this
for use only in Class I, Division 2 loca- section contain general requirements
tions need not be marked to indicate for all circuits and equipment operated
the group. at over 600 volts.
(C) Fixed general-purpose equipment (1) Wiring methods for fixed installa-
in Class I locations, other than lighting tions—(i) Above ground. Above-ground
fixtures, which is acceptable for use in conductors shall be installed in rigid
Class I, Division 2 locations need not be metal conduit, in intermediate metal
marked with the class, group, division, conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in
or operating temperature. other suitable raceways, or as open
(D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, runs of metal-clad cable designed for
other than lighting fixtures, which is the use and purpose. However, open
runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or
acceptable for use in Class II, Division
of bare conductors or busbars may be
2 and Class III locations need not be installed in locations which are acces-
marked with the class, group, division, sible only to qualified persons. Metallic
or operating temperature. shielding components, such as tapes,
(3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) wires, or braids for conductors, shall be
location. Equipment which is safe for grounded. Open runs of insulated wires
the location shall be of a type and de- and cables having a bare lead sheath or
sign which the employer demonstrates a braided outer covering shall be sup-
will provide protection from the haz- ported in a manner designed to prevent
ards arising from the combustibility physical damage to the braid or sheath.
and flammability of vapors, liquids, (ii) Installations emerging from the
gases, dusts, or fibers. ground. Conductors emerging from the
ground shall be enclosed in raceways.
NOTE: The National Electrical Code, NFPA Raceways installed on poles shall be of
70, contains guidelines for determining the rigid metal conduit, intermediate
type and design of equipment and installa-
metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or
tions which will meet this requirement. The
equivalent extending from the ground
guidelines of this document address electric
wiring, equipment, and systems installed in
line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above
hazardous (classified) locations and contain finished grade. Conductors entering a
specific provisions for the following: wiring building shall be protected by an enclo-
methods, wiring connections, conductor insure from the ground line to the point
sulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall
transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit be grounded.
breakers, fuses, motor controllers, recep- (2) Interrupting and isolating devices—
tacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, in- (i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers lo-
struments, resistors, generators, motors, cated indoors shall consist of metal-en-
lighting fixtures, storage battery charging closed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted
equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists units. In locations accessible only to
and similar equipment, utilization equip- qualified personnel, open mounting of
ment, signaling systems, alarm systems, re- circuit breakers is permitted. A means
mote control systems, local loud speaker and
of indicating the open and closed posi-
communication systems, ventilation piping,
live parts, lightning surge protection, and
tion of circuit breakers shall be pro-
grounding. Compliance with these guidelines vided.
will constitute one means, but not the only (ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts in-
means, of compliance with this paragraph. stalled in buildings or transformer
vaults shall be of a type identified for
(c) Conduits. All conduits shall be the purpose. They shall be readily ac-
threaded and shall be made wrench- cessible for fuse replacement.
tight. Where it is impractical to make (iii) Equipment isolating means. A
a threaded joint tight, a bonding jump- means shall be provided to completely
er shall be utilized. isolate equipment for inspection and
repairs. Isolating means which are not
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
designed to interrupt the load current
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
of the circuit shall be either
261
interlocked with a circuit interrupter An equipment grounding conductor

or provided with a sign warning shall be run with circuit conductors in-
against opening them under load. side the metal raceway or inside the
(3) Mobile and portable equipment—(i) multiconductor cable jacket. The
Power cable connections to mobile ma- equipment grounding conductor may
chines. A metallic enclosure shall be be insulated or bare.
provided on the mobile machine for en- (iii) Guarding live parts. Bare termi-
closing the terminals of the power nals of transformers, switches, motor
cable. The enclosure shall include pro- controllers, and other equipment shall
visions for a solid connection for the be enclosed to prevent accidental con-
ground wire(s) terminal to ground ef- tact with energized parts. Enclosures
fectively the machine frame. The for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof,
method of cable termination used shall weatherproof, or submersible as re-
prevent any strain or pull on the cable quired by the environmental condi-
from stressing the electrical connections.
tions. The enclosure shall have provi- (iv) Disconnecting means. A dis-
sion for locking so only authorized connecting means that simultaneously
qualified persons may open it and shall opens all ungrounded conductors shall
be marked with a sign warning of the be installed at each transformer or
presence of energized parts. motor location.
(ii) Guarding live parts. All energized (v) Grounding and bonding. All non-
switching and control parts shall be en- energized metal parts of electric equip-
closed in effectively grounded metal ment and metal raceways and cable
cabinets or enclosures. Circuit break- sheaths shall be grounded and bonded
ers and protective equipment shall to all metal pipes and rails at the por-
have the operating means projecting tal and at intervals not exceeding 1000
through the metal cabinet or enclosure feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel.
so these units can be reset without (b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote
locked doors being opened. Enclosures control, signaling, and power-limited cir-
and metal cabinets shall be locked so cuits—(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2,
that only authorized qualified persons or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or
have access and shall be marked with a power-limited circuits are character-
sign warning of the presence of ener- ized by their usage and electrical power
gized parts. Collector ring assemblies limitation which differentiates them
on revolving-type machines (shovels, from light and power circuits. These
draglines, etc.) shall be guarded. circuits are classified in accordance
(4) Tunnel installations—(i) Applica- with their respective voltage and power
tion. The provisions of this paragraph limitations as summarized in para-
apply to installation and use of high- graphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of
voltage power distribution and utiliza- this section.
tion equipment which is associated (i) Class 1 circuits—(A) A Class 1
with tunnels and which is portable and/ power-limited circuit is supplied from
or mobile, such as substations, trailers, a source having a rated output of not
cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-am-
drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, peres.
conveyors, and underground exca- (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit
vators. or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a volt-
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels age which does not exceed 600 volts;
shall be installed in one or more of the however, the power output of the
following: source need not be limited.
(A) Metal conduit or other metal (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits—(A)
raceway, Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is
(B) Type MC cable, or limited either inherently (in which no
(C) Other suitable multiconductor overcurrent protection is required) or
cable. by a combination of a power source and
Conductors shall also be so located or overcurrent protection.
guarded as to protect them from phys- (B) The maximum circuit voltage is
ical damage. Multiconductor portable 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inher-
cable may supply mobile equipment. ently limited power source, and 100
262
volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently be located below the light or power

limited power source. conductors. Communications conduc-
(C) The maximum circuit voltage is tors shall not be attached to a cross-
30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class arm that carries light or power conduc-
2 power source limited by overcurrent tors.
protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for (iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor anten-
a Class 3 power source limited by over- nas, lead-ins, and other communication
current protection. conductors attached as open conduc-
(iii) Application. The maximum cir- tors to the inside of buildings shall be
cuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from
(b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinus-
conductors of any light or power or
oidal AC or continuous DC power
Class 1 circuits unless a special and
sources, and where wet contact occur-
rence is not likely. equally protective method of conductor
(2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 separation is employed.
power supply unit shall not be used un- (4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal
less it is durably marked where plainly structures supporting antennas, as well
visible to indicate the class of supply as self-supporting antennas such as
and its electrical rating. vertical rods or dipole structures, shall
(c) Communications systems—(1) Scope. be located as far away from overhead
These provisions for communication conductors of electric light and power
systems apply to such systems as cen- circuits of over 150 volts to ground as
tral-station-connected and non-cen- necessary to avoid the possibility of
tral-station-connected telephone cir- the antenna or structure falling into or
cuits, radio receiving and transmitting making accidental contact with such
equipment, and outside wiring for fire circuits.
and burglar alarm, and similar central (5) Grounding—(i) Lead-in conductors.
station systems. These installations If exposed to contact with electric
need not comply with the provisions of light or power conductors, the metal
§§ 1926.403 through 1926.408(b), except sheath of aerial cables entering build-
§ 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and § 1926.407. ings shall be grounded or shall be inter-
(2) Protective devices—(i) Circuits ex-
rupted close to the entrance to the
posed to power conductors. Communica-
building by an insulating joint or
tion circuits so located as to be ex-
equivalent device. Where protective de-
posed to accidental contact with light
or power conductors operating at over vices are used, they shall be grounded.
300 volts shall have each circuit so ex- (ii) Antenna structures. Masts and
posed provided with an approved pro- metal structures supporting antennas
tector. shall be permanently and effectively
(ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor grounded without splice or connection
of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna in the grounding conductor.
shall be provided with an antenna dis- (iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmit-
charge unit or other means that will ters shall be enclosed in a metal frame
drain static charges from the antenna or grill or separated from the operating
system. space by a barrier, all metallic parts of
(3) Conductor location—(i) Outside of which are effectively connected to
buildings—(A) Receiving distribution ground. All external metal handles and
lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached controls accessible to the operating
to buildings and lead-in conductors to personnel shall be effectively grounded.
radio transmitters shall be so installed Unpowered equipment and enclosures
as to avoid the possibility of accidental shall be considered grounded where
contact with electric light or power connected to an attached coaxial cable
conductors. with an effectively grounded metallic
(B) The clearance between lead-in
shield.
conductors and any lightning protec-
tion conductors shall not be less than 6 [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
feet (1.83 m). FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
(ii) On poles. Where practicable, com-
munication conductors on poles shall
263
§§ 1926.409–1926.415 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
§§ 1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved] (e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or

frayed electric cords or cables shall not
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES be used.
(2) Extension cords shall not be fas-
§ 1926.416 General requirements. tened with staples, hung from nails, or
(a) Protection of employees—(1) No em- suspended by wire.
ployer shall permit an employee to [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
work in such proximity to any part of 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
an electric power circuit that the em- 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
ployee could contact the electric power 1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996]
circuit in the course of work, unless
§ 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of cir-
the employee is protected against elec- cuits.
tric shock by deenergizing the circuit
and grounding it or by guarding it ef- (a) Controls. Controls that are to be
fectively by insulation or other means. deactivated during the course of work
on energized or deenergized equipment
(2) In work areas where the exact lo-
or circuits shall be tagged.
cation of underground electric
(b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment
powerlines is unknown, employees
or circuits that are deenergized shall
using jack-hammers, bars, or other be rendered inoperative and shall have
hand tools which may contact a line tags attached at all points where such
shall be provided with insulated protec- equipment or circuits can be energized.
tive gloves. (c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to iden-
(3) Before work is begun the em- tify plainly the equipment or circuits
ployer shall ascertain by inquiry or di- being worked on.
rect observation, or by instruments,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
whether any part of an energized elec-
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
tric power circuit, exposed or con- 58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
cealed, is so located that the perform- 1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]]
ance of the work may bring any person,
tool, or machine into physical or elec- §§ 1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved]
trical contact with the electric power
circuit. The employer shall post and SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND
maintain proper warning signs where ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
such a circuit exists. The employer
§ 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment.
shall advise employees of the location
of such lines, the hazards involved, and The employer shall ensure that all
the protective measures to be taken. wiring components and utilization
(b) Passageways and open spaces—-(1) equipment in hazardous locations are
Barriers or other means of guarding maintained in a dust-tight, dust-igni-
shall be provided to ensure that work- tion-proof, or explosion-proof condi-
space for electrical equipment will not tion, as appropriate. There shall be no
loose or missing screws, gaskets,
be used as a passageway during periods
threaded connections, seals, or other
when energized parts of electrical
impairments to a tight condition.
equipment are exposed.
(2) Working spaces, walkways, and § 1926.432 Environmental deteriora-
similar locations shall be kept clear of tion of equipment.
cords so as not to create a hazard to (a) Deteriorating agents—(1) Unless
employees. identified for use in the operating envi-
(c) Load ratings. In existing installa- ronment, no conductors or equipment
tions, no changes in circuit protection shall be located:
shall be made to increase the load in (i) In damp or wet locations;
excess of the load rating of the circuit (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes,
wiring. vapors, liquids, or other agents having
(d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or a deteriorating effect on the conduc-
removed with one or both terminals en- tors or equipment; or
ergized, special tools insulated for the (iii) Where exposed to excessive tem-
voltage shall be used. peratures.
264
(2) Control equipment, utilization §§ 1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved]

equipment, and busways approved for
use in dry locations only shall be pro- DEFINITIONS
tected against damage from the weath-
er during building construction. § 1926.449 Definitions applicable to
this subpart.
(b) Protection against corrosion. Metal
raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable The definitions given in this section
sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, apply to the terms used in subpart K.
fittings, supports, and support hard- The definitions given here for ‘‘ap-
ware shall be of materials appropriate proved’’ and ‘‘qualified person’’ apply,
for the environment in which they are instead of the definitions given in
to be installed. § 1926.32, to the use of these terms in
subpart K.
§§ 1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] Acceptable. An installation or equip-
ment is acceptable to the Assistant
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL Secretary of Labor, and approved with-
EQUIPMENT in the meaning of this subpart K:
(a) If it is accepted, or certified, or
§ 1926.441 Batteries and battery charg- listed, or labeled, or otherwise deter-
ing.
mined to be safe by a qualified testing
(a) General requirements—(1) Batteries laboratory capable of determining the
of the unsealed type shall be located in suitability of materials and equipment
enclosures with outside vents or in well for installation and use in accordance
ventilated rooms and shall be arranged with this standard; or
so as to prevent the escape of fumes, (b) With respect to an installation or
gases, or electrolyte spray into other equipment of a kind which no qualified
areas. testing laboratory accepts, certifies,
(2) Ventilation shall be provided to lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if
ensure diffusion of the gases from the it is inspected or tested by another
battery and to prevent the accumula- Federal agency, or by a State, munic-
tion of an explosive mixture. ipal, or other local authority respon-
(3) Racks and trays shall be substan- sible for enforcing occupational safety
tial and shall be treated to make them provisions of the National Electrical
resistant to the electrolyte. Code, and found in compliance with
(4) Floors shall be of acid resistant those provisions; or
construction unless protected from (c) With respect to custom-made
acid accumulations. equipment or related installations
which are designed, fabricated for, and
(5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber
intended for use by a particular cus-
gloves shall be provided for workers
tomer, if it is determined to be safe for
handling acids or batteries.
its intended use by its manufacturer on
(6) Facilities for quick drenching of the basis of test data which the em-
the eyes and body shall be provided ployer keeps and makes available for
within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery han- inspection to the Assistant Secretary
dling areas. and his authorized representatives.
(7) Facilities shall be provided for Accepted. An installation is ‘‘accept-
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- ed’’ if it has been inspected and found
trolyte and for fire protection. to be safe by a qualified testing labora-
(b) Charging—(1) Battery charging in- tory.
stallations shall be located in areas Accessible. (As applied to wiring
designated for that purpose. methods.) Capable of being removed or
(2) Charging apparatus shall be pro- exposed without damaging the building
tected from damage by trucks. structure or finish, or not permanently
(3) When batteries are being charged, closed in by the structure or finish of
the vent caps shall be kept in place to the building. (See ‘‘concealed’’ and ‘‘ex-
avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall posed.’’)
be maintained in functioning condi- Accessible. (As applied to equipment.)
tion. Admitting close approach; not guarded
265
by locked doors, elevation, or other ef- Building. A structure which stands

fective means. (See‘‘Readily acces- alone or which is cut off from adjoining
sible.’’) structures by fire walls with all open-
Ampacity. The current in amperes a ings therein protected by approved fire
conductor can carry continuously doors.
under the conditions of use without ex- Cabinet. An enclosure designed either
ceeding its temperature rating. for surface or flush mounting, and pro-
Appliances. Utilization equipment, vided with a frame, mat, or trim in
generally other than industrial, nor- which a swinging door or doors are or
mally built in standardized sizes or may be hung.
types, which is installed or connecetcd Certified. Equipment is ‘‘certified’’ if
as a unit to perform one or more func- it:
tions. (a) Has been tested and found by a
Approved. Acceptable to the author- qualified testing laboratory to meet
ity enforcing this subpart. The author- applicable test standards or to be safe
ity enforcing this subpart is the Assist- for use in a specified manner, and
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (b) Is of a kind whose production is
tional Safety and Health. The defini- periodically inspected by a qualified
tion of ‘‘acceptable’’ indicates what is testing laboratory. Certified equipment
acceptable to the Assistant Secretary must bear a label, tag, or other record
of Labor, and therefore approved with- of certification.
in the meaning of this subpart. Circuit breaker—(a) (600 volts nomi-
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nal, or less.) A device designed to open
nonflammable synthetic chlorinated and close a circuit by nonautomatic
hydrocarbons used as electrical insu- means and to open the circuit auto-
lating media. Askarels of various matically on a predetermined overcur-
compositional types are used. Under rent without injury to itself when
arcing conditions the gases produced, properly applied within its rating.
while consisting predominantly of non- (b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A
combustible hydrogen chloride, can in- switching device capable of making,
clude varying amounts of combustible carrying, and breaking currents under
gases depending upon the askarel type. normal circuit conditions, and also
Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A de- making, carrying for a specified time,
vice which, by insertion in a recep- and breaking currents under specified
tacle, establishes connection between abnormal circuit conditions, such as
the conductors of the attached flexible those of short circuit.
cord and the conductors connected per- Class I locations. Class I locations are
manently to the receptacle. those in which flammable gases or va-
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by pors are or may be present in the air in
its own mechanism when actuated by quantities sufficient to produce explo-
some impersonal influence, as for ex- sive or ignitible mixtures. Class I loca-
ample, a change in current strength, tions include the following:
pressure, temperature, or mechanical (a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Divi-
configuration. sion 1 location is a location:
Bare conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ (1) In which ignitible concentrations
Bonding. The permanent joining of of flammable gases or vapors may exist
metallic parts to form an electrically under normal operating conditions; or
conductive path which will assure elec- (2) In which ignitible concentrations
trical continuity and the capacity to of such gases or vapors may exist fre-
conduct safely any current likely to be quently because of repair or mainte-
imposed. nance operations or because of leakage;
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor or
to assure the required electrical con- (3) In which breakdown or faulty op-
ductivity between metal parts required eration of equipment or processes
to be electrically connected. might release ignitible concentrations
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors of flammable gases or vapors, and
between the final overcurrent device might also cause simultaneous failure
protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). of electric equipment.
266
NOTE: This classification usually includes of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed
locations where volatile flammable liquids containers would not normally be considered
or liquefied flammable gases are transferred hazardous unless also subject to other haz-
from one container to another; interiors of ardous conditions.
spray booths and areas in the vicinity of Electrical conduits and their associated
spraying and painting operations where vola- enclosures separated from process fluids by a
tile flammable solvents are used; locations single seal or barrier are classed as a Divi-
containing open tanks or vats of volatile sion 2 location if the outside of the conduit
flammable liquids; drying rooms or compart- and enclosures is a nonhazardous location.
ments for the evaporation of flammable sol-
vents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms Class II locations. Class II locations
for flammable gas or for volatile flammable are those that are hazardous because of
liquids; and all other locations where ignit- the presence of combustible dust. Class
ible concentrations of flammable vapors or II locations include the following:
gases are likely to occur in the course of nor- (a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Di-
mal operations. vision 1 location is a location:
(b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Divi- (1) In which combustible dust is or
sion 2 location is a location: may be in suspension in the air under
(1) In which volatile flammable liq- normal operating conditions, in quan-
uids or flammable gases are handled, tities sufficient to produce explosive or
processed, or used, but in which the ignitible mixtures; or
hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will (2) Where mechanical failure or ab-
normally be confined within closed normal operation of machinery or
containers or closed systems from equipment might cause such explosive
which they can escape only in case of or ignitible mixtures to be produced,
accidental rupture or breakdown of and might also provide a source of igni-
such containers or systems, or in case tion through simultaneous failure of
of abnormal operation of equipment; or electric equipment, operation of pro-
(2) In which ignitible concentrations tection devices, or from other causes,
of gases or vapors are normally pre- or
vented by positive mechanical ventila- (3) In which combustible dusts of an
tion, and which might become haz- electrically conductive nature may be
ardous through failure or abnormal op- present.
erations of the ventilating equipment; NOTE: Combustible dusts which are elec-
or trically nonconductive include dusts pro-
(3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Divi- duced in the handling and processing of grain
sion 1 location, and to which ignitible and grain products, pulverized sugar and
concentrations of gases or vapors cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulver-
might occasionally be communicated ized spices, starch and pastes, potato and
unless such communication is pre- woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed,
vented by adequate positive-pressure dried hay, and other organic materials which
may produce combustible dusts when proc-
ventilation from a source of clean air, essed or handled. Dusts containing magne-
and effective safeguards against ven- sium or aluminum are particularly haz-
tilation failure are provided. ardous and the use of extreme caution is nec-
NOTE: This classification usually includes essary to avoid ignition and explosion.
locations where volatile flammable liquids (b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Di-
or flammable gases or vapors are used, but vision 2 location is a location in which:
which would become hazardous only in case
(1) Combustible dust will not nor-
of an accident or of some unusual operating
condition. The quantity of flammable mate- mally be in suspension in the air in
rial that might escape in case of accident, quantities sufficient to produce explo-
the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the sive or ignitible mixtures, and dust ac-
total area involved, and the record of the in- cumulations are normally insufficient
dustry or business with respect to explosions to interfere with the normal operation
or fires are all factors that merit consider- of electrical equipment or other appa-
ation in determining the classification and ratus; or
extent of each location.
(2) Dust may be in suspension in the
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and
similar devices would not ordinarily intro- air as a result of infrequent malfunc-
duce a hazardous condition even though used tioning of handling or processing
for flammable liquids or gases. Locations equipment, and dust accumulations re-
used for the storage of flammable liquids or sulting therefrom may be ignitible by
267
abnormal operation or failure of elec- (c) Insulated. A conductor encased

trical equipment or other apparatus. within material of composition and
thickness that is recognized as elec-
NOTE: This classification includes loca-
tions where dangerous concentrations of sus-
trical insulation.
pended dust would not be likely but where Controller. A device or group of de-
dust accumulations might form on or in the vices that serves to govern, in some
vicinity of electric equipment. These areas predetermined manner, the electric
may contain equipment from which appre- power delivered to the apparatus to
ciable quantities of dust would escape under which it is connected.
abnormal operating conditions or be adja- Covered conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’
cent to a Class II Division 1 location, as de-
scribed above, into which an explosive or ig-
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An
nitible concentration of dust may be put into assembly of a fuse support with either
suspension under abnormal operating condi- a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or dis-
tions. connecting blade. The fuseholder or
fuse carrier may include a conducting
Class III locations. Class III locations element (fuse link), or may act as the
are those that are hazardous because of disconnecting blade by the inclusion of
the presence of easily ignitible fibers a nonfusible member.
or flyings but in which such fibers or Cutout box. An enclosure designed for
flyings are not likely to be in suspen- surface mounting and having swinging
sion in the air in quantities sufficient doors or covers secured directly to and
to produce ignitible mixtures. Class 111 telescoping with the walls of the box
locations include the following: proper. (See ‘‘Cabinet.’’)
(a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Damp location. See ‘‘Location.’’
Division 1 location is a location in Dead front. Without live parts ex-
which easily ignitible fibers or mate- posed to a person on the operating side
rials producing combustible flyings are of the equipment.
handled, manufactured, or used. Device. A unit of an electrical system
NOTE: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings in- which is intended to carry but not uti-
clude rayon, cotton (including cotton linters lize electric energy.
and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, Disconnecting means. A device, or
jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled group of devices, or other means by
waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, saw- which the conductors of a circuit can
dust, woodchips, and other material of simi-
lar nature.
be disconnected from their source of
supply.
(b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch.
Division 2 location is a location in (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical
which easily ignitible fibers are stored switching device used for isolating a
or handled, except in process of manu- circuit or equipment from a source of
facture. power.
Collector ring. A collector ring is an Dry location. See ‘‘Location.’’
assembly of slip rings for transferring Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, hous-
electrical energy from a stationary to ing, fence or walls which will prevent
a rotating member. persons from accidentally contacting
Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by energized parts.
the structure or finish of the building. Enclosure. The case or housing of ap-
Wires in concealed raceways are con- paratus, or the fence or walls sur-
sidered concealed, even though they rounding an installation to prevent
may become accessible by withdrawing personnel from accidentally contacting
them. [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to energized parts, or to protect the
wiring methods.)’’] equipment from physical damage.
Conductor—(a) Bare. A conductor hav- Equipment. A general term including
ing no covering or electrical insulation material, fittings, devices, appliances,
whatsoever. fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used
(b) Covered. A conductor encased as a part of, or in connection with, an
within material of composition or electrical installation.
thickness that is not recognized as Equipment grounding conductor. See
electrical insulation. ‘‘Grounding conductor, equipment.’’
268
Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus ducting body that serves in place of the

enclosed in a case that is capable of earth.
withstanding an explosion of a speci- Grounded. Connected to earth or to
fied gas or vapor which may occur some conducting body that serves in
within it and of preventing the ignition place of the earth.
of a specified gas or vapor surrounding Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts,
the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or ex- nominal.) Permanently connected to
plosion of the gas or vapor within, and earth through a ground connection of
which operates at such an external sufficiently low impedance and having
temperature that it will not ignite a sufficient ampacity that ground fault
surrounding flammable atmosphere. current which may occur cannot build
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) up to voltages dangerous to personnel.
Capable of being inadvertently touched Grounded conductor. A system or cir-
or approached nearer than a safe dis- cuit conductor that is intentionally
tance by a person. It is applied to parts grounded.
not suitably guarded, isolated, or insu- Grounding conductor. A conductor
lated. (See ‘‘Accessible and ‘‘Con- used to connect equipment or the
cealed.’’) grounded circuit of a wiring system to
Exposed. (As applied to wiring meth- a grounding electrode or electrodes.
ods.) On or attached to the surface or Grounding conductor, equipment. The
behind panels designed to allow access. conductor used to connect the noncur-
[See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to wiring rent-carrying metal parts of equip-
methods.)’’] ment, raceways, and other enclosures
Exposed. (For the purposes of to the system grounded conductor and/
§ 1926.408(d), Communications systems.) or the grounding electrode conductor
Where the circuit is in such a position at the service equipment or at the
that in case of failure of supports or in- source of a separately derived system.
sulation, contact with another circuit Grounding electrode conductor. The
may result. conductor used to connect the ground-
Externally operable. Capable of being ing electrode to the equipment ground-
operated without exposing the operator ing conductor and/or to the grounded
to contact with live parts. conductor of the circuit at the service
Feeder. All circuit conductors be- equipment or at the source of a sepa-
tween the service equipment, or the rately derived system.
generator switchboard of an isolated Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A de-
plant, and the final branch-circuit vice for the protection of personnel
overcurrent device. that functions to deenergize a circuit
Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor or portion thereof within an estab-
lights suspended between two points lished period of time when a current to
more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart. ground exceeds some predetermined
Fitting. An accessory such as a lock- value that is less than that required to
nut, bushing, or other part of a wiring operate the overcurrent protective de-
system that is intended primarily to vice of the supply circuit.
perform a mechanical rather than an Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced,
electrical function. enclosed, or otherwise protected by
Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An means of suitable covers, casings, bar-
overcurrent protective device with a riers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms
circuit opening fusible part that is to remove the likelihood of approach
heated and severed by the passage of to a point of danger or contact by per-
overcurrent through it. A fuse com- sons or objects.
prises all the parts that form a unit ca- Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway,
pable of performing the prescribed well hole, or other vertical opening or
functions. It may or may not be the space in which an elevator or dumb-
complete device necessary to connect waiter is designed to operate.
it into an electrical circuit. Identified (conductors or terminals).
Ground. A conducting connection, Identified, as used in reference to a
whether intentional or accidental, be- conductor or its terminal, means that
tween an electrical circuit or equip- such conductor or terminal can be rec-
ment and the earth, or to some con- ognized as grounded.
269
Identified (for the use). Recognized as temporarily subject to dampness or

suitable for the specific purpose, func- wetness, as in the case of a building
tion, use, environment, application, under construction.
etc. where described as a requirement (c) Wet location. Installations under-
in this standard. Suitability of equip- ground or in concrete slabs or masonry
ment for a specific purpose, environ- in direct contact with the earth, and
ment, or application is determined by a locations subject to saturation with
qualified testing laboratory where such water or other liquids, such as loca-
identification includes labeling or list- tions exposed to weather and unpro-
ing. tected.
Insulated conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, mounted on a permanent base with
nominal.) A switch capable of making, wheels and/or casters for moving while
carrying, and interrupting specified completely assembled.
currents. Motor control center. An assembly of
Intrinsically safe equipment and associ- one or more enclosed sections having a
ated wiring. Equipment and associated common power bus and principally con-
wiring in which any spark or thermal taining motor control units.
effect, produced either normally or in Outlet. A point on the wiring system
specified fault conditions, is incapable, at which current is taken to supply
under certain prescribed test condi- utilization equipment.
tions, of causing ignition of a mixture Overcurrent. Any current in excess of
of flammable or combustible material the rated current of equipment or the
in air in its most easily ignitible con- ampacity of a conductor. It may result
centration. from overload (see definition), short
Isolated. Not readily accessible to circuit, or ground fault. A current in
persons unless special means for access excess of rating may be accommodated
are used. by certain equipment and conductors
Isolated power system. A system com- for a given set of conditions. Hence the
prising an isolating transformer or its rules for overcurrent protection are
equivalent, a line isolation monitor, specific for particular situations.
and its ungrounded circuit conductors. Overload. Operation of equipment in
Labeled. Equipment or materials to excess of normal, full load rating, or of
which has been attached a label, sym- a conductor in excess of rated
bol or other identifying mark of a ampacity which, when it persists for a
qualified testing laboratory which indi- sufficient length of time, would cause
cates compliance with appropriate damage or dangerous overheating. A
standards or performance in a specified fault, such as a short circuit or ground
manner. fault, is not an overload.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for (See‘‘Overcurrent.’’)
the direct connection of a lampholder, Panelboard. A single panel or group of
a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord panel units designed for assembly in
terminating in a lampholder. the form of a single panel; including
Listed. Equipment or materials in- buses, automatic overcurrent devices,
cluded in a list published by a qualified and with or without switches for the
testing laboratory whose listing states control of light, heat, or power cir-
either that the equipment or material cuits; designed to be placed in a cabi-
meets appropriate standards or has net or cutout box placed in or against
been tested and found suitable for use a wall or partition and accessible only
in a specified manner. from the front. (See ‘‘Switchboard.’’)
Location—(a) Damp location. Partially Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment de-
protected locations under canopies, signed to be hand-carried.
marquees, roofed open porches, and Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)
like locations, and interior locations See ‘‘Fuse.’’
subject to moderate degrees of mois- Power outlet. An enclosed assembly
ture, such as some basements. which may include receptacles, circuit
(b) Dry location. A location not nor- breakers, fuseholders, fused switches,
mally subject to dampness or wetness. buses and watt-hour meter mounting
A location classified as dry may be means; intended to serve as a means
270
for distributing power required to oper- cellular metal floor raceways, surface
ate mobile or temporarily installed raceways, wireways, and busways.
equipment. Readily accessible. Capable of being
Premises wiring system. That interior reached quickly for operation, renewal,
and exterior wiring, including power, or inspections, without requiring those
lighting, control, and signal circuit to whom ready access is requisite to
wiring together with all of its associ- climb over or remove obstacles or to
ated hardware, fittings, and wiring de- resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc.
vices, both permanently and tempo- (See ‘‘Accessible.’’)
rarily installed, which extends from Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact
the load end of the service drop, or load device installed at the outlet for the
end of the service lateral conductors to connection of a single attachment
the outlet(s). Such wiring does not in- plug. A single receptacle is a single
clude wiring internal to appliances, fix- contact device with no other contact
tures, motors, controllers, motor con- device on the same yoke. A multiple
trol centers, and similar equipment. receptacle is a single device containing
Qualified person. One familiar with two or more receptacles.
the construction and operation of the Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one
equipment and the hazards involved. or more receptacles are installed.
Qualified testing laboratory. A prop- Remote-control circuit. Any electric
erly equipped and staffed testing lab- circuit that controls any other circuit
oratory which has capabilities for and through a relay or an equivalent de-
which provides the following services: vice.
(a) Experimental testing for safety of Sealable equipment. Equipment en-
specified items of equipment and mate- closed in a case or cabinet that is pro-
rials referred to in this standard to de- vided with a means of sealing or lock-
termine compliance with appropriate ing so that live parts cannot be made
test standards or performance in a accessible without opening the enclo-
specified manner; sure. The equipment may or may not
(b) Inspecting the run of such items be operable without opening the enclo-
of equipment and materials at fac- sure.
tories for product evaluation to assure Separately derived system. A premises
compliance with the test standards; wiring system whose power is derived
(c) Service-value determinations from generator, transformer, or con-
through field inspections to monitor verter windings and has no direct elec-
the proper use of labels on products trical connection, including a solidly
and with authority for recall of the connected grounded circuit conductor,
label in the event a hazardous product to supply conductors originating in an-
is installed; other system.
(d) Employing a controlled procedure Service. The conductors and equip-
for identifying the listed and/or labeled ment for delivering energy from the
equipment or materials tested; and electricity supply system to the wiring
(e) Rendering creditable reports or system of the premises served.
findings that are objective and without Service conductors. The supply con-
bias of the tests and test methods em- ductors that extend from the street
ployed. main or from transformers to the serv-
Raceway. A channel designed ex- ice equipment of the premises supplied.
pressly for holding wires, cables, or Service drop. The overhead service
busbars, with additional functions as conductors from the last pole or other
permitted in this subpart. Raceways aerial support to and including the
may be of metal or insulating material, splices, if any, connecting to the serv-
and the term includes rigid metal con- ice-entrance conductors at the building
duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, inter- or other structure.
mediate metal conduit, liquidtight Service-entrance conductors, overhead
flexible metal conduit, flexible metal- system. The service conductors between
lic tubing, flexible metal conduit, elec- the terminals of the service equipment
trical metallic tubing, underfloor race- and a point usually outside the build-
ways, cellular concrete floor raceways, ing, clear of building walls, where
271
joined by tap or splice to the service and/or open one or more electric cir-
drop. cuits. Included in this category are cir-
Service-entrance conductors, under- cuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting
ground system. The service conductors (or isolating) switches, disconnecting
between the terminals of the service means, and interrupter switches.
equipment and the point of connection Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment
to the service lateral. Where service installed in a vehicle or that may read-
equipment is located outside the build- ily be disassembled for transport in a
ing walls, there may be no service-en- vehicle.
trance conductors, or they may be en- Utilization equipment. Utilization
tirely outside the building. equipment means equipment which uti-
Service equipment. The necessary lizes electric energy for mechanical,
equipment, usually consisting of a cir- chemical, heating, lighting, or similar
cuit breaker or switch and fuses, and useful purpose.
their accessories, located near the Utilization system. A utilization sys-
point of entrance of supply conductors tem is a system which provides electric
to a building or other structure, or an power and light for employee work-
otherwise defined area, and intended to places, and includes the premises wir-
constitute the main control and means ing system and utilization equipment.
of cutoff of the supply. Ventilated. Provided with a means to
Service raceway. The raceway that en- permit circulation of air sufficient to
closes the service-entrance conductors. remove an excess of heat, fumes, or va-
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit pors.
that energizes signaling equipment. Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable
Switchboard. A large single panel, liquid having a flash point below 38 de-
frame, or assembly of panels which grees C (100 degrees F) or whose tem-
have switches, buses, instruments, perature is above its flash point, or a
overcurrent and other protective de- Class II combustible liquid having a
vices mounted on the face or back or vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia
both. Switchboards are generally ac- (276 kPa) at 38 °C (100 °F) whose tem-
cessible from the rear as well as from perature is above its flash point.
the front and are not intended to be in- Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest
stalled in cabinets. (See ‘‘Panelboard.’’) root-mean-square (effective) difference
Switches—(a) General-use switch. A of potential between any two conduc-
switch intended for use in general dis- tors of the circuit concerned.
tribution and branch circuits. It is Voltage, nominal. A nominal value as-
rated in amperes, and it is capable of signed to a circuit or system for the
interrupting its rated current at its purpose of conveniently designating its
rated voltage. voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600,
(b) General-use snap switch. A form of etc.). The actual voltage at which a cir-
general-use switch so constructed that cuit operates can vary from the nomi-
it can be installed in flush device boxes nal within a range that permits satis-
or on outlet box covers, or otherwise factory operation of equipment.
used in conjunction with wiring sys- Voltage to ground. For grounded cir-
tems recognized by this subpart. cuits, the voltage between the given
(c) Isolating switch. A switch intended conductor and that point or conductor
for isolating an electric circuit from of the circuit that is grounded; for
the source of power. It has no inter- ungrounded circuits, the greatest volt-
rupting rating, and it is intended to be age between the given conductor and
operated only after the circuit has been any other conductor of the circuit.
opened by some other means. Watertight. So constructed that mois-
(d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, ture will not enter the enclosure.
rated in horsepower, capable of inter- Weatherproof. So constructed or pro-
rupting the maximum operating over- tected that exposure to the weather
load current of a motor of the same will not interfere with successful oper-
horsepower rating as the switch at the ation. Rainproof, raintight, or water-
rated voltage. tight equipment can fulfill the require-
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, ments for weatherproof where varying
nominal.) Devices designed to close weather conditions other than wetness,
272
such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature Bricklayers’ square scaffold means a

extremes, are not a factor. supported scaffold composed of framed
Wet location. See ‘‘Location.’’ squares which support a platform.
Carpenters’ bracket scaffold means a
Subpart L—Scaffolds supported scaffold consisting of a plat-
form supported by brackets attached to
building or structural walls.
AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work Catenary scaffold means a suspension
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc-
scaffold consisting of a platform sup-
tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8,
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 ported by two essentially horizontal
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s and parallel ropes attached to struc-
Order No. 1–90 (55 FR 9033); and 29 CFR Part tural members of a building or other
1911. structure. Additional support may be
provided by vertical pickups.
SOURCE: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless
otherwise noted. Chimney hoist means a multi-point
adjustable suspension scaffold used to
§ 1926.450 Scope, application and defi- provide access to work inside chim-
nitions applicable to this subpart. neys. (See ‘‘Multi-point adjustable sus-
pension scaffold’’.)
(a) Scope and application. This sub-
Cleat means a structural block used
part applies to all scaffolds used in
at the end of a platform to prevent the
workplaces covered by this part. It
platform from slipping off its supports.
does not apply to crane or derrick sus-
Cleats are also used to provide footing
pended personnel platforms, which are
on sloped surfaces such as crawling
covered by § 1926.550(g). The criteria for
boards.
aerial lifts are set out exclusively in
Competent person means one who is
§ 1926.453.
capable of identifying existing and pre-
(b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension dictable hazards in the surroundings or
scaffold means a suspension scaffold working conditions which are unsani-
equipped with a hoist(s) that can be op- tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
erated by an employee(s) on the scaf- ployees, and who has authorization to
fold. take prompt corrective measures to
Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal eliminate them.
transverse scaffold member (which Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold)
may be supported by ledgers or run- means a two- point or multi-point ad-
ners) upon which the scaffold platform justable suspension scaffold con-
rests and which joins scaffold uprights, structed using a series of inter-
posts, poles, and similar members. connected braced scaffold members or
Boatswains’ chair means a single- supporting structures erected to form a
point adjustable suspension scaffold continuous scaffold.
consisting of a seat or sling designed to Coupler means a device for locking
support one employee in a sitting posi- together the tubes of a tube and cou-
tion. pler scaffold.
Body belt (safety belt) means a strap Crawling board (chicken ladder) means
with means both for securing it about a supported scaffold consisting of a
the waist and for attaching it to a lan- plank with cleats spaced and secured to
yard, lifeline, or deceleration device. provide footing, for use on sloped sur-
Body harness means a design of straps faces such as roofs.
which may be secured about the em- Deceleration device means any mecha-
ployee in a manner to distribute the nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch
fall arrest forces over at least the lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear-
thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoul- ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic
ders, with means for attaching it to self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which
other components of a personal fall ar- dissipates a substantial amount of en-
rest system. ergy during a fall arrest or limits the
Brace means a rigid connection that energy imposed on an employee during
holds one scaffold member in a fixed fall arrest.
position with respect to another mem- Double pole (independent pole) scaffold
ber, or to a building or structure. means a supported scaffold consisting
273
of a platform(s) resting on cross beams Independent pole scaffold (see ‘‘Double

(bearers) supported by ledgers and a pole scaffold’’).
double row of uprights independent of Interior hung scaffold means a suspen-
support (except ties, guys, braces) from sion scaffold consisting of a platform
any structure. suspended from the ceiling or roof
Equivalent means alternative designs, structure by fixed length supports.
materials or methods to protect Ladder jack scaffold means a sup-
against a hazard which the employer ported scaffold consisting of a platform
can demonstrate will provide an equal resting on brackets attached to lad-
or greater degree of safety for employ- ders.
ees than the methods, materials or de- Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed-
signs specified in the standard. size, self-supporting ladder consisting
Exposed power lines means electrical of a wide flat tread ladder in the form
power lines which are accessible to em- of stairs.
ployees and which are not shielded Landing means a platform at the end
from contact. Such lines do not include of a flight of stairs.
extension cords or power tool cords.
Large area scaffold means a pole scaf-
Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or
fold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems
without a thimble at the end of a wire
scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold
rope.
erected over substantially the entire
Fabricated decking and planking work area. For example: a scaffold
means manufactured platforms made
erected over the entire floor area of a
of wood (including laminated wood, and
room.
solid sawn wood planks), metal or
other materials. Lean-to scaffold means a supported
scaffold which is kept erect by tilting
Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular
it toward and resting it against a
welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold
building or structure.
consisting of a platform(s) supported
on fabricated end frames with integral Lifeline means a component con-
posts, horizontal bearers, and inter- sisting of a flexible line that connects
mediate members. to an anchorage at one end to hang
Failure means load refusal, breakage, vertically (vertical lifeline), or that
or separation of component parts. Load connects to anchorages at both ends to
refusal is the point where the ultimate stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
strength is exceeded. line), and which serves as a means for
Float (ship) scaffold means a suspen- connecting other components of a per-
sion scaffold consisting of a braced sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
platform resting on two parallel bear- age.
ers and hung from overhead supports Lower levels means areas below the
by ropes of fixed length. level where the employee is located
Form scaffold means a supported scaf- and to which an employee can fall.
fold consisting of a platform supported Such areas include, but are not limited
by brackets attached to formwork. to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps,
Guardrail system means a vertical bar- runways, excavations, pits, tanks, ma-
rier, consisting of, but not limited to, terials, water, and equipment.
toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to Masons’ adjustable supported scaffold
prevent employees from falling off a (see ‘‘Self-contained adjustable scaf-
scaffold platform or walkway to lower fold’’).
levels. Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen-
Hoist means a manual or power-oper- sion scaffold means a continuous run
ated mechanical device to raise or suspension scaffold designed and used
lower a suspended scaffold. for masonry operations.
Horse scaffold means a supported scaf- Maximum intended load means the
fold consisting of a platform supported total load of all persons, equipment,
by construction horses (saw horses). tools, materials, transmitted loads,
Horse scaffolds constructed of metal and other loads reasonably anticipated
are sometimes known as trestle scaf- to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold
folds. component at any one time.
274
Mobile scaffold means a powered or fall. It consists of an anchorage, con-

unpowered, portable, caster or wheel- nectors, a body belt or body harness
mounted supported scaffold. and may include a lanyard, decelera-
Multi-level suspended scaffold means a tion device, lifeline, or combinations of
two-point or multi-point adjustable these.
suspension scaffold with a series of Platform means a work surface ele-
platforms at various levels resting on vated above lower levels. Platforms
common stirrups. can be constructed using individual
Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- wood planks, fabricated planks, fab-
fold means a suspension scaffold con- ricated decks, and fabricated plat-
sisting of a platform(s) which is sus- forms.
pended by more than two ropes from Pole scaffold (see definitions for
overhead supports and equipped with ‘‘Single-pole scaffold’’ and ‘‘Double
means to raise and lower the platform (independent) pole scaffold’’).
to desired work levels. Such scaffolds Power operated hoist means a hoist
include chimney hoists. which is powered by other than human
Needle beam scaffold means a platform energy.
suspended from needle beams. Pump jack scaffold means a supported
Open sides and ends means the edges scaffold consisting of a platform sup-
of a platform that are more than 14 ported by vertical poles and movable
inches (36 cm) away horizontally from support brackets.
a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface Qualified means one who, by posses-
(such as a building wall) or a sturdy, sion of a recognized degree, certificate,
continuous horizontal surface (such as or professional standing, or who by ex-
a floor), or a point of access. Exception: tensive knowledge, training, and expe-
For plastering and lathing operations rience, has successfully demonstrated
the horizontal threshold distance is 18 his/her ability to solve or resolve prob-
inches (46 cm). lems related to the subject matter, the
Outrigger means the structural mem- work, or the project.
ber of a supported scaffold used to in- Rated load means the manufacturer’s
crease the base width of a scaffold in specified maximum load to be lifted by
order to provide support for and in- a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or
creased stability of the scaffold. scaffold component.
Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the Repair bracket scaffold means a sup-
structural member of a suspension ported scaffold consisting of a platform
scaffold or outrigger scaffold which supported by brackets which are se-
provides support for the scaffold by ex- cured in place around the circum-
tending the scaffold point of attach- ference or perimeter of a chimney,
ment to a point out and away from the stack, tank or other supporting struc-
structure or building. ture by one or more wire ropes placed
Outrigger scaffold means a supported around the supporting structure.
scaffold consisting of a platform rest- Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop
ing on outrigger beams (thrustouts) supported scaffold consisting of a plat-
projecting beyond the wall or face of form resting on angular-shaped sup-
the building or structure, the inboard ports.
ends of which are secured inside the Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the
building or structure. lengthwise horizontal spacing or brac-
Overhand bricklaying means the proc- ing member which may support the
ess of laying bricks and masonry units bearers.
such that the surface of the wall to be Scaffold means any temporary ele-
jointed is on the opposite side of the vated platform (supported or sus-
wall from the mason, requiring the pended) and its supporting structure
mason to lean over the wall to com- (including points of anchorage), used
plete the work. It includes mason tend- for supporting employees or materials
ing and electrical installation incor- or both.
porated into the brick wall during the Self-contained adjustable scaffold
overhand bricklaying process. means a combination supported and
Personal fall arrest system means a suspension scaffold consisting of an ad-
system used to arrest an employee’s justable platform(s) mounted on an
275
independent supporting frame(s) not a points that accept runners, bearers,

part of the object being worked on, and and diagonals that can be inter-
which is equipped with a means to per- connected at predetermined levels.
mit the raising and lowering of the Tank builders’ scaffold means a sup-
platform(s). Such systems include roll- ported scaffold consisting of a platform
ing roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems, resting on brackets that are either di-
and some masons’ adjustable supported rectly attached to a cylindrical tank or
scaffolds. attached to devices that are attached
Shore scaffold means a supported scaf- to such a tank.
fold which is placed against a building Top plate bracket scaffold means a
or structure and held in place with scaffold supported by brackets that
props. hook over or are attached to the top of
Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- a wall. This type of scaffold is similar
fold means a suspension scaffold con- to carpenters’ bracket scaffolds and
sisting of a platform suspended by one form scaffolds and is used in residen-
rope from an overhead support and tial construction for setting trusses.
equipped with means to permit the Tube and coupler scaffold means a sup-
movement of the platform to desired ported or suspended scaffold consisting
work levels. of a platform(s) supported by tubing,
Single-pole scaffold means a supported erected with coupling devices con-
scaffold consisting of a platform(s) necting uprights, braces, bearers, and
resting on bearers, the outside ends of runners.
which are supported on runners secured Tubular welded frame scaffold (see
to a single row of posts or uprights, and ‘‘Fabricated frame scaffold’’).
the inner ends of which are supported Two-point suspension scaffold (swing
on or in a structure or building wall. stage) means a suspension scaffold con-
Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) sisting of a platform supported by
means a tower comprised of scaffold hangers (stirrups) suspended by two
components and which contains inter- ropes from overhead supports and
nal stairway units and rest platforms. equipped with means to permit the
These towers are used to provide access raising and lowering of the platform to
to scaffold platforms and other ele- desired work levels.
vated points such as floors and roofs.
Unstable objects means items whose
Stall load means the load at which
strength, configuration, or lack of sta-
the prime-mover of a power-operated
bility may allow them to become dis-
hoist stalls or the power to the prime-
located and shift and therefore may
mover is automatically disconnected.
not properly support the loads imposed
Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
on them. Unstable objects do not con-
fold means a platform resting directly
stitute a safe base support for scaf-
on the rungs of step ladders or trestle
folds, platforms, or employees. Exam-
ladders.
ples include, but are not limited to,
Stilts means a pair of poles or similar
barrels, boxes, loose brick, and con-
supports with raised footrests, used to
crete blocks.
permit walking above the ground or
working surface. Vertical pickup means a rope used to
Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable sus- support the horizontal rope in catenary
pension scaffold means a continuous run scaffolds.
suspension scaffold designed and used Walkway means a portion of a scaf-
for stonesetters’ operations. fold platform used only for access and
Supported scaffold means one or more not as a work level.
platforms supported by outrigger Window jack scaffold means a plat-
beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights, form resting on a bracket or jack
posts, frames, or similar rigid support. which projects through a window open-
Suspension scaffold means one or ing.
more platforms suspended by ropes or
other non-rigid means from an over- § 1926.451 General requirements.
head structure(s). This section does not apply to aerial
System scaffold means a scaffold con- lifts, the criteria for which are set out
sisting of posts with fixed connection exclusively in § 1926.453.
276
(a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in to fit around uprights when side brack-
paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5) ets are used to extend the width of the
and (g) of this section, each scaffold platform).
and scaffold component shall be capa- (ii) Where the employer makes the
ble of supporting, without failure, its demonstration provided for in para-
own weight and at least 4 times the graph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the plat-
maximum intended load applied or form shall be planked or decked as
transmitted to it. fully as possible and the remaining
(2) Direct connections to roofs and open space between the platform and
floors, and counterweights used to bal- the uprights shall not exceed 91⁄2 inches
ance adjustable suspension scaffolds, (24.1 cm).
shall be capable of resisting at least 4 Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The re-
times the tipping moment imposed by quirement in paragraph (b)(1) to pro-
the scaffold operating at the rated load vide full planking or decking does not
of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times apply to platforms used solely as walk-
the tipping moment imposed by the ways or solely by employees per-
scaffold operating at the stall load of forming scaffold erection or disman-
the hoist, whichever is greater. tling. In these situations, only the
(3) Each suspension rope, including planking that the employer establishes
connecting hardware, used on non-ad- is necessary to provide safe working
justable suspension scaffolds shall be conditions is required.
capable of supporting, without failure, (2) Except as provided in paragraphs
at least 6 times the maximum intended (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section,
load applied or transmitted to that each scaffold platform and walkway
rope. shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide.
(4) Each suspension rope, including (i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top
connecting hardware, used on adjust- plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket
able suspension scaffolds shall be capa- scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall
ble of supporting, without failure, at be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide.
least 6 times the maximum intended There is no minimum width require-
load applied or transmitted to that ment for boatswains’ chairs.
rope with the scaffold operating at ei-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to
ther the rated load of the hoist, or 2 an administrative stay effective November
(minimum) times the stall load of the 29, 1996 and published in the FEDERAL REG-
hoist, whichever is greater. ISTER on November 25, 1996, the requirement
(5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaf-
shall not exceed 3 times its rated load. folds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed
(6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking
qualified person and shall be con- regarding the minimum width of roof brack-
structed and loaded in accordance with et scaffolds has been completed, whichever is
later.
that design. Non-mandatory Appendix
A to this subpart contains examples of (ii) Where scaffolds must be used in
criteria that will enable an employer areas that the employer can dem-
to comply with paragraph (a) of this onstrate are so narrow that platforms
section. and walkways cannot be at least 18
(b) Scaffold platform construction. (1) inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and
Each platform on all working levels of walkways shall be as wide as feasible,
scaffolds shall be fully planked or and employees on those platforms and
decked between the front uprights and walkways shall be protected from fall
the guardrail supports as follows: hazards by the use of guardrails and/or
(i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold personal fall arrest systems.
plank, fabricated plank, fabricated (3) Except as provided in paragraphs
deck, or fabricated platform) shall be (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the
installed so that the space between ad- front edge of all platforms shall not be
jacent units and the space between the more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the
platform and the uprights is no more face of the work, unless guardrail sys-
than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where tems are erected along the front edge
the employer can demonstrate that a and/or personal fall arrest systems are
wider space is necessary (for example, used in accordance with paragraph (g)
277
of this section to protect employees may be coated periodically with wood

from falling. preservatives, fire-retardant finishes,
(i) The maximum distance from the and slip-resistant finishes; however,
face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 the coating may not obscure the top or
inches (8 cm); bottom wood surfaces.
(ii) The maximum distance from the (10) Scaffold components manufac-
face for plastering and lathing oper- tured by different manufacturers shall
ations shall be 18 inches (46 cm). not be intermixed unless the compo-
(4) Each end of a platform, unless nents fit together without force and
cleated or otherwise restrained by the scaffold’s structural integrity is
hooks or equivalent means, shall ex- maintained by the user. Scaffold com-
tend over the centerline of its support ponents manufactured by different
at least 6 inches (15 cm). manufacturers shall not be modified in
(5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or order to intermix them unless a com-
less in length shall not extend over its petent person determines the resulting
support more than 12 inches (30 cm) un- scaffold is structurally sound.
less the platform is designed and in- (11) Scaffold components made of dis-
stalled so that the cantilevered portion similar metals shall not be used to-
of the platform is able to support em- gether unless a competent person has
ployees and/or materials without tip- determined that galvanic action will
ping, or has guardrails which block em- not reduce the strength of any compo-
ployee access to the cantilevered end. nent to a level below that required by
(ii) Each platform greater than 10 paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
feet in length shall not extend over its (c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1)
support more than 18 inches (46 cm), Supported scaffolds with a height to
unless it is designed and installed so base width (including outrigger sup-
that the cantilevered portion of the ports, if used) ratio of more than four
platform is able to support employees to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tip-
without tipping, or has guardrails ping by guying, tying, bracing, or
which block employee access to the equivalent means, as follows:
cantilevered end. (i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in-
(6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks stalled at locations where horizontal
are abutted to create a long platform, members support both inner and outer
each abutted end shall rest on a sepa- legs.
rate support surface. This provision (ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in-
does not preclude the use of common stalled according to the scaffold manu-
support members, such as ‘‘T’’ sec- facturer’s recommendations or at the
tions, to support abutting planks, or closest horizontal member to the 4:1
hook on platforms designed to rest on height and be repeated vertically at lo-
common supports. cations of horizontal members every 20
(7) On scaffolds where platforms are feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaf-
overlapped to create a long platform, folds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and
the overlap shall occur only over sup- every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter
ports, and shall not be less than 12 for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m)
inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are wide. The top guy, tie or brace of com-
nailed together or otherwise restrained pleted scaffolds shall be placed no fur-
to prevent movement. ther than the 4:1 height from the top.
(8) At all points of a scaffold where Such guys, ties and braces shall be in-
the platform changes direction, such as stalled at each end of the scaffold and
turning a corner, any platform that at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30
rests on a bearer at an angle other than feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end
a right angle shall be laid first, and [not both] towards the other).
platforms which rest at right angles (iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers
over the same bearer shall be laid sec- shall be used to prevent the tipping of
ond, on top of the first platform. supported scaffolds in all cir-
(9) Wood platforms shall not be cov- cumstances where an eccentric load,
ered with opaque finishes, except that such as a cantilevered work platform,
platform edges may be covered or is applied or is transmitted to the scaf-
marked for identification. Platforms fold.
278
(2) Supported scaffold poles, legs, suspension scaffold connections shall

posts, frames, and uprights shall bear be designed by an engineer experienced
on base plates and mud sills or other in such scaffold design.
adequate firm foundation. (ii) Counterweights shall be made of
(i) Footings shall be level, sound, non-flowable material. Sand, gravel
rigid, and capable of supporting the and similar materials that can be eas-
loaded scaffold without settling or dis- ily dislocated shall not be used as
placement. counterweights.
(ii) Unstable objects shall not be used (iii) Only those items specifically de-
to support scaffolds or platform units. signed as counterweights shall be used
(iii) Unstable objects shall not be to counterweight scaffold systems.
used as working platforms. Construction materials such as, but
(iv) Front-end loaders and similar not limited to, masonry units and rolls
pieces of equipment shall not be used of roofing felt, shall not be used as
to support scaffold platforms unless counterweights.
they have been specifically designed by (iv) Counterweights shall be secured
the manufacturer for such use. by mechanical means to the outrigger
(v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to beams to prevent accidental displace-
support scaffold platforms unless the ment.
entire platform is attached to the fork (v) Counterweights shall not be re-
and the fork-lift is not moved hori- moved from an outrigger beam until
zontally while the platform is occu- the scaffold is disassembled.
pied. (vi) Outrigger beams which are not
(3) Supported scaffold poles, legs, stabilized by bolts or other direct con-
posts, frames, and uprights shall be nections to the floor or roof deck shall
plumb and braced to prevent swaying be secured by tiebacks.
and displacement.
(vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in
(d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1)
strength to the suspension ropes.
All suspension scaffold support devices,
such as outrigger beams, cornice (viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed
hooks, parapet clamps, and similar de- perpendicular to its bearing support
vices, shall rest on surfaces capable of (usually the face of the building or
supporting at least 4 times the load im- structure). However, where the em-
posed on them by the scaffold oper- ployer can demonstrate that it is not
ating at the rated load of the hoist (or possible to place an outrigger beam
at least 1.5 times the load imposed on perpendicular to the face of the build-
them by the scaffold at the stall capac- ing or structure because of obstruc-
ity of the hoist, whichever is greater). tions that cannot be moved, the out-
(2) Suspension scaffold outrigger rigger beam may be placed at some
beams, when used, shall be made of other angle, provided opposing angle
structural metal or equivalent tiebacks are used.
strength material, and shall be re- (ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a
strained to prevent movement. structurally sound anchorage on the
(3) The inboard ends of suspension building or structure. Sound anchor-
scaffold outrigger beams shall be sta- ages include structural members, but
bilized by bolts or other direct connec- do not include standpipes, vents, other
tions to the floor or roof deck, or they piping systems, or electrical conduit.
shall have their inboard ends stabilized (x) Tiebacks shall be installed per-
by counterweights, except masons’ pendicular to the face of the building
multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- or structure, or opposing angle
fold outrigger beams shall not be sta- tiebacks shall be installed. Single
bilized by counterweights. tiebacks installed at an angle are pro-
(i) Before the scaffold is used, direct hibited.
connections shall be evaluated by a (4) Suspension scaffold outrigger
competent person who shall confirm, beams shall be:
based on the evaluation, that the sup- (i) Provided with stop bolts or shack-
porting surfaces are capable of sup- les at both ends;
porting the loads to be imposed. In ad- (ii) Securely fastened together with
dition, masons’ multi-point adjustable the flanges turned out when channel
279
iron beams are used in place of I- rity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of
beams; the following conditions exist:
(iii) Installed with all bearing sup- (i) Any physical damage which im-
ports perpendicular to the beam center pairs the function and strength of the
line; rope.
(iv) Set and maintained with the web (ii) Kinks that might impair the
in a vertical position; and tracking or wrapping of rope around
(v) When an outrigger beam is used, the drum(s) or sheave(s).
the shackle or clevis with which the (iii) Six randomly distributed broken
rope is attached to the outrigger beam wires in one rope lay or three broken
shall be placed directly over the center wires in one strand in one rope lay.
line of the stirrup. (iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing,
(5) Suspension scaffold support de- flattening or peening causing loss of
vices such as cornice hooks, roof more than one-third of the original di-
hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or ameter of the outside wires.
similar devices shall be: (v) Heat damage caused by a torch or
(i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or any damage caused by contact with
materials of equivalent strength; electrical wires.
(ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and (vi) Evidence that the secondary
(iii) Secured against movement by brake has been activated during an
tiebacks installed at right angles to overspeed condition and has engaged
the face of the building or structure, or the suspension rope.
opposing angle tiebacks shall be in- (11) Swaged attachments or spliced
stalled and secured to a structurally eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not
sound point of anchorage on the build- be used unless they are made by the
ing or structure. Sound points of an- wire rope manufacturer or a qualified
chorage include structural members, person.
but do not include standpipes, vents, (12) When wire rope clips are used on
other piping systems, or electrical con- suspension scaffolds:
duit. (i) There shall be a minimum of 3
(iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in wire rope clips installed, with the clips
strength to the hoisting rope. a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart;
(6) When winding drum hoists are (ii) Clips shall be installed according
used on a suspension scaffold, they to the manufacturer’s recommenda-
shall contain not less than four wraps tions;
of the suspension rope at the lowest (iii) Clips shall be retightened to the
point of scaffold travel. When other manufacturer’s recommendations after
types of hoists are used, the suspension the initial loading;
ropes shall be long enough to allow the (iv) Clips shall be inspected and re-
scaffold to be lowered to the level tightened to the manufacturer’s rec-
below without the rope end passing ommendations at the start of each
through the hoist, or the rope end shall workshift thereafter;
be configured or provided with means (v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at
to prevent the end from passing the point of suspension for any scaffold
through the hoist. hoist;
(7) The use of repaired wire rope as (vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the
suspension rope is prohibited. U-bolt shall be placed over the dead
(8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be end of the rope, and the saddle shall be
joined together except through the use placed over the live end of the rope.
of eye splice thimbles connected with (13) Suspension scaffold power-oper-
shackles or coverplates and bolts. ated hoists and manual hoists shall be
(9) The load end of wire suspension tested by a qualified testing labora-
ropes shall be equipped with proper size tory.
thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and
equivalent means. hoists shall not be used on suspension
(10) Ropes shall be inspected for de- scaffolds.
fects by a competent person prior to (15) Gears and brakes of power-oper-
each workshift and after every occur- ated hoists used on suspension scaf-
rence which could affect a rope’s integ- folds shall be enclosed.
280
(16) In addition to the normal oper- (iii) When hook-on and attachable
ating brake, suspension scaffold power- ladders are used on a supported scaffold
operated hoists and manually operated more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they
hoists shall have a braking device or shall have rest platforms at 35-foot
locking pawl which engages automati- (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals.
cally when a hoist makes either of the (iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders
following uncontrolled movements: an shall be specifically designed for use
instantaneous change in momentum or with the type of scaffold used;
an accelerated overspeed. (v) Hook-on and attachable ladders
(17) Manually operated hoists shall shall have a minimum rung length of
require a positive crank force to de- 111⁄2 inches (29 cm); and
scend. (vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders
(18) Two-point and multi-point sus- shall have uniformly spaced rungs with
pension scaffolds shall be tied or other- a maximum spacing between rungs of
wise secured to prevent them from 163⁄4 inches.
swaying, as determined to be necessary (3) Stairway-type ladders shall:
based on an evaluation by a competent (i) Be positioned such that their bot-
person. Window cleaners’ anchors shall tom step is not more than 24 inches (61
not be used for this purpose. cm) above the scaffold supporting
(19) Devices whose sole function is to level;
provide emergency escape and rescue (ii) Be provided with rest platforms
shall not be used as working platforms. at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical in-
This provision does not preclude the tervals;
use of systems which are designed to (iii) Have a minimum step width of 16
function both as suspension scaffolds inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaf-
and emergency systems. fold stairway-type ladders shall have a
(e) Access. This paragraph applies to minimum step width of 111⁄2 inches (30
scaffold access for all employees. Ac- cm); and
cess requirements for employees erect- (iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all
ing or dismantling supported scaffolds steps and landings.
are specifically addressed in paragraph (4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/
(e)(9) of this section. towers) shall be positioned such that
(1) When scaffold platforms are more their bottom step is not more than 24
than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold sup-
point of access, portable ladders, hook- porting level.
on ladders, attachable ladders, stair (i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail
towers (scaffold stairways/towers), and a midrail shall be provided on each
stairway-type ladders (such as ladder side of each scaffold stairway.
stands), ramps, walkways, integral pre- (ii) The toprail of each stairrail sys-
fabricated scaffold access, or direct ac- tem shall also be capable of serving as
cess from another scaffold, structure, a handrail, unless a separate handrail
personnel hoist, or similar surface is provided.
shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be (iii) Handrails, and toprails that
used as a means of access. serve as handrails, shall provide an
(2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable adequate handhold for employees
ladders (Additional requirements for grasping them to avoid falling.
the proper construction and use of (iv) Stairrail systems and handrails
portable ladders are contained in sub- shall be surfaced to prevent injury to
part X of this part—Stairways and employees from punctures or lacera-
Ladders): tions, and to prevent snagging of cloth-
(i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable ing.
ladders shall be positioned so as not to (v) The ends of stairrail systems and
tip the scaffold; handrails shall be constructed so that
(ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders they do not constitute a projection
shall be positioned so that their bot- hazard.
tom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are
cm) above the scaffold supporting used as handrails, shall be at least 3
level; inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
281
(vii) Stairrails shall be not less than (v) Be provided with rest platforms at
28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical in-
inches (94 cm) from the upper surface tervals on all supported scaffolds more
of the stairrail to the surface of the than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and
tread, in line with the face of the riser (vi) Have a maximum spacing be-
at the forward edge of the tread. tween rungs of 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). Non-
(viii) A landing platform at least 18 uniform rung spacing caused by joining
inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 end frames together is allowed, pro-
inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided vided the resulting spacing does not ex-
at each level. ceed 163⁄4 inches (43 cm).
(ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at (7) Steps and rungs of ladder and
least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between stairway type access shall line up
stairrails. vertically with each other between rest
(x) Treads and landings shall have platforms.
slip-resistant surfaces. (8) Direct access to or from another
(xi) Stairways shall be installed be- surface shall be used only when the
tween 40 degrees and 60 degrees from scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36
the horizontal. cm) horizontally and not more than 24
(xii) Guardrails meeting the require- inches (61 cm) vertically from the other
ments of paragraph (g)(4) of this sec- surface.
tion shall be provided on the open sides (9) Effective September 2, 1997, access
and ends of each landing. for employees erecting or dismantling
(xiii) Riser height shall be uniform, supported scaffolds shall be in accord-
within 1⁄4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight ance with the following:
of stairs. Greater variations in riser (i) The employer shall provide safe
height are allowed for the top and bot- means of access for each employee
tom steps of the entire system, not for erecting or dismantling a scaffold
each flight of stairs. where the provision of safe access is
(xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform, feasible and does not create a greater
within 1⁄4 inch, for each flight of stairs. hazard. The employer shall have a com-
(5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps petent person determine whether it is
and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more feasible or would pose a greater hazard
above lower levels shall have guardrail to provide, and have employees use a
systems which comply with subpart M safe means of access. This determina-
of this part—Fall Protection; tion shall be based on site conditions
(ii) No ramp or walkway shall be in- and the type of scaffold being erected
clined more than a slope of one (1) or dismantled.
vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 de- (ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders
grees above the horizontal). shall be installed as soon as scaffold
(iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walk- erection has progressed to a point that
way is steeper than one (1) vertical in permits safe installation and use.
eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walk- (iii) When erecting or dismantling tu-
way shall have cleats not more than bular welded frame scaffolds, (end)
fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which frames, with horizontal members that
are securely fastened to the planks to are parallel, level and are not more
provide footing. than 22 inches apart vertically may be
(6) Integral prefabricated scaffold ac- used as climbing devices for access,
cess frames shall: provided they are erected in a manner
(i) Be specifically designed and con- that creates a usable ladder and pro-
structed for use as ladder rungs; vides good hand hold and foot space.
(ii) Have a rung length of at least 8 (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded
inches (20 cm); frame scaffolds shall not be used as a
(iii) Not be used as work platforms means of access or egress.
when rungs are less than 111⁄2 inches in (f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold com-
length, unless each affected employee ponents shall not be loaded in excess of
uses fall protection, or a positioning their maximum intended loads or rated
device, which complies with § 1926.502; capacities, whichever is less.
(iv) Be uniformly spaced within each (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaf-
frame section; folds is prohibited.
282
(3) Scaffolds and scaffold components unless they have been designed by a
shall be inspected for visible defects by registered professional engineer spe-
a competent person before each work cifically for such movement or, for mo-
shift, and after any occurrence which bile scaffolds, where the provisions of
could affect a scaffold’s structural in- § 1926.452(w) are followed.
tegrity. (6) The clearance between scaffolds
(4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or and power lines shall be as follows:
weakened such that its strength is less Scaffolds shall not be erected, used,
than that required by paragraph (a) of
dismantled, altered, or moved such
this section shall be immediately re-
paired or replaced, braced to meet that they or any conductive material
those provisions, or removed from serv- handled on them might come closer to
ice until repaired. exposed and energized power lines than
(5) Scaffolds shall not be moved hori- as follows:
zontally while employees are on them,
Insulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives
voltage
Less than 300 volts .......................... 3 feet (0.9 m).

300 volts to 50 kv ............................ 10 feet (3.1m).
More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
Uninsulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives

voltage
Less than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m).

More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
EXCEPTION TO PARAGRAPH (f)(6): Scaffolds (10) Suspension ropes supporting ad-

and materials may be closer to power lines justable suspension scaffolds shall be of
than specified above where such clearance is a diameter large enough to provide suf-
necessary for performance of work, and only
ficient surface area for the functioning
after the utility company, or electrical sys-
tem operator, has been notified of the need
of brake and hoist mechanisms.
to work closer and the utility company, or (11) Suspension ropes shall be shield-
electrical system operator, has deenergized ed from heat-producing processes.
the lines, relocated the lines, or installed When acids or other corrosive sub-
protective coverings to prevent accidental stances are used on a scaffold, the
contact with the lines. ropes shall be shielded, treated to pro-
(7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, tect against the corrosive substances,
dismantled, or altered only under the or shall be of a material that will not
supervision and direction of a com- be damaged by the substance being
petent person qualified in scaffold erec- used.
tion, moving, dismantling or alter- (12) Work on or from scaffolds is pro-
ation. Such activities shall be per- hibited during storms or high winds
formed only by experienced and trained unless a competent person has deter-
employees selected for such work by mined that it is safe for employees to
the competent person. be on the scaffold and those employees
(8) Employees shall be prohibited are protected by a personal fall arrest
from working on scaffolds covered with system or wind screens. Wind screens
snow, ice, or other slippery material shall not be used unless the scaffold is
except as necessary for removal of such secured against the anticipated wind
materials. forces imposed.
(9) Where swinging loads are being (13) Debris shall not be allowed to ac-
hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that cumulate on platforms.
the loads might contact the scaffold, (14) Makeshift devices, such as but
tag lines or equivalent measures to not limited to boxes and barrels, shall
control the loads shall be used. not be used on top of scaffold platforms
283
to increase the working level height of (v) If the scaffold grounding lead is
employees. disconnected at any time, the welding
(15) Ladders shall not be used on scaf- machine shall be shut off; and
folds to increase the working level (vi) An active welding rod or
height of employees, except on large uninsulated welding lead shall not be
area scaffolds where employers have allowed to contact the scaffold or its
satisfied the following criteria: suspension system.
(i) When the ladder is placed against (g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee
a structure which is not a part of the on a scaffold more than 10 feet (3.1 m)
scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured above a lower level shall be protected
against the sideways thrust exerted by from falling to that lower level. Para-
the ladder; graphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this
(ii) The platform units shall be se- section establish the types of fall pro-
cured to the scaffold to prevent their tection to be provided to the employees
movement; on each type of scaffold. Paragraph
(iii) The ladder legs shall be on the (g)(2) of this section addresses fall pro-
same platform or other means shall be tection for scaffold erectors and dis-
provided to stabilize the ladder against mantlers.
unequal platform deflection, and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1): The fall protec-
(iv) The ladder legs shall be secured tion requirements for employees installing
to prevent them from slipping or being suspension scaffold support systems on
pushed off the platform. floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are
(16) Platforms shall not deflect more set forth in subpart M of this part.
than 1⁄60 of the span when loaded. (i) Each employee on a boatswains’
(17) To reduce the possibility of weld- chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold,
ing current arcing through the suspen- needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack
sion wire rope when performing weld- scaffold shall be protected by a per-
ing from suspended scaffolds, the fol- sonal fall arrest system;
lowing precautions shall be taken, as (ii) Each employee on a single-point
applicable: or two-point adjustable suspension
(i) An insulated thimble shall be used scaffold shall be protected by both a
to attach each suspension wire rope to personal fall arrest system and guard-
its hanging support (such as cornice rail system;
hook or outrigger). Excess suspension (iii) Each employee on a crawling
wire rope and any additional inde- board (chicken ladder) shall be pro-
pendent lines from grounding shall be tected by a personal fall arrest system,
insulated; a guardrail system (with minimum 200
(ii) The suspension wire rope shall be pound toprail capacity), or by a three-
covered with insulating material ex- fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline
tending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the or equivalent handhold securely fas-
hoist. If there is a tail line below the tened beside each crawling board;
hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent (iv) Each employee on a self-con-
contact with the platform. The portion tained adjustable scaffold shall be pro-
of the tail line that hangs free below tected by a guardrail system (with
the scaffold shall be guided or retained, minimum 200 pound toprail capacity)
or both, so that it does not become when the platform is supported by the
grounded; frame structure, and by both a per-
(iii) Each hoist shall be covered with sonal fall arrest system and a guardrail
insulated protective covers; system (with minimum 200 pound top-
(iv) In addition to a work lead at- rail capacity) when the platform is sup-
tachment required by the welding proc- ported by ropes;
ess, a grounding conductor shall be (v) Each employee on a walkway lo-
connected from the scaffold to the cated within a scaffold shall be pro-
structure. The size of this conductor tected by a guardrail system (with
shall be at least the size of the welding minimum 200 pound toprail capacity)
process work lead, and this conductor installed within 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm) of
shall not be in series with the welding and along at least one side of the walk-
process or the work piece; way.
284
(vi) Each employee performing (iii) When lanyards are connected to

overhand bricklaying operations from horizontal lifelines or structural mem-
a supported scaffold shall be protected bers on a single-point or two-point ad-
from falling from all open sides and justable suspension scaffold, the scaf-
ends of the scaffold (except at the side fold shall be equipped with additional
next to the wall being laid) by the use independent support lines and auto-
of a personal fall arrest system or matic locking devices capable of stop-
guardrail system (with minimum 200 ping the fall of the scaffold in the event
pound toprail capacity). one or both of the suspension ropes
(vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise fail. The independent support lines
specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through shall be equal in number and strength
(g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee to the suspension ropes.
shall be protected by the use of per- (iv) Vertical lifelines, independent
sonal fall arrest systems or guardrail support lines, and suspension ropes
systems meeting the requirements of shall not be attached to each other, nor
paragraph (g)(4) of this section. shall they be attached to or use the
(2) Effective September 2, 1997, the same point of anchorage, nor shall they
employer shall have a competent per- be attached to the same point on the
son determine the feasibility and safe- scaffold or personal fall arrest system.
ty of providing fall protection for em- (4) Guardrail systems installed to
ployees erecting or dismantling sup- meet the requirements of this section
ported scaffolds. Employers are re- shall comply with the following provi-
quired to provide fall protection for sions (guardrail systems built in ac-
employees erecting or dismantling sup- cordance with Appendix A to this sub-
ported scaffolds where the installation part will be deemed to meet the re-
and use of such protection is feasible quirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii),
and does not create a greater hazard. (viii), and (ix) of this section):
(i) Guardrail systems shall be in-
(3) In addition to meeting the re-
stalled along all open sides and ends of
quirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall
platforms. Guardrail systems shall be
arrest systems used on scaffolds shall
installed before the scaffold is released
be attached by lanyard to a vertical for use by employees other than erec-
lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold tion/dismantling crews.
structural member. Vertical lifelines (ii) The top edge height of toprails or
shall not be used when overhead com- equivalent member on supported scaf-
ponents, such as overhead protection folds manufactured or placed in service
or additional platform levels, are part after January 1, 2000 shall be installed
of a single-point or two-point adjust- between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches
able suspension scaffold. (1.2 m) above the platform surface. The
(i) When vertical lifelines are used, top edge height on supported scaffolds
they shall be fastened to a fixed safe manufactured and placed in service be-
point of anchorage, shall be inde- fore January 1, 2000, and on all sus-
pendent of the scaffold, and shall be pended scaffolds where both a guardrail
protected from sharp edges and abra- and a personal fall arrest system are
sion. Safe points of anchorage include required shall be between 36 inches (0.9
structural members of buildings, but m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When condi-
do not include standpipes, vents, other tions warrant, the height of the top
piping systems, electrical conduit, out- edge may exceed the 45-inch height,
rigger beams, or counterweights. provided the guardrail system meets
(ii) When horizontal lifelines are all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4).
used, they shall be secured to two or (iii) When midrails, screens, mesh,
more structural members of the scaf- intermediate vertical members, solid
fold, or they may be looped around panels, or equivalent structural mem-
both suspension and independent sus- bers are used, they shall be installed
pension lines (on scaffolds so equipped) between the top edge of the guardrail
above the hoist and brake attached to system and the scaffold platform.
the end of the scaffold. Horizontal life- (iv) When midrails are used, they
lines shall not be attached only to the shall be installed at a height approxi-
suspension ropes. mately midway between the top edge of
285
the guardrail system and the platform (xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall
surface. not be used as a toprail or midrail.
(v) When screens and mesh are used, (xiv) Manila or plastic (or other syn-
they shall extend from the top edge of thetic) rope being used for toprails or
the guardrail system to the scaffold midrails shall be inspected by a com-
platform, and along the entire opening petent person as frequently as nec-
between the supports. essary to ensure that it continues to
(vi) When intermediate members meet the strength requirements of
(such as balusters or additional rails) paragraph (g) of this section.
are used, they shall not be more than (xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in
19 inches (48 cm) apart. place of a midrail when the crossing
(vii) Each toprail or equivalent mem- point of two braces is between 20 inches
ber of a guardrail system shall be capa- (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the
ble of withstanding, without failure, a work platform or as a toprail when the
force applied in any downward or hori- crossing point of two braces is between
zontal direction at any point along its 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m)
top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n) above the work platform. The end
for guardrail systems installed on sin- points at each upright shall be no more
gle-point adjustable suspension scaf- than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart.
folds or two-point adjustable suspen- (h) Falling object protection. (1) In ad-
sion scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds dition to wearing hardhats each em-
(890 n) for guardrail systems installed ployee on a scaffold shall be provided
on all other scaffolds. with additional protection from falling
(viii) When the loads specified in hand tools, debris, and other small ob-
paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are jects through the installation of
applied in a downward direction, the toeboards, screens, or guardrail sys-
top edge shall not drop below the tems, or through the erection of debris
height above the platform surface that nets, catch platforms, or canopy struc-
is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of tures that contain or deflect the falling
this section. objects. When the falling objects are
(ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- too large, heavy or massive to be con-
mediate vertical members, solid pan- tained or deflected by any of the above-
els, and equivalent structural members listed measures, the employer shall
of a guardrail system shall be capable place such potential falling objects
of withstanding, without failure, a away from the edge of the surface from
force applied in any downward or hori- which they could fall and shall secure
zontal direction at any point along the those materials as necessary to prevent
midrail or other member of at least 75 their falling.
pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems (2) Where there is a danger of tools,
with a minimum 100 pound toprail ca- materials, or equipment falling from a
pacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) scaffold and striking employees below,
for guardrail systems with a minimum the following provisions apply:
200 pound toprail capacity. (i) The area below the scaffold to
(x) Suspension scaffold hoists and which objects can fall shall be barri-
non-walk-through stirrups may be used caded, and employees shall not be per-
as end guardrails, if the space between mitted to enter the hazard area; or
the hoist or stirrup and the side guard- (ii) A toeboard shall be erected along
rail or structure does not allow passage the edge of platforms more than 10 feet
of an employee to the end of the scaf- (3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance
fold. sufficient to protect employees below,
(xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to except on float (ship) scaffolds where
prevent injury to an employee from an edging of 3⁄4 × 11⁄2 inch (2 × 4 cm)
punctures or lacerations, and to pre- wood or equivalent may be used in lieu
vent snagging of clothing. of toeboards;
(xii) The ends of all rails shall not (iii) Where tools, materials, or equip-
overhang the terminal posts except ment are piled to a height higher than
when such overhang does not con- the top edge of the toeboard, paneling
stitute a projection hazard to employ- or screening extending from the
ees. toeboard or platform to the top of the
286
guardrail shall be erected for a dis- § 1926.452 Additional requirements ap-

tance sufficient to protect employees plicable to specific types of scaf-
below; or folds.
(iv) A guardrail system shall be in- In addition to the applicable require-
stalled with openings small enough to ments of § 1926.451, the following re-
prevent passage of potential falling ob- quirements apply to the specific types
jects; or of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not
(v) A canopy structure, debris net, or specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such
catch platform strong enough to with- as but not limited to systems scaffolds,
stand the impact forces of the poten- must meet the requirements of
tial falling objects shall be erected § 1926.451.
over the employees below. (a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms
are being moved to the next level, the
(3) Canopies, when used for falling ob-
existing platform shall be left undis-
ject protection, shall comply with the
turbed until the new bearers have been
following criteria: set in place and braced, prior to receiv-
(i) Canopies shall be installed being the new platforms.
tween the falling object hazard and the (2) Crossbracing shall be installed be-
employees. tween the inner and outer sets of poles
(ii) When canopies are used on sus- on double pole scaffolds.
pension scaffolds for falling object pro- (3) Diagonal bracing in both direc-
tection, the scaffold shall be equipped tions shall be installed across the en-
with additional independent support tire inside face of double-pole scaffolds
lines equal in number to the number of used to support loads equivalent to a
points supported, and equivalent in uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds
strength to the strength of the suspen- (222 kg) or more per square foot (929
sion ropes. square cm).
(iii) Independent support lines and (4) Diagonal bracing in both direc-
suspension ropes shall not be attached tions shall be installed across the en-
to the same points of anchorage. tire outside face of all double- and sin-
gle-pole scaffolds.
(4) Where used, toeboards shall be:
(5) Runners and bearers shall be in-
(i) Capable of withstanding, without stalled on edge.
failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (6) Bearers shall extend a minimum
(222 n) applied in any downward or hor- of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside
izontal direction at any point along the edges of runners.
toeboard (toeboards built in accord- (7) Runners shall extend over a min-
ance with Appendix A to this subpart imum of two poles, and shall be sup-
will be deemed to meet this require- ported by bearing blocks securely at-
ment); and tached to the poles.
(ii) At least three and one-half inches (8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall
(9 cm) high from the top edge of the not be spliced between poles.
toeboard to the level of the walking/ (9) Where wooden poles are spliced,
working surface. Toeboards shall be se- the ends shall be squared and the upper
curely fastened in place at the outer- section shall rest squarely on the lower
most edge of the platform and have not section. Wood splice plates shall be
more than 1⁄4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance provided on at least two adjacent sides,
above the walking/working surface. and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m)
Toeboards shall be solid or with open- on either side of the splice, overlap the
ings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the abutted ends equally, and have at least
greatest dimension. the same cross-sectional areas as the
pole. Splice plates of other materials of
[61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and equivalent strength may be used.
amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996] (10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 61 FR 59832, Nov. height shall be designed by a registered
25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and professional engineer, and shall be con-
certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25, structed and loaded in accordance with
1997, or until further rulemaking has been that design. Non-mandatory Appendix
completed, whichever is later. A to this subpart contains examples of
287
criteria that will enable an employer both the inside and outside posts at
to comply with design and loading re- level heights (when tube and coupler
quirements for pole scaffolds under 60 guardrails and midrails are used on
feet in height. outside posts, they may be used in lieu
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) of outside runners).
When platforms are being moved to the (8) Runners shall be interlocked on
next level, the existing platform shall straight runs to form continuous
be left undisturbed until the new bear- lengths, and shall be coupled to each
ers have been set in place and braced post. The bottom runners and bearers
prior to receiving the new platforms. shall be located as close to the base as
(2) Transverse bracing forming an possible.
‘‘X’’ across the width of the scaffold (9) Couplers shall be of a structural
shall be installed at the scaffold ends metal, such as drop-forged steel, malle-
and at least at every third set of posts able iron, or structural grade alu-
horizontally (measured from only one minum. The use of gray cast iron is
end) and every fourth runner prohibited.
vertically. Bracing shall extend diago- (10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over
nally from the inner or outer posts or 125 feet in height shall be designed by
runners upward to the next outer or a registered professional engineer, and
inner posts or runners. Building ties shall be constructed and loaded in ac-
shall be installed at the bearer levels cordance with such design. Non-manda-
between the transverse bracing and tory Appendix A to this subpart con-
shall conform to the requirements of tains examples of criteria that will en-
§ 1926.451(c)(1). able an employer to comply with de-
(3) On straight run scaffolds, longitu- sign and loading requirements for tube
dinal bracing across the inner and and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in
outer rows of posts shall be installed height.
diagonally in both directions, and shall (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular
extend from the base of the end posts welded frame scaffolds). (1) When mov-
upward to the top of the scaffold at ap- ing platforms to the next level, the ex-
proximately a 45 degree angle. On scaf- isting platform shall be left undis-
folds whose length is greater than their turbed until the new end frames have
height, such bracing shall be repeated been set in place and braced prior to re-
beginning at least at every fifth post. ceiving the new platforms.
On scaffolds whose length is less than (2) Frames and panels shall be braced
their height, such bracing shall be in- by cross, horizontal, or diagonal
stalled from the base of the end posts braces, or combination thereof, which
upward to the opposite end posts, and secure vertical members together lat-
then in alternating directions until erally. The cross braces shall be of such
reaching the top of the scaffold. Brac- length as will automatically square
ing shall be installed as close as pos- and align vertical members so that the
sible to the intersection of the bearer erected scaffold is always plumb, level,
and post or runner and post. and square. All brace connections shall
(4) Where conditions preclude the at- be secured.
tachment of bracing to posts, bracing (3) Frames and panels shall be joined
shall be attached to the runners as together vertically by coupling or
close to the post as possible. stacking pins or equivalent means.
(5) Bearers shall be installed trans- (4) Where uplift can occur which
versely between posts, and when cou- would displace scaffold end frames or
pled to the posts, shall have the in- panels, the frames or panels shall be
board coupler bear directly on the run- locked together vertically by pins or
ner coupler. When the bearers are cou- equivalent means.
pled to the runners, the couplers shall (5) Brackets used to support canti-
be as close to the posts as possible. levered loads shall:
(6) Bearers shall extend beyond the (i) Be seated with side-brackets par-
posts and runners, and shall provide allel to the frames and end-brackets at
full contact with the coupler. 90 degrees to the frames;
(7) Runners shall be installed along (ii) Not be bent or twisted from these
the length of the scaffold, located on positions; and
288
(iii) Be used only to support perform wales either bolted to the form or
sonnel, unless the scaffold has been de- secured by snap ties or tie bolts ex-
signed for other loads by a qualified en- tending through the form and securely
gineer and built to withstand the tip- anchored; or, for carpenters’ bracket
ping forces caused by those other loads scaffolds only, by a bolt extending
being placed on the bracket-supported through to the opposite side of the
section of the scaffold. structure’s wall.
(6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in (2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds
height above their base plates shall be shall be an integral part of the form
designed by a registered professional panel.
engineer, and shall be constructed and (3) Folding type metal brackets,
loaded in accordance with such design. when extended for use, shall be either
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large bolted or secured with a locking-type
area scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be con- pin.
structed in accordance with paragraphs
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold
(a), (b), or (c) of this section, as appro-
brackets shall be constructed to fit the
priate.
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds pitch of the roof and shall provide a
(squares). (1) Scaffolds made of wood level support for the platform.
shall be reinforced with gussets on (2) Brackets (including those pro-
both sides of each corner. vided with pointed metal projections)
(2) Diagonal braces shall be installed shall be anchored in place by nails un-
on all sides of each square. less it is impractical to use nails. When
(3) Diagonal braces shall be installed nails are not used, brackets shall be se-
between squares on the rear and front cured in place with first-grade manila
sides of the scaffold, and shall extend rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9
from the bottom of each square to the cm) diameter, or equivalent.
top of the next square. (i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard
(4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three end of outrigger beams, measured from
tiers in height, and shall be so con- the fulcrum point to the extreme point
structed and arranged that one square of anchorage, shall be not less than one
rests directly above the other. The and one-half times the outboard end in
upper tiers shall stand on a continuous length.
row of planks laid across the next (2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the
lower tier, and shall be nailed down or shape of an I-beam or channel shall be
otherwise secured to prevent displace- placed so that the web section is
ment. vertical.
(f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall (3) The fulcrum point of outrigger
not be constructed or arranged more beams shall rest on secure bearings at
than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each hori-
height, whichever is less. zontal dimension.
(2) When horses are arranged in tiers, (4) Outrigger beams shall be secured
each horse shall be placed directly over
in place against movement, and shall
the horse in the tier below.
be securely braced at the fulcrum point
(3) When horses are arranged in tiers,
against tipping.
the legs of each horse shall be nailed
down or otherwise secured to prevent (5) The inboard ends of outrigger
displacement. beams shall be securely anchored ei-
(4) When horses are arranged in tiers, ther by means of braced struts bearing
each tier shall be crossbraced. against sills in contact with the over-
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ head beams or ceiling, or by means of
bracket scaffolds. (1) Each bracket, extension members secured to the floor
cept those for wooden bracket-form joists underfoot, or by both.
scaffolds, shall be attached to the sup- (6) The entire supporting structure
porting formwork or structure by shall be securely braced to prevent any
means of one or more of the following: horizontal movement.
nails; a metal stud attachment device; (7) To prevent their displacement,
welding; hooking over a secured struc- platform units shall be nailed, bolted,
tural supporting member, with the or otherwise secured to outriggers.
289
(8) Scaffolds and scaffold components (4) Ladders used to support ladder
shall be designed by a registered pro- jacks shall be placed, fastened, or
fessional engineer and shall be con- equipped with devices to prevent slip-
structed and loaded in accordance with ping.
such design. (5) Scaffold platforms shall not be
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack bridged one to another.
brackets, braces, and accessories shall (l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds
be fabricated from metal plates and an- shall be securely attached to the win-
gles. Each pump jack bracket shall dow opening.
have two positive gripping mechanisms (2) Scaffolds shall be used only for
to prevent any failure or slippage. the purpose of working at the window
(2) Poles shall be secured to the opening through which the jack is
structure by rigid triangular bracing or placed.
equivalent at the bottom, top, and (3) Window jacks shall not be used to
other points as necessary. When the support planks placed between one win-
pump jack has to pass bracing already dow jack and another, or for other ele-
installed, an additional brace shall be ments of scaffolding.
installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
above the brace to be passed, and shall (1) Crawling boards shall extend from
be left in place until the pump jack has the roof peak to the eaves when used in
been moved and the original brace re- connection with roof construction, re-
installed. pair, or maintenance.
(3) When guardrails are used for fall (2) Crawling boards shall be secured
protection, a workbench may be used to the roof by ridge hooks or by means
as the toprail only if it meets all the that meet equivalent criteria (e.g.,
requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii), strength and durability).
(vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451. (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder
scaffolds. (1) Scaffold platforms shall
(4) Work benches shall not be used as
not be placed any higher than the sec-
scaffold platforms.
ond highest rung or step of the ladder
(5) When poles are made of wood, the supporting the platform.
pole lumber shall be straight-grained, (2) All ladders used in conjunction
free of shakes, large loose or dead with step, platform and trestle ladder
knots, and other defects which might scaffolds shall meet the pertinent re-
impair strength. quirements of subpart X of this part—
(6) When wood poles are constructed Stairways and Ladders, except that
of two continuous lengths, they shall job-made ladders shall not be used to
be joined together with the seam par- support such scaffolds.
allel to the bracket. (3) Ladders used to support step, plat-
(7) When two by fours are spliced to form, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall
make a pole, mending plates shall be be placed, fastened, or equipped with
installed at all splices to develop the devices to prevent slipping.
full strength of the member. (4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms to another.
shall not exceed a height of 20 feet (6.1 (o) Single-point adjustable suspension
m). scaffolds. (1) When two single-point ad-
(2) All ladders used to support ladder justable suspension scaffolds are com-
jack scaffolds shall meet the require- bined to form a two-point adjustable
ments of subpart X of this part—Stair- suspension scaffold, the resulting two-
ways and Ladders, except that job- point scaffold shall comply with the re-
made ladders shall not be used to sup- quirements for two-point adjustable
port ladder jack scaffolds. suspension scaffolds in paragraph (p) of
(3) The ladder jack shall be so de- this section.
signed and constructed that it will bear (2) The supporting rope between the
on the side rails and ladder rungs or on scaffold and the suspension device shall
the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on be kept vertical unless all of the fol-
rungs only, the bearing area shall in- lowing conditions are met:
clude a length of at least 10 inches (25.4 (i) The rigging has been designed by a
cm) on each rung. qualified person, and
290
(ii) The scaffold is accessible to res- of all blocks shall fit the size of the
cuers, and rope used.
(iii) The supporting rope is protected (4) Platforms shall be of the ladder-
to ensure that it will not chafe at any type, plank-type, beam-type, or light-
point where a change in direction oc- metal type. Light metal-type plat-
curs, and forms having a rated capacity of 750
(iv) The scaffold is positioned so that pounds or less and platforms 40 feet
swinging cannot bring the scaffold into (12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested
contact with another surface. and listed by a nationally recognized
(3) Boatswains’ chair tackle shall testing laboratory.
consist of correct size ball bearings or (5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be
bushed blocks containing safety hooks bridged or otherwise connected one to
and properly ‘‘eye-spliced’’ minimum another during raising and lowering
five-eighth (5⁄8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter operations unless the bridge connec-
first-grade manila rope, or other rope tions are articulated (attached), and
which will satisfy the criteria (e.g., the hoists properly sized.
strength and durability) of manila (6) Passage may be made from one
rope. platform to another only when the
(4) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall platforms are at the same height, are
be reeved through four corner holes in abutting, and walk-through stirrups
the seat; shall cross each other on the specifically designed for this purpose
underside of the seat; and shall be are used.
rigged so as to prevent slippage which
(q) Multi-point adjustable suspension
could cause an out-of-level condition.
scaffolds, stonesetters’ multi-point adjust-
(5) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall
able suspension scaffolds, and masons’
be a minimum of five-eight (5⁄8) inch
multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
(1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or
folds. (1) When two or more scaffolds
other rope which will satisfy the cri-
are used they shall not be bridged one
teria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, du-
to another unless they are designed to
rability, etc.) of first grade manila
be bridged, the bridge connections are
rope.
articulated, and the hoists are properly
(6) When a heat-producing process
sized.
such as gas or arc welding is being con-
ducted, boatswains’ chair seat slings (2) If bridges are not used, passage
shall be a minimum of three-eight (3⁄8) may be made from one platform to an-
inch (1.0 cm) wire rope. other only when the platforms are at
(7) Non-cross-laminated wood boat- the same height and are abutting.
swains’ chairs shall be reinforced on (3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from
their underside by cleats securely fas- metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope
tened to prevent the board from split- slings, hooks, or means that meet
ting. equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du-
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension rability).
scaffolds (swing stages). The following (r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more
requirements do not apply to two-point than one platform shall be placed be-
adjustable suspension scaffolds used as tween consecutive vertical pickups,
masons’ or stonesetters’ scaffolds. and no more than two platforms shall
Such scaffolds are covered by para- be used on a catenary scaffold.
graph (q) of this section. (2) Platforms supported by wire ropes
(1) Platforms shall not be more than shall have hook-shaped stops on each
36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed end of the platforms to prevent them
by a qualified person to prevent unsta- from slipping off the wire ropes. These
ble conditions. hooks shall be so placed that they will
(2) The platform shall be securely fas- prevent the platform from falling if
tened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks.
or by other means which satisfy the re- (3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened
quirements of § 1926.451(a). to the extent that the application of a
(3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic scaffold load will overstress them.
ropes shall consist of at least one dou- (4) Wire ropes shall be continuous
ble and one single block. The sheaves and without splices between anchors.
291
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The plat- support the scaffold in the event the
form shall be supported by a minimum suspension rope(s) fail.
of two bearers, each of which shall (2) Independent support lines and sus-
project a minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) pension ropes shall not be attached to
beyond the platform on both sides. the same points of anchorage.
Each bearer shall be securely fastened (3) Supports for platforms shall be at-
to the platform. tached directly to the support stirrup
(2) Rope connections shall be such and not to any other platform.
that the platform cannot shift or slip. (w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall
(3) When only two ropes are used be braced by cross, horizontal, or di-
with each float: agonal braces, or combination thereof,
(i) They shall be arranged so as to to prevent racking or collapse of the
provide four ends which are securely scaffold and to secure vertical mem-
fastened to overhead supports. bers together laterally so as to auto-
(ii) Each supporting rope shall be matically square and align the vertical
hitched around one end of the bearer members. Scaffolds shall be plumb,
and pass under the platform to the level, and squared. All brace connec-
other end of the bearer where it is tions shall be secured.
hitched again, leaving sufficient rope (i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and
at each end for the supporting ties. coupler components shall also comply
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaf- with the requirements of paragraph (b)
folds shall be suspended only from the of this section;
roof structure or other structural (ii) Scaffolds constructed of fab-
member such as ceiling beams. ricated frame components shall also
(2) Overhead supporting members comply with the requirements of para-
(roof structure, ceiling beams, or other graph (c) of this section.
structural members) shall be inspected (2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall
and checked for strength before the be locked with positive wheel and/or
scaffold is erected. wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent
(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall means, to prevent movement of the
be connected to the overhead sup- scaffold while the scaffold is used in a
porting members by shackles, clips, stationary manner.
thimbles, or other means that meet (3) Manual force used to move the
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- scaffold shall be applied as close to the
rability). base as practicable, but not more than
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting sur-
support beams shall be installed on face.
edge. (4) Power systems used to propel mo-
(2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for bile scaffolds shall be designed for such
supports, except that one end of a nee- use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor
dle beam scaffold may be supported by vehicles or add-on motors shall not be
a permanent structural member. used to propel scaffolds unless the scaf-
(3) The ropes shall be securely at- fold is designed for such propulsion sys-
tached to the needle beams. tems.
(4) The support connection shall be (5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to
arranged so as to prevent the needle prevent tipping during movement.
beam from rolling or becoming dis- (6) Employees shall not be allowed to
placed. ride on scaffolds unless the following
(5) Platform units shall be securely conditions exist:
attached to the needle beams by bolts (i) The surface on which the scaffold
or equivalent means. Cleats and over- is being moved is within 3 degrees of
hang are not considered to be adequate level, and free of pits, holes, and ob-
means of attachment. structions;
(v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1) (ii) The height to base width ratio of
Scaffolds shall be equipped with addi- the scaffold during movement is two to
tional independent support lines, equal one or less, unless the scaffold is de-
in number to the number of points sup- signed and constructed to meet or ex-
ported, and of equivalent strength to ceed nationally recognized stability
the suspension ropes, and rigged to test requirements such as those listed
292
in paragraph (x) of Appendix A to this protected from damage due to contact

subpart (ANSI/SIA A92.5 and A92.6); with edges, corners, protrusions, or
(iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are other discontinuities of the supporting
installed on both sides of the scaffold; structure or scaffold components.
(iv) When power systems are used, (7) Tensioning of each wire rope used
the propelling force is applied directly for securing brackets in place or as an
to the wheels, and does not produce a anchorage for personal fall arrest sys-
speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3 tems shall be by means of a turnbuckle
mps); and at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or
(v) No employee is on any part of the by equivalent means.
scaffold which extends outward beyond (8) Each turnbuckle shall be con-
the wheels, casters, or other supports. nected to the other end of its rope by
(7) Platforms shall not extend out- use of an eyesplice thimble of a size ap-
ward beyond the base supports of the propriate to the turnbuckle to which it
scaffold unless outrigger frames or is attached.
equivalent devices are used to ensure (9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be
stability. used on any wire rope used to secure
(8) Where leveling of the scaffold is brackets or to serve as an anchor for
necessary, screw jacks or equivalent personal fall arrest systems.
means shall be used. (10) The employer shall ensure that
(9) Caster stems and wheel stems materials shall not be dropped to the
shall be pinned or otherwise secured in outside of the supporting structure.
scaffold legs or adjustment screws. (11) Scaffold erection shall progress
(10) Before a scaffold is moved, each in only one direction around any struc-
employee on the scaffold shall be made ture.
aware of the move. (y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brack- used in accordance with the following
ets shall be secured in place by at least requirements:
one wire rope at least 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) (1) An employee may wear stilts on a
in diameter. scaffold only if it is a large area scaf-
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to fold.
the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a (2) When an employee is using stilts
positive locking device capable of pre- on a large area scaffold where a guard-
venting the unintentional detachment rail system is used to provide fall pro-
of the bracket from the rope, or by tection, the guardrail system shall be
equivalent means. increased in height by an amount equal
(3) Each bracket, at the contact point to the height of the stilts being used by
between the supporting structure and the employee.
the bottom of the bracket, shall be pro- (3) Surfaces on which stilts are used
vided with a shoe (heel block or foot) shall be flat and free of pits, holes and
capable of preventing the lateral move- obstructions, such as debris, as well as
ment of the bracket. other tripping and falling hazards.
(4) Platforms shall be secured to the (4) Stilts shall be properly main-
brackets in a manner that will prevent tained. Any alteration of the original
the separation of the platforms from equipment shall be approved by the
the brackets and the movement of the manufacturer.
platforms or the brackets on a com-
pleted scaffold. § 1926.453 Aerial lifts.
(5) When a wire rope is placed around (a) General requirements. (1) Unless
the structure in order to provide a safe otherwise provided in this section, aer-
anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- ial lifts acquired for use on or after
tems used by employees erecting or January 22, 1973 shall be designed and
dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope constructed in conformance with the
shall meet the requirements of subpart applicable requirements of the Amer-
M of this part, but shall be at least 5⁄16 ican National Standards for ‘‘Vehicle
inch (0.8 cm) in diameter. Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work
(6) Each wire rope used for securing Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2–1969, including
brackets in place or as an anchorage appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before
for personal fall arrest systems shall be January 22, 1973 which do not meet the
293
requirements of ANSI A92.2–1969, may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(v): As of Janu-

not be used after January 1, 1976, un- ary 1, 1998, subpart M of this part
less they shall have been modified so as (§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not
to conform with the applicable design acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest
system. The use of a body belt in a tethering
and construction requirements of ANSI system or in a restraint system is acceptable
A92.2–1969. Aerial lifts include the fol- and is regulated under § 1926.502(e).
lowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial
devices used to elevate personnel to (vi) Boom and basket load limits
job-sites above ground: specified by the manufacturer shall not
(i) Extensible boom platforms; be exceeded.
(ii) Aerial ladders; (vii) The brakes shall be set and when
(iii) Articulating boom platforms; outriggers are used, they shall be posi-
(iv) Vertical towers; and tioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel
(v) A combination of any such de- chocks shall be installed before using
vices. Aerial equipment may be made an aerial lift on an incline, provided
of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced they can be safely installed.
plastic (FRP), or other material; may (viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be
be powered or manually operated; and moved when the boom is elevated in a
are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or working position with men in the bas-
not they are capable of rotating about ket, except for equipment which is spe-
a substantially vertical axis. cifically designed for this type of oper-
(2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi- ation in accordance with the provisions
fied’’ for uses other than those in- of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this sec-
tended by the manufacturer provided tion.
the modification has been certified in (ix) Articulating boom and extensible
writing by the manufacturer or by any boom platforms, primarily designed as
other equivalent entity, such as a na- personnel carriers, shall have both
tionally recognized testing laboratory, platform (upper) and lower controls.
to be in conformity with all applicable Upper controls shall be in or beside the
provisions of ANSI A92.2–1969 and this platform within easy reach of the oper-
section and to be at least as safe as the ator. Lower controls shall provide for
equipment was before modification. overriding the upper controls. Controls
(b) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder shall be plainly marked as to their
trucks and tower trucks. Aerial ladders function. Lower level controls shall not
shall be secured in the lower traveling be operated unless permission has been
position by the locking device on top of obtained from the employee in the lift,
the truck cab, and the manually oper-
except in case of emergency.
ated device at the base of the ladder be-
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while
fore the truck is moved for highway
performing work from an aerial lift.
travel.
(2) Extensible and articulating boom (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial
platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test- lift shall not be altered in any manner
ed each day prior to use to determine that might reduce its insulating value.
that such controls are in safe working (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for
condition. travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected
(ii) Only authorized persons shall op- to see that it is properly cradled and
erate an aerial lift. outriggers are in stowed position ex-
(iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, cept as provided in paragraph
structure, or equipment while working (b)(2)(viii) of this section.
from an aerial lift shall not be per- (3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests
mitted. shall conform to the requirements of
(iv) Employees shall always stand ANSI A92.2–1969 section 5. However
firmly on the floor of the basket, and equivalent d.c.; voltage tests may be
shall not sit or climb on the edge of the used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified
basket or use planks, ladders, or other in A92.2–1969; d.c. voltage tests which
devices for a work position. are approved by the equipment manu-
(v) A body belt shall be worn and a facturer or equivalent entity shall be
lanyard attached to the boom or bas- considered an equivalent test for the
ket when working from an aerial lift. purpose of this paragraph (b)(3).
294
(4) Bursting safety factor. The provi- the procedures to control or minimize
sions of the American National Stand- those hazards. The training shall in-
ards Institute standard ANSI A92.2– clude the following areas, as applica-
1969, section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor ble:
shall apply to all critical hydraulic and (1) The nature of any electrical haz-
pneumatic components. Critical com- ards, fall hazards and falling object
ponents are those in which a failure hazards in the work area;
would result in a free fall or free rota- (2) The correct procedures for dealing
tion of the boom. All noncritical com- with electrical hazards and for erect-
ponents shall have a bursting safety ing, maintaining, and disassembling
factor of at least 2 to 1.
the fall protection systems and falling
(5) Welding standards. All welding
object protection systems being used;
shall conform to the following stand-
ards as applicable: (3) The proper use of the scaffold, and
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure, the proper handling of materials on the
AWS B3.0–41. scaffold;
(ii) Recommended Practices for (4) The maximum intended load and
Automotive Welding Design, AWS the load-carrying capacities of the
D8.4–61. scaffolds used; and
(iii) Standard Qualification of Weld- (5) Any other pertinent requirements
ing Procedures and Welders for Piping of this subpart.
and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69. (b) The employer shall have each em-
(iv) Specifications for Welding High- ployee who is involved in erecting, dis-
way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69. assembling, moving, operating, repair-
NOTE TO § 1926.453: Non-mandatory Appen- ing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaf-
dix C to this subpart lists examples of na- fold trained by a competent person to
tional consensus standards that are consid- recognize any hazards associated with
ered to provide employee protection equiva- the work in question. The training
lent to that provided through the application shall include the following topics, as
of ANSI A92.2–1969, where appropriate. This applicable:
incorporation by reference was approved by
the Director of the Federal Register in ac- (1) The nature of scaffold hazards;
cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part (2) The correct procedures for erect-
51. Copies may be obtained from the Amer- ing, disassembling, moving, operating,
ican National Standards Institute. Copies repairing, inspecting, and maintaining
may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occu- the type of scaffold in question;
pational Safety and Health Administration,
U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
(3) The design criteria, maximum in-
Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or tended load-carrying capacity and in-
at the National Archives and Records Ad- tended use of the scaffold;
ministration (NARA). For information on (4) Any other pertinent requirements
the availability of this material at NARA, of this subpart.
call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://
(c) When the employer has reason to
www.archives.gov/federallregister/
codeloflfederallregulations/ believe that an employee lacks the
ibrllocations.html. skill or understanding needed for safe
work involving the erection, use or dis-
[61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov.
25, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, mantling of scaffolds, the employer
2004] shall retrain each such employee so
that the requisite proficiency is re-
§ 1926.454 Training requirements. gained. Retraining is required in at
This section supplements and clari- least the following situations:
fies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2) (1) Where changes at the worksite
as these relate to the hazards of work present a hazard about which an em-
on scaffolds. ployee has not been previously trained;
(a) The employer shall have each em- or
ployee who performs work while on a (2) Where changes in the types of
scaffold trained by a person qualified scaffolds, fall protection, falling object
in the subject matter to recognize the protection, or other equipment present
hazards associated with the type of a hazard about which an employee has
scaffold being used and to understand not been previously trained; or
295
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
(3) Where inadequacies in an affected (r) Catenary scaffolds.

employee’s work involving scaffolds in- (s) Float (ship) scaffolds.
dicate that the employee has not re- (t) Interior hung scaffolds.
(u) Needle beam scaffolds.
tained the requisite proficiency.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds.
NON-MANDATORY APPENDICES (w) Mobile scaffolds.
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds.
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX A TO SUB- (y) Stilts.
(z) Tank builders’ scaffolds.
PART L OF PART 1926—SCAFFOLD
SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL GUIDELINES AND TABLES
This Appendix provides non-mandatory (a) The following tables, and the tables in
guidelines to assist employers in complying Part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, as-
with the requirements of subpart L of this sume that all load-carrying timber members
part. An employer may use these guidelines (except planks) of the scaffold are a min-
and tables as a starting point for designing imum of 1,500 lb-f/in2 (stress grade) construc-
scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do tion grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi-
not provide all the information necessary to nal sizes as provided in the American
build a complete system, and the employer is Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January
still responsible for designing and assem- 1970, except that, where rough sizes are
bling these components in such a way that noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the
the completed system will meet the require- size specified will satisfy minimum require-
ments of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components ments.
which are not selected and loaded in accord- (b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks
ance with this Appendix, and components for shall be selected for such use following the
which no specific guidelines or tables are grading rules established by a recognized
given in this Appendix (e.g., joints, ties, lumber grading association or by an inde-
components for wood pole scaffolds more pendent lumber grading inspection agency.
than 60 feet in height, components for heavy- Such planks shall be identified by the grade
duty horse scaffolds, components made with stamp of such association or agency. The as-
other materials, and components with other sociation or agency and the grading rules
dimensions, etc.) must be designed and con- under which the wood is graded shall be cer-
structed in accordance with the capacity re- tified by the Board of Review, American
quirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in ac- Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in
cordance with § 1926.451(d)(1). the American Softwood Lumber Standard of
the U.S. Department of Commerce.
Index to Appendix A for Subpart L (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in
1. General guidelines and tables. compliance with the National Design Speci-
2. Specific guidelines and tables. fication for Wood Construction published by
(a) Pole scaffolds: the National Forest Products Association;
Single-pole wood pole scaffolds. paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8–1988 Scaffolding-
Independent wood pole scaffolds. Safety Requirements published by the Amer-
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. ican National Standards Institute; or for 2×10
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. inch (nominal) or 2×9 inch (rough) solid sawn
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’ and large area wood planks, as shown in the following table:
scaffolds.
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. Maximum per- Maximum per-
missible span
(f) Horse scaffolds. missible span
Maximum intended nominal using full thick- using nominal
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket load ness un- thickness
scaffolds. (lb/ft2) dressed lumber
lumber
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (ft)
(ft)
(i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level).
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. 25 ....................................... 10 8
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. 50 ....................................... 8 6
(l) Window jack scaffolds. 75 ....................................... 6
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
(n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaf- (ii) The maximum permissible span for 11⁄4
folds. × 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thick-
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- ness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/
folds. ft.2 shall be 4 feet.
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaf- (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may
folds. be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks.
(q)(1) Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable Maximum spans for such units shall be as
suspension scaffolds. recommended by the manufacturer based on
(2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- the maximum intended load being calculated
sion scaffolds. as follows:
296
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A
Rated load Intended load

capacity
Light-duty ................... • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Medium-duty .............. • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Heavy-duty ................. • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
One-person ................ • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds).
Two-person ................ • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds).
Three-person ............. • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of
the center of the span (total 750 pounds).
NOTE: Platform units used to make scaf- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch structural angle iron; or
fold platforms intended for light-duty use 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
shall be capable of supporting at least 25 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
pounds per square foot applied uniformly ing.
over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength
point load placed on the unit at the center of to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or
the span, whichever load produces the great- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 structural angle
er shear force. iron; or
(d) Guardrails shall be as follows: 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
(i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or ing.
11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or
(v) Distance between posts shall not exceed
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990
8 feet.
inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing.
(e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2
(ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength
inch nominal planking laid tight, or 3⁄4-inch
to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or
plywood.
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural
angle iron; or (f) Screen installed between toeboards and
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18
1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh.
ing.
2. SPECIFIC GUIDELINES AND TABLES.
(iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in
strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or (a) Pole Scaffolds.
SINGLE POLE WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2) ................... 25 ......................... 25 ......................... 50 ......................... 75

Poles or uprights ........................................... 2×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×6 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet
Maximum pole spacing (transverse) ............. 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet
Runners ......................................................... 1×4 in ................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet ............................................... 2×4 in ................... 2×4 in ................... 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
5 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
(rough).
6 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
8 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 9 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 ft. 6 in.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×6 in. or 11⁄4×4 in 2×4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 2×4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16×2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Maximum intended load ................................ 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 50 lbs/ft2 .............. 75 lbs/ft2.
Poles or uprights ........................................... 2×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet.
Maximum (transverse) ................................... 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 8 feet.
Runners ......................................................... 11⁄4×4 in ............... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
297
INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS—Continued

3 feet ............................................... 2×4 in ................... 2×4 in ................... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in. (rough).
6 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in. (rough).
3×8 in.
8 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in .................
3×8 in.
10 feet ............................................. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or ..............................
3×3 in.
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 feet ................... 6 feet.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×6 in. or 11⁄4×4 in 2×4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 2×4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16×2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
Maximum intended load .......... 25 lbs/ft2

................................. 50 lbs/ft2................................. 75 lbs/ft2.
Posts, runners and braces ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)
OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe.
Bearers .................................... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 6
ft.×10 ft.. ft.×7 ft. or. ft.×6 ft.
Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 6
ft.×8 ft.*.
Maximum runner spacing 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in.
vertically.
* Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.
NOTE: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (±5°).
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PLANKED LEVELS

Maximum number of addi-
tional planked levels Maximum
height of
Me- scaffold
Light Heavy
dium (in feet)
duty duty
duty
Number of Working Levels:

1 ...................................................................................................................... 16 11 6 125
2 ...................................................................................................................... 11 1 0 125
3 ...................................................................................................................... 6 0 0 125
4 ...................................................................................................................... 1 0 0 125
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2*

their prefabricated nature, no additional Maximum width: 5 ft.
guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are Maximum height: 5 ft.
being adopted in this Appendix. Gussets: 1 × 6 in.
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large area Braces: 1 × 8 in.
scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or Legs: 2 × 6 in.
tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a)
and (b)) may be applied. * The squares shall be set not more than 8
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not
more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf-
folds.
298
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A
Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guide-
(f) Horse scaffolds. lines or tables are given.
Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ (i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No spe-
ft.2 ** cific guidelines or tables are given.
Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 (j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not
lb/ft.2 ** exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended
Horizontal members or bearers: load—500 lbs between poles; applied at the
Light duty: 2 × 4 in. center of the span. Not more than two em-
Medium duty: 3 × 4 in. ployees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at
Legs: 2 × 4 in. one time between any two supports. When 2
Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in. × 4’s are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch
Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in. wood pole, they shall be spliced with ‘‘10
Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. penny’’ common nails no more than 12 inches
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket center to center, staggered uniformly from
scaffolds. the opposite outside edges.
(1) Brackets shall consist of a triangular- (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum in-
shaped frame made of wood with a cross-sec- tended load—25 lb/ft2. However, not more
tion not less than 2 inches by 3 inches, or of than two employees shall occupy any plat-
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle form at any one time. Maximum span be-
iron. tween supports shall be 8 feet.
(2) Bolts used to attach brackets to struc- (l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than
tures shall not be less than 5⁄8 inches in di- one employee shall occupy a window jack
ameter. scaffold at any one time.
(3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
feet on centers. Crawling boards shall be not less than 10
(4) No more than two employees shall oc- inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats
cupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form having a minimum 1 × 11⁄2 inch cross-sec-
scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials tional area. The cleats shall be equal in
shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the length to the width of the board and spaced
occupancy. at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches.
(5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds: (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
folds. No additional guidelines or tables are
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 given.
Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in.
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf-
Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in.
folds. Maximum intended load—250 lbs. Wood
Braces: 1 × 6 in.
seats for boatswains’ chairs shall be not less
Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated
ft. 6 in. wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine
(i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two quality plywood.
pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
sides of the vertical support.
(1) In addition to direct connections to build-
(ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets
ings (except window cleaners’ anchors) ac-
shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches
ceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway in-
from the outside of the form support, and
clude angulated roping and static lines. An-
shall be braced and secured to prevent tip-
gulated roping is a system of platform sus-
ping or turning. The knee or angle brace
pension in which the upper wire rope sheaves
shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from
or suspension points are closer to the plane
the form at an angle of approximately 45 de-
of the building face than the corresponding
grees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a
attachment points on the platform, thus
vertical support.
causing the platform to press against the
(6) Metal bracket scaffolds: face of the building. Static lines are separate
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 ropes secured at their top and bottom ends
Uprights: 2 × 4 inch closer to the plane of the building face than
Bearers: As designed. the outermost edge of the platform. By draw-
Braces: As designed. ing the static line taut, the platform is
(7) Wood bracket scaffolds: drawn against the face of the building.
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a
Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in working load of 500 pounds, no more than
Bearers: 2 × 6 in two employees shall be permitted on the
Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds
Braces: 1 × 6 in with a working load of 750 pounds, no more
than three employees shall be permitted on
the scaffold at one time.
** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side string-
feet apart for light duty loads, and not more er shall be of clear straight-grained spruce.
than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak,
299
ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diame- washers on both ends. The flooring strips
ter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart,
side stringers at least 7⁄8 inch. The stringers except at the side rails where the space may
shall be tied together with tie rods not less be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be
than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through constructed in accordance with the following
the stringers and riveted up tight against table:
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ................................ 12 feet .............. 14 & 16 feet ...... 18 & 20 feet.
Side stringers, minimum cross section
(finished sizes):
At ends .......................................... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 3 in.
At middle ....................................... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 4 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................. A1⁄8 × 7⁄8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached
to the side or underside, full length.
Rungs ................................................... Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at
least 7⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum
spacing shall be 12 inches to center.
Tie rods:
Number (minimum) ........................ 3 ....................... 4 ....................... 4
Diameter (minimum) ...................... ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch
14
Flooring, minimum finished size ........... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ............................................................... 22 & 24 ft .......... 28 & 30 ft.

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):
At ends ......................................................................... 13⁄4×3 in ............ 13⁄4 × 31⁄2 in.
At middle ...................................................................... 13⁄4 × 41⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 5 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................................................ A1⁄8 × 7⁄8-inch steel reinforcing strip
shall be attached to the side or
underside, full length.
Rungs .................................................................................. Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum
diameter with at least 7⁄8 inch in
diameter tenons, and the max-
imum spacing shall be 12 inches
to center. Tie rods.
Number (minimum) ....................................................... 5 ....................... 6.
Diameter (minimum) ..................................................... 1⁄4 in .................. 1⁄4 in.
Flooring, minimum finished size .......................................... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type plat- flat and set into the upper edge of the string-
forms shall be composed of not less than ers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more
nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, con- than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross
nected together on the underside with cleats beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced
at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 more than 1⁄2 inch apart.
inches from each end. A bar or other effec- (q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
tive means shall be securely fastened to the folds and stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable
platform at each end to prevent the platform suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or
from slipping off the hanger. The span be- tables are given for these scaffolds.
tween hangers for plank-type platforms shall (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension
not exceed 10 feet. scaffolds. Maximum intended load—50 lb/ft2.
(5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms Each outrigger beam shall be at least a
shall have side stringers of lumber not less standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at
than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span be- least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not
tween hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the
beam platforms are used. The flooring shall bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6
be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid
300
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. C
feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com- (3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported
posed of stronger beams or multiple beams. on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum in- the scaffold plank level between the inner-
tended load—500 lbs. most edge of the scaffold platform and the
(2) Not more than two employees shall be curved plate structure of the tank shell to
permitted on the scaffold at one time. serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner
(3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall guardrail assembly where the space between
be 2,000 lbs. the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12
(4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space
more than 50 feet apart. on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches
(5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope
at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved appropriately placed, or guardrails in ac-
plow steel wire rope.
cordance with § 1926.451(e)(4), shall be in-
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum in-
stalled in order to reduce that open space to
tended load—750 lbs.
less than 12 inches (30.48 cm).
(2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch ply-
wood, equivalent in rating to American Ply- (4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimen-
wood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exte- sioned 2-inch (5.1 cm)×12-inch (30.5 cm) Doug-
rior. las Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select
(3) Bearers shall be made from 2×4 inch, or Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir
1×10 inch rough lumber. They shall be free of planks shall have a fiber stress of at least
knots and other flaws. 1900 lb/in2 (130,929 n/cm2) and a modulus of
(4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in2
at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade (130,929,000 n/cm2), while Yellow Pine planks
manila rope. shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. (172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of
Bearers (use on edge): 2×10 in. at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/cm2).
Maximum intended load: Maximum span (5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a
25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be sup-
50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. ported by angle irons attached to brackets
75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft. welded to the steel plates. These guardrails
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. shall comply with § 1926.451(e)(4). Guardrail
supports shall be located at no greater than
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
10 feet 6 inch intervals.
Beams: 4×6 in.
Maximum platform span: 8 ft.
Maximum beam span: 10 ft.
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX B TO SUB-
(1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle PART L OF PART 1926—CRITERIA FOR
beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice. DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF
The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL
bowline knot or by a round turn and a half PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD EREC-
hitch. TORS AND DISMANTLERS [RE-
(2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
SERVED]
at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade
manila rope.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No addi- (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX C TO SUB-
tional guidelines or tables are being given PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF NA-
for these scaffolds. TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
(w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as de-
scribed in the ANSI A92 series documents, as ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990 Vehicle-Mounted Ele-
appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be vating and Rotating Aerial Devices
used to establish stability for the purpose of ANSI/SIA A92.3–1990 Manually Propelled Ele-
§ 1926.452(w)(6). vating Aerial Platforms
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional ANSI/SIA A92.5–1990 Boom Supported Ele-
guidelines or tables are being given for these vating Work Platforms
scaffolds. ANSI/SIA A92.6–1990 Self-Propelled Elevating
(y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables Work Platforms
are given. ANSI/SIA A92.7–1990 Airline Ground Support
(z) Tank builder’s scaffold.
Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices
(1) The maximum distance between brack-
ANSI/SIA A92.8–1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge
ets to which scaffolding and guardrail sup-
ports are attached shall be no more than 10 Inspection and Maintenance Devices
feet 6 inches. ANSI/SIA A92.9–1993 Mast-Climbing Work
(2) Not more than three employees shall Platforms
occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold plank-
ing at any time.
301
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX D TO SUB- • parts inspection

PART L—LIST OF TRAINING TOPICS • erection/dismantling planning
FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DIS- • guys, ties and braces
MANTLERS
• fall protection
• general safety
This Appendix D is provided to serve as a • access and platforms
guide to assist employers when evaluating • erection/dismantling procedures
the training needs of employees erecting or • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
dismantling supported scaffolds. • System Scaffolds
The Agency believes that employees erect- • specific regulations and standards
ing or dismantling scaffolds should be • components
trained in the following topics: • parts inspection
• General Overview of Scaffolding • erection/dismantling planning
• regulations and standards • guys, ties and braces
• erection/dismantling planning • fall protection
• PPE and proper procedures • general safety
• fall protection • access and platforms
• materials handling • erection/dismantling procedures
• access • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
• working platforms
• foundations Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should
• guys, ties and braces all receive the general overview, and, in ad-
• Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds dition, specific training for the type of sup-
• specific regulations and standards ported scaffold being erected or dismantled.
• components
• parts inspection (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX E TO SUB-
• erection/dismantling planning PART L—DRAWINGS AND ILLUSTRA-
• guys, ties and braces TIONS
• fall protection
• general safety This Appendix provides drawings of par-
• access and platforms ticular types of scaffolds and scaffold compo-
• erection/dismantling procedures nents, and graphic illustrations of bracing
• rolling scaffold assembly patterns and tie spacing patterns.
• putlogs This Appendix is intended to provide visual
• Tube and Clamp Scaffolds guidance to assist the user in complying
• specific regulations and standards with the requirements of subpart L, part
• components 1926.
302
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E
303
ER30au96.000</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD
304
ER30au96.001
305
ER30au96.002</GPH>
306
ER30au96.003</GPH>
307
ER30au96.004</GPH>
308
ER30au96.005</GPH>
309
ER30au96.006</GPH>
310
ER30au96.007</GPH>
[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
Subpart M—Fall Protection § 1926.500 Scope, application, and defi-

nitions applicable to this subpart.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (a) Scope and application. (1) This sub-
and Safety Standards Act (Construction part sets forth requirements and cri-
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 4, 6, 8, Occu- teria for fall protection in construction
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 workplaces covered under 29 CFR part
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Or- 1926. Exception: The provisions of this
ders Nos. 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111);
subpart do not apply when employees
and 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), as applicable, and 29
CFR Part 1911. are making an inspection, investiga-
tion, or assessment of workplace condi-
SOURCE: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless tions prior to the actual start of con-
otherwise noted.
struction work or after all construc-
tion work has been completed.
311
ER30au96.008</GPH>
(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those belts, lanyards and lifelines used for
workplaces, conditions, operations, and fall protection during tank and com-
circumstances for which fall protection munication and broadcast tower erec-
shall be provided except as follows: tion. Paragraphs (b),(c) and (f) of
(i) Requirements relating to fall pro- § 1926.107 provide definitions for the
tection for employees working on scaf- pertinent terms.)
folds are provided in subpart L of this (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth require-
part. ments for training in the installation
(ii) Requirements relating to fall pro- and use of fall protection systems, ex-
tection for employees working on cer- cept in relation to steel erection ac-
tain cranes and derricks are provided tivities.
in subpart N of this part. (b) Definitions.
(iii) Fall protection requirements for Anchorage means a secure point of at-
employees performing steel erection tachment for lifelines, lanyards or de-
work (except for towers and tanks) are celeration devices.
provided in subpart R of this part. Body belt (safety belt) means a strap
(iv) Requirements relating to fall with means both for securing it about
protection for employees working on the waist and for attaching it to a lan-
certain types of equipment used in tun- yard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
neling operations are provided in sub- Body harness means straps which
part S of this part. may be secured about the employee in
(v) Requirements relating to fall pro- a manner that will distribute the fall
tection for employees engaged in the arrest forces over at least the thighs,
erection of tanks and communication pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with
and broadcast towers are provided in means for attaching it to other compo-
§ 1926.105. nents of a personal fall arrest system.
(vi) Requirements relating to fall Buckle means any device for holding
protection for employees engaged in the body belt or body harness closed
the construction of electric trans- around the employee’s body.
mission and distribution lines and Connector means a device which is
equipment are provided in subpart V of used to couple (connect) parts of the
this part. personal fall arrest system and posi-
(vii) Requirements relating to fall tioning device systems together. It
protection for employees working on may be an independent component of
stairways and ladders are provided in the system, such as a carabiner, or it
subpart X of this part. may be an integral component of part
(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the re- of the system (such as a buckle or dee-
quirements for the installation, con- ring sewn into a body belt or body har-
struction, and proper use of fall protec- ness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to
tion required by part 1926, except as a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
follows: Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an
(i) Performance requirements for area in which certain work (e.g.,
guardrail systems used on scaffolds and overhand bricklaying) may take place
performance requirements for falling without the use of guardrail systems,
object protection used on scaffolds are personal fall arrest systems, or safety
provided in subpart L of this part. net systems and access to the zone is
(ii) Performance requirements for controlled.
stairways, stairrail systems, and hand- Dangerous equipment means equip-
rails are provided in subpart X of this ment (such as pickling or galvanizing
part. tanks, degreasing units, machinery,
(iii) Additional performance require- electrical equipment, and other units)
ments for personal climbing equip- which, as a result of form or function,
ment, lineman’s body belts, safety may be hazardous to employees who
straps, and lanyards are provided in fall onto or into such equipment.
subpart V of this part. Deceleration device means any mecha-
(iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch
the erection of tanks and communica- lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear-
tion and broadcast towers. (Note: Sec- ing or deforming lanyards, automatic
tion 1926.104 sets the criteria for body self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc.,
312
which serves to dissipate a substantial Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,

amount of energy during a fall arrest, wire rope, or strap which generally has
or otherwise limit the energy imposed a connector at each end for connecting
on an employee during fall arrest. the body belt or body harness to a de-
Deceleration distance means the addi- celeration device, lifeline, or anchor-
tional vertical distance a falling em- age.
ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon- Leading edge means the edge of a
gation and free fall distance, before floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or
stopping, from the point at which the other walking/working surface (such as
deceleration device begins to operate. the deck) which changes location as ad-
It is measured as the distance between ditional floor, roof, decking, or
the location of an employee’s body belt formwork sections are placed, formed,
or body harness attachment point at or constructed. A leading edge is con-
the moment of activation (at the onset sidered to be an ‘‘unprotected side and
of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration edge’’ during periods when it is not ac-
device during a fall, and the location of tively and continuously under con-
that attachment point after the em- struction.
ployee comes to a full stop. Lifeline means a component con-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sisting of a flexible line for connection
materials, or methods to protect to an anchorage at one end to hang
against a hazard which the employer vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
can demonstrate will provide an equal nection to anchorages at both ends to
or greater degree of safety for employ- stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
ees than the methods, materials or de- line), and which serves as a means for
signs specified in the standard. connecting other components of a per-
Failure means load refusal, breakage, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
or separation of component parts. Load age.
refusal is the point where the ultimate
Low-slope roof means a roof having a
strength is exceeded.
slope less than or equal to 4 in 12
Free fall means the act of falling be-
(vertical to horizontal).
fore a personal fall arrest system be-
gins to apply force to arrest the fall. Lower levels means those areas or sur-
Free fall distance means the vertical faces to which an employee can fall.
displacement of the fall arrest attach- Such areas or surfaces include, but are
ment point on the employee’s body belt not limited to, ground levels, floors,
or body harness between onset of the platforms, ramps, runways, exca-
fall and just before the system begins vations, pits, tanks, material, water,
to apply force to arrest the fall. This equipment, structures, or portions
distance excludes deceleration dis- thereof.
tance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, Mechanical equipment means all
but includes any deceleration device motor or human propelled wheeled
slide distance or self-retracting life- equipment used for roofing work, ex-
line/lanyard extension before they op- cept wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
erate and fall arrest forces occur. Opening means a gap or void 30
Guardrail system means a barrier inches (76 cm) or more high and 18
erected to prevent employees from fall- inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall
ing to lower levels. or partition, through which employees
Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 can fall to a lower level.
cm) or more in its least dimension, in Overhand bricklaying and related work
a floor, roof, or other walking/working means the process of laying bricks and
surface. masonry units such that the surface of
Infeasible means that it is impossible the wall to be jointed is on the opposite
to perform the construction work using side of the wall from the mason, requir-
a conventional fall protection system ing the mason to lean over the wall to
(i.e., guardrail system, safety net sys- complete the work. Related work in-
tem, or personal fall arrest system) or cludes mason tending and electrical in-
that it is technologically impossible to stallation incorporated into the brick
use any one of these systems to provide wall during the overhand bricklaying
fall protection. process.
313
Personal fall arrest system means a (2) The non-locking type with a self-
system used to arrest an employee in a closing keeper which remains closed
fall from a working level. It consists of until pressed open for connection or
an anchorage, connectors, a body belt disconnection. As of January 1, 1998,
or body harness and may include a lan- the use of a non-locking snaphook as
yard, deceleration device, lifeline, or part of personal fall arrest systems and
suitable combinations of these. As of positioning device systems is prohib-
January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt ited.
for fall arrest is prohibited. Steep roof means a roof having a slope
Positioning device system means a body greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to hori-
belt or body harness system rigged to zontal).
allow an employee to be supported on Toeboard means a low protective bar-
an elevated vertical surface, such as a rier that will prevent the fall of mate-
wall, and work with both hands free rials and equipment to lower levels and
while leaning. provide protection from falls for per-
Rope grab means a deceleration de- sonnel.
vice which travels on a lifeline and Unprotected sides and edges means any
automatically, by friction, engages the side or edge (except at entrances to
lifeline and locks so as to arrest the points of access) of a walking/working
fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or run-
ally employs the principle of inertial way where there is no wall or guardrail
locking, cam/level locking, or both. system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
Roof means the exterior surface on Walking/working surface means any
the top of a building. This does not in- surface, whether horizontal or vertical
clude floors or formwork which, be- on which an employee walks or works,
cause a building has not been com- including, but not limited to, floors,
pleted, temporarily become the top roofs, ramps, bridges, runways,
surface of a building. formwork and concrete reinforcing
Roofing work means the hoisting, steel but not including ladders, vehi-
storage, application, and removal of cles, or trailers, on which employees
roofing materials and equipment, in- must be located in order to perform
cluding related insulation, sheet metal, their job duties.
and vapor barrier work, but not includ- Warning line system means a barrier
ing the construction of the roof deck. erected on a roof to warn employees
Safety-monitoring system means a safe- that they are approaching an unpro-
ty system in which a competent person tected roof side or edge, and which des-
is responsible for recognizing and warn- ignates an area in which roofing work
ing employees of fall hazards. may take place without the use of
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a guardrail, body belt, or safety net sys-
deceleration device containing a drum- tems to protect employees in the area.
wound line which can be slowly ex- Work area means that portion of a
tracted from, or retracted onto, the walking/working surface where job du-
drum under slight tension during nor- ties are being performed.
mal employee movement, and which, [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60
after onset of a fall, automatically FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18,
locks the drum and arrests the fall. 2001]
Snaphook means a connector com-
prised of a hook-shaped member with a § 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
normally closed keeper, or similar ar- (a) General. (1) This section sets forth
rangement, which may be opened to requirements for employers to provide
permit the hook to receive an object fall protection systems. All fall protec-
and, when released, automatically tion required by this section shall con-
closes to retain the object. Snaphooks form to the criteria set forth in
are generally one of two types: § 1926.502 of this subpart.
(1) The locking type with a self-clos- (2) The employer shall determine if
ing, self-locking keeper which remains the walking/working surfaces on which
closed and locked until unlocked and its employees are to work have the
pressed open for connection or dis- strength and structural integrity to
connection; or support employees safely. Employees
314
shall be allowed to work on those sur- opening or out over the edge of the ac-
faces only when the surfaces have the cess opening (to receive or guide equip-
requisite strength and structural integ- ment and materials, for example), that
rity. employee shall be protected from fall
(b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. hazards by a personal fall arrest sys-
Each employee on a walking/working tem.
surface (horizontal and vertical sur- (4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walk-
face) with an unprotected side or edge ing/working surfaces shall be protected
which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a from falling through holes (including
lower level shall be protected from fall- skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m)
ing by the use of guardrail systems, above lower levels, by personal fall ar-
safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail sys-
rest systems. tems erected around such holes.
(2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee (ii) Each employee on a walking/
who is constructing a leading edge 6 working surface shall be protected
feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels from tripping in or stepping into or
shall be protected from falling by through holes (including skylights) by
guardrail systems, safety net systems, covers.
or personal fall arrest systems. Excep-
(iii) Each employee on a walking/
tion: When the employer can dem-
working surface shall be protected
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates
from objects falling through holes (in-
a greater hazard to use these systems,
cluding skylights) by covers.
the employer shall develop and imple-
ment a fall protection plan which (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel.
meets the requirements of paragraph Each employee on the face of formwork
(k) of § 1926.502. or reinforcing steel shall be protected
NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to
sible and will not create a greater hazard to lower levels by personal fall arrest sys-
implement at least one of the above-listed tems, safety net systems, or posi-
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the tioning device systems.
employer has the burden of establishing that (6) Ramps, runways, and other walk-
it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- ways. Each employee on ramps, run-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) ways, and other walkways shall be pro-
for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
of implementing any of those systems.
tected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or
(ii) Each employee on a walking/ more to lower levels by guardrail sys-
working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more tems.
above a lower level where leading edges (7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at
are under construction, but who is not the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m)
engaged in the leading edge work, shall or more in depth shall be protected
be protected from falling by a guard- from falling by guardrail systems,
rail system, safety net system, or per- fences, or barricades when the exca-
sonal fall arrest system. If a guardrail vations are not readily seen because of
system is chosen to provide the fall plant growth or other visual barrier;
protection, and a controlled access (ii) Each employee at the edge of a
zone has already been established for well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation
leading edge work, the control line 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be
may be used in lieu of a guardrail along protected from falling by guardrail sys-
the edge that parallels the leading tems, fences, barricades, or covers.
edge. (8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each em-
(3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a ployee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above
hoist area shall be protected from fall- dangerous equipment shall be pro-
ing 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower lev- tected from falling into or onto the
els by guardrail systems or personal dangerous equipment by guardrail sys-
fall arrest systems. If guardrail systems or by equipment guards.
tems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or (ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or
portions thereof, are removed to facili- more above dangerous equipment shall
tate the hoisting operation (e.g., dur- be protected from fall hazards by
ing landing of materials), and an em- guardrail systems, personal fall arrest
ployee must lean through the access systems, or safety net systems.
315
(9) Overhand bricklaying and related graph (b) of this section provides for an
work. (i) Except as otherwise provided alternative fall protection measure.
in paragraph (b) of this section, each Exception: When the employer can
employee performing overhand brick- demonstrate that it is infeasible or cre-
laying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) ates a greater hazard to use these sys-
or more above lower levels, shall be tems, the employer shall develop and
protected from falling by guardrail sys- implement a fall protection plan which
tems, safety net systems, personal fall meets the requirements of paragraph
arrest systems, or shall work in a con- (k) of § 1926.502.
trolled access zone. NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
(ii) Each employee reaching more sible and will not create a greater hazard to
than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level implement at least one of the above-listed
of the walking/working surface on fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
which they are working, shall be pro- employer has the burden of establishing that
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
tem, safety net system, or personal fall for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
arrest system. of implementing any of those systems.
NOTE: Bricklaying operations performed on (13) Residential construction. Each em-
scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaf-
folds of this part.
ployee engaged in residential construc-
(10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. tion activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
Except as otherwise provided in para- above lower levels shall be protected
graph (b) of this section, each employee by guardrail systems, safety net sys-
engaged in roofing activities on low- tem, or personal fall arrest system un-
slope roofs, with unprotected sides and less another provision in paragraph (b)
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower of this section provides for an alter-
levels shall be protected from falling native fall protection measure. Excep-
by guardrail systems, safety net sys- tion: When the employer can dem-
tems, personal fall arrest systems, or a onstrate that it is infeasible or creates
combination of warning line system a greater hazard to use these systems,
and guardrail system, warning line sys- the employer shall develop and imple-
tem and safety net system, or warning ment a fall protection plan which
line system and personal fall arrest meets the requirements of paragraph
system, or warning line system and (k) of § 1926.502.
safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see sible and will not create a greater hazard to
implement at least one of the above-listed
Appendix A to subpart M of this part),
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
the use of a safety monitoring system employer has the burden of establishing that
alone [i.e. without the warning line it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
system] is permitted. tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
(11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
steep roof with unprotected sides and of implementing any of those systems.
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower (14) Wall openings. Each employee
levels shall be protected from falling working on, at, above, or near wall
by guardrail systems with toeboards, openings (including those with chutes
safety net systems, or personal fall ar- attached) where the outside bottom
rest systems. edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m)
(12) Precast concrete erection. Each em- or more above lower levels and the in-
ployee engaged in the erection of pre- side bottom edge of the wall opening is
cast concrete members (including, but less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the
not limited to the erection of wall pan- walking/working surface, shall be pro-
els, columns, beams, and floor and roof tected from falling by the use of a
‘‘tees’’) and related operations such as guardrail system, a safety net system,
grouting of precast concrete members, or a personal fall arrest system.
who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above (15) Walking/working surfaces not oth-
lower levels shall be protected from erwise addressed. Except as provided in
falling by guardrail systems, safety net § 1926.500(a)(2) or in § 1926.501 (b)(1)
systems, or personal fall arrest sys- through (b)(14), each employee on a
tems, unless another provision in para- walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m)
316
or more above lower levels shall be proof the guardrail system and the walk-
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- ing/working surface when there is no
tem, safety net system, or personal fall wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches
arrest system. (53 cm) high.
(c) Protection from falling objects. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be in-
When an employee is exposed to falling stalled at a height midway between the
objects, the employer shall have each top edge of the guardrail system and
employee wear a hard hat and shall im- the walking/working level.
plement one of the following measures: (ii) Screens and mesh, when used,
(1) Erect toeboards, screens, or shall extend from the top rail to the
guardrail systems to prevent objects walking/working level and along the
from falling from higher levels; or, entire opening between top rail sup-
(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep
ports.
potential fall objects far enough from
the edge of the higher level so that (iii) Intermediate members (such as
those objects would not go over the balusters), when used between posts,
edge if they were accidentally dis- shall be not more than 19 inches (48
placed; or, cm) apart.
(3) Barricade the area to which ob- (iv) Other structural members (such
jects could fall, prohibit employees as additional midrails and architec-
from entering the barricaded area, and tural panels) shall be installed such
keep objects that may fall far enough that there are no openings in the
away from the edge of a higher level so guardrail system that are more than 19
that those objects would not go over inches (.5 m) wide.
the edge if they were accidentally dis- (3) Guardrail systems shall be capa-
placed. ble of withstanding, without failure, a
force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) ap-
§ 1926.502 Fall protection systems cri- plied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top
teria and practices. edge, in any outward or downward di-
(a) General. (1) Fall protection sys- rection, at any point along the top
tems required by this part shall comply edge.
with the applicable provisions of this (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test
section. load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of
(2) Employers shall provide and in- this section is applied in a downward
stall all fall protection systems re- direction, the top edge of the guardrail
quired by this subpart for an employee, shall not deflect to a height less than
and shall comply with all other perti- 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/
nent requirements of this subpart be- working level. Guardrail system com-
fore that employee begins the work ponents selected and constructed in ac-
that necessitates the fall protection. cordance with the Appendix B to sub-
(b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- part M of this part will be deemed to
tems and their use shall comply with meet this requirement.
the following provisions: (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or mediate vertical members, solid pan-
equivalent guardrail system members, els, and equivalent structural members
shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus shall be capable of withstanding, with-
3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/ out failure, a force of at least 150
working level. When conditions war- pounds (666 N) applied in any downward
rant, the height of the top edge may or outward direction at any point
exceed the 45-inch height, provided the along the midrail or other member.
guardrail system meets all other cri-
(6) Guardrail systems shall be so sur-
teria of this paragraph.
NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
faced as to prevent injury to an em-
top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent ployee from punctures or lacerations,
member, shall be increased an amount equal and to prevent snagging of clothing.
to the height of the stilts. (7) The ends of all top rails and
(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- midrails shall not overhang the ter-
mediate vertical members, or equiva- minal posts, except where such over-
lent intermediate structural members hang does not constitute a projection
shall be installed between the top edge hazard.
317
(8) Steel banding and plastic banding Minimum required horizontal

Vertical distance from working distance of outer edge of net
shall not be used as top rails or level to horizontal plane of net from the edge of the working
midrails. surface
(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at Up to 5 feet ............................ 8 feet.
least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet.
diameter or thickness to prevent cuts More than 10 feet ................... 13 feet.
and lacerations. If wire rope is used for
top rails, it shall be flagged at not (3) Safety nets shall be installed with
more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with sufficient clearance under them to pre-
high-visibility material. vent contact with the surface or struc-
(10) When guardrail systems are used tures below when subjected to an im-
at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or re- pact force equal to the drop test speci-
movable guardrail section shall be fied in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
placed across the access opening be- (4) Safety nets and their installations
tween guardrail sections when hoisting shall be capable of absorbing an impact
operations are not taking place. force equal to that produced by the
(11) When guardrail systems are used drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i)
at holes, they shall be erected on all of this section.
unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (i) Except as provided in paragraph
(c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and
(12) When guardrail systems are used
safety net installations shall be drop-
around holes used for the passage of
tested at the jobsite after initial in-
materials, the hole shall have not more
stallation and before being used as a
than two sides provided with remov-
fall protection system, whenever relo-
able guardrail sections to allow the
cated, after major repair, and at 6-
passage of materials. When the hole is
month intervals if left in one place.
not in use, it shall be closed over with
The drop-test shall consist of a 400
a cover, or a guardrail system shall be
pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches
provided along all unprotected sides or
(76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the
edges.
net from the highest walking/working
(13) When guardrail systems are used surface at which employees are exposed
around holes which are used as points to fall hazards, but not from less than
of access (such as ladderways), they 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.
shall be provided with a gate, or be so (ii) When the employer can dem-
offset that a person cannot walk di- onstrate that it is unreasonable to per-
rectly into the hole. form the drop-test required by para-
(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps graph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the em-
and runways shall be erected along ployer (or a designated competent per-
each unprotected side or edge. son) shall certify that the net and net
(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope installation is in compliance with the
being used for top rails or midrails provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and
shall be inspected as frequently as nec- (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a
essary to ensure that it continues to certification record prior to the net
meet the strength requirements of being used as a fall protection system.
paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The certification record must include
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net sys- an identification of the net and net in-
tems and their use shall comply with stallation for which the certification
the following provisions: record is being prepared; the date that
(1) Safety nets shall be installed as it was determined that the identified
close as practicable under the walking/ net and net installation were in com-
working surface on which employees pliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
are working, but in no case more than section and the signature of the person
30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When making the determination and certifi-
nets are used on bridges, the potential cation. The most recent certification
fall area from the walking/working sur- record for each net and net installation
face to the net shall be unobstructed. shall be available at the jobsite for in-
(2) Safety nets shall extend outward spection.
from the outermost projection of the (5) Defective nets shall not be used.
work surface as follows: Safety nets shall be inspected at least
318
once a week for wear, damage, and locking type snaphook designed and
other deterioration. Defective compo- used to prevent disengagement of the
nents shall be removed from service. snaphook by the contact of the
Safety nets shall also be inspected snaphook keeper by the connected
after any occurrence which could affect member. Effective January 1, 1998, only
the integrity of the safety net system. locking type snaphooks shall be used.
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equip- (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking
ment, and tools which have fallen into type and designed for the following
the safety net shall be removed as soon connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
as possible from the net and at least gaged:
before the next work shift. (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire
(7) The maximum size of each safety rope;
net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 (ii) to each other;
square inches (230 cm 2) nor be longer (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another
than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and snaphook or other connector is at-
the opening, measured center-to-center tached;
of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh
(v) to any object which is incom-
crossings shall be secured to prevent
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela-
enlargement of the mesh opening.
tion to the snaphook such that unin-
(8) Each safety net (or section of it)
tentional disengagement could occur
shall have a border rope for webbing
by the connected object being able to
with a minimum breaking strength of
depress the snaphook keeper and re-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
lease itself.
(9) Connections between safety net
panels shall be as strong as integral (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar
net components and shall be spaced not work platforms with horizontal life-
more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. lines which may become vertical life-
(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Per- lines, the devices used to connect to a
sonal fall arrest systems and their use horizontal lifeline shall be capable of
shall comply with the provisions set locking in both directions on the life-
forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, line.
body belts are not acceptable as part of (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be de-
a personal fall arrest system. Note: The signed, installed, and used, under the
use of a body belt in a positioning de- supervision of a qualified person, as
vice system is acceptable and is regu- part of a complete personal fall arrest
lated under paragraph (e) of this sec- system, which maintains a safety fac-
tion. tor of at least two.
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines
pressed or formed steel, or made of shall have a minimum breaking
equivalent materials. strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- (10) (i) Except as provided in para-
resistant finish, and all surfaces and graph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- vertical lifelines are used, each em-
age to interfacing parts of the system. ployee shall be attached to a separate
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall lifeline.
have a minimum tensile strength of (ii) During the construction of eleva-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). tor shafts, two employees may be at-
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be tached to the same lifeline in the
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load hoistway, provided both employees are
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- working atop a false car that is
ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- equipped with guardrails; the strength
formation. of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be pounds per employee attached] (44.4
compatible with the member to which kN); and all other criteria specified in
they are connected to prevent uninten- this paragraph for lifelines have been
tional disengagement of the snaphook met.
by depression of the snaphook keeper (11) Lifelines shall be protected
by the connected member, or shall be a against being cut or abraded.
319
(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- bined person and tool weight of less than 310
yards which automatically limit free pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid-
fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less ered to be in compliance with the provisions
shall be capable of sustaining a min- of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the
system is used by an employee having a com-
imum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3
bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140
kN) applied to the device with the life- kg) or more, then the employer must appro-
line or lanyard in the fully extended priately modify the criteria and protocols of
position. the Appendix to provide proper protection
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- for such heavier weights, or the system will
yards which do not limit free fall dis- not be deemed to be in compliance with the
tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this sec-
lanyards, and tearing and deforming tion.
lanyards shall be capable of sustaining (17) The attachment point of the
a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds body belt shall be located in the center
(22.2 kN) applied to the device with the of the wearer’s back. The attachment
lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended point of the body harness shall be lo-
position. cated in the center of the wearer’s back
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used near shoulder level, or above the wear-
in lanyards, lifelines, and strength er’s head.
components of body belts and body har- (18) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- ponents shall be used only for em-
bers. ployee protection (as part of a personal
(15) Anchorages used for attachment fall arrest system or positioning device
of personal fall arrest equipment shall system) and not to hoist materials.
be independent of any anchorage being
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and
used to support or suspend platforms
components subjected to impact load-
and capable of supporting at least 5,000
ing shall be immediately removed from
pounds (22.2 kN) per employee at-
service and shall not be used again for
tached, or shall be designed, installed,
and used as follows: employee protection until inspected
(i) as part of a complete personal fall and determined by a competent person
arrest system which maintains a safety to be undamaged and suitable for
factor of at least two; and reuse.
(ii) under the supervision of a quali- (20) The employer shall provide for
fied person. prompt rescue of employees in the
(16) Personal fall arrest systems, event of a fall or shall assure that em-
when stopping a fall, shall: ployees are able to rescue themselves.
(i) limit maximum arresting force on (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall
an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when be inspected prior to each use for wear,
used with a body belt; damage and other deterioration, and
(ii) limit maximum arresting force defective components shall be removed
on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) from service.
when used with a body harness; (22) Body belts shall be at least one
(iii) be rigged such that an employee and five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm)
can neither free fall more than 6 feet wide.
(1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall
(iv) bring an employee to a complete not be attached to guardrail systems,
stop and limit maximum deceleration nor shall they be attached to hoists ex-
distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet cept as specified in other subparts of
(1.07 m); and, this part.
(v) have sufficient strength to with-
(24) When a personal fall arrest sys-
stand twice the potential impact en-
tem is used at hoist areas, it shall be
ergy of an employee free falling a dis-
rigged to allow the movement of the
tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall
employee only as far as the edge of the
distance permitted by the system,
walking/working surface.
whichever is less.
NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system (e) Positioning device systems. Posi-
meets the criteria and protocols contained in tioning device systems and their use
Appendix C to subpart M, and if the system shall conform to the following provi-
is being used by an employee having a com- sions:
320
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged (10) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
such that an employee cannot free fall ponents shall be used only for em-
more than 2 feet (.6 m). ployee protection (as part of a personal
(2) Positioning devices shall be se- fall arrest system or positioning device
cured to an anchorage capable of sup- system) and not to hoist materials.
porting at least twice the potential im- (f) Warning line systems. Warning line
pact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 systems [See § 1926.501(b)(10)] and their
pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. use shall comply with the following
(3) Connectors shall be drop forged, provisions:
pressed or formed steel, or made of (1) The warning line shall be erected
equivalent materials. around all sides of the roof work area.
(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion- (i) When mechanical equipment is
resistant finish, and all surfaces and not being used, the warning line shall
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m)
age to interfacing parts of this system. from the roof edge.
(5) Connecting assemblies shall have (ii) When mechanical equipment is
a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 being used, the warning line shall be
pounds (22.2 kN) erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from
(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be the roof edge which is parallel to the
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load direction of mechanical equipment op-
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- eration, and not less than 10 feet (3.1
ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- m) from the roof edge which is perpen-
formation. dicular to the direction of mechanical
equipment operation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be
(iii) Points of access, materials han-
compatible with the member to which
dling areas, storage areas, and hoisting
they are connected to prevent uninten-
areas shall be connected to the work
tional disengagement of the snaphook
area by an access path formed by two
by depression of the snaphook keeper
warning lines.
by the connected member, or shall be a
(iv) When the path to a point of ac-
locking type snaphook designed and
cess is not in use, a rope, wire, chain,
used to prevent disengagement of the
or other barricade, equivalent in
snaphook by the contact of the
strength and height to the warning
snaphook keeper by the connected
line, shall be placed across the path at
member. As of January 1, 1998, only
the point where the path intersects the
locking type snaphooks shall be used.
warning line erected around the work
(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking
area, or the path shall be offset such
type and designed for the following
that a person cannot walk directly into
connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
the work area.
gaged:
(2) Warning lines shall consist of
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting
rope; stanchions erected as follows:
(ii) to each other; (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
(iii) to a Dee-ring to which another flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m)
snaphook or other connector is at- intervals with high-visibility material;
tached; (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or rigged and supported in such a way
(v) to any object which is incom- that its lowest point (including sag) is
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the
tion to the snaphook such that unin- walking/working surface and its high-
tentional disengagement could occur est point is no more than 39 inches (1.0
by the connected object being able to m) from the walking/working surface;
depress the snaphook keeper and re- (iii) After being erected, with the
lease itself. rope, wire, or chain attached, stan-
(9) Positioning device systems shall chions shall be capable of resisting,
be inspected prior to each use for wear, without tipping over, a force of at least
damage, and other deterioration, and 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally
defective components shall be removed against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m)
from service. above the walking/working surface,
321
perpendicular to the warning line, and (2) When used to control access to
in the direction of the floor, roof, or areas where overhand bricklaying and
platform edge; related work are taking place:
(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall (i) The controlled access zone shall
have a minimum tensile strength of 500 be defined by a control line erected not
pounds (2.22 kN), and after being at- less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than
tached to the stanchions, shall be capa- 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge.
ble of supporting, without breaking, (ii) The control line shall extend for
the loads applied to the stanchions as a distance sufficient for the controlled
prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of access zone to enclose all employees
this section; and performing overhand bricklaying and
(v) The line shall be attached at each related work at the working edge and
stanchion in such a way that pulling on shall be approximately parallel to the
one section of the line between stan- working edge.
chions will not result in slack being (iii) Additional control lines shall be
taken up in adjacent sections before erected at each end to enclose the con-
the stanchion tips over. trolled access zone.
(3) No employee shall be allowed in (iv) Only employees engaged in
the area between a roof edge and a overhand bricklaying or related work
warning line unless the employee is shall be permitted in the controlled ac-
performing roofing work in that area. cess zone.
(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs (3) Control lines shall consist of
shall be used or stored only in areas ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent mate-
where employees are protected by a rials, and supporting stanchions as fol-
warning line system, guardrail system, lows:
or personal fall arrest system. (i) Each line shall be flagged or oth-
erwise clearly marked at not more
(g) Controlled access zones. Controlled
than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-
access zones [See § 1926.501(b)(9) and
visibility material.
§ 1926.502(k)] and their use shall con-
form to the following provisions. (ii) Each line shall be rigged and sup-
ported in such a way that its lowest
(1) When used to control access to
point (including sag) is not less than 39
areas where leading edge and other op-
inches (1 m) from the walking/working
erations are taking place the con- surface and its highest point is not
trolled access zone shall be defined by more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches
a control line or by any other means (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying op-
that restricts access. erations are being performed] from the
(i) When control lines are used, they walking/working surface.
shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 (iii) Each line shall have a minimum
m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88
the unprotected or leading edge, except kN).
when erecting precast concrete mem- (4) On floors and roofs where guard-
bers. rail systems are not in place prior to
(ii) When erecting precast concrete the beginning of overhand bricklaying
members, the control line shall be operations, controlled access zones
erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor shall be enlarged, as necessary, to en-
more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the close all points of access, material han-
length of the member being erected, dling areas, and storage areas.
whichever is less, from the leading (5) On floors and roofs where guard-
edge. rail systems are in place, but need to
(iii) The control line shall extend be removed to allow overhand brick-
along the entire length of the unpro- laying work or leading edge work to
tected or leading edge and shall be ap- take place, only that portion of the
proximately parallel to the unpro- guardrail necessary to accomplish that
tected or leading edge. day’s work shall be removed.
(iv) The control line shall be con- (h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety
nected on each side to a guardrail sys- monitoring systems [See
tem or wall. §§ 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and
322
their use shall comply with the fol- displacement by the wind, equipment,
lowing provisions: or employees.
(1) The employer shall designate a (4) All covers shall be color coded or
competent person to monitor the safe- they shall be marked with the word
ty of other employees and the em- ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to provide warn-
ployer shall ensure that the safety ing of the hazard.
monitor complies with the following NOTE: This provision does not apply to cast
requirements: iron manhole covers or steel grates used on
streets or roadways.
(i) The safety monitor shall be com-
(j) Protection from falling objects. Fall-
petent to recognize fall hazards;
ing object protection shall comply with
(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the following provisions:
the employee when it appears that the (1) Toeboards, when used as falling
employee is unaware of a fall hazard or object protection, shall be erected
is acting in an unsafe manner; along the edge of the overhead walking/
(iii) The safety monitor shall be on working surface for a distance suffi-
the same walking/working surface and cient to protect employees below.
within visual sighting distance of the (2) Toeboards shall be capable of
employee being monitored; withstanding, without failure, a force
(iv) The safety monitor shall be close of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in
enough to communicate orally with any downward or outward direction at
the employee; and any point along the toeboard.
(v) The safety monitor shall not have (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of
other responsibilities which could take 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height
the monitor’s attention from the moni- from their top edge to the level of the
toring function. walking/working surface. They shall
(2) Mechanical equipment shall not have not more than 1⁄4 inch (0.6 cm)
be used or stored in areas where safety clearance above the walking/working
monitoring systems are being used to surface. They shall be solid or have
monitor employees engaged in roofing openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in
operations on low-slope roofs. greatest dimension.
(3) No employee, other than an em- (4) Where tools, equipment, or mate-
ployee engaged in roofing work [on rials are piled higher than the top edge
low-sloped roofs] or an employee cov- of a toeboard, paneling or screening
ered by a fall protection plan, shall be shall be erected from the walking/
allowed in an area where an employee working surface or toeboard to the top
is being protected by a safety moni- of a guardrail system’s top rail or
toring system. midrail, for a distance sufficient to
(4) Each employee working in a con- protect employees below.
(5) Guardrail systems, when used as
trolled access zone shall be directed to
falling object protection, shall have all
comply promptly with fall hazard
openings small enough to prevent pas-
warnings from safety monitors.
sage of potential falling objects.
(i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, (6) During the performance of
roofs, and other walking/working sur- overhand bricklaying and related work:
faces shall meet the following require- (i) No materials or equipment except
ments: masonry and mortar shall be stored
(1) Covers located in roadways and within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working
vehicular aisles shall be capable of sup- edge.
porting, without failure, at least twice (ii) Excess mortar, broken or scat-
the maximum axle load of the largest tered masonry units, and all other ma-
vehicle expected to cross over the terials and debris shall be kept clear
cover. from the work area by removal at reg-
(2) All other covers shall be capable ular intervals.
of supporting, without failure, at least (7) During the performance of roofing
twice the weight of employees, equip- work:
ment, and materials that may be im- (i) Materials and equipment shall not
posed on the cover at any one time. be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof
(3) All covers shall be secured when edge unless guardrails are erected at
installed so as to prevent accidental the edge.
323
(ii) Materials which are piled, and the employer must comply with
grouped, or stacked near a roof edge the criteria in paragraph (g) of this sec-
shall be stable and self-supporting. tion.
(8) Canopies, when used as falling ob- (8) Where no other alternative meas-
ject protection, shall be strong enough ure has been implemented, the em-
to prevent collapse and to prevent pen- ployer shall implement a safety moni-
etration by any objects which may fall toring system in conformance with
onto the canopy. § 1926.502(h).
(k) Fall protection plan. This option is (9) The fall protection plan must in-
available only to employees engaged in clude a statement which provides the
leading edge work, precast concrete name or other method of identification
erection work, or residential construc- for each employee who is designated to
tion work (See § 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), work in controlled access zones. No
and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that other employees may enter controlled
it is infeasible or it creates a greater access zones.
hazard to use conventional fall protec- (10) In the event an employee falls, or
tion equipment. The fall protection some other related, serious incident oc-
plan must conform to the following curs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer
provisions. shall investigate the circumstances of
(1) The fall protection plan shall be the fall or other incident to determine
prepared by a qualified person and de- if the fall protection plan needs to be
veloped specifically for the site where changed (e.g. new practices, proce-
the leading edge work, precast concrete dures, or training) and shall implement
work, or residential construction work those changes to prevent similar types
is being performed and the plan must of falls or incidents.
be maintained up to date.
(2) Any changes to the fall protection § 1926.503 Training requirements.
plan shall be approved by a qualified The following training provisions
person. supplement and clarify the require-
(3) A copy of the fall protection plan ments of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards
with all approved changes shall be addressed in subpart M of this part.
maintained at the job site. (a) Training Program. (1) The em-
(4) The implementation of the fall ployer shall provide a training program
protection plan shall be under the su- for each employee who might be ex-
pervision of a competent person. posed to fall hazards. The program
(5) The fall protection plan shall doc- shall enable each employee to recog-
ument the reasons why the use of con- nize the hazards of falling and shall
ventional fall protection systems train each employee in the procedures
(guardrail systems, personal fall arrest to be followed in order to minimize
systems, or safety nets systems) are in- these hazards.
feasible or why their use would create (2) The employer shall assure that
a greater hazard. each employee has been trained, as
(6) The fall protection plan shall in- necessary, by a competent person
clude a written discussion of other qualified in the following areas:
measures that will be taken to reduce (i) The nature of fall hazards in the
or eliminate the fall hazard for workers work area;
who cannot be provided with protec- (ii) The correct procedures for erect-
tion from the conventional fall protec- ing, maintaining, disassembling, and
tion systems. For example, the em- inspecting the fall protection systems
ployer shall discuss the extent to to be used;
which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle (iii) The use and operation of guard-
mounted work platforms can be used to rail systems, personal fall arrest sys-
provide a safer working surface and tems, safety net systems, warning line
thereby reduce the hazard of falling. systems, safety monitoring systems,
(7) The fall protection plan shall controlled access zones, and other pro-
identify each location where conven- tection to be used;
tional fall protection methods cannot (iv) The role of each employee in the
be used. These locations shall then be safety monitoring system when this
classified as controlled access zones system is used;
324
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A
(v) The limitations on the use of me- NOTE: The following appendices to subpart
chanical equipment during the per- M of this part serve as non-mandatory guide-
formance of roofing work on low-sloped lines to assist employers in complying with
the appropriate requirements of subpart M of
roofs;
this part.
(vi) The correct procedures for the
handling and storage of equipment and APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART
materials and the erection of overhead 1926—DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS
protection; and
(vii) The role of employees in fall Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
protection plans; § 1926.501(b)(10)
(viii) The standards contained in this (1) This Appendix serves as a guideline to
subpart. assist employers complying with the require-
(b) Certification of training. (1) The ments of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section
employer shall verify compliance with 1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety mon-
paragraph (a) of this section by pre- itoring system alone as a means of providing
fall protection during the performance of
paring a written certification record. roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet
The written certification record shall (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in
contain the name or other identity of the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and
the employee trained, the date(s) of the indicates where each roof or roof area is to
training, and the signature of the per- be measured to determine its width. Section
son who conducted the training or the views or elevation views are shown where ap-
signature of the employer. If the em- propriate. Some examples show ‘‘correct’’
ployer relies on training conducted by and ‘‘incorrect’’ subdivisions of irregularly
shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly
another employer or completed prior to shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension
the effective date of this section, the selected to be the width of an area is the
certification record shall indicate the lesser of the two primary dimensions of the
date the employer determined the prior area, as viewed from above. Example A
training was adequate rather than the shows that on a simple rectangular roof,
date of actual training. width is the lesser of the two primary overall
(2) The latest training certification dimensions. This is also the case with roofs
shall be maintained. which are sloped toward or away from the
roof center, as shown in Example B.
(c) Retraining. When the employer has (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles.
reason to believe that any affected em- Such roofs may be broken down into sub-
ployee who has already been trained areas as shown in Example C. The process of
does not have the understanding and dividing a roof area can produce many dif-
skill required by paragraph (a) of this ferent configurations. Example C gives the
section, the employer shall retrain general rule of using dividing lines of min-
each such employee. Circumstances imum length to minimize the size and num-
where retraining is required include, ber of the areas which are potentially less
than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to
but are not limited to, situations minimize the number of roof areas where
where: safety monitoring systems alone are suffi-
(1) Changes in the workplace render cient protection.
previous training obsolete; or (3) Roofs which are comprised of several
(2) Changes in the types of fall pro- separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in
tection systems or equipment to be Example D, may be considered as a series of
used render previous training obsolete; individual roofs. Some roofs have pent-
or houses, additional floors, courtyard open-
ings, or similar architectural features; Ex-
(3) Inadequacies in an affected em-
ample E shows how the rule for dividing
ployee’s knowledge or use of fall pro- roofs into subareas is applied to such con-
tection systems or equipment indicate figurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs
that the employee has not retained the must be considered on an individual basis, as
requisite understanding or skill. shown in Example F.
325
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
EXAMPLE A: RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE B: SLOPED RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE C: IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
WITH RECTANGULAR SHAPED SECTIONS toring system alone can be used
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
by using dividing lines of minimum length to examples to show the location of dividing
minimize the size and number of the areas lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
which are potentially less than or equal to 50 width.
feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit ER09AU94.001</GPH>
326
ER09AU94.000</GPH>
327
ER09AU94.002</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
EXAMPLE D: SEPARATE, NON-CONTIGUOUS ROOF AREAS
EXAMPLE E: ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit
COURTYARDS, ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC. the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas toring system alone can be used
by using dividing lines of minimum length to [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
minimize the size and number of the areas examples to show the location of dividing
which are potentially less than or equal to 50
328
ER09AU94.003</GPH>
lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
width.
329
ER09AU94.004</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
EXAMPLE F: IRREGULAR, NON-RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART plying with these requirements. An employer

1926—GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS may use these guidelines as a starting point
for designing guardrail systems. However,
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with the guidelines do not provide all the infor-
§ 1926.502(b) mation necessary to build a complete sys-
The standard requires guardrail systems tem, and the employer is still responsible for
and components to be designed and built to designing and assembling these components
meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), in such a way that the completed system
and (5). This Appendix serves as a non-man- will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3),
datory guideline to assist employers in com- (4), and (5). Components for which no specific
330
ER09AU94.005</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
guidelines are given in this Appendix (e.g., of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm
joints, base connections, components made plus or minus 10 cm).
with other materials, and components with (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create
other dimensions) must also be designed and the free fall distance should be supplied with
constructed in such a way that the com- the system, or in its absence, the least elas-
pleted system meets the requirements of tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used
§ 1926.502. with the system.
(1) For wood railings: Wood components (6) The test weight for each test should be
shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in2 fiber (stress hoisted to the required level and should be
grade) construction grade lumber; the posts quickly released without having any appre-
shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm×10 ciable motion imparted to it.
cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 (7) The system’s performance should be
m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at evaluated taking into account the range of
least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm×10 cm) lumber, environmental conditions for which it is de-
the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch signed to be used.
by 6-inch (2.5 cm×15 cm) lumber. All lumber (8) Following the test, the system need not
dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by be capable of further operation.
the American Softwood Lumber Standards, (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
dated January 1970. all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5
(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and
kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of
intermediate railings shall be at least one
this section.)
and one-half inches nominal diameter
(2) The test consists of dropping the test
(schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more
weight once. A new unused system should be
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. used for each test.
(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm×10 cm) by 3⁄8-inch (1.1 (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from
cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than the fixed anchorage to the attachment on
8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. the body belt or body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART tems, the length of the lifeline above the
1926—PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With 2 feet (0.61 m).
§ 1926.502(d) (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
deceleration devices which do not automati-
I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
and positioning device systems—(a) General.
or less, and for systems with deceleration de-
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory
vices which have a connection distance in ex-
guideline to assist employers comply with
cess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the
the requirements in § 1926.502(d). Paragraphs
centerline of the lifeline and the attachment
(b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Appendix describe
point to the body belt or harness), the test
test procedures which may be used to deter-
weight should be rigged to free fall a dis-
mine compliance with the requirements in
tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is
§ 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in Appendix D of
1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to
this subpart, the test methods listed here in
its hanging location (6 feet below the anchor-
Appendix C can also be used to assist em-
age). The test weight should fall without in-
ployers comply with the requirements in
terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device
or ground during the test. In some cases a
systems.
non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length
(b) General conditions for all tests in the Ap- may need to be added to the system (for test
pendix to § 1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards purposes) to create the necessary free fall
and deceleration devices should be attached distance.
to an anchorage and connected to the body- (6) For deceleration device systems with
belt or body harness in the same manner as integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
they would be when used to protect employ- matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
ees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22
should not have a deflection greater than m).
0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 (7) Any weight which detaches from the
pounds (10 kN) is applied. belt or harness has failed the strength test.
(3) The frequency response of the load (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists
measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. of dropping the respective test weight once
(4) The test weight used in the strength as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i)
and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- of this section. A new, unused system should
lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth be used for each test.
331
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration de-
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg vices. The locking mechanisms of other self-
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See activating-type deceleration devices de-
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). signed for more than one arrest should lock
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or each of 1,000 times as they would in normal
minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) service.
as measured from the fixed anchorage to the II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for
attachment on the body belt or body har- personal fall arrest systems. The following in-
ness. formation constitutes additional guidelines
(iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a
the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system.
(a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The
without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected
the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation,
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment.
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) For example, the presence of acids, dirt,
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on
test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse ef-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be
free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet
used where an electrical hazard is antici-
(1.83 m), except as follows:
pated. As required by the standard, the em-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to
connection link or lanyard, the test weight
promptly rescue an employee should a fall
should free fall a distance equal to the con-
occur, since the suspended employee may not
nection distance (measured between the cen-
be able to reach a work level independently.
terline of the lifeline and the attachment
point to the body belt or harness). (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and life-
lines are subject to damage by work oper-
(B) For deceleration device systems with
ations such as welding, chemical cleaning,
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
and sandblasting, the component should be
matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free protected, or other securing systems should
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the be used. The employer should fully evaluate
system in normal use. (For example, to test the work conditions and environment (in-
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or cluding seasonal weather changes) before se-
lanyard, the test weight should be supported lecting the appropriate personal fall protec-
and the system allowed to retract the life- tion system. Once in use, the system’s effec-
line or lanyard as it would in normal use. tiveness should be monitored. In some cases,
The test weight would then be released and a program for cleaning and maintenance of
the force and deceleration distance meas- the system may be necessary.
ured). (b) Testing considerations. Before pur-
(4) A system fails the force test if the re- chasing or putting into use a personal fall
corded maximum arresting force exceeds arrest system, an employer should obtain
1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, from the supplier information about the sys-
and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when tem based on its performance during testing
using a body harness. so that the employer can know if the system
(5) The maximum elongation and decelera- meets this standard. Testing should be done
tion distance should be recorded during the using recognized test methods. This Appen-
force test. dix contains test methods recognized for
(e) Deceleration device tests—(1) General. The evaluating the performance of fall arrest
device should be evaluated or tested under systems. Not all systems may need to be in-
the environmental conditions, (such as rain, dividually tested; the performance of some
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for systems may be based on data and calcula-
which the device is designed. tions derived from testing of similar sys-
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) tems, provided that enough information is
Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 available to demonstrate similarity of func-
times over the same length of line a distance tion and design.
of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the (c) Component compatibility considerations.
mechanism should lock each time. Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de-
(ii) Unless the device is permanently signed, tested, and supplied as a complete
marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline system. However, it is common practice for
which must be used, several types (different lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
diameters and different materials), of life- devices, body belts and body harnesses to be
lines should be used to test the device. interchanged since some components wear
332
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
out before others. The employer and em- can rescue themselves should a fall occur.
ployee should realize that not all compo- The availability of rescue personnel, ladders
nents are interchangeable. For instance, a or other rescue equipment should be evalu-
lanyard should not be connected between a ated. In some situations, equipment which
body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de- allows employees to rescue themselves after
vice of the self-retracting type since this can the fall has been arrested may be desirable,
result in additional free fall for which the such as devices which have descent capa-
system was not designed. Any substitution bility.
or change to a personal fall arrest system (g) Inspection considerations. As required by
should be fully evaluated or tested by a com- § 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems
petent person to determine that it meets the must be regularly inspected. Any component
standard, before the modified system is put with any significant defect, such as cuts,
in use. tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching;
(d) Employee training considerations. Thor- alterations or additions which might affect
ough employee training in the selection and its efficiency; damage due to deterioration;
use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
tive. Employees must be trained in the safe distorted hooks or faulty hook springs;
use of the system. This should include the tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles;
following: application limits; proper anchor- loose or damaged mountings; non-func-
ing and tie-off techniques; estimation of free tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio-
fall distance, including determination of de- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from
celeration distance, and total fall distance to service immediately, and should be tagged or
prevent striking a lower level; methods of marked as unusable, or destroyed.
use; and inspection and storage of the sys- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the
tem. Careless or improper use of the equip- most important aspects of personal fall pro-
ment can result in serious injury or death. tection systems is fully planning the system
Employers and employees should become fa- before it is put into use. Probably the most
miliar with the material in this Appendix, as overlooked component is planning for suit-
well as manufacturer’s recommendations, able anchorage points. Such planning should
before a system is used. Of uppermost impor- ideally be done before the structure or build-
tance is the reduction in strength caused by ing is constructed so that anchorage points
certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying can be incorporated during construction for
around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum per- use later for window cleaning or other build-
mitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed ing maintenance. If properly planned, these
are the importance of inspections prior to anchorage points may be used during con-
use, the limitations of the equipment, and struction, as well as afterwards.
unique conditions at the worksite which may (i) Properly planned anchorages should be
be important in determining the type of sys- used if they are available. In some cases, an-
tem to use. chorages must be installed immediately
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers prior to use. In such cases, a registered pro-
should obtain comprehensive instructions fessional engineer with experience in design-
from the supplier as to the system’s proper ing fall protection systems, or another quali-
use and application, including, where appli- fied person with appropriate education and
cable: experience should design an anchor point to
(1) The force measured during the sample be installed.
force test; (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes
(2) The maximum elongation measured for that there will be a need to devise an anchor
lanyards during the force test; point from existing structures. Examples of
(3) The deceleration distance measured for what might be appropriate anchor points are
deceleration devices during the force test; steel members or I-beams if an acceptable
(4) Caution statements on critical use limi- strap is available for the connection (do not
tations; use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto
(5) Application limits; itself); large eye-bolts made of an appro-
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off priate grade steel; guardrails or railings if
techniques, including the proper dee-ring or they have been designed for use as an anchor
other attachment point to use on the body point; or masonry or wood members only if
belt and harness for fall arrest; the attachment point is substantial and pre-
(7) Proper climbing techniques; cautions have been taken to assure that
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, bolts or other connectors will not pull
and storage; and through. A qualified person should be used to
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. evaluate the suitable of these ‘‘make shift’’
This information should be provided to em- anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
ployees during training. (2) Employers and employees should at all
(f) Rescue considerations. As required by times be aware that the strength of a per-
§ 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest sys- sonal fall arrest system is based on its being
tems are used, the employer must assure attached to an anchoring system which does
that employees can be promptly rescued or not reduce the strength of the system (such
333
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap- greatly reduced if the force is applied at an
hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of at- angle to this axis (in the direction of shear).
tachment is used that will reduce the Also, care should be exercised in selecting
strength of the system, that component the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci-
should be replaced by a stronger one, but one dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de-
that will also maintain the appropriate max- signed to be compatible for the connection.
imum arrest force characteristics. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some
lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life- cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the
line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be
more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life- used for lifeline/lanyard connections except
line should be used to compensate for the in emergency situations where no other
weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard available system is practical. The ‘‘one-and-
length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca- one’’ sliding hitch knot should never be used
tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or because it is unreliable in stopping a fall.
the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by The ‘‘two-and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’
one which has an appropriately incorporated knot (preferable) may be used in emergency
connector to eliminate the need for a knot. situations; however, care should be taken to
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline limit free fall distance to a minimum be-
around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup- cause of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
port can reduce its strength as much as 70 (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re-
percent due to the cutting action of the quired by the standard, each employee must
beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of have a separate lifeline [except employees
a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline engaged in constructing elevator shafts who
around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline are permitted to have two employees on one
should be protected from the edge; or free lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The
fall distance should be greatly minimized. reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the
around rough or sharp surfaces reduces movement of the lifeline during the arrest of
strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards,
avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging causing them to fall as well.
should be used. Such alternatives may in- (j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although
clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, not required by this standard for all connec-
wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the tions until January 1, 1998, locking
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap snaphooks designed for connection to suit-
around or over the problem surface. able objects (of sufficient strength) are high-
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on ly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking
their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a posi-
to greater loads than the impact load im- tive locking mechanism in addition to the
posed by an attached component. When the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow
angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 the keeper to open under moderate pressure
degrees, the impact force imparted to the without someone first releasing the mecha-
lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly nism. Such a feature, properly designed, ef-
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of fectively prevents roll-out from occurring.
15 degrees, the force amplification is about (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the fol-
2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- lowing connections must be avoided (unless
pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s properly designed locking snaphooks are
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- used) because they are conditions which can
line and the anchorages to which it is at- result in roll-out when a nonlocking
tached should be increased a number of snaphook is used:
times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a
should be taken in considering a horizontal horizontal lifeline.
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to
this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- one dee-ring.
zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each
movement of the falling employee and the other.
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall (iv) A snaphook connected back on its inte-
may cause other employees to fall also. Hori- gral lanyard.
zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing
be increased for each additional employee to loop or webbing lanyard.
be tied off. For these and other reasons, the (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring,
design of systems using horizontal lifelines rebar, or other connection point in relation
must only be done by qualified persons. Test- to the snaphook dimensions which would
ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed
use is recommended. by a turning motion of the snaphook.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated (k) Free fall considerations. The employer
along the axis of the bolt and its strength is and employee should at all times be aware
334
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. D
that a system’s maximum arresting force is be considered. In addition, when a body belt
evaluated under normal use conditions es- is used, the employee’s body will go through
tablished by the manufacturer, and in no a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi-
case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob-
feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can structions which might interfere with this
significantly increase the arresting force on motion should be avoided or a severe injury
the employee, possibly to the point of caus- could occur.
ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis- (n) Other considerations. Because of the de-
tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad-
required by the standard, in no case greater ditional considerations may be required for
than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera-
tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an- tion devices of the self-retracting type
chor should be located at or above the con- should be secured overhead in order to avoid
nection point of the fall arrest equipment to the weight of the device having to be sup-
belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional
ported by the employee. Also, if self- retract-
free fall distance is added to the length of
ing equipment is connected to a horizontal
the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach-
lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be
ing to the working surface will often result
minimized to prevent the device from sliding
in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For
down the lifeline to a position which creates
instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used,
a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all
the total free fall distance will be the dis-
tance from the working level to the body cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be
belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 followed.
feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another im-
portant consideration is that the arresting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART
force which the fall system must withstand 1926—POSITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS
also goes up with greater distances of free
fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
system. § 1926.502(e)
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance con- I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device
siderations. Other factors involved in a proper Systems. This appendix serves as a non-man-
tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis- datory guideline to assist employers comply
tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan- with the requirements for positioning device
yard will experience a length of stretching or systems in § 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c),
elongation, whereas activation of a decelera- (d) and (e) of Appendix C of subpart M relat-
tion device will result in a certain stopping ing to § 1926.502(d)—Personal Fall Arrest Sys-
distance. These distances should be available tems—set forth test procedures which may
with the lanyard or device’s instructions and
be used, along with the procedures listed
must be added to the free fall distance to ar-
below, to determine compliance with the re-
rive at the total fall distance before an em-
quirements for positioning device systems in
ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop-
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M.
ping distance may be very significant if the
lanyard or deceleration device is attached (a) General. (1) Single strap positioning de-
near or at the end of a long lifeline, which vices shall have one end attached to a fixed
may itself add considerable distance due to anchorage and the other end connected to a
its own elongation. As required by the stand- body belt or harness in the same manner as
ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of they would be used to protect employees.
these factors must also be maintained be- Double strap positioning devices, similar to
tween the employee and obstructions below, window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of
to prevent an injury due to impact before the the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and
system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a the other end shall hang free. The body belt
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should or harness shall be attached to the strap in
be allowed below the securing point of a rope the same manner as it would be used to pro-
grab type deceleration device, and the end tect employees. The two strap ends shall be
terminated to prevent the device from slid- adjusted to their maximum span.
ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and
should extend to the ground or the next shall not have a deflection greater than .04
working level below. These measures are inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds
suggested to prevent the worker from inad- (10 kN) is applied.
vertently moving past the end of the lifeline (3) During the testing of all systems, a test
and having the rope grab become disengaged weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds
from the lifeline. (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location The weight shall be a rigid object with a
of the tie-off should also consider the hazard girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96
of obstructions in the potential fall path of cm plus or minus 10 cm).
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the
possibilities of exaggerated swinging should specified weight one time without failure of
335
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
the system being tested. A new system shall SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS
be used for each test.
(5) The test weight for each test shall be Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress
Concrete Structures
hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its ‘‘at
rest’’ position), and shall be dropped so as to This Fall Protection Plan is specific for
permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). the following project:
(6) The test is failed whenever any break- Location of Job lllllllllllllll
age or slippage occurs which permits the Erecting Company lllllllllllll
weight to fall free of the system. Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll
(7) Following the test, the system need not Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll
be capable of further operation; however, all Plan Approved By llllllllllllll
such incapacities shall be readily apparent. Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll
The following Fall Protection Plan is a
II. Inspection Considerations. As required in
sample program prepared for the prevention
§ 1926.502 (e)(5), positioning device systems of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro-
must be regularly inspected. Any component tection Plan must be developed and evalu-
with any significant defect, such as cuts, ated on a site by site basis. It is rec-
tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; ommended that erectors discuss the written
alterations or additions which might affect Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area
its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; Office prior to going on a jobsite.
contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; (Company Name) is dedicated to the pro-
loose or damaged mountings; non-func- tection of its employees from on-the-job in-
tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- juries. All employees of (Company Name)
ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from have the responsibility to work safely on the
service immediately, and should be tagged or job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To sup-
marked as unusable, or destroyed. plement our standard safety policy by pro-
viding safety standards specifically designed
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to
1926—SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLAN ensure that each employee is trained and
made aware of the safety provisions which
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With are to be implemented by this plan prior to
§ 1926.502(k) the start of erection.
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the
Employers engaged in leading edge work, use of other than conventional fall protec-
precast concrete construction work and resi- tion at a number of areas on the project, as
dential construction work who can dem- well as identifying specific activities that re-
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates a quire non-conventional means of fall protec-
greater hazard to use conventional fall pro- tion. These areas include:
tection systems must develop and follow a a. Connecting activity (point of erection).
fall protection plan. Below are sample fall b. Leading edge work.
protection plans developed for precast con- c. Unprotected sides or edge.
crete construction and residential work that d. Grouting.
could be tailored to be site specific for other This plan is designed to enable employers
precast concrete or residential jobsite. This and employees to recognize the fall hazards
sample plan can be modified to be used for on this job and to establish the procedures
that are to be followed in order to prevent
other work involving leading edge work. The
falls to lower levels or through holes and
sample plan outlines the elements that must
openings in walking/working surfaces. Each
be addressed in any fall protection plan. The employee will be trained in these procedures
reasons outlined in this sample fall protec- and strictly adhere to them except when
tion plan are for illustrative purposes only doing so would expose the employee to a
and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion,
rationale (unless the conditions at the job this is the case, the employee is to notify the
site are the same as those covered by these foreman of the concern and the concern ad-
sample plans) for not using conventional fall dressed before proceeding.
protection systems for a particular precast Safety policy and procedure on any one
concrete or residential construction work- project cannot be administered, imple-
site. However, the sample plans provide guid- mented, monitored and enforced by any one
ance to employers on the type of information individual. The total objective of a safe, ac-
that is required to be discussed in fall pro- cident free work environment can only be ac-
tection plans. complished by a dedicated, concerted effort
by every individual involved with the project
from management down to the last em-
ployee. Each employee must understand
336
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E
their value to the company; the costs of acci- Only individuals with the appropriate experi-
dents, both monetary, physical, and emo- ence, skills, and training will be authorized
tional; the objective of the safety policy and as designated erectors. All employees that
procedures; the safety rules that apply to the will be working as designated erectors under
safety policy and procedures; and what their the safety monitoring system shall have
individual role is in administering, imple- been trained and instructed in the following
menting, monitoring, and compliance of areas:
their safety policy and procedures. This al- 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the
lows for a more personal approach to compli- work area (at the leading edge and when
ance through planning, training, under- making initial connections—point of erec-
standing and cooperative effort, rather than tion).
by strict enforcement. If for any reason an 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using estab-
unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will lished work practices which have been made
be implemented. known to the employees.
It is the responsibility of (name of com- 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or work-
petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- ing conditions that could lead to a fall, such
tection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is as windy conditions.
responsible for continual observational safe- 4. The function, use, and operation of safe-
ty checks of their work operations and to en- ty monitoring systems, guardrail systems,
force the safety policy and procedures. The body belt/harness systems, control zones and
foreman also is responsible to correct any other protection to be used.
unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is 5. The correct procedure for erecting,
the responsibility of the employee to under- maintaining, disassembling and inspecting
stand and adhere to the procedures of this the system(s) to be used.
plan and to follow the instructions of the 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or
foreman. It is also the responsibility of the the erection plan.
employee to bring to management’s atten- A conference will take place prior to start-
tion any unsafe or hazardous conditions or ing work involving all members of the erec-
acts that may cause injury to either them- tion crew, crane crew and supervisors of any
selves or any other employees. Any changes other concerned contractors. This conference
to this Fall Protection Plan must be ap- will be conducted by the precast concrete
proved by (name of Qualified Person). erection supervisor in charge of the project.
During the pre-work conference, erection
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON procedures and sequences pertinent to this
THIS PROJECT job will be thoroughly discussed and safety
Where conventional fall protection is in- practices to be used throughout the project
feasible or creates a greater hazard at the will be specified. Further, all personnel will
leading edge and during initial connecting be informed that the controlled access zones
activity, we plan to do this work using a are off limits to all personnel other than
safety monitoring system and expose only a those designated erectors specifically
minimum number of employees for the time trained to work in that area.
necessary to actually accomplish the job.
Safety Monitoring System
The maximum number of workers to be mon-
itored by one safety monitor is six (6). We A safety monitoring system means a fall
are designating the following trained em- protection system in which a competent per-
ployees as designated erectors and they are son is responsible for recognizing and warn-
permitted to enter the controlled access ing employees of fall hazards. The duties of
zones and work without the use of conven- the safety monitor are to:
tional fall protection. 1. Warn by voice when approaching the
Safety monitor: open edge in an unsafe manner.
Designated erector: 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous sit-
Designated erector: uation developing which cannot be seen by
another person involved with product place-
Designated erector:
ment, such as a member getting out of con-
Designated erector:
trol.
Designated erector:
3. Make the designated erectors aware they
Designated erector: are in a dangerous area.
The safety monitor shall be identified by 4. Be competent in recognizing fall haz-
wearing an orange hard hat. The designated ards.
erectors will be identified by one of the fol- 5. Warn employees when they appear to be
lowing methods: unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an
1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, unsafe manner.
or 6. Be on the same walking/working surface
2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, as the monitored employees and within vis-
or ual sighting distance of the monitored em-
3. They will wear a blue colored vest. ployees.
337
7. Be close enough to communicate orally ers will not be removed without the approval
with the employees. of the erection foreman.
8. Not allow other responsibilities to en- Precast concrete column erection through
cumber monitoring. If the safety monitor be- the existing deck requires that many holes
comes too encumbered with other respon- be provided through this deck. These are to
sibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erec- be covered and protected. Except for the
tion process; and (2) turn over other respon- opening being currently used to erect a col-
sibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn umn, all opening protection is to be left un-
over the safety monitoring function to an- disturbed. The opening being uncovered to
other designated, competent person. The erect a column will become part of the point
safety monitoring system shall not be used of erection and will be addressed as part of
when the wind is strong enough to cause this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is
loads with large surface areas to swing out of to be done at the erection foreman’s direc-
radius, or result in loss of control of the tion and will only occur immediately prior
load, or when weather conditions cause the to ‘‘feeding’’ the column through the open-
walking-working surfaces to become icy or ing. Once the end of the column is through
slippery. the slab opening, there will no longer exist a
fall hazard at this location.
Control Zone System
III. IMPLEMENTATION OF FALL PROTECTION
A controlled access zone means an area PLAN
designated and clearly marked, in which
leading edge work may take place without The structure being erected is a multistory
the use of guardrail, safety net or personal total precast concrete building consisting of
fall arrest systems to protect the employees columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core
in the area. Control zone systems shall com- slabs and double tee floor and roof members.
ply with the following provisions: The following is a list of the products and
1. When used to control access to areas erection situations on this job:
where leading edge and other operations are
Columns
taking place the controlled access zone shall
be defined by a control line or by any other For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees
means that restricts access. disconnecting crane hooks from columns will
When control lines are used, they shall be work from a ladder and wear a body belt/har-
erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more ness with lanyard and be tied off when both
than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the hands are needed to disconnect. For tying
member being erected, whichever is less, off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to
from the leading edge. the lifting eye at the top of the column,
2. The control line shall extend along the prior to lifting, to be used with a manually
entire length of the unprotected or leading operated or mobile rope grab. For columns
edge and shall be approximately parallel to too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and
the unprotected or leading edge. higher, an added cable will be used to reduce
3. The control line shall be connected on the height of the disconnecting point so that
each side to a guardrail system or wall. a ladder can be used. This cable will be left
4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, in place until a point in erection that it can
wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and be removed safely. In some cases, columns
supporting stanchions as follows: will be unhooked from the crane by using an
5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise erection tube or shackle with a pull pin
clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 which is released from the ground after the
m) intervals with high- visibility material. column is stabilized.
6. Each line shall be rigged and supported The column will be adequately connected
in such a way that its lowest point (includ- and/or braced to safely support the weight of
ing sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from a ladder with an employee on it.
the walking/working surface and its highest
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from Inverted Tee Beams
the walking/working surface. Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at
7. Each line shall have a minimum break- a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam,
ing strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). make initial connections, and final align-
ment from a ladder. If the employee needs to
Holes
reach over the side of the beam to bar or
All openings greater than 12 in.×12 in. will make an adjustment to the alignment of the
have perimeter guarding or covering. All beam, they will mount the beam and be tied
predetermined holes will have the plywood off to the lifting device in the beam after en-
covers made in the precasters’ yard and suring the load has been stabilized on its
shipped with the member to the jobsite. bearing. To disconnect the crane from the
Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper pro- beam an employee will stand a ladder
tection for the hole must be provided to pro- against the beam. Because the use of ladders
tect the workers. Perimeter guarding or cov- is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams
338
will be initially placed with the use of tag under the control of the safety monitor for
lines and their final alignment made by a fall protection and are directed to stay a
person on a manlift or similar employee po- minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the
sitioning systems. event a designated erector must move from
one end of a member, which has just been
Spandrel Beams placed at the leading edge, they must first
Spandrel beams at the exterior of the move away from the leading edge a min-
building will be aligned as closely as possible imum of six (6) ft and then progress to the
with the use of tag lines with the final place- other end while maintaining the minimum
ment of the spandrel beam made from a lad- distance of six (6) ft at all times.
der at the open end of the structure. A ladder Erection of double tees, where conditions
will be used to make the initial connections require bearing of one end into a closed
and a ladder will be used to disconnect the pocket and the other end on a beam ledge,
crane. The other end of the beam will be restricting the tee legs from going directly
placed by the designated erector from the into the pockets, require special consider-
double tee deck under the observation of the ations. The tee legs that are to bear in the
safety monitor. closed pocket must hang lower than those at
The beams will be adequately connected the beam bearing. The double tee will be
and/or braced to safely support the weight of ‘‘two-lined’’ in order to elevate one end high-
er than the other to allow for the low end to
a ladder with an employee on it.
be ducked into the closed pocket using the
Floor and Roof Members following procedure.
The double tee will be rigged with a stand-
During installation of the precast concrete ard four-way spreader off of the main load
floor and/or roof members, the work deck line. An additional choker will be attached
continuously increases in area as more and to the married point of the two-legged
more units are being erected and positioned. spreader at the end of the tee that is to be
Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with
constantly modified with the leading edge the main load line and swung into a position
changing location as each member is in- as close as possible to the tee’s final bearing
stalled. The fall protection for workers at elevation. When the tee is in this position
the leading edge shall be assured by properly and stabilized, the whip line load block will
constructed and maintained control zone be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this
lines not more than 60 ft away from the lead- time, two erectors will walk out on the sus-
ing edge supplemented by a safety moni- pended tee deck at midspan of the tee mem-
toring system to ensure the safety of all des- ber and pull the load block to the end of the
ignated erectors working within the area de- tee to be elevated and attach the additional
fined by the control zone lines. choker to the load block. The possibility of
The hollow core slabs erected on the ma- entanglement with the crane lines and other
sonry portion of the building will be erected obstacles during this two lining process
and grouted using the safety monitoring sys- while raising and lowering the crane block
tem. Grout will be placed in the space be- on that second line could be hazardous to an
tween the end of the slab and face shell of encumbered employee. Therefore, the des-
the concrete masonry by dumping from a ignated erectors will not tie off during any
wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways be- part of this process. While the designated
tween the slabs will be dumped from a wheel- erectors are on the double tee, the safety
barrow and then spread with long handled monitoring system will be used. After at-
tools, allowing the worker to stand erect fac- taching the choker, the two erectors then
ing toward the unprotected edge and back step back on the previously erected tee deck
from any work deck edge. and signal the crane operator to hoist the
Whenever possible, the designated erectors load with the whip line to the elevation that
will approach the incoming member at the will allow for enough clearance to let the low
leading edge only after it is below waist end tee legs slide into the pockets when the
height so that the member itself provides main load line is lowered. The erector, who
protection against falls. is handling the lowered end of the tee at the
Except for the situations described below, closed pocket bearing, will step out on the
when the arriving floor or roof member is suspended tee. An erection bar will then be
within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the placed between the end of the tee leg and the
designated erectors can then proceed to their inside face of the pocketed spandrel member.
position of erection at each end of the mem- The tee is barred away from the pocketed
ber under the control of the safety monitor. member to reduce the friction and lateral
Crane hooks will be unhooked from double force against the pocketed member. As the
tee members by designated erectors under tee is being lowered, the other erector re-
the direction and supervision of the safety mains on the tee which was previously erect-
monitor. ed to handle the other end. At this point the
Designated erectors, while waiting for the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point
next floor or roof member, will be constantly where the tee legs can freely slide into the
339
pockets. The erector working the lowered IV. CONVENTIONAL FALL PROTECTION CONSID-
end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar ERED FOR THE POINT OF ERECTION OR LEAD-
between the tee and the face of the pocketed ING EDGE ERECTION OPERATIONS
spandrel member to very gradually let the
A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper
bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly In this particular erection sequence and
lowered into its final erected position. procedure, personal fall arrest systems re-
The designated erector should be allowed quiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines
onto the suspended double tee, otherwise and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards
there is no control over the horizontal move- to workers and will create offsetting hazards
ment of the double tee and this movement during their usage at the leading edge of pre-
cast/prestressed concrete construction.
could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or
Leading edge erection and initial connec-
the column out of plumb. The control nections are conducted by employees who are
essary to prevent hitting the spandrel can specifically trained to do this type of work
only be done safely from the top of the dou- and are trained to recognize the fall hazards.
ble tee being erected. The nature of such work normally exposes
Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of the employee to the fall hazard for a short
the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated period of time and installation of fall protec-
decks requires the use of a safety monitor tion systems for a short duration is not fea-
and a controlled access zone that is a min- sible because it exposes the installers of the
imum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1⁄2 the system to the same fall hazard, but for a
length of the wall panels away from the un- longer period of time.
protected edge, so that designated erectors 1. It is necessary that the employee be able
can move freely and unencumbered when re- to move freely without encumbrance in order
ceiving the panels. Bracing, if required for to guide the sections of precast concrete into
their final position without having lifelines
stability, will be installed by ladder. After
attached which will restrict the employee’s
the braces are secured, the crane will be dis-
ability to move about at the point of erec-
connected from the wall by using a ladder. tion.
The wall to wall connections will also be per- 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more
formed from a ladder. workers to maneuver around each other as a
Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The concrete member is positioned to fit into the
locating of survey lines, panel layout and structure. If they are each attached to a life-
other installation prerequisites (prewelding, line, part of their attention must be diverted
etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) from their main task of positioning a mem-
will not commence until floor perimeter and ber weighing several tons to the task of
floor openings have been protected. In some avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or
areas, it is necessary because of panel con- avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if
figuration to remove the perimeter protec- these workers are attached to lanyards,
tion as the cladding is being installed. Re- more fall potential would result than from
moval of perimeter protection will be per- not using such a device.
In this specific erection sequence and pro-
formed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of
cedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the
cladding erection to minimize temporarily
problem of two workers becoming tangled. In
unprotected floor edges. Those workers with- fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline
in 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning from retracting as the worker moved, thus
the cladding when the perimeter protection potentially exposing the worker to a fall
is removed shall be tied off. greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing
over the lifeline of another worker can cre-
Detailing ate a hazard because the movement of one
Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or person can unbalance the other. In the event
more to lower levels, who are not actively of a fall by one person there is a likelihood
engaged in leading edge work or connecting that the other person will be caused to fall
as well. In addition, if contamination such as
activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting,
grout (during hollow core grouting) enters
bracing, guying, patching, painting or other
the retractable housing it can cause exces-
operations, and who are working less than
sive wear and damage to the device and
six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be could clog the retracting mechanism as the
tied off at all times or guardrails will be in- lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstruct-
stalled. Employees engaged in these activi- ing the cable orifice can defeat the device’s
ties but who are more than six (6) ft from an shock absorbing function, produce cable
unprotected edge as defined by the control slack and damage, and adversely affect cable
zone lines, do not require fall protection but extraction and retraction.
a warning line or control lines must be erect- 3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be
ed to remind employees they are approach- trapped and crushed by moving structural
ing an area where fall protection is required. members if the employee becomes restrained
340
by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and ation of erectors’ position is done before the
cannot get out of the path of the moving members are cast. Any hole or other attach-
load. ment must be approved by the engineer who
The sudden movement of a precast con- designed the member. It is possible that
crete member being raised by a crane can be some design restrictions will not allow a
caused by a number of factors. When this member to be weakened by an additional
happens, a connector may immediately have hole; however, it is anticipated that such sit-
to move a considerable distance to avoid in- uations would be the exception, not the rule.
jury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being Attachment points, other than on the deck
used, the connector could be trapped. There- surface, will require removal and/or
fore, there is a greater risk of injury if the patching. In order to remove and/or patch
connector is tied to the structure for this these points, requires the employee to be ex-
specific erection sequence and procedure. posed to an additional fall hazard at an un-
When necessary to move away from a re- protected perimeter. The fact that attach-
tractable device, the worker cannot move at ment points could be available anywhere on
a rate greater than the device locking speed the structure does not eliminate the hazards
typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving to- of using these points for tying off as dis-
ward the device it is necessary to move at a cussed above. A logical point for tying off on
rate which does not permit cable slack to double tees would be using the lifting loops,
build up. This slack may cause cable retrac- except that they must be cut off to eliminate
tion acceleration and cause a worker to lose a tripping hazard at an appropriate time.
their balance by applying a higher than nor- 5. Providing attachment at a point above
mal jerking force on the body when the cable the walking/working surface would also cre-
suddenly becomes taut after building up mo- ate fall exposures for employees installing
mentum. This slack can also cause damage their devices. Final positioning of a precast
to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven concrete member requires it to be moved in
coiling of cable on the drum, and possible such a way that it must pass through the
cable damage. area that would be occupied by the lifeline
The factors causing sudden movements for and the lanyards attached to the point
this location include: above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines
and lanyards on a moving member could pull
(a) Cranes employees from the work surface. Also, the
structure is being created and, in most cases,
(1) Operator error. there is no structure above the members
(2) Site conditions (soft or unstable being placed.
ground). (a) Temporary structural supports, in-
(3) Mechanical failure. stalled to provide attaching points for life-
(4) Structural failure. lines limit the space which is essential for
(5) Rigging failure. orderly positioning, alignment and place-
(6) Crane signal/radio communication fail- ment of the precast concrete members. To
ure. keep the lanyards a reasonable and manage-
(b) Weather Conditions able length, lifeline supports would nec-
essarily need to be in proximity to the posi-
(1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—par- tioning process. A sudden shift of the precast
ticularly a problem with the large surface concrete member being positioned because of
areas of precast concrete members. wind pressure or crane movement could
(2) Snow/rain (visibility). make it strike the temporary supporting
(3) Fog (visibility). structure, moving it suddenly and causing
(4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or me- tied off employees to fall.
chanical problems. (b) The time in manhours which would be
(c) Structure/Product Conditions. expended in placing and maintaining tem-
(1) Lifting Eye failure. porary structural supports for lifeline at-
(2) Bearing failure or slippage. taching points could exceed the expended
(3) Structure shifting. manhours involved in placing the precast
(4) Bracing failure. concrete members. No protection could be
(5) Product failure. provided for the employees erecting the tem-
(d) Human Error. porary structural supports and these sup-
(1) Incorrect tag line procedure. ports would have to be moved for each suc-
(2) Tag line hang-up. cessive step in the construction process, thus
(3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane sig- greatly increasing the employee’s exposure
nals. to the fall hazard.
(4) Misjudged elevation of member. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally
(5) Misjudged speed of member. between two columns to provide tie off lines
(6) Misjudged angle of member. for erecting or walking a beam for con-
4. Anchorages or special attachment points necting work is not feasible and creates a
could be cast into the precast concrete mem- greater hazard on this multi-story building
bers if sufficient preplanning and consider- for the following reasons:
341
(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it ty block/retractable lifeline anchored to the
must be installed between the two columns. walking-working surface; and the potential
To perform this installation requires an for swing hazards is increased.
erector to have more fall exposure time at- Manufacturers also require that workers
taching the cable to the columns than would not work at a level where the point of
be spent to make the beam to column con- snaphook attachment to the body harness is
nection itself. above the device because this will increase
(2) If such a line is to be installed so that the free fall distance and the deceleration
an erector can walk along a beam, it must be distance and will cause higher forces on the
overhead or below him. For example, if a body in the event of an accidental fall.
connector must walk along a 24 in. wide Manufacturers recommend an anchorage
beam, the presence of a line next to the con- for the retractable lifeline which is immov-
nector at waist level, attached directly to ably fixed in space and is independent of the
the columns, would prevent the connector user’s support systems. A moveable anchor-
from centering their weight over the beam age is one which can be moved around (such
and balancing themselves. Installing the line as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which
above the connector might be possible on the can deflect substantially under shock load-
first level of a two-story column; however, ing (such as a horizontal cable or very flexi-
the column may extend only a few feet above ble beam). In the case of a very flexible an-
the floor level at the second level or be flush chorage, a shock load applied to the anchor-
with the floor level. Attaching the line to age during fall arrest can cause oscillation of
the side of the beam could be a solution; the flexible anchorage such that the retract-
however, it would require the connector to
able brake mechanism may undergo one or
attach the lanyard below foot level which
more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking
would most likely extend a fall farther than
(ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflec-
6 ft.
tion is dampened. Therefore, use of a move-
(3) When lines are strung over every beam,
able anchorage involves critical engineering
it becomes more and more difficult for the
and safety factors and should only be consid-
crane operator to lower a precast concrete
ered after fixed anchorage has been deter-
member into position without the member
mined to be not feasible.
becoming fouled. Should the member become
entangled, it could easily dislodge the line Horizontal cables used as an anchorage
from a column. If a worker is tied to it at present an additional hazard due to amplifi-
the time, a fall could be caused. cation of the horizontal component of max-
6. The ANSI A10.14–1991 American National imum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to
Standard for Construction and Demolition the points where the horizontal cable is at-
Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, tached to the structure. This amplification
Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Con- is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal
struction and Demolition Use, states that cable and is most severe for small angles of
the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the
device should, if possible, be located above horizontal force on the points of cable at-
the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. tachment can be amplified by a factor of 15.
ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable an- It is also necessary to install the retract-
chorage point is one which is located as high able device vertically overhead to minimize
as possible to prevent contact with an ob- swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s
struction below should the worker fall. Most swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous
manufacturers also warn in the user’s hand- situations exist: (1) due to the swing, hori-
book that the safety block/retractable life- zontal speed of the user may be high enough
line must be positioned above the D-ring to cause injury when an obstacle in the
(above the work space of the intended user) swing fall path is struck by either the user
and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall dis-
restraint equipment be used in accordance tance of the user may be much greater than
with the manufacturer’s instructions. if the user had fallen only vertically without
Attachment of a retractable device to a a swing fall path.
horizontal cable near floor level or using the With retractable lines, overconfidence may
inserts in the floor or roof members may re- cause the worker to engage in inappropriate
sult in increased free fall due to the dorsal behavior, such as approaching the perimeter
D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably
than the attachment point of the snaphook greater than the shortest distance between
to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker the anchorage point and the leading edge.
with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a
or surface, reduces the working length to worker’s fall before he or she has fallen a few
only one foot, by placing the anchorage five feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of
feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, the floor or beam and swing the worker like
impact loads may exceed maximum fall ar- a pendulum until the line has moved to a po-
rest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D- sition where the distance between the an-
ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safe- chorage point and floor edge is the shortest
342
distance between those two points. Accom- time necessary to position and secure the
panying this pendulum swing is a lowering of concrete member.
the worker, with the attendant danger that 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter
he or she may violently impact the floor or wall openings and opensided floors, causes
some obstruction below. attachment points to be left in architectural
The risk of a cable breaking is increased if concrete which must be patched and filled
a lifeline is dragged sideways across the with matching material after the net sup-
rough surface or edge of a concrete member porting hardware is removed. In order to
at the same moment that the lifeline is patch these openings, additional numbers of
being subjected to a maximum impact load- employees must be suspended by swing
ing during a fall. The typical 3⁄16 in. cable in stages, boatswain chairs or other devices,
a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength thereby increasing the amount of fall expo-
of from 3000 to 3700 lbs. sure time to employees.
7. The competent person, who can take 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional
into account the specialized operations being hazard at the perimeter of the erected struc-
performed on this project, should determine ture where limited space is available in
when and where a designated erector cannot which members can be turned after being
use a personal fall arrest system. lifted from the ground by the crane. There
B. Safety Net Systems would be a high probability that the member
being lifted could become entangled in net
The nature of this particular precast con- hardware, cables, etc.
crete erection worksite precludes the safe 6. The use of safety nets where structural
use of safety nets where point of erection or wall panels are being erected would prevent
leading edge work must take place. movement of panels to point of installation.
1. To install safety nets in the interior To be effective, nets would necessarily have
high bay of the single story portion of the to provide protection across the area where
building poses rigging attachment problems. structural supporting wall panels would be
Structural members do not exist to which set and plumbed before roof units could be
supporting devices for nets can be attached placed.
in the area where protection is required. As 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of
the erection operation advances, the loca- the high rise portion of the structure poses a
tion of point of erection or leading edge work particular hazard in that the crane operator
changes constantly as each member is at- cannot see or judge the proximity of the load
tached to the structure. Due to this constant in relation to the structure or nets. If the
change it is not feasible to set net sections signaler is looking through nets and sup-
and build separate structures to support the porting structural devices while giving in-
nets. structions to the crane operator, it is not
2. The nature of the erection process for possible to judge precise relationships be-
the precast concrete members is such that tween the load and the structure itself or to
an installed net would protect workers as nets and supporting structural devices. This
they position and secure only one structural could cause the load to become entangled in
member. After each member is stabilized the the net or hit the structure causing poten-
net would have to be moved to a new loca- tial damage.
tion (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or
the possibility of a move to a different level C. Guardrail Systems
or area of the structure) to protect workers
placing the next piece in the construction se- On this particular worksite, guardrails,
quence. The result would be the installation barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter
and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly guarding devices or methods on the erection
throughout the normal work day. As the floor will pose problems to safe erection pro-
time necessary to install a net, test, and re- cedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected
move it is significantly greater than the by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members
time necessary to position and secure a pre- next to one another and welding or grouting
cast concrete member, the exposure time for them together. The perimeter of a floor and
the worker installing the safety net would be roof changes each time a new member is
far longer than for the workers whom the net placed into position. It is unreasonable and
is intended to protect. The time exposure re- virtually impossible to erect guardrails and
peats itself each time the nets and sup- toe boards at the ever changing leading edge
porting hardware must be moved laterally or of a floor or roof.
upward to provide protection at the point of 1. To position a member safely it is nec-
erection or leading edge. essary to remove all obstructions extending
3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) re- above the floor level near the point of erec-
quires that operations shall not be under- tion. Such a procedure allows workers to
taken until the net is in place and has been swing a new member across the erected sur-
tested. With the point of erection constantly face as necessary to position it properly
changing, the time necessary to install and without worrying about knocking material
test a safety net significantly exceeds the off of this surface.
343
Hollow core slab erection on the masonry area that could be erected more safely by the
wall requires installation of the perimeter use of these fall protection measures, the
protection where the masonry wall has to be foreman should be notified.
constructed. This means the guardrail is in- A. Scaffolds are not used because:
stalled then subsequently removed to con- 1. The leading edge of the building is con-
tinue the masonry construction. The erector stantly changing and the scaffolding would
will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer have to be moved at very frequent intervals.
period of time while installing and removing Employees erecting and dismantling the
perimeter protection than while erecting the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards
slabs. for a greater length of time than they would
In hollow core work, as in other precast by merely erecting the precast concrete
concrete erection, others are not typically member.
on the work deck until the precast concrete 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the
erection is complete. The deck is not com- safe swinging of a load by the crane.
plete until the leveling, aligning, and grout- 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not
ing of the joints is done. It is normal prac- allow for the safe use of scaffolding.
tice to keep others off the deck until at least B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used
the next day after the installation is com- because:
plete to allow the grout to harden. 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not
2. There is no permanent boundary until reach areas on the deck that are erected over
all structural members have been placed in other levels.
the floor or roof. At the leading edge, work- 2. The leading edge of the building is usu-
ers are operating at the temporary edge of ally over a lower level of the building and
the structure as they work to position the this lower level will not support the weight
next member in the sequence. Compliance of a vehicle mounted platform.
with the standard would require a guardrail 3. A vehicle mounted platform could inter-
and toe board be installed along this edge. fere with the safe swinging of a load by the
However, the presence of such a device would crane, either by the crane swinging the load
prevent a new member from being swung over or into the equipment.
over the erected surface low enough to allow 4. Power lines and surrounding site work
workers to control it safely during the posi- do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle
tioning process. Further, these employees mounted platform.
would have to work through the guardrail to C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are
align the new member and connect it to the not used because:
structure. The guardrail would not protect 1. A second crane close enough to suspend
an employee who must lean through it to do any employee in the working and erecting
the necessary work, rather it would hinder area could interfere with the safe swinging of
the employee to such a degree that a greater a load by the crane hoisting the product to
hazard is created than if the guardrail were be erected.
absent. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work
3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at do not allow for the safe use of a second
the leading edge of installed floor or roof crane on the job.
sections by creating the possibility of em-
ployees being caught between guardrails and VI. ENFORCEMENT
suspended loads. The lack of a clear work
area in which to guide the suspended load Constant awareness of and respect for fall
into position for placement and welding of hazards, and compliance with all safety rules
members into the existing structure creates are considered conditions of employment.
still further hazards. The jobsite Superintendent, as well as indi-
4. Where erection processes require precast viduals in the Safety and Personnel Depart-
concrete stairways or openings to be in- ment, reserve the right to issue disciplinary
stalled as an integral part of the overall warnings to employees, up to and including
erection process, it must also be recognized termination, for failure to follow the guide-
that guardrails or handrails must not project lines of this program.
above the surface of the erection floor. Such
guardrails should be terminated at the level VII. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
of the erection floor to avoid placing haz- All accidents that result in injury to work-
ardous obstacles in the path of a member ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves-
being positioned. tigated and reported. It is an integral part of
any safety program that documentation take
V. OTHER FALL PROTECTION MEASURES place as soon as possible so that the cause
CONSIDERED FOR THIS JOB
and means of prevention can be identified to
The following is a list and explanation of prevent a reoccurrence.
other fall protection measures available and In the event that an employee falls or
an explanation of limitations for use on this there is some other related, serious incident
particular jobsite. If during the course of occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de-
erecting the building the employee sees an termine if additional practices, procedures,
344
or training need to be implemented to pre- In these cases, conventional fall protection
vent similar types of falls or incidents from systems may not be the safest choice for
occurring. builders. This plan is designed to enable em-
ployers and employees to recognize the fall
VIII. CHANGES TO PLAN hazards associated with this job and to es-
Any changes to the plan will be approved tablish the safest procedures that are to be
by (name of the qualified person). This plan followed in order to prevent falls to lower
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the levels or through holes and openings in walk-
job progresses to determine if additional ing/working surfaces.
practices, procedures or training needs to be Each employee will be trained in these pro-
implemented by the competent person to im- cedures and will strictly adhere to them ex-
prove or provide additional fall protection. cept when doing so would expose the em-
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- ployee to a greater hazard. If, in the employ-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is
plan and all approved changes shall be main- to notify the competent person of their con-
tained at the jobsite. cern and have the concern addressed before
proceeding.
Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential It is the responsibility of (name of com-
Construction petent person) to implement this Fall Pro-
tection Plan. Continual observational safety
(INSERT COMPANY NAME) checks of work operations and the enforce-
This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For ment of the safety policy and procedures
The Following Project: shall be regularly enforced. The crew super-
Location of Job lllllllllllllll visor or foreman (insert name) is responsible
Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll for correcting any unsafe practices or condi-
Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll tions immediately.
Plan Approved By llllllllllllll It is the responsibility of the employer to
Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll ensure that all employees understand and
The following Fall Protection Plan is a adhere to the procedures of this plan and to
sample program prepared for the prevention follow the instructions of the crew super-
of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- visor. It is also the responsibility of the em-
tection Plan must be developed and evalu- ployee to bring to management’s attention
ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- any unsafe or hazardous conditions or prac-
ommended that builders discuss the written tices that may cause injury to either them-
Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area selves or any other employees. Any changes
Office prior to going on a jobsite. to the Fall Protection Plan must be ap-
proved by (name of qualified person).
I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON
(Your company name here) is dedicated to THIS JOB
the protection of its employees from on-the-
job injuries. All employees of (Your company Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior
name here) have the responsibility to work wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing
safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is and joist/truss activities will be conducted
to supplement our existing safety and health by employees who are specifically trained to
program and to ensure that every employee do this type of work and are trained to rec-
who works for (Your company name here) ognize the fall hazards. The nature of such
recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes work normally exposes the employee to the
the appropriate measures to address those fall hazard for a short period of time. This
hazards. Plan details how (Your company name here)
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the will minimize these hazards.
use of conventional fall protection at a num-
Controlled Access Zones
ber of areas on the project, as well as identi-
fies specific activities that require non-con- When using the Plan to implement the fall
ventional means of fall protection. During protection options available, workers must
the construction of residential buildings be protected through limited access to high
under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infea- hazard locations. Before any non-conven-
sible or it creates a greater hazard to use tional fall protection systems are used as
conventional fall protection systems at spe- part of the work plan, a controlled access
cific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the
tasks may include, but are not limited to: competent person as an area where a recog-
a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and nized hazard exists. The demarcation of the
rafters; CAZ shall be communicated by the com-
b. Installation of floor sheathing and petent person in a recognized manner, either
joists; through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains.
c. Roof sheathing operations; and (Your company name here) shall take the
d. Erecting exterior walls. following steps to ensure that the CAZ is
345
clearly marked or controlled by the com- exposed to fall hazards while working from
petent person: the top plate installing trusses/rafters:
• All access to the CAZ must be restricted • Only the following trained workers will
to authorized entrants; be allowed to work on the top plate during
• All workers who are permitted in the roof truss or rafter installation:
CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sec- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tions of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable llllllllllllllllllllllll
by the competent person) prior to implemen- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tation;
• Workers shall have no other duties to
• The competent person shall ensure that
perform during truss/rafter erection proce-
all protective elements of the CAZ be imple-
dures;
mented prior to the beginning of work.
• All trusses/rafters will be adequately
Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and braced before any worker can use the truss/
Rafter Erection rafter as a support;
• Workers will remain on the top plate
During the erection and bracing of roof using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as
trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection a support while other trusses/rafters are
may present a greater hazard to workers. On being erected;
this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal • Workers will leave the area of the se-
fall arrest systems will not provide adequate cured trusses only when it is necessary to se-
fall protection because the nets will cause cure another truss/rafter;
the walls to collapse, while there are no suit- • The first two trusses/rafters will be set
able attachment or anchorage points for from ladders leaning on side walls at points
guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. where the walls can support the weight of
On this job, requiring workers to use a lad- the ladder; and
der for the entire installation process will • A worker will climb onto the interior top
cause a greater hazard because the worker plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the
must stand on the ladder with his back or first two trusses/rafters being set.
side to the front of the ladder. While erecting
The workers responsible for detaching
the truss or rafter the worker will need both
trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses
hands to maneuver the truss and therefore
at the peaks traditionally are positioned at
cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, lad-
the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are
ders cannot be adequately protected from
also situations where workers securing
movement while trusses are being maneu-
rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on
vered into place. Many workers may experi-
top of the ridge beam.
ence additional fatigue because of the in-
(Your company name here) shall take the
crease in overhead work with heavy mate-
following steps to protect workers who are
rials, which can also lead to a greater haz-
exposed to fall hazards while securing truss-
ard.
es/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge
Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on
beam:
this job because the ground, after recent
• Only the following trained workers will
backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding.
be allowed to work at the peak during roof
In most cases, the erection and dismantling
truss or rafter installation:
of the scaffold would expose workers to a
greater fall hazard than erection of the llllllllllllllllllllllll
trusses/rafters. llllllllllllllllllllllll
On all walls eight feet or less, workers will llllllllllllllllllllllll
install interior scaffolds along the interior • Once truss or rafter installation begins,
wall below the location where the trusses/ workers not involved in that activity shall
rafters will be erected. ‘‘Sawhorse’’ scaffolds not stand or walk below or adjacent to the
constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2×10 roof opening or exterior walls in any area
planks will often allow workers to be ele- where they could be struck by falling ob-
vated high enough to allow for the erection jects;
of trusses and rafters without working on • Workers shall have no other duties than
the top plate of the wall. securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam;
In structures that have walls higher than • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the
eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam
ladders would create a greater hazard, safe shall work from a stable position, either by
working procedures will be utilized when sitting on a ‘‘ridge seat’’ or other equivalent
working on the top plate and will be mon- surface that provides additional stability or
itored by the crew supervisor. During all by positioning themselves in previously sta-
stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of bilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and
the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all reaching through the trusses/rafters;
times. • Workers shall not remain on or in the
(Your company name here) shall take the peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safe-
following steps to protect workers who are ly complete the task.
346
Roof Sheathing Operations are installed. For roofs with pitches in ex-
cess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed
Workers typically install roof sheathing
at four-foot intervals.
after all trusses/rafters and any permanent
truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet)
unstable until some sheathing is installed, so are present, roof sheathing operations shall
workers installing roof sheathing cannot be be suspended unless safe footing can be as-
protected from fall hazards by conventional sured for those workers installing sheathing.
fall protection systems until it is determined • When strong winds (above 40 miles per
that the roofing system can be used as an an- hour) are present, roof sheathing operations
chorage point. At that point, employees are to be suspended unless wind breakers are
shall be protected by a personal fall arrest erected.
system.
Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing
worker falls while attached to a single truss During the installation of floor sheathing/
with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause joists (leading edge construction), the fol-
collapse, and there is no place to attach lowing steps shall be taken to protect work-
guardrails. ers:
All workers will ensure that they have se- • Only the following trained workers will
cure footing before they attempt to walk on
be allowed to install floor joists or sheath-
the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots
ing:
of mud or other slip hazards.
To minimize the time workers must be ex- llllllllllllllllllllllll
posed to a fall hazard, materials will be llllllllllllllllllllllll
staged to allow for the quickest installation llllllllllllllllllllllll
of sheathing. • Materials for the operations shall be con-
(Your company name here) shall take the veniently staged to allow for easy access to
following steps to protect workers who are workers;
exposed to fall hazards while installing roof • The first floor joists or trusses will be
sheathing: rolled into position and secured either from
• Once roof sheathing installation begins, the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds;
workers not involved in that activity shall • Each successive floor joist or truss will
not stand or walk below or adjacent to the be rolled into place and secured from a plat-
roof opening or exterior walls in any area form created from a sheet of plywood laid
where they could be struck by falling ob- over the previously secured floor joists or
jects; trusses;
• The competent person shall determine
• Except for the first row of sheathing
the limits of this area, which shall be clearly
which will be installed from ladders or the
communicated to workers prior to place-
ground, workers shall work from the estab-
ment of the first piece of roof sheathing;
lished deck; and
• The competent person may order work
on the roof to be suspended for brief periods • Any workers not assisting in the leading
as necessary to allow other workers to pass edge construction while leading edges still
through such areas when this would not cre- exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the install-
ate a greater hazard; ers) shall not be permitted within six feet of
• Only qualified workers shall install roof the leading edge under construction.
sheathing;
Erection of Exterior Walls
• The bottom row of roof sheathing may be
installed by workers standing in truss webs; During the construction and erection of ex-
• After the bottom row of roof sheathing is terior walls, employers shall take the fol-
installed, a slide guard extending the width lowing steps to protect workers:
of the roof shall be securely attached to the • Only the following trained workers will
roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no be allowed to erect exterior walls:
less than nominal 4’’ height capable of lim-
llllllllllllllllllllllll
iting the uncontrolled slide of workers.
Workers should install the slide guard while llllllllllllllllllllllll
standing in truss webs and leaning over the llllllllllllllllllllllll
sheathing; • A painted line six feet from the perim-
• Additional rows of roof sheathing may be eter will be clearly marked prior to any wall
installed by workers positioned on pre- erection activities to warn of the approach-
viously installed rows of sheathing. A slide ing unprotected edge;
guard can be used to assist workers in re- • Materials for operations shall be conven-
taining their footing during successive iently staged to minimize fall hazards; and
sheathing operations; and • Workers constructing exterior walls
• Additional slide guards shall be securely shall complete as much cutting of materials
attached to the roof at intervals not to ex- and other preparation as possible away from
ceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing the edge of the deck.
347
III. ENFORCEMENT minations of a qualified engineer com-
Constant awareness of and respect for fall petent in this field and such determina-
hazards, and compliance with all safety rules tions will be appropriately documented
are considered conditions of employment. and recorded. Attachments used with
The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as cranes shall not exceed the capacity,
individuals in the Safety and Personnel De- rating, or scope recommended by the
partment, reserve the right to issue discipli-
manufacturer.
nary warnings to employees, up to and in-
cluding termination, for failure to follow the (2) Rated load capacities, and rec-
guidelines of this program. ommended operating speeds, special
hazard warnings, or instruction, shall
IV. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS be conspicuously posted on all equip-
All accidents that result in injury to work- ment. Instructions or warnings shall be
ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- visible to the operator while he is at
tigated and reported. It is an integral part of his control station.
any safety program that documentation take (3) [Reserved]
place as soon as possible so that the cause
(4) Hand signals to crane and derrick
and means of prevention can be identified to
prevent a reoccurrence. operators shall be those prescribed by
In the event that an employee falls or the applicable ANSI standard for the
there is some other related, serious incident type of crane in use. An illustration of
occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- the signals shall be posted at the job
termine if additional practices, procedures, site.
or training need to be implemented to pre- (5) The employer shall designate a
vent similar types of falls or incidents from
competent person who shall inspect all
occurring.
machinery and equipment prior to each
V. CHANGES TO PLAN use, and during use, to make sure it is
Any changes to the plan will be approved in safe operating condition. Any defi-
by (name of the qualified person). This plan ciencies shall be repaired, or defective
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the parts replaced, before continued use.
job progresses to determine if additional (6) A thorough, annual inspection of
practices, procedures or training needs to be the hoisting machinery shall be made
implemented by the competent person to im- by a competent person, or by a govern-
prove or provide additional fall protection.
ment or private agency recognized by
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this the U.S. Department of Labor. The em-
plan and all approved changes shall be main- ployer shall maintain a record of the
tained at the jobsite. dates and results of inspections for
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
each hoisting machine and piece of
equipment.
(7) Wire rope shall be taken out of
Subpart N—Cranes, Derricks, service when any of the following con-
Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors ditions exist:
(i) In running ropes, six randomly
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours distributed broken wires in one lay or
and Safety Standards Act (Construction three broken wires in one strand in one
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- lay;
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
(ii) Wear of one-third the original di-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ameter of outside individual wires.
25059), or 9–83 (49 FR 35736), as applicable. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any
Section 1926.550 also issued under 29 CFR other damage resulting in distortion of
Part 1911. the rope structure;
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage
§ 1926.550 Cranes and derricks. from any cause;
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- (iv) Reductions from nominal diame-
ployer shall comply with the manufac- ter of more than one-sixty-fourth inch
turer’s specifications and limitations for diameters up to and including five-
applicable to the operation of any and sixteenths inch, one-thirty-second inch
all cranes and derricks. Where manu- for diameters three-eighths inch to and
facturer’s specifications are not avail- including one-half inch, three-sixty-
able, the limitations assigned to the fourths inch for diameters nine-six-
equipment shall be based on the deter- teenths inch to and including three-
348
fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch for di- (14) Fuel tank filler pipe shall be lo-
ameters seven-eighths inch to 11⁄8 cated in such a position, or protected
inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds in such manner, as to not allow spill or
inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in- overflow to run onto the engine, ex-
clusive; haust, or electrical equipment of any
(v) In standing ropes, more than two machine being fueled.
broken wires in one lay in sections be- (i) An accessible fire extinguisher of
yond end connections or more than one 5BC rating, or higher, shall be avail-
broken wire at an end connection. able at all operator stations or cabs of
(vi) Wire rope safety factors shall be equipment.
in accordance with American National (ii) All fuels shall be transported,
Standards Institute B30.5–1968 or SAE stored, and handled to meet the rules
J959–1966. of subpart F of this part. When fuel is
(8) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, transported by vehicles on public high-
sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, ways, Department of Transportation
chains, or other reciprocating, rotat- rules contained in 49 CFR Parts 177 and
ing, or other moving parts or equip- 393 concerning such vehicular transpor-
ment shall be guarded if such parts are tation are considered applicable.
exposed to contact by employees, or (15) Except where electrical distribu-
otherwise create a hazard. Guarding tion and transmission lines have been
shall meet the requirements of the deenergized and visibly grounded at
American National Standards Institute point of work or where insulating bar-
B15.1–1958 Rev., Safety Code for Me- riers, not a part of or an attachment to
chanical Power Transmission Appa- the equipment or machinery, have been
ratus. erected to prevent physical contact
(9) Accessible areas within the swing with the lines, equipment or machines
radius of the rear of the rotating super- shall be operated proximate to power
structure of the crane, either perma- lines only in accordance with the fol-
nently or temporarily mounted, shall lowing:
be barricaded in such a manner as to (i) For lines rated 50 kV. or below,
prevent an employee from being struck minimum clearance between the lines
or crushed by the crane. and any part of the crane or load shall
(10) All exhaust pipes shall be guard- be 10 feet;
ed or insulated in areas where contact (ii) For lines rated over 50 kV., min-
by employees is possible in the per- imum clearance between the lines and
formance of normal duties. any part of the crane or load shall be 10
(11) Whenever internal combustion feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV. over 50
engine powered equipment exhausts in kV., or twice the length of the line in-
enclosed spaces, tests shall be made sulator, but never less than 10 feet;
and recorded to see that employees are (iii) In transit with no load and boom
not exposed to unsafe concentrations of lowered, the equipment clearance shall
toxic gases or oxygen deficient be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages
atmospheres. less than 50 kV., and 10 feet for
(12) All windows in cabs shall be of voltages over 50 kV., up to and includ-
safety glass, or equivalent, that intro- ing 345 kV., and 16 feet for voltages up
duces no visible distortion that will to and including 750 kV.
interfere with the safe operation of the (iv) A person shall be designated to
machine. observe clearance of the equipment and
(13) (i) Where necessary for rigging or give timely warning for all operations
service requirements, a ladder, or where it is difficult for the operator to
steps, shall be provided to give access maintain the desired clearance by vis-
to a cab roof. ual means;
(ii) Guardrails, handholds, and steps (v) Cage-type boom guards, insu-
shall be provided on cranes for easy ac- lating links, or proximity warning de-
cess to the car and cab, conforming to vices may be used on cranes, but the
American National Standards Institute use of such devices shall not alter the
B30.5. requirements of any other regulation
(iii) Platforms and walkways shall of this part even if such device is re-
have anti-skid surfaces. quired by law or regulation;
349
(vi) Any overhead wire shall be con- belly slings does not constitute compli-
sidered to be an energized line unless ance with this rule.
and until the person owning such line (2) All crawler, truck, or locomotive
or the electrical utility authorities in- cranes in use shall meet the applicable
dicate that it is not an energized line requirements for design, inspection,
and it has been visibly grounded; construction, testing, maintenance and
(vii) Prior to work near transmitter operation as prescribed in the ANSI
towers where an electrical charge can B30.5–1968, Safety Code for Crawler, Lo-
be induced in the equipment or mate- comotive and Truck Cranes. However,
rials being handled, the transmitter the written, dated, and signed inspec-
shall be de-energized or tests shall be tion reports and records of the monthly
made to determine if electrical charge inspection of critical items prescribed
is induced on the crane. The following in section 5–2.1.5 of the ANSI B30.5–1968
precautions shall be taken when nec- standard are not required. Instead, the
essary to dissipate induced voltages: employer shall prepare a certification
(a) The equipment shall be provided record which includes the date the
with an electrical ground directly to crane items were inspected; the signa-
the upper rotating structure sup- ture of the person who inspected the
porting the boom; and crane items; and a serial number, or
(b) Ground jumper cables shall be at- other identifier, for the crane in-
tached to materials being handled by spected. The most recent certification
boom equipment when electrical record shall be maintained on file until
charge is induced while working near a new one is prepared.
energized transmitters. Crews shall be (c) Hammerhead tower cranes. (1) Ade-
provided with nonconductive poles hav- quate clearance shall be maintained
ing large alligator clips or other simi- between moving and rotating struc-
lar protection to attach the ground tures of the crane and fixed objects to
cable to the load. allow the passage of employees without
(c) Combustible and flammable mate- harm.
rials shall be removed from the imme- (2) Each employee required to per-
diate area prior to operations. form duties on the horizontal boom of
(16) No modifications or additions hammerhead tower cranes shall be pro-
which affect the capacity or safe oper- tected against falling by guardrails or
ation of the equipment shall be made by a personal fall arrest system in con-
by the employer without the manufac- formance with subpart M of this part.
turer’s written approval. If such modi- (3) Buffers shall be provided at both
fications or changes are made, the ca- ends of travel of the trolley.
pacity, operation, and maintenance in- (4) Cranes mounted on rail tracks
struction plates, tags, or decals, shall shall be equipped with limit switches
be changed accordingly. In no case limiting the travel of the crane on the
shall the original safety factor of the track and stops or buffers at each end
equipment be reduced. of the tracks.
(17) The employer shall comply with (5) All hammerhead tower cranes in
Power Crane and Shovel Association use shall meet the applicable require-
Mobile Hydraulic Crane Standard No. ments for design, construction, instal-
2. lation, testing, maintenance, inspec-
(18) Sideboom cranes mounted on tion, and operation as prescribed by
wheel or crawler tractors shall meet the manufacturer.
the requirements of SAE J743a–1964. (d) Overhead and gantry cranes. (1)
(19) All employees shall be kept clear The rated load of the crane shall be
of loads about to be lifted and of sus- plainly marked on each side of the
pended loads. crane, and if the crane has more than
(b) Crawler, locomotive, and truck one hoisting unit, each hoist shall have
cranes. (1) All jibs shall have positive its rated load marked on it or its load
stops to prevent their movement of block, and this marking shall be clear-
more than 5° above the straight line of ly legible from the ground or floor.
the jib and boom on conventional type (2) Bridge trucks shall be equipped
crane booms. The use of cable type with sweeps which extend below the
350
top of the rail and project in front of tion of employees working onboard ma-
the truck wheels. rine vessels specified in § 1926.605.
(3) Except for floor-operated cranes, a (g) Crane or derrick suspended per-
gong or other effective audible warning sonnel platforms—(1) Scope, application
signal shall be provided for each crane and definitions—(i) Scope and applica-
equipped with a power traveling mech- tion. This standard applies to the de-
anism. sign, construction, testing, use and
(4) All overhead and gantry cranes in maintenance of personnel platforms,
use shall meet the applicable require- and the hoisting of personnel platforms
ments for design, construction, instal- on the load lines of cranes or derricks.
lation, testing, maintenance, inspec- (ii) Definitions. For the purposes of
tion, and operation as prescribed in the this paragraph (g), the following defini-
ANSI B30.2.0–1967, Safety Code for tions apply:
Overhead and Gantry Cranes. (A) Failure means load refusal, break-
(e) Derricks. All derricks in use shall age, or separation of components.
meet the applicable requirements for (B) Hoist (or hoisting) means all
design, construction, installation, in- crane or derrick functions such as low-
spection, testing, maintenance, and op- ering, lifting, swinging, booming in and
eration as prescribed in American Na- out or up and down, or suspending a
tional Standards Institute B30.6–1969, personnel platform.
Safety Code for Derricks. (C) Load refusal means the point
(f) Floating cranes and derricks—(1) where the ultimate strength is exceed-
Mobile cranes mounted on barges. (i) ed.
When a mobile crane is mounted on a (D) Maximum intended load means the
barge, the rated load of the crane shall total load of all employees, tools, ma-
not exceed the original capacity speci- terials, and other loads reasonably an-
fied by the manufacturer. ticipated to be applied to a personnel
platform or personnel platform compo-
(ii) A load rating chart, with clearly
nent at any one time.
legible letters and figures, shall be pro-
(E) Runway means a firm, level sur-
vided with each crane, and securely
face designed, prepared and designated
fixed at a location easily visible to the
as a path of travel for the weight and
operator.
configuration of the crane being used
(iii) When load ratings are reduced to
to lift and travel with the crane sus-
stay within the limits for list of the
pended platform. An existing surface
barge with a crane mounted on it, a
may be used as long as it meets these
new load rating chart shall be pro-
criteria.
vided.
(2) General requirements. The use of a
(iv) Mobile cranes on barges shall be crane or derrick to hoist employees on
positively secured. a personnel platform is prohibited, ex-
(2) Permanently mounted floating cept when the erection, use, and dis-
cranes and derricks. (i) When cranes and mantling of conventional means of
derricks are permanently installed on a reaching the worksite, such as a per-
barge, the capacity and limitations of sonnel hoist, ladder, stairway, aerial
use shall be based on competent design lift, elevating work platform or scaf-
criteria. fold, would be more hazardous, or is
(ii) A load rating chart with clearly not possible because of structural de-
legible letters and figures shall be pro- sign or worksite conditions.
vided and securely fixed at a location (3) Cranes and derricks—(i) Operational
easily visible to the operator. criteria. (A) Hoisting of the personnel
(iii) Floating cranes and floating der- platform shall be performed in a slow,
ricks in use shall meet the applicable controlled, cautious manner with no
requirements for design, construction, sudden movements of the crane or der-
installation, testing, maintenance, and rick, or the platform.
operation as prescribed by the manu- (B) Load lines shall be capable of sup-
facturer. porting, without failure, at least seven
(3) Protection of employees working on times the maximum intended load, ex-
barges. The employer shall comply with cept that where rotation resistant rope
the applicable requirements for protec- is used, the lines shall be capable of
351
supporting without failure, at least ten trolled load lowering.) Free fall is pro-
times the maximum intended load. The hibited.
required design factor is achieved by (4) Personnel platforms—(i) Design cri-
taking the current safety factor of 3.5 teria. (A) The personnel platform and
(required under paragraph (b)(2)) of this suspension system shall be designed by
section and applying the 50 per cent de- a qualified engineer or a qualified per-
rating of the crane capacity which is son competent in structural design.
required by paragraph (g)(3)(i)(F) of (B) The suspension system shall be
this section. designed to minimize tipping of the
(C) Load and boom hoist drum platform due to movement of employ-
brakes, swing brakes, and locking de- ees occupying the platform.
vices such as pawls or dogs shall be en- (C) The personnel platform itself, ex-
gaged when the occupied personnel cept the guardrail system and personal
platform is in a stationary working po- fall arrest system anchorages, shall be
sition. capable of supporting, without failure,
(D) The crane shall be uniformly its own weight and at least five times
level within one percent of level grade the maximum intended load. Criteria
and located on firm footing. Cranes for guardrail systems and personal fall
equipped with outriggers shall have arrest system anchorages are con-
them all fully deployed following man- tained in subpart M of this Part.
ufacturer’s specifications, insofar as (ii) Platform specifications. (A) Each
applicable, when hoisting employees. personnel platform shall be equipped
(E) The total weight of the loaded with a guardrail system which meets
personnel platform and related rigging the requirements of subpart M, and,
shall not exceed 50 percent of the rated shall be enclosed at least from the
capaciy for the radius and configura- toeboard to mid-rail with either solid
tion of the crane or derrick. construction or expanded metal having
(F) The use of machines having live openings no greater than 1⁄2 inch (1.27
booms (booms in which lowering is con- cm).
trolled by a brake without aid from (B) A grab rail shall be installed in-
other devices which slow the lowering side the entire perimeter of the per-
speeds) is prohibited. sonnel platform.
(ii) Instruments and components. (A) (C) Access gates, if installed, shall
Cranes and derricks with variable not swing outward during hoisting.
angle booms shall be equipped with a (D) Access gates, including sliding or
boom angle indicator, readily visible to folding gates, shall be equipped with a
the operator. restraining device to prevent acci-
(B) Cranes with telescoping booms dental opening.
shall be equipped with a device to indi- (E) Headroom shall be provided which
cate clearly to the operator, at all allows employees to stand upright in
times, the boom’s extended length, or the platform.
an accurate determination of the load (F) In addition to the use of hard
radius to be used during the lift shall hats, employees shall be protected by
be made prior to hoisting personnel. overhead protection on the personnel
(C) A positive acting device shall be platform when employees are exposed
used which prevents contact between to falling objects.
the load block or overhaul ball and the (G) All rough edges exposed to con-
boom tip (anti-two-blocking device), or tact by employees shall be surfaced or
a system shall be used which deacti- smoothed in order to prevent injury to
vates the hoisting action before dam- employees from punctures or lacera-
age occurs in the event of a two-block- tions.
ing situation (two block damage pre- (H) All welding of the personnel plat-
vention feature). form and its components shall be per-
(D) The load line hoist drum shall formed by a qualified welder familiar
have a system or device on the power with the weld grades, types and mate-
train, other than the load hoist brake, rial specified in the platform design.
which regulates the lowering rate of (I) The personnel platform shall be
speed of the hoist mechanism (con- conspicuously posted with a plate or
352
other permanent marking which indi- platform and the necessary employees,
cates the weight of the platform and their tools and the materials necessary
its rated load capacity or maximum in- to do their work, and shall not be used
tended load. for any other purpose when not hoist-
(iii) Personnel platform loading. (A) ing personnel.
The personnel platform shall not be (5) Trial lift, inspection, and proof test-
loaded in excess of its rated load capac- ing. (i) A trial lift with the unoccupied
ity. When a personnel platform does personnel platform loaded at least to
not have a rated load capacity then the the anticipated liftweight shall be
personnel platform shall not be loaded made from ground level, or any other
in excess of its maximum intended location where employees will enter
load. the platform, to each location at which
(B) The number of employees occu- the personnel platform is to be hoisted
pying the personnel platform shall not and positioned. This trial lift shall be
exceed the number required for the performed immediately prior to plac-
work being performed. ing personnel on the platform. The op-
(C) Personnel platforms shall be used erator shall determine that all sys-
only for employees, their tools, and the tems, controls and safety devices are
materials necessary to do their work, activated and functioning properly;
and shall not be used to hoist only ma- that no interferences exist; and that all
terials or tools when not hoisting per- configurations necessary to reach
sonnel. those work locations will allow the op-
(D) Materials and tools for use during erator to remain under the 50 percent
a personnel lift shall be secured to pre- limit of the hoist’s rated capacity. Ma-
vent displacement. terials and tools to be used during the
(E) Materials and tools for use during actual lift can be loaded in the plat-
a personnel lift shall be evenly distrib- form, as provided in paragraphs
uted within the confines of the plat- (g)(4)(iii) (D), and (E) of this section for
form while the platform is suspended. the trial lift. A single trial lift may be
(iv) Rigging. (A) When a wire rope bri- performed at one time for all locations
dle is used to connect the personnel that are to be reached from a single set
platform to the load line, each bridle up position.
leg shall be connected to a master link (ii) The trial lift shall be repeated
or shackle in such a manner to ensure prior to hoisting employees whenever
that the load is evenly divided among the crane or derrick is moved and set
the bridle legs. up in a new location or returned to a
(B) Hooks on overhaul ball assem- previously used location. Additionally,
blies, lower load blocks, or other at- the trial lift shall be repeated when the
tachment assemblies shall be of a type lift route is changed unless the oper-
that can be closed and locked, elimi- ator determines that the route change
nating the hook throat opening. Alter- is not significant (i.e. the route change
natively, an alloy anchor type shackle would not affect the safety of hoisted
with a bolt, nut and retaining pin may employees.)
be used. (iii) After the trial lift, and just prior
(C) Wire rope, shackles, rings, master to hoisting personnel, the platform
links, and other rigging hardware must shall be hoisted a few inches and in-
be capable of supporting, without fail- spected to ensure that it is secure and
ure, at least five times the maximum properly balanced. Employees shall not
intended load applied or transmitted to be hoisted unless the following condi-
that component. Where rotation resist- tions are determined to exist:
ant rope is used, the slings shall be ca- (A) Hoist ropes shall be free of kinks;
pable of supporting without failure at (B) Multiple part lines shall not be
least ten times the maximum intended twisted around each other;
load. (C) The primary attachment shall be
(D) All eyes in wire rope slings shall centered over the platform; and
be fabricated with thimbles. (D) The hoisting system shall be in-
(E) Bridles and associated rigging for spected if the load rope is slack to en-
attaching the personnel platform to sure all ropes are properly stated on
the hoist line shall be used only for the drums and in sheaves.
353
(iv) A visual inspection of the crane a signal person would create a greater
or derrick, rigging, personnel platform, hazard for that person, direct commu-
and the crane or derrick base support nication alone such as by radio may be
or ground shall be conducted by a com- used.
petent person immediately after the (vii) Except over water, employees
trial lift to determine whether the occupying the personnel platform shall
testing has exposed any defect or pro- use a body belt/harness system with
duced any adverse effect upon any com- lanyard appropriately attached to the
ponent or structure. lower load block or overhaul ball, or to
(v) Any defects found during inspec- a structural member within the per-
tions which create a safety hazard sonnel platform capable of supporting a
shall be corrected before hoisting per- fall impact for employees using the an-
sonnel. chorage. When working over water, the
(vi) At each job site, prior to hoisting requirements of § 1926.106 shall apply.
employees on the personnel platform, (viii) No lifts shall be made on an-
and after any repair or modification, other of the crane’s or derrick’s
the platform and rigging shall be proof loadlines while personnel are sus-
tested to 125 percent of the platform’s pended on a platform.
rated capacity by holding it in a sus- (7) Traveling. (i) Hoisting of employ-
pended position for five minutes with ees while the crane is traveling is pro-
the test load evenly distributed on the hibited, except for portal, tower and lo-
platform (this may be done concur- comotive cranes, or where the em-
rently with the trial lift). After ployer demonstrates that there is no
prooftesting, a competent person shall less hazardous way to perform the
inspect the platform and rigging. Any work.
deficiencies found shall be corrected (ii) Under any circumstances where a
and another proof test shall be con- crane would travel while hoisting per-
ducted. Personnel hoisting shall not be sonnel, the employer shall implement
conducted until the proof testing re- the following procedures to safeguard
quirements are satisfied. employees:
(6) Work practices. (i) Employees shall (A) Crane travel shall be restricted to
keep all parts of the body inside the a fixed track or runway;
platform during raising, lowering, and (B) Travel shall be limited to the
positioning. This provision does not load radius of the boom used during the
apply to an occupant of the platform lift; and
performing the duties of a signal per- (C) The boom must be parallel to the
son. direction of travel.
(ii) Before employees exit or enter a (D) A complete trial run shall be per-
hoisted personnel platform that is not formed to test the route of travel be-
landed, the platform shall be secured to fore employees are allowed to occupy
the structure where the work is to be the platform. This trial run can be per-
performed, unless securing to the formed at the same time as the trial
structure creates an unsafe situation. lift required by paragraph (g)(5)(i) of
(iii) Tag lines shall be used unless this section which tests the route of
their use creates an unsafe condition. the lift.
(iv) The crane or derrick operator (E) If travel is done with a rubber
shall remain at the controls at all tired-carrier, the condition and air
times when the crane engine is running pressure of the tires shall be checked.
and the platform is occupied. The chart capacity for lifts on rubber
(v) Hoisting of employees shall be shall be used for application of the 50
promptly discontinued upon indication percent reduction of rated capacity.
of any dangerous weather conditions or Notwithstanding paragraph (g)(3)(i)(E)
other impending danger. of this section, outriggers may be par-
(vi) Employees being hoisted shall re- tially retracted as necessary for travel.
main in continuous sight of and in di- (8) Pre-lift meeting. (i) A meeting at-
rect communication with the operator tended by the crane or derrick oper-
or signal person. In those situations ator, signal person(s) (if necessary for
where direct visual contact with the the lift), employee(s) to be lifted, and
operator is not possible, and the use of the person responsible for the task to
354
be performed shall be held to review vide for the protection of the employ-
the appropriate requirements of para- ees from flying objects in the rotor
graph (g) of this section and the proce- downwash. All loose gear within 100
dures to be followed. feet of the place of lifting the load, de-
(ii) This meeting shall be held prior positing the load, and all other areas
to the trial lift at each new work loca- susceptible to rotor downwash shall be
tion, and shall be repeated for any em- secured or removed.
ployees newly assigned to the oper- (g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping
ation. shall be maintained in all helicopter
loading and unloading areas.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, (h) Operator responsibility. The heli-
1987; 53 FR 29139, Aug. 2, 1988; 54 FR 15406, copter operator shall be responsible for
Apr. 18, 1989; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR size, weight, and manner in which
35183, June 30, 1993; 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994; loads are connected to the helicopter.
61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] If, for any reason, the helicopter oper-
ator believes the lift cannot be made
§ 1926.551 Helicopters. safely, the lift shall not be made.
(a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter (i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When
cranes shall be expected to comply employees are required to perform
with any applicable regulations of the work under hovering craft, a safe
Federal Aviation Administration. means of access shall be provided for
(b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper- employees to reach the hoist line hook
ation a briefing shall be conducted. and engage or disengage cargo slings.
This briefing shall set forth the plan of Employees shall not perform work
operation for the pilot and ground per- under hovering craft except when nec-
sonnel. essary to hook or unhook loads.
(c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be (j) Static charge. Static charge on the
properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a suspended load shall be dissipated with
length that will not permit their being a grounding device before ground per-
drawn up into rotors. Pressed sleeve, sonnel touch the suspended load, or
swedged eyes, or equivalent means protective rubber gloves shall be worn
shall be used for all freely suspended by all ground personnel touching the
loads to prevent hand splices from suspended load.
spinning open or cable clamps from (k) Weight limitation. The weight of an
loosening. external load shall not exceed the man-
(d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper- ufacturer’s rating.
ated cargo hooks shall have the elec- (l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other
trical activating device so designed and gear, except for pulling lines or con-
installed as to prevent inadvertent op- ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’
eration. In addition, these cargo hooks from a container or roll off a reel, shall
shall be equipped with an emergency not be attached to any fixed ground
mechanical control for releasing the structure, or allowed to foul on any
load. The hooks shall be tested prior to fixed structure.
each day’s operation to determine that (m) Visibility. When visibility is re-
the release functions properly, both duced by dust or other conditions,
electrically and mechanically. ground personnel shall exercise special
(e) Personal protective equipment. (1) caution to keep clear of main and sta-
Personal protective equipment for em- bilizing rotors. Precautions shall also
ployees receiving the load shall consist be taken by the employer to eliminate
of complete eye protection and hard as far as practical reduced visibility.
hats secured by chinstraps. (n) Signal systems. Signal systems be-
(2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to tween aircrew and ground personnel
flap in the downwash, and thus be shall be understood and checked in ad-
snagged on hoist line, shall not be vance of hoisting the load. This applies
worn. to either radio or hand signal systems.
(f) Loose gear and objects. Every prac- Hand signals shall be as shown in Fig-
tical precaution shall be taken to pro- ure N–1.
355
(o) Approach distance. No unauthor- (p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever

ized person shall be allowed to ap- approaching or leaving a helicopter
proach within 50 feet of the helicopter with blades rotating, all employees
when the rotor blades are turning. shall remain in full view of the pilot
356
EC30OC91.015</GPH>
and keep in a crouched position. Em- inches; and three thirty-seconds inch
ployees shall avoid the area from the for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches.
cockpit or cabin rearward unless au- (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed
thorized by the helicopter operator to in accordance with the wire rope manu-
work there. facturers’ recommendations.
(q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per- (5) The installation of live booms on
sonnel shall be provided when required hoists is prohibited.
for safe helicopter loading and unload- (6) The use of endless belt-type
ing operations. manlifts on construction shall be pro-
(r) Communications. There shall be hibited.
constant reliable communication be- (b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating
tween the pilot, and a designated em- rules shall be established and posted at
ployee of the ground crew who acts as the operator’s station of the hoist.
a signalman during the period of load- Such rules shall include signal system
ing and unloading. This signalman and allowable line speed for various
shall be distinctly recognizable from loads. Rules and notices shall be posted
other ground personnel. on the car frame or crosshead in a con-
(s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per- spicuous location, including the state-
mitted in an area that could result in ment ‘‘No Riders Allowed.’’
such fires being spread by the rotor (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride
downwash. on material hoists except for the pur-
poses of inspection and maintenance.
§ 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel (2) All entrances of the hoistways
hoists, and elevators.
shall be protected by substantial gates
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- or bars which shall guard the full width
ployer shall comply with the manufac- of the landing entrance. All hoistway
turer’s specifications and limitations entrance bars and gates shall be paint-
applicable to the operation of all hoists ed with diagonal contrasting colors,
and elevators. Where manufacturer’s such as black and yellow stripes.
specifications are not available, the (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4-
limitations assigned to the equipment inch wooden bars or the equivalent, lo-
shall be based on the determinations of cated 2 feet from the hoistway line.
a professional engineer competent in Bars shall be located not less than 36
the field. inches nor more than 42 inches above
(2) Rated load capacities, rec- the floor.
ommended operating speeds, and spe- (ii) Gates or bars protecting the en-
cial hazard warnings or instructions trances to hoistways shall be equipped
shall be posted on cars and platforms. with a latching device.
(3) Wire rope shall be removed from (3) Overhead protective covering of 2-
service when any of the following con- inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood, or
ditions exists: other solid material of equivalent
(i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly strength, shall be provided on the top
distributed broken wires in one rope of every material hoist cage or plat-
lay or three broken wires in one strand form.
in one rope lay; (4) The operator’s station of a hoist-
(ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, ing machine shall be provided with
or peening, causing loss of more than overhead protection equivalent to tight
one-third of the original diameter of planking not less than 2 inches thick.
the outside wires; The support for the overhead protec-
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage re- tion shall be of equal strength.
sulting from a torch or any damage (5) Hoist towers may be used with or
caused by contact with electrical without an enclosure on all sides. How-
wires; ever, whichever alternative is chosen,
(iv) Reduction from nominal diame- the following applicable conditions
ter of more than three sixty-fourths shall be met:
inch for diameters up to and including (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it
three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch shall be enclosed on all sides for its en-
for diameters seven-eights to 11⁄8 tire height with a screen enclosure of
357
1⁄2-inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or (6) A door or gate shall be provided at
equivalent, except for landing access. each entrance to the car which shall
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- protect the full width and height of the
closed, the hoist platform or car shall car entrance opening.
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides (7) Overhead protective covering of 2-
for the full height between the floor inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood or other
and the overhead protective covering solid material or equivalent strength
with 1⁄2-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge shall be provided on the top of every
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform personnel hoist.
enclosure shall include the required (8) Doors or gates shall be provided
gates for loading and unloading. A 6- with electric contacts which do not
foot high enclosure shall be provided allow movement of the hoist when door
on the unused sides of the hoist tower or gate is open.
at ground level. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stop-
ping and holding the car and rated load
(6) Car arresting devices shall be in-
when traveling at governor tripping
stalled to function in case of rope fail-
speed.
ure. (10) Cars shall be provided with a ca-
(7) All material hoist towers shall be pacity and data plate secured in a con-
designed by a licensed professional en- spicuous place on the car or crosshead.
gineer. (11) Internal combustion engines
(8) All material hoists shall conform shall not be permitted for direct drive.
to the requirements of ANSI A10.5–1969, (12) Normal and final terminal stop-
Safety Requirements for Material ping devices shall be provided.
Hoists. (13) An emergency stop switch shall
(c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers be provided in the car and marked
outside the structure shall be enclosed ‘‘Stop.’’
for the full height on the side or sides (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number
used for entrance and exit to the struc- of hoisting ropes used shall be three for
ture. At the lowest landing, the enclo- traction hoists and two for drum-type
sure on the sides not used for exit or hoists.
entrance to the structure shall be en- (ii) The minimum diameter of hoist-
closed to a height of at least 10 feet. ing and counterweight wire ropes shall
Other sides of the tower adjacent to be 1⁄2-inch.
floors or scaffold platforms shall be en- (iii) Safety factors:
closed to a height of 10 feet above the
level of such floors or scaffolds. MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR SUSPENSION
(2) Towers inside of structures shall WIRE ROPES
be enclosed on all four sides through- Minimum
out the full height. Rope speed in feet per minute factor of
safety
(3) Towers shall be anchored to the
structure at intervals not exceeding 25 50 ......................................................................... 7.60
75 ......................................................................... 7.75
feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of 100 ....................................................................... 7.95
guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins 125 ....................................................................... 8.10
are not practical the tower shall be an- 150 ....................................................................... 8.25
chored by means of guys made of wire 175 ....................................................................... 8.40
200 ....................................................................... 8.60
rope at least one-half inch in diameter, 225 ....................................................................... 8.75
securely fastened to anchorage to en- 250 ....................................................................... 8.90
sure stability. 300 ....................................................................... 9.20
350 ....................................................................... 9.50
(4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be 400 ....................................................................... 9.75
not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and 450 ....................................................................... 10.00
500 ....................................................................... 10.25
shall be provided with mechanical 550 ....................................................................... 10.45
locks which cannot be operated from 600 ....................................................................... 10.70
the landing side, and shall be acces-
sible only to persons on the car. (15) Following assembly and erection
(5) Cars shall be permanently en- of hoists, and before being put in serv-
closed on all sides and the top, except ice, an inspection and test of all func-
sides used for entrance and exit which tions and safety devices shall be made
have car gates or doors. under the supervision of a competent
358
person. A similar inspection and test is (c) Evidence of any heat damage from
required following major alteration of any cause;
an existing installation. All hoists (d) Reductions from nominal diame-
shall be inspected and tested at not ter of more than three-sixty-fourths
more than 3-month intervals. The em- inch for diameters to and including
ployer shall prepare a certification three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch
record which includes the date the infor diameters seven-eights inch to 11⁄8
spection and test of all functions and inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds
safety devices was performed; the sig- inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in-
nature of the person who performed the clusive;
inspection and test; and a serial num- (e) In standing ropes, more than two
ber, or other identifier, for the hoist broken wires in one lay in sections be-
that was inspected and tested. The yond end connections or more than one
most recent certification record shall broken wire at an end connection.
be maintained on file. (d) Permanent elevators under the
(16) All personnel hoists used by em- care and custody of the employer and
ployees shall be constructed of mate- used by employees for work covered by
rials and components which meet the this Act shall comply with the require-
specifications for materials, construc- ments of American National Standards
tion, safety devices, assembly, and Institute A17.1–1965 with addenda
structural integrity as stated in the A17.1a–1967, A17.1b–1968, A17.1c–1969,
American National Standard A10.4– A17.1d–1970, and inspected in accord-
1963, Safety Requirements for Work- ance with A17.2–1960 with addenda
men’s Hoists. The requirements of this A17.2a–1965, A17.2b–1967.
paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to canti-
lever type personnel hoists. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(17) (i) Personnel hoists used in
1987]
bridge tower construction shall be ap-
proved by a registered professional en- § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
gineer and erected under the super-
vision of a qualified engineer com- (a) General requirements. (1) Exposed
petent in this field. moving parts such as gears, projecting
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain
closed, the hoist platform or car shall sprockets, and reciprocating or rotat-
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides ing parts, which constitute a hazard,
for the full height between the floor shall be guarded.
and the overhead protective covering (2) All controls used during the nor-
with 3⁄4-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge mal operation cycle shall be located
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform within easy reach of the operator’s sta-
enclosure shall include the required tion.
gates for loading and unloading. (3) Electric motor operated hoists
(iii) These hoists shall be inspected shall be provided with:
and maintained on a weekly basis. (i) A device to disconnect all motors
Whenever the hoisting equipment is ex- from the line upon power failure and
posed to winds exceeding 35 miles per not permit any motor to be restarted
hour it shall be inspected and put in until the controller handle is brought
operable condition before reuse. to the ‘‘off’’ position;
(iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed
service when any of the following con- preventive device;
ditions exist: (iii) A means whereby remotely oper-
(a) In running ropes, six randomly ated hoists stop when any control is in-
distributed broken wires in one lay or effective.
three broken wires in one strand in one (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in
lay; use shall meet the applicable require-
(b) Wear of one-third the original di- ments for design, construction, instal-
ameter of outside individual wires. lation, testing, inspection, mainte-
Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any nance, and operations, as prescribed by
other damage resulting in distortion of the manufacturer.
the rope structure; (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
359
§ 1926.554 Overhead hoists. suitable signs, as required by subpart G

of this part.
(a) General requirements. (1) The safe
(7) Conveyors shall be locked out or
working load of the overhead hoist, as
otherwise rendered inoperable, and
determined by the manufacturer, shall
tagged out with a ‘‘Do Not Operate’’
be indicated on the hoist, and this safe
tag during repairs and when operation
working load shall not be exceeded.
is hazardous to employees performing
(2) The supporting structure to which
maintenance work.
the hoist is attached shall have a safe
(8) All conveyors in use shall meet
working load equal to that of the hoist.
the applicable requirements for design,
(3) The support shall be arranged so
construction, inspection, testing,
as to provide for free movement of the
maintenance, and operation, as pre-
hoist and shall not restrict the hoist
scribed in the ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety
from lining itself up with the load.
Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and
(4) The hoist shall be installed only
Related Equipment.
in locations that will permit the oper-
ator to stand clear of the load at all
times. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles,
(5) Air hoists shall be connected to an Mechanized Equipment, and
air supply of sufficient capacity and Marine Operations
pressure to safely operate the hoist. All
air hoses supplying air shall be posi- AUTHORITY: Section 107, Construction
tively connected to prevent their be- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con-
coming disconnected during use. struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4,
(6) All overhead hoists in use shall 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of
meet the applicable requirements for 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La-
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
construction, design, installation, test- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
ing, inspection, maintenance, and oper- 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable. Section
ation, as prescribed by the manufac- 1926.602 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
turer.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] § 1926.600 Equipment.
(a) General requirements. (1) All equip-
§ 1926.555 Conveyors.
ment left unattended at night, adja-
(a) General requirements. (1) Means for cent to a highway in normal use, or ad-
stopping the motor or engine shall be jacent to construction areas where
provided at the operator’s station. Con- work is in progress, shall have appro-
veyor systems shall be equipped with priate lights or reflectors, or barri-
an audible warning signal to be sound- cades equipped with appropriate lights
ed immediately before starting up the or reflectors, to identify the location of
conveyor. the equipment.
(2) If the operator’s station is at a re- (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equiv-
mote point, similar provisions for stop- alent protection shall be provided and
ping the motor or engine shall be pro- used when inflating, mounting, or dis-
vided at the motor or engine location. mounting tires installed on split rims,
(3) Emergency stop switches shall be or rims equipped with locking rings or
arranged so that the conveyor cannot similar devices.
be started again until the actuating (3) (i) Heavy machinery, equipment,
stop switch has been reset to running or parts thereof, which are suspended
or ‘‘on’’ position. or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or
(4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded jacks shall be substantially blocked or
to prevent employee contact with turn- cribbed to prevent falling or shifting
ing flights. before employees are permitted to
(5) Where a conveyor passes over work under or between them. Bulldozer
work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares, and scraper blades, end-loader buckets,
suitable guards shall be provided to dump bodies, and similar equipment,
protect employees required to work shall be either fully lowered or blocked
below the conveyors. when being repaired or when not in
(6) All crossovers, aisles, and passage- use. All controls shall be in a neutral
ways shall be conspicuously marked by position, with the motors stopped and
360
brakes set, unless work being per- (4) No employer shall use any motor
formed requires otherwise. vehicle equipment having an ob-
(ii) Whenever the equipment is structed view to the rear unless:
parked, the parking brake shall be set. (i) The vehicle has a reverse signal
Equipment parked on inclines shall alarm audible above the surrounding
have the wheels chocked and the park- noise level or:
ing brake set. (ii) The vehicle is backed up only
(4) The use, care and charging of all when an observer signals that it is safe
batteries shall conform to the require- to do so.
ments of subpart K of this part. (5) All vehicles with cabs shall be
(5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, equipped with windshields and powered
or equivalent, that introduces no visi- wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall
ble distortion affecting the safe oper- be replaced. Vehicles operating in
ation of any machine covered by this areas or under conditions that cause
subpart. fogging or frosting of the windshields
(6) All equipment covered by this shall be equipped with operable
subpart shall comply with the require- defogging or defrosting devices.
ments of § 1926.550(a)(15) when working (6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay
or being moved in the vicinity of power load is loaded by means of cranes,
lines or energized transmitters. power shovels, loaders, or similar
(7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or equipment, shall have a cab shield and/
bumper blocks shall be provided on or canopy adequate to protect the oper-
spur railroad tracks where a rolling car ator from shifting or falling materials.
could contact other cars being worked, (7) Tools and material shall be se-
enter a building, work or traffic area. cured to prevent movement when
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] transported in the same compartment
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, with employees.
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993] (8) Vehicles used to transport em-
ployees shall have seats firmly secured
§ 1926.601 Motor vehicles. and adequate for the number of em-
(a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as cov- ployees to be carried.
ered by this part are those vehicles (9) Seat belts and anchorages meet-
that operate within an off-highway job- ing the requirements of 49 CFR part 571
site, not open to public traffic. The re- (Department of Transportation, Fed-
quirements of this section do not apply eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards)
to equipment for which rules are pre- shall be installed in all motor vehicles.
scribed in § 1926.602. (10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be
(b) General requirements. (1) All vehi- equipped with positive means of sup-
cles shall have a service brake system, port, permanently attached, and capa-
an emergency brake system, and a ble of being locked in position to pre-
parking brake system. These systems vent accidental lowering of the body
may use common components, and while maintenance or inspection work
shall be maintained in operable condi- is being done.
tion. (11) Operating levers controlling
(2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions hoisting or dumping devices on haulage
warrant additional light, all vehicles, bodies shall be equipped with a latch or
or combinations of vehicles, in use other device which will prevent acci-
shall be equipped with at least two dental starting or tripping of the mech-
headlights and two taillights in oper- anism.
able condition. (12) Trip handles for tailgates of
(ii) All vehicles, or combination of dump trucks shall be so arranged that,
vehicles, shall have brake lights in opin dumping, the operator will be in the
erable condition regardless of light clear.
conditions. (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle
(3) All vehicles shall be equipped with equipment manufactured on or after
an adequate audible warning device at May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with
the operator’s station and in an oper- fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle
able condition. equipment manufactured before May 1,
361
1972, shall be equipped with fenders not (3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No
later than May 1, 1973. employer shall move or cause to be
(ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of moved construction equipment or vehi-
fenders whenever motor vehicle equip- cles upon any access roadway or grade
ment is not designed for fenders. unless the access roadway or grade is
(14) All vehicles in use shall be constructed and maintained to accom-
checked at the beginning of each shift modate safely the movement of the
to assure that the following parts, equipment and vehicles involved.
equipment, and accessories are in safe (ii) Every emergency access ramp
operating condition and free of appar- and berm used by an employer shall be
ent damage that could cause failure constructed to restrain and control
while in use: service brakes, including runaway vehicles.
trailer brake connections; parking sys- (4) Brakes. All earthmoving equip-
ment mentioned in this § 1926.602(a)
tem (hand brake); emergency stopping
shall have a service braking system ca-
system (brakes); tires; horn; steering
pable of stopping and holding the
mechanism; coupling devices; seat
equipment fully loaded, as specified in
belts; operating controls; and safety
Society of Automotive Engineers SAE-
devices. All defects shall be corrected J237, Loader Dozer–1971, J236, Graders–
before the vehicle is placed in service. 1971, and J319b, Scrapers–1971. Brake
These requirements also apply to systems for self-propelled rubber-tired
equipment such as lights, reflectors, off-highway equipment manufactured
windshield wipers, defrosters, fire ex- after January 1, 1972 shall meet the ap-
tinguishers, etc., where such equip- plicable minimum performance criteria
ment is necessary. set forth in the following Society of
Automotive Engineers Recommended
§ 1926.602 Material handling equip- Practices:
ment.
Self-Propelled Scrapers ................ SAE J319b–1971.
(a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1) Self-Propelled Graders ................. SAE J236–1971.
Trucks and Wagons ...................... SAE J166–1971.
These rules apply to the following Front End Loaders and Dozers .... SAE J237–1971.
types of earthmoving equipment:
scrapers, loaders, crawler or wheel (5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth-
tractors, bulldozers, off-highway moving haulage equipment (trucks,
trucks, graders, agricultural and indus- scrapers, tractors, and trailing units)
trial tractors, and similar equipment. whose maximum speed exceeds 15 miles
The promulgation of specific rules for per hour, shall be equipped with fend-
compactors and rubber-tired ‘‘skid- ers on all wheels to meet the require-
steer’’ equipment is reserved pending ments of Society of Automotive Engi-
neers SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for
consideration of standards currently
Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage
being developed.
Equipment. An employer may, of
(2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be course, at any time seek to show under
provided on all equipment covered by § 1926.2, that the uncovered wheels
this section and shall meet the require- present no hazard to personnel from
ments of the Society of Automotive flying materials.
Engineers, J386–1969, Seat Belts for (6) Rollover protective structures
Construction Equipment. Seat belts for (ROPS). See subpart W of this part for
agricultural and light industrial trac- requirements for rollover protective
tors shall meet the seat belt require- structures and overhead protection.
ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (7) Rollover protective structures for off-
neers J333a–1970, Operator Protection highway trucks. The promulgation of
for Agricultural and Light Industrial standards for rollover protective struc-
Tractors. tures for off-highway trucks is reserved
(ii) Seat belts need not be provided pending further study and develop-
for equipment which is designed only ment.
for standup operation. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and
(iii) Seat belts need not be provided fenders. (i) Equipment mentioned in
for equipment which does not have paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section,
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and manufactured after January 1,
or adequate canopy protection. 1972, which is used by any employer
362
after that date, shall comply with the the normal seating arrangement for
applicable rules prescribed therein contractor operation, even though back-
cerning brakes and fenders. Equipment hoes, breakers, or other similar attach-
mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5) ments are used on these machines for
of this section, and manufactured be- excavating or other work.
fore January 1, 1972, which is used by (2) For the purposes of this subpart
any employer after that date, shall and of subpart N of this part, the no-
meet the applicable rules prescribed menclatures and descriptions for meas-
herein not later than June 30, 1973. It urement of dimensions of machinery
should be noted that, as permitted and attachments shall be as described
under § 1926.2, employers may request in Society of Automotive Engineers
variations from the applicable brakes 1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103.
and fender standards required by this (3) The safety requirements, ratios,
subpart. Employers wishing to seek or limitations applicable to machines
variations from the applicable brakes or attachment usage covered in Power
and fenders rules may submit any re- Crane and Shovel Associations Stand-
quests for variations after the publica- ards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3
tion of this document in the FEDERAL of 1969, shall be complied with, and
REGISTER. Any statements intending to shall apply to cranes, machines, and
meet the requirements of § 1926.2(b)(4), attachments under this part.
should specify how the variation would (c) Lifting and hauling equipment
protect the safety of the employees by (other than equipment covered under sub-
providing for any compensating re- part N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks
strictions on the operation of equip- shall meet the requirements of
ment. § 1926.600 and the following:
(ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of (i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall
paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this have the rated capacity clearly posted
section, the requirement that fenders on the vehicle so as to be clearly visi-
be installed on pneumatic-tired ble to the operator. When auxiliary re-
earthmoving haulage equipment, is movable counterweights are provided
suspended pending reconsideration of by the manufacturer, corresponding al-
the requirement. ternate rated capacities also shall be
(9) Audible alarms. (i) All clearly shown on the vehicle. These
bidirectional machines, such as rollers, ratings shall not be exceeded.
compacters, front-end loaders, bull- (ii) No modifications or additions
dozers, and similar equipment, shall be which affect the capacity or safe oper-
equipped with a horn, distinguishable ation of the equipment shall be made
from the surrounding noise level, without the manufacturer’s written ap-
which shall be operated as needed when proval. If such modifications or
the machine is moving in either direc- changes are made, the capacity, oper-
tion. The horn shall be maintained in ation, and maintenance instruction
an operative condition. plates, tags, or decals shall be changed
(ii) No employer shall permit accordingly. In no case shall the origi-
earthmoving or compacting equipment nal safety factor of the equipment be
which has an obstructed view to the reduced.
rear to be used in reverse gear unless (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more
the equipment has in operation a re- trucks working in unison, the propor-
verse signal alarm distinguishable tion of the total load carried by any
from the surrounding noise level or an one truck shall not exceed its capacity.
employee signals that it is safe to do (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall
so. not be attached to the steering wheel
(10) Scissor points. Scissor points on unless the steering mechanism is of a
all front-end loaders, which constitute type that prevents road reactions from
a hazard to the operator during normal causing the steering handwheel to spin.
operation, shall be guarded. The steering knob shall be mounted
(b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) within the periphery of the wheel.
Tractors covered in paragraph (a) of (v) All high lift rider industrial
this section shall have seat belts as re- trucks shall be equipped with overhead
quired for the operators when seated in guards which meet the configuration
363
and structural requirements as defined and which meets the requirements of

in paragraph 421 of American National subpart N of this part, shall be pro-
Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety vided. Protection shall be the equiva-
Standards for Powered Industrial lent of 2-inch planking or other solid
Trucks. material of equivalent strength.
(vi) All industrial trucks in use shall (4) Stop blocks shall be provided for
meet the applicable requirements of the leads to prevent the hammer from
design, construction, stability, inspec- being raised against the head block.
tion, testing, maintenance, and oper-
(5) A blocking device, capable of safe-
ation, as defined in American National
ly supporting the weight of the ham-
Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety
Standards for Powered Industrial mer, shall be provided for placement in
Trucks. the leads under the hammer at all
(vii) Unauthorized personnel shall times while employees are working
not be permitted to ride on powered in- under the hammer.
dustrial trucks. A safe place to ride (6) Guards shall be provided across
shall be provided where riding of the top of the head block to prevent
trucks is authorized. the cable from jumping out of the
(viii) Whenever a truck is equipped sheaves.
with vertical only, or vertical and hori- (7) When the leads must be inclined
zontal controls elevatable with the lift- in the driving of batter piles, provi-
ing carriage or forks for lifting per- sions shall be made to stabilize the
sonnel, the following additional pre- leads.
cautions shall be taken for the protec- (8) Fixed leads shall be provided with
tion of personnel being elevated. ladder, and adequate rings, or similar
(A) Use of a safety platform firmly attachment points, so that the loft
secured to the lifting carriage and/or
worker may engage his safety belt lan-
forks.
yard to the leads. If the leads are pro-
(B) Means shall be provided whereby
personnel on the platform can shut off vided with loft platforms(s), such plat-
power to the truck. form(s) shall be protected by standard
(C) Such protection from falling ob- guardrails.
jects as indicated necessary by the op- (9) Steam hose leading to a steam
erating conditions shall be provided. hammer or jet pipe shall be securely
(d) Powered industrial truck operator attached to the hammer with an ade-
training. quate length of at least 1⁄4-inch diame-
ter chain or cable to prevent whipping
struction work under this paragraph are in the event the joint at the hammer is
identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of broken. Air hammer hoses shall be pro-
this chapter. vided with the same protection as re-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, quired for steam lines.
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; (10) Safety chains, or equivalent
63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] means, shall be provided for each hose
connection to prevent the line from
§ 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
thrashing around in case the coupling
(a) General requirements. (1) Boilers becomes disconnected.
and piping systems which are a part of, (11) Steam line controls shall consist
or used with, pile driving equipment of two shutoff valves, one of which
shall meet the applicable requirements shall be a quick-acting lever type with-
of the American Society of Mechanical in easy reach of the hammer operator.
Engineers, Power Boilers (section I).
(12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or
(2) All pressure vessels which are a
part of, or used with, pile driving counterbalances shall be provided as
equipment shall meet the applicable necessary to maintain stability of pile
requirements of the American Society driver rigs.
of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Ves- (b) Pile driving from barges and floats.
sels (section VIII). Barges or floats supporting pile driving
(3) Overhead protection, which will operations shall meet the applicable
not obscure the vision of the operator requirements of § 1926.605.
364
(c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engi- of this chapter. The term ‘‘longshoring
neers and winchmen shall accept sig- operations’’ means the loading, unload-
nals only from the designated signaling, moving, or handling of construc-
men. tion materials, equipment and supplies,
(2) All employees shall be kept clear etc. into, in, on, or out of any vessel
when piling is being hoisted into the from a fixed structure or shore-to-ves-
leads. sel, vessel-to-shore or fixed structure
(3) When piles are being driven in an or vessel-to-vessel.
excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall (b) Access to barges. (1) Ramps for ac-
be sloped to the angle of repose or cess of vehicles to or between barges
sheet-piled and braced. shall be of adequate strength, provided
(4) When steel tube piles are being with side boards, well maintained, and
‘‘blown out’’, employees shall be kept properly secured.
well beyond the range of falling mate- (2) Unless employees can step safely
rials. to or from the wharf, float, barge, or
(5) When it is necessary to cut off the river towboat, either a ramp, meeting
tops of driven piles, pile driving oper- the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of
ations shall be suspended except where this section, or a safe walkway, shall
the cutting operations are located at be provided.
least twice the length of the longest (3) Jacob’s ladders shall be of the
pile from the driver. double rung or flat tread type. They
(6) When driving jacked piles, all ac- shall be well maintained and properly
cess pits shall be provided with ladders secured.
and bulkheaded curbs to prevent mate- (4) A Jacob’s ladder shall either hang
rial from falling into the pit. without slack from its lashings or be
§ 1926.604 Site clearing. pulled up entirely.
(5) When the upper end of the means
(a) General requirements. (1) Employ- of access rests on or is flush with the
ees engaged in site clearing shall be top of the bulwark, substantial steps
protected from hazards of irritant and properly secured and equipped with at
toxic plants and suitably instructed in least one substantial hand rail approxi-
the first aid treatment available. mately 33 inches in height, shall be
(2) All equipment used in site clear- provided between the top of the bul-
ing operations shall be equipped with wark and the deck.
rollover guards meeting the require-
(6) Obstructions shall not be laid on
ments of this subpart. In addition,
or across the gangway.
rider-operated equipment shall be
equipped with an overhead and rear (7) The means of access shall be ade-
canopy guard meeting the following re- quately illuminated for its full length.
quirements: (8) Unless the structure makes it im-
(i) The overhead covering on this possible, the means of access shall be
canopy structure shall be of not less so located that the load will not pass
than 1⁄8-inch steel plate or 1⁄4-inch over employees.
woven wire mesh with openings no (c) Working surfaces of barges. (1) Em-
greater than 1 inch, or equivalent. ployees shall not be permitted to walk
(ii) The opening in the rear of the along the sides of covered lighters or
canopy structure shall be covered with barges with coamings more than 5 feet
not less than 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh high, unless there is a 3-foot clear
with openings no greater than 1 inch. walkway, or a grab rail, or a taut
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] handline is provided.
(2) Decks and other working surfaces
§ 1926.605 Marine operations and shall be maintained in a safe condition.
equipment. (3) Employees shall not be permitted
(a) Material handling operations. (1) to pass fore and aft, over, or around
Operations fitting the definition of deckloads, unless there is a safe pas-
‘‘material handling’’ shall be per- sage.
formed in conformance with applicable (4) Employees shall not be permitted
requirements of part 1918, ‘‘Safety and to walk over deckloads from rail to
Health Regulations for Longshoring’’ coaming unless there is a safe passage.
365
If it is necessary to stand at the out- 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable, and
board or inboard edge of the deckload 29 CFR part 1911.
where less than 24 inches of bulwark, SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless
rail, coaming, or other protection ex- otherwise noted.
ists, all employees shall be provided
with a suitable means of protection § 1926.650 Scope, application, and defi-
against falling from the deckload. nitions applicable to this subpart.
(d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment. (a) Scope and application. This sub-
(1) Provisions for rendering first aid part applies to all open excavations
and medical assistance shall be in ac- made in the earth’s surface. Exca-
cordance with subpart D of this part. vations are defined to include trenches.
(2) The employer shall ensure that (b) Definitions applicable to this sub-
there is in the vicinity of each barge in part.
use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-ap- Accepted engineering practices means
proved 30-inch lifering with not less those requirements which are compat-
than 90 feet of line attached, and at ible with standards of practice required
least one portable or permanent ladder by a registered professional engineer.
which will reach the top of the apron Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a
to the surface of the water. If the above pre-engineered shoring system com-
equipment is not available at the pier, prised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders
the employer shall furnish it during (crossbraces) used in conjunction with
the time that he is working the barge. vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal
(3) Employees walking or working on rails (walers). Such system is designed,
the unguarded decks of barges shall be specifically to support the sidewalls of
protected with U.S. Coast Guard-ap- an excavation and prevent cave-ins.
proved work vests or buoyant vests. Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of
(e) Commercial diving operations. Com- shaft or footing excavation, the bottom
mercial diving operations shall be sub- of which is made larger than the cross
ject to subpart T of part 1910, section above to form a belled shape.
§§ 1910.401–1910.441, of this chapter.
Benching (Benching system) means a
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42 method of protecting employees from
FR 37674, July 22, 1977] cave-ins by excavating the sides of an
excavation to form one or a series of
§ 1926.606 Definitions applicable to horizontal levels or steps, usually with
this subpart. vertical or near-vertical surfaces be-
(a) Apron—The area along the water- tween levels.
front edge of the pier or wharf. Cave-in means the separation of a
(b) Bulwark—The side of a ship above mass of soil or rock material from the
the upper deck. side of an excavation, or the loss of soil
(c) Coaming—The raised frame, as from under a trench shield or support
around a hatchway in the deck, to keep system, and its sudden movement into
out water. the excavation, either by falling or
(d) Jacob’s ladder—A marine ladder of sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it
rope or chain with wooden or metal could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure
rungs. and immobilize a person.
(e) Rail, for the purpose of § 1926.605, Competent person means one who is
means a light structure serving as a capable of identifying existing and pre-
guard at the outer edge of a ship’s dictable hazards in the surroundings,
deck. or working conditions which are unsan-
itary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
Subpart P—Excavations ployees, and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker
Cross braces mean the horizontal
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc-
tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, members of a shoring system installed
Occupational Safety and Hea1th Act of 1970 perpendicular to the sides of the exca-
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s vation, the ends of which bear against
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR either uprights or wales.
366
Excavation means any man-made cut, accordance with § 1926.652 (c)(3) or

cavity, trench, or depression in an (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usu-
earth surface, formed by earth really referred to as ‘‘trench boxes’’ or
moval. ‘‘trench shields.’’
Faces or sides means the vertical or Shoring (Shoring system) means a
inclined earth surfaces formed as a re- structure such as a metal hydraulic,
sult of excavation work. mechanical or timber shoring system
Failure means the breakage, displace- that supports the sides of an exca-
ment, or permanent deformation of a vation and which is designed to prevent
structural member or connection so as cave-ins.
to reduce its structural integrity and Sides. See ‘‘Faces.’’
its supportive capabilities. Sloping (Sloping system) means a
Hazardous atmosphere means an at- method of protecting employees from
mosphere which by reason of being ex- cave-ins by excavating to form sides of
plosive, flammable, poisonous, corro- an excavation that are inclined away
sive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen defi- from the excavation so as to prevent
cient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may cave-ins. The angle of incline required
cause death, illness, or injury. to prevent a cave-in varies with dif-
Kickout means the accidental release ferences in such factors as the soil
or failure of a cross brace. type, environmental conditions of ex-
Protective system means a method of
posure, and application of surcharge
protecting employees from cave-ins,
loads.
from material that could fall or roll
Stable rock means natural solid min-
from an excavation face or into an ex-
cavation, or from the collapse of adja- eral material that can be excavated
cent structures. Protective systems in- with vertical sides and will remain in-
clude support systems, sloping and tact while exposed. Unstable rock is
benching systems, shield systems, and considered to be stable when the rock
other systems that provide the nec- material on the side or sides of the ex-
essary protection. cavation is secured against caving-in
Ramp means an inclined walking or or movement by rock bolts or by an-
working surface that is used to gain ac- other protective system that has been
cess to one point from another, and is designed by a registered professional
constructed from earth or from struc- engineer.
tural materials such as steel or wood. Structural ramp means a ramp built of
Registered Professional Engineer means steel or wood, usually used for vehicle
a person who is registered as a profes- access. Ramps made of soil or rock are
sional engineer in the state where the not considered structural ramps.
work is to be performed. However, a Support system means a structure
professional engineer, registered in any such as underpinning, bracing, or shor-
state is deemed to be a ‘‘registered pro- ing, which provides support to an adja-
fessional engineer’’ within the meaning cent structure, underground installa-
of this standard when approving de- tion, or the sides of an excavation.
signs for ‘‘manufactured protective Tabulated data means tables and
systems’’ or ‘‘tabulated data’’ to be charts approved by a registered profes-
used in interstate commerce. sional engineer and used to design and
Sheeting means the members of a construct a protective system.
shoring system that retain the earth in Trench (Trench excavation) means a
position and in turn are supported by narrow excavation (in relation to its
other members of the shoring system. length) made below the surface of the
Shield (Shield system) means a struc- ground. In general, the depth is greater
ture that is able to withstand the than the width, but the width of a
forces imposed on it by a cave-in and trench (measured at the bottom) is not
thereby protect employees within the greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or
structure. Shields can be permanent other structures are installed or con-
structures or can be designed to be structed in an excavation so as to re-
portable and moved along as work produce the dimension measured from the
gresses. Additionally, shields can be ei- forms or structure to the side of the ex-
ther premanufactured or job-built in cavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less
367
(measured at the bottom of the exca- (4) While the excavation is open, un-
vation), the excavation is also consid- derground installations shall be pro-
ered to be a trench. tected, supported or removed as nec-
Trench box. See ‘‘Shield.’’ essary to safeguard employees.
Trench shield. See ‘‘Shield.’’ (c) Access and egress—(1) Structural
Uprights means the vertical members ramps. (i) Structural ramps that are
of a trench shoring system placed in used solely by employees as a means of
contact with the earth and usually po- access or egress from excavations shall
sitioned so that individual members do be designed by a competent person.
not contact each other. Uprights Structural ramps used for access or
placed so that individual members are egress of equipment shall be designed
closely spaced, in contact with or by a competent person qualified in
interconnected to each other, are often structural design, and shall be con-
called ‘‘sheeting.’’ structed in accordance with the design.
Wales means horizontal members of a (ii) Ramps and runways constructed
shoring system placed parallel to the of two or more structural members
excavation face whose sides bear shall have the structural members con-
against the vertical members of the nected together to prevent displace-
shoring system or earth. ment.
(iii) Structural members used for
§ 1926.651 Specific excavation require- ramps and runways shall be of uniform
ments. thickness.
(a) Surface encumbrances. All surface (iv) Cleats or other appropriate
encumbrances that are located so as to means used to connect runway struc-
create a hazard to employees shall be tural members shall be attached to the
removed or supported, as necessary, to bottom of the runway or shall be at-
safeguard employees. tached in a manner to prevent tripping.
(b) Underground installations. (1) The (v) Structural ramps used in lieu of
estimated location of utility installa- steps shall be provided with cleats or
tions, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, other surface treatments on the top
electric, water lines, or any other un- surface to prevent slipping.
derground installations that reason- (2) Means of egress from trench exca-
ably may be expected to be encoun- vations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or
tered during excavation work, shall be other safe means of egress shall be lo-
determined prior to opening an exca- cated in trench excavations that are 4
vation. feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to
(2) Utility companies or owners shall require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of
be contacted within established or cus- lateral travel for employees.
tomary local response times, advised of (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Em-
the proposed work, and asked to estab- ployees exposed to public vehicular
lish the location of the utility under- traffic shall be provided with, and shall
ground installations prior to the start wear, warning vests or other suitable
of actual excavation. When utility garments marked with or made of
companies or owners cannot respond to reflectorized or high-visibility mate-
a request to locate underground utility rial.
installations within 24 hours (unless a (e) Exposure to falling loads. No em-
longer period is required by state or ployee shall be permitted underneath
local law), or cannot establish the loads handled by lifting or digging
exact location of these installations, equipment. Employees shall be re-
the employer may proceed, provided quired to stand away from any vehicle
the employer does so with caution, and being loaded or unloaded to avoid being
provided detection equipment or other struck by any spillage or falling mate-
acceptable means to locate utility in- rials. Operators may remain in the
stallations are used. cabs of vehicles being loaded or un-
(3) When excavation operations ap- loaded when the vehicles are equipped,
proach the estimated location of under- in accordance with § 1926.601(b)(6), to
ground installations, the exact loca- provide adequate protection for the op-
tion of the installations shall be deter- erator during loading and unloading
mined by safe and acceptable means. operations.
368
(f) Warning system for mobile equip- mospheric conditions exist or may rea-
ment. When mobile equipment is oper- sonably be expected to develop during
ated adjacent to an excavation, or work in an excavation. This equipment
when such equipment is required to ap- shall be attended when in use.
proach the edge of an excavation, and (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom
the operator does not have a clear and pier holes, or other similar deep and
direct view of the edge of the exca- confined footing excavations, shall
vation, a warning system shall be uti- wear a harness with a life-line securely
lized such as barricades, hand or me- attached to it. The lifeline shall be sep-
chanical signals, or stop logs. If pos- arate from any line used to handle ma-
sible, the grade should be away from terials, and shall be individually at-
the excavation. tended at all times while the employee
(g) Hazardous atmospheres—(1) Testing wearing the lifeline is in the exca-
and controls. In addition to the require- vation.
ments set forth in subparts D and E of (h) Protection from hazards associated
this part (29 CFR 1926.50–1926.107) to with water accumulation. (1) Employees
prevent exposure to harmful levels of shall not work in excavations in which
atmospheric contaminants and to as- there is accumulated water, or in exca-
sure acceptable atmospheric condi- vations in which water is accumu-
tions, the following requirements shall lating, unless adequate precautions
apply: have been taken to protect employees
(i) Where oxygen deficiency against the hazards posed by water ac-
(atmospheres containing less than 19.5 cumulation. The precautions necessary
percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmos- to protect employees adequately vary
phere exists or could reasonably be ex- with each situation, but could include
pected to exist, such as in excavations special support or shield systems to
in landfill areas or excavations in areas protect from cave-ins, water removal
where hazardous substances are stored to control the level of accumulating
nearby, the atmospheres in the exca- water, or use of a safety harness and
vation shall be tested before employees lifeline.
enter excavations greater than 4 feet (2) If water is controlled or prevented
(1.22 m) in depth. from accumulating by the use of water
(ii) Adequate precautions shall be removal equipment, the water removal
taken to prevent employee exposure to equipment and operations shall be
atmospheres containing less than 19.5 monitored by a competent person to
percent oxygen and other hazardous ensure proper operation.
atmospheres. These precautions in- (3) If excavation work interrupts the
clude providing proper respiratory pro- natural drainage of surface water (such
tection or ventilation in accordance as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or
with subparts D and E of this part re- other suitable means shall be used to
spectively. prevent surface water from entering
(iii) Adequate precaution shall be the excavation and to provide adequate
taken such as providing ventilation, to drainage of the area adjacent to the ex-
prevent employee exposure to an at- cavation. Excavations subject to runoff
mosphere containing a concentration from heavy rains will require an in-
of a flammable gas in excess of 20 per- spection by a competent person and
cent of the lower flammable limit of compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and
the gas. (h)(2) of this section.
(iv) When controls are used that are (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (1)
intended to reduce the level of atmos- Where the stability of adjoining build-
pheric contaminants to acceptable lev- ings, walls, or other structures is en-
els, testing shall be conducted as often dangered by excavation operations,
as necessary to ensure that the atmos- support systems such as shoring, brac-
phere remains safe. ing, or underpinning shall be provided
(2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) to ensure the stability of such struc-
Emergency rescue equipment, such as tures for the protection of employees.
breathing apparatus, a safety harness (2) Excavation below the level of the
and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be base or footing of any foundation or re-
readily available where hazardous at- taining wall that could be reasonably
369
expected to pose a hazard to employees the shift. Inspections shall also be

shall not be permitted except when: made after every rainstorm or other
(i) A support system, such as under- hazard increasing occurrence. These in-
pinning, is provided to ensure the safe- spections are only required when em-
ty of employees and the stability of the ployee exposure can be reasonably an-
structure; or ticipated.
(ii) The excavation is in stable rock; (2) Where the competent person finds
or evidence of a situation that could re-
(iii) A registered professional engi- sult in a possible cave-in, indications
neer has approved the determination of failure of protective systems, haz-
that the structure is sufficently re- ardous atmospheres, or other haz-
moved from the excavation so as to be ardous conditions, exposed employees
unaffected by the excavation activity; shall be removed from the hazardous
or area until the necessary precautions
(iv) A registered professional engi- have been taken to ensure their safety.
neer has approved the determination (l) Walkways shall be provided where
that such excavation work will not employees or equipment are required
pose a hazard to employees. or permitted to cross over excavations.
(3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appur- Guardrails which comply with
tenant structure shall not be under- § 1926.502(b) shall be provided where
mined unless a support system or an- walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
other method of protection is provided above lower levels.
to protect employees from the possible
collapse of such structures. [54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended by 59
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
(j) Protection of employees from loose
rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection § 1926.652 Requirements for protective
shall be provided to protect employees systems.
from loose rock or soil that could pose
a hazard by falling or rolling from an (a) Protection of employees in exca-
excavation face. Such protection shall vations. (1) Each employee in an exca-
consist of scaling to remove loose ma- vation shall be protected from cave-ins
terial; installation of protective barri- by an adequate protective system de-
cades at intervals as necessary on the signed in accordance with paragraph
face to stop and contain falling mate- (b) or (c) of this section except when:
rial; or other means that provide equiv- (i) Excavations are made entirely in
alent protection. stable rock; or
(2) Employees shall be protected from (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet
excavated or other materials or equip- (1.52m) in depth and examination of the
ment that could pose a hazard by fall- ground by a competent person provides
ing or rolling into excavations. Protec- no indication of a potential cave-in.
tion shall be provided by placing and (2) Protective systems shall have the
keeping such materials or equipment capacity to resist without failure all
at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of loads that are intended or could rea-
excavations, or by the use of retaining sonably be expected to be applied or
devices that are sufficient to prevent transmitted to the system.
materials or equipment from falling or (b) Design of sloping and benching sys-
rolling into excavations, or by a com- tems. The slopes and configurations of
bination of both if necessary. sloping and benching systems shall be
(k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections selected and constructed by the em-
of excavations, the adjacent areas, and ployer or his designee and shall be in
protective systems shall be made by a accordance with the requirements of
competent person for evidence of a sit- paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative,
uation that could result in possible paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative,
cave-ins, indications of failure of pro- paragraph (b)(3), or, in the alternative,
tective systems, hazardous paragraph (b)(4), as follows:
atmospheres, or other hazardous condi- (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations
tions. An inspection shall be conducted and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be
by the competent person prior to the sloped at an angle not steeper than one
start of work and as needed throughout and one-half horizontal to one vertical
370
(34 degrees measured from the hori- (B) The configurations that were de-
zontal), unless the employer uses one termined to be safe for the particular
of the other options listed below. project; and
(ii) Slopes specified in paragraph (C) The identity of the registered pro-
(b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be exca- fessional engineer approving the de-
vated to form configurations that are sign.
in accordance with the slopes shown (iii) At least one copy of the design
for Type C soil in Appendix B to this shall be maintained at the jobsite
subpart. while the slope is being constructed.
(2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes After that time the design need not be
and configurations using Appendices A at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made
and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and available to the Secretary upon re-
allowable configurations for sloping quest.
(c) Design of support systems, shield
and benching systems, shall be deter-
systems, and other protective systems. De-
mined in accordance with the condi-
signs of support systems shield sys-
tions and requirements set forth in ap-
tems, and other protective systems
pendices A and B to this subpart.
shall be selected and constructed by
(3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- the employer or his designee and shall
ulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or be in accordance with the requirements
benching systems shall be selected of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alter-
from and be in accordance with tab- native, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the al-
ulated data, such as tables and charts. ternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, in the
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows:
written form and shall include all of (1) Option (1)—Designs using appen-
the following: dices A, C and D. Designs for timber
(A) Identification of the parameters shoring in trenches shall be determined
that affect the selection of a sloping or in accordance with the conditions and
benching system drawn from such data; requirements set forth in appendices A
(B) Identification of the limits of use and C to this subpart. Designs for alu-
of the data, to include the magnitude minum hydraulic shoring shall be in
and configuration of slopes determined accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this
to be safe; section, but if manufacturer’s tab-
(C) Explanatory information as may ulated data cannot be utilized, designs
be necessary to aid the user in making shall be in accordance with appendix D.
a correct selection of a protective sys- (2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufac-
tem from the data. turer’s Tabulated Data. (i) Design of sup-
(iii) At least one copy of the tab- port systems, shield systems, or other
ulated data which identifies the reg- protective systems that are drawn
istered professional engineer who ap- from manufacturer’s tabulated data
proved the data, shall be maintained at shall be in accordance with all speci-
fications, recommendations, and limi-
the jobsite during construction of the
tations issued or made by the manufac-
protective system. After that time the
turer.
data may be stored off the jobsite, but
(ii) Deviation from the specifications,
a copy of the data shall be made avail-
recommendations, and limitations
able to the Secretary upon request.
issued or made by the manufacturer
(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered shall only be allowed after the manu-
professional engineer. (i) Sloping and facturer issues specific written ap-
benching systems not utilizing Option proval.
(1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under (iii) Manufacturer’s specifications,
paragraph (b) of this section shall be recommendations, and limitations, and
approved by a registered professional manufacturer’s approval to deviate
engineer. from the specifications, recommenda-
(ii) Designs shall be in written form tions, and limitations shall be in writ-
and shall include at least the following: ten form at the jobsite during con-
(A) The magnitude of the slopes that struction of the protective system.
were determined to be safe for the par- After that time this data may be
ticular project; stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall
371
be made available to the Secretary ner that is consistent with the rec-
upon request. ommendations of the manufacturer,
(3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- and in a manner that will prevent em-
ulated data. (i) Designs of support sys- ployee exposure to hazards.
tems, shield systems, or other protec- (3) When material or equipment that
tive systems shall be selected from and is used for protective systems is dam-
be in accordance with tabulated data, aged, a competent person shall exam-
such as tables and charts. ine the material or equipment and
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in evaluate its suitability for continued
written form and include all of the fol- use. If the competent person cannot as-
lowing: sure the material or equipment is able
(A) Identification of the parameters to support the intended loads or is oth-
that affect the selection of a protective erwise suitable for safe use, then such
system drawn from such data; material or equipment shall be re-
(B) Identification of the limits of use moved from service, and shall be evalu-
of the data; ated and approved by a registered pro-
(C) Explanatory information as may fessional engineer before being re-
be necessary to aid the user in making turned to service.
a correct selection of a protective sys- (e) Installation and removal of sup-
tem from the data. port—(1) General. (i) Members of sup-
(iii) At least one copy of the tab- port systems shall be securely con-
ulated data, which identifies the reg- nected together to prevent sliding, fall-
istered professional engineer who ap- ing, kickouts, or other predictable fail-
proved the data, shall be maintained at ure.
the jobsite during construction of the (ii) Support systems shall be in-
protective system. After that time the stalled and removed in a manner that
data may be stored off the jobsite, but protects employees from cave-ins,
a copy of the data shall be made avail- structural collapses, or from being
able to the Secretary upon request. struck by members of the support sys-
(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered tem.
professional engineer. (i) Support sys- (iii) Individual members of support
tems, shield systems, and other protec- systems shall not be subjected to loads
tive systems not utilizing Option 1, Op- exceeding those which those members
tion 2 or Option 3, above, shall be ap- were designed to withstand.
proved by a registered professional en- (iv) Before temporary removal of in-
gineer. dividual members begins, additional
(ii) Designs shall be in written form precautions shall be taken to ensure
and shall include the following: the safety of employees, such as in-
(A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, stalling other structural members to
and configurations of the materials to carry the loads imposed on the support
be used in the protective system; and system.
(B) The identity of the registered (v) Removal shall begin at, and
professional engineer approving the de- progress from, the bottom of the exca-
sign. vation. Members shall be released slow-
(iii) At least one copy of the design ly so as to note any indication of pos-
shall be maintained at the jobsite dur- sible failure of the remaining members
ing construction of the protective sys- of the structure or possible cave-in of
tem. After that time, the design may the sides of the excavation.
be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of (vi) Backfilling shall progress to-
the design shall be made available to gether with the removal of support sys-
the Secretary upon request. tems from excavations.
(d) Materials and equipment. (1) Mate- (2) Additional requirements for support
rials and equipment used for protective systems for trench excavations. (i) Exca-
systems shall be free from damage or vation of material to a level no greater
defects that might impair their proper than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of
function. the members of a support system shall
(2) Manufactured materials and be permitted, but only if the system is
equipment used for protective systems designed to resist the forces calculated
shall be used and maintained in a man- for the full depth of the trench, and
372
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A
there are no indications while the to subpart P of part 1926, and when alu-
trench is open of a possible loss of soil minum hydraulic shoring is designed in ac-
from behind or below the bottom of the cordance with appendix D. This Appendix
also applies if other protective systems are
support system. designed and selected for use from data pre-
(ii) Installation of a support system pared in accordance with the requirements
shall be closely coordinated with the set forth in § 1926.652(c), and the use of the
excavation of trenches. data is predicated on the use of the soil clas-
(f) Sloping and benching systems. Em- sification system set forth in this appendix.
ployees shall not be permitted to work (b) Definitions. The definitions and exam-
on the faces of sloped or benched exca- ples given below are based on, in whole or in
vations at levels above other employ- part, the following: American Society for
Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653–85
ees except when employees at the lower and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification
levels are adequately protected from System, The U.S. Department of Agriculture
the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and
material or equipment. The National Bureau of Standards Report
(g) Shield systems—(1) General. (i) BSS–121.
Shield systems shall not be subjected Cemented soil means a soil in which the par-
to loads exceeding those which the sys- ticles are held together by a chemical agent,
tem was designed to withstand. such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand-
size sample cannot be crushed into powder or
(ii) Shields shall be installed in a individual soil particles by finger pressure.
manner to restrict lateral or other haz- Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil),
ardous movement of the shield in the or soil with a high clay content, which has
event of the application of sudden lat- cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not
eral loads. crumble, can be excavated with vertical
(iii) Employees shall be protected sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohe-
from the hazard of cave-ins when enter- sive soil is hard to break up when dry, and
ing or exiting the areas protected by exhibits significant cohesion when sub-
merged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt,
shields. sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay.
(iv) Employees shall not be allowed Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit
in shields when shields are being in- visible signs of moisture content.
stalled, removed, or moved vertically. Fissured means a soil material that has a
(2) Additional requirement for shield tendency to break along definite planes of
systems used in trench excavations. Exca- fracture with little resistance, or a material
vations of earth material to a level not that exhibits open cracks, such as tension
greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the cracks, in an exposed surface.
Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt,
bottom of a shield shall be permitted,
(coarse grained soil) with little or no clay
but only if the shield is designed to re- content. Granular soil has no cohesive
sist the forces calculated for the full strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit
depth of the trench, and there are no apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be
indications while the trench is open of molded when moist and crumbles easily
a possible loss of soil from behind or when dry.
below the bottom of the shield. Layered system means two or more dis-
tinctly different soil or rock types arranged
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened
1926—SOIL CLASSIFICATION planes in rock or shale are considered lay-
ered.
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. This Moist soil means a condition in which a soil
appendix describes a method of classifying looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can
soil and rock deposits based on site and envi- easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into
ronmental conditions, and on the structure small diameter threads before crumbling.
and composition of the earth deposits. The Moist granular soil that contains some cohe-
appendix contains definitions, sets forth re- sive material will exhibit signs of cohesion
quirements, and describes acceptable visual between particles.
and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Plastic means a property of a soil which al-
(2) Application. This appendix applies when lows the soil to be deformed or molded with-
a sloping or benching system is designed in out cracking, or appreciable volume change.
accordance with the requirements set forth Saturated soil means a soil in which the
in § 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection voids are filled with water. Saturation does
for employees from cave-ins. This appendix not require flow. Saturation, or near satura-
also applies when timber shoring for exca- tion, is necessary for the proper use of in-
vations is designed as a method of protection struments such as a pocket penetrometer or
from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C sheer vane.
373
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
Soil classification system means, for the pur- (v) Material in a sloped, layered system
pose of this subpart, a method of catego- where the layers dip into the excavation or a
rizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy slope of four horizontal to one vertical
of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, (4H:1V) or steeper.
in decreasing order of stability. The cat- Unconfined compressive strength means the
egories are determined based on an analysis load per unit area at which a soil will fail in
of the properties and performance character- compression. It can be determined by labora-
istics of the deposits and the environmental tory testing, or estimated in the field using
conditions of exposure. a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetra-
Stable rock means natural solid mineral tion tests, and other methods.
matter that can be excavated with vertical Wet soil means soil that contains signifi-
sides and remain intact while exposed. cantly more moisture than moist soil, but in
Submerged soil means soil which is under- such a range of values that cohesive material
water or is free seeping. will slump or begin to flow when vibrated.
Type A means cohesive soils with an Granular material that would exhibit cohe-
unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton sive properties when moist will lose those co-
per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Ex- hesive properties when wet.
amples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay, (c) Requirements—(1) Classification of soil
sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit
silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Ce- shall be classified by a competent person as
mented soils such as caliche and hardpan are Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in
also considered Type A. However, no soil is accordance with the definitions set forth in
Type A if: paragraph (b) of this appendix.
(i) The soil is fissured; or (2) Basis of classification. The classification
of the deposits shall be made based on the re-
(ii) The soil is subject to vibration from
sults of at least one visual and at least one
heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects;
manual analysis. Such analyses shall be con-
or
ducted by a competent person using tests de-
(iii) The soil has been previously disturbed;
scribed in paragraph (d) below, or in other
or
recognized methods of soil classification and
(iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered testing such as those adopted by the Amer-
system where the layers dip into the exca- ica Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S.
vation on a slope of four horizontal to one Department of Agriculture textural classi-
vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or fication system.
(v) The material is subject to other factors (3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual
that would require it to be classified as a less and manual analyses, such as those noted as
stable material. being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this ap-
Type B means: pendix, shall be designed and conducted to
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- provide sufficient quantitative and quali-
pressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 tative information as may be necessary to
kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or identify properly the properties, factors, and
(ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: conditions affecting the classification of the
angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), deposits.
silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some (4) Layered systems. In a layered system,
cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. the system shall be classified in accordance
(iii) Previously disturbed soils except those with its weakest layer. However, each layer
which would otherwise be classed as Type C may be classified individually where a more
soil. stable layer lies under a less stable layer.
(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined com- (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a de-
pressive strength or cementation require- posit, the properties, factors, or conditions
ments for Type A, but is fissured or subject affecting its classification change in any
to vibration; or way, the changes shall be evaluated by a
(v) Dry rock that is not stable; or competent person. The deposit shall be re-
(vi) Material that is part of a sloped, lay- classified as necessary to reflect the changed
ered system where the layers dip into the ex- circumstances.
cavation on a slope less steep than four hori- (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests—(1)
zontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to
material would otherwise be classified as determine qualitative information regarding
Type B. the excavation site in general, the soil adja-
Type C means: cent to the excavation, the soil forming the
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- sides of the open excavation, and the soil
pressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or taken as samples from excavated material.
(ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, (i) Observe samples of soil that are exca-
and loamy sand; or vated and soil in the sides of the excavation.
(iii) Submerged soil or soil from which Estimate the range of particle sizes and the
water is freely seeping; or relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil
(iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or that is primarily composed of fine-grained
374
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B
material is cohesive material. Soil composed designation D2488—‘‘Standard Recommended
primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is Practice for Description of Soils (Visual—
granular material. Manual Procedure).’’) Type A soils with an
(ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf
that remains in clumps when excavated is can be readily indented by the thumb; how-
cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does ever, they can be penetrated by the thumb
not stay in clumps is granular. only with very great effort. Type C soils with
(iii) Observe the side of the opened exca- an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf
vation and the surface area adjacent to the can be easily penetrated several inches by
excavation. Crack-like openings such as ten- the thumb, and can be molded by light finger
sion cracks could indicate fissured material. pressure. This test should be conducted on
If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large
soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evi- clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after
dence of moving ground and are indications excavation to keep to a miminum the effects
of potentially hazardous situations. of exposure to drying influences. If the exca-
(iv) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences
vation and the excavation itself for evidence (rain, flooding), the classification of the soil
of existing utility and other underground must be changed accordingly.
structures, and to identify previously dis- (iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of
turbed soil. unconfined compressive strength of soils can
(v) Observe the opened side of the exca- also be obtained by use of a pocket pene-
vation to identify layered systems. Examine trometer or by using a hand-operated
layered systems to identify if the layers shearvane.
slope toward the excavation. Estimate the (v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the
degree of slope of the layers. drying test is to differentiate between cohe-
(vi) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- sive material with fissures, unfissured cohe-
vation and the sides of the opened exca- sive material, and granular material. The
vation for evidence of surface water, water procedure for the drying test involves drying
seeping from the sides of the excavation, or a sample of soil that is approximately one
the location of the level of the water table. inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm)
(vii) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- in diameter until it is thoroughly dry:
vation and the area within the excavation (A) If the sample develops cracks as it
for sources of vibration that may affect the dries, significant fissures are indicated.
stability of the excavation face. (B) Samples that dry without cracking are
(2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil to be broken by hand. If considerable force is
samples is conducted to determine quan- necessary to break a sample, the soil has sig-
titative as well as qualitative properties of nificant cohesive material content. The soil
soil and to provide more information in can be classified as a unfissured cohesive ma-
order to classify soil properly. terial and the unconfined compressive
(i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of strength should be determined.
soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into (C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is
threads as thin as 1⁄8-inch in diameter. Cohe- either a fissured cohesive material or a
sive material can be successfully rolled into granular material. To distinguish between
threads without crumbling. For example, if the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the
at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1⁄8-inch sample by hand or by stepping on them. If
thread can be held on one end without tear- the clumps do not pulverize easily, the mate-
ing, the soil is cohesive. rial is cohesive with fissures. If they pul-
(ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and verize easily into very small fragments, the
crumbles on its own or with moderate pres- material is granular.
sure into individual grains or fine powder, it
is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART
or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into 1926—SLOPING AND BENCHING
clumps which break up into smaller clumps,
but the smaller clumps can only be broken (a) Scope and application. This appendix
up with difficulty, it may be clay in any contains specifications for sloping and
combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the benching when used as methods of protecting
dry soil breaks into clumps which do not employees working in excavations from
break up into small clumps and which can cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix
only be broken with difficulty, and there is apply when the design of sloping and bench-
no visual indication the soil is fissured, the ing protective systems is to be performed in
soil may be considered unfissured. accordance with the requirements set forth
(iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetra- in § 1926.652(b)(2).
tion test can be used to estimate the (b) Definitions.
unconfined compressive strength of cohesive Actual slope means the slope to which an
soils. (This test is based on the thumb pene- excavation face is excavated.
tration test described in American Society Distress means that the soil is in a condi-
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard tion where a cave-in is imminent or is likely
375
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phe- (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum
nomena as the development of fissures in the allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit
face of or adjacent to an open excavation; shall be determined from Table B–1 of this
the subsidence of the edge of an excavation; appendix.
the slumping of material from the face or (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall
the bulging or heaving of material from the not be steeper than the maximum allowable
bottom of an excavation; the spalling of ma- slope.
terial from the face of an excavation; and (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep
ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material than the maximum allowable slope, when
such as pebbles or little clumps of material there are signs of distress. If that situation
suddenly separating from the face of an exca- occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an ac-
vation and trickling or rolling down into the tual slope which is at least 1⁄2 horizontal to
excavation. one vertical (1⁄2H:1V) less steep than the
Maximum allowable slope means the steep- maximum allowable slope.
est incline of an excavation face that is ac- (iii) When surcharge loads from stored ma-
ceptable for the most favorable site condi- terial or equipment, operating equipment, or
tions as protection against cave-ins, and is traffic are present, a competent person shall
expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance determine the degree to which the actual
to vertical rise (H:V). slope must be reduced below the maximum
Short term exposure means a period of time allowable slope, and shall assure that such
less than or equal to 24 hours that an exca- reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from
vation is open. adjacent structures shall be evaluated in ac-
(c) Requirements—(1) Soil classification. Soil cordance with § 1926.651(i).
and rock deposits shall be classified in ac- (4) Configurations. Configurations of slop-
cordance with appendix A to subpart P of ing and benching systems shall be in accord-
part 1926. ance with Figure B–1.
376
EC30OC91.016</GPH>
Figure B–1
Slope Configurations
(All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)
B–1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil.

1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE—GENERAL
Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which
are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1⁄2:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE—SHORT TERM

2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4 to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
EC30OC91.018</GPH> EC30OC91.019</GPH>
377
EC30OC91.017</GPH>
SIMPLE BENCH
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower por-
tions shall have a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH

All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported
vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum
vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
EC30OC91.021</GPH> EC30OC91.022</GPH>
378
EC30OC91.020</GPH>
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH
All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are
supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1. The support or shield sys-
tem must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.
SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations
shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b).
B–1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil

1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 1:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
EC30OC91.024</GPH>
379
EC30OC91.023</GPH>
SINGLE BENCH
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.
EC30OC91.026</GPH> EC30OC91.027</GPH>
VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in
§ 1926.652(b).
B–1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil

1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 11⁄2:1.
380
EC30OC91.025</GPH>
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.
VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION

§ 1926.652(b).
B–1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils

1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum al-
lowable slope for each layer as set forth below.
EC30OC91.029</GPH>
381
EC30OC91.028</GPH>
382
EC30OC91.030</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C
§ 1926.652(b).
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the

1926—TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES data presented in this appendix, the soil type
or types in which the excavation is made
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- must first be determined using the soil clas-
tion that can be used timber shoring is pro- sification method set forth in appendix A of
vided as a method of protection from cave- subpart P of this part.
ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 (c) Presentation of Information. Information
m) in depth. This appendix must be used is presented in several forms as follows:
when design of timber shoring protective (1) Information is presented in tabular
systems is to be performed in accordance form in Tables C–1.1, C–1.2, and C–1.3, and Ta-
with § 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring bles C–2.1, C–2.2 and C–2.3 following para-
configurations; other systems of support graph (g) of the appendix. Each table pre-
such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; sents the minimum sizes of timber members
and other protective systems such as slop- to use in a shoring system, and each table
ing, benching, shielding, and freezing sys- contains data only for the particular soil
tems must be designed in accordance with type in which the excavation or portion of
the requirements set forth in § 1926.652(b) and
§ 1926.652(c).
383
EC30OC91.031</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
the excavation is made. The data are ar- (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross
ranged to allow the user the flexibility to se- braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load dis-
lect from among several acceptable configu- tributed on a one-foot section of the center
rations of members based on varying the of the crossbrace.
horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable (C) When surcharge loads are present from
rock is exempt from shoring requirements equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
and therefore, no data are presented for this pounds.
condition. (D) When only the lower portion of a
(2) Information concerning the basis of the trench is shored and the remaining portion
tabular data and the limitations of the data of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
dix, and on the tables themselves. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(3) Information explaining the use of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of for use at a depth which is determined from
this appendix. the top of the overall trench, and not from
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the toe of the sloped portion.
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shor-
this appendix.
ing system that are to be selected using this
(5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Ta-
information are the cross braces, the
bles C–1.1 through C–1.3 and Tables C–2.1
uprights, and the wales, where wales are re-
through C–2.3 are presented in paragraph (g)
quired. Minimum sizes of members are speci-
of this Appendix.
fied for use in different types of soil. There
(d) Basis and limitations of the data—(1) Di-
are six tables of information, two for each
mensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the
soil type. The soil type must first be deter-
timber members listed in Tables C–1.1
through C–1.3 are taken from the National mined in accordance with the soil classifica-
Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, ‘‘Rec- tion system described in appendix A to sub-
ommended Technical Provisions for Con- part P of part 1926. Using the appropriate
struction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of table, the selection of the size and spacing of
Trenches and Excavations.’’ In addition, the members is then made. The selection is
where NBS did not recommend specific sizes based on the depth and width of the trench
of members, member sizes are based on an where the members are to be installed and,
analysis of the sizes required for use by ex- in most instances, the selection is also based
isting codes and on empirical practice. on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces.
(ii) The required dimensions of the mem- Instances where a choice of horizontal spac-
bers listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 refer ing of crossbracing is available, the hori-
to actual dimensions and not nominal di- zontal spacing of the crossbraces must be
mensions of the timber. Employers wanting chosen by the user before the size of any
to use nominal size shoring are directed to member can be determined. When the soil
Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3, or have this type, the width and depth of the trench, and
choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are
to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of known, the size and vertical spacing of the
Reclamation or data from other acceptable crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of
sources. the wales, and the size and horizontal spac-
(2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not ining of the uprights can be read from the ap-
tended that the timber shoring specification propriate table.
apply to every situation that may be experi- (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C–
enced in the field. These data were developed 1.1 through C–1.3.
to apply to the situations that are most (1) Example 1.
commonly experienced in current trenching A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep
practice. Shoring systems for use in situa- and five feet wide.
tions that are not covered by the data in this From Table C–1.1, for acceptable arrange-
appendix must be designed as specified in ments of timber can be used.
§ 1926.652(c).
(ii) When any of the following conditions Arrangement #B1
are present, the members specified in the ta- Space 4×4 crossbraces at six feet hori-
bles are not considered adequate. Either an zontally and four feet vertically.
alternate timber shoring system must be de-
Wales are not required.
signed or another type of protective system
Space 3×8 uprights at six feet horizontally.
designed in accordance with § 1926.652.
(A) When loads imposed by structures or This arrangement is commonly called ‘‘skip
by stored material adjacent to the trench shoring.’’
weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two- Arrangement #B2
foot soil surcharge. The term ‘‘adjacent’’ as
used here means the area within a horizontal Space 4×6 crossbraces at eight feet hori-
distance from the edge of the trench equal to zontally and four feet vertically.
the depth of the trench. Space 8×8 wales at four feet vertically.
384
Space 2×6 uprights at four feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally. Position 2×6 uprights in a close sheeting
configuration unless water pressure must be
Arrangement #B3 resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where
Space 6×6 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- water must be retained.
zontally and four feet vertically. (4) Example 4.
Space 8×10 wales at four feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep
Space 2×6 uprights at five feet hori- and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of
zontally. members for the section of trench that is
over 15 feet in depth is determined using
Arrangement #B4
Table C–1.3. Only one arrangement of mem-
Space 6×6 crossbraces at 12 feet hori- bers is provided.
zontally and four feet vertically. Space 8×10 crossbraces at six feet hori-
Space 10×10 wales at four feet vertically. zontally and five feet vertically.
Spaces 3×8 uprights at six feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally.
Use 3×6 tight sheeting.
(2) Example 2.
A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep Use of Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3 would fol-
and five feet wide. From Table C–1.2 three low the same procedures.
acceptable arrangements of members are (g) Notes for all Tables.
listed. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than in-
dicated are to be determined as specified in
Arrangement #B1 § 1926.652(c), ‘‘Design of Protective Systems.’’
Space 6×6 crossbraces at six feet hori- 2. When conditions are saturated or sub-
zontally and five feet vertically. merged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting
Space 8×8 wales at five feet vertically. refers to the use of specially-edged timber
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least
zontally. three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or
similar construction that when driven or
Arrangement #B2 placed in position provide a tight wall to re-
Space 6×8 crossbraces at eight feet hori- sist the lateral pressure of water and to pre-
zontally and five feet vertically. vent the loss of backfill material. Close
Space 10×10 wales at five feet vertically. Sheeting refers to the placement of planks
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- side-by-side allowing as little space as pos-
zontally. sible between them.
3. All spacing indicated is measured center
Arrangement #B3 to center.
Space 8×8 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- 4. Wales to be installed with greater di-
zontally and five feet vertically. mension horizontal.
Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. 5. If the vertical distance from the center
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet vertically. of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the
(3) Example 3. trench exceeds two and one-half feet,
A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep uprights shall be firmly embedded or a
and five feet wide. mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are
From Table C–1.3 two acceptable arrange- embedded, the vertical distance from the
ments of members can be used. center of the lowest crossbrace to the bot-
tom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches.
Arrangement #B1 When mudsills are used, the vertical dis-
Space 8×8 crossbraces at six feet hori- tance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are
zontally and five feet vertically. wales that are installed at the toe of the
Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. trench side.
Position 2×6 uprights as closely together as 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in
possible. combination with timber crossbraces.
If water must be retained use special 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the
tongue and groove uprights to form tight vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet,
sheeting. place the top crossbrace no more than two
feet below the top of the trench. When the
Arrangement #B2
vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet,
Space 8×10 crossbraces at eight feet hori- place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5
zontally and five feet vertically. feet below the top of the trench.
385
386
EC30OC91.032</GPH>
387
EC30OC91.033</GPH>
388
EC30OC91.034</GPH>
389
EC30OC91.035</GPH>
390
EC30OC91.036</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth. This ap-
1926—ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHOR- pendix must be used when design of the alu-
ING FOR TRENCHES minum hydraulic protective system cannot
be performed in accordance with
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- § 1926.652(c)(2).
tion that can be used when aluminum hy- (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data
draulic shoring is provided as a method of presented in this appendix, the soi1 type or
protection against cave-ins in trenches that types in which the excavation is made must
391
EC30OC91.037</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
first be determined using the soil classifica- bles are not considered adequate. In this
tion method set forth in appendix A of sub- case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic
part P of part 1926. shoring system or other type of protective
(c) Presentation of Information. Information system must be designed in accordance with
is presented in several forms as follows: § 1926.652.
(1) Information is presented in tabular (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross
form in Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and E–1.4. braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load dis-
Each table presents the maximum vertical tributed on a one foot section of the center
and horizontal spacings that may be used of the hydraulic cylinder.
with various aluminum member sizes and (B) When surcharge loads are present from
various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
contains data only for the particular soil pounds.
type in which the excavation or portion of (C) When only the lower portion or a
the excavation is made. Tables D–1.1 and D– trench is shored and the remaining portion
1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
soil. Tables D–1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
waler systems in Types B and C soil. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(2) Information concerning the basis of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data and the limitations of the data for use at a depth which is determined from
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- the top of the overall trench, and not from
dix. the toe of the sloped portion.
(3) Information explaining the use of the (e) Use of Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and D–
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of 1.4. The members of the shoring system that
this appendix. are to be selected using this information are
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the hydraulic cylinders, and either the
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When
this appendix. a waler system is used the vertical timber
(5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) re- sheeting to be used is also selected from
garding Table D–1.1 through D–1.4 are pre- these tables. The Tables D–1.1 and D–1.2 for
sented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. vertical shores are used in Type A and B
(6) Figures, illustrating typical installa- soils that do not require sheeting. Type B
tions of hydraulic shoring, are included just soils that may require sheeting, and Type C
prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is soils that always require sheeting are found
entitled ‘‘Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; in the horizontal wale Tables D–1.3 and D–1.4.
Typical Installations.’’ The soil type must first be determined in ac-
(d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) cordance with the soil classification system
Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are described in appendix A to subpart P of part
those that meet the Section Modulus re- 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selec-
quirements in the D–1 Tables. Aluminum tion of the size and spacing of the members
material is 6061–T6 or material of equivalent is made. The selection is based on the depth
strength and properties. and width of the trench where the members
(2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2- are to be installed. In these tables the
inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- vertical spacing is held constant at four feet
side diameter with a minimum safe working on center. The tables show the maximum
capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for
compressive load at maximum extension. each size of wale in the waler system tables,
Maximum extension is to include full range and in the vertical shore tables, the hydrau-
of cylinder extensions as recommended by lic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as
product manufaturer. the vertical shore spacing.
(ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables:
inch inside diameter with a safe working ca- (1) Example 1:
pacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep
compressive load at extensions as rec- and 3 feet wide. From Table D–1.1: Find
ommended by product manufacturer. vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders
(3) Limitation of application. spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and
(i) It is not intended that the aluminum 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures
hydraulic specification apply to every situa- 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
tion that may be experienced in the field. (2) Example 2:
These data were developed to apply to the A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
situations that are most commonly experi- not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet
enced in current trenching practice. Shoring wide. From Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores
systems for use in situations that are not and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet
covered by the data in this appendix must be o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically.
otherwise designed as specified in (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
§ 1926.652(c). (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
(ii) When any of the following conditions not require sheeting, but does experience
are present, the members specified in the Ta- some minor raveling of the trench face. The
392
trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width,
Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch shall have structural steel tube
diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves (3.5×3.5×0.1875) oversleeves, or structural
as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet oversleeves of manufacturer’s specification,
o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, extending the full, collapsed length.
plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D–1 Table) (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2
should be used behind the shores. (See Fig- inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in-
ures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) side diameter with a safe working capacity
(4) Example 4: A trench is dug in pre- of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compres-
viously disturbed Type B soil, with charac- sive load at maximum extension. Maximum
teristics of a Type C soil, and will require extension is to include full range of cylinder
sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 extensions as recommended by product man-
feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between ufacturer.
cylinders is desired for working space. From (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3-
Table D–1.3: Find horizontal wale with a sec- inch inside diameter with a safe work capac-
tion modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. ity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial com-
vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder pressive load at maximum extension. Max-
spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. imum extension is to include full range of
3×12 timber sheeting is required at close cylinder extensions as recommended by
spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical product manufacturer.
installation.)
(4) All spacing indicated is measured cen-
(5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C
ter to center.
soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal
cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a min-
for working space. From Table D–1.4: Find imum section modulus of 0.40 inch.
horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 (6) When vertical shores are used, there
and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 must be a minimum of three shores spaced
feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal equally, horizontally, in a group.
wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick
diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. hori- softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic
zontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. white birch (Finland form). Please note that
vertically. 3×12 timber sheeting is required plywood is not intended as a structural
at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for member, but only for prevention of local rav-
typical installation.) eling (sloughing of the trench face) between
(g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables shores.
D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3, and D–1.4. (8) See appendix C for timber specifica-
(1) For applications other than those listed tions.
in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of (9) Wales are calculated for simple span
manufacturer’s tabulated data. For trench conditions.
depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and
§ 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). limitations of the data.
393
394
EC30OC91.038</GPH>
395
EC30OC91.039</GPH>
396
EC30OC91.040</GPH>
397
EC30OC91.041</GPH>
398
EC30OC91.042</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. E
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—ALTERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING
399
EC30OC91.043</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART part P for excavations 20 feet or less in

1926—SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE depth. Protective systems for use in exca-
SYSTEMS vations more than 20 feet in depth must be
designed by a registered professional engi-
The following figures are a graphic sum- neer in accordance with § 1926.652 (b) and (c).
mary of the requirements contained in sub-
400
EC30OC91.044</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
401
EC30OC91.045</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
402
EC30OC91.046</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
403
EC30OC91.047</GPH>
Subpart Q—Concrete and forms and shores are removed, in order

Masonry Construction to support partially cured concrete and
construction loads.
(7) Shore means a supporting member
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours that resists a compressive force im-
and Safety Standards Act (Construction
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8
posed by a load.
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (8) Vertical slip forms means forms
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- which are jacked vertically during the
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR placement of concrete.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (9) Jacking operation means the task
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. of lifting a slab (or group of slabs)
SOURCE: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless vertically from one location to another
otherwise noted. (e.g., from the casting location to a
temporary (parked) location, or from a
§ 1926.700 Scope, application, and defi- temporary location to another tem-
nitions applicable to this subpart. porary location, or to its final location
(a) Scope and application. This sub- in the structure), during the construc-
part sets forth requirements to protect tion of a building/structure where the
all construction employees from the lift-slab process is being used.
hazards associated with concrete and [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55
masonry construction operations per- FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
formed in workplaces covered under 29
CFR part 1926. In addition to the re- § 1926.701 General requirements.
quirements in subpart Q, other rel- (a) Construction loads. No construc-
evant provisions in parts 1910 and 1926 tion loads shall be placed on a concrete
apply to concrete and masonry con- structure or portion of a concrete
struction operations. structure unless the employer deter-
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- mines, based on information received
part. In addition to the definitions set from a person who is qualified in struc-
forth in § 1926.32, the following defini- tural design, that the structure or por-
tions apply to this subpart. tion of the structure is capable of sup-
(1) Bull float means a tool used to porting the loads.
spread out and smooth concrete. (b) Reinforcing steel. All protruding
(2) Formwork means the total system reinforcing steel, onto and into which
of support for freshly placed or par- employees could fall, shall be guarded
tially cured concrete, including the to eliminate the hazard of impalement.
mold or sheeting (form) that is in con- (c) Post-tensioning operations. (1) No
tact with the concrete as well as all employee (except those essential to the
supporting members including shores, post-tensioning operations) shall be
reshores, hardware, braces, and related permitted to be behind the jack during
hardware. tensioning operations.
(3) Lift slab means a method of con- (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected
crete construction in which floor, and to limit employee access to the post-
roof slabs are cast on or at ground level tensioning area during tensioning oper-
and, using jacks, lifted into position. ations.
(4) Limited access zone means an area (d) Riding concrete buckets. No em-
alongside a masonry wall, which is ployee shall be permitted to ride con-
under construction, and which is clear- crete buckets.
ly demarcated to limit access by em- (e) Working under loads. (1) No em-
ployees. ployee shall be permitted to work
(5) Precast concrete means concrete under concrete buckets while buckets
members (such as walls, panels, slabs, are being elevated or lowered into posi-
columns, and beams) which have been tion.
formed, cast, and cured prior to final (2) To the extent practical, elevated
placement in a structure. concrete buckets shall be routed so
(6) Reshoring means the construction that no employee, or the fewest num-
operation in which shoring equipment ber of employees, are exposed to the
(also called reshores or reshoring hazards associated with falling con-
equipment) is placed, as the original crete buckets.
404
(f) Personal protective equipment. No (g) Tremies. Sections of tremies and

employee shall be permitted to apply a similar concrete conveyances shall be
cement, sand, and water mixture secured with wire rope (or equivalent
through a pneumatic hose unless the materials) in addition to the regular
employee is wearing protective head couplings or connections.
and face equipment. (h) Bull floats. Bull float handles,
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 used where they might contact ener-
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] gized electrical conductors, shall be
constructed of nonconductive material
§ 1926.702 Requirements for equip- or insulated with a nonconductive
ment and tools. sheath whose electrical and mechan-
(a) Bulk cement storage. (1) Bulk stor- ical characteristics provide the equiva-
age bins, containers, and silos shall be lent protection of a handle constructed
equipped with the following: of nonconductive material.
(i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (i) Masonry saws. (1) Masonry saws
(ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means shall be guarded with a semicircular
of starting the flow of material. enclosure over the blade.
(2) No employee shall be permitted to (2) A method for retaining blade frag-
enter storage facilities unless the ejec- ments shall be incorporated in the de-
tion system has been shut down, locked sign of the semicircular enclosure.
out, and tagged to indicate that the (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (1) No
ejection system is not to be operated. employee shall be permitted to perform
(b) Concrete mixers. Concrete mixers maintenance or repair activity on
with one cubic yard (.8 m3) or larger equipment (such as compressors, mix-
loading skips shall be equipped with ers, screens or pumps used for concrete
the following: and masonry construction activities)
(1) A mechanical device to clear the where the inadvertent operation of the
skip of materials; and equipment could occur and cause in-
(2) Guardrails installed on each side jury, unless all potentially hazardous
of the skip. energy sources have been locked out
(c) Power concrete trowels. Powered and tagged.
and rotating type concrete troweling
(2) Tags shall read Do Not Start or
machines that are manually guided
similar language to indicate that the
shall be equipped with a control switch
equipment is not to be operated.
that will automatically shut off the
power whenever the hands of the oper- § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-
ator are removed from the equipment place concrete.
handles.
(d) Concrete buggies. Concrete buggy (a) General requirements for formwork.
handles shall not extend beyond the (1) Formwork shall be designed, fab-
wheels on either side of the buggy. ricated, erected, supported, braced and
(e) Concrete pumping systems. (1) Con- maintained so that it will be capable of
crete pumping systems using discharge supporting without failure all vertical
pipes shall be provided with pipe sup- and lateral loads that may reasonably
ports designed for 100 percent overload. be anticipated to be applied to the
(2) Compressed air hoses used on con- formwork. Formwork which is de-
crete pumping system shall be provided signed, fabricated, erected, supported,
with positive fail-safe joint connectors braced and maintained in conformance
to prevent separation of sections when with the Appendix to this section will
pressurized. be deemed to meet the requirements of
(f) Concrete buckets. (1) Concrete this paragraph.
buckets equipped with hydraulic or (2) Drawings or plans, including all
pneumatic gates shall have positive revisions, for the jack layout,
safety latches or similar safety devices formwork (including shoring equip-
installed to prevent premature or acci- ment), working decks, and scaffolds,
dental dumping. shall be available at the jobsite.
(2) Concrete buckets shall be de- (b) Shoring and reshoring. (1) All shor-
signed to prevent concrete from hanging equipment (including equipment
ing up on top and the sides. used in reshoring operations) shall be
405
inspected prior to erection to deter- (c) Vertical slip forms. (1) The steel
mine that the equipment meets the re- rods or pipes on which jacks climb or
quirements specified in the formwork by which the forms are lifted shall be—
drawings. (i) Specifically designed for that pur-
(2) Shoring equipment found to be pose; and
damaged such that its strength is re- (ii) Adequately braced where not en-
duced to less than that required by cased in concrete.
§ 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for (2) Forms shall be designed to pre-
shoring. vent excessive distortion of the struc-
(3) Erected shoring equipment shall ture during the jacking operation.
be inspected immediately prior to, dur- (3) All vertical slip forms shall be
ing, and immediately after concrete provided with scaffolds or work plat-
placement. forms where employees are required to
(4) Shoring equipment that is found work or pass.
to be damaged or weakened after erec- (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall
tion, such that its strength is reduced be positioned in such a manner that
to less than that required by the loads do not exceed the rated ca-
§ 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately re- pacity of the jacks.
inforced. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices
(5) The sills for shoring shall be shall be provided with mechanical dogs
sound, rigid, and capable of carrying or other automatic holding devices to
the maximum intended load. support the slip forms whenever failure
(6) All base plates, shore heads, ex- of the power supply or lifting mecha-
tension devices, and adjustment screws nism occurs.
shall be in firm contact, and secured (6) The form structure shall be main-
when necessary, with the foundation tained within all design tolerances
and the form. specified for plumbness during the
jacking operation.
(7) Eccentric loads on shore heads
(7) The predetermined safe rate of lift
and similar members shall be prohib-
shall not be exceeded.
ited unless these members have been
(d) Reinforcing steel. (1) Reinforcing
designed for such loading.
steel for walls, piers, columns, and
(8) Whenever single post shores are
similar vertical structures shall be
used one on top of another (tiered), the
adequately supported to prevent over-
employer shall comply with the fol-
turning and to prevent collapse.
lowing specific requirements in addi-
(2) Employers shall take measures to
tion to the general requirements for
prevent unrolled wire mesh from re-
formwork:
coiling. Such measures may include,
(i) The design of the shoring shall be but are not limited to, securing each
prepared by a qualified designer and end of the roll or turning over the roll.
the erected shoring shall be inspected (e) Removal of formwork. (1) Forms
by an engineer qualified in structural and shores (except those used for slabs
design. on grade and slip forms) shall not be
(ii) The single post shores shall be removed until the employer determines
vertically aligned. that the concrete has gained sufficient
(iii) The single post shores shall be strength to support its weight and su-
spliced to prevent misalignment. perimposed loads. Such determination
(iv) The single post shores shall be shall be based on compliance with one
adequately braced in two mutually per- of the following:
pendicular directions at the splice (i) The plans and specifications stipu-
level. Each tier shall also be diagonally late conditions for removal of forms
braced in the same two directions. and shores, and such conditions have
(9) Adjustment of single post shores been followed, or
to raise formwork shall not be made (ii) The concrete has been properly
after the placement of concrete. tested with an appropriate ASTM
(10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the standard test method designed to indi-
original forms and shores are removed, cate the concrete compressive
whenever the concrete is required to strength, and the test results indicate
support loads in excess of its capacity. that the concrete has gained sufficient
406
strength to support its weight and su- § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab
perimposed loads. construction operations.
(2) Reshoring shall not be removed (a) Lift-slab operations shall be de-
until the concrete being supported has signed and planned by a registered pro-
attained adequate strength to support fessional engineer who has experience
its weight and all loads in place upon in lift-slab construction. Such plans
it. and designs shall be implemented by
the employer and shall include detailed
APPENDIX TO § 1926.703(a)(1) instructions and sketches indicating
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK
the prescribed method of erection.
These plans and designs shall also in-
(This Appendix is non-mandatory.) clude provisions for ensuring lateral
stability of the building/structure dur-
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory
guideline to assist employers in complying
ing construction.
with the formwork requirements in (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be
§ 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork which has been de- marked to indicate their rated capac-
signed, fabricated, erected, braced, supported ity as established by the manufacturer.
and maintained in accordance with Sections (c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be
6 and 7 of the American National Standard loaded beyond their rated capacity as
for Construction and Demolition Oper- established by the manufacturer.
ations—Concrete and Masonry Work, ANSI (d) Jacking equipment shall be capa-
A10.9–1983, shall be deemed to be in compli- ble of supporting at least two and one-
ance with the provision of § 1926.703(a)(1). half times the load being lifted during
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 jacking operations and the equipment
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] shall not be overloaded. For the pur-
pose of this provision, jacking equip-
§ 1926.704 Requirements for precast ment includes any load bearing compo-
concrete. nent which is used to carry out the lift-
(a) Precast concrete wall units, ing operation(s). Such equipment in-
structural framing, and tilt-up wall cludes, but is not limited, to the fol-
panels shall be adequately supported to lowing: threaded rods, lifting attach-
prevent overturning and to prevent col- ments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T-
lapse until permanent connections are caps, shearheads, columns, and foot-
completed. ings.
(b) Lifting inserts which are embed- (e) Jacks/lifting units shall be de-
ded or otherwise attached to tilt-up signed and installed so that they will
precast concrete members shall be ca- neither lift nor continue to lift when
pable of supporting at least two times they are loaded in excess of their rated
the maximum intended load applied or capacity.
transmitted to them. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a
(c) Lifting inserts which are embed- safety device installed which will cause
ded or otherwise attached to precast the jacks/lifting units to support the
concrete members, other than the tilt- load in any position in the event any
up members, shall be capable of sup- jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses
porting at least four times the max- its lifting ability.
imum intended load applied or trans- (g) Jacking operations shall be syn-
mitted to them. chronized in such a manner to ensure
even and uniform lifting of the slab.
(d) Lifting hardware shall be capable
During lifting, all points at which the
of supporting at least five times the
slab is supported shall be kept within 1/
maximum intended load applied or
2 inch of that needed to maintain the
transmitted to the lifting hardware.
slab in a level position.
(e) No employee shall be permitted (h) If leveling is automatically con-
under precast concrete members being trolled, a device shall be installed that
lifted or tilted into position except will stop the operation when the 1⁄2inch
those employees required for the erec- tolerance set forth in paragraph (g) of
tion of those members. this section is exceeded or where there
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54 is a malfunction in the jacking (lifting)
FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989] system.
407
(i) If leveling is maintained by man- (m) All welding on temporary and

ual controls, such controls shall be lo- permanent connections shall be per-
cated in a central location and at- formed by a certified welder, familiar
tended by a competent person while with the welding requirements speci-
lifting is in progress. In addition to fied in the plans and specifications for
meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), the lift-slab operation.
the competent person must be experi- (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting
enced in the lifting operation and with units to building columns shall not be
the lifting equipment being used. executed until the welds on the column
(j) The maximum number of manu-
shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to
ally controlled jacks/lifting units on
air temperature.
one slab shall be limited to a number
that will permit the operator to main- (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be posi-
tain the slab level within specified tol- tively secured to building columns so
erances of paragraph (g) of this section, that they do not become dislodged or
but in no case shall that number ex- dislocated.
ceed 14. (p) Equipment shall be designed and
(k)(1) No employee, except those es- installed so that the lifting rods cannot
sential to the jacking operation, shall slip out of position or the employer
be permitted in the building/structure shall institute other measures, such as
while any jacking operation is taking the use of locking or blocking devices,
place unless the building/structure has which will provide positive connection
been reinforced sufficiently to ensure between the lifting rods and attach-
its integrity during erection. The ments and will prevent components
phrase ‘‘reinforced sufficiently to en- from disengaging during lifting oper-
sure its integrity’’ used in this para- ations.
graph means that a registered profes-
sional engineer, independent of the en- APPENDIX TO § 1926.705—LIFT-SLAB
gineer who designed and planned the OPERATIONS
lifting operation, has determined from
the plans that if there is a loss of sup- (This Appendix is non-mandatory.)
port at any jack location, that loss will In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA requires
be confined to that location and the employees to be removed from the building/
structure as a whole will remain sta- structure during jacking operations unless
ble. an independent registered professional engi-
(2) Under no circumstances, shall any neer, other than the engineer who designed
employee who is not essential to the and planned the lifting operation, has deter-
jacking operation be permitted imme- mined that the building/structure has been
diately beneath a slab while it is being sufficiently reinforced to insure the integ-
lifted. rity of the building/structure. One method to
(3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) comply with this provision is for the em-
ployer to ensure that continuous bottom
of this section, a jacking operation be-
steel is provided in every slab and in both di-
gins when a slab or group of slabs is rections through every wall or column head
lifted and ends when such slabs are se- area. (Column head area means the distance
cured (with either temporary connec- between lines that are one and one half
tions or permanent connections). times the thickness of the slab or drop panel.
(4) Employers who comply with ap- These lines are located outside opposite
pendix A to § 1926.705 shall be consid- faces of the outer edges of the shearhead sec-
ered to be in compliance with the pro- tions—See Figure 1). The amount of bottom
visions of paragraphs (k)(1) through steel shall be established by assuming loss of
(k)(3) of this section. support at a given lifting jack and then de-
(l) When making temporary connec- termining the steel necessary to carry, by
tions to support slabs, wedges shall be catenary action over the span between sur-
rounding supports, the slab service dead load
secured by tack welding, or an equiva- plus any service dead and live loads likely to
lent method of securing the wedges to be acting on the slab during jacking. In addi-
prevent them from falling out of position, the surrounding supports must be capa-
tion. Lifting rods may not be released ble of resisting any additional load trans-
until the wedges at that column have ferred to them as a result of the loss of sup-
been secured. port at the lifting jack considered.
408
[55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
§ 1926.706 Requirements for masonry constructed plus four feet, and shall
construction. run the entire length of the wall.
(a) A limited access zone shall be es- (3) The limited access zone shall be
tablished whenever a masonry wall is established on the side of the wall
being constructed. The limited access which will be unscaffolded.
zone shall conform to the following. (4) The limited access zone shall be
(1) The limited access zone shall be restricted to entry by employees ac-
established prior to the start of con- tively engaged in constructing the
struction of the wall. wall. No other employees shall be per-
(2) The limited access zone shall be mitted to enter the zone.
equal to the height of the wall to be
409
EC30OC91.048</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. Q, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
(5) The limited access zone shall re- Insulating Concrete for Compressive
main in place until the wall is ade- Strength (ASTM C513–86).
quately supported to prevent over- • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength
of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM
turning and to prevent collapse unless
C495–86).
the height of wall is over eight feet, in • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing,
which case, the limited access zone and Testing of Concrete Compression Test
shall remain in place until the require- Specimens (ASTM C684–81).
ments of paragraph (b) of this section • Test Method for Compressive Strength of
have been met. Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in
(b) All masonry walls over eight feet Flexure (ASTM C116–68 (1980)).
in height shall be adequately braced to
prevent overturning and to prevent col- Subpart R—Steel Erection
lapse unless the wall is adequately sup-
ported so that it will not overturn or AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
collapse. The bracing shall remain in and Safety Standards Act (Construction
place until permanent supporting ele- Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 4, 6, and 8,
ments of the structure are in place. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART Order No. 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), No. 5–2002 (67
1926—REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF FR 65008), and 29 CFR part 1911.
PART 1926 SOURCE: 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, unless
otherwise noted.
(This Appendix is non-mandatory.)
The following non-mandatory references § 1926.750 Scope.
provide information which can be helpful in
understanding and complying with the re-
(a) This subpart sets forth require-
quirements contained in subpart Q. ments to protect employees from the
• Accident Prevention Manual for Indus- hazards associated with steel erection
trial Operations; Eighth Edition; National activities involved in the construction,
Safety Council. alteration, and/or repair of single and
• Building Code Requirements for Rein- multi-story buildings, bridges, and
forced Concrete (ACI 318–83). other structures where steel erection
• Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP–4).
occurs. The requirements of this sub-
• Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork (ACI 347–78). part apply to employers engaged in
• Safety Requirements for Concrete and steel erection unless otherwise speci-
Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9–1983). fied. This subpart does not cover elec-
• Standard Test Method for Compressive trical transmission towers, commu-
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens nication and broadcast towers, or
(ASTM C39–86). tanks.
• Standard Test Method for Making and
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Examples of struc-
(ASTM C31–85). tures where steel erection may occur include
• Standard Test Method for Penetration but are not limited to the following: Single
Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM and multi-story buildings; systems-engi-
C803–82). neered metal buildings; lift slab/tilt-up
• Standard Test Method for Compressive structures; energy exploration structures;
Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place energy production, transfer and storage
in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873–85). structures and facilities; auditoriums; malls;
• Standard Method for Developing Early amphitheaters; stadiums; power plants;
Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting mills; chemical process structures; bridges;
Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918–80). trestles; overpasses; underpasses; viaducts;
• Recommended Practice for Inspection aqueducts; aerospace facilities and struc-
and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and tures; radar and communication structures;
Bituminous Materials as Used in Construc- light towers; signage; billboards; score-
tion (ASTM E329–77). boards; conveyor systems; conveyor supports
• Method of Making and Curing Concrete and related framing; stairways; stair towers;
Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM fire escapes; draft curtains; fire containment
C192–88). structures; monorails; aerialways; catwalks;
• Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled curtain walls; window walls; store fronts; el-
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM evator fronts; entrances; skylights; metal
C42–87). roofs; industrial structures; hi-bay struc-
• Methods of Securing, Preparing and Test- tures; rail, marine and other transportation
ing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight structures; sound barriers; water process and
410
water containment structures; air and cable ings; hydraulic structures; fascias; sof-
supported structures; space frames; geodesic fit panels; penthouse enclosures; sky-
domes; canopies; racks and rack support lights; joint fillers; gaskets; sealants
structures and frames; platforms; walkways;
balconies; atriums; penthouses; car dumpers;
and seals; doors; windows; hardware;
stackers/reclaimers; cranes and craneways; detention/security equipment and
bins; hoppers; ovens; furnaces; stacks; doors, windows and hardware; con-
amusement park structures and rides; and veying systems; building specialties;
artistic and monumental structures. building equipment; machinery and
(b)(1) Steel erection activities in- plant equipment, furnishings and spe-
clude hoisting, laying out, placing, cial construction.
connecting, welding, burning, guying, (c) The duties of controlling contrac-
bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging tors under this subpart include, but are
structural steel, steel joists and metal not limited to, the duties specified in
buildings; installing metal decking, §§ 1926.752 (a) and (c), 1926.755(b)(2),
curtain walls, window walls, siding sys- 1926.759(b), and 1926.760(e).
tems, miscellaneous metals, orna-
§ 1926.751 Definitions.
mental iron and similar materials; and
moving point-to-point while per- Anchored bridging means that the
forming these activities. steel joist bridging is connected to a
(2) The following activities are cov- bridging terminus point.
ered by this subpart when they occur Bolted diagonal bridging means diago-
during and are a part of steel erection nal bridging that is bolted to a steel
activities: rigging, hoisting, laying out, joist or joists.
placing, connecting, guying, bracing, Bridging clip means a device that is
dismantling, burning, welding, bolting, attached to the steel joist to allow the
grinding, sealing, caulking, and all re- bolting of the bridging to the steel
lated activities for construction, alter- joist.
ation and/or repair of materials and as- Bridging terminus point means a wall,
semblies such as structural steel; fer- a beam, tandem joists (with all bridg-
rous metals and alloys; non-ferrous ing installed and a horizontal truss in
metals and alloys; glass; plastics and the plane of the top chord) or other ele-
synthetic composite materials; struc- ment at an end or intermediate
tural metal framing and related brac- point(s) of a line of bridging that pro-
ing and assemblies; anchoring devices; vides an anchor point for the steel joist
structural cabling; cable stays; perma- bridging.
nent and temporary bents and towers; Choker means a wire rope or syn-
falsework for temporary supports of thetic fiber rigging assembly that is
permanent steel members; stone and used to attach a load to a hoisting de-
other non-precast concrete architec- vice.
tural materials mounted on steel Cold forming means the process of
frames; safety systems for steel erec- using press brakes, rolls, or other
tion; steel and metal joists; metal methods to shape steel into desired
decking and raceway systems and ac- cross sections at room temperature.
cessories; metal roofing and acces- Column means a load-carrying
sories; metal siding; bridge flooring; vertical member that is part of the pri-
cold formed steel framing; elevator mary skeletal framing system. Col-
beams; grillage; shelf racks; multi-pur- umns do not include posts.
pose supports; crane rails and acces- Competent person (also defined in
sories; miscellaneous, architectural § 1926.32) means one who is capable of
and ornamental metals and metal identifying existing and predictable
work; ladders; railings; handrails; hazards in the surroundings or working
fences and gates; gratings; trench cov- conditions which are unsanitary, haz-
ers; floor plates; castings; sheet metal ardous, or dangerous to employees, and
fabrications; metal panels and panel who has authorization to take prompt
wall systems; louvers; column covers; corrective measures to eliminate them.
enclosures and pockets; stairs; per- Connector means an employee who,
forated metals; ornamental iron work, working with hoisting equipment, is
expansion control including bridge ex- placing and connecting structural
pansion joint assemblies; slide bear- members and/or components.
411
Constructibility means the ability to stallation of a double connection, sup-

erect structural steel members in ac- ports the first member while the sec-
cordance with subpart R without hav- ond member is connected.
ing to alter the over-all structural de- Erection bridging means the bolted di-
sign. agonal bridging that is required to be
Construction load (for joist erection) installed prior to releasing the hoisting
means any load other than the weight cables from the steel joists.
of the employee(s), the joists and the Fall restraint system means a fall pro-
bridging bundle. tection system that prevents the user
Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ) means from falling any distance. The system
an area in which certain work (for ex- is comprised of either a body belt or
ample, initial installation and place- body harness, along with an anchorage,
ment of metal decking) may take place connectors and other necessary equip-
without the use of guardrail systems, ment. The other components typically
personal fall arrest systems, fall re- include a lanyard, and may also in-
straint systems, or safety net systems clude a lifeline and other devices.
and where access to the zone is con- Final interior perimeter means the pe-
trolled. rimeter of a large permanent open
Controlled load lowering means low- space within a building such as an atri-
ering a load by means of a mechanical um or courtyard. This does not include
hoist drum device that allows a hoisted openings for stairways, elevator shafts,
load to be lowered with maximum con- etc.
trol using the gear train or hydraulic Girt (in systems-engineered metal build-
components of the hoist mechanism. ings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped mem-
Controlled load lowering requires the ber formed from sheet steel spanning
use of the hoist drive motor, rather between primary framing and sup-
than the load hoist brake, to lower the porting wall material.
load. Headache ball means a weighted hook
Controlling contractor means a prime that is used to attach loads to the hoist
contractor, general contractor, con- load line of the crane.
struction manager or any other legal Hoisting equipment means commer-
entity which has the overall responsi- cially manufactured lifting equipment
bility for the construction of the designed to lift and position a load of
project—its planning, quality and com- known weight to a location at some
pletion. known elevation and horizontal dis-
Critical lift means a lift that (1) ex- tance from the equipment’s center of
ceeds 75 percent of the rated capacity rotation. ‘‘Hoisting equipment’’ in-
of the crane or derrick, or (2) requires cludes but is not limited to cranes, der-
the use of more than one crane or derricks, tower cranes, barge-mounted
rick. derricks or cranes, gin poles and gan-
Decking hole means a gap or void try hoist systems. A ‘‘come-a-long’’ (a
more than 2 inches (5.1 cm) in its least mechanical device, usually consisting
dimension and less than 12 inches (30.5 of a chain or cable attached at each
cm) in its greatest dimension in a end, that is used to facilitate move-
floor, roof or other walking/working ment of materials through leverage) is
surface. Pre-engineered holes in cel- not considered ‘‘hoisting equipment.’’
lular decking (for wires, cables, etc.) Leading edge means the unprotected
are not included in this definition. side and edge of a floor, roof, or
Derrick floor means an elevated floor formwork for a floor or other walking/
of a building or structure that has been working surface (such as deck) which
designated to receive hoisted pieces of changes location as additional floor,
steel prior to final placement. roof, decking or formwork sections are
Double connection means an attach- placed, formed or constructed.
ment method where the connection Metal decking means a commercially
point is intended for two pieces of steel manufactured, structural grade, cold
which share common bolts on either rolled metal panel formed into a series
side of a central piece. of parallel ribs; for this subpart, this
Double connection seat means a struc- includes metal floor and roof decks,
tural attachment that, during the in- standing seam metal roofs, other metal
412
roof systems and other products such appears on the structural contract doc-
as bar gratings, checker plate, ex- uments.
panded metal panels, and similar prod- Purlin (in systems-engineered metal
ucts. After installation and proper fas- buildings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped
tening, these decking materials serve a member formed from sheet steel span-
combination of functions including, ning between primary framing and sup-
but not limited to: a structural ele- porting roof material.
ment designed in combination with the Qualified person (also defined in
structure to resist, distribute and § 1926.32) means one who, by possession
transfer loads, stiffen the structure and of a recognized degree, certificate, or
provide a diaphragm action; a walking/ professional standing, or who by exten-
working surface; a form for concrete sive knowledge, training, and experi-
slabs; a support for roofing systems; ence, has successfully demonstrated
and a finished floor or roof. the ability to solve or resolve problems
Multiple lift rigging means a rigging relating to the subject matter, the
assembly manufactured by wire rope work, or the project.
rigging suppliers that facilitates the Safety deck attachment means an ini-
attachment of up to five independent tial attachment that is used to secure
loads to the hoist rigging of a crane. an initially placed sheet of decking to
Opening means a gap or void 12 keep proper alignment and bearing
inches (30.5 cm) or more in its least di-
with structural support members.
mension in a floor, roof or other walk-
Shear connector means headed steel
ing/working surface. For the purposes
studs, steel bars, steel lugs, and similar
of this subpart, skylights and smoke
devices which are attached to a struc-
domes that do not meet the strength
tural member for the purpose of
requirements of § 1926.754(e)(3) shall be
achieving composite action with con-
regarded as openings.
crete.
Permanent floor means a structurally
completed floor at any level or ele- Steel erection means the construction,
vation (including slab on grade). alteration or repair of steel buildings,
Personal fall arrest system means a bridges and other structures, including
system used to arrest an employee in a the installation of metal decking and
fall from a working level. A personal all planking used during the process of
fall arrest system consists of an an- erection.
chorage, connectors, a body harness Steel joist means an open web, sec-
and may include a lanyard, decelera- ondary load-carrying member of 144
tion device, lifeline, or suitable com- feet (43.9 m) or less, designed by the
bination of these. The use of a body manufacturer, used for the support of
belt for fall arrest is prohibited. floors and roofs. This does not include
Positioning device system means a body structural steel trusses or cold-formed
belt or body harness rigged to allow an joists.
employee to be supported on an ele- Steel joist girder means an open web,
vated, vertical surface, such as a wall primary load-carrying member, de-
or column and work with both hands signed by the manufacturer, used for
free while leaning. the support of floors and roofs. This
Post means a structural member with does not include structural steel truss-
a longitudinal axis that is essentially es.
vertical, that: (1) weighs 300 pounds or Steel truss means an open web mem-
less and is axially loaded (a load press- ber designed of structural steel compo-
es down on the top end), or (2) is not nents by the project structural engi-
axially loaded, but is laterally re- neer of record. For the purposes of this
strained by the above member. Posts subpart, a steel truss is considered
typically support stair landings, wall equivalent to a solid web structural
framing, mezzanines and other sub- member.
structures. Structural steel means a steel member,
Project structural engineer of record or a member made of a substitute ma-
means the registered, licensed profes- terial (such as, but not limited to, fi-
sional responsible for the design of berglass, aluminum or composite mem-
structural steel framing and whose seal bers). These members include, but are
413
not limited to, steel joists, joist gird- priate ASTM standard test method of
ers, purlins, columns, beams, trusses, field-cured samples, either 75 percent
splices, seats, metal decking, girts, and of the intended minimum compressive
all bridging, and cold formed metal design strength or sufficient strength
framing which is integrated with the to support the loads imposed during
structural steel framing of a building. steel erection.
Systems-engineered metal building (c) Site layout. The controlling con-
means a metal, field-assembled build- tractor shall ensure that the following
ing system consisting of framing, roof is provided and maintained:
and wall coverings. Typically, many of (1) Adequate access roads into and
these components are cold-formed through the site for the safe delivery
shapes. These individual parts are fab- and movement of derricks, cranes,
ricated in one or more manufacturing trucks, other necessary equipment, and
facilities and shipped to the job site for the material to be erected and means
assembly into the final structure. The and methods for pedestrian and vehic-
engineering design of the system is ular control. Exception: this require-
normally the responsibility of the sys- ment does not apply to roads outside of
tems-engineered metal building manu- the construction site.
facturer. (2) A firm, properly graded, drained
Tank means a container for holding area, readily accessible to the work
gases, liquids or solids. with adequate space for the safe stor-
Unprotected sides and edges means any age of materials and the safe operation
side or edge (except at entrances to of the erector’s equipment.
points of access) of a walking/working (d) Pre-planning of overhead hoisting
surface, for example a, floor, roof, ramp operations. All hoisting operations in
or runway, where there is no wall or steel erection shall be pre-planned to
guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 ensure that the requirements of
m) high. § 1926.753(d) are met.
§ 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific (e) Site-specific erection plan. Where
erection plan and construction se- employers elect, due to conditions spe-
quence. cific to the site, to develop alternate
means and methods that provide em-
(a) Approval to begin steel erection. Be-
ployee protection in accordance with
fore authorizing the commencement of
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) or
steel erection, the controlling con-
§ 1926.757(e)(4), a site-specific erection
tractor shall ensure that the steel erec-
plan shall be developed by a qualified
tor is provided with the following writ-
person and be available at the work
ten notifications:
site. Guidelines for establishing a site-
(1) The concrete in the footings, piers
specific erection plan are contained in
and walls and the mortar in the ma-
Appendix A to this subpart.
sonry piers and walls has attained, on
the basis of an appropriate ASTM § 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging.
standard test method of field-cured
samples, either 75 percent of the in- (a) All the provisions of § 1926.550
tended minimum compressive design apply to hoisting and rigging with the
strength or sufficient strength to sup- exception of § 1926.550(g)(2).
port the loads imposed during steel (b) In addition, paragraphs (c)
erection. through (e) of this section apply re-
(2) Any repairs, replacements and garding the hazards associated with
modifications to the anchor bolts were hoisting and rigging.
conducted in accordance with (c) General. (1) Pre-shift visual in-
§ 1926.755(b). spection of cranes.
(b) Commencement of steel erection. A (i) Cranes being used in steel erection
steel erection contractor shall not activities shall be visually inspected
erect steel unless it has received writ- prior to each shift by a competent per-
ten notification that the concrete in son; the inspection shall include obser-
the footings, piers and walls or the vation for deficiencies during oper-
mortar in the masonry piers and walls ation. At a minimum this inspection
has attained, on the basis of an appro- shall include the following:
414
(A) All control mechanisms for mal- sonnel except as provided in paragraph
adjustments; (c)(4) of this section.
(B) Control and drive mechanism for (4) Cranes or derricks may be used to
excessive wear of components and con- hoist employees on a personnel plat-
tamination by lubricants, water or form when work under this subpart is
other foreign matter; being conducted, provided that all pro-
(C) Safety devices, including but not visions of § 1926.550 (except for
limited to boom angle indicators, boom § 1926.550(g)(2)) are met.
stops, boom kick out devices, anti-two (5) Safety latches on hooks shall not
block devices, and load moment indica- be deactivated or made inoperable ex-
tors where required; cept:
(D) Air, hydraulic, and other pressur- (i) When a qualified rigger has deter-
ized lines for deterioration or leakage, mined that the hoisting and placing of
particularly those which flex in normal purlins and single joists can be per-
operation; formed more safely by doing so; or
(E) Hooks and latches for deforma- (ii) When equivalent protection is
tion, chemical damage, cracks, or provided in a site-specific erection
wear; plan.
(F) Wire rope reeving for compliance (d) Working under loads. (1) Routes for
with hoisting equipment manufactur- suspended loads shall be pre-planned to
er’s specifications; ensure that no employee is required to
(G) Electrical apparatus for malfunc- work directly below a suspended load
tioning, signs of excessive deteriora- except for:
tion, dirt, or moisture accumulation; (i) Employees engaged in the initial
(H) Hydraulic system for proper fluid connection of the steel; or
level; (ii) Employees necessary for the
(I) Tires for proper inflation and con- hooking or unhooking of the load.
dition; (2) When working under suspended
(J) Ground conditions around the loads, the following criteria shall be
hoisting equipment for proper support, met:
including ground settling under and
(i) Materials being hoisted shall be
around outriggers, ground water accu-
rigged to prevent unintentional dis-
mulation, or similar conditions;
placement;
(K) The hoisting equipment for level
(ii) Hooks with self-closing safety
position; and
latches or their equivalent shall be
(L) The hoisting equipment for level
used to prevent components from slip-
position after each move and setup.
ping out of the hook; and
(ii) If any deficiency is identified, an
immediate determination shall be (iii) All loads shall be rigged by a
made by the competent person as to qualified rigger
whether the deficiency constitutes a (e) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (1) A
hazard. multiple lift shall only be performed if
(iii) If the deficiency is determined to the following criteria are met:
constitute a hazard, the hoisting equip- (i) A multiple lift rigging assembly is
ment shall be removed from service used;
until the deficiency has been corrected. (ii) A maximum of five members are
(iv) The operator shall be responsible hoisted per lift;
for those operations under the opera- (iii) Only beams and similar struc-
tor’s direct control. Whenever there is tural members are lifted; and
any doubt as to safety, the operator (iv) All employees engaged in the
shall have the authority to stop and multiple lift have been trained in these
refuse to handle loads until safety has procedures in accordance with
been assured. § 1926.761(c)(1).
(2) A qualified rigger (a rigger who is (v) No crane is permitted to be used
also a qualified person) shall inspect for a multiple lift where such use is
the rigging prior to each shift in ac- contrary to the manufacturer’s speci-
cordance with § 1926.251. fications and limitations.
(3) The headache ball, hook or load (2) Components of the multiple lift
shall not be used to transport per- rigging assembly shall be specifically
415
designed and assembled with a max- or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, de-
imum capacity for total assembly and formed anchors or threaded studs shall
for each individual attachment point. not be attached to the top flanges of
This capacity, certified by the manu- beams, joists or beam attachments so
facturer or a qualified rigger, shall be that they project vertically from or
based on the manufacturer’s specifica- horizontally across the top flange of
tions with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all the member until after the metal deck-
components. ing, or other walking/working surface,
(3) The total load shall not exceed: has been installed.
(i) The rated capacity of the hoisting (2) Installation of shear connectors on
equipment specified in the hoisting composite floors, roofs and bridge decks.
equipment load charts; When shear connectors are used in con-
(ii) The rigging capacity specified in struction of composite floors, roofs and
the rigging rating chart. bridge decks, employees shall lay out
(4) The multiple lift rigging assembly and install the shear connectors after
shall be rigged with members: the metal decking has been installed,
(i) Attached at their center of grav- using the metal decking as a working
ity and maintained reasonably level; platform. Shear connectors shall not be
(ii) Rigged from top down; and installed from within a controlled
(iii) Rigged at least 7 feet (2.1 m) decking zone (CDZ), as specified in
apart. § 1926.760(c)(8).
(5) The members on the multiple lift
(d) Plumbing-up. (1) When deemed
rigging assembly shall be set from the
necessary by a competent person,
bottom up.
plumbing-up equipment shall be in-
(6) Controlled load lowering shall be
stalled in conjunction with the steel
used whenever the load is over the con-
erection process to ensure the stability
nectors.
of the structure.
§ 1926.754 Structural steel assembly. (2) When used, plumbing-up equip-
ment shall be in place and properly in-
(a) Structural stability shall be
stalled before the structure is loaded
maintained at all times during the
with construction material such as
erection process.
loads of joists, bundles of decking or
(b) The following additional require-
bundles of bridging.
ments shall apply for multi-story
(3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be
structures:
removed only with the approval of a
(1) The permanent floors shall be in-
competent person.
stalled as the erection of structural
members progresses, and there shall be (e) Metal decking—(1) Hoisting, landing
not more than eight stories between and placing of metal decking bundles. (i)
the erection floor and the upper-most Bundle packaging and strapping shall
permanent floor, except where the not be used for hoisting unless specifi-
structural integrity is maintained as a cally designed for that purpose.
result of the design. (ii) If loose items such as dunnage,
(2) At no time shall there be more flashing, or other materials are placed
than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m), on the top of metal decking bundles to
whichever is less, of unfinished bolting be hoisted, such items shall be secured
or welding above the foundation or up- to the bundles.
permost permanently secured floor, ex- (iii) Bundles of metal decking on
cept where the structural integrity is joists shall be landed in accordance
maintained as a result of the design. with § 1926.757(e)(4).
(3) A fully planked or decked floor or (iv) Metal decking bundles shall be
nets shall be maintained within two landed on framing members so that
stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is enough support is provided to allow the
less, directly under any erection work bundles to be unbanded without dis-
being performed. lodging the bundles from the supports.
(c) Walking/working surfaces—shear (v) At the end of the shift or when en-
connectors and other similar devices—(1) vironmental or jobsite conditions re-
Tripping hazards. Shear connectors quire, metal decking shall be secured
(such as headed steel studs, steel bars against displacement.
416
(2) Roof and floor holes and openings. (ii) During initial placement, metal
Metal decking at roof and floor holes decking panels shall be placed to en-
and openings shall be installed as fol- sure full support by structural mem-
lows: bers.
(i) Framed metal deck openings shall (6) Derrick floors. (i) A derrick floor
have structural members turned down shall be fully decked and/or planked
to allow continuous deck installation and the steel member connections com-
except where not allowed by structural pleted to support the intended floor
design constraints or constructibility. loading.
(ii) Roof and floor holes and openings (ii) Temporary loads placed on a der-
shall be decked over. Where large size, rick floor shall be distributed over the
configuration or other structural de- underlying support members so as to
sign does not allow openings to be prevent local overloading of the deck
decked over (such as elevator shafts, material.
stair wells, etc.) employees shall be [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 71
protected in accordance with FR 2885, Jan. 18, 2006; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3,
§ 1926.760(a)(1). 2006]
(iii) Metal decking holes and open-
ings shall not be cut until immediately § 1926.755 Column anchorage.
prior to being permanently filled with (a) General requirements for erection
the equipment or structure needed or stability. (1) All columns shall be an-
intended to fulfill its specific use and chored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods
which meets the strength requirements (anchor bolts).
of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or (2) Each column anchor rod (anchor
shall be immediately covered. bolt) assembly, including the column-
(3) Covering roof and floor openings. (i) to-base plate weld and the column
Covers for roof and floor openings shall foundation, shall be designed to resist
be capable of supporting, without fail- a minimum eccentric gravity load of
ure, twice the weight of the employees, 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches
equipment and materials that may be (.46m) from the extreme outer face of
imposed on the cover at any one time. the column in each direction at the top
(ii) All covers shall be secured when of the column shaft.
installed to prevent accidental dis- (3) Columns shall be set on level fin-
placement by the wind, equipment or ished floors, pre-grouted leveling
employees. plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs
(iii) All covers shall be painted with which are adequate to transfer the con-
high-visibility paint or shall be marked struction loads.
with the word ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to (4) All columns shall be evaluated by
provide warning of the hazard. a competent person to determine
(iv) Smoke dome or skylight fixtures whether guying or bracing is needed; if
that have been installed, are not con- guying or bracing is needed, it shall be
sidered covers for the purpose of this installed.
section unless they meet the strength (b) Repair, replacement or field modi-
requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of fication of anchor rods (anchor bolts). (1)
this section. Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be
(4) Decking gaps around columns. Wire repaired, replaced or field-modified
mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, without the approval of the project
shall be installed around columns structural engineer of record.
where planks or metal decking do not (2) Prior to the erection of a column,
fit tightly. The materials used must be the controlling contractor shall pro-
of sufficient strength to provide fall vide written notification to the steel
protection for personnel and prevent erector if there has been any repair, re-
objects from falling through. placement or modification of the an-
(5) Installation of metal decking. (i) Ex- chor rods (anchor bolts) of that col-
cept as provided in § 1926.760(c), metal umn.
decking shall be laid tightly and imme-
diately secured upon placement to pre- § 1926.756 Beams and columns.
vent accidental movement or displace- (a) General. (1) During the final plac-
ment. ing of solid web structural members,
417
the load shall not be released from the constructibility does not allow (see Ap-
hoisting line until the members are se- pendix F to this subpart);
cured with at least two bolts per con- (2) The perimeter columns have holes
nection, of the same size and strength or other devices in or attached to pe-
as shown in the erection drawings, rimeter columns at 42–45 inches (107–114
drawn up wrench-tight or the equiva- cm) above the finished floor and the
lent as specified by the project struc- midpoint between the finished floor
tural engineer of record, except as and the top cable to permit installa-
specified in paragraph (b) of this section of perimeter safety cables required
tion. by § 1926.760(a)(2), except where
(2) A competent person shall deter- constructibility does not allow. (See
mine if more than two bolts are nec- Appendix F to this subpart).
essary to ensure the stability of canti-
levered members; if additional bolts § 1926.757 Open web steel joists.
are needed, they shall be installed. (a) General. (1) Except as provided in
(b) Diagonal bracing. Solid web struc- paragraph (a)(2) of this section, where
tural members used as diagonal brac- steel joists are used and columns are
ing shall be secured by at least one bolt not framed in at least two directions
per connection drawn up wrench-tight with solid web structural steel mem-
or the equivalent as specified by the bers, a steel joist shall be field-bolted
project structural engineer of record. at the column to provide lateral sta-
(c) (1) Double connections at columns bility to the column during erection.
and/or at beam webs over a column. When For the installation of this joist:
two structural members on opposite (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be
sides of a column web, or a beam web provided on each column for steel
over a column, are connected sharing joists. The plate shall be a minimum of
common connection holes, at least one 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm)
bolt with its wrench-tight nut shall re- and shall extend at least 3 inches (76
main connected to the first member mm) below the bottom chord of the
unless a shop-attached or field-at- joist with a 13⁄16 inch (21 mm) hole to
tached seat or equivalent connection provide an attachment point for guying
device is supplied with the member to or plumbing cables.
secure the first member and prevent (ii) The bottom chords of steel joists
the column from being displaced (See at columns shall be stabilized to pre-
Appendix H to this subpart for exam- vent rotation during erection.
ples of equivalent connection devices). (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
(2) If a seat or equivalent device is leased until the seat at each end of the
used, the seat (or device) shall be de- steel joist is field-bolted, and each end
signed to support the load during the of the bottom chord is restrained by
double connection process. It shall be the column stabilizer plate.
adequately bolted or welded to both a (2) Where constructibility does not
supporting member and the first mem- allow a steel joist to be installed at the
ber before the nuts on the shared bolts column:
are removed to make the double con- (i) an alternate means of stabilizing
nection. joists shall be installed on both sides
(d) Column splices. Each column splice near the column and shall:
shall be designed to resist a minimum (A) provide stability equivalent to
eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds paragraph (a)(1) of this section;
(136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from (B) be designed by a qualified person;
the extreme outer face of the column (C) be shop installed; and
in each direction at the top of the col- (D) be included in the erection draw-
umn shaft. ings.
(e) Perimeter columns. Perimeter col- (ii) hoisting cables shall not be re-
umns shall not be erected unless: leased until the seat at each end of the
(1) The perimeter columns extend a steel joist is field-bolted and the joist
minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the is stabilized.
finished floor to permit installation of (3) Where steel joists at or near col-
perimeter safety cables prior to erec- umns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the
tion of the next tier, except where joist shall be designed with sufficient
418
strength to allow one employee to re- (3) Except as provided in paragraph

lease the hoisting cable without the (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist
need for erection bridging. shall be attached to the support struc-
(4) Where steel joists at or near col- ture, at least at one end on both sides
umns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), of the seat, immediately upon place-
the joists shall be set in tandem with ment in the final erection position and
all bridging installed unless an alter- before additional joists are placed.
native method of erection, which pro- (4) Panels that have been pre-assem-
vides equivalent stability to the steel bled from steel joists with bridging
joist, is designed by a qualified person shall be attached to the structure at
and is included in the site-specific erec- each corner before the hoisting cables
tion plan. are released.
(5) A steel joist or steel joist girder (c) Erection of steel joists. (1) Both
shall not be placed on any support sides of the seat of one end of each
structure unless such structure is sta- steel joist that requires bridging under
bilized. Tables A and B shall be attached to the
(6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a support structure before hoisting ca-
structure, they shall be secured to pre- bles are released.
vent unintentional displacement prior (2) For joists over 60 feet, both ends
to installation. of the joist shall be attached as speci-
fied in paragraph (b) of this section and
(7) No modification that affects the
the provisions of paragraph (d) of this
strength of a steel joist or steel joist
section met before the hoisting cables
girder shall be made without the ap-
are released.
proval of the project structural engi-
(3) On steel joists that do not require
neer of record.
erection bridging under Tables A and
(8) Field-bolted joists. (i) Except for B, only one employee shall be allowed
steel joists that have been pre-assem- on the joist until all bridging is in-
bled into panels, connections of indi- stalled and anchored.
vidual steel joists to steel structures in
bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT
fabricated to allow for field bolting SPAN JOISTS
during erection.
Joist Span
(ii) These connections shall be field-
bolted unless constructibility does not 8L1 ................................................................. NM
allow. 10K1 .............................................................. NM
12K1 .............................................................. 23–0
(9) Steel joists and steel joist girders 12K3 .............................................................. NM
shall not be used as anchorage points 12K5 .............................................................. NM
for a fall arrest system unless written 14K1 .............................................................. 27–0
14K3 .............................................................. NM
approval to do so is obtained from a 14K4 .............................................................. NM
qualified person. 14K6 .............................................................. NM
16K2 .............................................................. 29–0
(10) A bridging terminus point shall 16K3 .............................................................. 30–0
be established before bridging is in- 16K4 .............................................................. 32–0
stalled. (See Appendix C to this sub- 16K5 .............................................................. 32–0
16K6 .............................................................. NM
part.) 16K7 .............................................................. NM
(b) Attachment of steel joists and steel 16K9 .............................................................. NM
joist girders. (1) Each end of ‘‘K’’ series 18K3 .............................................................. 31–0
18K4 .............................................................. 32–0
steel joists shall be attached to the 18K5 .............................................................. 33–0
support structure with a minimum of 18K6 .............................................................. 35–0
two 1⁄8-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch 18K7 .............................................................. NM
18K9 .............................................................. NM
(25 mm) long or with two 1⁄2-inch (13 18K10 ............................................................ NM
mm) bolts, or the equivalent. 20K3 .............................................................. 32–0
(2) Each end of ‘‘LH’’ and ‘‘DLH’’ se- 20K4 .............................................................. 34–0
20K5 .............................................................. 34–0
ries steel joists and steel joist girders 20K6 .............................................................. 36–0
shall be attached to the support struc- 20K7 .............................................................. 39–0
ture with a minimum of two 1⁄4-inch (6 20K9 .............................................................. 39–0
20K10 ............................................................ NM
mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long, 22K4 .............................................................. 34–0
or with two 3⁄4-inch (19 mm) bolts, or 22K5 .............................................................. 35–0
the equivalent. 22K6 .............................................................. 36–0
419
TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT
SPAN JOISTS—Continued SPAN JOISTS—Continued
Joist Span Joist Span
22K7 .............................................................. 40–0 30KCS5 ......................................................... 54–0

22K9 .............................................................. 40–0
NM=diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists under
22K10 ............................................................ 40–0 40 feet.
22K11 ............................................................ 40–0
24K4 .............................................................. 36–0
24K5 .............................................................. 38–0 TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN
24K6 .............................................................. 39–0 JOISTS
24K7 .............................................................. 43–0
24K8 .............................................................. 43–0 Joist Span
24K9 .............................................................. 44–0
24K10 ............................................................ NM 18LH02 .................................. 33–0.
24K12 ............................................................ NM 18LH03 .................................. NM.
26K5 .............................................................. 38–0 18LH04 .................................. NM.
26K6 .............................................................. 39–0 18LH05 .................................. NM.
26K7 .............................................................. 43–0 18LH06 .................................. NM.
18LH07 .................................. NM.
26K8 .............................................................. 44–0
18LH08 .................................. NM.
26K9 .............................................................. 45–0
18LH09 .................................. NM.
26K10 ............................................................ 49–0
20LH02 .................................. 33–0.
26K12 ............................................................ NM
20LH03 .................................. 38–0.
28K6 .............................................................. 40–0
20LH04 .................................. NM.
28K7 .............................................................. 43–0 20LH05 .................................. NM.
28K8 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH06 .................................. NM.
28K9 .............................................................. 45–0 20LH07 .................................. NM.
28K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH08 .................................. NM.
28K12 ............................................................ 53–0 20LH09 .................................. NM.
30K7 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH10 .................................. NM.
30K8 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH03 .................................. 35–0.
30K9 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH04 .................................. 39–0.
30K10 ............................................................ 50–0 24LH05 .................................. 40–0.
30K11 ............................................................ 52–0 24LH06 .................................. 45–0.
30K12 ............................................................ 54–0 24LH07 .................................. NM.
10KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH08 .................................. NM.
10KCS2 ......................................................... NM 24LH09 .................................. NM.
10KCS3 ......................................................... NM 24LH10 .................................. NM.
12KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH11 .................................. NM.
12KCS2 ......................................................... NM 28LH05 .................................. 42–0.
12KCS3 ......................................................... NM 28LH06 .................................. 42–0.
14KCS1 ......................................................... NM 28LH07 .................................. NM.
14KCS2 ......................................................... NM 28LH08 .................................. NM.
14KCS3 ......................................................... NM 28LH09 .................................. NM.
16KCS2 ......................................................... NM 28LH10 .................................. NM.
16KCS3 ......................................................... NM 28LH11 .................................. NM.
16KCS4 ......................................................... NM 28LH12 .................................. NM.
16KCS5 ......................................................... NM 28LH13 .................................. NM.
18KCS2 ......................................................... 35–0 32LH06 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0.
18KCS3 ......................................................... NM 32LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0.
18KCS4 ......................................................... NM 32LH08 .................................. 55–0 through 60–0.
18KCS5 ......................................................... NM 32LH09 .................................. NM through 60–0.
20KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0 32LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0.
20KCS3 ......................................................... 39–0 32LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0.
22KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0 32LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0.
22KCS3 ......................................................... 40–0 32LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0.
22KCS4 ......................................................... NM 36LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0.
22KCS5 ......................................................... NM 36LH08 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0.
24KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0 36LH09 .................................. 57–0 through 60–0.
24KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0 36LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0.
26KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0 36LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0.
26KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0 36LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0.
26KCS5 ......................................................... NM
28KCS2 ......................................................... 40–0 NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists
under 40 feet.
28KCS3 ......................................................... 45–0
28KCS4 ......................................................... 53–0 (4) Employees shall not be allowed on
28KCS5 ......................................................... 53–0
30KC53 .......................................................... 45–0 steel joists where the span of the steel
30KCS4 ......................................................... 54–0 joist is equal to or greater than the
420
span shown in Tables A and B except in port(s). This bridging shall be installed
accordance with § 1926.757(d). and anchored before the hoisting
(5) When permanent bridging ter- cable(s) is released.
minus points cannot be used during (6) When bolted diagonal erection
erection, additional temporary bridg- bridging is required by this section, the
ing terminus points are required to following shall apply:
provide stability. (See appendix C of (i) The bridging shall be indicated on
this subpart.) the erection drawing;
(d) Erection bridging. (1) Where the (ii) The erection drawing shall be the
span of the steel joist is equal to or exclusive indicator of the proper place-
greater than the span shown in Tables ment of this bridging;
A and B, the following shall apply: (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or
(i) A row of bolted diagonal erection functional equivalents, shall be used
bridging shall be installed near the where the bridging bolts to the steel
midspan of the steel joist; joists;
(ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (iv) When two pieces of bridging are
leased until this bolted diagonal erec- attached to the steel joist by a com-
tion bridging is installed and anchored; mon bolt, the nut that secures the first
and piece of bridging shall not be removed
(iii) No more than one employee shall from the bolt for the attachment of the
be allowed on these spans until all second; and
other bridging is installed and an-
(v) Bridging attachments shall not
chored.
protrude above the top chord of the
(2) Where the span of the steel joist is
steel joist.
over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet
(e) Landing and placing loads. (1) Dur-
(30.5 m), the following shall apply:
ing the construction period, the em-
(i) All rows of bridging shall be
ployer placing a load on steel joists
bolted diagonal bridging;
shall ensure that the load is distrib-
(ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erec-
uted so as not to exceed the carrying
tion bridging shall be installed near
capacity of any steel joist.
the third points of the steel joist;
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this
leased until this bolted diagonal erec- section, no construction loads are al-
tion bridging is installed and anchored; lowed on the steel joists until all bridg-
and ing is installed and anchored and all
(iv) No more than two employees joist-bearing ends are attached.
shall be allowed on these spans until (3) The weight of a bundle of joist
all other bridging is installed and an- bridging shall not exceed a total of
chored. 1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist
(3) Where the span of the steel joist is bridging shall be placed on a minimum
over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet of three steel joists that are secured at
(43.9 m), the following shall apply: one end. The edge of the bridging bun-
(i) All rows of bridging shall be dle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30
bolted diagonal bridging; m) of the secured end.
(ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (4) No bundle of decking may be
leased until all bridging is installed placed on steel joists until all bridging
and anchored; and has been installed and anchored and all
(iii) No more than two employees joist bearing ends attached, unless all
shall be allowed on these spans until of the following conditions are met:
all bridging is installed and anchored. (i) The employer has first determined
(4) For steel members spanning over from a qualified person and docu-
144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods mented in a site-specific erection plan
used shall be in accordance with that the structure or portion of the
§ 1926.756. structure is capable of supporting the
(5) Where any steel joist specified in load;
paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and (ii) The bundle of decking is placed
(d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord on a minimum of three steel joists;
bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal (iii) The joists supporting the bundle
bridging shall be provided near the sup- of decking are attached at both ends;
421
(iv) At least one row of bridging is in- (h) Purlins may only be used as a
stalled and anchored; walking/working surface when install-
(v) The total weight of the bundle of ing safety systems, after all permanent
decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds bridging has been installed and fall
(1816 kg); and protection is provided.
(vi) Placement of the bundle of deck- (i) Construction loads may be placed
ing shall be in accordance with para- only within a zone that is within 8 feet
graph (e)(5) of this section. (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary
(5) The edge of the construction load support member.
shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of
§ 1926.759 Falling object protection.
the bearing surface of the joist end.
(a) Securing loose items aloft. All mate-
§ 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal rials, equipment, and tools, which are
buildings. not in use while aloft, shall be secured
(a) All of the requirements of this against accidental displacement.
subpart apply to the erection of sys- (b) Protection from falling objects other
tems-engineered metal buildings ex- than materials being hoisted. The con-
cept §§ 1926.755 (column anchorage) and trolling contractor shall bar other con-
1926.757 (open web steel joists). struction processes below steel erec-
(b) Each structural column shall be tion unless overhead protection for the
anchored by a minimum of four anchor employees below is provided.
rods (anchor bolts). § 1926.760 Fall protection.
(c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent
of their bolts or the number of bolts (a) General requirements. (1) Except as
specified by the manufacturer (which- provided by paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-
ever is greater) installed and tightened tion, each employee engaged in a steel
on both sides of the web adjacent to erection activity who is on a walking/
each flange before the hoisting equip- working surface with an unprotected
ment is released. side or edge more than 15 feet (4.6 m)
above a lower level shall be protected
(d) Construction loads shall not be
from fall hazards by guardrail systems,
placed on any structural steel frame-
safety net systems, personal fall arrest
work unless such framework is safely
systems, positioning device systems or
bolted, welded or otherwise adequately
fall restraint systems.
secured.
(2) Perimeter safety cables. On multi-
(e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame story structures, perimeter safety ca-
connections, when girts or eave struts bles shall be installed at the final inte-
share common connection holes, at rior and exterior perimeters of the
least one bolt with its wrench-tight floors as soon as the metal decking has
nut shall remain connected to the first been installed.
member unless a manufacturer-sup- (3) Connectors and employees work-
plied, field-attached seat or similar ing in controlled decking zones shall be
connection device is present to secure protected from fall hazards as provided
the first member so that the girt or in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this sec-
eave strut is always secured against tion, respectively.
displacement. (b) Connectors. Each connector shall:
(f) Both ends of all steel joists or (1) Be protected in accordance with
cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted paragraph (a)(1) of this section from
and/or welded to the support structure fall hazards of more than two stories or
before: 30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level,
(1) Releasing the hoisting cables; whichever is less;
(2) Allowing an employee on the (2) Have completed connector train-
joists; or ing in accordance with § 1926.761; and
(3) Allowing any construction loads (3) Be provided, at heights over 15
on the joists. and up to 30 feet above a lower level,
(g) Purlins and girts shall not be used with a personal fall arrest system, po-
as an anchorage point for a fall arrest sitioning device system or fall re-
system unless written approval is ob- straint system and wear the equipment
tained from a qualified person. necessary to be able to be tied off; or be
422
provided with other means of protec- shall remain in the area where steel
tion from fall hazards in accordance erection activity has been completed,
with paragraph (a)(1) of this section. to be used by other trades, only if the
(c) Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). A controlling contractor or its author-
controlled decking zone may be estab- ized representative:
lished in that area of the structure (1) Has directed the steel erector to
over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower leave the fall protection in place; and
level where metal decking is initially (2) Has inspected and accepted con-
being installed and forms the leading trol and responsibility of the fall pro-
edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the tection prior to authorizing persons
following shall apply: other than steel erectors to work in
(1) Each employee working at the the area.
leading edge in a CDZ shall be pro-
tected from fall hazards of more than § 1926.761 Training.
two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever
is less. The following provisions supplement
(2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding
to only those employees engaged in the hazards addressed in this subpart.
leading edge work. (a) Training personnel. Training re-
(3) The boundaries of a CDZ shall be quired by this section shall be provided
designated and clearly marked. The by a qualified person(s).
CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 (b) Fall hazard training. The employer
m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from shall provide a training program for all
any leading edge. The CDZ shall be employees exposed to fall hazards. The
marked by the use of control lines or program shall include training and in-
the equivalent. Examples of acceptable struction in the following areas:
procedures for demarcating CDZ’s can (1) The recognition and identification
be found in Appendix D to this subpart. of fall hazards in the work area;
(4) Each employee working in a CDZ (2) The use and operation of guardrail
shall have completed CDZ training in systems (including perimeter safety
accordance with § 1926.761. cable systems), personal fall arrest sys-
(5) Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall tems, positioning device systems, fall
not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m2). restraint systems, safety net systems,
(6) Safety deck attachments shall be and other protection to be used;
performed in the CDZ from the leading (3) The correct procedures for erect-
edge back to the control line and shall ing, maintaining, disassembling, and
have at least two attachments for each inspecting the fall protection systems
metal decking panel. to be used;
(7) Final deck attachments and in-
(4) The procedures to be followed to
stallation of shear connectors shall not
prevent falls to lower levels and
be performed in the CDZ.
through or into holes and openings in
(d) Criteria for fall protection equip-
walking/working surfaces and walls;
ment. (1) Guardrail systems, safety net
and
systems, personal fall arrest systems,
positioning device systems and their (5) The fall protection requirements
components shall conform to the cri- of this subpart.
teria in § 1926.502 (see Appendix G to (c) Special training programs. In addi-
this subpart). tion to the training required in para-
(2) Fall arrest system components graphs (a) and (b) of this section, the
shall be used in fall restraint systems employer shall provide special training
and shall conform to the criteria in to employees engaged in the following
§ 1926.502 (see Appendix G). Either body activities.
belts or body harnesses shall be used in (1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. The
fall restraint systems. employer shall ensure that each em-
(3) Perimeter safety cables shall ployee who performs multiple lift rig-
meet the criteria for guardrail systems ging has been provided training in the
in § 1926.502 (see Appendix G). following areas:
(e) Custody of fall protection. Fall pro- (i) The nature of the hazards associ-
tection provided by the steel erector ated with multiple lifts; and
423
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
(ii) The proper procedures and equip- plan, a steel erector considers the following
ment to perform multiple lifts required elements:
by § 1926.753(e). (1) The sequence of erection activity, de-
(2) Connector procedures. The em- veloped in coordination with the controlling
contractor, that includes the following:
ployer shall ensure that each connector
(i) Material deliveries:
has been provided training in the fol-
(ii) Material staging and storage; and
lowing areas:
(iii) Coordination with other trades and
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- construction activities.
ated with connecting; and (2) A description of the crane and derrick
(ii) The establishment, access, proper selection and placement procedures, includ-
connecting techniques and work prac- ing the following:
tices required by § 1926.756(c) and (i) Site preparation;
§ 1926.760(b). (ii) Path for overhead loads; and
(3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging sup-
Where CDZs are being used, the em- plies and equipment.
ployer shall assure that each employee (3) A description of steel erection activities
has been provided training in the fol- and procedures, including the following:
lowing areas: (i) Stability considerations requiring tem-
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- porary bracing and guying;
(ii) Erection bridging terminus point;
ated with work within a controlled
(iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications
decking zone; and
regarding repair, replacement and modifica-
(ii) The establishment, access, proper tions;
installation techniques and work prac- (iv) Columns and beams (including joists
tices required by § 1926.760(c) and and purlins);
§ 1926.754(e). (v) Connections;
(vi) Decking; and
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART (vii) Ornamental and miscellaneous iron.
1926—GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING (4) A description of the fall protection pro-
THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC cedures that will be used to comply with
ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY § 1926.760.
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (5) A description of the procedures that
§ 1926.752(e). will be used to comply with § 1926.759.
(6) A description of the special procedures
(a) General. This appendix serves as a required for hazardous non-routine tasks.
guideline to assist employers who elect to (7) A certification for each employee who
develop a site-specific erection plan in ac- has received training for performing steel
cordance with § 1926.752(e) with alternate erection operations as required by § 1926.761.
means and methods to provide employee pro- (8) A list of the qualified and competent
tection in accordance with § 1926.752(e), persons.
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) and
(9) A description of the procedures that
§ 1926.757(e)(4).
will be utilized in the event of rescue or
(b) Development of a site-specific erection
emergency response.
plan. Pre-construction conference(s) and site
inspection(s) are held between the erector (d) Other plan information. The plan:
and the controlling contractor, and others (1) Includes the identification of the site
such as the project engineer and fabricator and project; and
before the start of steel erection. The pur- (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified per-
pose of such conference(s) is to develop and son(s) responsible for its preparation and
review the site-specific erection plan that modification.
will meet the requirements of this section.
(c) Components of a site-specific erection APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926
plan. In developing a site-specific erection [RESERVED]
424
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS

POINTS: NON-MANDATORY
425
ER18JA01.021</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
426
ER18JA01.022</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. D
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART metal deck and other operations connected

1926—ILLUSTRATION OF THE USE OF with leading edge work are taking place, the
controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a
CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE CON-
control line or by any other means that re-
TROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): stricts access.
NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR (i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.760(c)(3) less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet
(27.4 m) from the leading edge.
(1) When used to control access to areas (ii) Control lines extend along the entire
where leading edge and initial securement of length of the unprotected or leading edge
427
ER18JA01.023</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
and are approximately parallel to the unpro- NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
tected or leading edge. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent
(iii) Control lines are connected on each member, shall be increased an amount equal
side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or to the height of the stilts.
other suitable anchorage. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
(2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, vertical members, or equivalent inter-
tapes, or equivalent materials, and sup- mediate structural members shall be in-
porting stanchions as follows: stalled between the top edge of the guardrail
(i) Each line is rigged and supported in system and the walking/working surface
such a way that its lowest point (including when there is no wall or parapet wall at least
sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from 21 inches (53 cm) high.
the walking/working surface and its highest
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from
at a height midway between the top edge of
the walking/working surface.
the guardrail system and the walking/work-
(ii) Each line has a minimum breaking
ing level.
strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg).
(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall ex-
tend from the top rail to the walking/work-
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART
ing level and along the entire opening be-
1926—TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY tween top rail supports.
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (iii) Intermediate members (such as balus-
§ 1926.761 ters), when used between posts, shall be not
more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
The training requirements of § 1926.761 will
(iv) Other structural members (such as ad-
be deemed to have been met if employees
ditional midrails and architectural panels)
have completed a training course on steel
shall be installed such that there are no
erection, including instruction in the provi-
openings in the guardrail system that are
sions of this standard, that has been ap-
more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.
proved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bu-
(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of
reau of Apprenticeship.
withstanding, without failure, a force of at
least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any out-
1926—PERIMETER COLUMNS: NON- ward or downward direction, at any point
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COM- along the top edge.
PLYING WITH § 1926.756(e) TO PRO- (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load
TECT THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section
EDGE OF A WALKING/WORKING SUR- (§ 1926.502) is applied in a downward direc-
FACE tion, the top edge of the guardrail shall not
deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m)
In multi-story structures, when holes in above the walking/working level. Guardrail
the column web are used for perimeter safety system components selected and constructed
cables, the column splice must be placed suf- in accordance with the appendix B to subpart
ficiently high so as not to interfere with any M of this part will be deemed to meet this re-
attachments to the column necessary for the quirement.
column splice. Column splices are rec- (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
ommended to be placed at every other or vertical members, solid panels, and equiva-
fourth levels as design allows. Column lent structural members shall be capable of
splices at third levels are detrimental to the withstanding, without failure, a force of at
erection process and should be avoided if pos- least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any down-
sible. ward or outward direction at any point along
the midrail or other member.
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced
1926—§ 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTEC- as to prevent injury to an employee from
TION SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRAC- punctures or lacerations, and to prevent
TICES snagging of clothing.
(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails
(b) ‘‘Guardrail systems.’’ Guardrail sys- shall not overhang the terminal posts, ex-
tems and their use shall comply with the fol- cept where such overhang does not con-
lowing provisions: stitute a projection hazard.
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or equiva- (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall
lent guardrail system members, shall be 42 not be used as top rails or midrails.
inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least
above the walking/working level. When con- one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter
ditions warrant, the height of the top edge or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations.
may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be
guardrail system meets all other criteria of flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals
this paragraph (§ 1926.502(b)). with high-visibility material.
428
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G
(10) When guardrail systems are used at (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and
hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable runways shall be erected along each unpro-
guardrail section shall be placed across the tected side or edge.
access opening between guardrail sections (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being
when hoisting operations are not taking used for top rails or midrails shall be in-
place. spected as frequently as necessary to ensure
(11) When guardrail systems are used at that it continues to meet the strength re-
holes, they shall be erected on all unpro- quirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section
tected sides or edges of the hole. (§ 1926.502).
(12) When guardrail systems are used
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems
around holes used for the passage of mate-
and their use shall comply with the fol-
rials, the hole shall have not more than two
lowing provisions:
sides provided with removable guardrail sec-
tions to allow the passage of materials. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as
When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed practicable under the walking/working sur-
over with a cover, or a guardrail system face on which employees are working, but in
shall be provided along all unprotected sides no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such
or edges. level. When nets are used on bridges, the po-
(13) When guardrail systems are used tential fall area from the walking/working
around holes which are used as points of ac- surface to the net shall be unobstructed.
cess (such as ladderways), they shall be pro- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from
vided with a gate, or be so offset that a per- the outermost projection of the work surface
son cannot walk directly into the hole. as follows:
Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from

Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of net the edge of the working surface
Up to 5 feet .................................................................................. 8 feet

More than 5 feet up to 10 feet .................................................... 10 feet
More than 10 feet ........................................................................ 13 feet
(3) Safety nets shall be installed with suffi- certification record must include an identi-
cient clearance under them to prevent con- fication of the net and net installation for
tact with the surface or structures below which the certification record is being pre-
when subjected to an impact force equal to pared; the date that it was determined that
the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of the identified net and net installation were
this section [§ 1926.502]. in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
(4) Safety nets and their installations shall section (§ 1926.502) and the signature of the
be capable of absorbing an impact force person making the determination and cer-
equal to that produced by the drop test spec- tification. The most recent certification
ified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section record for each net and net installation shall
[§ 1926.502]. be available at the jobsite for inspection.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety
(c)(4)(ii) of this section (§ 1926.502), safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week
nets and safety net installations shall be for wear, damage, and other deterioration.
drop-tested at the jobsite after initial instal- Defective components shall be removed from
lation and before being used as a fall protec- service. Safety nets shall also be inspected
tion system, whenever relocated, after major after any occurrence which could affect the
repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one
integrity of the safety net system.
place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and
pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30+ or ¥2 inches
(76+ or ¥5 cm) in diameter dropped into the tools which have fallen into the safety net
net from the highest walking/working sur- shall be removed as soon as possible from the
face at which employees are exposed to fall net and at least before the next work shift.
hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 (7) The maximum size of each safety net
m) above that level. mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square
(ii) When the employer can demonstrate inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches
that it is unreasonable to perform the drop- (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, meas-
test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this ured center-to-center of mesh ropes or web-
section (§ 1926.502), the employer (or a des- bing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15
ignated competent person) shall certify that cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to
the net and net installation is in compliance prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.
with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and (8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall
(c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502) by pre- have a border rope for webbing with a min-
paring a certification record prior to the net imum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2
being used as a fall protection system. The kN).
429
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
(9) Connections between safety net panels (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall
shall be as strong as integral net components have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000
and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches pounds (22.2 kN).
(15 cm) apart. (10)(i) Except as provided in paragraph
(d) ‘‘Personal fall arrest systems.’’ Per- (d)(10)(ii) of this section [§ 1926.502], when
sonal fall arrest systems and their use shall vertical lifelines are used, each employee
comply with the provisions set forth below. shall be attached to a separate lifeline.
Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not (ii) During the construction of elevator
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shafts, two employees may be attached to
system. the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided
both employees are working atop a false car
NOTE: The use of a body belt in a posi- that is equipped with guardrails; the
tioning device system is acceptable and is strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000
regulated under paragraph (e) of this section pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and
(§ 1926.502). all other criteria specified in this paragraph
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed for lifelines have been met.
or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate- (11) Lifelines shall be protected against
rials. being cut or abraded.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges which automatically limit free fall distance
shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of
facing parts of the system. sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with
minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
(22.2 kN). position.
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet
tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
(0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tear-
pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
ing and deforming lanyards shall be capable
or taking permanent deformation.
of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with
ible with the member to which they are con-
the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
position.
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan-
snaphook keeper by the connected member,
yards, lifelines, and strength components of
or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
body belts and body harnesses shall be made
and used to prevent disengagement of the
from synthetic fibers.
snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(15) Anchorages used for attachment of
keeper by the connected member. Effective
personal fall arrest equipment shall be inde-
January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
pendent of any anchorage being used to sup-
shall be used.
port or suspend platforms and capable of sup-
(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type porting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per
and designed for the following connections, employee attached, or shall be designed, in-
snaphooks shall not be engaged: stalled, and used as follows:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (i) as part of a complete personal fall ar-
(ii) to each other; rest system which maintains a safety factor
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another of at least two; and
snaphook or other connector is attached; (ii) under the supervision of a qualified
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or person.
(v) to any object which is incompatibly (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when
shaped or dimensioned in relation to the stopping a fall, shall:
snaphook such that unintentional disengage- (i) limit maximum arresting force on an
ment could occur by the connected object employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
being able to depress the snaphook keeper with a body belt;
and release itself. (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an
(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
platforms with horizontal lifelines which with a body harness;
may become vertical lifelines, the devices (iii) be rigged such that an employee can
used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor
be capable of locking in both directions on contact any lower level;
the lifeline. (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop
(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, and limit maximum deceleration distance an
installed, and used, under the supervision of employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and,
a qualified person, as part of a complete per- (v) have sufficient strength to withstand
sonal fall arrest system, which maintains a twice the potential impact energy of an em-
safety factor of at least two. ployee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m),
430
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H
or the free fall distance permitted by the (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to
system, whichever is less. an anchorage capable of supporting at least
twice the potential impact load of an em-
NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system
ployee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), which-
meets the criteria and protocols contained in
Appendix C to subpart M, and if the system ever is greater.
is being used by an employee having a com- (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed
bined person and tool weight of less than 310 or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate-
pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- rials.
ered to be in compliance with the provisions (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re-
of paragraph (d)(16) of this section [§ 1926.502]. sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges
If the system is used by an employee having shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter-
a combined tool and body weight of 310 facing parts of this system.
pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a
must appropriately modify the criteria and minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds
protocols of the Appendix to provide proper (22.2 kN)
protection for such heavier weights, or the (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
system will not be deemed to be in compli- tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
ance with the requirements of paragraph pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
(d)(16) of this section (§ 1926.502). or taking permanent deformation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
(17) The attachment point of the body belt
ible with the member to which they are con-
shall be located in the center of the wearer’s
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
back. The attachment point of the body har-
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
ness shall be located in the center of the
wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above snaphook keeper by the connected member,
the wearer’s head. or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
(18) Body belts, harnesses, and components and used to prevent disengagement of the
shall be used only for employee protection snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(as part of a personal fall arrest system or keeper by the connected member. As of Jan-
positioning device system) and not to hoist uary 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
materials. shall be used.
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and com- (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type
ponents subjected to impact loading shall be and designed for the following connections,
immediately removed from service and shall snaphooks shall not be engaged:
not be used again for employee protection (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
until inspected and determined by a com- (ii) to each other;
petent person to be undamaged and suitable (iii) to a dee-ring to which another
for reuse. snaphook or other connector is attached;
(20) The employer shall provide for prompt (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or to depress
rescue of employees in the event of a fall or the snaphook keeper and release itself.
shall assure that employees are able to res- (v) to any object which is incompatibly
cue themselves. shaped or dimensioned in relation to the
(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be snaphook such that unintentional disengage-
inspected prior to each use for wear, damage ment could occur by the connected object
and other deterioration, and defective com- being able to depress the snaphook keeper
ponents shall be removed from service. and release itself.
(22) Body belts shall be at least one and (9) Positioning device systems shall be in-
five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) wide. spected prior to each use for wear, damage,
(23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not and other deterioration, and defective com-
be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall ponents shall be removed from service.
they be attached to hoists except as specified (10) Body belts, harnesses, and components
in other subparts of this Part. shall be used only for employee protection
(24) When a personal fall arrest system is (as part of a personal fall arrest system or
used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to positioning device system) and not to hoist
allow the movement of the employee only as materials.
far as the edge of the walking/working sur-
face. APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART
(e) Positioning device systems. Positioning
1926—DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUS-
device systems and their use shall conform
to the following provisions: TRATION OF A CLIPPED END CONNEC-
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such TION AND A STAGGERED CONNECTION:
that an employee cannot free fall more than NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
2 feet (.9 m). COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(C)(1)
431
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
Clipped end connections are connection member to remain in place. The notch(es)
material on the end of a structural member fits around the nut or bolt head of the oppos-
which has a notch at the bottom and/or top ing member to allow the second member to
to allow the bolt(s) of the first member be bolted up without removing the bolt(s)
placed on the opposite side of the central holding the first member.
Staggered connections are connection ma- Subpart S—Underground Con-

terial on a structural member in which all of
the bolt holes in the common member web struction, Caissons,
are not shared by the two incoming members Cofferdams and Compressed
in the final connection. The extra hole in the Air
column web allows the erector to maintain
at least a one bolt connection at all times
while making the double connection.
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333);
ER18JA01.025</GPH>
secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety

and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
432
ER18JA01.024</GPH>
Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR ronmental controls are effective, and
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1– when the remaining construction ac-
90 (55 FR 9033), or 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applica-
tivity will not cause any environ-
ble.
mental hazard or structural failure
§ 1926.800 Underground construction. within the facilities.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- (d) Safety instruction. All employees
tion applies to the construction of un- shall be instructed in the recognition
derground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and avoidance of hazards associated
and passageways. This section also ap- with underground construction activi-
plies to cut-and-cover excavations ties including, where appropriate, the
which are both physically connected to following subjects:
ongoing underground construction op- (1) Air monitoring;
erations within the scope of this sec- (2) Ventilation;
tion, and covered in such a manner as (3) Illumination;
to create conditions characteristic of (4) Communications;
underground construction. (5) Flood control;
(2) This section does not apply to the (6) Mechanical equipment;
following:
(7) Personal protective equipment;
(i) Excavation and trenching oper-
ations covered by subpart P of this (8) Explosives;
part, such as foundation operations for (9) Fire prevention and protection;
above-ground structures that are not and
physically connected to underground (10) Emergency procedures, including
construction operations, and surface evacuation plans and check-in/check-
excavation; nor out systems.
(ii) Underground electrical trans- (e) Notification. (1) Oncoming shifts
mission and distribution lines, as ad- shall be informed of any hazardous oc-
dressed in subpart V of this part. currences or conditions that have af-
(b) Access and egress. (1) The employer fected or might affect employee safety,
shall provide and maintain safe means including liberation of gas, equipment
of access and egress to all work sta- failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins,
tions. floodings, fires or explosions.
(2) The employer shall provide access (2) The employer shall establish and
and egress in such a manner that em- maintain direct communications for
ployees are protected from being coordination of activities with other
struck by excavators, haulage ma- employers whose operations at the job-
chines, trains and other mobile equip- site affect or may affect the safety of
ment. employees underground.
(3) The employer shall control access
(f) Communications. (1) When natural
to all openings to prevent unauthorized
unassisted voice communication is in-
entry underground. Unused chutes,
effective, a power-assisted means of
manways, or other openings shall be
voice communication shall be used to
tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced
off, and shall be posted with warning provide communication between the
signs indicating ‘‘Keep Out’’ or similar work face, the bottom of the shaft, and
language. Completed or unused sec- the surface.
tions of the underground facility shall (2) Two effective means of commu-
be barricaded. nication, at least one of which shall be
(c) Check-in/check-out. The employer voice communication, shall be provided
shall maintain a check-in/check-out in all shafts which are being developed
procedure that will ensure that above- or used either for personnel access or
ground personnel can determine an ac- for hoisting. Additional requirements
curate count of the number of persons for hoist operator communication are
underground in the event of an emer- contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of
gency. However, this procedure is not this section.
required when the construction of un- (3) Powered communication systems
derground facilities designed for shall operate on an independent power
human occupancy has been sufficiently supply, and shall be installed so that
completed so that the permanent envi- the use of or disruption of any one
433
phone or signal location will not dis- (5) Rescue teams. (i) On jobsites where
rupt the operation of the system from 25 or more employees work under-
any other location. ground at one time, the employer shall
(4) Communication systems shall be provide (or make arrangements in ad-
tested upon initial entry of each shift vance with locally available rescue
to the underground, and as often as services to provide) at least two 5-per-
necessary at later times, to ensure that son rescue teams, one on the jobsite or
they are in working order. within one-half hour travel time from
(5) Any employee working alone un- the entry point, and the other within 2
derground in a hazardous location, who hours travel time.
is both out of the range of natural un- (ii) On jobsites where less than 25 em-
assisted voice communication and not ployees work underground at one time,
under observation by other persons, the employer shall provide (or make
shall be provided with an effective arrangements in advance with locally
means of obtaining assistance in an available rescue services to provide) at
emergency. least one 5-person rescue team to be ei-
(g) Emergency provisions—(1) Hoisting ther on the jobsite or within one-half
capability. When a shaft is used as a hour travel time from the entry point.
means of egress, the employer shall (iii) Rescue team members shall be
make advance arrangements for power- qualified in rescue procedures, the use
assisted hoisting capability to be read- and limitations of breathing apparatus,
ily available in an emergency, unless and the use of firefighting equipment.
the regular hoisting means can con- Qualifications shall be reviewed not
tinue to function in the event of an less than annually.
electrical power failure at the jobsite.
(iv) On jobsites where flammable or
Such hoisting means shall be designed
noxious gases are encountered or an-
so that the load hoist drum is powered
ticipated in hazardous quantities, res-
in both directions of rotation and so
cue team members shall practice don-
that the brake is automatically applied
ning and using self-contained breathing
upon power release or failure.
apparatus monthly.
(2) Self-rescuers. The employer must
(v) The employer shall ensure that
provide self-rescuers approved by the
rescue teams are familiar with condi-
National Institute for Occupational
tions at the jobsite.
Safety and Health under 42 CFR part
84. The respirators must be imme- (h) Hazardous classifications—(1) Po-
diately available to all employees at tentially gassy operations. Underground
work stations in underground areas construction operations shall be classi-
where employees might be trapped by fied as potentially gassy if either:
smoke or gas. The selection, issuance, (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
use, and care of respirators must be in cent or more of the lower explosive
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. limit for methane or other flammable
(3) Designated person. At least one gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
designated person shall be on duty ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
above ground whenever any employee floor or walls in any underground work
is working underground. This des- area for more than a 24-hour period; or
ignated person shall be responsible for (ii) The history of the geographical
securing immediate aid and keeping an area or geological formation indicates
accurate count of employees under- that 10 percent or more of the lower ex-
ground in case of emergency. The des- plosive limit for methane or other
ignated person must not be so busy flammable gases is likely to be encoun-
with other responsibilities that the tered in such underground operations.
counting function is encumbered. (2) Gassy operations. Underground
(4) Emergency lighting. Each employee construction operations shall be classi-
underground shall have an acceptable fied as gassy if:
portable hand lamp or cap lamp in his (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
or her work area for emergency use, cent or more of the lower explosive
unless natural light or an emergency limit for methane or other flammable
lighting system provides adequate illu- gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
mination for escape. ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
434
floor or walls in any underground work (ii) Installation of new equipment, or

area for three consecutive days; or conversion of existing equipment, to
(ii) There has been an ignition of comply with this paragraph (i); and
methane or of other flammable gases (iii) Installation of above-ground con-
emanating from the strata that indi- trols for reversing the air flow.
cates the presence of such gases; or (j) Air quality and monitoring—(1) Gen-
(iii) The underground construction eral. Air quality limits and control re-
operation is both connected to an un- quirements for construction are found
derground work area which is cur- in § 1926.55, except as modified by this
rently classified as gassy and is also section.
subject to a continuous course of air (i)(A) The employer shall assign a
containing the flammable gas con- competent person who shall perform all
centration. air monitoring required by this sec-
(3) Declassification to potentially gassy tion.
operations. Underground construction (B) Where this paragraph requires
gassy operations may be declassified to monitoring of airborne contaminants
Potentially Gassy when air monitoring ‘‘as often as necessary,’’ the competent
results remain under 10 percent of the person shall make a reasonable deter-
lower explosive limit for methane or mination as to which substances to
other flammable gases for three con- monitor and how frequently to mon-
secutive days. itor, considering at least the following
(i) Gassy operations-additional require- factors:
ments. (1) Only acceptable equipment, (1) Location of jobsite: Proximity to
maintained in suitable condition, shall fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, old land-
be used in gassy operations. fills, coal deposits, and swamps;
(2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment (2) Geology: Geological studies of the
used in gassy operations shall be either jobsite, particularly involving the soil
approved in accordance with the re- type and its permeability;
quirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly (3) History: Presence of air contami-
Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be dem- nants in nearby jobsites, changes in
onstrated by the employer to be fully levels of substances monitored on the
equivalent to such MSHA-approved prior shift; and
equipment, and shall be operated in ac- (4) Work practices and jobsite condi-
cordance with that part. tions: The use of diesel engines, use of
(3) Each entrance to a gassy oper- explosives, use of fuel gas, volume and
ation shall be prominently posted with flow of ventilation, visible atmospheric
signs notifying all entrants of the conditions, decompression of the at-
gassy classification. mosphere, welding, cutting and hot
(4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all work, and employees’ physical reac-
gassy operations and the employer tions to working underground.
shall be responsible for collecting all (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
personal sources of ignition, such as ground work areas shall be tested as
matches and lighters, from all persons often as necessary to assure that the
entering a gassy operation. atmosphere at normal atmospheric
(5) A fire watch as described in pressure contains at least 19.5 percent
§ 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when oxygen and no more than 22 percent ox-
hot work is performed. ygen.
(6) Once an operation has met the cri- (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be
teria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting made before tests for air contaminants.
classification as gassy, all operations (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
in the affected area, except the fol- ground work areas shall be tested
lowing, shall be discontinued until the quantitatively for carbon monoxide, ni-
operation either is in compliance with trogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and
all of the gassy operation requirements other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists,
or has been declassified in accordance and fumes as often as necessary to en-
with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: sure that the permissible exposure lim-
(i) Operations related to the control its prescribed in § 1926.55 are not ex-
of the gas concentration; ceeded.
435
(B) The atmosphere in all under- that air contaminants may be present
ground work areas shall be tested in sufficient quantity to be dangerous
quantitatively for methane and other to life, the employer shall:
flammable gases as often as necessary (A) Prominently post a notice at all
to determine: entrances to the underground jobsite
(1) Whether action is to be taken to inform all entrants of the hazardous
under paragraphs (j)(1)(vii), (viii), and condition; and
(ix), of this section; and (B) Ensure that the necessary pre-
(2) Whether an operation is to be cautions are taken.
classified potentially gassy or gassy (vii) Whenever five percent or more
under paragraph (h) of this section. of the lower explosive limit for meth-
(C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine ane or other flammable gases is de-
driven ventilating fans or compressors tected in any underground work area(s)
are used, an initial test shall be made or in the air return, steps shall be
of the inlet air of the fan or com- taken to increase ventilation air vol-
pressor, with the engines operating, to ume or otherwise control the gas con-
ensure that the air supply is not concentration, unless the employer is op-
taminated by engine exhaust. erating in accordance with the poten-
(D) Testing shall be performed as tially gassy or gassy operation require-
often as necessary to ensure that the ments. Such additional ventilation
ventilation requirements of paragraph
controls may be discontinued when gas
(k) of this section are met.
concentrations are reduced below five
(iv) When rapid excavation machines
percent of the lower explosive limit,
are used, a continuous flammable gas
but shall be reinstituted whenever the
monitor shall be operated at the face
five percent level is exceeded.
with the sensor(s) placed as high and
(viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of
close to the front of the machine’s cut-
the lower explosive limit for methane
ter head as practicable.
or other flammable gases is detected in
(v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indi-
the vicinity of welding, cutting, or
cates the presence of 5 ppm or more of
other hot work, such work shall be sus-
hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be con-
pended until the concentration of such
ducted in the affected underground
flammable gas is reduced to less than
work area(s), at least at the beginning
10 percent of the lower explosive limit.
and midpoint of each shift, until the
concentration of hydrogen sulfide has (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of
been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive the lower explosive limit for methane
days. or other flammable gases is detected in
(B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is de- any underground work area(s) or in the
tected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, air return:
a continuous sampling and indicating (A) All employees, except those nec-
hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used essary to eliminate the hazard, shall be
to monitor the affected work area. immediately withdrawn to a safe loca-
(C) Employees shall be informed tion above ground; and
when a concentration of 10 ppm hydro- (B) Electrical power, except for ac-
gen sulfide is exceeded. ceptable pumping and ventilation
(D) The continuous sampling and in- equipment, shall be cut off to the area
dicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall endangered by the flammable gas until
be designed, installed, and maintained the concentration of such gas is re-
to provide a visual and aural alarm duced to less than 20 percent of the
when the hydrogen sulfide concentra- lower explosive limit.
tion reaches 20 ppm to signal that addi- (2) Additional monitoring for potentially
tional measures, such as respirator use, gassy and gassy operations. Operations
increased ventilation, or evacuation, which meet the criteria for potentially
might be necessary to maintain hydro- gassy and gassy operations set forth in
gen sulfide exposure below the permis- paragraph (h) of this section shall be
sible exposure limit. subject to the additional monitoring
(vi) When the competent person de- requirements of this paragraph.
termines, on the basis of air moni- (i) A test for oxygen content shall be
toring results or other information, conducted in the affected underground
436
work areas and work areas imme- (2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7
diately adjacent to such areas at least m3) of fresh air per minute shall be sup-
at the beginning and midpoint of each plied for each employee underground.
shift. (3) The linear velocity of air flow in
(ii) When using rapid excavation ma- the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all
chines, continuous automatic flam- other underground work areas shall be
mable gas monitoring equipment shall at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute
be used to monitor the air at the head- where blasting or rock drilling is con-
ing, on the rib, and in the return air ducted, or where other conditions like-
duct. The continuous monitor shall sig- ly to produce dust, fumes, mists, va-
nal the heading, and shut down electric pors, or gases in harmful or explosive
power in the affected underground quantities are present.
work area, except for acceptable pump- (4) The direction of mechanical air
ing and ventilation equipment, when 20 flow shall be reversible.
percent or more of the lower explosive (5) Following blasting, ventilation
limit for methane or other flammable systems shall exhaust smoke and
gases is encountered. fumes to the outside atmosphere before
(iii) A manual flammable gas mon- work is resumed in affected areas.
itor shall be used as needed, but at
(6) Ventilation doors shall be de-
least at the beginning and midpoint of
signed and installed so that they re-
each shift, to ensure that the limits
main closed when in use, regardless of
prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are
the direction of the air flow.
not exceeded. In addition, a manual
electrical shut down control shall be (7) When ventilation has been re-
provided near the heading. duced to the extent that hazardous lev-
els of methane or flammable gas may
(iv) Local gas tests shall be made
have accumulated, a competent person
prior to and continuously during any
shall test all affected areas after ven-
welding, cutting, or other hot work.
tilation has been restored and shall de-
(v) In underground operations driven
termine whether the atmosphere is
by drill-and-blast methods, the air in
within flammable limits before any
the affected area shall be tested for
power, other than for acceptable equip-
flammable gas prior to re-entry after
ment, is restored or work is resumed.
blasting, and continuously when em-
ployees are working underground. (8) Whenever the ventilation system
has been shut down with all employees
(3) Recordkeeping. A record of all air
out of the underground area, only com-
quality tests shall be maintained above
petent persons authorized to test for
ground at the worksite and be made
air contaminants shall be allowed un-
available to the Secretary of Labor
upon request. The record shall include derground until the ventilation has
the location, date, time, substance and been restored and all affected areas
amount monitored. Records of expo- have been tested for air contaminants
sures to toxic substances shall be re- and declared safe.
tained in accordance with § 1910.33 of (9) When drilling rock or concrete,
this chapter. All other air quality test appropriate dust control measures
records shall be retained until comple- shall be taken to maintain dust levels
tion of the project. within limits set in § 1926.55. Such
(k) Ventilation. (1)(i) Fresh air shall measures may include, but are not lim-
be supplied to all underground work ited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum
areas in sufficient quantities to pre- collectors, and water mix spray sys-
vent dangerous or harmful accumula- tems.
tion of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or (10)(i) Internal combustion engines,
gases. except diesel-powered engines on mo-
(ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be bile equipment, are prohibited under-
provided in all underground work areas ground.
except when the employer can dem- (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment
onstrate that natural ventilation pro- used underground in atmospheres other
vides the necessary air quality through than gassy operations shall be either
sufficient air volume and air flow. approved by MSHA in accordance with
437
the provisions of 30 CFR part 32 (for- ed in areas having fire or explosion

merly Schedule 24), or shall be dem- hazards.
onstrated by the employer to be fully (3) The employer may store under-
equivalent to such MSHA-approved ground no more than a 24-hour supply
equipment, and shall be operated in ac- of diesel fuel for the underground
cordance with that part. (Each brake equipment used at the worksite.
horsepower of a diesel engine requires (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the
at least 100 cubic feet (28.32 m3) of air surface to an underground location is
per minute for suitable operation in ad- permitted only if:
dition to the air requirements for per- (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the sur-
sonnel. Some engines may require a face in a tank whose maximum capac-
greater amount of air to ensure that ity is no more than the amount of fuel
the allowable levels of carbon mon- required to supply for a 24-hour period
oxide, nitric oxide, and nitrogen diox- the equipment serviced by the under-
ide are not exceeded.) ground fueling station; and
(11) Potentially gassy or gassy oper-
(ii) The surface tank is connected to
ations shall have ventilation systems
the underground fueling station by an
installed which shall:
acceptable pipe or hose system that is
(i) Be constructed of fire-resistant
controlled at the surface by a valve,
materials; and
and at the shaft bottom by a hose noz-
(ii) Have acceptable electrical sys-
zle; and
tems, including fan motors.
(iii) The pipe is empty at all times
(12) Gassy operations shall be pro-
except when transferring diesel fuel
vided with controls located above
from the surface tank to a piece of
ground for reversing the air flow of
equipment in use underground; and
ventilation systems.
(13) In potentially gassy or gassy op- (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft
erations, wherever mine-type ventila- are suspended during refueling oper-
tion systems using an offset main fan ations if the supply piping in the shaft
installed on the surface are used, they is not protected from damage.
shall be equipped with explosion-doors (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried,
or a weak-wall having an area at least stored, or used underground.
equivalent to the cross-sectional area (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum
of the airway. gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene
(l) Illumination. (1) Illumination re- Stabilized gas may be used under-
quirements applicable to underground ground only for welding, cutting and
construction operations are found in other hot work, and only in accordance
Table D–3 of § 1926.56 of this part. with subpart J of this part, and para-
(2) Only acceptable portable lighting graphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this sec-
equipment shall be used within 50 feet tion.
(15.24 m) of any underground heading (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored
during explosives handling. underground shall be kept in tightly
(m) Fire prevention and control. Fire sealed containers in fire-resistant areas
prevention and protection require- at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from under-
ments applicable to underground con- ground explosive magazines, and at
struction operations are found in sub- least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft sta-
part F of this part, except as modified tions and steeply inclined passageways.
by the following additional standards. Storage areas shall be positioned or
(1) Open flames and fires are prohib- diked so that the contents of ruptured
ited in all underground construction or overturned containers will not flow
operations except as permitted for from the storage area.
welding, cutting and other hot work (7) Flammable or combustible mate-
operations in paragraph (n) of this sec- rials shall not be stored above ground
tion. within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access
(2) (i) Smoking may be allowed only opening to any underground operation.
in areas free of fire and explosion haz- Where this is not feasible because of
ards. space limitations at the jobsite, such
(ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting materials may be located within the
smoking and open flames shall be post- 100-foot limit, provided that:
438
(i) They are located as far as prac- protection to ensure safe access of em-
ticable from the opening; and ployees and equipment. Adjacent areas
(ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of shall be scaled or otherwise secured to
not less than one-hour rating is placed prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured
between the stored material and the materials from endangering the portal
opening, or additional precautions are and access area.
taken which will protect the materials (2) Subsidence areas. The employer
from ignition sources. shall ensure ground stability in haz-
(8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids ardous subsidence areas by shoring, by
shall be used in hydraulically-actuated filling in, or by erecting barricades and
underground machinery and equipment posting warning signs to prevent entry.
unless such equipment is protected by (3) Underground areas. (i)(A) A com-
a fire suppression system or by multi- petent person shall inspect the roof,
purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of face, and walls of the work area at the
sufficient capacity for the type and size start of each shift and as often as nec-
of hydraulic equipment involved, but essary to determine ground stability.
rated at least 4A:40B:C. (B) Competent persons conducting
(9)(i) Electrical installations in un- such inspections shall be protected
derground areas where oil, grease, or from loose ground by location, ground
diesel fuel are stored shall be used only support or equivalent means.
for lighting fixtures. (ii) Ground conditions along
(ii) Lighting fixtures in storage haulageways and travelways shall be
areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of un- inspected as frequently as necessary to
derground areas where oil, grease, or ensure safe passage.
diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved
(iii) Loose ground that might be haz-
for Class I, Division 2 locations, in ac-
ardous to employees shall be taken
cordance with subpart K of this part.
down, scaled or supported.
(10) Leaks and spills of flammable or
combustible fluids shall be cleaned up (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be
immediately. used wherever bolts that depend on
(11) A fire extinguisher of at least torsionally applied force are used for
4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent ex- ground support.
tinguishing means shall be provided at (B) A competent person shall deter-
the head pulley and at the tail pulley mine whether rock bolts meet the nec-
of underground belt conveyors. essary torque, and shall determine the
(12) Any structure located under- testing frequency in light of the bolt
ground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an system, ground conditions and the dis-
opening to the underground shall be tance from vibration sources.
constructed of material having a fire- (v) Suitable protection shall be pro-
resistance rating of at least one hour. vided for employees exposed to the haz-
(n) Welding, cutting, and other hot ard of loose ground while installing
work. In addition to the requirements ground support systems.
of subpart J of this part, the following (vi) Support sets shall be installed so
requirements shall apply to under- that the bottoms have sufficient an-
ground welding, cutting, and other hot chorage to prevent ground pressures
work. from dislodging the support base of the
(1) No more than the amount of fuel sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing,
gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided
perform welding, cutting, or other hot between immediately adjacent sets to
work during the next 24-hour period ensure added stability.
shall be permitted underground. (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground
(2) Noncombustible barriers shall be supports that create a hazardous condi-
installed below welding, cutting, or tion shall be promptly repaired or re-
other hot work being done in or over a placed. When replacing supports, the
shaft or raise. new supports shall be installed before
(o) Ground support—(1) Portal areas. the damaged supports are removed.
Portal openings and access areas shall (viii) A shield or other type of sup-
be guarded by shoring, fencing, head port shall be used to maintain a safe
walls, shotcreting or other equivalent travelway for employees working in
439
dead-end areas ahead of any support re- (q) Drilling. (1) A competent person
placement operation. shall inspect all drilling and associated
(4) Shafts. (i) Shafts and wells over 5 equipment prior to each use. Equip-
feet (1.53 m) in depth that employees ment defects affecting safety shall be
must enter shall be supported by a corrected before the equipment is used.
steel casing, concrete pipe, timber, (2) The drilling area shall be in-
solid rock or other suitable material. spected for hazards before the drilling
(ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft operation is started.
shall be supported by casing or bracing (3) Employees shall not be allowed on
except where the shaft penetrates into a drill mast while the drill bit is in op-
solid rock having characteristics that eration or the drill machine is being
will not change as a result of exposure. moved.
Where the shaft passes through earth (4) When a drill machine is being
into solid rock, or through solid rock moved from one drilling area to an-
into earth, and where there is potential other, drill steel, tools, and other
for shear, the casing or bracing shall equipment shall be secured and the
extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the mast shall be placed in a safe position.
solid rock. When the shaft terminates (5) Receptacles or racks shall be pro-
in solid rock, the casing or bracing vided for storing drill steel located on
shall extend to the end of the shaft or jumbos.
5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, (6) Employees working below jumbo
whichever is less. decks shall be warned whenever drill-
(B) The casing or bracing shall ex- ing is about to begin.
tend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 (7) Drills on columns shall be an-
inches (8 cm) above ground level, ex- chored firmly before starting drilling,
cept that the minimum casing height
and shall be retightened as necessary
may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m),
thereafter.
provided that a standard railing is in-
(8) (i) The employer shall provide me-
stalled; that the ground adjacent to the
chanical means on the top deck of a
top of the shaft is sloped away from the
jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy ma-
shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids;
and that effective barriers are used to terial.
prevent mobile equipment operating (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10
near the shaft from jumping over the 12 feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer
inch (0.3 m) barrier. shall install stairs wide enough for two
(iii) After blasting operations in persons.
shafts, a competent person shall deter- (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet
mine if the walls, ladders, timbers, (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped
blocking, or wedges have loosened. If with guardrails on all open sides, ex-
so, necessary repairs shall be made be- cluding access openings of platforms,
fore employees other than those as- unless an adjacent surface provides
signed to make the repairs are allowed equivalent fall protection.
in or below the affected areas. (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the
(p) Blasting. This paragraph applies in operator shall be allowed to ride on
addition to the requirements for blast- jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the re-
ing and explosives operations, includ- quirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of
ing handling of misfires, which are this section.
found in subpart U of this part. (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to pre-
(1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear vent movement while employees are
of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and working on them.
other conductive material, excluding (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces
earth, to prevent explosives initiation of jumbos shall be maintained to pre-
or employee exposure to electric cur- vent the hazards of slipping, tripping
rent. and falling.
(2) Following blasting, an employee (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads
shall not enter a work area until the shall be designed to be slip-resistent
air quality meets the requirements of and secured to prevent accidental dis-
paragraph (j) of this section. placement.
440
(9) Scaling bars shall be available at (ii) No employee shall ride haulage
scaling operations and shall be main- equipment unless it is equipped with
tained in good condition at all times. seating for each passenger and protects
Blunted or severely worn bars shall not passengers from being struck, crushed,
be used. or caught between other equipment or
(10) (i) Blasting holes shall not be surfaces. Members of train crews may
drilled through blasted rock (muck) or ride on a locomotive if it is equipped
water. with handholds and nonslip steps or
(ii) Employees in a shaft shall be pro- footboards. Requirements applicable to
tected either by location or by suitable Underground Construction for motor
barrier(s) if powered mechanical load- vehicle transportation of employees
ing equipment is used to remove muck are found in § 1926.601 of this part.
containing unfired explosives. (7) Powered mobile haulage equip-
(11) A caution sign reading ‘‘Buried ment, including trains, shall not be left
Line,’’ or similar wording shall be post-
unattended unless the master switch or
ed where air lines are buried or other-
motor is turned off; operating controls
wise hidden by water or debris.
are in neutral or park position; and the
(r) Haulage. (1)(i) A competent person
brakes are set, or equivalent pre-
shall inspect haulage equipment before
cautions are taken to prevent rolling.
each shift.
(ii) Equipment defects affecting safe- (8) Whenever rails serve as a return
ty and health shall be corrected before for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be
the equipment is used. bonded at every joint and crossbonded
(2) Powered mobile haulage equip- every 200 feet (60.96 m).
ment shall have suitable means of stop- (9) When dumping cars by hand, the
ping. car dumps shall have tiedown chains,
(3)(i) Power mobile haulage equip- bumper blocks, or other locking or
ment, including trains, shall have audi- holding devices to prevent the cars
ble warning devices to warn employees from overturning.
to stay clear. The operator shall sound (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump
the warning device before moving the cars shall be equipped with positive
equipment and whenever necessary locking devices to prevent unintended
during travel. dumping.
(ii) The operator shall assure that (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be
lights which are visible to employees loaded and secured to prevent sliding
at both ends of any mobile equipment, or dislodgement.
including a train, are turned on when- (12)(i) Mobile equipment, including
ever the equipment is operating. rail-mounted equipment, shall be
(4) In those cabs where glazing is stopped for manual connecting or serv-
used, the glass shall be safety glass, or ice work.
its equivalent, and shall be maintained (ii) Employees shall not reach be-
and cleaned so that vision is not ob- tween moving cars during coupling op-
structed.
erations.
(5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes
(iii) Couplings shall not be aligned,
shall be installed on inclined conveyor
drive units to prevent conveyors from shifted or cleaned on moving cars or lo-
inadvertently running in reverse. comotives.
(6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be per- (13)(i) Safety chains or other connec-
mitted to ride a power-driven chain, tions shall be used in addition to cou-
belt, or bucket conveyor unless the plers to connect man cars or powder
conveyor is specifically designed for cars whenever the locomotive is uphill
the transportation of persons. of the cars.
(B) Endless belt-type manlifts are (ii) When the grade exceeds one per-
prohibited in underground construc- cent and there is a potential for run-
tion. away cars, safety chains or other con-
(C) General requirements also appli- nections shall be used in addition to
cable to underground construction for couplers to connect haulage cars or, as
use of conveyors in construction are an alternative, the locomotive must be
found in § 1926.555 of this part. downhill of the train.
441
(iii) Such safety chains or other con- of subpart N of this part apply: Re-
nections shall be capable of maintain- quirements for cranes are found in
ing connection between cars in the § 1926.550 of this part. Paragraph (g) of
event of either coupler disconnect, fail- § 1926.550 applies to crane-hoisting of
ure or breakage. personnel, except that the limitation
(14) Parked rail equipment shall be in paragraph (g)(2) does not apply to
chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to the routine access of employees to the
prevent inadvertent movement. underground via a shaft. Requirements
(15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety for material hoists are found in
hooks, or equivalent means shall be § 1926.552 (a) and (b) of this part. Re-
provided to prevent overtravel and quirements for personnel hoists are
overturning of haulage equipment at found in the personnel hoist require-
dumping locations. ments of § 1926.552 (a) and (c) of this
(16) Bumper blocks or equivalent part and in the elevator requirement of
stopping devices shall be provided at § 1926.552 (a) and (d) of this part.
all track dead ends. (1) General requirements for cranes and
(17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch hoists. (i) Materials, tools, and supplies
pails or similar small items may be being raised or lowered, whether within
transported with employees in man- a cage or otherwise, shall be secured or
cars, or on top of a locomotive. stacked in a manner to prevent the
(ii) When small hand tools or other load from shifting, snagging or falling
small items are carried on top of a lo- into the shaft.
comotive, the top shall be designed or (ii) A warning light suitably located
modified to retain them while trav- to warn employees at the shaft bottom
eling. and subsurface shaft entrances shall
(18)(i) Where switching facilities are flash whenever a load is above the
available, occupied personnel-cars shall shaft bottom or subsurface entrances,
be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars or the load is being moved in the shaft.
must be pushed and visibility of the This paragraph does not apply to fully
track ahead is hampered, then a quali- enclosed hoistways.
fied person shall be stationed in the (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully
lead car to give signals to the loco- enclosed and employees are at the
motive operator. shaft bottom, conveyances or equip-
(ii) Crew trips shall consist of per- ment shall be stopped at least 15 feet
sonnel-loads only. (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft
(s) Electrical safety. This paragraph and held there until the signalman at
applies in addition to the general re- the bottom of the shaft directs the op-
quirements for electrical safety which erator to continue lowering the load,
are found in subpart K of this part. except that the load may be lowered
(1) Electric power lines shall be insu- without stopping if the load or convey-
lated or located away from water lines, ance is within full view of a bottom
telephone lines, air lines, or other con- signalman who is in constant voice
ductive materials so that a damaged communication with the operator.
circuit will not energize the other sys- (iv) (A) Before maintenance, repairs,
tems. or other work is commenced in the
(2) Lighting circuits shall be located shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket,
so that movement of personnel or the operator and other employees in
equipment will not damage the circuits the area shall be informed and given
or disrupt service. suitable instructions.
(3) Oil-filled transformers shall not (B) A sign warning that work is being
be used underground unless they are lo- done in the shaft shall be installed at
cated in a fire-resistant enclosure suit- the shaft collar, at the operator’s sta-
ably vented to the outside and sur- tion, and at each underground landing.
rounded by a dike to retain the con- (v) Any connection between the
tents of the transformers in the event hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall
of rupture. be compatible with the type of wire
(t) Hoisting unique to underground con- rope used for hoisting.
struction. Except as modified by this (vi) Spin-type connections, where
paragraph (t), the following provisions used, shall be maintained in a clean
442
condition and protected from foreign controlled by an operator within the

matter that could affect their oper- cage or skip.
ation. (vii) Line speed shall not exceed the
(vii) Cage, skip, and load connections design limitations of the systems.
to the hoist rope shall be made so that (viii) Hoists shall be equipped with
the force of the hoist pull, vibration, landing level indicators at the opera-
misalignment, release of lift force, or tor’s station. Marking of the hoist rope
impact will not disengage the connec- does not satisfy this requirement.
tion. Moused or latched open-throat (ix) Whenever glazing is used in the
hooks do not meet this requirement. hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or
(viii) When using wire rope wedge its equivalent, and be free of distor-
sockets, means shall be provided to tions and obstructions.
prevent wedge escapement and to en- (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated
sure that the wedge is properly seated. at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry
(2) Additional requirements for cranes. chemical) shall be mounted in each
Cranes shall be equipped with a limit hoist house.
switch to prevent overtravel at the (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged
boom tip. Limit switches are to be used so that the operator can perform all
only to limit travel of loads when oper- operating cycle functions and reach the
ational controls malfunction and shall emergency power cutoff without hav-
not be used as a substitute for other ing to reach beyond the operator’s nor-
operational controls. mal operating position.
(3) Additional requirements for hoists. (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with
(i) Hoists shall be designed so that the limit switches to prevent overtravel at
load hoist drum is powered in both di- the top and bottom of the hoistway.
rections of rotation, and so that brakes (xiii) Limit switches are to be used
are automatically applied upon power only to limit travel of loads when oper-
release or failure. ational controls malfunction and shall
(ii) Control levers shall be of the not be used as a substitute for other
‘‘deadman type’’ which return auto- operational controls.
matically to their center (neutral) po- (xiv) Hoist operators shall be pro-
sition upon release. vided with a closed-circuit voice com-
(iii) When a hoist is used for both munication system to each landing sta-
personnel hoisting and material hoist- tion, with speaker-microphones so lo-
ing, load and speed ratings for per- cated that the operator can commu-
sonnel and for materials shall be as- nicate with individual landing stations
signed to the equipment. during hoist use.
(iv) Material hoisting may be per- (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86
formed at speeds higher than the rated m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and
speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist buckets that may swing, bump, or snag
and components have been designed for against shaft sides or other structural
such higher speeds and if shaft condi- protrusions shall be guided by fenders,
tions permit. rails, ropes, or a combination of those
(v) Employees shall not ride on top of means.
any cage, skip or bucket except when (xvi) When sinking shafts more than
necessary to perform inspection or 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages,
maintenance of the hoisting system, in skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail-
which case they shall be protected by a guided to within a rail length from the
body belt/harness system to prevent sinking operation.
falling. (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all
(vi) Personnel and materials (other completed shafts, or in all shafts being
than small tools and supplies secured used as completed shafts, shall be rope
in a manner that will not create a haz- or rail-guided for the full length of
ards to employees) shall not be hoisted their travel.
together in the same conveyance. How- (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of
ever, if the operator is protected from material hoists shall be capable of sup-
the shifting of materials, then the op- porting, without failure, at least five
erator may ride with materials in times the maximum intended load or
cages or skips which are designed to be the factor recommended by the rope
443
manufacturer, whichever is greater. (ii) The operator shall remain within

Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part sight and sound of the signals at the
for design factors for wire rope used in operator’s station.
personnel hoists. The design factor (iii) All sides of personnel cages shall
shall be calculated by dividing the be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm)
breaking strength of wire rope, as re- wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge
ported in the manufacturer’s rating ta- or equivalent) to a height of not less
bles, by the total static load, including than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the
the weight of the wire rope in the shaft cage or skip is being used as a work
when fully extended. platform, its sides may be reduced in
(xix) A competent person shall vis- height to 42 inches 1.07 m) when the
ually check all hoisting machinery, conveyance is not in motion.
equipment, anchorages, and hoisting (iv) All personnel cages shall be pro-
rope at the beginning of each shift and vided with positive locking door that
during hoist use, as necessary. does not open outward.
(xx) Each safety device shall be (v) All personnel cages shall be pro-
checked by a competent person at least vided with a protective canopy. The
weekly during hoist use to ensure suit- canopy shall be made of steel plate, at
able operation and safe condition. least 3⁄16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness,
or material of equivalent strength and
(xxi) In order to ensure suitable oper-
impact resistance. The canopy shall be
ation and safe condition of all func-
sloped to the outside, and so designed
tions and safety devices, each hoist as-
that a section may be readily pushed
sembly shall be inspected and load-
upward to afford emergency egress.
tested to 100 percent of its rated capac-
The canopy shall cover the top in such
ity: at the time of installation; after
a manner as to protect those inside
any repairs or alterations affecting its
from objects falling in the shaft.
structural integrity; after the oper-
(vi) Personnel platforms operating on
ation of any safety device; and annu-
guide rails or guide ropes shall be
ally when in use. The employer shall
equipped with broken-rope safety de-
prepare a certification record which in-
vices, safety catches or arrestment de-
cludes the date each inspection and vices that will stop and hold 150 per-
load-test was performed; the signature cent of the weight of the personnel
of the person who performed the in- platform and its maximum rated load.
spection and test; and a serial number (vii) During sinking operations in
or other identifier for the hoist that shafts where guides and safeties are
was inspected and tested. The most re- not yet used, the travel speed of the
cent certification record shall be main- personnel platform shall not exceed 200
tained on file until completion of the feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor
project. controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per
(xxii) Before hoisting personnel or minute shall be installed in the control
material, the operator shall perform a system and shall be used during per-
test run of any cage or skip whenever sonnel hoisting.
it has been out of service for one com- (viii) The personnel platform may
plete shift, and whenever the assembly travel over the controlled length of the
or components have been repaired or hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet
adjusted. (182.88 m) per minute during sinking
(xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be cor- operations in shafts where guides and
rected before using the equipment. safeties are used.
(4) Additional requirements for per- (ix) The personnel platform may
sonnel hoists. (i) Hoist drum systems travel at rated speeds greater than 600
shall be equipped with at least two feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed
means of stopping the load, each of shafts.
which shall be capable of stopping and (u) Definitions. ‘‘Accept’’—Any de-
holding 150 percent of the hoist’s rated vice, equipment, or appliance that is
line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety either approved by MSHA and main-
catch, or arrestment device is not a tained in permissible condition, or is
permissible means of stopping under listed or labeled for the class and loca-
this paragraph. tion under subpart K of this part.
444
‘‘Rapid Excavation Machine’’—Tun- (b) Warning signals for evacuation of

nel boring machines, shields, employees in case of emergency shall
roadheaders, or any other similar exca- be developed and posted.
vation machine. (c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or
ramps with at least two means of rapid
[54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June exit shall be provided with guardrails
30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr.
as specified in subpart M of this part.
3, 2006] (d) Cofferdams located close to navi-
gable shipping channels shall be pro-
§ 1926.801 Caissons. tected from vessels in transit, where
possible.
(a) Wherever, in caisson work in
which compressed air is used, and the § 1926.803 Compressed air.
working chamber is less than 11 feet in (a) General provisions. (1) There shall
length, and when such caissons are at be present, at all times, at least one
any time suspended or hung while work competent person designated by and
is in progress so that the bottom of the representing the employer, who shall
excavation is more than 9 feet below be familiar with this subpart in all re-
the deck of the working chamber, a spects, and responsible for full compli-
shield shall be erected therein for the ance with these and other applicable
protection of the employees. subparts.
(b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hy- (2) Every employee shall be in-
drostatic or air-pressure test, at which structed in the rules and regulations
pressure they shall be tight. The shaft which concern his safety or the safety
shall be stamped on the outside shell of others.
about 12 inches from each flange to (b) Medical attendance, examination,
show the pressure to which they have and regulations. (1) There shall be re-
been subjected. tained one or more licensed physicians
(c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall familiar with and experienced in the
be provided, where space permits, with physical requirements and the medical
a safe, proper, and suitable staircase aspects of compressed air work and the
for its entire length, including landing treatment of decompression illness. He
platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. shall be available at all times while
Where this is impracticable, suitable work is in progress in order to provide
ladders shall be installed with landing medical supervision of employees em-
platforms located about 20 feet apart to ployed in compressed air work. He
break the climb. shall himself be physically qualified
(d) All caissons having a diameter or and be willing to enter a pressurized
side greater than 10 feet shall be pro- environment.
vided with a man lock and shaft for the (2) No employee shall be permitted to
exclusive use of employees. enter a compressed air environment
until he has been examined by the phy-
(e) In addition to the gauge in the
sician and reported by him to be phys-
locks, an accurate gauge shall be main-
ically qualified to engage in such work.
tained on the outer and inner side of
(3) In the event an employee is absent
each bulkhead. These gauges shall be
from work for 10 days, or is absent due
accessible at all times and kept in ac-
to sickness or injury, he shall not re-
curate working order.
sume work until he is reexamined by
(f) In caisson operations where em- the physician, and his physical condi-
ployees are exposed to compressed air tion reported, as provided in this para-
working environments, the require- graph, to be such as to permit him to
ments contained in § 1926.803 shall be work in compressed air.
complied with. (4) After an employee has been em-
ployed continuously in compressed air
§ 1926.802 Cofferdams.
for a period designated by the physi-
(a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by cian, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall
high waters is possible, means shall be be reexamined by the physician to de-
provided for controlled flooding of the termine if he is still physically quali-
work area. fied to engage in compressed air work.
445
(5) Such physician shall at all times (viii) Be equipped with internal con-
keep a complete and full record of ex- trols which may be overridden by ex-
aminations made by him. The physi- ternal controls;
cian shall also keep an accurate record (ix) Be provided with air pressure
of any decompression illness or other gauges to show the air pressure within
illness or injury incapacitating any each compartment to observers inside
employee for work, and of all loss of and outside the medical lock.
life that occurs in the operation of a (x) Be equipped with a manual type
tunnel, caisson, or other compartment sprinkler system that can be activated
in which compressed air is used. inside the lock or by the outside lock
(6) Records shall be available for the tender.
inspection of the Secretary or his rep- (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines
resentatives, and a copy thereof shall and fittings leading into external
be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours tanks. The lines shall be fitted with
following the occurrence of the acci- check valves to prevent reverse flow.
dent, death, injury, or decompression The oxygen system inside the chamber
illness. It shall state as fully as pos- shall be of a closed circuit design and
sible the cause of said death or decom- be so designed as to automatically shut
pression illness, and the place where off the oxygen supply whenever the fire
the injured or sick employee was system is activated.
taken, and such other relative informa- (xii) Be in constant charge of an at-
tion as may be required by the Sec-
tendant under the direct control of the
retary.
retained physician. The attendant shall
(7) A fully equipped first aid station be trained in the use of the lock and
shall be provided at each tunnel project suitably instructed regarding steps to
regardless of the number of persons be taken in the treatment of employee
employed. An ambulance or transpor- exhibiting symptoms compatible with
tation suitable for a litter case shall be a diagnosis of decompression illness;
at each project.
(xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate
(8) Where tunnels are being excavated emergency medical facility;
from portals more than 5 road miles
(xiv) The medical facility shall be
apart, a first aid station and transpor-
equipped with demand-type oxygen in-
tation facilities shall be provided at
halation equipment approved by the
each portal.
U.S. Bureau of Mines;
(9) A medical lock shall be estab-
(xv) Be capable of being maintained
lished and maintained in immediate
at a temperature, in use, not to exceed
working order whenever air pressure in
90 °F. nor be less than 70 °F.; and
the working chamber is increased
(xvi) Be provided with sources of air,
above the normal atmosphere.
free of oil and carbon monoxide, for
(10) The medical lock shall:
normal and emergency use, which are
(i) Have at least 6 feet of clear head- capable of raising the air pressure in
room at the center, and be subdivided the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 min-
into not less than two compartments; utes.
(ii) Be readily accessible to employ- (11) Identification badges shall be
ees working under compressed air; furnished to all employees, indicating
(iii) Be kept ready for immediate use that the wearer is a compressed air
for at least 5 hours subsequent to the worker. A permanent record shall be
emergence of any employee from the kept of all identification badges issued.
working chamber; The badge shall give the employee’s
(iv) Be properly heated, lighted and name, address of the medical lock, the
ventilated; telephone number of the licensed phy-
(v) Be maintained in a sanitary con- sician for the compressed air project,
dition; and contain instructions that in case of
(vi) Have a nonshatterable port emergency of unknown or doubtful
through which the occupant(s) may be cause or illness, the wearer shall be
kept under constant observation; rushed to the medical lock. The badge
(vii) Be designed for a working pres- shall be worn at all times—off the job,
sure of 75 p.s.i.g. as well as on the job.
446
(c) Telephone and signal communica- lieved. If, after 5 minutes the discom-
tion. (1) Effective and reliable means of fort does not disappear, the lock at-
communication, such as bells, whistles, tendant shall gradually reduce the
or telephones, shall be maintained, at pressure until the employee signals
all times between all the following lo- that the discomfort has ceased. If he
cations: does not indicate that the discomfort
(i) The working chamber face; has disappeared, the lock attendant
(ii) The working chamber side of the shall reduce the pressure to atmos-
man lock near the door; pheric and the employee shall be re-
(iii) The interior of the man lock; leased from the lock.
(iv) Lock attendant’s station; (5) No employee shall be subjected to
(v) The compressor plant; pressure exceeding 50 pounds per
(vi) The first-aid station; square inch except in emergency.
(vii) The emergency lock (if one is re- (f) Decompression. (1) Decompression
quired); and to normal condition shall be in accord-
(viii) The special decompression ance with the Decompression Tables in
chamber (if one is required). Appendix A of this subpart.
(d) Signs and records. (1) The time of
(2) In the event it is necessary for an
decompression shall be posted in each
employee to be in compressed air more
man lock as follows:
than once in a 24-hour period, the ap-
TIME OF DECOMPRESSION FOR THIS LOCK pointed physician shall be responsible
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. for the establishment of methods and
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. procedures of decompression applicable
(Signed by) llllll (Superintendent) to repetitive exposures.
This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at (3) If decanting is necessary, the ap-
all times. pointed physician shall establish proce-
(2) Any code of signals used shall be dures before any employee is permitted
conspicuously posted near workplace to be decompressed by decanting meth-
entrances and such other locations as ods. The period of time that the em-
may be necessary to bring them to the ployees spend at atmospheric pressure
attention of all employees concerned. between the decompression following
(3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of the shift and recompression shall not
employees employed under air pressure exceed 5 minutes.
shall be kept by an employee who shall (g) Man locks and special decompres-
remain outside the lock near the en- sion chambers—(1) Man locks. (i) Except
trance. This record shall show the pe- in emergency, no employees employed
riod each employee spends in the air in compressed air shall be permitted to
chamber and the time taken from de- pass from the working chamber to at-
compression. A copy shall be submitted mospheric pressure until after decom-
to the appointed physician after each pression, in accordance with the proce-
shift. dures in this subpart.
(e) Compression. (1) Every employee (ii) The lock attendant in charge of a
going under air pressure for the first man lock shall be under the direct su-
time shall be instructed on how to pervision of the appointed physician.
avoid excessive discomfort. He shall be stationed at the lock con-
(2) During the compression of em- trols on the free air side during the pe-
ployees, the pressure shall not be in- riod of compression and decompression
creased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within and shall remain at the lock control
the first minute. The pressure shall be station whenever there are men in the
held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. working chamber or in the man lock.
sufficiently long to determine if any (iii) Except where air pressure in the
employees are experiencing discomfort. working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g.,
(3) After the first minute the pres- each man lock shall be equipped with
sure shall be raised uniformly and at a automatic controls which, through
rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. taped programs, cams, or similar appa-
(4) If any employee complains of dis- ratus, shall automatically regulate de-
comfort, the pressure shall be held to compressions. It shall also be equipped
determine if the symptoms are re- with manual controls to permit the
447
lock attendant to override the auto- (xi) In addition to the pressure gauge
matic mechanism in the event of an in the locks, an accurate pressure
emergency, as provided in paragraph gauge shall be maintained on the outer
(g)(1)(viii) of this section. and inner side of each bulkhead. These
(iv) A manual control, which can be gauges shall be accessible at all times
used in the event of an emergency, and shall be kept in accurate working
shall be placed inside the man lock. order.
(v) A clock, thermometer, and con- (xii) Man locks shall have an observa-
tinuous recording pressure gauge with tion port at least 4 inches in diameter
a 4-hour graph shall be installed out- located in such a position that all oc-
side of each man lock and shall be cupants of the man lock may be ob-
changed prior to each shift’s decom- served from the working chamber and
pression. The chart shall be of suffi- from the free air side of the lock.
cient size to register a legible record of (xiii) Adequate ventilation in the
variations in pressure within the man lock shall be provided.
lock and shall be visible to the lock at- (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained
tendant. A copy of each graph shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 °F.
submitted to the appointed physician (xv) When locks are not in use and
after each shift. In addition, a pressure employees are in the working chamber,
gauge, clock, and thermometer shall lock doors shall be kept open to the
also be installed in each man lock. Ad- working chamber, where practicable.
ditional fittings shall be provided so (xvi) Provision shall be made to
that test gauges may be attached allow for rescue parties to enter the
whenever necessary. tunnel if the working force is disabled.
(vi) Except where air pressure is (xvii) A special decompression cham-
below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger ber of sufficient size to accommodate
of rapid flooding, all caissons having a the entire force of employees being de-
working area greater than 150 square compressed at the end of a shift shall
feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 be provided whenever the regularly es-
feet or more in diameter, or equivalent tablished working period requires a
area, shall have at least two locks in total time of decompression exceeding
perfect working condition, one of 75 minutes.
which shall be used exclusively as a (2) Special decompression chamber. (i)
man lock, the other, as a materials The headroom in the special decom-
lock. pression chamber shall be not less than
(vii) Where only a combination man- a minimum 7 feet and the cubical con-
and-materials lock is required, this tent shall provide at least 50 cubic feet
single lock shall be of sufficient capac- of airspace for each employee. For each
ity to hold the employees constituting occupant, there shall be provided 4
two successive shifts. square feet of free walking area and 3
(viii) Emergency locks shall be large square feet of seating space, exclusive
enough to hold an entire heading shift of area required for lavatory and toilet
and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. facilities. The rated capacity shall be
There shall be a chamber available for based on the stated minimum space per
oxygen decompression therapy to 28 employee and shall be posted at the
p.s.i.g. chamber entrance. The posted capacity
(ix) The man lock shall be large shall not be exceeded, except in case of
enough so that those using it are not emergency.
compelled to be in a cramped position, (ii) Each special decompression
and shall not have less than 5 feet clear chamber shall be equipped with the fol-
head room at the center and a min- lowing:
imum of 30 cubic feet of air space per (a) A clock or clocks suitably placed
occupant. so that the attendant and the chamber
(x) Locks on caissons shall be so lo- occupants can readily ascertain the
cated that the bottom door shall be not time;
less than 3 feet above the water level (b) Pressure gauges which will indi-
surrounding the caisson on the outside. cate to the attendants and to the
(The water level, where it is affected by chamber occupants the pressure in the
tides, is construed to mean high tide.) chamber;
448
(c) Valves to enable the attendant to the special chamber to atmospheric

control the supply and discharge of pressure upon the completion of the de-
compressed air into and from the compression procedure.
chamber; (h) Compressor plant and air supply. (1)
(d) Valves and pipes, in connection At all times there shall be a thor-
with the air supply and exhaust, ar- oughly experienced, competent, and re-
ranged so that the chamber pressure liable person on duty at the air control
can be controlled from within and valves as a gauge tender who shall reg-
without; ulate the pressure in the working
(e) Effective means of oral inter- areas. During tunneling operations,
communication between the attendant, one gauge tender may regulate the
occupants of the chamber, and the air pressure in not more than two head-
compressor plant; and ings: Provided, That the gauge and con-
(f) An observation port at the en- trols are all in one location. In caisson
trance to permit observation of the work, there shall be a gauge tender for
chamber occupants. each caisson.
(iii) Seating facilities in special de- (2) The low air compressor plant shall
compression chambers shall be so ar- be of sufficient capacity to not only
ranged as to permit a normal sitting permit the work to be done safely, but
posture without cramping. Seating shall also provide a margin to meet
space, not less than 18 inches by 24 emergencies and repairs.
inches wide, shall be provided per occu-
(3) Low air compressor units shall
pant.
have at least two independent and sep-
(iv) Adequate toilet and washing fa-
arate sources of power supply and each
cilities, in a screened or enclosed re-
shall be capable of operating the entire
cess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls
low air plant and its accessory sys-
shall have a built-in protector on the
tems.
rim so that an air space is created
(4) The capacity, arrangement, and
when the seat lid is closed.
number of compressors shall be suffi-
(v) Fresh and pure drinking water
cient to maintain the necessary pres-
shall be available. This may be accom-
sure without overloading the equip-
plished by either piping water into the
ment and to assure maintenance of
special decompression chamber and
such pressure in the working chamber
providing drinking fountains, or by
during periods of breakdown, repair, or
providing individual canteens, or by
emergency.
some other sanitary means. Commu-
nity drinking vessels are prohibited. (5) Switching from one independent
(vi) No refuse or discarded material source of power supply to the other
of any kind shall be permitted to accu- shall be done periodically to ensure the
mulate, and the chamber shall be kept workability of the apparatus in an
clean. emergency.
(vii) Unless the special decompres- (6) Duplicate low-pressure air
sion chamber is serving as the man feedlines and regulating valves shall be
lock to atmospheric pressure, the spe- provided between the source of air sup-
cial decompression chamber shall be ply and a point beyond the locks with
situated, where practicable, adjacent one of the lines extending to within 100
to the man lock on the atmospheric feet of the working face.
pressure side of the bulkhead. A pas- (7) All high- and low-pressure air sup-
sageway shall be provided, connecting ply lines shall be equipped with check
the special chamber with the man lock, valves.
to permit employees in the process of (8) Low-pressure air shall be regu-
decompression to move from the man lated automatically. In addition,
lock to the special chamber without a manually operated valves shall be pro-
reduction in the ambient pressure from vided for emergency conditions.
that designated for the next stage of (9) The air intakes for all air com-
decompression. The passageway shall pressors shall be located at a place
be so arranged as to not interfere with where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other
the normal operation of the man lock, air contaminants will be at a min-
nor with the release of the occupants of imum.
449
(10) Gauges indicating the pressure in foot-candles, and in all workplaces the
the working chamber shall be installed lighting shall at all times be such as to
in the compressor building, the lock at- enable employees to see clearly.
tendant’s station, and at the employ- (3) All electrical equipment and wir-
er’s field office. ing for light and power circuits shall
(i) Ventilation and air quality. (1) Ex- comply with the requirements of sub-
haust valves and exhaust pipes shall be part K of this part for use in damp,
provided and operated so that the hazardous, high temperature, and com-
working chamber shall be well venti- pressed air environments.
lated, and there shall be no pockets of (4) External parts of lighting fixtures
dead air. Outlets may be required at in- and all other electrical equipment,
termediate points along the main low- when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be
pressure air supply line to the heading constructed of noncombustible, non-
to eliminate such pockets of dead air. absorptive, insulating materials, ex-
Ventilating air shall be not less than 30 cept that metal may be used if it is ef-
cubic feet per minute. fectively grounded.
(2) The air in the workplace shall be (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped
analyzed by the employer not less than with noncombustible, nonabsorptive,
once each shift, and records of such insulating sockets, approved handles,
tests shall be kept on file at the place basket guards, and approved cords.
where the work is in progress. The test
(6) The use of worn or defective port-
results shall be within the threshold
able and pendant conductors is prohib-
limit values specified in subpart D of
ited.
this part, for hazardous gases, and
(k) Sanitation. (1) Sanitary, heated,
within 10 percent of the lower explosive
lighted, and ventilated dressing rooms
limit of flammable gases. If these lim-
and drying rooms shall be provided for
its are not met, immediate action to
all employees engaged in compressed
correct the situation shall be taken by
air work. Such rooms shall contain
the employer.
suitable benches and lockers. Bathing
(3) The temperature of all working
accommodations (showers at the ratio
chambers which are subjected to air
of one to 10 employees per shift),
pressure shall, by means of after-cool-
equipped with running hot and cold
ers or other suitable devices, be main-
water, and suitable and adequate toilet
tained at a temperature not to exceed
accommodations, shall be provided.
85 °F.
One toilet for each 15 employees, or
(4) Forced ventilation shall be pro-
fractional part thereof, shall be pro-
vided during decompression. During
vided.
the entire decompression period, forced
ventilation through chemical or me- (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a
chanical air purifying devices that will cover, there should be an air space so
ensure a source of fresh air shall be that the bowl or bucket does not im-
provided. plode when pressure is increased.
(5) Whenever heat-producing ma- (3) All parts of caissons and other
chines (moles, shields) are used in com- working compartments shall be kept in
pressed air tunnel operations, a posi- a sanitary condition.
tive means of removing the heat build- (l) Fire prevention and protection. (1)
up at the heading shall be provided. Firefighting equipment shall be avail-
(j) Electricity. (1) All lighting in com- able at all times and shall be main-
pressed-air chambers shall be by elec- tained in working condition.
tricity exclusively, and two inde- (2) While welding or flame-cutting is
pendent electric-lighting systems with being done in compressed air, a
independent sources of supply shall be firewatch with a fire hose or approved
used. The emergency source shall be extinguisher shall stand by until such
arranged to become automatically op- operation is completed.
erative in the event of failure of the (3) Shafts and caissons containing
regularly used source. flammable material of any kind, either
(2) The minimum intensity of light above or below ground, shall be pro-
on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or vided with a waterline and a fire hose
working level shall be not less than 10 connected thereto, so arranged that all
450
points of the shaft or caisson are with- combustible material shall not be used
in reach of the hose stream. in the working chamber in quantities
(4) Fire hose shall be at least 11⁄2 which could cause a fire hazard. The
inches in nominal diameter; the water compressor building shall be con-
pressure shall at all times be adequate structed of non-combustible material.
for efficient operation of the type of (9) Man locks shall be equipped with
nozzle used; and the water supply shall a manual type fire extinguisher system
be such as to ensure an uninterrupted that can be activated inside the man
flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall lock and also by the outside lock at-
be located or guarded to prevent injury tendant. In addition, a fire hose and
thereto. portable fire extinguisher shall be pro-
(5) The power house, compressor vided inside and outside the man lock.
house, and all buildings housing ven- The portable fire extinguisher shall be
tilating equipment, shall be provided the dry chemical type.
with at least one hose connection in (10) Equipment, fixtures, and fur-
the water line, with a fire hose con- niture in man locks and special decom-
nected thereto. A fire hose shall be pression chambers shall be constructed
maintained within reach of structures of noncombustible materials. Bedding,
of wood over or near shafts. etc., shall be chemically treated so as
(6) Tunnels shall be provided with a to be fire resistant.
2-inch minimum diameter water line
(11) Head frames shall be constructed
extending into the working chamber
of structural steel or open frame-work
and to within 100 feet of the working
fireproofed timber. Head houses and
face. Such line shall have hose outlets
other temporary surface buildings or
with 100 feet of fire hose attached and
structures within 100 feet of the shaft,
maintained as follows: One at the
caisson, or tunnel opening shall be
working face; one immediately inside
built of fire-resistant materials.
of the bulkhead of the working cham-
ber; and one immediately outside such (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combus-
bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets tible material shall be stored within
shall be provided at 200-foot intervals 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel
throughout the length of the tunnel, opening, except that oils may be stored
and 100 feet of fire hose shall be at- in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof
tached to the outlet nearest to any lo- buildings, provided such buildings are
cation where flammable material is not less than 50 feet from any shaft,
being kept or stored or where any caisson, or tunnel opening, or any
flame is being used. building directly connected thereto.
(7) In addition to fire hose protection (13) Positive means shall be taken to
required by this subpart, on every floor prevent leaking flammable liquids
of every building not under compressed from flowing into the areas specifically
air, but used in connection with the mentioned in the preceding paragraph.
compressed air work, there shall be (14) All explosives used in connection
provided at least one approved fire ex- with compressed air work shall be se-
tinguisher of the proper type for the lected, stored, transported, and used as
hazard involved. At least two approved specified in subpart U of this part.
fire extinguishers shall be provided in (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (1)
the working chamber as follows: One at Intermediate bulkheads with locks, or
the working face and one immediately intermediate safety screens or both,
inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Ex- are required where there is the danger
tinguishers in the working chamber of rapid flooding.
shall use water as the primary extin- (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in di-
guishing agent and shall not use any ameter, hanging walkways shall be
extinguishing agent which could be provided from the face to the man lock
harmful to the employees in the work- as high in the tunnel as practicable,
ing chamber. The fire extinguisher with at least 6 feet of head room. Walk-
shall be protected from damage. ways shall be constructed of non-
(8) Highly combustible materials combustible material. Standard rail-
shall not be used or stored in the work- ings shall be securely installed
ing chamber. Wood, paper, and similar throughout the length of all walkways
451
on open sides in accordance with sub- (j) Normal condition—One during

part M of this part. Where walkways which exposure to compressed air is
are ramped under safety screens, the limited to a single continuous working
walkway surface shall be skidproofed period followed by a single decompres-
by cleats or by equivalent means. sion in any given 24-hour period; the
(3) Bulkheads used to contain com- total time of exposure to compressed
pressed air shall be tested, where prac- air during the single continuous work-
ticable, to prove their ability to resist ing period is not interrupted by expo-
the highest air pressure which may be sure to normal atmospheric pressure,
expected to be used. and a second exposure to compressed
air does not occur until at least 12 con-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
secutive hours of exposure to normal
1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6,
1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, atmospheric pressure has elapsed since
Feb. 13, 1996] the employee has been under pressure.
(k) Pressure—A force acting on a unit
§ 1926.804 Definitions applicable to area. Usually shown as pounds per
this subpart. square inch. (p.s.i.)
(a) Bulkhead—An airtight structure (l) Absolute pressure (p.s.i.a.)—The
separating the working chamber from sum of the atmospheric pressure and
free air or from another chamber under gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.).
a lesser pressure than the working (m) Atmospheric pressure—The pres-
pressure. sure of air at sea level, usually 14.7
(b) Caisson—A wood, steel, concrete p.s.i.a. (1 atmosphere), or 0 p.s.i.g.
or reinforced concrete, air- and water- (n) Gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.)—Pressure
tight chamber in which it is possible measured by a gauge and indicating
for men to work under air pressure the pressure exceeding atmospheric.
greater than atmospheric pressure to (o) Safety screen—An air- and water-
excavate material below water level. tight diaphragm placed across the
upper part of a compressed air tunnel
(c) Decanting—A method used for de-
between the face and bulkhead, in
compressing under emergency cir-
order to prevent flooding the crown of
cumstances. In this procedure, the em-
the tunnel between the safety screen
ployees are brought to atmospheric
and the bulkhead, thus providing a safe
pressure with a very high gas tension
means of refuge and exit from a flood-
in the tissues and then immediately re-
ing or flooded tunnel.
compressed in a second and separate
chamber or lock. (p) Special decompression chamber—A
chamber to provide greater comfort of
(d) Emergency locks—A lock designed
employees when the total decompres-
to hold and permit the quick passage of
sion time exceeds 75 minutes.
an entire shift of employees.
(q) Working chamber—The space or
(e) High air—Air pressure used to sup- compartment under air pressure in
ply power to pneumatic tools and de- which the work is being done.
vices.
(f) Low air—Air supplied to pressurize APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART
working chambers and locks. 1926—DECOMPRESSION TABLES
(g) Man lock—A chamber through
which men pass from one air pressure 1. Explanation. The decompression tables
are computed for working chamber pressures
environment into another.
from 0 to 14 pounds, and from 14 to 50 pounds
(h) Materials lock—A chamber per square inch gauge inclusive by 2-pound
through which materials and equip- increments and for exposure times for each
ment pass from one air pressure envi- pressure extending from one-half to over 8
ronment into another. hours inclusive. Decompressions will be con-
(i) Medical lock—A special chamber in ducted by two or more stages with a max-
which employees are treated for de- imum of four stages, the latter for a working
chamber pressure of 40 pounds per square
compression illness. It may also be inch gauge or over.
used in preemployment physical ex- Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient
aminations to determine the adapt- pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16
ability of the prospective employee to pounds per square inch, but in no instance
changes in pressure. will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds
452
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A
at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pres- Examples Minutes
sure in stage 1 will always take place at a
rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute. Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20
pounds gauge.
Further reduction in pressure will take Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4
place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as hours, total decompression time ...................... 43
required at a slower rate, but in no event at Decompression Table No. 2:
a rate greater than 1 pound per minute. Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds
to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the
pounds per minute.
body of the table the total decompression Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
time in minutes for various combinations of Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a
working chamber pressure and exposure uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
time. gage over a period of 40 minutes.
Rate—0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes
Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for per pound.
the same various combinations of working Stage 2 (final) elapsed time ......................... 40
chamber pressure and exposure time the fol-
lowing: Total time .............................................. 43
Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24
a. The number of stages required;
pounds gage.
b. The reduction in pressure and the ter- Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5
minal pressure for each required stage; hours, total decompression time ...................... 117
c. The time in minutes through which the Decompression Table No. 2:
reduction in pressure is accomplished for Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds
to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
each required stage; pounds per minute.
d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
per pound for each required stage; Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate
from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Pressure Reduction of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute
in Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform elapsed time, stage 2 ............................... 4
Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values Transfer men to special decompression
Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher chamber maintaining the 4-pound pres-
Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Expo- sure during the transfer operation.
Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decom-
sure Time Should the Actual Working Cham- pression chamber, reduce the pressure at
ber Pressure or the Actual Exposure Time, a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
Respectively, Fall Between Those for Which gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate,
Calculated Values Are Shown in the Body of 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes
the Tables. per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time ... 110
Total time .............................................. 117
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 1—TOTAL DECOMPRESSION TIME

Working period hours
Work pressure p.s.i.g. Over
⁄
12 1 1 ⁄
12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8
9 to 12 ........................................ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14 ................................................ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33
16 ................................................ 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62
18 ................................................ 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87
20 ................................................ 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113
22 ................................................ 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133
24 ................................................ 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151
26 ................................................ 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163
28 ................................................ 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183
30 ................................................ 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204
32 ................................................ 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226
34 ................................................ 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248
36 ................................................ 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273
38 ................................................ 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278
40 ................................................ 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288
42 ................................................ 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293
44 ................................................ 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293
46 ................................................ 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318
48 ................................................ 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 ..........
50 ................................................ 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 .......... .......... ..........
453
Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2

[Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]
Decompression data
Working
Working chamber pressure Total time
period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure
p.s.i.g. decom-
hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate press min-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
14 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
1 1⁄2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
6 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
7 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 32
16 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 ⁄
12 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
3 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
4 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 3.50 17
6 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 33
7 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
18 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1⁄2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
3 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 8 2.00 11
4 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 17
5 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
6 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
7 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 84 21.00 87
454
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
20 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................

2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1⁄2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
3 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
4 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 40 10.00 43
5 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
6 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
7 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 80 20.00 83
8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 25.00 103
Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 110 27.50 113
22 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 ⁄
12 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 13 2.20 16
2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 21 3.50 24
3 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 35 5.85 38
4 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 65 10.83 68
5 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 90 15.00 93
6 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 16.67 103
7 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 110 18.35 113
8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 125 20.80 128
Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 130 21.70 133
24 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 11
1 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 12
1 1⁄2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 16 4.00 23
2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 27
3 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 52
4 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.25 92
5 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 117
6 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
455

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 122
7 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 127
8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 137
Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 8 2.00 ..................
3 4 0 140 35.00 151
26 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 13
1 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 14
1 1⁄2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 29
2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 34
3 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 69
4 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 104
5 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 126
6 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 141
7 1 26 10 3 2.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 32.50 163
28 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 15
1 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 12 3.00 23
1 1⁄2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 31
2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 41
3 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 10 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 98
4 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 14 1.75 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 127
5 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 143
6 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
456

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 153
7 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 32.50 153
8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 32 4.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 50 6.25 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 183
30 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 17
1 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 15 3.75 28
1 1⁄2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 38
2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 14 1.40 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 62
3 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 17 1.70 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 105
4 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 30 3.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 143
5 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
6 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 168
7 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 45 4.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 55 5.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 188
Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 71 7.10 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 204
32 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 19
1 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 35
1 1⁄2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 15 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 43
2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 22 1.83 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 85
3 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 28 2.33 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 126
4 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 40 3.33 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 163
5 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
6 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
457

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 193
7 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 70 5.83 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 203
8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 80 6.67 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 213
Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 93 7.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 226
34 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 21
1 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 22 5.50 39
1 1⁄2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 25 1.80 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 58
2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 35 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 98
3 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 43 3.10 ..................
3 4 0 105 26.25 151
4 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 178
5 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 62 4.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 195
6 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 85 6.07 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 218
7 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 90 6.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 233
Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 115 8.23 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 248
36 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 24
1 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 44
1 1⁄2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 30 1.88 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 63
2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 40 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 70 17.50 113
3 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 52 3.25 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.75 170
4 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 65 4.06 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 198
5 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 90 5.63 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
6 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
458

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 20 4 100 6.25 ..................

3 4 0 130 32.50 233
7 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 110 6.88 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 243
8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 120 7.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 253
Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 140 8.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 273
38 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 9 1.50 28
1 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 30 5.00 49
1 1⁄2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 20 1.25 ..................
3 6 0 50 8.34 73
2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 30 1.88 ..................
3 6 0 95 15.83 128
3 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 35 2.19 ..................
3 6 0 140 23.35 178
4 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 50 3.12 ..................
3 6 0 150 25.00 203
5 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 55 3.44 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 223
6 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 70 4.38 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 238
7 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 85 5.32 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 253
8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 95 5.93 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 263
Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 110 6.88 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 278
40 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 8 2.00 31
1 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 5 1.25 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 49
1 1⁄2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 45 11.25 84
2 2 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
1 24 8 25 1.56 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 143
3 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 30 1.88 ..................
3 8 4 30 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 183
4 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 45 2.81 ..................
459

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 8 4 35 8.75 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 213
5 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 47 2.94 ..................
3 8 4 53 13.25 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 233
6 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 55 3.44 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 248
7 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 65 4.06 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 258
8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 75 4.70 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 95 5.93 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 288
42 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 12 3.00 37
1 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 12 2.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 56
1 1⁄2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 23 3.83 ..................
4 4 0 60 15.00 102
2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 144
3 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 50 8.34 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 189
4 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 17 1.06 ..................
3 10 4 65 10.83 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 215
5 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 85 14.18 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 245
6 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 260
7 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 30 1.88 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 263
8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 35 2.19 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 60 3.75 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
460

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
44 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................

2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 16 4.00 43
1 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 64
1 1⁄2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 27 3.38 ..................
4 4 0 72 18.00 118
2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 40 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 154
3 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 60 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 199
4 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 85 10.62 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 234
5 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 105 13.13 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 254
6 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 115 14.38 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 264
7 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 40 2.50 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
46 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 15 3.75 44
1 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 25 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 30 7.50 74
1 1⁄2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
4 4 0 85 21.20 139
2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 47 4.70 ..................
4 4 0 105 26.25 171
3 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 65 6.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 214
4 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
461

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 14 4 95 9.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 244
5 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 120 12.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
6 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 125 12.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 274
7 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 140 14.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 289
8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 150 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 299
Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 25 1.56 ..................
3 14 4 160 16.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 318
48 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 20 5.00 51
1 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 35 2.92 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 89
1 1⁄2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
4 4 0 80 20.00 144
2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 110 27.50 189
3 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 90 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 229
4 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 120 10.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
5 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 140 11.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 209
6 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 160 13.33 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 309
7 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
8 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
50 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 58
462

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
1 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 40 2.86 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 94
1 1⁄2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
4 4 0 90 22.50 164
2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 70 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 209
3 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 249
4 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 130 8.58 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 279
5 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 160 11.42 ..................
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—CONTINUED

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
4 4 0 130 32.50 309

6 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 180 12.85 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 329
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6. 1979; as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993]
Subpart T—Demolition unplanned collapse of any portion of

the structure. Any adjacent structure
where employees may be exposed shall
and Safety Standards Act (Construction also be similarly checked. The em-
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- ployer shall have in writing evidence
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 that such a survey has been performed.
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s (b) When employees are required to
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
work within a structure to be demol-
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable.
ished which has been damaged by fire,
§ 1926.850 Preparatory operations. flood, explosion, or other cause, the
walls or floor shall be shored or braced.
(a) Prior to permitting employees to
start demolition operations, an engi- (c) All electric, gas, water, steam,
neering survey shall be made, by a sewer, and other service lines shall be
competent person, of the structure to shut off, capped, or otherwise con-
determine the condition of the fram- trolled, outside the building line before
ing, floors, and walls, and possibility of demolition work is started. In each
463
case, any utility company which is in- be completely protected by sidewalk

volved shall be notified in advance. sheds or canopies, or both, providing
(d) If it is necessary to maintain any protection from the face of the build-
power, water or other utilities during ing for a minimum of 8 feet. All such
demolition, such lines shall be tempo- canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider
rarily relocated, as necessary, and pro- than the building entrances or open-
tected. ings (1 foot wider on each side thereof),
(e) It shall also be determined if any and shall be capable of sustaining a
type of hazardous chemicals, gases, ex- load of 150 pounds per square foot.
plosives, flammable materials, or simi-
larly dangerous substances have been § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and
used in any pipes, tanks, or other ladders.
equipment on the property. When the
presence of any such substances is ap- (a) Only those stairways, passage-
parent or suspected, testing and purg- ways, and ladders, designated as means
ing shall be performed and the hazard of access to the structure of a building,
eliminated before demolition is start- shall be used. Other access ways shall
ed. be entirely closed at all times.
(f) Where a hazard exists from frag- (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders
mentation of glass, such hazards shall and incidental equipment thereto,
be removed. which are covered by this section, shall
(g) Where a hazard exists to employ- be periodically inspected and main-
ees falling through wall openings, the tained in a clean safe condition.
opening shall be protected to a height (c) In a multistory building, when a
of approximately 42 inches. stairwell is being used, it shall be prop-
(h) When debris is dropped through erly illuminated by either natural or
holes in the floor without the use of artificial means, and completely and
chutes, the area onto which the mate- substantially covered over at a point
rial is dropped shall be completely en- not less than two floors below the floor
closed with barricades not less than 42 on which work is being performed, and
inches high and not less than 6 feet access to the floor where the work is in
back from the projected edge of the
progress shall be through a properly
opening above. Signs, warning of the
lighted, protected, and separate pas-
hazard of falling materials, shall be
sageway.
posted at each level. Removal shall not
be permitted in this lower area until § 1926.852 Chutes.
debris handling ceases above.
(i) All floor openings, not used as ma- (a) No material shall be dropped to
terial drops, shall be covered over with any point lying outside the exterior
material substantial enough to support walls of the structure unless the area is
the weight of any load which may be effectively protected.
imposed. Such material shall be prop- (b) All materials chutes, or sections
erly secured to prevent its accidental thereof, at an angle of more than 45°
movement. from the horizontal, shall be entirely
(j) Except for the cutting of holes in enclosed, except for openings equipped
floors for chutes, holes through which with closures at or about floor level for
to drop materials, preparation of stor- the insertion of materials. The open-
age space, and similar necessary pre- ings shall not exceed 48 inches in
paratory work, the demolition of exte- height measured along the wall of the
rior walls and floor construction shall chute. At all stories below the top
begin at the top of the structure and
floor, such openings shall be kept
proceed downward. Each story of exte-
closed when not in use.
rior wall and floor construction shall
be removed and dropped into the stor- (c) A substantial gate shall be in-
age space before commencing the re- stalled in each chute at or near the dis-
moval of exterior walls and floors in charge end. A competent employee
the story next below. shall be assigned to control the oper-
(k) Employee entrances to multi- ation of the gate, and the backing and
story structures being demolished shall loading of trucks.
464
(d) When operations are not in (d) Structural or load-supporting

progress, the area surrounding the dis- members on any floor shall not be cut
charge end of a chute shall be securely or removed until all stories above such
closed off. a floor have been demolished and re-
(e) Any chute opening, into which moved. This provision shall not pro-
workmen dump debris, shall be prohibit the cutting of floor beams for the
tected by a substantial guardrail ap- disposal of materials or for the instal-
proximately 42 inches above the floor lation of equipment, provided that the
or other surface on which the men requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855
stand to dump the material. Any space are met.
between the chute and the edge of (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of
openings in the floors through which it any wall being demolished shall be
passes shall be solidly covered over. planked solid, except when employees
(f) Where the material is dumped are kept out of the area below.
from mechanical equipment or wheel- (f) In buildings of ‘‘skeleton-steel’’
barrows, a securely attached toeboard construction, the steel framing may be
or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick left in place during the demolition of
and 6 inches high, shall be provided at masonry. Where this is done, all steel
each chute opening. beams, girders, and similar structural
(g) Chutes shall be designed and con- supports shall be cleared of all loose
structed of such strength as to elimi- material as the masonry demolition
nate failure due to impact of materials progresses downward.
or debris loaded therein. (g) Walkways or ladders shall be pro-
vided to enable employees to safely
§ 1926.853 Removal of materials
through floor openings. reach or leave any scaffold or wall.
(h) Walls, which serve as retaining
Any openings cut in a floor for the walls to support earth or adjoining
disposal of materials shall be no larger structures, shall not be demolished
in size than 25 percent of the aggregate until such earth has been properly
of the total floor area, unless the lat- braced or adjoining structures have
eral supports of the removed flooring been properly underpinned.
remain in place. Floors weakened or (i) Walls, which are to serve as re-
otherwise made unsafe by demolition
taining walls against which debris will
operations shall be shored to carry
be piled, shall not be so used unless ca-
safely the intended imposed load from
pable of safely supporting the imposed
demolition operations.
load.
§ 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry
sections, and chimneys. § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
(a) Masonry walls, or other sections (a) Openings cut in a floor shall ex-
of masonry, shall not be permitted to tend the full span of the arch between
fall upon the floors of the building in supports.
such masses as to exceed the safe car- (b) Before demolishing any floor
rying capacities of the floors. arch, debris and other material shall be
(b) No wall section, which is more removed from such arch and other ad-
than one story in height, shall be per- jacent floor area. Planks not less than
mitted to stand alone without lateral 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section,
bracing, unless such wall was origi- full size undressed, shall be provided
nally designed and constructed to for, and shall be used by employees to
stand without such lateral support, and stand on while breaking down floor
is in a condition safe enough to be self- arches between beams. Such planks
supporting. All walls shall be left in a shall be so located as to provide a safe
stable condition at the end of each support for the workmen should the
shift. arch between the beams collapse. The
(c) Employees shall not be permitted open space between planks shall not
to work on the top of a wall when exceed 16 inches.
weather conditions constitute a haz- (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18
ard. inches wide, formed of planks not less
465
than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equiv- does not endanger the stability of the
alent strength if metal, shall be pro- structure.
vided and used by workmen when nec- (e) Storage space into which material
essary to enable them to reach any is dumped shall be blocked off, except
point without walking upon exposed for openings necessary for the removal
beams. of material. Such openings shall be
(d) Stringers of ample strength shall kept closed at all times when material
be installed to support the flooring is not being removed.
planks, and the ends of such stringers
shall be supported by floor beams or § 1926.858 Removal of steel construc-
girders, and not by floor arches alone. tion.
(e) Planks shall be laid together over (a) When floor arches have been re-
solid bearings with the ends overlap- moved, planking in accordance with
ping at least 1 foot. § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the
(f) When floor arches are being re- workers engaged in razing the steel
moved, employees shall not be allowed framing.
in the area directly underneath, and (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoist-
such an area shall be barricaded to pre- ing equipment used shall meet the re-
vent access to it. quirements specified in subpart N of
(g) Demolition of floor arches shall this part.
not be started until they, and the sur- (c) Steel construction shall be dis-
rounding floor area for a distance of 20 mantled column length by column
feet, have been cleared of debris and length, and tier by tier (columns may
any other unnecessary materials. be in two-story lengths).
§ 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, (d) Any structural member being dis-
and material with equipment. membered shall not be overstressed.
(a) Mechanical equipment shall not § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
be used on floors or working surfaces
unless such floors or surfaces are of (a) No workers shall be permitted in
sufficient strength to support the im- any area, which can be adversely af-
posed load. fected by demolition operations, when
(b) Floor openings shall have curbs or balling or clamming is being per-
stop-logs to prevent equipment from formed. Only those workers necessary
running over the edge. for the performance of the operations
(c) Mechanical equipment used shall shall be permitted in this area at any
meet the requirements specified in sub- other time.
parts N and O of this part. (b) The weight of the demolition ball
shall not exceed 50 percent of the
§ 1926.857 Storage. crane’s rated load, based on the length
(a) The storage of waste material and of the boom and the maximum angle of
debris on any floor shall not exceed the operation at which the demolition ball
allowable floor loads. will be used, or it shall not exceed 25
(b) In buildings having wooden floor percent of the nominal breaking
construction, the flooring boards may strength of the line by which it is sus-
be removed from not more than one pended, whichever results in a lesser
floor above grade to provide storage value.
space for debris, provided falling mate- (c) The crane boom and loadline shall
rial is not permitted to endanger the be as short as possible.
stability of the structure. (d) The ball shall be attached to the
(c) When wood floor beams serve to loadline with a swivel-type connection
brace interior walls or free-standing to prevent twisting of the loadline, and
exterior walls, such beams shall be left shall be attached by positive means in
in place until other equivalent support such manner that the weight cannot
can be installed to replace them. become accidentally disconnected.
(d) Floor arches, to an elevation of (e) When pulling over walls or por-
not more than 25 feet above grade, may tions thereof, all steel members af-
be removed to provide storage area for fected shall have been previously cut
debris: Provided, That such removal free.
466
(f) All roof cornices or other such or- with explosives. All employees shall be
namental stonework shall be removed removed to a safe area and the fire area
prior to pulling walls over. guarded against intruders.
(g) During demoliton, continuing in- (g) Original containers, or Class II
spections by a competent person shall magazines, shall be used for taking det-
be made as the work progresses to de- onators and other explosives from stor-
tect hazards resulting from weakened age magazines to the blasting area.
or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loos- (h) When blasting is done in con-
ened material. No employee shall be gested areas or in proximity to a struc-
permitted to work where such hazards
ture, railway, or highway, or any other
exist until they are corrected by shor-
installation that may be damaged, the
ing, bracing, or other effective means.
blaster shall take special precautions
§ 1926.860 Selective demolition by ex- in the loading, delaying, initiation, and
plosives. confinement of each blast with mats or
Selective demolition by explosives other methods so as to control the
shall be conducted in accordance with throw of fragments, and thus prevent
the applicable sections of subpart U of bodily injury to employees.
this part. (i) Employees authorized to prepare
explosive charges or conduct blasting
Subpart U—Blasting and the Use operations shall use every reasonable
of Explosives precaution including, but not limited
to, visual and audible warning signals,
flags, or barricades, to ensure employee
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); safety.
secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health (j) Insofar as possible, blasting oper-
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary ations above ground shall be conducted
of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 between sunup and sundown.
(41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 6–96 (62 FR
(k) Due precautions shall be taken to
111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
prevent accidental discharge of electric
§ 1926.900 General provisions. blasting caps from current induced by
(a) The employer shall permit only radar, radio transmitters, lightning,
authorized and qualified persons to adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or
handle and use explosives. other sources of extraneous electricity.
(b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open These precautions shall include:
flame lamps, and other fires, flame or (1) Detonators shall be short-
heat producing devices and sparks shall circuited in holes which have been
be prohibited in or near explosive mag- primed and shunted until wired into
azines or while explosives are being the blasting circuit.
handled, transported or used. (2) The suspension of all blasting op-
(c) No person shall be allowed to han- erations and removal of persons from
dle or use explosives while under the the blasting area during the approach
influence of intoxicating liquors, nar- and progress of an electric storm;
cotics, or other dangerous drugs. (3) (i) The prominent display of ade-
(d) All explosives shall be accounted quate signs, warning against the use of
for at all times. Explosives not being mobile radio transmitters, on all roads
used shall be kept in a locked maga- within 1,000 feet of blasting operations.
zine, unavailable to persons not au- Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot
thorized to handle them. The employer
distance would create an operational
shall maintain an inventory and use
handicap, a competent person shall be
record of all explosives. Appropriate
consulted to evaluate the particular
authorities shall be notified of any
loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into situation, and alternative provisions
a magazine. may be made which are adequately de-
(e) No explosives or blasting agents signed to prevent any premature firing
shall be abandoned. of electric blasting caps. A description
(f) No fire shall be fought where the of any such alternatives shall be re-
fire is in imminent danger of contact duced to writing and shall be certified
467
as meeting the purposes of this subdivi- (q) All loading and firing shall be di-
sion by the competent person con- rected and supervised by competent
sulted. The description shall be main- persons thoroughly experienced in this
tained at the construction site during field.
the duration of the work, and shall be (r) All blasts shall be fired elec-
available for inspection by representa- trically with an electric blasting ma-
tives of the Secretary of Labor. chine or properly designed electric
(ii) Specimens of signs which would power source, except as provided in
meet the requirements of paragraph § 1926.906 (a) and (r).
(k)(3) of this section are the following: (s) Buildings used for the mixing of
blasting agents shall conform to the re-
quirements of this section.
(1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
tible construction or sheet metal on
wood studs.
(2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
materials.
(3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall
be separated from the mixing plant and
located in such a manner that in case
(4) Ensuring that mobile radio trans- of tank rupture, the oil will drain away
mitters which are less than 100 feet from the mixing plant building.
away from electric blasting caps, in (4) The building shall be well venti-
other than original containers, shall be lated.
deenergized and effectively locked; (5) Heating units which do not depend
(5) Compliance with the rec- on combustion processes, when prop-
ommendations of The Institute of the erly designed and located, may be used
Makers of Explosives with regard to in the building. All direct sources of
blasting in the vicinity of radio trans- heat shall be provided exclusively from
mitters as stipulated in Radio Fre- units located outside the mixing build-
quency Energy—A Potential Hazard in ing.
the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME (6) All internal-combustion engines
Publication No. 20, March 1971. used for electric power generation shall
(l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber be located outside the mixing plant
packing materials, which have pre- building, or shall be properly venti-
viously contained high explosives, lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
shall not be used again for any purpose, haust systems on all such engines shall
but shall be destroyed by burning at an be located so any spark emission can-
approved location. not be a hazard to any materials in or
(m) Explosives, blasting agents, and adjacent to the plant.
blasting supplies that are obviously de- (t) Buildings used for the mixing of
teriorated or damaged shall not be water gels shall conform to the re-
used. quirements of this subdivision.
(n) Delivery and issue of explosives (1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
shall only be made by and to author- tible construction or sheet metal on
ized persons and into authorized maga- wood studs.
zines or approved temporary storage or (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
handling areas. of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
(o) Blasting operations in the prox- materials.
imity of overhead power lines, commu- (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil
nication lines, utility services, or other storage facilities shall be separated
services and structures shall not be from the mixing plant and located in
carried on until the operators and/or such a manner that in case of tank rup-
owners have been notified and meas- ture, the oil will drain away from the
ures for safe control have been taken. mixing plant building.
(p) The use of black powder shall be (4) The building shall be well venti-
prohibited. lated.
468
EC30OC91.049</GPH>
(5) Heating units that do not depend (c) No person shall smoke, or carry
on combustion processes, when prop- matches or any other flame-producing
erly designed and located, may be used device, nor shall firearms or loaded
in the building. All direct sources of cartridges be carried while in or near a
heat shall be provided exclusively from motor vehicle or conveyance trans-
units located outside of the mixing porting explosives.
building. (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and
(6) All internal-combustion engines blasting supplies shall not be trans-
used for electric power generation shall ported with other materials or cargoes.
be located outside the mixing plant
Blasting caps (including electric) shall
building, or shall be properly venti-
not be transported in the same vehicle
lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
haust systems on all such engines shall with other explosives.
be located so any spark emission can- (e) Vehicles used for transporting ex-
not be a hazard to any materials in or plosives shall be strong enough to
adjacent to the plant. carry the load without difficulty, and
shall be in good mechanical condition.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(f) When explosives are transported
by a vehicle with an open body, a Class
§ 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. II magazine or original manufacturer’s
(a) A blaster shall be able to under- container shall be securely mounted on
stand and give written and oral orders. the bed to contain the cargo.
(b) A blaster shall be in good physical (g) All vehicles used for the transpor-
condition and not be addicted to nar- tation of explosives shall have tight
cotics, intoxicants, or similar types of floors and any exposed spark-producing
drugs. metal on the inside of the body shall be
(c) A blaster shall be qualified, by covered with wood, or other non-
reason of training, knowledge, or expe- sparking material, to prevent contact
rience, in the field of transporting, with containers of explosives.
storing, handling, and use of explo- (h) Every motor vehicle or convey-
sives, and have a working knowledge of ance used for transporting explosives
State and local laws and regulations shall be marked or placarded on both
which pertain to explosives. sides, the front, and the rear with the
(d) Blasters shall be required to fur- word ‘‘Explosives’’ in red letters, not
nish satisfactory evidence of com- less than 4 inches in height, on white
petency in handling explosives and per- background. In addition to such mark-
forming in a safe manner the type of ing or placarding, the motor vehicle or
blasting that will be required. conveyance may display, in such a
(e) The blaster shall be knowledge- manner that it will be readily visible
able and competent in the use of each from all directions, a red flag 18 inches
type of blasting method used. by 30 inches, with the word ‘‘Explo-
§ 1926.902 Surface transportation of sives’’ painted, stamped, or sewed
explosives. thereon, in white letters, at least 6
inches in height.
(a) Transportation of explosives shall
meet the provisions of Department of (i) Each vehicle used for transpor-
Transportation regulations contained tation of explosives shall be equipped
in 46 CFR parts 146–149, Water Carriers; with a fully charged fire extinguisher,
49 CFR parts 171–179, Highways and in good condition. An Underwriters
Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; Laboratory-approved extinguisher of
and 49 CFR parts 390–397, Motor Car- not less than 10-ABC rating will meet
riers. the minimum requirement. The driver
(b) Motor vehicles or conveyances shall be trained in the use of the extin-
transporting explosives shall only be guisher on his vehicle.
driven by, and be in the charge of, a li- (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances
censed driver who is physically fit. He carrying explosives, blasting agents, or
shall be familiar with the local, State, blasting supplies, shall not be taken in-
and Federal regulation governing the side a garage or shop for repairs or
transportation of explosives. servicing.
469
(k) No motor vehicle transporting ex- (k) No explosives or blasting agents

plosives shall be left unattended. shall be transported on a man haul
trip.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(l) The car or conveyance containing
explosives or blasting agents shall be
§ 1926.903 Underground transpor- pulled, not pushed, whenever possible.
tation of explosives. (m) The powder car or conveyance es-
pecially built for the purpose of trans-
(a) All explosives or blasting agents
porting explosives or blasting agents
in transit underground shall be taken
shall bear a reflectorized sign on each
to the place of use or storage without
side with the word ‘‘Explosives’’ in let-
delay.
ters, not less than 4 inches in height;
(b) The quantity of explosives or upon a background of sharply con-
blasting agents taken to an under- trasting color.
ground loading area shall not exceed (n) Compartments for transporting
the amount estimated to be necessary detonators and explosives in the same
for the blast. car or conveyance shall be physically
(c) Explosives in transit shall not be separated by a distance of 24 inches or
left unattended. by a solid partition at least 6 inches
(d) The hoist operator shall be noti- thick.
fied before explosives or blasting (o) Detonators and other explosives
agents are transported in a shaft con- shall not be transported at the same
veyance. time in any shaft conveyance.
(e) Trucks used for the transpor- (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or
tation of explosives underground shall blasting supplies shall not be trans-
have the electrical system checked ported with other materials.
weekly to detect any failures which (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not
may constitute an electrical hazard. A in original containers, shall be placed
certification record which includes the in a suitable container when trans-
date of the inspection; the signature of ported manually.
the person who performed the inspec- (r) Detonators, primers, and other ex-
tion; and a serial number, or other plosives shall be carried in separate
identifier, of the truck inspected shall containers when transported manually.
be prepared and the most recent cer-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
tification record shall be maintained
on file. 1987]
(f) The installation of auxiliary
lights on truck beds, which are pow- § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and
ered by the truck’s electrical system, blasting agents.
shall be prohibited. (a) Explosives and related materials
(g) Explosives and blasting agents shall be stored in approved facilities
shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed required under the applicable provi-
in a powder car. No other materials, sions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco
supplies, or equipment shall be trans- and Firearms regulations contained in
ported in the same conveyance at the 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explo-
same time. sives.
(h) No one, except the operator, his (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting
helper, and the powderman, shall be caps, detonating primers, and primed
permitted to ride on a conveyance cartridges shall not be stored in the
transporting explosives and blasting same magazine with other explosives
agents. or blasting agents.
(i) No person shall ride in any shaft (c) Smoking and open flames shall
conveyance transporting explosives not be permitted within 50 feet of ex-
and blasting agents. plosives and detonator storage maga-
(j) No explosives or blasting agents zine.
shall be transported on any loco- (d) No explosives or blasting agents
motive. At least two car lengths shall shall be permanently stored in any un-
separate the locomotive from the pow- derground operation until the oper-
der car. ation has been developed to the point
470
where at least two modes of exit have or blasting agents being loaded into
been provided. drill holes. Cables in the proximity of
(e) Permanent underground storage the blast area shall be deenergized and
magazines shall be at least 300 feet locked out by the blaster.
from any shaft, adit, or active under- (k) Holes shall be checked prior to
ground working area. loading to determine depth and condi-
(f) Permanent underground maga- tions. Where a hole has been loaded
zines containing detonators shall not with explosives but the explosives have
be located closer than 50 feet to any failed to detonate, there shall be no
magazine containing other explosives drilling within 50 feet of the hole.
or blasting agents. (l) When loading a long line of holes
with more than one loading crew, the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] crews shall be separated by practical
distance consistent with efficient oper-
§ 1926.905 Loading of explosives or ation and supervision of crews.
blasting agents. (m) No explosive shall be loaded or
(a) Procedures that permit safe and used underground in the presence of
efficient loading shall be established combustible gases or combustible
before loading is started. dusts.
(b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently (n) No explosives other than those in
large to admit freely the insertion of Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Insti-
the cartridges of explosives. tute of Makers of Explosives, shall be
(c) Tamping shall be done only with used; however, explosives complying
wood rods or plastic tamping poles with the requirements of Fume Class 2
without exposed metal parts, but non- and Fume Class 3 may be used if ade-
sparking metal connectors may be used quate ventilation has been provided.
for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall (o) All blast holes in open work shall
be avoided. The primer shall never be be stemmed to the collar or to a point
tamped. which will confine the charge.
(d) No holes shall be loaded except (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast
those to be fired in the next round of area, shall be maintained at all ap-
blasting. After loading, all remaining proaches to the blast area. The warn-
explosives and detonators shall be im- ing sign lettering shall not be less than
mediately returned to an authorized 4 inches in height on a contrasting
magazine. background.
(e) Drilling shall not be started until (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung
all remaining butts of old holes are ex- when it is adjacent to or near a hole
amined for unexploded charges, and if that is loaded. Flashlight batteries
any are found, they shall be refired be- shall not be used for springing holes.
fore work proceeds. (r) Drill holes which have been
(f) No person shall be allowed to sprung or chambered, and which are
deepen drill holes which have con- not water-filled, shall be allowed to
tained explosives or blasting agents. cool before explosives are loaded.
(g) No explosives or blasting agents (s) No loaded holes shall be left unat-
shall be left unattended at the blast tended or unprotected.
site. (t) The blaster shall keep an accu-
(h) Machines and all tools not used rate, up-to-date record of explosives,
for loading explosives into bore holes blasting agents, and blasting supplies
shall be removed from the immediate used in a blast and shall keep an accu-
location of holes before explosives are rate running inventory of all explosives
delivered. Equipment shall not be oper- and blasting agents stored on the oper-
ated within 50 feet of loaded holes. ation.
(i) No activity of any nature other (u) When loading blasting agents
than that which is required for loading pneumatically over electric blasting
holes with explosives shall be per- caps, semiconductive delivery hose
mitted in a blast area. shall be used and the equipment shall
(j) Powerlines and portable electric be bonded and grounded.
cables for equipment being used shall [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
be kept a safe distance from explosives 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993]
471
§ 1926.906 Initiation of explosive This gap shall be bridged by a flexible

charges—electric blasting. jumper cord just before firing the blast.
(a) Electric blasting caps shall not be (l) When firing from a power circuit,
used where sources of extraneous elec- the firing switch shall be locked in the
tricity make the use of electric blast- open or ‘‘Off’’ position at all times, ex-
ing caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg cept when firing. It shall be so designed
wires shall be kept short-circuited that the firing lines to the cap circuit
(shunted) until they are connected into are automatically short-circuited when
the circuit for firing. the switch is in the ‘‘Off’’ position.
(b) Before adopting any system of Keys to this switch shall be entrusted
electrical firing, the blaster shall con- only to the blaster.
duct a thorough survey for extraneous (m) Blasting machines shall be in
currents, and all dangerous currents good condition and the efficiency of
shall be eliminated before any holes the machine shall be tested periodi-
are loaded. cally to make certain that it can de-
(c) In any single blast using electric liver power at its rated capacity.
blasting caps, all caps shall be of the (n) When firing with blasting ma-
same style or function, and of the same chines, the connections shall be made
manufacture. as recommended by the manufacturer
(d) Electric blasting shall be carried of the electric blasting caps used.
out by using blasting circuits or power (o) The number of electric blasting
circuits in accordance with the electric caps connected to a blasting machine
blasting cap manufacturer’s rec- shall not be in excess of its rated ca-
ommendations, or an approved con- pacity. Furthermore, in primary blast-
tractor or his designated representa- ing, a series circuit shall contain no
tive. more caps than the limits rec-
(e) When firing a circuit of electric ommended by the manufacturer of the
blasting caps, care must be exercised to electric blasting caps in use.
ensure that an adequate quantity of de- (p) The blaster shall be in charge of
livered current is available, in accord- the blasting machines, and no other
ance with the manufacturer’s rec- person shall connect the leading wires
ommendations. to the machine.
(f) Connecting wires and lead wires (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to
shall be insulated single solid wires of charged holes, shall use only blasting
sufficient current-carrying capacity. galvanometers or other instruments
(g) Bus wires shall be solid single that are specifically designed for this
wires of sufficient current-carrying ca- purpose.
pacity. (r) Whenever the possibility exists
(h) When firing electrically, the insu- that a leading line or blasting wire
lation on all firing lines shall be ade- might be thrown over a live powerline
quate and in good condition. by the force of an explosion, care shall
(i) A power circuit used for firing be taken to see that the total length of
electric blasting caps shall not be wires are kept too short to hit the
grounded. lines, or that the wires are securely an-
(j) In underground operations when chored to the ground. If neither of
firing from a power circuit, a safety these requirements can be satisfied, a
switch shall be placed in the perma- nonelectric system shall be used.
nent firing line at intervals. This (s) In electrical firing, only the man
switch shall be made so it can be making leading wire connections shall
locked only in the ‘‘Off’’ position and fire the shot. All connections shall be
shall be provided with a short- made from the bore hole back to the
circuiting arrangement of the firing source of firing current, and the lead-
lines to the cap circuit. ing wires shall remain shorted and not
(k) In underground operations there be connected to the blasting machine
shall be a ‘‘lightning’’ gap of at least 5 or other source of current until the
feet in the firing system ahead of the charge is to be fired.
main firing switch; that is, between (t) After firing an electric blast from
this switch and the source of power. a blasting machine, the leading wires
472
shall be immediately disconnected one charge from dislodging other shots

from the machine and short-circuited. in the blast.
(m) When blasting with safety fuses,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
consideration shall be given to the
length and burning rate of the fuse.
§ 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safe-
ty, shall always be provided for the
(a) Safety fuse shall only be used blaster to reach a place of safety.
where sources of extraneous electricity
make the use of electric blasting caps § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
dangerous. The use of a fuse that has
(a) Care shall be taken to select a
been hammered or injured in any way
detonating cord consistent with the
shall be forbidden.
type and physical condition of the bore
(b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or
hole and stemming and the type of ex-
other projections which will cause a
plosives used.
sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is
(b) Detonating cord shall be handled
prohibited.
and used with the same respect and
(c) Before capping safety fuse, a short care given other explosives.
length shall be cut from the end of the (c) The line of detonating cord ex-
supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut tending out of a bore hole or from a
end in each blasting cap. charge shall be cut from the supply
(d) Only a cap crimper of approved spool before loading the remainder of
design shall be used for attaching the bore hole or placing additional
blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers charges.
shall be kept in good repair and acces- (d) Detonating cord shall be handled
sible for use. and used with care to avoid damaging
(e) No unused cap or short capped or severing the cord during and after
fuse shall be placed in any hole to be loading and hooking-up.
blasted; such unused detonators shall (e) Detonating cord connections shall
be removed from the working place and be competent and positive in accord-
destroyed. ance with approved and recommended
(f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers methods. Knot-type or other cord-to-
made up, in any magazine or near any cord connections shall be made only
possible source of ignition. with detonating cord in which the ex-
(g) No one shall be permitted to carry plosive core is dry.
detonators or primers of any kind on (f) All detonating cord trunklines and
his person. branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp
(h) The minimum length of safety kinks, or angles that direct the cord
fuse to be used in blasting shall be as back toward the oncoming line of deto-
required by State law, but shall not be nation.
less than 30 inches. (g) All detonating cord connections
(i) At least two men shall be present shall be inspected before firing the
when multiple cap and fuse blasting is blast.
done by hand lighting methods. (h) When detonating cord milli-
(j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be second-delay connectors or short-inter-
lighted by each blaster when hand val-delay electric blasting caps are
lighting devices are used. However, used with detonating cord, the practice
when two or more safety fuses in a shall conform strictly to the manufac-
group are lighted as one by means of turer’s recommendations.
igniter cord, or other similar fuse- (i) When connecting a blasting cap or
lighting devices, they may be consid- an electric blasting cap to detonating
ered as one fuse. cord, the cap shall be taped or other-
(k) The so-called ‘‘drop fuse’’ method wise attached securely along the side
of dropping or pushing a primer or any or the end of the detonating cord, with
explosive with a lighted fuse attached the end of the cap containing the ex-
is forbidden. plosive charge pointed in the direction
(l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for in which the detonation is to proceed.
firing mudcap charges unless charges (j) Detonators for firing the trunk-
are separated sufficiently to prevent line shall not be brought to the loading
473
area nor attached to the detonating and in tunnels, after the muck pile has
cord until everything else is in readi- been wetted down.
ness for the blast.
§ 1926.911 Misfires.
§ 1926.909 Firing the blast. (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster
(a) A code of blasting signals equiva- shall provide proper safeguards for ex-
lent to Table U–1, shall be posted on cluding all employees from the danger
one or more conspicuous places at the zone.
operation, and all employees shall be (b) No other work shall be done ex-
required to familiarize themselves with cept that necessary to remove the haz-
the code and conform to it. Danger ard of the misfire and only those em-
signs shall be placed at suitable loca- ployees necessary to do the work shall
tions. remain in the danger zone.
(b) Before a blast is fired, a loud (c) No attempt shall be made to ex-
warning signal shall be given by the tract explosives from any charged or
blaster in charge, who has made cer- misfired hole; a new primer shall be
tain that all surplus explosives are in a put in and the hole reblasted. If re-
safe place and all employees, vehicles, firing of the misfired hole presents a
and equipment are at a safe distance, hazard, the explosives may be removed
or under sufficient cover. by washing out with water or, where
(c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed the misfire is under water, blown out
on highways which pass through the with air.
danger zone so as to stop traffic during (d) If there are any misfires while
blasting operations. using cap and fuse, all employees shall
(d) It shall be the duty of the blaster remain away from the charge for at
to fix the time of blasting. least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled
(e) Before firing an underground under the direction of the person in
blast, warning shall be given, and all charge of the blasting. All wires shall
possible entries into the blasting area, be carefully traced and a search made
and any entrances to any working for unexploded charges.
place where a drift, raise, or other (e) No drilling, digging, or picking
opening is about to hole through, shall shall be permitted until all missed
be carefully guarded. The blaster shall holes have been detonated or the au-
make sure that all employees are out thorized representative has approved
of the blast area before firing a blast. that work can proceed.
TABLE U–1
§ 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
WARNING SIGNAL—A 1-minute series of long
blasts 5 minutes prior to blast signal.
(a) A blaster shall conduct all blast-
BLAST SIGNAL—A series of short blasts 1 ing operations, and no shot shall be
minute prior to the shot. fired without his approval.
ALL CLEAR SIGNAL—A prolonged blast fol- (b) Loading tubes and casings of dis-
lowing the inspection of blast area. similar metals shall not be used be-
cause of possible electric transient cur-
§ 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. rents from galvanic action of the met-
(a) Immediately after the blast has als and water.
been fired, the firing line shall be dis- (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps
connected from the blasting machine, and detonating cords shall be used for
or where power switches are used, they all marine blasting. Loading shall be
shall be locked open or in the off posi- done through a nonsparking metal
tion. loading tube when tube is necessary.
(b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, (d) No blast shall be fired while any
not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for vessel under way is closer than 1,500
the smoke and fumes to leave the feet to the blasting area. Those on
blasted area before returning to the board vessels or craft moored or an-
shot. An inspection of the area and the chored within 1,500 feet shall be noti-
surrounding rubble shall be made by fied before a blast is fired.
the blaster to determine if all charges (e) No blast shall be fired while any
have been exploded before employees swimming or diving operations are in
are allowed to return to the operation, progress in the vicinity of the blasting
474
area. If such operations are in progress, (g) When tunnel excavation in rock
signals and arrangements shall be face is approaching mixed face, and
agreed upon to assure that no blast when tunnel excavation is in mixed
shall be fired while any person is in the face, blasting shall be performed with
water. light charges and with light burden on
(f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. each hole. Advance drilling shall be
(g) The storage and handling of ex- performed as tunnel excavation in rock
plosives aboard vessels used in under- face approaches mixed face, to deter-
water blasting operations shall be ac- mine the general nature and extent of
cording to provisions outlined herein rock cover and the remaining distance
on handling and storing explosives. ahead to soft ground as excavation ad-
(h) When more than one charge is vances.
placed under water, a float device shall
be attached to an element of each § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to
charge in such manner that it will be this subpart.
released by the firing. Misfires shall be
handled in accordance with the re- (a) American Table of Distances (also
quirements of § 1926.911. known as Quantity Distance Tables)
means American Table of Distances for
§ 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work Storage of Explosives as revised and
under compressed air. approved by the Institute of the Mak-
(a) Detonators and explosives shall ers of Explosives, June 5, 1964.
not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, (b) Approved storage facility—A facil-
or caissons. Detonators and explosives ity for the storage of explosive mate-
for each round shall be taken directly rials conforming to the requirements of
from the magazines to the blasting this part and covered by a license or
zone and immediately loaded. Deto- permit issued under authority of the
nators and explosives left over after Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Fire-
loading a round shall be removed from arms. (See 27 CFR Part 55)
the working chamber before the con- (c) Blast area—The area in which ex-
necting wires are connected up. plosives loading and blasting oper-
(b) When detonators or explosives are ations are being conducted.
brought into an air lock, no employee (d) Blaster—The person or persons au-
except the powderman, blaster, lock thorized to use explosives for blasting
tender and the employees necessary for purposes and meeting the qualifica-
carrying, shall be permitted to enter tions contained in § 1926.901.
the air lock. No other material, sup-
(e) Blasting agent—A blasting agent is
plies, or equipment shall be locked
any material or mixture consisting of a
through with the explosives.
fuel and oxidizer used for blasting, but
(c) Detonators and explosives shall be
not classified an explosive and in which
taken separately into pressure working
chambers. none of the ingredients is classified as
(d) The blaster or powderman shall be an explosive provided the furnished
responsible for the receipt, unloading, (mixed) product cannot be detonated
storage, and on-site transportation of with a No. 8 test blasting cap when
explosives and detonators. confined. A common blasting agent
(e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, presently in use is a mixture of ammo-
and steel tunnel lining shall be elec- nium nitrate (NH4 NO3) and carbo-
trically bonded together and grounded naceous combustibles, such as fuel oil
at or near the portal or shaft, and such or coal, and may either be procured,
pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded to- premixed and packaged from explosives
gether at not less than 1,000-foot inter- companies or mixed in the field.
vals throughout the length of the tun- (f) Blasting cap—A metallic tube
nel. In addition, each low air supply closed at one end, containing a charge
pipe shall be grounded at its delivery of one or more detonating compounds,
end. and designed for and capable of detona-
(f) The explosives suitable for use in tion from the sparks or flame from a
wet holes shall be water-resistant and safety fuse inserted and crimped into
shall be Fume Class 1. the open end.
475
(g) Block holing—The breaking of Class A Explosives. Possessing detonating

boulders by firing a charge of explo- hazard, such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, pic-
sives that has been loaded in a drill ric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury,
black powder, blasting caps, and detonating
hole.
primers.
(h) Conveyance—Any unit for trans- Class B Explosives. Possessing flammable
porting explosives or blasting agents, hazard, such as propellant explosives, includ-
including but not limited to trucks, ing some smokeless propellants.
trailers, rail cars, barges, and vessels. Class C Explosives. Include certain types of
(i) Detonating cord—A flexible cord manufactured articles which contain Class A
containing a center core of high explo- or Class B explosives, or both, as compo-
sives which when detonated, will have nents, but in restricted quantities.
sufficient strength to detonate other (o) Fuse lighters—Special devices for
cap-sensitive explosives with which it the purpose of igniting safety fuse.
is in contact. (p) Magazine—Any building or struc-
(j) Detonator—Blasting caps, electric ture, other than an explosives manu-
blasting caps, delay electric blasting facturing building, used for the storage
caps, and nonelectric delay blasting of explosives.
caps. (q) Misfire—An explosive charge
(k) Electric blasting cap—A blasting which failed to detonate.
cap designed for and capable of detona- (r) Mud-capping (sometimes known as
tion by means of an electric current. bulldozing, adobe blasting, or dobying).
(l) Electric blasting circuitry— The blasting of boulders by placing a
(1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, quantity of explosives against a rock,
used in parallel or series, in parallel boulder, or other object without con-
circuits, to which are connected the leg fining the explosives in a drill hole.
wires of electric blasting caps. (s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap—A
(2) Connecting wire. An insulated ex- blasting cap with an integral delay ele-
pendable wire used between electric ment in conjunction with and capable
blasting caps and the leading wires or of being detonated by a detonation im-
between the bus wire and the leading pulse or signal from miniaturized deto-
wires. nating cord.
(3) Leading wire. An insulated wire (t) Primary blasting—The blasting op-
used between the electric power source eration by which the original rock for-
and the electric blasting cap circuit. mation is dislodged from its natural lo-
(4) Permanent blasting wire. A per- cation.
manently mounted insulated wire used (u) Primer—A cartridge or container
between the electric power source and of explosives into which a detonator or
the electric blasting cap circuit. detonating cord is inserted or attached.
(m) Electric delay blasting caps—Caps (v) Safety fuse—A flexible cord con-
designed to detonate at a predeter- taining an internal burning medium by
mined period of time after energy is which fire is conveyed at a continuous
applied to the ignition system. and uniform rate for the purpose of fir-
(n) Explosives—(1) Any chemical coming blasting caps.
pound, mixture, or device, the primary (w) Secondary blasting—The reduction
or common purpose of which is to func- of oversize material by the use of ex-
tion by explosion; that is, with sub- plosives to the dimension required for
stantially instantaneous release of gas handling, including mudcapping and
and heat, unless such compound, mix- blockholing.
ture or device is otherwise specifically (x) Stemming—A suitable inert incom-
classified by the U.S. Department of bustible material or device used to con-
Transportation. fine or separate explosives in a drill
(2) All material which is classified as hole, or to cover explosives in mud-cap-
Class A, Class B, and Class C Explo- ping.
sives by the U.S. Department of Trans- (y) Springing—The creation of a pock-
portation. et in the bottom of a drill hole by the
(3) Classification of explosives by the use of a moderate quantity of explo-
U.S. Department of Transportation is sives in order that larger quantities or
as follows: explosives may be inserted therein.
476
(z) Water gels, or slurry explosives—A ment need not be modified to conform
wide variety of materials used for to the requirements of applicable
blasting. They all contain substantial standards in this subpart V, until such
proportions of water and high propor- work as described in paragraph (a)(1) of
tions of ammonium nitrate, some of this section is to be performed on such
which is in solution in the water. Two lines or equipment.
broad classes of water gels are: (1) (3) The standards set forth in this
Those which are sensitized by a mate- subpart V provide minimum require-
rial classed as an explosive, such as ments for safety and health. Employers
TNT or smokeless powder, and (2) those may require adherence to additional
which contain no ingredient classified standards which are not in conflict
as an explosive; these are sensitized with the standards contained in this
with metals such as aluminum or with subpart V.
other fuels. Water gels may be (b) Initial inspections, tests, or deter-
premixed at an explosives plant or minations. (1) Existing conditions shall
mixed at the site immediately before be determined before starting work, by
delivery into the bore hole. an inspection or a test. Such condi-
(aa) Semiconductive hose. tions shall include, but not be limited
Semiconductive hose—a hose with an to, energized lines and equipment, con-
electrical resistance high enough to ditions of poles, and the location of cir-
limit flow of stray electric currents to cuits and equipment, including power
safe levels, yet not so high as to pre- and communication lines, CATV and
vent drainage of static electric charges fire alarm circuits.
to ground; hose of not more than 2 (2) Electric equipment and lines shall
megohms resistance over its entire be considered energized until deter-
length and of not less than 5,000 ohms mined to be deenergized by tests or
per foot meets the requirement. other appropriate methods or means.
(3) Operating voltage of equipment
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184 and 35311, and lines shall be determined before
June 30, 1993] working on or near energized parts.
(c) Clearances. The provisions of para-
graph (c) (1) or (2) of this section shall
Subpart V—Power Transmission be observed.
and Distribution (1) No employee shall be permitted to
approach or take any conductive object
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours without an approved insulating handle
and Safety Standards Act (Construction closer to exposed energized parts than
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu-
shown in Table V–1, unless:
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s (i) The employee is insulated or
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR guarded from the energized part (gloves
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or gloves with sleeves rated for the
as applicable. Section 1926.951 also issued voltage involved shall be considered in-
under 29 CFR Part 1911. sulation of the employee from the en-
ergized part), or
§ 1926.950 General requirements. (ii) The energized part is insulated or
(a) Application. The occupational guarded from him and any other con-
safety and health standards contained ductive object at a different potential,
in this subpart V shall apply to the or
construction of electric transmission (iii) The employee is isolated, insu-
and distribution lines and equipment. lated, or guarded from any other con-
(1) As used in this subpart V the term ductive object(s), as during live-line
‘‘construction’’ includes the erection of bare-hand work.
new electric transmission and distribu- (2) (i) The minimum working dis-
tion lines and equipment, and the al- tance and minimum clear hot stick dis-
teration, conversion, and improvement tances stated in Table V–1 shall not be
of existing electric transmission and violated. The minimum clear hot stick
distribution lines and equipment. distance is that for the use of live-line
(2) Existing electric transmission and tools held by linemen when performing
distribution lines and electrical equip- live-line work.
477
(ii) Conductor support tools, such as insure that equipment or lines have
link sticks, strain carriers, and insu- been deenergized.
lator cradles, may be used: Provided, (iv) Protective grounds shall be ap-
That the clear insulation is at least as plied on the disconnected lines or
long as the insulator string or the min- equipment to be worked on.
imum distance specified in Table V–1 (v) Guards or barriers shall be erect-
for the operating voltage. ed as necessary to adjacent energized
lines.
TABLE V–1—ALTERNATING CURRENT—MINIMUM (vi) When more than one independent
DISTANCES crew requires the same line or equip-
Minimum ment to be deenergized, a prominent
working tag for each such independent crew
Voltage range (phase to phase) kilovolt) and clear
hot stick shall be placed on the line or equip-
distance ment by the designated employee in
charge.
2.1 to 15 .............................................................. 2 ft. 0 in.
15.1 to 35 ............................................................ 2 ft. 4 in. (vii) Upon completion of work on de-
35.1 to 46 ............................................................ 2 ft. 6 in. energized lines or equipment, each des-
46.1 to 72.5 ......................................................... 3 ft. 0 in. ignated employee in charge shall deter-
72.6 to 121 .......................................................... 3 ft. 4 in.
138 to 145 ........................................................... 3 ft. 6 in. mine that all employees in his crew are
161 to 169 ........................................................... 3 ft. 8 in. clear, that protective grounds installed
230 to 242 ........................................................... 5 ft. 0 in. by his crew have been removed, and he
345 to 362 ........................................................... 17 ft. 0 in.
500 to 552 ........................................................... 1 11 ft. 0 shall report to the designated author-
in. ity that all tags protecting his crew
700 to 765 ........................................................... 1 15 ft. 0
may be removed.
in. (2) When a crew working on a line or
1 NOTE: For 345–362 kv., 500–552 kv., and 700–765 kv.,
equipment can clearly see that the
the minimum working distance and the minimum clear hot
stick distance may be reduced provided that such distances means of disconnecting from electric
are not less than the shortest distance between the energized energy are visibly open or visibly
part and a grounded surface.
locked-out, the provisions of para-
(d) Deenergizing lines and equipment. graphs (d)(i), and (ii) of this section
(1) When deenergizing lines and equip- shall apply:
ment operated in excess of 600 volts, (i) Guards or barriers shall be erected
and the means of disconnecting from as necessary to adjacent energized
electric energy is not visibly open or lines.
visibly locked out, the provisions of (ii) Upon completion of work on de-
paragraphs (d)(1) (i) through (vii) of energized lines or equipment, each des-
this section shall be complied with: ignated employee in charge shall deter-
(i) The particular section of line or mine that all employees in his crew are
equipment to be deenergized shall be clear, that protective grounds installed
clearly identified, and it shall be iso- by his crew have been removed, and he
lated from all sources of voltage. shall report to the designated author-
(ii) Notification and assurance from ity that all tags protecting his crew
the designated employee shall be ob- may be removed.
tained that: (e) Emergency procedures and first aid.
(a) All switches and disconnectors (1) The employer shall provide training
through which electric energy may be or require that his employees are
supplied to the particular section of knowledgeable and proficient in:
line or equipment to be worked have (i) Procedures involving emergency
been deenergized; situations, and
(b) All switches and disconnectors are (ii) First-aid fundamentals including
plainly tagged indicating that men are resuscitation.
at work; (2) In lieu of paragraph (e)(1) of this
(c) And that where design of such section the employer may comply with
switches and disconnectors permits, the provisions of § 1926.50(c) regarding
they have been rendered inoperable. first-aid requirements.
(iii) After all designated switches and (f) Night work. When working at
disconnectors have been opened, ren- night, spotlights or portable lights for
dered inoperable, and tagged, visual in- emergency lighting shall be provided
spection or tests shall be conducted to as needed to perform the work safely.
478
(g) Work near and over water. When which case other safeguards shall be
crews are engaged in work over or near employed.
water and when danger of drowning ex- (2) Body belts and safety straps shall
ists, suitable protection shall be pro- meet the requirements of § 1926.959. In
vided as stated in § 1926.104, or § 1926.105, addition to being used as an employee
or § 1926.106. safeguarding item, body belts with ap-
(h) Sanitation facilities. The require- proved tool loops may be used for the
ments of § 1926.51 of subpart D of this purpose of holding tools. Body belts
part shall be complied with for sanita- shall be free from additional metal
tion facilities. hooks and tool loops other than those
(i) Hydraulic fluids. All hydraulic permitted in § 1926.959.
fluids used for the insulated sections of (3) Body belts and straps shall be in-
derrick trucks, aerial lifts, and hydrau- spected before use each day to deter-
lic tools which are used on or around mine that they are in safe working
energized lines and equipment shall be condition.
of the insulating type. The require- (4)(i) Lifelines and lanyards shall
ments for fire resistant fluids of comply with the provisions of § 1926.502.
§ 1926.302(d)(1) do not apply to hydraulic (ii) Safety lines are not intended to
tools covered by this paragraph. be subjected to shock loading and are
used for emergency rescue such as low-
§ 1926.951 Tools and protective equip-
ment. ering a man to the ground. Such safety
lines shall be a minimum of one-half-
(a) Protective equipment. (1)(i) Rubber inch diameter and three or four strand
protective equipment shall be in ac- first-grade manila or its equivalent in
cordance with the provisions of the strength (2,650 lb.) and durability.
American National Standards Institute (5) Defective ropes shall be replaced.
(ANSI), ANSI J6 series, as follows:
(c) Ladders. (1) Portable metal or con-
Item Standard ductive ladders shall not be used near
energized lines or equipment except as
Rubber insulating gloves ..................... J6.6–1971.
Rubber matting for use around electric J6.7–1935 (R1971).
may be necessary in specialized work
apparatus. such as in high voltage substations
Rubber insulating blankets .................. J6.4–1971. where nonconductive ladders might
Rubber insulating hoods ..................... J6.2–1950 (R1971). present a greater hazard than conduc-
Rubber insulating line hose ................. J6.1–1950 (R1971).
Rubber insulating sleeves ................... J6.5–1971.
tive ladders. Conductive or metal lad-
ders shall be prominently marked as
(ii) Rubber protective equipment conductive and all necessary pre-
shall be visually inspected prior to use. cautions shall be taken when used in
(iii) In addition, an ‘‘air’’ test shall specialized work.
be performed for rubber gloves prior to (2) Hook or other type ladders used in
use. structures shall be positively secured
(iv) Protective equipment of material to prevent the ladder from being acci-
other than rubber shall provide equal dentally displaced.
or better electrical and mechanical (d) Live-line tools. (1) Only live-line
protection. tool poles having a manufacturer’s cer-
(2) Protective hats shall be in accord- tification to withstand the following
ance with the provisions of ANSI Z89.2– minimum tests shall be used:
1971 Industrial Protective Helmets for (i) 100,000 volts per foot of length for
Electrical Workers, Class B, and shall 5 minutes when the tool is made of fi-
be worn at the jobsite by employees berglass; or
who are exposed to the hazards of fall- (ii) 75,000 volts per foot of length for
ing objects, electric shock, or burns. 3 minutes when the tool is made of
(b) Personal climbing equipment. (1) wood; or
Body belts with straps or lanyards (iii) Other tests equivalent to para-
shall be worn to protect employees graph (d) (i) or (ii) of this section as ap-
working at elevated locations on poles, propriate.
towers, or other structures except (2) All live-line tools shall be visually
where such use creates a greater haz- inspected before use each day. Tools to
ard to the safety of the employees, in be used shall be wiped clean and if any
479
hazardous defects are indicated such (b) Aerial lifts. (1) The provisions of
tools shall be removed from service. § 1926.556, subpart N of this part, shall
(e) Measuring tapes or measuring ropes. apply to the utilization of aerial lifts.
Measuring tapes or measuring ropes (2) When working near energized
which are metal or contain conductive lines or equipment, aerial lift trucks
strands shall not be used when working shall be grounded or barricaded and
on or near energized parts. considered as energized equipment, or
(f) Handtools. (1) Switches for all pow- the aerial lift truck shall be insulated
ered hand tools shall comply with for the work being performed.
§ 1926.300(d). (3) Equipment or material shall not
(2) All portable electric handtools be passed between a pole or structure
shall: and an aerial lift while an employee
(i) Be equipped with three-wire cord working from the basket is within
having the ground wire permanently reaching distance of energized conduc-
connected to the tool frame and means tors or equipment that are not covered
for grounding the other end; or with insulating protective equipment.
(ii) Be of the double insulated type (c) Derrick trucks, cranes and other lift-
and permanently labeled as ‘‘Double ing equipment. (1) All derrick trucks,
Insulated’’; or cranes and other lifting equipment
(iii) Be connected to the power sup- shall comply with subpart N and O of
ply by means of an isolating trans- this part except:
former, or other isolated power supply.
(i) As stated in § 1926.550(a)(15) (i) and
(3) All hydraulic tools which are used
(ii) relating to clearance (for clear-
on or around energized lines or equip-
ances in this subpart see Table V–1)
ment shall use nonconducting hoses
and
having adequate strength for the nor-
mal operating pressures. It should be (ii) Derrick truck (electric line
noted that the provisions of trucks) shall not be required to comply
§ 1926.302(d)(2) shall also apply. with § 1926.550(a)(7)(vi), (a)(17), (b)(2),
(4) All pneumatic tools which are and (e).
used on or around energized lines or (2) With the exception of equipment
equipment shall: certified for work on the proper volt-
(i) Have nonconducting hoses having age, mechanical equipment shall not be
adequate strength for the normal oper- operated closer to any energized line or
ating pressures, and equipment than the clearances set
(ii) Have an accumulator on the com- forth in § 1926.950(c) unless:
pressor to collect moisture. (i) An insulated barrier is installed
between the energized part and the me-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, chanical equipment, or
1979, as amended at 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
(ii) The mechanical equipment is
§ 1926.952 Mechanical equipment. grounded, or
(iii) The mechanical equipment is in-
(a) General. (1) Visual inspections
sulated, or
shall be made of the equipment to de-
termine that it is in good condition (iv) The mechanical equipment is
each day the equipment is to be used. considered as energized.
(2) Tests shall be made at the begin-
§ 1926.953 Material handling.
ning of each shift during which the
equipment is to be used to determine (a) Unloading. Prior to unloading
that the brakes and operating systems steel, poles, cross arms and similar ma-
are in proper working condition. terial, the load shall be thoroughly ex-
(3) No employer shall use any motor amined to ascertain if the load has
vehicle equipment having an ob- shifted, binders or stakes have broken
structed view to the rear unless: or the load is otherwise hazardous to
(i) The vehicle has a reverse signal employees.
alarm audible above the surrounding (b) Pole hauling. (1) During pole haul-
noise level or: ing operations, all loads shall be se-
(ii) The vehicle is backed up only cured to prevent displacement and a
when an observer signals that it is safe red flag shall be displayed at the trail-
to do so. ing end of the longest pole.
480
(2) Precautions shall be exercised to (c) Communication conductors. Bare

prevent blocking of roadways or endan- wire communication conductors on
gering other traffic. power poles or structures shall be
(3) When hauling poles during the treated as energized lines unless pro-
hours of darkness, illuminated warning tected by insulating materials.
devices shall be attached to the trail- (d) Voltage testing. Deenergized con-
ing end of the longest pole. ductors and equipment which are to be
(c) Storage. (1) No materials or equip- grounded shall be tested for voltage.
ment shall be stored under energized Results of this voltage test shall deter-
bus, energized lines, or near energized mine the subsequent procedures as re-
equipment, if it is practical to store quired in § 1926.950(d).
them elsewhere. (e) Attaching grounds. (1) When at-
(2) When materials or equipment are taching grounds, the ground end shall
stored under energized lines or near en- be attached first, and the other end
ergized equipment, applicable clear- shall be attached and removed by
ances shall be maintained as stated in means of insulated tools or other suit-
Table V–1; and extraordinary caution able devices.
shall be exercised when moving mate- (2) When removing grounds, the
rials near such energized equipment. grounding device shall first be removed
(d) Tag line. Where hazards to em- fromt the line or equipment using insu-
ployees exist tag lines or other suitable lating tools or other suitable devices.
devices shall be used to control loads (f) Grounds shall be placed between
being handled by hoisting equipment. work location and all sources of energy
and as close as practicable to the work
(e) Oil filled equipment. During con-
location, or grounds shall be placed at
struction or repair of oil filled equip-
the work location. If work is to be per-
ment the oil may be stored in tem-
formed at more than one location in a
porary containers other than those re-
line section, the line section must be
quired in § 1926.152, such as pillow
grounded and short circuited at one lo-
tanks.
cation in the line section and the con-
(f) Framing. During framing oper-
ductor to be worked on shall be
ations, employees shall not work under
grounded at each work location. The
a pole or a structure suspended by a
minimum distance shown in Table V–1
crane, A-frame or similar equipment
shall be maintained from ungrounded
unless the pole or structure is ade-
conductors at the work location. Where
quately supported.
the making of a ground is impracti-
(g) Attaching the load. The hoist rope cable, or the conditions resulting
shall not be wrapped around the load. therefrom would be more hazardous
This provision shall not apply to elec- than working on the lines or equip-
tric construction crews when setting or ment without grounding, the grounds
removing poles. may be omitted and the line or equip-
ment worked as energized.
§ 1926.954 Grounding for protection of
employees. (g) Testing without grounds. Grounds
may be temporarily removed only
(a) General. All conductors and equip- when necessary for test purposes and
ment shall be treated as energized extreme caution shall be exercised dur-
until tested or otherwise determined to ing the test procedures.
be deenergized or until grounded. (h) Grounding electrode. When ground-
(b) New construction. New lines or ing electrodes are utilized, such elec-
equipment may be considered deener- trodes shall have a resistance to
gized and worked as such where: ground low enough to remove the dan-
(1) The lines or equipment are ger of harm to personnel or permit
grounded, or prompt operation of protective devices.
(2) The hazard of induced voltages is (i) Grounding to tower. Grounding to
not present, and adequate clearances or tower shall be made with a tower
other means are implemented to pre- clamp capable of conducting the antici-
vent contact with energized lines or pated fault current.
equipment and the new lines or equip- (j) Ground lead. A ground lead, to be
ment. attached to either a tower ground or
481
driven ground, shall be capable of con- (b) Metal tower construction. (1) When
ducting the anticipated fault current working in unstable material the exca-
and shall have a minimum conductance vation for pad- or pile-type footings in
of No. 2 AWG copper. excess of 5 feet deep shall be either
sloped to the angle of repose as re-
§ 1926.955 Overhead lines. quired in § 1926.652 or shored if entry is
(a) Overhead lines. (1) When working required. Ladders shall be provided for
on or with overhead lines the provi- access to pad- or pile-type footing ex-
sions of paragraphs (a) (2) through (8) cavations in excess of 4 feet.
of this section shall be complied with (2) When working in unstable mate-
in addition to other applicable provi- rial provision shall be made for clean-
sions of this subpart. ing out auger-type footings without re-
(2) Prior to climbing poles, ladders, quiring an employee to enter the foot-
scaffolds, or other elevated structures, ing unless shoring is used to protect
an inspection shall be made to deter- the employee.
mine that the structures are capable of (3)(i) A designated employee shall be
sustaining the additional or unbal- used in directing mobile equipment ad-
anced stresses to which they will be jacent to footing excavations.
subjected. (ii) No one shall be permitted to re-
(3) Where poles or structures may be main in the footing while equipment is
unsafe for climbing, they shall not be being spotted for placement.
climbed until made safe by guying, (iii) Where necessary to assure the
bracing, or other adequate means. stability of mobile equipment the loca-
(4) Before installing or removing wire tion of use for such equipment shall be
or cable, strains to which poles and graded and leveled.
structures will be subjected shall be (4)(i) Tower assembly shall be carried
considered and necessary action taken out with a minimum exposure of em-
to prevent failure of supporting struc- ployees to falling objects when working
tures. at two or more levels on a tower.
(5)(i) When setting, moving, or re- (ii) Guy lines shall be used as nec-
moving poles using cranes, derricks, essary to maintain sections or parts of
gin poles, A-frames, or other mecha- sections in position and to reduce the
nized equipment near energized lines or possibility of tipping.
equipment, precautions shall be taken (iii) Members and sections being as-
to avoid contact with energized lines or sembled shall be adequately supported.
equipment, except in bare-hand live- (5) When assembling and erecting
line work, or where barriers or protec- towers the provisions of paragraphs
tive devices are used. (b)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii) of this section
(ii) Equipment and machinery oper- shall be complied with:
ating adjacent to energized lines or (i) The construction of transmission
equipment shall comply with towers and the erecting of poles, hoist-
§ 1926.952(c)(2). ing machinery, site preparation ma-
(6)(i) Unless using suitable protective chinery, and other types of construc-
equipment for the voltage involved, tion machinery shall conform to the
employees standing on the ground shall applicable requirements of this part.
avoid contacting equipment or machin- (ii) No one shall be permitted under a
ery working adjacent to energized lines tower which is in the process of erec-
or equipment. tion or assembly, except as may be re-
(ii) Lifting equipment shall be bond- quired to guide and secure the section
ed to an effective ground or it shall be being set.
considered energized and barricaded (iii) When erecting towers using
when utilized near energized equip- hoisting equipment adjacent to ener-
ment or lines. gized transmission lines, the lines shall
(7) Pole holes shall not be left unat- be deenergized when practical. If the
tended or unguarded in areas where lines are not deenergized, extraor-
employees are currently working. dinary caution shall be exercised to
(8) Tag lines shall be of a nonconduc- maintain the minimum clearance dis-
tive type when used near energized tances required by § 1926.950(c), includ-
lines. ing Table V–1.
482
(6)(i) Erection cranes shall be set on (ii) When crossing over energized
firm level foundations and when the conductors in excess of 600 volts, rope
cranes are so equipped outriggers shall nets or guard structures shall be in-
be used. stalled unless provision is made to iso-
(ii) Tag lines shall be utilized to late or insulate the workman or the en-
maintain control of tower sections ergized conductor. Where practical the
being raised and positioned, except automatic reclosing feature of the cir-
where the use of such lines would cre- cuit interrupting device shall be made
ate a greater hazard. inoperative. In addition, the line being
(iii) The loadline shall not be de- strung shall be grounded on either side
tached from a tower section until the of the crossover or considered and
section is adequately secured. worked as energized.
(iv) Except during emergency res- (5) Conductors being strung in or re-
toration procedures erection shall be moved shall be kept under positive
discontinued in the event of high wind control by the use of adequate tension
or other adverse weather conditions reels, guard structures, tielines, or
which would make the work hazardous. other means to prevent accidental con-
(v) Equipment and rigging shall be tact with energized circuits.
regularly inspected and maintained in (6) Guard structure members shall be
safe operating condition. sound and of adequate dimension and
(7) Adequate traffic control shall be strength, and adequately supported.
maintained when crossing highways
(7)(i) Catch-off anchors, rigging, and
and railways with equipment as re-
hoists shall be of ample capacity to
quired by the provisions of § 1926.200(g)
prevent loss of the lines.
(1) and (2).
(ii) The manufacturer’s load rating
(8) A designated employee shall be
shall not be exceeded for stringing
utilized to determine that required
lines, pulling lines, sock connections,
clearance is maintained in moving
and all load-bearing hardware and ac-
equipment under or near energized
cessories.
lines.
(c) Stringing or removing deenergized (iii) Pulling lines and accessories
conductors. (1) When stringing or re- shall be inspected regularly and re-
moving deenergized conductors, the placed or repaired when damaged or
provisions of paragraphs (c) (2) through when dependability is doubtful. The
(12) of this section shall be complied provisions of § 1926.251(c)(4)(ii) (con-
with. cerning splices) shall not apply.
(2) Prior to stringing operations a (8) Conductor grips shall not be used
briefing shall be held setting forth the on wire rope unless designed for this
plan of operation and specifying the application.
type of equipment to be used, ground- (9) While the conductor or pulling
ing devices and procedures to be fol- line is being pulled (in motion) employ-
lowed, crossover methods to be em- ees shall not be permitted directly
ployed, and the clearance authoriza- under overhead operations, nor shall
tion required. any employee be permitted on the
(3) Where there is a possibility of the crossarm.
conductor accidentally contacting an (10) A transmission clipping crew
energized circuit or receiving a dan- shall have a minimum of two struc-
gerous induced voltage buildup, to fur- tures clipped in between the crew and
ther protect the employee from the the conductor being sagged. When
hazards of the conductor, the con- working on bare conductors, clipping
ductor being installed or removed shall and tying crews shall work between
be grounded or provisions made to in- grounds at all times. The grounds shall
sulate or isolate the employee. remain intact until the conductors are
(4)(i) If the existing line is deener- clipped in, except on dead end struc-
gized, proper clearance authorization tures.
shall be secured and the line grounded (11)(i) Except during emergency res-
on both sides of the crossover or, the toration procedures, work from struc-
line being strung or removed shall be tures shall be discontinued when ad-
considered and worked as energized. verse weather (such as high wind or ice
483
on structures) makes the work haz- (ii) Such grounds shall be removed as
ardous. the last phase of aerial cleanup.
(ii) Stringing and clipping operations (iii) Except for moving type grounds,
shall be discontinued during the the grounds shall be placed and re-
progress of an electrical storm in the moved with a hot stick.
immediate vicinity. (6) Conductors, subconductors, and
(12)(i) Reel handling equipment, in- overhead ground conductors shall be
cluding pulling and braking machines, grounded at all dead-end or catch-off
shall have ample capacity, operate points.
smoothly, and be leveled and aligned in (7) A ground shall be located at each
accordance with the manufacturer’s side and within 10 feet of working areas
operating instructions. where conductors, subconductors, or
(ii) Reliable communications be- overhead ground conductors are being
tween the reel tender and pulling rig spliced at ground level. The two ends
operator shall be provided. to be spliced shall be bonded to each
(iii) Each pull shall be snubbed or other. It is recommended that splicing
dead ended at both ends before subse- be carried out on either an insulated
quent pulls. platform or on a conductive metallic
(d) Stringing adjacent to energized grounding mat bonded to both grounds.
lines. (1) Prior to stringing parallel to When a grounding mat is used, it is
an existing energized transmission line
recommended that the grounding mat
a competent determination shall be
be roped off and an insulated walkway
made to ascertain whether dangerous
induced voltage buildups will occur, provided for access to the mat.
particularly during switching and (8)(i) All conductors, subconductors,
ground fault conditions. When there is and overhead ground conductors shall
a possibility that such dangerous in- be bonded to the tower at any isolated
duced voltage may exist the employer tower where it may be necessary to
shall comply with the provisions of complete work on the transmission
paragraphs (d) (2) through (9) of this line.
section in addition to the provisions of (ii) Work on dead-end towers shall re-
paragraph (c) of this § 1926.955, unless quire grounding on all deenergized
the line is worked as energized. lines.
(2) When stringing adjacent to ener- (iii) Grounds may be removed as soon
gized lines the tension stringing meth- as the work is completed: Provided,
od or other methods which preclude un- That the line is not left open circuited
intentional contact between the lines at the isolated tower at which work is
being pulled and any employee shall be being completed.
used. (9) When performing work from the
(3) All pulling and tensioning equip- structures, clipping crews and all oth-
ment shall be isolated, insulated, or ef- ers working on conductors, subconduc-
fectively grounded. tors, or overhead ground conductors
(4) A ground shall be installed be- shall be protected by individual
tween the tensioning reel setup and the grounds installed at every work loca-
first structure in order to ground each tion.
bare conductor, subconductor, and
(e) Live-line bare-hand work. In addi-
overhead ground conductor during
tion to any other applicable standards
stringing operations.
contained elsewhere in this subpart all
(5) During stringing operations, each
live-line bare-hand work shall be per-
bare conductor, subconductor, and
overhead ground conductor shall be formed in accordance with the fol-
grounded at the first tower adjacent to lowing requirements:
both the tensioning and pulling setup (1) Employees shall be instructed and
and in increments so that no point is trained in the live-line bare-hand tech-
more than 2 miles from a ground. nique and the safety requirements per-
(i) The grounds shall be left in place tinent thereto before being permitted
until conductor installation is com- to use the technique on energized cir-
pleted. cuits.
484
(2) Before using the live-line bare- age is going to be worked and when
hand technique on energized high-volt- changed conditions indicate a need for
age conductors or parts, a check shall additional tests. Aerial buckets used
be made of: for bare-hand live-line work shall be
(i) The voltage rating of the circuit subjected to an arm current test. This
on which the work is to be performed; test shall consist of placing the bucket
(ii) The clearances to ground of lines in contact with an energized source
and other energized parts on which equal to the voltage to be worked upon
work is to be performed; and for a minimum time of three (3) min-
(iii) The voltage limitations of the utes. the leakage current shall not ex-
aerial-lift equipment intended to be ceed 1 microampere per kilo-volt of
used.
nominal line-to-line voltage. Work op-
(3) Only equipment designed, tested,
erations shall be suspended imme-
and intended for live-line bare-hand
work shall be used. diately upon any indication of a mal-
(4) All work shall be personally su- function in the equipment.
pervised by a person trained and quali- (12) All aerial lifts to be used for live-
fied to perform live-line bare-hand line bare-hand work shall have dual
work. controls (lower and upper) as required
(5) The automatic reclosing feature by paragraph (e)(12) (i) and (ii) of this
of circuit interrupting devices shall be section.
made inoperative where practical be- (i) The upper controls shall be within
fore working on any energized line or easy reach of the employee in the bas-
equipment. ket. If a two basket type lift is used ac-
(6) Work shall not be performed dur- cess to the controls shall be within
ing the progress of an electrical storm easy reach from either basket.
in the immediate vicinity. (ii) The lower set of controls shall be
(7) A conductive bucket liner or other located near base of the boom that will
suitable conductive device shall be pro- permit over-ride operation of equip-
vided for bonding the insulated aerial ment at any time.
device to the energized line or equip-
(13) Ground level lift control shall
ment.
not be operated unless permission has
(i) The employee shall be connected
to the bucket liner by use of conduc- been obtained from the employee in
tive shoes, leg clips, or other suitable lift, except in case of emergency.
means. (14) Before the employee contacts the
(ii) Where necessary, adequate elec- energized part to be worked on, the
trostatic shielding for the voltage conductive bucket liner shall be bond-
being worked or conductive clothing ed to the energized conductor by means
shall be provided. of a positive connection which shall re-
(8) Only tools and equipment in- main attached to the energized con-
tended for live-line bare-hand work ductor until the work on the energized
shall be used, and such tools and equip- circuit is completed.
ment shall be kept clean and dry. (15) The minimum clearance dis-
(9) Before the boom is elevated, the tances for live-line bare-hand work
outriggers on the aerial truck shall be shall be as specified in Table V–2.
extended and adjusted to stabilize the These minimum clearance distances
truck and the body of the truck shall shall be maintained from all grounded
be bonded to an effective ground, or objects and from lines and equipment
barricaded and considered as energized at a different potential than that to
equipment. which the insulated aerial device is
(10) Before moving the aerial lift into bonded unless such grounded objects or
the work position, all controls (ground
other lines and equipment are covered
level and bucket) shall be checked and
by insulated guards. These distances
tested to determine that they are in
proper working condition. shall be maintained when approaching,
(11) Arm current tests shall be made leaving, and when bonded to the ener-
before starting work each day, each gized circuit.
time during the day when higher volt-
485
TABLE V–2—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES § 1926.956 Underground lines.

FOR LIVE-LINE BARE-HAND WORK (ALTER-
(a) Guarding and ventilating street
NATING CURRENT)
opening used for access to underground
Distance in feet and lines or equipment. (1) Appropriate
inches for maximum warning signs shall be promptly placed
Voltage range (phase-to-phase) voltage
kilovolts when covers of manholes, handholes, or
Phase to Phase to vaults are removed. What is an appro-
ground phase
priate warning sign is dependent upon
2.1 to 15 ........................................ 2′0″ 2′0″ the nature and location of the hazards
15.1 to 35 ...................................... 2′4″ 2′4″ involved.
35.1 to 46 ...................................... 2′6″ 2′6″ (2) Before an employee enters a street
46.1 to 72.5 ................................... 3′0″ 3′0″ opening, such as a manhole or an
72.6 to 121 .................................... 3′4″ 4′6″
138 to 145 ..................................... 3′6″ 5′0″
unvented vault, it shall be promptly
161 to 169 ..................................... 3′8″ 5′6″ protected with a barrier, temporary
230 to 242 ..................................... 5′0″ 8′4″ cover, or other suitable guard.
345 to 362 ..................................... 1 7′0″ 1 13′4″
(3) When work is to be performed in a
500 to 552 ..................................... 1 11′0″ 1 20′0″
1 15′0″ 1 31′0″
manhole or unvented vault:
700 to 765 .....................................
(i) No entry shall be permitted unless
1 For 345–362kv., 500–552kv., and 700–765kv., the min-
forced ventilation is provided or the at-
imum clearance distance may be reduced provided the dis-
tances are not made less than the shortest distance between mosphere is found to be safe by testing
the energized part and a grounded surface. for oxygen deficiency and the presence
of explosive gases or fumes;
(16) When approaching, leaving, or
(ii) Where unsafe conditions are de-
bonding to an energized circuit the
tected, by testing or other means, the
minimum distances in Table V–2 shall
work area shall be ventilated and oth-
be maintained between all parts of the
erwise made safe before entry;
insulated boom assembly and any
(iii) Provisions shall be made for an
grounded parts (including the lower
adequate continuous supply of air.
arm or portions of the truck).
(b) Work in manholes. (1) While work
(17) When positioning the bucket is being performed in manholes, an em-
alongside an energized bushing or insu- ployee shall be available in the imme-
lator string, the minimum line-to- diate vicinity to render emergency as-
ground clearances of Table V–2 must be sistance as may be required. This shall
maintained between all parts of the not preclude the employee in the im-
bucket and the grounded end of the mediate vicinity from occasionally en-
bushing or insulator string. tering a manhole to provide assistance,
(18)(i) The use of handlines between other than emergency. This require-
buckets, booms, and the ground is pro- ment does not preclude a qualified em-
hibited. ployee, working alone, from entering
(ii) No conductive materials over 36 for brief periods of time, a manhole
inches long shall be placed in the buck- where energized cables or equipment
et, except for appropriate length jump- are in service, for the purpose of in-
ers, armor rods, and tools. spection, housekeeping, taking read-
(iii) Nonconductive-type handlines ings, or similar work if such work can
may be used from line to ground when be performed safely.
not supported from the bucket. (2) When open flames must be used or
(19) The bucket and upper insulated smoking is permitted in manholes,
boom shall not be overstressed by at- extra precautions shall be taken to
tempting to lift or support weights in provide adequate ventilation.
excess of the manufacturer’s rating. (3) Before using open flames in a
(20)(i) A minimum clearance table (as manhole or excavation in an area
shown in table V–2) shall be printed on where combustible gases or liquids may
a plate of durable nonconductive mate- be present, such as near a gasoline
rial, and mounted in the buckets or its service station, the atmosphere of the
vicinity so as to be visible to the oper- manhole or excavation shall be tested
ator of the boom. and found safe or cleared of the com-
(ii) It is recommended that insulated bustible gases or liquids.
measuring sticks be used to verify (c) Trenching and excavating. (1) Dur-
clearance distances. ing excavation or trenching, in order to
486
prevent the exposure of employees to (c) Barricades and barriers. (1) Barri-
the hazards created by damage to dan- cades or barriers shall be installed to
gerous underground facilities, efforts prevent accidental contact with ener-
shall be made to determine the loca- gized lines or equipment.
tion of such facilities and work con- (2) Where appropriate, signs indi-
ducted in a manner designed to avoid cating the hazard shall be posted near
damage. the barricade or barrier. These signs
(2) Trenching and excavation oper- shall comply with § 1926.200.
ations shall comply with §§ 1926.651 and (d) Control panels. (1) Work on or ad-
1926.652.
jacent to energized control panels shall
(3) When underground facilities are
be performed by designated employees.
exposed (electric, gas, water, tele-
phone, etc.) they shall be protected as (2) Precaution shall be taken to pre-
necessary to avoid damage. vent accidental operation of relays or
(4) Where multiple cables exist in an other protective devices due to jarring,
excavation, cables other than the one vibration, or improper wiring.
being worked on shall be protected as (e) Mechanized equipment. (1) Use of
necessary. vehicles, gin poles, cranes, and other
(5) When multiple cables exist in an equipment in restricted or hazardous
excavation, the cable to be worked on areas shall at all times be controlled
shall be identified by electrical means by designated employees.
unless its identity is obvious by reason (2) All mobile cranes and derricks
of distinctive appearance. shall be effectively grounded when
(6) Before cutting into a cable or being moved or operated in close prox-
opening a splice, the cable shall be imity to energized lines or equipment,
identified and verified to be the proper or the equipment shall be considered
cable. energized.
(7) When working on buried cable or (3) Fenders shall not be required for
on cable in manholes, metallic sheath
lowboys used for transporting large
continuity shall be maintained by
electrical equipment, transformers, or
bonding across the opening or by equiv-
alent means. breakers.
(f) Storage. The storage requirements
§ 1926.957 Construction in energized of § 1926.953(c) shall be complied with.
substations. (g) Substation fences. (1) When a sub-
(a) Work near energized equipment fa- station fence must be expanded or re-
cilities. (1) When construction work is moved for construction purposes, a
performed in an energized substation, temporary fence affording similar pro-
authorization shall be obtained from tection when the site is unattended,
the designated, authorized person be- shall be provided. Adequate inter-
fore work is started. connection with ground shall be main-
(2) When work is to be done in an en- tained between temporary fence and
ergized substation, the following shall permanent fence.
be determined: (2) All gates to all unattended sub-
(i) What facilities are energized, and stations shall be locked, except when
(ii) What protective equipment and work is in progress.
precautions are necessary for the safe- (h) Footing excavation. (1) Excavation
ty of personnel. for auger, pad and piling type footings
(3) Extraordinary caution shall be ex-
for structures and towers shall require
ercised in the handling of busbars,
the same precautions as for metal
tower steel, materials, and equipment
in the vicinity of energized facilities. tower construction (see § 1926.955(b)(1)).
The requirements set forth in (2) No employee shall be permitted to
§ 1926.950(c), shall be complied with. enter an unsupported auger-type exca-
(b) Deenergized equipment or lines. vation in unstable material for any
When it is necessary to deenergize purpose. Necessary clean-out in such
equipment or lines for protection of cases shall be accomplished without
employees, the requirements of entry.
§ 1926.950(d) shall be complied with.
487
§ 1926.958 External load helicopters. pockets. On shifting D belts, this meas-

In all operations performed using a urement for pocket tabs shall be taken
rotorcraft for moving or placing exter- when the D ring section is centered.
nal loads, the provisions of § 1926.551 of (3) A maximum of four (4) tool loops
subpart N of this part shall be complied shall be so situated on the body belt
with. that four (4) inches of the body belt in
the center of the back, measuring from
§ 1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety D ring to D ring, shall be free of tool
straps, and lanyards. loops, and any other attachments.
(a) General requirements. The require- (4) Suitable copper, steel, or equiva-
ments of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this lent liners shall be used around bar of
section shall be complied with for all D rings to prevent wear between these
lineman’s body belts, safety straps and members and the leather or fabric en-
lanyards acquired for use after the ef- closing them.
fective date of this subpart.
(5) All stitching shall be of a min-
(1) Hardware for lineman’s body
imum 42-pound weight nylon or equiva-
belts, safety straps, and lanyards shall
be drop forged or pressed steel and have lent thread and shall be lock stitched.
a corrosive resistive finish tested to Stitching parallel to an edge shall not
American Society for Testing and Ma- be less than three-sixteenths (3⁄16) inch
terials B117–64 (50-hour test). Surfaces from edge of narrowest member caught
shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. by the thread. The use of cross stitch-
(2) All buckles shall withstand a ing on leather is prohibited.
2,000-pound tensile test with a max- (6) The keeper of snaphooks shall
imum permanent deformation no have a spring tension that will not
greater than one sixty-fourth inch. allow the keeper to begin to open with
(3) D rings shall withstand a 5,000- a weight of 21⁄2 pounds or less, but the
pound tensile test without failure. keeper of snaphooks shall begin to
Failure of a D ring shall be considered open with a weight of four (4) pounds,
cracking or breaking. when the weight is supported on the
(4) Snaphooks shall withstand a 5,000- keeper against the end of the nose.
pound tensile test without failure. (7) Testing of lineman’s safety straps,
Failure of a snaphook shall be distor- body belts and lanyards shall be in ac-
tion sufficient to release the keeper.
cordance with the following procedure:
(b) Specific requirements. (1)(i) All fab-
ric used for safety straps shall with- (i) Attach one end of the safety strap
stand an A.C. dielectric test of not less or lanyard to a rigid support, the other
than 25,000 volts per foot ‘‘dry’’ for 3 end shall be attached to a 250-pound
minutes, without visible deterioration. canvas bag of sand:
(ii) All fabric and leather used shall (ii) Allow the 250-pound canvas bag of
be tested for leakage current and shall sand to free fall 4 feet for (safety strap
not exceed 1 milliampere when a test) and 6 feet for (lanyard test); in
potention of 3,000 volts is applied to the each case stopping the fall of the 250-
electrodes positioned 12 inches apart. pound bag:
(iii) Direct current tests may be per- (iii) Failure of the strap or lanyard
mitted in lieu of alternating current shall be indicated by any breakage, or
tests. slippage sufficient to permit the bag to
(2) The cushion part of the body belt fall free of the strap or lanyard. The
shall: entire ‘‘body belt assembly’’ shall be
(i) Contain no exposed rivets on the tested using one D ring. A safety strap
inside; or lanyard shall be used that is capable
(ii) Be at least three (3) inches in
of passing the ‘‘impact loading test’’
width;
and attached as required in paragraph
(iii) Be at least five thirty-seconds
(5⁄32) inch thick, if made of leather; and (b)(7)(i) of this section. The body belt
(iv) Have pocket tabs that extended shall be secured to the 250-pound bag of
at least 11⁄2 inches down and three (3) sand at a point to simulate the waist of
inches back of the inside of circle of a man and allowed to drop as stated in
each D ring for riveting on plier or tool paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section.
488
Failure of the body belt shall be indi- NOTE: A cable sheath may consist of mul-
cated by any breakage, or slippage suf- tiple layers of which one or more is conduc-
tive.
ficient to permit the bag to fall free of
the body belt. (i) Circuit. The term means a con-
ductor or system of conductors
§ 1926.960 Definitions applicable to through which an electric current is in-
this subpart. tended to flow.
(a) Alive or live (energized). The term (j) Communication lines. The term
means electrically connected to a means the conductors and their sup-
source of potential difference, or elec- porting or containing structures which
trically charged so as to have a poten- are used for public or private signal or
communication service, and which op-
tial significantly different from that of
erate at potentials not exceeding 400
the earth in the vicinity. The term
volts to ground or 750 volts between
‘‘live’’ is sometimes used in place of any two points of the circuit, and the
the term ‘‘current-carrying,’’ where transmitted power of which does not
the intent is clear, to avoid repetition exceed 150 watts. When operating at
of the longer term. less than 150 volts no limit is placed on
(b) Automatic circuit recloser. The term the capacity of the system.
means a self-controlled device for auto- NOTE: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sig-
matically interrupting and reclosing nal, data, clock, fire, police-alarm, commu-
an alternating current circuit with a nity television antenna, and other systems
predetermined sequence of opening and conforming with the above are included.
Lines used for signaling purposes, but not in-
reclosing followed by resetting, hold cluded under the above definition, are con-
closed, or lockout operation. sidered as supply lines of the same voltage
(c) Barrier. The term means a phys- and are to be so run.
ical obstruction which is intended to
(k) Conductor. The term means a ma-
prevent contact with energized lines or terial, usually in the form of a wire,
equipment. cable, or bus bar suitable for carrying
(d) Barricade. The term means a phys- an electric current.
ical obstruction such as tapes, screens, (l) Conductor shielding. The term
or cones intended to warn and limit ac- means an envelope which encloses the
cess to a hazardous area. conductor of a cable and provides an
(e) Bond. The term means an elec- equipotential surface in contact with
trical connection from one conductive the cable insulation.
element to another for the purpose of (m) Current-carrying part. The term
minimizing potential differences or means a conducting part intended to be
providing suitable conductivity for connected in an electric circuit to a
fault current or for mitigation of leak- source of voltage. Non-current-car-
age current and electrolytic action. rying parts are those not intended to
(f) Bushing. The term means an insu- be so connected.
lating structure including a through (n) Dead (deenergized). The term
conductor, or providing a passageway means free from any electrical connec-
for such a conductor, with provision for tion to a source of potential difference
mounting on a barrier, conducting or and from electrical charges: Not having
otherwise, for the purpose of insulating a potential difference from that of
the conductor from the barrier and earth.
conducting current from one side of the NOTE: The term is used only with reference
to current-carrying parts which are some-
barrier to the other. times alive (energized).
(g) Cable. The term means a con- (o) Designated employee. The term
ductor with insulation, or a stranded means a qualified person delegated to
conductor with or without insulation perform specific duties under the con-
and other coverings (single-conductor ditions existing.
cable) or a combination of conductors (p) Effectively grounded. The term
insulated from one another (multiple- means intentionally connected to earth
conductor cable). through a ground connection or con-
(h) Cable sheath. The term means a nections of sufficiently low impedance
protective covering applied to cables. and having sufficient current-carrying
489
capacity to prevent the buildup of (y) Ground (as a verb). The term
voltages which may result in undue means the connecting or establishment
hazard to connected equipment or to of a connection, whether by intention
persons. or accident of an electric circuit or
(q) Electric line trucks. The term equipment to reference ground.
means a truck used to transport men, (z) Grounding electrode (ground elec-
tools, and material, and to serve as a trode). The term grounding electrode
traveling workshop for electric power means a conductor embedded in the
line construction and maintenance earth, used for maintaining ground po-
work. It is sometimes equipped with a tential on conductors connected to it,
boom and auxiliary equipment for set- and for dissipating into the earth cur-
ting poles, digging holes, and elevating rent conducted to it.
material or men. (aa) Grounding electrode resistance.
The term means the resistance of the
(r) Enclosed. The term means sur-
grounding electrode to earth.
rounded by a case, cage, or fence,
(bb) Grounding electrode conductor
which will protect the contained equip-
(grounding conductor). The term means
ment and prevent accidental contact of
a conductor used to connect equipment
a person with live parts.
or the grounded circuit of a wiring sys-
(s) Equipment. This is a general term tem to a grounding electrode.
which includes fittings, devices, appli- (cc) Grounded conductor. The term
ances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, means a system or circuit conductor
used as part of, or in connection with, which is intentionally grounded.
an electrical power transmission and (dd) Grounded system. The term
distribution system, or communication means a system of conductors in which
systems. at least one conductor or point (usu-
(t) Exposed. The term means not iso- ally the middle wire, or neutral point
lated or guarded. of transformer or generator windings)
(u) Electric supply lines. The term is intentionally grounded, either sol-
means those conductors used to trans- idly or through a current-limiting de-
mit electric energy and their necessary vice (not a current-interrupting de-
supporting or containing structures. vice).
Signal lines of more than 400 volts to (ee) Hotline tools and ropes. The term
ground are always supply lines within means those tools and ropes which are
the meaning of the rules, and those of especially designed for work on ener-
less than 400 volts to ground may be gized high voltage lines and equipment.
considered as supply lines, if so run and Insulated aerial equipment especially
operated throughout. designed for work on energized high
(v) Guarded. The term means pro- voltage lines and equipment shall be
tected by personnel, covered, fenced, or considered hot line.
enclosed by means of suitable casings, (ff) Insulated. The term means sepa-
barrier rails, screens, mats, platforms, rated from other conducting surfaces
or other suitable devices in accordance by a dielectric substance (including air
with standard barricading techniques space) offering a high resistance to the
designed to prevent dangerous ap- passage of current.
proach or contact by persons or ob- NOTE: When any object is said to be insu-
jects. lated, it is understood to be insulated in
suitable manner for the conditions to which
NOTE: Wires, which are insulated but not it is subjected. Otherwise, it is within the
otherwise protected, are not considered as purpose of this subpart, uninsulated. Insu-
guarded. lating covering of conductors is one means of
(w) Ground. (Reference). The term making the conductor insulated.
means that conductive body, usually (gg) Insulation (as applied to cable).
earth, to which an electric potential is The term means that which is relied
referenced. upon to insulate the conductor from
(x) Ground (as a noun). The term other conductors or conducting parts
means a conductive connection wheth- or from ground.
er intentional or accidental, by which (hh) Insulation shielding. The term
an electric circuit or equipment is con- means an envelope which encloses the
nected to reference ground. insulation of a cable and provides an
490
equipotential surface in contact with between any two conductors. If one cir-
cable insulation. cuit is directly connected to and sup-
(ii) Isolated. The term means an ob- plied from another circuit of higher
ject that is not readily accessible to voltage (as in the case of an
persons unless special means of access autotransformer), both are considered
are used. as of the higher voltage, unless the cir-
(jj) Manhole. The term means a sub- cuit of lower voltage is effectively
surface enclosure which personnel may grounded, in which case its voltage is
enter and which is used for the purpose not determined by the circuit of higher
of installing, operating, and maintain- voltage. Direct connection implies
ing equipment and/or cable. electric connection as distinguished
(kk) Pulling tension. The term means from connection merely through elec-
the longitudinal force exerted on a tromagnetic or electrostatic induction.
cable during installation.
(ll) Qualified person. The term means Subpart W—Rollover Protective
a person who by reason of experience or Structures; Overhead Protection
training is familiar with the operation
to be performed and the hazards in- AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
volved. Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
(mm) Switch. The term means a de- U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
vice for opening and closing or chang- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
ing the connection of a circuit. In these U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); and Secretary of Labor’s
rules, a switch is understood to be Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
manually operable, unless otherwise 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5–2002
stated. (67 FR 65008), as applicable.
(nn) Tag. The term means a system
or method of identifying circuits, sys- § 1926.1000 Rollover protective struc-
tems or equipment for the purpose of tures (ROPS) for material handling
alerting persons that the circuit, sys- equipment.
tem or equipment is being worked on. (a) Coverage. (1) This section applies
(oo) Unstable material. The term to the following types of material han-
means earth material, other than run- dling equipment: To all rubber-tired,
ning, that because of its nature or the self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired
influence of related conditions, cannot front-end loaders, rubber-tired dozers,
be depended upon to remain in place wheel-type agricultural and industrial
without extra support, such as would tractors, crawler tractors, crawler-type
be furnished by a system of shoring. loaders, and motor graders, with or
(pp) Vault. The term means an enclo- without attachments, that are used in
sure above or below ground which per- construction work. This requirement
sonnel may enter and is used for the does not apply to sideboom pipelaying
purpose of installing, operating, and/or tractors.
maintaining equipment and/or cable. (2) The promulgation of specific
(qq) Voltage. The term means the ef- standards for rollover protective struc-
fective (rms) potential difference be- tures for compactors and rubber-tired
tween any two conductors or between a skid-steer equipment is reserved pend-
conductor and ground. Voltages are ex- ing consideration of standards cur-
pressed in nominal values. The nominal rently being developed.
voltage of a system or circuit is the (b) Equipment manufactured on or after
value assigned to a system or circuit of September 1, 1972. Material handling
a given voltage class for the purpose of machinery described in paragraph (a)
convenient designation. The operating of this section and manufactured on or
voltage of the system may vary above after September 1, 1972, shall be
or below this value. equipped with rollover protective
(rr) Voltage of an effectively grounded structures which meet the minimum
circuit. The term means the voltage be- performance standards prescribed in
tween any conductor and ground unless §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as applicable.
otherwise indicated. (c) Equipment manufactured before Sep-
(ss) Voltage of a circuit not effectively tember 1, 1972. (1) All material handling
grounded. The term means the voltage equipment described in paragraph (a)
491
of this section and manufactured or tive structures, shall be deemed in

placed in service (owned or operated by compliance with this section if it
the employer) prior to September 1, meets the rollover protective structure
1972, shall be fitted with rollover pro- requirements of the State of Cali-
tective structures no later than the fornia, the U.S. Army Corps of Engi-
dates listed below: neers, or the Bureau of Reclamation of
(i) Machines manufactured on or the U.S. Department of the Interior in
after January 1, 1972, shall be fitted no effect on April 5, 1972. The require-
later than April 1, 1973. ments in effect are:
(ii) Machines manufactured between (1) State of California: Construction
July 1, 1971, and December 31, 1971, Safety Orders, issued by the Depart-
shall be fitted no later than July 1, ment of Industrial Relations pursuant
1973. to Division 5, Labor Code, § 6312, State
(iii) Machines manufactured between of California.
July 1, 1970, and June 30, 1971, shall be (2) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers:
fitted no later than January 1, 1974. General Safety Requirements, EM–385–
(iv) Machines manufactured between 1–1 (March 1967).
July 1, 1969, and June 30, 1970, shall be (3) Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. De-
fitted no later than July 1, 1974. partment of the Interior: Safety and
(v) Machines manufactured before
Health Regulations for Construction.
July 1, 1969: Reserved pending further
Part II (September 1971).
study, development, and review.
(2) Rollover protective structures and § 1926.1001 Minimum performance cri-
supporting attachment shall meet the teria for rollover protective struc-
minimum performance criteria de- tures for designated scrapers, load-
tailed in §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as ap- ers, dozers, graders, and crawler
plicable or shall be designed, fab- tractors.
ricated, and installed in a manner (a) General. This section prescribes
which will support, based on the ulti- minimum performance criteria for roll-
mate strength of the metal, at least over protective structures (ROPS) for
two times the weight of the prime rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers;
mover applied at the point of impact. rubber-tired front-end loaders and rub-
(i) The design objective shall be to ber-tired dozers; crawler tractors, and
minimize the likelihood of a complete crawler-type loaders, and motor grad-
overturn and thereby minimize the ers. The vehicle and ROPS as a system
possibility of the operator being
shall have the structural characteris-
crushed as a result of a rollover or
tics prescribed in paragraph (f) of this
upset.
section for each type of machine de-
(ii) The design shall provide a
scribed in this paragraph.
vertical clearance of at least 52 inches
from the work deck to the ROPS at the (b) The static laboratory test pre-
point of ingress or egress. scribed herein will determine the ade-
(d) Remounting. ROPS removed for quacy of the structures used to protect
any reason, shall be remounted with the operator under the following condi-
equal quality, or better, bolts or weld- tions:
ing as required for the original mount- (1) For rubber-tired self-propelled
ing. scrapers, rubber-tired front-end load-
(e) Labeling. Each ROPS shall have ers, and rubber-tired dozers: Operating
the following information permanently between 0 and 10 miles per hour over
affixed to the structure: hard clay where rollover would be lim-
(1) Manufacturer or fabricator’s name ited to a maximum roll angle of 360°
and address; down a slope of 30° maximum.
(2) ROPS model number, if any; (2) For motor graders: Operating be-
(3) Machine make, model, or series tween 0 and 10 miles per hour over hard
number that the structure is designed clay where rollover would be limited to
to fit. 360° down a slope of 30° maximum.
(f) Machines meeting certain existing (3) For crawler tractors and crawler-
governmental requirements. Any machine type loaders: Operating between 0 and
in use, equipped with rollover protec- 10 miles per hour over hard clay where
492
rollover would be limited to a max- structure in the same manner as it will

imum roll angle of 360° down a slope of be attached during vehicle use. A to-
45°. tally assembled vehicle is not required.
(c) Facilities and apparatus. (1) The However, the vehicle structure and
following material is necessary: frame which support the ROPS must
(i) Material, equipment, and tiedown represent the actual vehicle installa-
means adequate to insure that the tion. All normally detachable windows,
ROPS and its vehicle frame absorb the panels, or nonstructural fittings shall
applied energy.
be removed so that they do not con-
(ii) Equipment necessary to measure
tribute to the strength of the ROPS.
and apply loads to the ROPS. Adequate
means to measure deflections and (e) Test procedure. The test procedure
lengths should also be provided. shall include the following, in the se-
(iii) Recommended, but not manda- quence indicated:
tory, types of test setups are illus- (1) Energy absorbing capabilities of
trated in Figure W–1 for all types of ROPS shall be verified when loaded lat-
equipment to which this section ap- erally by incrementally applying a dis-
plies; and in Figure W–2 for rubber- tributed load to the longitudinal out-
tired self-propelled scrapers; Figure W– side top member of the ROPS, as shown
3 for rubber-tired front-end loaders, in Figure W–1, W–2, or W–3, as applica-
rubber-tired dozers, and motor graders; ble. The distributed load must be ap-
and Figure W–4 for crawler tractors plied so as to result in approximately
and crawler-type loaders. uniform deflection of the ROPS. The
(2) Table W–1 contains a listing of the load increments should correspond
required apparatus for all types of with approximately 0.5 in. ROPS de-
equipment described in paragraph (a)
flection increment in the direction of
of this section.
the load application, measured at the
TABLE W–1 ROPS top edge. Should the operator’s
seat be offcenter, the load shall be ap-
Means to measure Accuracy
plied on the offcenter side. For each ap-
Deflection of ROPS, inches .......... ±5% of deflection meas- plied load increment, the total load
ured. (lb.) versus corresponding deflection
Vehicle weight, pounds ................ ±5% of the weight meas-
ured. (in.) shall be plotted, and the area
Force applied to frame, pounds ... ±5% of force measured. under the load -deflection curve shall
Dimensions of critical zone, ±0.5 in. be calculated. This area is equal to the
inches.
energy (in.-lb.) absorbed by the ROPS.
(d) Vehicle condition. The ROPS to be For a typical load-deflection curve and
tested must be attached to the vehicle calculation method, see Figure W–5.
493
EC30OC91.051</GPH>
494
EC30OC91.050</GPH>
ROPS shall be verified by suitable ma-

terial tests or material certification
(see paragraph (f)(2)(iv) of this section).
Incremental loading shall be continued

until the ROPS has absorbed the
amount of energy and the minimum
applied load specified under paragraph
(f) of this section has been reached or
surpassed.
(2) To cover the possibility of the ve-
hicle coming to rest on its top, the sup-
port capability shall be verified by ap-
plying a distributed vertical load to
EC30OC91.053</GPH> EC30OC91.054</GPH>
the top of the ROPS so as to result in

approximately uniform deflection (see
Figure W–1). The load magnitude is
specified in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this
section.
(3) The low temperature impact
strength of the material used in the
495
EC30OC91.052</GPH>
(f) Performance requirements—(1) Gen- (iii) The load magnitude for purposes
eral performance requirements. (i) No re- of compliance with paragraph (e)(2) of
pairs or straightening of any member this section is equal to the vehicle
shall be carried out between each pre- weight. The test of load magnitude
scribed test. shall only be made after the require-
(ii) During each test, no part of the ments of paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this sec-
ROPS shall enter the critical zone as tion are met.
detailed in SAE J397 (1969). Deforma-
tion of the ROPS shall not allow the
plane of the ground to enter this zone.
(2) Specific performance requirements.
(i) The energy requirement for pur-
poses of meeting the requirements of
paragraph (e)(1) of this section is to be
determined by referring to the plot of
the energy versus weight of vehicle (see
Figure W–6 for rubber-tired self-pro-
pelled scrapers; Figure W–7 for rubber-
tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired
dozers; Figure W–8 for crawler tractors
and crawler-type loaders; and Figure
W–9 for motor graders). For purposes of
this section, force and weight are
measured as pounds (lb.); energy (U) is
measured as inch-pounds.
(iv) Material used in the ROPS must

have the capability of performing at
zero degrees Fahrenheit, or exhibit
Charpy V notch impact strength of 8
foot-pounds at minus 20 °Fahrenheit.
This is a standard Charpy specimen as
described in American Society of Test-
ing and Materials A 370, Methods and
Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products (available at each Re-
gional Office of the Occupational Safe-
ty and Health Administration). The
purpose of this requirement is to re-
duce the tendency of brittle fracture
associated with dynamic loading, low
temperature operation, and stress rais-
ers which cannot be entirely avoided
(ii) The applied load must attain at on welded structures.
least a value which is determined by
multiplying the vehicle weight by the
corresponding factor shown in Figure
W–10 for rubber-tired self-propelled
scrapers; in Figure W–11 for rubber-
tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired
dozers; in Figure W–12 for crawler trac-
EC30OC91.056</GPH>
tors and crawler-type loaders; and in

Figure W–13 for motor graders.
496
EC30OC91.055</GPH>
weight of the vehicle plus the heaviest

attachment.
EC30OC91.060</GPH>
(g) Definitions. For purposes of this

section, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the
EC30OC91.058</GPH> EC30OC91.059</GPH>
manufacturer’s maximum weight of

the prime mover for rubber-tired self-
propelled scrapers. For other types of
equipment to which this section ap-
plies, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the man-
ufacturer’s maximum recommended
497
EC30OC91.057</GPH>
of interpretation arise. The rec-

ommended practices appear in the 1971
SAE Handbook, which may be exam-
ined in each of the Regional Offices of
the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
§ 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-

over protective structures, known
as ROPS) for wheel-type agricul-
tural and industrial tractors used
in construction.
(a) General. (1) The purpose of this
section is to set forth requirements for
frames used to protect operators of
wheel-type agricultural and industrial
tractors that will minimize the possi-
bility of operator injury resulting from
accidental upsets during normal oper-
ation. With respect to agricultural and
industrial tractors, the provisions of 29
CFR 1926.1001 and 1926.1003 for rubber-
tired dozers and rubber-tired loaders
may be used instead of the require-
ments of this section.
(2) The protective frame that is the
subject of this standard is a structure
mounted to the tractor that extends
above the operator’s seat and conforms
generally to Figure W–14.
(3) When an overhead weather shield
is attached to the protective frame, it
may be in place during testing, pro-
vided that it does not contribute to the
strength of the protective frame. When
such an overhead weather shield is at-
tached, it must meet the requirements
of paragraph (i) of this section.
(4) For overhead protection require-
ments, see 29 CFR 1926.1003.
(h) Source of standard. This standard (5) The following provisions address
is derived from, and restates, the fol- requirements for protective enclosures.
lowing Society of Automotive Engi- (i) When protective enclosures are
neers Recommended Practices: SAE used on wheel-type agricultural and in-
J320a, Minimum Performance Criteria dustrial tractors, they shall meet the
for Roll-Over Protective Structure for requirements of Society of Automotive
Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers; Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J168–1970
SAE J394, Minimum Performance Cri- (‘‘Protective enclosures—test proce-
teria for Roll-Over Protective Struc- dures and performance requirements’’),
ture for Rubber-Tired Front End Load- which is incorporated by reference. The
ers and Rubber-Tired Dozers; SAE J395, incorporation by reference was ap-
Minimum Performance Criteria for proved by the Director of the Federal
Roll-Over Protective Structure for Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
Loaders; and SAE J396, Minimum Per- (ii) SAE standard J168–1970 appears in
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- the 1971 SAE Handbook, or it may be
tive Structure for Motor Graders. examined at: any OSHA Regional Of-
EC30OC91.062</GPH>
These recommended practices shall be fice; the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. De-
resorted to in the event that questions partment of Labor, 200 Constitution
498
EC30OC91.061</GPH>
Avenue, NW., Room N–2625, Wash- (6) The low-temperature impact

ington, DC 20210 (telephone: (202) 693– strength of the material used in the
2350 (TTY number: (877) 889–5627)); or protective structure shall be verified
the National Archives and Records Ad- by suitable material tests or material
ministration (‘‘NARA’’). (For informa- certifications according to 29 CFR
tion on the availability of this mate- 1926.1001(f)(2)(iv).
rial at NARA, telephone (202) 741–6030 (e) Test procedure for vehicle overturn—
or access the NARA Web site at (1) Vehicle weight. The weight of the
www.archives.gov/federallregister/ tractor, for purposes of this section, in-
codeloflfederallregulations/ cludes the protective frame, all fuels,
ibrllocations.html.) Copies may be pur- and other components required for nor-
chased from the Society of Automotive mal use of the tractor. Ballast must be
Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive,
added when necessary to achieve a
Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15096–0001.
minimum total weight of 130 lb (59 kg)
(b) Applicability. The requirements of per maximum power-takeoff horse-
this section apply to wheel-type agri-
power at the rated engine speed. The
cultural and industrial tractors used in
weight of the front end must be at
construction work. See paragraph (j) of
least 33 lb (15 kg) per maximum power-
this section for definitions of agricul-
tural tractors set forth in paragraph (i) takeoff horsepower. In case power-
of this section. takeoff horsepower is unavailable, 95
(c) Performance requirements. (1) Ei- percent of net engine flywheel horse-
ther a laboratory test or a field test is power shall be used.
required to determine the performance (2) Agricultural tractors shall be
requirements set forth in paragraph (i) tested at the weight set forth in para-
of this section. graph (e)(1) of this section.
(2) A laboratory test may be either (3) Industrial tractors shall be tested
static or dynamic. The laboratory test with items of integral or mounted
must be under conditions of repeatable equipment and ballast that are sold as
and controlled loading to permit anal- standard equipment or approved by the
ysis of the protective frame. vehicle manufacturer for use with the
(3) A field-upset test, when used, vehicle when the protective frame is
shall be conducted under reasonably expected to provide protection for the
controlled conditions, both rearward operator with such equipment in-
and sideways to verify the effectiveness stalled. The total vehicle weight and
of the protective frame under actual front-end weight as tested shall not be
dynamic conditions. less than the weights established in
(d) Test procedures—general. (1) The paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
tractor used shall be the tractor with (4) The following provisions address
the greatest weight on which the pro- soil bank test conditions.
tective frame is to be used. (i) The test shall be conducted on a
(2) A new protective frame and dry, firm soil bank as illustrated in
mounting connections of the same de- Figure W–15. The soil in the impact
sign shall be used for each test proce- area shall have an average cone index
dure. in the 0-in. to 6-in. (0-mm to 153-mm)
(3) Instantaneous and permanent layer not less than 150 according to
frame deformation shall be measured American Society of Agricultural En-
and recorded for each segment of the gineers (‘‘ASAE’’) recommendation
test.
ASAE R313.1–1971 (‘‘Soil cone pene-
(4) Dimensions relative to the seat trometer’’), as reconfirmed in 1975,
shall be determined with the seat un-
which is incorporated by reference. The
loaded and adjusted to its highest and
incorporation by reference was ap-
most rearward latched position pro-
vided for a seated operator. proved by the Director of the Federal
Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
(5) When the seat is offset, the frame
loading shall be on the side with the 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. The path of
least space between the centerline of vehicle travel shall be 12° ± 2° to the
the seat and the upright. top edge of the bank.
499
(ii) ASAE recommendation ASAE to which the protective frame is at-

R313.1–1971, as reconfirmed in 1975, ap- tached, including the mounting parts.
pears in the 1977 Agricultural Engi- (ii) The protective frame shall be in-
neers Yearbook, or it may be examined strumented with the necessary equip-
at: any OSHA Regional Office; the ment to obtain the required load-de-
OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department flection data at the locations and di-
of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, rections specified in Figures W–16, W–
NW., Room N–2625, Washington, DC 17, and W–18.
20210 (telephone: (202) 693–2350 (TTY (iii) The protective frame and mount-
number: (877) 889–5627)); or the National ing connections shall be instrumented
Archives and Records Administration with the necessary recording equip-
(‘‘NARA’’). (For information on the ment to obtain the required load-de-
availability of this material at NARA, flection data to be used in calculating
telephone (202) 741–6030 or access the FSB (see paragraph (j)(3) of this sec-
NARA Web site at www.archives.gov/ tion). The gauges shall be placed on
federallregister/ mounting connections before the in-
codeloflfederallregulations/ stallation load is applied.
ibrllocations.html). Copies may be pur- (2) Test procedure. (i) The side-load
chased from the American Society of application shall be at the upper ex-
Agricultural Engineers 2950 Niles Road, tremity of the frame upright at a 90°
St. Joseph, MI 49085. angle to the centerline of the vehicle.
(5) The upper edge of the bank shall The side load L shall be applied accord-
be equipped with an 18-in. (457-mm) ing to Figure W–16. L and D shall be re-
high ramp as described in Figure W–15 corded simultaneously. The test shall
to assist in tipping the vehicle. be stopped when:
(6) The front and rear wheel-tread
(A) The strain energy absorbed by
settings, when adjustable, shall be at
the frame is equal to the required input
the position nearest to halfway be-
energy (Eis);
tween the minimum and maximum set-
(B) Deflection of the frame exceeds
tings obtainable on the vehicle. When
the allowable deflection; or
only two settings are obtainable, the
minimum setting shall be used. (C) The frame load limit occurs be-
(7) Vehicle overturn test—sideways and fore the allowable deflection is reached
rearward. (i) The tractor shall be driven in the side load.
under its own power along the specified (ii) The L–D diagram (see Figure W–
path of travel at a minimum speed of 10 19 for an example) shall be constructed
mph (16 kph), or maximum vehicle using the data obtained according to
speed when under 10 mph (16 kph), up paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section.
the ramp as described in paragraph (iii) The modified Lm–Dm diagram
(d)(5) of this section to induce sideways shall be constructed according to para-
overturn. graph (g)(2)(ii) and Figure W–20 of this
(ii) Rear upset shall be induced by en- section. The strain energy absorbed by
gine power with the tractor operating the frame (Eu) shall then be deter-
in gear to obtain 3 to 5 mph (4.8 to 8 mined.
kph) at maximum governed engine (iv) Eis, FER, and FSB shall be cal-
rpm, preferably by driving forward di- culated.
rectly up a minimum slope of two (v) The test procedure shall be re-
vertical to one horizontal. The engine peated on the same frame using L (rear
clutch may be used to aid in inducing input; see Figure W–18) and Eir. Rear-
the upset. load application shall be distributed
(f) Other test procedures. When the uniformly along a maximum projected
field-upset test is not used to deter- dimension of 27 in. (686 mm) and a max-
mine ROPS performance, either the imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm)
static test or the dynamic test, con- normal to the direction of load applica-
tained in paragraph (g) or (h) of this tion. The load shall be applied to the
section, shall be made. upper extremity of the frame at the
(g) Static test—(1) Test conditions. (i) point that is midway between the cen-
The laboratory mounting base shall in- terline of the seat and the inside of the
clude that part of the tractor chassis frame upright.
500
(h) Dynamic test—(1) Test conditions. three times its depth (see Figures W–22
(i) The protective frame and tractor and W–23).
shall meet the requirements of para- (v) Means shall be provided for indi-
graphs (e)(2) or (3) of this section, as cating the maximum instantaneous de-
appropriate. flection along the line of impact. A
(ii) The dynamic loading shall be pro- simple friction device is illustrated in
duced by using a 4,410-lb (2,000-kg) Figure W–18.
weight acting as a pendulum. The im- (vi) No repair or adjustments may be
pact face of the weight shall be 27 ± 1 carried out during the test.
in. by 27 ± 1 in. (686 ± 25 mm by 686 ± 25 (vii) When any cables, props, or
mm), and shall be constructed so that blocking shift or break during the test,
its center of gravity is within 1.0 in. the test shall be repeated.
(25.4 mm) of its geometric center. The (2) Test procedure. (i) General. The
weight shall be suspended from a pivot frame shall be evaluated by imposing
point 18 to 22 ft (5.5 to 6.7 m) above the dynamic loading to the rear, followed
point of impact on the frame, and shall by a load to the side on the same
be conveniently and safely adjustable frame. The pendulum dropped from the
for height (see Figure W–21). height (see the definition of ‘‘H’’ in
paragraph (j)(3) of this section) imposes
(iii) For each phase of testing, the
the dynamic load. The position of the
tractor shall be restrained from mov-
pendulum shall be so selected that the
ing when the dynamic load is applied.
initial point of impact on the frame
The restraining members shall be 0.50-
shall be in line with the arc of travel of
to 0.63-in. (12.5- to 16.0-mm) steel cable,
the center of gravity of the pendulum.
and points for attaching restraining
A quick-release mechanism should be
members shall be located an appro-
used but, when used, it shall not influ-
priate distance behind the rear axle ence the attitude of the block.
and in front of the front axle to provide (ii) Impact at rear. The tractor shall
a 15° to 30° angle between the restrain- be restrained properly according to
ing cable and the horizontal. The re- paragraphs (h)(1)(iii) and (h)(1)(iv) of
straining cables shall either be in the this section. The tractor shall be posi-
plane in which the center of gravity of tioned with respect to the pivot point
the pendulum will swing, or more than of the pendulum so that the pendulum
one restraining cable shall give a re- is 20° from the vertical prior to impact
sultant force in this plane (see Figure as shown in Figure W–22. The impact
W–22). shall be applied to the upper extremity
(iv) The wheel-tread setting shall of the frame at the point that is mid-
comply with the requirements of para- way between the centerline of the
graph (e)(6) of this section. The tires frame and the inside of the frame up-
shall have no liquid ballast, and shall right of a new frame.
be inflated to the maximum operating (iii) Impact at side. The blocking and
pressure recommended by the tire man- restraining shall conform to para-
ufacturer. With the specified tire infla- graphs (h)(1)(iii) and (h)(1)(iv) of this
tion, the restraining cables shall be section. The center point of impact
tightened to provide tire deflection of 6 shall be that structural member of the
to 8 percent of the nominal tire-section protective frame likely to hit the
width. After the vehicle is restrained ground first in a sideways accidental
properly, a wooden beam that is 6-in. × upset. The side impact shall be applied
6-in. (150 mm × 150 mm) shall be driven to the side opposite that used for rear
tightly against the appropriate wheels impact.
and clamped. For the test to the side, (i) Performance requirements—(1) Gen-
an additional wooden beam shall be eral. (i) The frame, overhead weather
placed as a prop against the wheel shield, fenders, or other parts in the
nearest to the operator’s station, and operator area may be deformed in these
shall be secured to the floor so that tests, but shall not shatter or leave
when it is positioned against the wheel sharp edges exposed to the operator, or
rim, it is at an angle of 25° to 40° to the violate the dimensions shown in Fig-
horizontal. It shall have a length 20 to ures W–16 and W–17, and specified as
25 times its depth, and a width two to follows:
501
D = 2 in. (51 mm) inside of the frame rubber-tired loaders and dozers de-
upright to the vertical centerline of scribed in 29 CFR 1926.1001), used in op-
the seat; erations such as landscaping, construc-
E = 30 in. (762 mm); tion services, loading, digging, grounds
F = Not less than 0 in. (0 mm) and not keeping, and highway maintenance.
more than 12 in. (305 mm), measured (3) The following symbols, terms, and
at the centerline of the seat backrest explanations apply to this section:
to the crossbar along the line of load E is = Energy input to be absorbed dur-
application as shown in Figure W–17; ing side loading in ft-lb (E′is in J
and [joules]);
G = 24 in. (610 mm). E is = 723 + 0.4 W ft-lb (E′ is = 100 + 0.12
(ii) The material and design combina- W′ , J);
tion used in the protective structure E ir = Energy input to be absorbed dur-
must be such that the structure can ing rear loading in ft-lb (E′ ir in J);
meet all prescribed performance tests E ir = 0.47 W ft-lb (E′ ir = 0.14 W’, J);
at 0 °F (¥18 °C) according to 29 CFR W = Tractor weight as specified by 29
1926.1001(f)(2)(iv). CFR 1926.1002(e)(1) and (e)(3), in lb (W′
(2) Vehicle overturn performance re- , kg);
quirements. The requirements of this L = Static load, lb (kg);
paragraph (i) must be met in both side
D = Deflection under L, in. (mm);
and rear overturns.
L–D = Static load-deflection diagram;
(3) Static test performance requirements.
Design factors shall be incorporated in Lm–Dm = Modified static load-deflection
each design to withstand an overturn diagram (Figure W–20). To account
test as specified by this paragraph (i). for an increase in strength due to an
The structural requirements will be increase in strain rate, raise L in the
met generally when FER is greater plastic range L × K;
than 1.0 and FSB is greater than K–1 in K = Increase in yield strength induced
both side and rear loadings. by higher rate of loading (1.3 for hot,
(4) Dynamic test performance require- rolled, low-carbon steel 1010–1030).
ments. Design factors shall be incor- Low carbon is preferable; however,
porated in each design to withstand the when higher carbon or other material
overturn test specified by this para- is used, K must be determined in the
graph (i). The structural requirements laboratory. Refer to Norris, C.H.,
will be met generally when the dimen- Hansen, R.J., Holley, M.J., Biggs,
sions in this paragraph (i) are used dur- J.M., Namyet, S., and Minami, J.V.,
ing both side and rear loads. Structural Design for Dynamic Loads,
(j) Definitions applicable to this section. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959, p. 3;
(1) ‘‘Agricultural tractor’’ means a Lmax = Maximum observed static load;
wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- Load Limit = Point on a continuous L–
gine horsepower, used in construction D curve at which the observed static
work, that is designed to furnish the load is 0.8 Lmax (refer to Figure W–19);
power to pull, propel, or drive imple- Eu = Strain energy absorbed by the
ments. (SAE standard J333a–1970 (‘‘Op- frame, ft-lb (J); area under the Lm–Dm
erator protection for wheel-type agri- curve;
cultural and industrial tractors’’) de- FER = Factor of energy ratio, FER =
fines ‘‘agricultural tractor’’ as a EuEis; also, FER = EuEir;
‘‘wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- Pb = Maximum observed force in
gine horsepower designed to furnish mounting connection under a static
the power to pull, carry, propel, or load, L, lb (kg);
drive implements that are designed for Pu = Ultimate force capacity of mount-
agricultural usage.’’ Since this part ing connection, lb (kg);
1926 applies only to construction work, FSB = Design margin for a mounting
the SAE definition of ‘‘agricultural connection (PuPb)¥1; and
tractor’’ is adopted for purposes of this H = Vertical height of lift of 4,410-lb
subpart.) (2,000-kg) weight, in. (H′, mm). The
(2) ‘‘Industrial tractor’’ means that weight shall be pulled back so that
class of wheel-type tractors of more the height of its center of gravity
than 20 engine horsepower (other than above the point of impact is defined
502
as follows: H = 4.92 + 0.00190 W (H′ = (c) Test procedures—general. (1) The

125 + 0.107 W′) (see Figure W–24). requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1002(d), (e),
(k) Source of standard. The standard and (f) shall be met.
in this section is derived from, and re- (2) Static and dynamic rear load ap-
states, in part, Society of Automotive plication shall be distributed uni-
Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J334a-1970 formly along a maximum projected di-
(‘‘Protective frame test procedures and mension of 27 in. (686 mm), and a max-
performance requirements’’). The SAE imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm),
standard appears in the 1971 SAE Hand- normal to the direction of load applica-
book, which may be examined at any tion. The load shall be applied to the
OSHA regional office. upper extremity of the frame at the
[70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 point that is midway between the cen-
FR 41129, July 20, 2006] terline of the seat and the inside of the
frame upright.
§ 1926.1003 Overhead protection for (3) The static and dynamic side load
operators of agricultural and indus- application shall be distributed uni-
trial tractors used in construction. formly along a maximum projected di-
(a) General—(1) Purpose. When over- mension of 27 in. (686 mm), and a max-
head protection is provided on wheel- imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm),
type agricultural and industrial trac- normal to the direction of load applica-
tors, the overhead protection shall be tion. The direction of load application
designed and installed according to the is the same as in 29 CFR 1926.1002 (g)
requirements contained in this section. and (h). To simulate the characteris-
The provisions of 29 CFR 1926.1001 for tics of the structure during an upset,
rubber-tired dozers and rubber-tired the center of load application may be
loaders may be used instead of the located from a point 24 in. (610 mm) (K)
standards contained in this section. forward to 12 in. (305 mm) (L) rearward
The purpose of this standard is to mini- of the front of the seat backrest, to
mize the possibility of operator injury best use the structural strength (see
resulting from overhead hazards such Figure W–25).
as flying and falling objects, and at the
(d) Drop test procedures. (1) The same
same time to minimize the possibility
frame shall be subjected to the drop
of operator injury from the cover itself
test following either the static or dy-
in the event of accidental upset.
(2) Applicability. This standard applies namic test.
to wheel-type agricultural and indus- (2) A solid steel sphere or material of
trial tractors used in construction equivalent spherical dimension weigh-
work (see 29 CFR 1926.1002(b) and (j)). ing 100 lb (45.4 kg) shall be dropped
In the case of machines to which 29 once from a height 10 ft (3.08 m) above
CFR 1926.604 (relating to site clearing) the overhead cover.
also applies, the overhead protection (3) The point of impact shall be on
may be either the type of protection the overhead cover at a point within
provided in 29 CFR 1926.604, or the type the zone of protection as shown in Fig-
of protection provided by this section. ure W–26, which is furthest removed
(b) Overhead protection. When over- from major structural members.
head protection is installed on wheel- (e) Crush test procedure. (1) The same
type agricultural or industrial tractors frame shall be subjected to the crush
used in construction work, it shall test following the drop test and static
meet the requirements of this para- or dynamic test.
graph. The overhead protection may be (2) The test load shall be applied as
constructed of a solid material. When shown in Figure W–27, with the seat po-
grid or mesh is used, the largest per- sitioned as specified in 29 CFR
missible opening shall be such that the 1926.1002(d)(4). Loading cylinders shall
maximum circle that can be inscribed be mounted pivotally at both ends.
between the elements of the grid or Loads applied by each cylinder shall be
mesh is 1.5 in. (38 mm) in diameter. The equal within two percent, and the sum
overhead protection shall not be in- of the loads of the two cylinders shall
stalled in such a way as to become a be two times the tractor weight as set
hazard in the case of upset. forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(e)(1). The
503
Pt. 1926, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
maximum width of the beam illus- (3) Crush test performance require-
trated in Figure W–27 shall be 6 in. (152 ments. The protected zone as described
mm). in Figure W–28 must not be violated.
(f) Performance requirements. (1) Gen- (g) Source of standard. This standard
eral. The performance requirements set is derived from, and restates, in part,
forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(i)(2), (3), and the portions of Society of Automotive
(4) shall be met. Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J167–1970
(2) Drop test performance requirements.
(‘‘Protective frame with overhead pro-
(i) Instantaneous deformation due to
tection—test procedures and perform-
impact of the sphere shall not enter
the protected zone as illustrated in ance requirements’’), which pertain to
Figures W–25, W–26, and W–28. overhead protection requirements. The
(ii) In addition to the dimensions set SAE standard appears in the 1971 SAE
forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(i)(1)(i), the fol- Handbook, which may be examined at
lowing dimensions apply to Figure W– any OSHA regional office.
28: [70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005]
H = 17.5 in. (444 mm); and
J = 2 in. (50.8 mm), measured from the APPENDIX A TO SUBPART W—FIGURES
outer periphery of the steering wheel. W–14 THROUGH W–28
504
ER20JY06.009</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, App. A
505
ER20JY06.010</GPH>
506
ER20JY06.011</GPH>
507
ER20JY06.012</GPH>
ER20JY06.014</GPH>
508
ER20JY06.013</GPH>
509
ER20JY06.015</GPH>
510
ER20JY06.016</GPH>
511
ER20JY06.017</GPH>
512
ER20JY06.018</GPH>
513
ER20JY06.019</GPH>
514
ER20JY06.020</GPH>
515
ER20JY06.021</GPH>
516
ER20JY06.022</GPH>
[70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 tional requirements for ladders used on
FR 41130, July 20, 2006] or with scaffolds are contained in sub-
part L—Scaffolds
Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders (b) Definitions. Cleat means a ladder
crosspiece of rectangular cross section
AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work placed on edge upon which a person
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- may step while ascending or descend-
tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8,
ing a ladder.
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Double-cleat ladder means a ladder
Order No. 1–90 (55 FR 9033); and 29 CFR part similar in construction to a single-
1911. cleat ladder, but with a center rail to
SOURCE: 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990, unless allow simultaneous two-way traffic for
otherwise noted. employees ascending or descending.
Equivalent means alternative designs,
§ 1926.1050 Scope, application, and materials, or methods that the em-
definitions applicable to this sub-
part. ployer can demonstrate will provide an
equal or greater degree of safety for
(a) Scope and application. This sub- employees than the method or item
part applies to all stairways and lad-
specified in the standard.
ders used in construction, alteration,
repair (including painting and deco- Extension trestle ladder means a self-
rating), and demolition workplaces supporting portable ladder, adjustable
covered under 29 CFR part 1926, and in length, consisting of a trestle ladder
also sets forth, in specified cir- base and a vertically adjustable exten-
cumstances, when ladders and stair- sion section, with a suitable means for
ways are required to be provided. Addi- locking the ladders together.
517
ER20JY06.023</GPH>
Failure means load refusal, breakage, or temporary openings used for such
or separation of component parts. Load travel.
refusal is the point where the struc- Portable ladder means a ladder that
tural members lose their ability to can be readily moved or carried.
carry the loads. Riser height means the vertical dis-
Fixed ladder means a ladder that can- tance from the top of a tread to the top
not be readily moved or carried be- of the next higher tread or platform/
cause it is an integral part of a build- landing or the distance from the top of
ing or structure. A side-step fixed ladder a platform/landing to the top of the
is a fixed ladder that requires a person next higher tread or platform/landing.
getting off at the top to step to the Side-step fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed lad-
side of the ladder side rails to reach the der.’’
landing. A through fixed ladder is a
Single-cleat ladder means a ladder
fixed ladder that requires a person get-
consisting of a pair of side rails, con-
ting off at the top to step between the
side rails of the ladder to reach the nected together by cleats, rungs, or
landing. steps.
Handrail means a rail used to provide Single-rail ladder means a portable
employees with a handhold for support. ladder with rungs, cleats, or steps
Individual-rung/step ladders means mounted on a single rail instead of the
ladders without a side rail or center normal two rails used on most other
rail support. Such ladders are made by ladders.
mounting individual steps or rungs di- Spiral stairway means a series of steps
rectly to the side or wall of the struc- attached to a vertical pole and pro-
ture. gressing upward in a winding fashion
Job-made ladder means a ladder that within a cylindrical space.
is fabricated by employees, typically at Stairrail system means a vertical bar-
the construction site, and is not com- rier erected along the unprotected
mercially manufactured. This defini- sides and edges of a stariway to pre-
tion does not apply to any individual- vent employees from falling to lower
rung/step ladders. levels. The top surface of a stairrail
Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size self- system may also be a ‘‘handrail.’’
supporting ladder consisting of a wide Step stool (ladder type) means a self-
flat tread ladder in the form of stairs. supporting, foldable, portable ladder,
The assenbly may include handrails. nonadjustable in length, 32 inches or
Lower levels means those areas to less in overall size, with flat steps and
which an employee can fall from a without a pail shelf, designed to be
stairway or ladder. Such areas include climbed on the ladder top cap as well
ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, run- as all steps. The side rails may con-
ways, excavations, pits, tanks, mate- tinue above the top cap.
rial, water, equipment, and similar sur- Through fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed lad-
faces. It does not include the surface der.’’
from which the employee falls. Tread depth means the horizontal dis-
Maximum intended load means the tance from front to back of a tread (ex-
total load of all employees, equipment, cluding nosing, if any).
tools, materials, transmitted loads, Unprotected sides and edges means any
and other loads anticipated to be ap-
side or edge (except at entrances to
plied to a ladder component at any one
points of access) of a stairway where
time.
there is no stairrail system or wall 36
Nosing means that portion of a tread
inches (.9 m) or more in height, and
projecting beyond the face of the riser
any side or edge (except at entrances to
immediately below.
points of access) of a stairway landing,
Point of access means all areas used
or ladder platform where there is no
by employees for work-related passage
wall or guardrail system 39 inches (1 m)
from one area or level to another. Such
or more in height.
open areas include doorways,
1passageways, stairway openings, stud- [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23,
ded walls, and various other permanent 1991, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993]
518
§ 1926.1051 General requirements. stairs. Variations in riser height or

(a) A stairway or ladder shall be pro- tread depth shall not be over 1⁄4-inch
vided at all personnel points of access (0.6 cm) in any stairway system.
where there is a break in elevation of (4) Where doors or gates open directly
19 inches (48 cm) or more, and no ramp, on a stairway, a platform shall be pro-
runway, sloped embankment, or per- vided, and the swing of the door shall
sonnel hoist is provided. not reduce the effective width of the
(1) Employees shall not use any spi- platform to less than 20 inches (51 cm).
ral stairways that will not be a perma- (5) Metal pan landings and metal pan
nent part of the structure on which treads, when used, shall be secured in
construction work is being performed. place before filling with concrete or
(2) A double-cleated ladder or two or other material.
more separate ladders shall be provided (6) All parts of stairways shall be free
when ladders are the only mean of ac- of hazardous projections, such as pro-
cess or exit from a working area for 25 truding nails.
or more employees, or when a ladder is (7) Slippery conditions on stairways
to serve simultaneous two-way traffic. shall be eliminated before the stair-
(3) When a building or structure has ways are used to reach other levels.
only one point of access between levels, (b) Temporary service. The following
that point of access shall be kept clear requirements apply to all stairways as
to permit free passage of employees. indicated:
When work must be performed or (1) Except during stairway construc-
equipment must be used such that free tion, foot traffic is prohibited on stair-
passage at that point of access is re-
ways with pan stairs where the treads
stricted, a second point of access shall
and/or landings are to be filled in with
be provided and used.
concrete or other material at a later
(4) When a building or structure has
date, unless the stairs are temporarily
two or more points of access between
fitted with wood or other solid mate-
levels, at least one point of access shall
rial at least to the top edge of each
be kept clear to permit free passage of
pan. Such temporary treads and land-
employees.
(b) Employers shall provide and in- ings shall be replaced when worn below
stall all stairway and ladder fall pro- the level of the top edge of the pan.
tection systems required by this sub- (2) Except during stairway construc-
part and shall comply with all other tion, foot traffic is prohibited on skel-
pertinent requirements of this subpart eton metal stairs where permanent
before employees begin the work that treads and/or landings are to be in-
necessitates the installation and use of stalled at a later date, unless the stairs
stairways, ladders, and their respective are fitted with secured temporary
fall protection systems. treads and landings long enough to
cover the entire tread and/or landing
§ 1926.1052 Stairways. area.
(a) General. The following require- (3) Treads for temporary service shall
ments apply to all stairways as indi- be made of wood or other solid mate-
cated: rial, and shall be installed the full
(1) Stairways that will not be a per- width and depth of the stair.
manent part of the structure on which (c) Stairrails and handrails. The fol-
construction work is being performed lowing requirements apply to all stair-
shall have landings of not less than 30 ways as indicated:
inches (76 cm) in the direction of travel (1) Stairways having four or more ris-
and extend at least 22 inches (56 cm) in ers or rising more than 30 inches (76
width at every 12 feet (3.7 m) or less of cm), whichever is less, shall be
vertical rise. equipped with:
(2) Stairs shall be installed between (i) At least one handrail; and
30° and 50° from horizontal. (ii) One stairrail system along each
(3) Riser height and tread depth shall unprotected side or edge.
be uniform within each flight of stairs, NOTE: When the top edge of a stairrail sys-
including any foundation structure tem also serves as a handrail, paragraph
used as one or more treads of the (c)(7) of this section applies.
519
(2) Winding and spiral stairways shall (7) When the top edge of a stairrail
be equipped with a handrail offset suf- system also serves as a handrail, the
ficiently to prevent walking on those height of the top edge shall be not
portions of the stairways where the more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less
tread width is less than 6 inches (15 than 36 inches (91.5 cm) from the upper
cm). surface of the stairrail system to the
(3) The height of stairrails shall be as surface of the tread, in line with the
follows: face of the riser at the forward edge of
(i) Stairrails installed after March 15, the tread.
1991, shall be not less than 36 inches (8) Stairrail systems and handrails
(91.5 cm) from the upper surface of the shall be so surfaced as to prevent in-
stairrail system to the surface of the jury to employees from punctures or
tread, in line with the face of the riser lacerations, and to prevent snagging of
at the forward edge of the tread. clothing.
(9) Handrails shall provide an ade-
(ii) Stairrails installed before March
quate handhold for employees grasping
15, 1991, shall be not less than 30 inches
them to avoid falling.
(76 cm) nor more than 34 inches (86 cm)
(10) The ends of stairrail systems and
from the upper surface of the stairrail
handrails shall be constructed so as not
system to the surface of the tread, in
to constitute a projection hazard.
line with the face of the riser at the
(11) Handrails that will not be a per-
forward edge of the tread.
manent part of the structure being
(4) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- built shall have a minimum clearance
mediate vertical members, or equiva- of 3 inches (8 cm) between the handrail
lent intermediate structural members, and walls, stairrail systems, and other
shall be provided between the top rail objects.
of the stairrail system and the stair- (12) Unprotected sides and edges of
way steps. stairway landings shall be provided
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be lo- with guardrail systems. Guardrail sys-
cated at a height midway between the tem criteria are contained in subpart
top edge of the stairrail system and the M of this part.
stairway steps.
[55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23,
(ii) Screens or mesh, when used, shall
1991; 56 FR 5061, Feb. 7, 1991; 56 FR 41794, Aug.
extend from the top rail to the stair- 23, 1991]
way step, and along the entire opening
between top rail supports. § 1926.1053 Ladders.
(iii) When intermediate vertical (a) General. The following require-
members, such as balusters, are used ments apply to all ladders as indicated,
between posts, they shall be not more including job-made ladders.
than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. (1) Ladders shall be capable of sup-
(iv) Other structural members, when porting the following loads without
used, shall be installed such that there failure:
are no openings in the stairrail system (i) Each self-supporting portable lad-
that are more than 19 inches (48 cm) der: At least four times the maximum
wide. intended load, except that each extra-
(5) Handrails and the top rails of heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic
stairrail systems shall be capable of ladder shall sustain at least 3.3 times
withstanding, without failure, a force the maximum intended load. The abil-
of at least 200 pounds (890 n) applied ity of a ladder to sustain the loads in-
within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, dicated in this paragraph shall be de-
in any downward or outward direction, termined by applying or transmitting
at any point along the top edge. the requisite load to the ladder in a
(6) The height of handrails shall be downward vertical direction. Ladders
not more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor built and tested in conformance with
less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the the applicable provisions of appendix A
upper surface of the handrail to the of this subpart will be deemed to meet
surface of the tread, in line with the this requirement.
face of the riser at the forward edge of (ii) Each portable ladder that is not
the tread. self-supporting: At least four times the
520
maximum intended load, except that nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as
each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal measured between center lines of the
or plastic ladders shall sustain at least rungs, cleats, and steps.
3.3 times the maximum intended load. (4)(i) The minimum clear distance be-
The ability of a ladder to sustain the tween the sides of individual-rung/step
loads indicated in this paragraph shall ladders and the minimum clear dis-
be determined by applying or transmit- tance between the side rails of other
ting the requisite load to the ladder in fixed ladders shall be 16 inches (41 cm).
a downward vertical direction when the (ii) The minimum clear distance be-
ladder is placed at an angle of 751⁄2 de- tween side rails for all portable ladders
grees from the horizontal. Ladders shall be 111⁄2 inches (29 cm).
built and tested in conformance with (5) The rungs of individual-rung/step
the applicable provisions of appendix A ladders shall be shaped such that em-
will be deemed to meet this require- ployees’ feet cannot slide off the end of
ment. the rungs.
(iii) Each fixed ladder: At least two (6)(i) The rungs and steps of fixed
loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, con- metal ladders manufactured after
centrated between any two consecutive March 15, 1991, shall be corrugated,
attachments (the number and position knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re-
of additional concentrated loads of 250 sistant material, or otherwise treated
pounds (114 kg) each, determined from to minimize slipping.
anticipated usage of the ladder, shall (ii) The rungs and steps of portable
also be included), plus anticipated metal ladders shall be corrugated,
loads caused by ice buildup, winds, rig- knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re-
ging, and impact loads resulting from sistant material, or otherwise treated
the use of ladder safety devices. Each to minimize slipping.
step or rung shall be capable of sup- (7) Ladders shall not be tied or fas-
porting a single concentrated load of at tened together to provide longer sec-
least 250 pounds (114 kg) applied in the tions unless they are specifically de-
middle of the step or rung. Ladders signed for such use.
built in conformance with the applica- (8) A metal spreader or locking de-
ble provisions of appendix A will be vice shall be provided on each step-
deemed to meet this requirement. ladder to hold the front and back sec-
(2) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps tions in an open position when the lad-
shall be parallel, level, and uniformly der is being used.
spaced when the ladder is in position (9) When splicing is required to ob-
for use. tain a given length of side rail, the re-
(3)(i) Rungs, cleats, and steps of port- sulting side rail must be at least equiv-
able ladders (except as provided below) alent in strength to a one-piece side
and fixed ladders (including individual- rail made of the same material.
rung/step ladders) shall be spaced not (10) Except when portable ladders are
less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart, nor used to gain access to fixed ladders
more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as (such as those on utility towers, bill-
measured between center lines of the boards, and other structures where the
rungs, cleats, and steps. bottom of the fixed ladder is elevated
(ii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step to limit access), when two or more sep-
stools shall be not less than 8 inches (20 arate ladders are used to reach an ele-
cm) apart, nor more than 12 inches (31 vated work area, the ladders shall be
cm) apart, as measured between center offset with a platform or landing be-
lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. tween the ladders. (The requirements
(iii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the to have guardrail systems with
base section of extension trestle lad- toeboards for falling object and over-
ders shall not be less than 8 inches (20 head protection on platforms and land-
cm) nor more than 18 inches (46 cm) ings are set forth in subpart M of this
apart, as measured between center part.)
lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. (11) Ladder components shall be sur-
The rung spacing on the extension sec- faced so as to prevent injury to an em-
tion of the extension trestle ladder ployee from punctures or lacerations,
shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm) and to prevent snagging of clothing.
521
(12) Wood ladders shall not be coated (ii) Self-retracting lifelines, and rest
with any opaque covering, except for platforms at intervals not to exceed 150
identification or warning labels which feet (45.7 m); or
may be placed on one face only of a (iii) A cage or well, and multiple lad-
side rail. der sections, each ladder section not to
(13) The minimum perpendicular exceed 50 feet (15.2 m) in length. Ladder
clearance between fixed ladder rungs, sections shall be offset from adjacent
cleats, and steps, and any obstruction sections, and landing platforms shall
behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 be provided at maximum intervals of 50
cm), except in the case of an elevator feet (15.2 m).
pit ladder, for which a minimum per- (20) Cages for fixed ladders shall con-
pendicular clearance of 41⁄2 inches (11 form to all of the following:
cm) is required. (i) Horizontal bands shall be fastened
(14) The minimum perpendicular to the side rails of rail ladders, or di-
clearance between the center line of rectly to the structure, building, or
fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, equipment for individual-rung ladders;
and any obstruction on the climbing (ii) Vertical bars shall be on the in-
side of the ladder shall be 30 inches (76 side of the horizontal bands and shall
cm), except as provided in paragraph be fastened to them;
(a)(15) of this section. (iii) Cages shall extend not less than
(15) When unavoidable obstructions 27 inches (68 cm), or more than 30
are encountered, the minimum perpen- inches (76 cm) from the centerline of
dicular clearance between the center- the step or rung (excluding the flare at
line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and the bottom of the cage), and shall not
steps, and the obstruction on the be less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width;
climbing side of the ladder may be re- (iv) The inside of the cage shall be
duced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided clear of projections;
that a deflection device is installed to (v) Horizontal bands shall be spaced
guide employees around the obstruc- not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) on center
tion. vertically;
(16) Through fixed ladders at their (vi) Vertical bars shall be spaced at
point of access/egress shall have a step- intervals not more than 91⁄2 inches (24
across distance of not less than 7 cm) on center horizontally;
inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches (vii) The bottom of the cage shall be
(30 cm) as measured from the center- at a level not less than 7 feet (2.1 m)
line of the steps or rungs to the nearest nor more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the
edge of the landing area. If the normal point of access to the bottom of the
step-across distance exceeds 12 inches ladder. The bottom of the cage shall be
(30 cm), a landing platform shall be flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all
provided to reduce the distance to the around within the distance between the
specified limit. bottom horizontal band and the next
(17) Fixed ladders without cages or higher band;
wells shall have a clear width to the (viii) The top of the cage shall be a
nearest permanent object of at least 15 minimum of 42 inches (1.1 m) above the
inches (38 cm) on each side of the cen- top of the platform, or the point of ac-
terline of the ladder. cess at the top of the ladder, with pro-
(18) Fixed ladders shall be provided vision for access to the platform or
with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, other point of access.
or self-retracting lifelines where the (21) Wells for fixed ladders shall con-
length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 form to all of the following:
m) but the top of the ladder is at a dis- (i) They shall completely encircle the
tance greater than 24 feet (7.3 m) above ladder;
lower levels. (ii) They shall be free of projections;
(19) Where the total length of a climb (iii) Their inside face on the climbing
equals or exceeds 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed side of the ladder shall extend not less
ladders shall be equipped with one of than 27 inches (68 cm) nor more than 30
the following: inches (76 cm) from the centerline of
(i) Ladder safety devices; or the step or rung;
522
(iv) The inside clear width shall be at (25) For through-fixed-ladder exten-
least 30 inches (76 cm); sions, the steps or rungs shall be omit-
(v) The bottom of the wall on the acted from the extension and the exten-
cess side shall start at a level not less sion of the side rails shall be flared to
than 7 feet (2.1 m) nor more than 8 feet provide not less than 24 inches (61 cm)
(2.4 m) above the point of access to the nor more than 30 inches (76 cm) clear-
bottom of the ladder. ance between side rails. Where ladder
(22) Ladder safety devices, and re- safety devices are provided, the max-
lated support systems, for fixed ladders imum clearance between side rails of
shall conform to all of the following: the extensions shall not exceed 36
(i) They shall be capable of with- inches (91 cm).
standing without failure a drop test
(26) For side-step fixed ladders, the
consisting of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of
a 500-pound (226 kg) weight; side rails and the steps or rungs shall
(ii) They shall permit the employee be continuous in the extension.
using the device to ascend or descend (27) Individual-rung/step ladders, ex-
without continually having to hold, cept those used where their access
push or pull any part of the device, openings are covered with manhole
leaving both hands free for climbing; covers or hatches, shall extend at least
(iii) They shall be activated within 2 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level
feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs, and or landing platform either by the con-
limit the descending velocity of an em- tinuation of the rung spacings as hori-
ployee to 7 feet/sec. (2.1 m/sec.) or less; zontal grab bars or by providing
(iv) The connection between the car- vertical grab bars that shall have the
rier or lifeline and the point of attach- same lateral spacing as the vertical
ment to the body belt or harness shall legs of the rungs.
not exceed 9 inches (23 cm) in length. (b) Use. The following requirements
(23) The mounting of ladder safety apply to the use of all ladders, includ-
devices for fixed ladders shall conform ing job-made ladders, except as other-
to the following: wise indicated:
(i) Mountings for rigid carriers shall
(1) When portable ladders are used for
be attached at each end of the carrier,
access to an upper landing surface, the
with intermediate mountings, as nec-
essary, spaced along the entire length ladder side rails shall extend at least 3
of the carrier, to provide the strength feet (.9 m) above the upper landing sur-
necessary to stop employees’ falls. face to which the ladder is used to gain
(ii) Mountings for flexible carriers access; or, when such an extension is
shall be attached at each end of the not possible because of the ladder’s
carrier. When the system is exposed to length, then the ladder shall be secured
wind, cable guides for flexible carriers at its top to a rigid support that will
shall be installed at a minimum spac- not deflect, and a grasping device, such
ing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and maximum as a grabrail, shall be provided to as-
spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the en- sist employees in mounting and dis-
tire length of the carrier, to prevent mounting the ladder. In no case shall
wind damage to the system. the extension be such that ladder de-
(iii) The design and installation of flection under a load would, by itself,
mountings and cable guides shall not cause the ladder to slip off its support.
reduce the design strength of the lad- (2) Ladders shall be maintained free
der. of oil, grease, and other slipping haz-
(24) The side rails of through or side- ards.
step fixed ladders shall extend 42 inches (3) Ladders shall not be loaded be-
(1.1 m) above the top of the access level yond the maximum intended load for
or landing platform served by the lad-
which they were built, nor beyond
der. For a parapet ladder, the access
their manufacturer’s rated capacity.
level shall be the roof if the parapet is
cut to permit passage through the (4) Ladders shall be used only for the
parapet; if the parapet is continuous, purpose for which they were designed.
the access level shall be the top of the (5)(i) Non-self-supporting ladders
parapet. shall be used at an angle such that the
523
§§ 1926.1054–1926.1059 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–07 Edition)
horizontal distance from the top sup- climbing on both front and rear sec-
port to the foot of the ladder is ap- tions.
proximately one-quarter of the work- (15) Ladders shall be inspected by a
ing length of the ladder (the distance competent person for visible defects on
along the ladder between the foot and a periodic basis and after any occur-
the top support). rence that could affect their safe use.
(ii) Wood job-made ladders with (16) Portable ladders with structural
spliced side rails shall be used at an defects, such as, but not limited to,
angle such that the horizontal distance broken or missing rungs, cleats, or
is one-eighth the working length of the steps, broken or split rails, corroded
ladder. components, or other faulty or defec-
(iii) Fixed ladders shall be used at a tive components, shall either be imme-
pitch no greater than 90 degrees from diately marked in a manner that read-
the horizontal, as measured to the ily identifies them as defective, or be
back side of the ladder. tagged with ‘‘Do Not Use’’ or similar
(6) Ladders shall be used only on sta- language, and shall be withdrawn from
ble and level surfaces unless secured to service until repaired.
prevent accidental displacement. (17) Fixed ladders with structural de-
(7) Ladders shall not be used on slip- fects, such as, but not limited to, bro-
pery surfaces unless secured or pro- ken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps,
vided with slip-resistant feet to pre- broken or split rails, or corroded com-
vent accidental displacement. Slip-re- ponents, shall be withdrawn from serv-
sistant feet shall not be used as a sub- ice until repaired. The requirement to
stitute for care in placing, lashing, or withdraw a defective ladder from serv-
holding a ladder that is used upon slip- ice is satisfied if the ladder is either:
pery surfaces including, but not lim- (i) Immediately tagged with ‘‘Do Not
ited to, flat metal or concrete surfaces Use’’ or similar language,
that are constructed so they cannot be (ii) Marked in a manner that readily
prevented from becoming slippery. identifies it as defective;
(8) Ladders placed in any location (iii) Or blocked (such as with a ply-
where they can be displaced by work- wood attachment that spans several
place activities or traffic, such as in rungs).
passageways, doorways, or driveways, (18) Ladder repairs shall restore the
shall be secured to prevent accidental ladder to a condition meeting its origi-
displacement, or a barricade shall be nal design criteria, before the ladder is
used to keep the activities or traffic returned to use.
away from the ladder. (19) Single-rail ladders shall not be
(9) The area around the top and bot- used.
tom of ladders shall be kept clear. (20) When ascending or descending a
(10) The top of a non-self-supporting ladder, the user shall face the ladder.
ladder shall be placed with the two (21) Each employee shall use at least
rails supported equally unless it is one hand to grasp the ladder when pro-
equipped with a single support attach- gressing up and/or down the ladder.
ment. (22) An employee shall not carry any
(11) Ladders shall not be moved, object or load that could cause the em-
shifted, or extended while occupied. ployee to lose balance and fall.
(12) Ladders shall have nonconduc- [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23,
tive siderails if they are used where the 1991, as amended at 56 FR 41794, Aug. 23, 1991]
employee or the ladder could contact
exposed energized electrical equip- §§ 1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved]
ment, except as provided in
§ 1926.951(c)(1) of this part. § 1926.1060 Training requirements.
(13) The top or top step of a step- The following training provisions
ladder shall not be used as a step. clarify the requirements of
(14) Cross-bracing on the rear section § 1926.21(b)(2), regarding the hazards ad-
of stepladders shall not be used for dressed in subpart X.
climbing unless the ladders are de- (a) The employer shall provide a
signed and provided with steps for training program for each employee
524
using ladders and stairways, as nec- U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Sec. 107, Contract Work
essary. The program shall enable each Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Con-
employee to recognize hazards related struction Safety Standards Act) (40 U.S.C.
333); Sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor Workers’
to ladders and stairways, and shall
Compensation Act (33 U.S.C. 941); Secretary
train each employee in the procedures of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76
to be followed to minimize these haz- (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR
ards. 9033), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017) or 5–2002 (67 FR
(1) The employer shall ensure that 65008) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
each employee has been trained by a SOURCE: 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993, unless
competent person in the following otherwise noted.
areas, as applicable:
(i) The nature of fall hazards in the GENERAL
work area;
(ii) The correct procedures for erect- § 1926.1071 Scope and application.
ing, maintaining, and disassembling NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
the fall protection systems to be used; struction work under this section are iden-
(iii) The proper construction, use, tical to those set forth at § 1910.401 of this
placement, and care in handling of all chapter.
stairways and ladders; [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
(iv) The maximum intended load-car-
rying capacities of ladders used; and § 1926.1072 Definitions.
(v) The standards contained in this
NOTE: The provisions applicable to con-
subpart. struction work under this section are iden-
(b) Retraining shall be provided for tical to those set forth at § 1910.402 of this
each employee as necessary so that the chapter.
employee maintains the understanding
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
and knowledge acquired through com-
pliance with this section. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X OF PART § 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team.
1926—LADDERS
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory struction work under this section are iden-
guideline to assist employers in complying tical to those set forth at § 1910.410 of this
with the ladder loading and strength require- chapter.
ments of § 1926.1053(a)(1). A ladder designed
and built in accordance with the applicable [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
national consensus standards, as set forth
below, will be considered to meet the re- GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
quirements of § 1926.1053(a)(1):
• Manufactured portable wood ladders: § 1926.1080 Safe practices manual.
American National Standards Institute NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
(ANSI) A14.1–1982—American National struction work under this section are iden-
Standard for Ladders-Portable Wood-Safety tical to those set forth at § 1910.420 of this
Requirements. chapter.
• Manufactured portable metal ladders:
ANSI A14.2–1982—American National Stand- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
ard for Ladders—Portable Metal-Safety Re-
quirements. § 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures.
• Manufactured fixed ladders: ANSI A14.3– NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
1984—American National Standard for Lad- struction work under this section are iden-
ders-Fixed-Safety Requirements. tical to those set forth at § 1910.421 of this
• Job-made ladders: ANSI A14.4–1979—Safe- chapter.
ty Requirements for Job-Made Ladders.
• Plastic ladders: ANSI A14.5–1982—Amer- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
ican National Standard for Ladders-Portable
Reinforced Plastic-Safety Requirements. § 1926.1082 Procedures during dive.
Subpart Y—Diving struction work under this section are iden-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.422 of this
chapter.
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
525
§ 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y OF PART

1926—EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONS
WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR LIMIT EX-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.423 of this POSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS
chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] struction work under this appendix A are
identical to those set forth at Appendix A to
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.1084 SCUBA diving.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y OF PART
struction work under this section are iden- 1926—GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING
chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this appendix B are
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] identical to those set forth at Appendix B to
Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter.
§ 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air div-
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
ing.
Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous
tical to those set forth at § 1910.425 of this Substances
chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
§ 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. U.S.C. 3701 et seq.); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
struction work under this section are iden- Orders 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–
tical to those set forth at § 1910.426 of this 83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR
chapter. 111), 3–2000 (62 FR 50017), or 5–2002 (67 FR
65008) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 11.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
Section 1926.1102 of 29 CFR not issued
under 29 U.S.C. 655 or 29 CFR part 1911; also
§ 1926.1087 Liveboating. issued under 5 U.S.C. 553.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- SOURCE: 58 FR 35190, June 30, 1993, unless
struction work under this section are iden- otherwise noted.
chapter. § 1926.1100 [Reserved]
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.1101 Asbestos.
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND (a) Scope and application. This section
REQUIREMENTS regulates asbestos exposure in all work
as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), includ-
§ 1926.1090 Equipment. ing but not limited to the following:
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (1) Demolition or salvage of struc-
struction work under this section are iden- tures where asbestos is present;
tical to those set forth at § 1910.430 of this (2) Removal or encapsulation of ma-
chapter. terials containing asbestos;
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (3) Construction, alteration, repair,
maintenance, or renovation of struc-
RECORDKEEPING tures, substrates, or portions thereof,
that contain asbestos;
§ 1926.1091 Recordkeeping require- (4) Installation of products con-
ments. taining asbestos;
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (5) Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup;
struction work under this section are iden- and
tical to those set forth at § 1910.440 of this (6) Transportation, disposal, storage,
chapter.
containment of and housekeeping ac-
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] tivities involving asbestos or products
526
containing asbestos, on the site or lo- sheeting, roofing and siding shingles,
cation at which construction activities and construction mastics.
are performed. Class III asbestos work means repair
(7) Coverage under this standard and maintenance operations, where
shall be based on the nature of the ‘‘ACM’’, including TSI and surfacing
work operation involving asbestos ex- ACM and PACM, is likely to be dis-
posure. turbed.
(8) This section does not apply to as- Class IV asbestos work means mainte-
bestos-containing asphalt roof coat- nance and custodial activities during
ings, cements and mastics. which employees contact but do not
(b) Definitions. disturb ACM or PACM and activities to
Aggressive method means removal or clean up dust, waste and debris result-
disturbance of building material by ing from Class I, II, and III activities.
sanding, abrading, grinding or other Clean room means an uncontaminated
method that breaks, crumbles, or dis- room having facilities for the storage
integrates intact ACM. of employees’ street clothing and
Amended water means water to which uncontaminated materials and equip-
surfactant (wetting agent) has been ment.
added to increase the ability of the liq- Closely resemble means that the major
uid to penetrate ACM. workplace conditions which have con-
tributed to the levels of historic asbes-
Asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite,
tos exposure, are no more protective
crocidolite, tremolite asbestos,
than conditions of the current work-
anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite as-
place.
bestos, and any of these minerals that
Competent person means, in addition
has been chemically treated and/or al-
to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32 (f),
tered. For purposes of this standard,
one who is capable of identifying exist-
‘‘asbestos’’ includes PACM, as defined
ing asbestos hazards in the workplace
below.
and selecting the appropriate control
Asbestos-containing material (ACM),
strategy for asbestos exposure, who has
means any material containing more
the authority to take prompt correc-
than one percent asbestos.
tive measures to eliminate them, as
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f): in addi-
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- tion, for Class I and Class II work who
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- is specially trained in a training course
ment of Labor, or designee. which meets the criteria of EPA’s
Authorized person means any person Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR part
authorized by the employer and re- 763) for supervisor, or its equivalent
quired by work duties to be present in and, for Class III and Class IV work,
regulated areas. who is trained in a manner consistent
Building/facility owner is the legal en- with EPA requirements for training of
tity, including a lessee, which exercises local education agency maintenance
control over management and record and custodial staff as set forth at 40
keeping functions relating to a build- CFR 763.92 (a)(2).
ing and/or facility in which activities Critical barrier means one or more
covered by this standard take place. layers of plastic sealed over all open-
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) ings into a work area or any other
means one certified in the practice of similarly placed physical barrier suffi-
industrial hygiene by the American cient to prevent airborne asbestos in a
Board of Industrial Hygiene. work area from migrating to an adja-
Class I asbestos work means activities cent area.
involving the removal of TSI and sur- Decontamination area means an en-
facing ACM and PACM. closed area adjacent and connected to
Class II asbestos work means activities the regulated area and consisting of an
involving the removal of ACM which is equipment room, shower area, and
not thermal system insulation or sur- clean room, which is used for the de-
facing material. This includes, but is contamination of workers, materials,
not limited to, the removal of asbestos- and equipment that are contaminated
containing wallboard, floor tile and with asbestos.
527
Demolition means the wrecking or Modification for purposes of para-

taking out of any load-supporting graph (g)(6)(ii), means a changed or al-
structural member and any related tered procedure, material or compo-
razing, removing, or stripping of asbes- nent of a control system, which re-
tos products. places a procedure, material or compo-
Director means the Director, National nent of a required system. Omitting a
Institute for Occupational Safety and procedure or component, or reducing or
Health, U.S. Department of Health and diminishing the stringency or strength
Human Services, or designee. of a material or component of the con-
Disturbance means activities that dis- trol system is not a ‘‘modification’’ for
rupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, purposes of paragraph (g)(6) of this sec-
crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or tion.
generate visible debris from ACM or Negative Initial Exposure Assessment
PACM. In no event shall the amount of means a demonstration by the em-
ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that ployer, which complies with the cri-
which can be contained in one glove teria in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this sec-
bag or waste bag which shall not ex- tion, that employee exposure during an
ceed 60 inches in length and width. operation is expected to be consist-
Employee exposure means that expo- ently below the PELs.
sure to airborne asbestos that would PACM means ‘‘presumed asbestos
occur if the employee were not using containing material’’.
respiratory protective equipment. Presumed Asbestos Containing Material
Equipment room (change room) means means thermal system insulation and
a contaminated room located within surfacing material found in buildings
the decontamination area that is sup- constructed no later than 1980. The des-
plied with impermeable bags or con- ignation of a material as ‘‘PACM’’ may
tainers for the disposal of contami- be rebutted pursuant to paragraph
nated protective clothing and equip- (k)(5) of this section.
ment. Project Designer means a person who
Fiber means a particulate form of as- has successfully completed the train-
bestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a ing requirements for an abatement
length-to-diameter ratio of at least 3 to project designer established by 40
1. U.S.C. 763.90(g).
Glovebag means not more than a 60×60 Regulated area means: an area estab-
inch impervious plastic bag-like enclo- lished by the employer to demarcate
sure affixed around an asbestos-con- areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos
taining material, with glove-like ap- work is conducted, and any adjoining
pendages through which material and area where debris and waste from such
tools may be handled. asbestos work accumulate; and a work
High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) area within which airborne concentra-
filter means a filter capable of trapping tions of asbestos, exceed or there is a
and retaining at least 99.97 percent of reasonable possibility they may exceed
all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 mi- the permissible exposure limit. Re-
crometers in diameter. quirements for regulated areas are set
Homogeneous area means an area of out in paragraph (e) of this section.
surfacing material or thermal system Removal means all operations where
insulation that is uniform in color and ACM and/or PACM is taken out or
texture. stripped from structures or substrates,
Industrial hygienist means a profes- and includes demolition operations.
sional qualified by education, training, Renovation means the modifying of
and experience to anticipate, recog- any existing structure, or portion
nize, evaluate and develop controls for thereof.
occupational health hazards. Repair means overhauling, rebuild-
Intact means that the ACM has not ing, reconstructing, or reconditioning
crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise of structures or substrates, including
deteriorated so that the asbestos is no encapsulation or other repair of ACM
longer likely to be bound with its ma- or PACM attached to structures or sub-
trix. strates.
528
Surfacing material means material (3) In addition, all employers of em-

that is sprayed, troweled-on or other- ployees exposed to asbestos hazards
wise applied to surfaces (such as acous- shall comply with applicable protective
tical plaster on ceilings and fire- provisions to protect their employees.
proofing materials on structural mem- For example, if employees working im-
bers, or other materials on surfaces for mediately adjacent to a Class I asbes-
acoustical, fireproofing, and other pur- tos job are exposed to asbestos due to
poses). the inadequate containment of such
Surfacing ACM means surfacing mate- job, their employer shall either remove
rial which contains more than 1% as- the employees from the area until the
bestos. enclosure breach is repaired; or per-
Thermal system insulation (TSI) means form an initial exposure assessment
ACM applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, pursuant to (f) of this section.
breeching, tanks, ducts or other struc- (4) All employers of employees work-
tural components to prevent heat loss ing adjacent to regulated areas estab-
or gain. lished by another employer on a multi-
Thermal system insulation ACM is employer work-site, shall take steps on
thermal system insulation which con- a daily basis to ascertain the integrity
tains more than 1% asbestos. of the enclosure and/or the effective-
ness of the control method relied on by
(c) Permissible exposure limits (PELS)—
the primary asbestos contractor to as-
(1) Time-weighted average limit (TWA).
sure that asbestos fibers do not mi-
The employer shall ensure that no em-
grate to such adjacent areas.
ployee is exposed to an airborne con-
(5) All general contractors on a con-
centration of asbestos in excess of 0.1 struction project which includes work
fiber per cubic centimeter of air as an covered by this standard shall be
eight (8) hour time-weighted average deemed to exercise general supervisory
(TWA), as determined by the method authority over the work covered by
prescribed in Appendix A to this sec- this standard, even though the general
tion, or by an equivalent method. contractor is not qualified to serve as
(2) Excursion limit. The employer shall the asbestos ‘‘competent person’’ as de-
ensure that no employee is exposed to fined by paragraph (b) of this section.
an airborne concentration of asbestos As supervisor of the entire project, the
in excess of 1.0 fiber per cubic centi- general contractor shall ascertain
meter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a whether the asbestos contractor is in
sampling period of thirty (30) minutes, compliance with this standard, and
as determined by the method pre- shall require such contractor to come
scribed in Appendix A to this section, into compliance with this standard
or by an equivalent method. when necessary.
(d) Multi-employer worksites. (1) On (e) Regulated areas. (1) All Class I, II
multi-employer worksites, an employer and III asbestos work shall be con-
performing work requiring the estab- ducted within regulated areas. All
lishment of a regulated area shall in- other operations covered by this stand-
form other employers on the site of the ard shall be conducted within a regu-
nature of the employer’s work with as- lated area where airborne concentra-
bestos and/or PACM, of the existence of tions of asbestos exceed, or there is a
and requirements pertaining to regu- reasonable possibility they may exceed
lated areas, and the measures taken to a PEL. Regulated areas shall comply
ensure that employees of such other with the requirements of paragraphs
employers are not exposed to asbestos. (2), (3),(4) and (5) of this section.
(2) Asbestos hazards at a multi-em- (2) Demarcation. The regulated area
ployer work site shall be abated by the shall be demarcated in any manner
contractor who created or controls the that minimizes the number of persons
source of asbestos contamination. For within the area and protects persons
example, if there is a significant outside the area from exposure to air-
breach of an enclosure containing Class borne asbestos. Where critical barriers
I work, the employer responsible for or negative pressure enclosures are
erecting the enclosure shall repair the used, they may demarcate the regu-
breach immediately. lated area. Signs shall be provided and
529
displayed pursuant to the requirements workplace. The assessment must be

of paragraph (k)(7) of this section. completed in time to comply with re-
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas quirements which are triggered by ex-
shall be limited to authorized persons posure data or the lack of a ‘‘negative
and to persons authorized by the Act or exposure assessment,’’ and to provide
regulations issued pursuant thereto. information necessary to assure that
(4) Respirators. All persons entering a all control systems planned are appro-
regulated area where employees are re- priate for that operation and will work
quired pursuant to paragraph (h)(1) of properly.
this section to wear respirators shall (ii) Basis of Initial Exposure Assess-
be supplied with a respirator selected ment: Unless a negative exposure as-
in accordance with paragraph (h)(2) of sessment has been made pursuant to
this section. paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer initial exposure assessment shall, if
shall ensure that employees do not eat, feasible, be based on monitoring con-
drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or ducted pursuant to paragraph (f)(1)(iii)
apply cosmetics in the regulated area. of this section. The assessment shall
(6) Competent Persons. The employer take into consideration both the moni-
shall ensure that all asbestos work per- toring results and all observations, in-
formed within regulated areas is super- formation or calculations which indi-
vised by a competent person, as defined cate employee exposure to asbestos, in-
in paragraph (b) of this section. The cluding any previous monitoring con-
duties of the competent person are set ducted in the workplace, or of the oper-
out in paragraph (o) of this section. ations of the employer which indicate
(f) Exposure assessments and moni- the levels of airborne asbestos likely to
toring—(1) General monitoring criteria. (i) be encountered on the job. For Class I
Each employer who has a workplace or asbestos work, until the employer con-
work operation where exposure moni- ducts exposure monitoring and docu-
toring is required under this section ments that employees on that job will
shall perform monitoring to determine not be exposed in excess of the PELs,
accurately the airborne concentrations or otherwise makes a negative expo-
of asbestos to which employees may be sure assessment pursuant to paragraph
exposed. (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the employer
(ii) Determinations of employee ex- shall presume that employees are ex-
posure shall be made from breathing posed in excess of the TWA and excur-
zone air samples that are representa- sion limit.
tive of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute (iii) Negative Exposure Assessment:
short-term exposures of each employee. For any one specific asbestos job which
(iii) Representative 8-hour TWA em- will be performed by employees who
ployee exposure shall be determined on have been trained in compliance with
the basis of one or more samples rep- the standard, the employer may dem-
resenting full-shift exposure for em- onstrate that employee exposures will
ployees in each work area. Representa- be below the PELs by data which con-
tive 30-minute short-term employee ex- form to the following criteria;
posures shall be determined on the (A) Objective data demonstrating
basis of one or more samples rep- that the product or material con-
resenting 30 minute exposures associ- taining asbestos minerals or the activ-
ated with operations that are most ity involving such product or material
likely to produce exposures above the cannot release airborne fibers in con-
excursion limit for employees in each centrations exceeding the TWA and ex-
work area. cursion limit under those work condi-
(2) Initial Exposure Assessment. (i) tions having the greatest potential for
Each employer who has a workplace or releasing asbestos; or
work operation covered by this stand- (B) Where the employer has mon-
ard shall ensure that a ‘‘competent per- itored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL
son’’ conducts an exposure assessment and the excursion limit within 12
immediately before or at the initiation months of the current or projected job,
of the operation to ascertain expected the monitoring and analysis were per-
exposures during that operation or formed in compliance with the asbestos
530
standard in effect; and the data were (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
obtained during work operations con- periodic monitoring required by para-
ducted under workplace conditions graph (f)(3) of this section reveals that
‘‘closely resembling’’ the processes, employee exposures, as indicated by
type of material, control methods, statistically reliable measurements,
work practices, and environmental are below the permissible exposure
conditions used and prevailing in the limit and excursion limit the employer
employer’s current operations, the op- may discontinue monitoring for those
erations were conducted by employees employees whose exposures are rep-
whose training and experience are no resented by such monitoring.
more extensive than that of employees (ii) Additional monitoring. Notwith-
performing the current job, and these standing the provisions of paragraph (f)
data show that under the conditions (2) and (3), and (f)(4) of this section, the
prevailing and which will prevail in the employer shall institute the exposure
current workplace there is a high de- monitoring required under paragraph
gree of certainty that employee expo- (f)(3) of this section whenever there has
sures will not exceed the TWA and ex- been a change in process, control
cursion limit; or equipment, personnel or work practices
(C) The results of initial exposure that may result in new or additional
monitoring of the current job made exposures above the permissible expo-
from breathing zone air samples that sure limit and/or excursion limit or
are representative of the 8-hour TWA when the employer has any reason to
and 30-minute short-term exposures of suspect that a change may result in
each employee covering operations new or additional exposures above the
which are most likely during the per- permissible exposure limit and/or ex-
formance of the entire asbestos job to cursion limit. Such additional moni-
result in exposures over the PELs. toring is required regardless of whether
(3) Periodic monitoring—(i) Class I and a ‘‘negative exposure assessment’’ was
II operations. The employer shall con- previously produced for a specific job.
duct daily monitoring that is rep- (5) Employee notification of monitoring
resentative of the exposure of each em- results. The employer must, as soon as
ployee who is assigned to work within possible but no later than 5 working
a regulated area who is performing days after the receipt of the results of
Class I or II work, unless the employer any monitoring performed under this
pursuant to (f)(2)(iii) of this section, section, notify each affected employee
has made a negative exposure assess- of these results either individually in
ment for the entire operation. writing or by posting the results in an
(ii) All operations under the standard appropriate location that is accessible
other than Class I and II operations. to employees.
The employer shall conduct periodic (6) Observation of monitoring. (i) The
monitoring of all work where exposures employer shall provide affected em-
are expected to exceed a PEL, at inter- ployees and their designated represent-
vals sufficient to document the valid- atives an opportunity to observe any
ity of the exposure prediction. monitoring of employee exposure to as-
(iii) Exception: When all employees bestos conducted in accordance with
required to be monitored daily are this section.
equipped with supplied-air respirators (ii) When observation of the moni-
operated in the pressure demand mode, toring of employee exposure to asbes-
or other positive pressure mode res- tos requires entry into an area where
pirator, the employer may dispense the use of protective clothing or equip-
with the daily monitoring required by ment is required, the observer shall be
this paragraph. However, employees provided with and be required to use
performing Class I work using a con- such clothing and equipment and shall
trol method which is not listed in para- comply with all other applicable safety
graph (g)(4) (i), (ii), or (iii) of this sec- and health procedures.
tion or using a modification of a listed (g) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi-
control method, shall continue to be neering controls and work practices for
monitored daily even if they are all operations covered by this section.
equipped with supplied-air respirators. The employer shall use the following
531
engineering controls and work prac- with the requirements of paragraph (h)
tices in all operations covered by this of this section.
section, regardless of the levels of ex- (3) Prohibitions. The following work
posure: practices and engineering controls
(i) Vacuum cleaners equipped with shall not be used for work related to
HEPA filters to collect all debris and asbestos or for work which disturbs
dust containing ACM and PACM, ex- ACM or PACM, regardless of measured
cept as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) levels of asbestos exposure or the re-
of this section in the case of roofing sults of initial exposure assessments:
material. (i) High-speed abrasive disc saws that
(ii) Wet methods, or wetting agents, are not equipped with point of cut ven-
to control employee exposures during tilator or enclosures with HEPA fil-
asbestos handling, mixing, removal, tered exhaust air.
cutting, application, and cleanup, ex- (ii) Compressed air used to remove
cept where employers demonstrate asbestos, or materials containing as-
that the use of wet methods is infeasi- bestos, unless the compressed air is
ble due to for example, the creation of used in conjunction with an enclosed
electrical hazards, equipment malfunc- ventilation system designed to capture
tion, and, in roofing, except as provided the dust cloud created by the com-
in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section; pressed air.
and (iii) Dry sweeping, shoveling or other
dry clean-up of dust and debris con-
(iii) Prompt clean-up and disposal of
taining ACM and PACM.
wastes and debris contaminated with
(iv) Employee rotation as a means of
asbestos in leak-tight containers ex-
reducing employee exposure to asbes-
cept in roofing operations, where the
tos.
procedures specified in paragraph
(4) Class I Requirements. In addition to
(g)(8)(ii) of this section apply.
the provisions of paragraphs (g) (1) and
(2) In addition to the requirements of
(2) of this section, the following engi-
paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the em-
neering controls and work practices
ployer shall use the following control
and procedures shall be used.
methods to achieve compliance with
(i) All Class I work, including the in-
the TWA permissible exposure limit
stallation and operation of the control
and excursion limit prescribed by para-
system shall be supervised by a com-
graph (c) of this section;
petent person as defined in paragraph
(i) Local exhaust ventilation (b) of this section;
equipped with HEPA filter dust collec- (ii) For all Class I jobs involving the
tion systems; removal of more than 25 linear or 10
(ii) Enclosure or isolation of proc- square feet of thermal system insula-
esses producing asbestos dust; tion or surfacing material; for all other
(iii) Ventilation of the regulated area Class I jobs, where the employer can-
to move contaminated air away from not produce a negative exposure assess-
the breathing zone of employees and ment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii)
toward a filtration or collection device of this section, or where employees are
equipped with a HEPA filter; working in areas adjacent to the regu-
(iv) Use of other work practices and lated area, while the Class I work is
engineering controls that the Assistant being performed, the employer shall
Secretary can show to be feasible. use one of the following methods to en-
(v) Wherever the feasible engineering sure that airborne asbestos does not
and work practice controls described migrate from the regulated area:
above are not sufficient to reduce em- (A) Critical barriers shall be placed
ployee exposure to or below the permis- over all the openings to the regulated
sible exposure limit and/or excursion area, except where activities are per-
limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this formed outdoors; or
section, the employer shall use them to (B) The employer shall use another
reduce employee exposure to the lowest barrier or isolation method which pre-
levels attainable by these controls and vents the migration of airborne asbes-
shall supplement them by the use of tos from the regulated area, as verified
respiratory protection that complies by perimeter area surveillance during
532
each work shift at each boundary of (2) At least 4 air changes per hour
the regulated area, showing no visible shall be maintained in the NPE,
asbestos dust; and perimeter area mon- (3) A minimum of ¥0.02 column
itoring showing that clearance levels inches of water pressure differential,
contained in 40 CFR part 763, subpt. E, relative to outside pressure, shall be
of the EPA Asbestos in Schools Rule maintained within the NPE as evi-
are met, or that perimeter area levels, denced by manometric measurements,
measured by Phase Contrast Micros- (4) The NPE shall be kept under neg-
copy (PCM) are no more than back- ative pressure throughout the period of
ground levels representing the same its use, and
area before the asbestos work began. (5) Air movement shall be directed
The results of such monitoring shall be away from employees performing as-
made known to the employer no later bestos work within the enclosure, and
than 24 hours from the end of the work toward a HEPA filtration or a collec-
shift represented by such monitoring. tion device.
Exception: For work completed out- (B) Work Practices:
doors where employees are not working (1) Before beginning work within the
in areas adjacent to the regulated enclosure and at the beginning of each
areas, this paragraph (g)(4)(ii) is satis- shift, the NPE shall be inspected for
fied when the specific control methods breaches and smoke-tested for leaks,
in paragraph (g)(5) of this section are and any leaks sealed.
used. (2) Electrical circuits in the enclo-
(iii) For all Class I jobs, HVAC sys- sure shall be deactivated, unless
tems shall be isolated in the regulated equipped with ground-fault circuit in-
area by sealing with a double layer of terrupters.
6 mil plastic or the equivalent; (ii) Glove bag systems may be used to
(iv) For all Class I jobs, impermeable remove PACM and/or ACM from
dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces straight runs of piping and elbows and
beneath all removal activity; other connections with the following
(v) For all Class I jobs, all objects specifications and work practices:
within the regulated area shall be cov- (A) Specifications:
ered with impermeable dropcloths or (1) Glovebags shall be made of 6 mil
plastic sheeting which is secured by thick plastic and shall be seamless at
duct tape or an equivalent. the bottom.
(vi) For all Class I jobs where the em- (2) Glovebags used on elbows and
ployer cannot produce a negative expo- other connections must be designed for
sure assessment, or where exposure that purpose and used without modi-
monitoring shows that a PEL is ex- fications.
ceeded, the employer shall ventilate (B) Work Practices:
the regulated area to move contami- (1) Each glovebag shall be installed
nated air away from the breathing zone so that it completely covers the cir-
of employees toward a HEPA filtration cumference of pipe or other structure
or collection device. where the work is to be done.
(5) Specific control methods for Class I (2) Glovebags shall be smoke-tested
work. In addition, Class I asbestos work for leaks and any leaks sealed prior to
shall be performed using one or more of use.
the following control methods pursu- (3) Glovebags may be used only once
ant to the limitations stated below: and may not be moved.
(i) Negative Pressure Enclosure (4) Glovebags shall not be used on
(NPE) systems: NPE systems may be surfaces whose temperature exceeds 150
used where the configuration of the °F.
work area does not make the erection (5) Prior to disposal, glovebags shall
of the enclosure infeasible, with the be collapsed by removing air within
following specifications and work prac- them using a HEPA vacuum.
tices. (6) Before beginning the operation,
(A) Specifications: loose and friable material adjacent to
(1) The negative pressure enclosure the glovebag/box operation shall be
(NPE) may be of any configuration, wrapped and sealed in two layers of six
533
mil plastic or otherwise rendered in- (5) An aperture at the base of the box
tact, shall serve as a bagging outlet for
(7) Where system uses attached waste waste ACM and water:
bag, such bag shall be connected to col- (6) A back-up generator shall be
lection bag using hose or other mate- present on site:
rial which shall withstand pressure of (7) Waste bags shall consist of 6 mil
ACM waste and water without losing thick plastic double-bagged before they
its integrity: are filled or plastic thicker than 6 mil.
(8) Sliding valve or other device shall (B) Work practices:
separate waste bag from hose to ensure (1) At least two persons shall perform
no exposure when waste bag is discon- the removal:
nected: (2) The box shall be smoke-tested for
(9) At least two persons shall perform leaks and any leaks sealed prior to
Class I glovebag removal operations. each use.
(iii) Negative Pressure Glove Bag Sys- (3) Loose or damaged ACM adjacent
tems. Negative pressure glove bag sys- to the box shall be wrapped and sealed
tems may be used to remove ACM or in two layers of 6 mil plastic prior to
PACM from piping. the job, or otherwise made intact prior
(A) Specifications: In addition to spec- to the job.
ifications for glove bag systems above, (4) A HEPA filtration system shall be
negative pressure glove bag systems used to maintain pressure barrier in
shall attach HEPA vacuum systems or box.
other devices to bag to prevent collapse (v) Water Spray Process System. A
during removal. water spray process system may be
(B) Work Practices: (1) The employer used for removal of ACM and PACM
shall comply with the work practices from cold line piping if, employees car-
for glove bag systems in paragraph rying out such process have completed
(g)(5)(ii)(B)(4) of this section. a 40-hour separate training course in
(2) The HEPA vacuum cleaner or its use, in addition to training required
other device used to prevent collapse of for employees performing Class I work.
bag during removal shall run contin- The system shall meet the following
ually during the operation until it is specifications and shall be performed
completed at which time the bag shall by employees using the following work
be collapsed prior to removal of the practices.
bag from the pipe. (A) Specifications:
(3) Where a separate waste bag is (1) Piping shall be surrounded on 3
used along with a collection bag and sides by rigid framing,
discarded after one use, the collection (2) A 360 degree water spray, deliv-
bag may be reused if rinsed clean with ered through nozzles supplied by a high
amended water before reuse. pressure separate water line, shall be
(iv) Negative Pressure Glove Box formed around the piping.
Systems: Negative pressure glove boxes (3) The spray shall collide to form a
may be used to remove ACM or PACM fine aerosol which provides a liquid
from pipe runs with the following spec- barrier between workers and the ACM
ifications and work practices. and PACM.
(A) Specifications: (B) Work Practices:
(1) Glove boxes shall be constructed (1) The system shall be run for at
with rigid sides and made from metal least 10 minutes before removal begins.
or other material which can withstand (2) All removal shall take place with-
the weight of the ACM and PACM and in the water barrier.
water used during removal: (3) The system shall be operated by
(2) A negative pressure generator at least three persons, one of whom
shall be used to create negative pres- shall not perform removal, but shall
sure in the system: check equipment, and ensure proper
(3) An air filtration unit shall be at- operation of the system.
tached to the box: (4) After removal, the ACM and
(4) The box shall be fitted with gloved PACM shall be bagged while still inside
apertures: the water barrier.
534
(vi) A small walk-in enclosure which criteria in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of

accommodates no more than two per- this section.
sons (mini-enclosure) may be used if (A) Where the TSI or surfacing mate-
the disturbance or removal can be com- rial to be removed is 25 linear or 10
pletely contained by the enclosure with square feet or less , the evaluation re-
the following specifications and work quired in paragraph (g)(6) of this sec-
practices. tion may be performed by a ‘‘com-
(A) Specifications: petent person’’, and may omit consid-
(1) The fabricated or job-made enclo- eration of perimeter or clearance moni-
sure shall be constructed of 6 mil plas- toring otherwise required.
tic or equivalent: (B) The evaluation of employee expo-
(2) The enclosure shall be placed sure required in paragraph (g)(6) of this
under negative pressure by means of a section, shall include and be based on
HEPA filtered vacuum or similar ven- sampling and analytical data rep-
tilation unit: resenting employee exposure during
(B) Work practices: the use of such method under worst-
(1) Before use, the mini-enclosure case conditions and by employees
shall be inspected for leaks and smoke- whose training and experience are
tested to detect breaches, and any equivalent to employees who are to
breaches sealed. perform the current job.
(2) Before reuse, the interior shall be (7) Work Practices and Engineering
completely washed with amended Controls for Class II work.
water and HEPA-vacuumed. (i) All Class II work shall be super-
(3) During use, air movement shall be vised by a competent person as defined
directed away from the employee’s in paragraph (b) of this section.
breathing zone within the mini-enclo- (ii) For all indoor Class II jobs, where
sure. the employer has not produced a nega-
(6) Alternative control methods for Class tive exposure assessment pursuant to
I work. Class I work may be performed paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or
using a control method which is not where during the job, changed condi-
referenced in paragraph (g)(5) of this tions indicate there may be exposure
section, or which modifies a control above the PEL or where the employer
method referenced in paragraph (g)(5)of does not remove the ACM in a substan-
this section, if the following provisions tially intact state, the employer shall
are complied with: use one of the following methods to en-
(i) The control method shall enclose, sure that airborne asbestos does not
contain or isolate the processes or migrate from the regulated area;
source of airborne asbestos dust, or (A) Critical barriers shall be placed
otherwise capture or redirect such dust over all openings to the regulated area;
before it enters the breathing zone of or,
employees. (B) The employer shall use another
(ii) A certified industrial hygienist or barrier or isolation method which pre-
licensed professional engineer who is vents the migration of airborne asbes-
also qualified as a project designer as tos from the regulated area, as verified
defined in paragraph (b) of this section, by perimeter area monitoring or clear-
shall evaluate the work area, the pro- ance monitoring which meets the cri-
jected work practices and the engineer- teria set out in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B)
ing controls and shall certify in writ- of this section.
ing that the planned control method is (C) Impermeable dropcloths shall be
adequate to reduce direct and indirect placed on surfaces beneath all removal
employee exposure to below the PELs activity;
under worst-case conditions of use, and (iii) [Reserved]
that the planned control method will (iv) All Class II asbestos work shall
prevent asbestos contamination out- be performed using the work practices
side the regulated area, as measured by and requirements set out above in
clearance sampling which meets the re- paragraph (g)(1) (i) through (g)(1)(iii) of
quirements of EPA’s Asbestos in this section.
Schools rule issued under AHERA, or (8) Additional Controls for Class II
perimeter monitoring which meets the work. Class II asbestos work shall also
535
be performed by complying with the shall ensure that the following work
work practices and controls designated practices are followed:
for each type of asbestos work to be (A) Roofing material shall be re-
performed, set out in this paragraph. moved in an intact state to the extent
Where more than one control method feasible.
may be used for a type of asbestos (B) Wet methods shall be used to re-
work, the employer may choose one or move roofing materials that are not in-
a combination of designated control tact, or that will be rendered not in-
methods. Class II work also may be tact during removal, unless such wet
performed using a method allowed for methods are not feasible or will create
Class I work, except that glove bags safety hazards.
and glove boxes are allowed if they (C) Cutting machines shall be con-
fully enclose the Class II material to be tinuously misted during use, unless a
removed. competent person determines that
(i) For removing vinyl and asphalt misting substantially decreases worker
flooring materials which contain ACM safety.
or for which in buildings constructed (D) When removing built-up roofs
no later than 1980, the employer has with asbestos-containing roofing felts
not verified the absence of ACM pursu- and an aggregate surface using a power
ant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this sec- roof cutter, all dust resulting from the
tion. The employer shall ensure that cutting operation shall be collected by
employees comply with the following a HEPA dust collector, or shall be
work practices and that employees are HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along
trained in these practices pursuant to the cut line. When removing built-up
paragraph (k)(9): roofs with asbestos-containing roofing
(A) Flooring or its backing shall not felts and a smooth surface using a
be sanded. power roof cutter, the dust resulting
(B) Vacuums equipped with HEPA fil- from the cutting operation shall be col-
ter, disposable dust bag, and metal lected either by a HEPA dust collector
floor tool (no brush) shall be used to or HEPA vacuuming along the cut line,
clean floors. or by gently sweeping and then care-
(C) Resilient sheeting shall be re- fully and completely wiping up the
moved by cutting with wetting of the still-wet dust and debris left along the
snip point and wetting during cut line. The dust and debris shall be
delamination. Rip-up of resilient sheet immediately bagged or placed in cov-
floor material is prohibited. ered containers.
(D) All scraping of residual adhesive (E) Asbestos-containing material
and/or backing shall be performed that has been removed from a roof
using wet methods. shall not be dropped or thrown to the
(E) Dry sweeping is prohibited. ground. Unless the material is carried
(F) Mechanical chipping is prohibited or passed to the ground by hand, it
unless performed in a negative pressure shall be lowered to the ground via cov-
enclosure which meets the require- ered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist:
ments of paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this sec- (1) Any ACM that is not intact shall
tion. be lowered to the ground as soon as is
(G) Tiles shall be removed intact, un- practicable, but in any event no later
less the employer demonstrates that than the end of the work shift. While
intact removal is not possible. the material remains on the roof it
(H) When tiles are heated and can be shall either be kept wet, placed in an
removed intact, wetting may be omit- impermeable waste bag, or wrapped in
ted. plastic sheeting.
(I) Resilient flooring material includ- (2) Intact ACM shall be lowered to
ing associated mastic and backing the ground as soon as is practicable,
shall be assumed to be asbestos-con- but in any event no later than the end
taining unless an industrial hygienist of the work shift.
determines that it is asbestos-free (F) Upon being lowered, unwrapped
using recognized analytical techniques. material shall be transferred to a
(ii) For removing roofing material closed receptacle in such manner so as
which contains ACM the employer to preclude the dispersion of dust.
536
(G) Roof level heating and ventila- (v) When performing any other Class
tion air intake sources shall be isolated II removal of asbestos containing ma-
or the ventilation system shall be shut terial for which specific controls have
down. not been listed in paragraph (g)(8)(iv)
(H) Notwithstanding any other provi- (A) through (D) of this section, the em-
sion of this section, removal or repair ployer shall ensure that the following
of sections of intact roofing less than work practices are complied with.
25 square feet in area does not require (A) The material shall be thoroughly
use of wet methods or HEPA wetted with amended water prior to
vacuuming as long as manual methods and during its removal.
which do not render the material non- (B) The material shall be removed in
intact are used to remove the material an intact state unless the employer
and no visible dust is created by the re- demonstrates that intact removal is
moval method used. In determining not possible.
whether a job involves less than 25 (C) Cutting, abrading or breaking the
square feet, the employer shall include material shall be prohibited unless the
all removal and repair work performed employer can demonstrate that meth-
on the same roof on the same day. ods less likely to result in asbestos
(iii) When removing cementitious as- fiber release are not feasible.
bestos-containing siding and shingles (D) Asbestos-containing material re-
or transite panels containing ACM on moved, shall be immediately bagged or
building exteriors (other than roofs, wrapped, or kept wetted until trans-
where paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this sec- ferred to a closed receptacle, no later
tion applies) the employer shall ensure than the end of the work shift.
that the following work practices are (vi) Alternative Work Practices and
followed: Controls. Instead of the work practices
(A) Cutting, abrading or breaking and controls listed in paragraph (g)(8)
siding, shingles, or transite panels, (i) through (v) of this section, the em-
shall be prohibited unless the employer ployer may use different or modified
can demonstrate that methods less engineering and work practice controls
likely to result in asbestos fiber re- if the following provisions are complied
lease cannot be used. with.
(B) Each panel or shingle shall be (A) The employer shall demonstrate
sprayed with amended water prior to by data representing employee expo-
removal. sure during the use of such method
(C) Unwrapped or unbagged panels or under conditions which closely resem-
shingles shall be immediately lowered ble the conditions under which the
to the ground via covered dust-tight method is to be used, that employee ex-
chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an posure will not exceed the PELs under
impervious waste bag or wrapped in any anticipated circumstances.
plastic sheeting and lowered to the (B) A competent person shall evalu-
ground no later than the end of the ate the work area, the projected work
work shift. practices and the engineering controls,
(D) Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp and shall certify in writing, that the
instruments. different or modified controls are ade-
(iv) When removing gaskets con- quate to reduce direct and indirect em-
taining ACM, the employer shall en- ployee exposure to below the PELs
sure that the following work practices under all expected conditions of use
are followed: and that the method meets the require-
(A) If a gasket is visibly deteriorated ments of this standard. The evaluation
and unlikely to be removed intact, re- shall include and be based on data rep-
moval shall be undertaken within a resenting employee exposure during
glovebag as described in paragraph the use of such method under condi-
(g)(5)(ii) of this section. tions which closely resemble the condi-
(B) [Reserved] tions under which the method is to be
(C) The gasket shall be immediately used for the current job, and by em-
placed in a disposal container. ployees whose training and experience
(D) Any scraping to remove residue are equivalent to employees who are to
must be performed wet. perform the current job.
537
(9) Work Practices and Engineering (ii) Employers of employees who

Controls for Class III asbestos work. Class clean up waste and debris in, and em-
III asbestos work shall be conducted ployers in control of, areas where fri-
using engineering and work practice able thermal system insulation or sur-
controls which minimize the exposure facing material is accessible, shall as-
to employees performing the asbestos sume that such waste and debris con-
work and to bystander employees. tain asbestos.
(i) The work shall be performed using (11) Alternative methods of compliance
wet methods. for installation, removal, repair, and
(ii) To the extent feasible, the work maintenance of certain roofing and pipe-
shall be performed using local exhaust line coating materials. Notwithstanding
ventilation. any other provision of this section, an
(iii) Where the disturbance involves
employer who complies with all provi-
drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding,
sions of this paragraph (g)(11) when in-
chipping, breaking, or sawing of ther-
stalling, removing, repairing, or main-
mal system insulation or surfacing ma-
taining intact pipeline asphaltic wrap,
terial, the employer shall use imper-
meable dropcloths, and shall isolate or roof flashings which contain asbes-
the operation using mini-enclosures or tos fibers encapsulated or coated by bi-
glove bag systems pursuant to para- tuminous or resinous compounds shall
graph (g)(5) of this section or another be deemed to be in compliance with
isolation method. this section. If an employer does not
(iv) Where the employer does not comply with all provisions of this para-
produce a ‘‘negative exposure assess- graph (g)(11) or if during the course of
ment’’ for a job, or where monitoring the job the material does not remain
results show the PEL has been exceed- intact, the provisions of paragraph
ed, the employer shall contain the area (g)(8) of this section apply instead of
using impermeable dropcloths and this paragraph (g)(11).
plastic barriers or their equivalent, or (i) Before work begins and as needed
shall isolate the operation using a con- during the job, a competent person who
trol system listed in and in compliance is capable of identifying asbestos haz-
with paragraph (g)(5) of this section. ards in the workplace and selecting the
(v) Employees performing Class III appropriate control strategy for asbes-
jobs, which involve the disturbance of tos exposure, and who has the author-
thermal system insulation or surfacing ity to take prompt corrective measures
material, or where the employer does to eliminate such hazards, shall con-
not produce a ‘‘negative exposure as- duct an inspection of the worksite and
sessment’’ or where monitoring results determine that the roofing material is
show a PEL has been exceeded, shall intact and will likely remain intact.
wear respirators which are selected, (ii) All employees performing work
used and fitted pursuant to provisions
covered by this paragraph (g)(11) shall
of paragraph (h) of this section.
be trained in a training program that
(10) Class IV asbestos work. Class IV
meets the requirements of paragraph
asbestos jobs shall be conducted by em-
ployees trained pursuant to the asbes- (k)(9)(viii) of this section.
tos awareness training program set out (iii) The material shall not be sand-
in paragraph (k)(9) of this section. In ed, abraded, or ground. Manual meth-
addition, all Class IV jobs shall be con- ods which do not render the material
ducted in conformity with the require- non-intact shall be used.
ments set out in paragraph (g)(1) of (iv) Material that has been removed
this section, mandating wet methods, from a roof shall not be dropped or
HEPA vacuums, and prompt clean up thrown to the ground. Unless the mate-
of debris containing ACM or PACM. rial is carried or passed to the ground
(i) Employees cleaning up debris and by hand, it shall be lowered to the
waste in a regulated area where res- ground via covered, dust-tight chute,
pirators are required shall wear res- crane or hoist. All such material shall
pirators which are selected, used and be removed from the roof as soon as is
fitted pursuant to provisions of para- practicable, but in any event no later
graph (h) of this section. than the end of the work shift.
538
(v) Where roofing products which ees must be assigned to another job or
have been labeled as containing asbes- given the opportunity to transfer to a
tos pursuant to paragraph (k)(8) of this different position that they can per-
section are installed on non-residential form. If such a transfer position is
roofs during operations covered by this available, it must be with the same em-
paragraph (g)(11), the employer shall ployer, in the same geographical area,
notify the building owner of the pres- and with the same seniority, status,
ence and location of such materials no rate of pay, and other job benefits the
later than the end of the job. employee had just prior to such trans-
(vi) All removal or disturbance of fer.
pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be per- (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers
formed using wet methods. must:
(h) Respiratory protection—(1) General.
(A) Select, and provide to employees,
For employees who use respirators re-
the appropriate respirators specified in
quired by this section, the employer
must provide respirators that comply paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR
with the requirements of this para- 1910.134; however, employers must not
graph. Respirators must be used dur- select or use filtering facepiece res-
ing: pirators for use against asbestos fibers.
(i) Class I asbestos work. (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered
(ii) Class II asbestos work when ACM and non-powered air-purifying res-
is not removed in a substantially in- pirators.
tact state. (ii) Employers must provide an em-
(iii) Class II and III asbestos work ployee with tight-fitting, powered air-
that is not performed using wet meth- purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of
ods, except for removal of ACM from a negative pressure respirator selected
sloped roofs when a negative-exposure according to paragraph (h)(3)(i)(A) of
assessment has been conducted and this standard when the employee
ACM is removed in an intact state. chooses to use a PAPR and it provides
(iv) Class II and III asbestos work for adequate protection to the employee.
which a negative-exposure assessment (iii) Employers must provide employ-
has not been conducted. ees with an air-purifying half mask res-
(v) Class III asbestos work when TSI pirator, other than a filtering facepiece
or surfacing ACM or PACM is being respirator, whenever the employees
disturbed. perform:
(vi) Class IV asbestos work performed (A) Class II or Class III asbestos work
within regulated areas where employ- for which no negative exposure assess-
ees who are performing other work are ment is available.
required to use respirators. (B) Class III asbestos work involving
(vii) Work operations covered by this
disturbance of TSI or surfacing ACM or
section for which employees are ex-
PACM.
posed above the TWA or excursion
limit. (iv) Employers must provide employ-
(viii) Emergencies. ees with:
(2) Respirator program. (i) The em- (A) A tight-fitting powered air-puri-
ployer must implement a respiratory fying respirator or a full facepiece, sup-
protection program in accordance with plied-air respirator operated in the
29 CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except pressure-demand mode and equipped
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m). with either HEPA egress cartridges or
(ii) No employee shall be assigned to an auxiliary positive-pressure, self-con-
asbestos work that requires respirator tained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
use if, based on their most recent med- whenever the employees are in a regu-
ical examination, the examining physi- lated area performing Class I asbestos
cian determines that the employee will work for which a negative exposure as-
be unable to function normally while sessment is not available and the expo-
using a respirator, or that the safety or sure assessment indicates that the ex-
health of the employee or other em- posure level will be at or below 1 f/cc as
ployees will be impaired by the em- an 8-hour time-weighted average
ployee’s respirator use. Such employ- (TWA).
539
(B) A full facepiece supplied-air res- (j) Hygiene facilities and practices for
pirator operated in the pressure-de- employees. (1) Requirements for employ-
mand mode and equipped with an auxil- ees performing Class I asbestos jobs in-
iary positive-pressure SCBA whenever volving over 25 linear or 10 square feet
the employees are in a regulated area of TSI or surfacing ACM and PACM.
performing Class I asbestos work for (i) Decontamination areas. The em-
which a negative exposure assessment ployer shall establish a decontamina-
is not available and the exposure as- tion area that is adjacent and con-
sessment indicates that the exposure nected to the regulated area for the de-
level will be above 1 f/cc as an 8-hour contamination of such employees. The
TWA. decontamination area shall consist of
(i) Protective clothing—(1) General. The an equipment room, shower area, and
employer shall provide or require the clean room in series. The employer
use of protective clothing, such as cov- shall ensure that employees enter and
eralls or similar whole-body clothing, exit the regulated area through the de-
head coverings, gloves, and foot cov- contamination area.
erings for any employee exposed to air- (A) Equipment room. The equipment
borne concentrations of asbestos that room shall be supplied with imper-
exceed the TWA and/or excursion limit meable, labeled bags and containers for
prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- the containment and disposal of con-
tion, or for which a required negative taminated protective equipment.
exposure assessment is not produced, (B) Shower area. Shower facilities
or for any employee performing Class I shall be provided which comply with 29
operations which involve the removal CFR 1910.141(d)(3), unless the employer
of over 25 linear or 10 square feet of TSI can demonstrate that they are not fea-
or surfacing ACM and PACM. sible. The showers shall be adjacent
(2) Laundering. (i) The employer shall both to the equipment room and the
clean room, unless the employer can
ensure that laundering of contami-
demonstrate that this location is not
nated clothing is done so as to prevent
feasible. Where the employer can dem-
the release of airborne asbestos in ex-
onstrate that it is not feasible to lo-
cess of the TWA or excursion limit pre-
cate the shower between the equipment
scribed in paragraph (c) of this section.
room and the clean room, or where the
(ii) Any employer who gives contami- work is performed outdoors, the em-
nated clothing to another person for ployers shall ensure that employees:
laundering shall inform such person of (1) Remove asbestos contamination
the requirement in paragraph (i)(2)(i) from their worksuits in the equipment
of this section to effectively prevent room using a HEPA vacuum before pro-
the release of airborne asbestos in exceeding to a shower that is not adja-
cess of the TWA and excursion limit cent to the work area; or
prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- (2) Remove their contaminated
tion. worksuits in the equipment room, then
(3) Contaminated clothing. Contami- don clean worksuits, and proceed to a
nated clothing shall be transported in shower that is not adjacent to the work
sealed impermeable bags, or other area.
closed, impermeable containers, and be (C) Clean change room. The clean
labeled in accordance with paragraph room shall be equipped with a locker or
(k) of this section. appropriate storage container for each
(4) Inspection of protective clothing. (i) employee’s use. When the employer can
The competent person shall examine demonstrate that it is not feasible to
worksuits worn by employees at least provide a clean change area adjacent to
once per workshift for rips or tears the work area or where the work is per-
that may occur during performance of formed outdoors, the employer may
work. permit employees engaged in Class I
(ii) When rips or tears are detected asbestos jobs to clean their protective
while an employee is working, rips and clothing with a portable HEPA-
tears shall be immediately mended, or equipped vacuum before such employ-
the worksuit shall be immediately re- ees leave the regulated area. Following
placed. showering, such employees however
540
must then change into street clothing on the floor or horizontal working sur-
in clean change areas provided by the face.
employer which otherwise meet the re- (ii) The area must be of sufficient
quirements of this section. size as to accommodate cleaning of
(ii) Decontamination area entry proce- equipment and removing personal pro-
dures. The employer shall ensure that tective equipment without spreading
employees: contamination beyond the area (as de-
(A) Enter the decontamination area termined by visible accumulations).
through the clean room; (iii) Work clothing must be cleaned
(B) Remove and deposit street cloth- with a HEPA vacuum before it is re-
ing within a locker provided for their moved.
use; and (iv) All equipment and surfaces of
(C) Put on protective clothing and containers filled with ACM must be
respiratory protection before leaving cleaned prior to removing them from
the clean room. the equipment room or area.
(D) Before entering the regulated (v) The employer shall ensure that
area, the employer shall ensure that employees enter and exit the regulated
employees pass through the equipment area through the equipment room or
room. area.
(iii) Decontamination area exit proce- (3) Requirements for Class IV work.
dures. The employer shall ensure that: Employers shall ensure that employees
(A) Before leaving the regulated area, performing Class IV work within a reg-
employees shall remove all gross con- ulated area comply with the hygiene
tamination and debris from their pro- practice required of employees per-
tective clothing. forming work which has a higher clas-
(B) Employees shall remove their sification within that regulated area.
protective clothing in the equipment Otherwise employers of employees
room and deposit the clothing in la- cleaning up debris and material which
beled impermeable bags or containers. is TSI or surfacing ACM or identified
(C) Employees shall not remove their as PACM shall provide decontamina-
respirators in the equipment room. tion facilities for such employees
(D) Employees shall shower prior to which are required by paragraph (j)(2)
entering the clean room. of this section.
(E) After showering, employees shall (4) Smoking in work areas. The em-
enter the clean room before changing ployer shall ensure that employees do
into street clothes. not smoke in work areas where they
(iv) Lunch Areas. Whenever food or are occupationally exposed to asbestos
beverages are consumed at the work- because of activities in that work area.
site where employees are performing (k) Communication of hazards. (1) This
Class I asbestos work, the employer section applies to the communication
shall provide lunch areas in which the of information concerning asbestos
airborne concentrations of asbestos are hazards in construction activities to
below the permissible exposure limit facilitate compliance with this stand-
and/or excursion limit. ard. Most asbestos-related construction
(2) Requirements for Class I work in- activities involve previously installed
volving less than 25 linear or 10 square building materials. Building owners
feet of TSI or surfacing ACM and often are the only and/or best sources
PACM, and for Class II and Class III as- of information concerning them.
bestos work operations where expo- Therefore, they, along with employers
sures exceed a PEL or where there is of potentially exposed employees, are
no negative exposure assessment pro- assigned specific information con-
duced before the operation. veying and retention duties under this
(i) The employer shall establish an section. Installed Asbestos Containing
equipment room or area that is adja- Building Material. Employers and
cent to the regulated area for the de- building owners shall identify TSI and
contamination of employees and their sprayed or troweled on surfacing mate-
equipment which is contaminated with rials in buildings as asbestos-con-
asbestos which shall consist of an area taining, unless they determine in com-
covered by an impermeable drop cloth pliance with paragraph (k)(5) of this
541
section that the material is not asbes- (i) Before work in areas containing
tos-containing. Asphalt and vinyl ACM and PACM is begun; employers
flooring material installed no later shall identify the presence, location,
than 1980 must also be considered as as- and quantity of ACM, and/or PACM
bestos containing unless the employer, therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1) of
pursuant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section.
this section determines that it is not (ii) Before work under this standard
asbestos-containing. If the employer/ is performed employers of employees
building owner has actual knowledge, who will perform such work shall in-
or should have known through the ex- form the following persons of the loca-
ercise of due diligence, that other mation and quantity of ACM and/or PACM
terials are asbestos-containing, they present in the area and the precautions
too must be treated as such. When
to be taken to insure that airborne as-
communicating information to em-
bestos is confined to the area.
ployees pursuant to this standard, own-
ers and employers shall identify (A) Owners of the building/facility;
‘‘PACM’’ as ACM. Additional require- (B) Employees who will perform such
ments relating to communication of work and employers of employees who
asbestos work on multi-employer work and/or will be working in adja-
worksites are set out in paragraph (d) cent areas.
of this section. (iii) Within 10 days of the completion
(2) Duties of building and facility own- of such work, the employer whose em-
ers. (i) Before work subject to this ployees have performed work subject to
standard is begun, building and facility this standard, shall inform the build-
owners shall determine the presence, ing/facility owner and employers of
location, and quantity of ACM and/or employees who will be working in the
PACM at the work site pursuant to area of the current location and quan-
paragraph (k)(1) of this section. tity of PACM and/or ACM remaining in
(ii) Building and/or facility owners the area and final monitoring results,
shall notify the following persons of if any.
the presence, location and quantity of (4) In addition to the above require-
ACM or PACM, at the work sites in ments, all employers who discover
their buildings and facilities. Notifica- ACM and/or PACM on a worksite shall
tion either shall be in writing, or shall convey information concerning the
consist of a personal communication presence, location and quantity of such
between the owner and the person to newly discovered ACM and/or PACM to
whom notification must be given or the owner and to other employers of
their authorized representatives: employees working at the work site,
(A) Prospective employers applying
within 24 hours of the discovery.
or bidding for work whose employees
(5) Criteria to rebut the designation
reasonably can be expected to work in
or adjacent to areas containing such of installed material as PACM. (i) At
material; any time, an employer and/or building
(B) Employees of the owner who will owner may demonstrate, for purposes
work in or adjacent to areas containing of this standard, that PACM does not
such material: contain asbestos. Building owners and/
(C) On multi-employer worksites, all or employers are not required to com-
employers of employees who will be municate information about the pres-
performing work within or adjacent to ence of building material for which
areas containing such materials; such a demonstration pursuant to the
(D) Tenants who will occupy areas requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of
containing such material. this section has been made. However,
(3) Duties of employers whose em- in all such cases, the information, data
ployees perform work subject to this and analysis supporting the determina-
standard in or adjacent to areas con- tion that PACM does not contain as-
taining ACM and PACM. Building/facil- bestos, shall be retained pursuant to
ity owners whose employees perform paragraph (n) of this section.
such work shall comply with these pro- (ii) An employer or owner may dem-
visions to the extent applicable. onstrate that PACM does not contain
542
more than 1% asbestos by the fol- distance from such a location that an
lowing: (A) Having a completed inspec- employee may read the signs and take
tion conducted pursuant to the require- necessary protective steps before en-
ments of AHERA (40 CFR Part 763, sub- tering the area marked by the signs.
part E) which demonstrates that the (ii) (A) The warning signs required by
material is not ACM; or paragraph (k)(7) of this section shall
(B) Performing tests of the material bear the following information:
containing PACM which demonstrate
that no ACM is present in the material. DANGER
Such tests shall include analysis of ASBESTOS
bulk samples collected in the manner CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE
described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, HAZARD
evaluation and sample collection shall AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
be conducted by an accredited inspec-
(B) In addition, where the use of res-
tor or by a CIH. Analysis of samples
pirators and protective clothing is re-
shall be performed by persons or lab- quired in the regulated area under this
oratories with proficiency dem- section, the warning signs shall include
onstrated by current successful partici- the following:
pation in a nationally recognized test-
ing program such as the National Vol- RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE
untary Laboratory Accreditation Pro- CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS
gram (NVLAP) or the National Insti- AREA
tute for Standards and Technology
(NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk (iii) The employer shall ensure that
samples administered by the American employees working in and contiguous
Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) to regulated areas comprehend the
or an equivalent nationally-recognized warning signs required to be posted by
round robin testing program. paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section.
(iii) The employer and/or building Means to ensure employee comprehen-
owner may demonstrate that flooring sion may include the use of foreign lan-
material including associated mastic guages, pictographs and graphics.
and backing does not contain asbestos, (8) Labels. (i) Labels shall be affixed
by a determination of an industrial hy- to all products containing asbestos and
gienist based upon recognized analyt- to all containers containing such prod-
ucts, including waste containers.
ical techniques showing that the mate-
Where feasible, installed asbestos prod-
rial is not ACM.
ucts shall contain a visible label.
(6) At the entrance to mechanical
(ii) Labels shall be printed in large,
rooms/areas in which employees rea-
bold letters on a contrasting back-
sonably can be expected to enter and
ground.
which contain ACM and/or PACM, the
(iii) Labels shall be used in accord-
building owner shall post signs which
ance with the requirements of 29 CFR
identify the material which is present,
1910.1200(f) of OSHA’s Hazard Commu-
its location, and appropriate work
nication standard, and shall contain
practices which, if followed, will ensure
the following information:
that ACM and/or PACM will not be dis-
turbed. The employer shall ensure, to DANGER
the extent feasible, that employees CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
who come in contact with these signs AVOID CREATING DUST
can comprehend them. Means to ensure
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE
employee comprehension may include
HAZARD
the use of foreign languages, picto-
graphs, graphics, and awareness train- (iv) [Reserved]
ing. (v) Labels shall contain a warning
(7) Signs. (i) Warning signs that de- statement against breathing asbestos
marcate the regulated area shall be fibers.
provided and displayed at each location (vi) The provisions for labels required
where a regulated area is required to be by paragraphs (k)(8)(i) through
established by paragraph (e) of this sec- (k)(8)(iii) of this section do not apply
tion. Signs shall be posted at such a where:
543
(A) Asbestos fibers have been modi- or transite panels, training shall in-
fied by a bonding agent, coating, bind- clude at a minimum all the elements
er, or other material, provided that the included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of
manufacturer can demonstrate that, this section and in addition, the spe-
during any reasonably foreseeable use, cific work practices and engineering
handling, storage, disposal, processing, controls set forth in paragraph (g) of
or transportation, no airborne con- this section which specifically relate to
centrations of asbestos fibers in excess that category. Such course shall in-
of the permissible exposure limit and/ clude ‘‘hands-on’’ training and shall
or excursion limit will be released, or take at least 8 hours.
(B) Asbestos is present in a product (B) An employee who works with
in concentrations less than 1.0 percent. more than one of the categories of ma-
(vii) When a building owner or em- terial specified in paragraph
ployer identifies previously installed (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section shall re-
PACM and/or ACM, labels or signs shall ceive training in the work practices ap-
be affixed or posted so that employees plicable to each category of material
will be notified of what materials con- that the employee removes and each
tain PACM and/or ACM. The employer removal method that the employee
shall attach such labels in areas where uses.
they will clearly be noticed by employ- (C) For Class II operations not in-
ees who are likely to be exposed, such volving the categories of material spec-
as at the entrance to mechanical room/ ified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this
areas. Signs required by paragraph section, training shall be provided
(k)(6) of this section may be posted in which shall include at a minimum all
lieu of labels so long as they contain the elements included in paragraph
information required for labelling. The (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi-
employer shall ensure, to the extent tion, the specific work practices and
feasible, that employees who come in engineering controls set forth in para-
contact with these signs or labels can graph (g) of this section which specifi-
comprehend them. Means to ensure em- cally relate to the category of material
ployee comprehension may include the being removed, and shall include
use of foreign languages, pictographs, ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the work prac-
graphics, and awareness training. tices applicable to each category of
(9) Employee Information and Training. material that the employee removes
(i) The employer shall, at no cost to and each removal method that the em-
the employee, institute a training pro- ployee uses.
gram for all employees who are likely (v) Training for Class III employees
to be exposed in excess of a PEL and shall be consistent with EPA require-
for all employees who perform Class I ments for training of local education
through IV asbestos operations, and agency maintenance and custodial staff
shall ensure their participation in the as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2). Such
program. a course shall also include ‘‘hands-on’’
(ii) Training shall be provided prior training and shall take at least 16
to or at the time of initial assignment hours. Exception: For Class III oper-
and at least annually thereafter. ations for which the competent person
(iii) Training for Class I operations determines that the EPA curriculum
and for Class II operations that require does not adequately cover the training
the use of critical barriers (or equiva- needed to perform that activity, train-
lent isolation methods) and/or negative ing shall include as a minimum all the
pressure enclosures under this section elements included in paragraph
shall be the equivalent in curriculum, (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi-
training method and length to the EPA tion, the specific work practices and
Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) asbes- engineering controls set forth in para-
tos abatement workers training (40 graph (g) of this section which specifi-
CFR Part 763, subpart E, appendix C). cally relate to that activity, and shall
(iv) Training for other Class II work. include ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the
(A) For work with asbestos con- work practices applicable to each cat-
taining roofing materials, flooring ma- egory of material that the employee
terials, siding materials, ceiling tiles, disturbs.
544
(vi) Training for employees per- (E) The purpose, proper use, fitting
forming Class IV operations shall be instructions, and limitations of res-
consistent with EPA requirements for pirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134;
training of local education agency (F) The appropriate work practices
maintenance and custodial staff as set for performing the asbestos job;
forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(1). Such a (G) Medical surveillance program re-
course shall include available informa- quirements;
tion concerning the locations of ther- (H) The content of this standard in-
mal system insulation and surfacing cluding appendices;
ACM/PACM, and asbestos-containing (I) The names, addresses and phone
flooring material, or flooring material numbers of public health organizations
where the absence of asbestos has not which provide information, materials
yet been certified; and instruction in and/or conduct programs concerning
recognition of damage, deterioration, smoking cessation. The employer may
and delamination of asbestos con- distribute the list of such organiza-
taining building materials. Such course tions contained in Appendix J to this
shall take at least 2 hours. section, to comply with this require-
(vii) Training for employees who are ment; and
likely to be exposed in excess of the (J) The requirements for posting
PEL and who are not otherwise re- signs and affixing labels and the mean-
quired to be trained under paragraph ing of the required legends for such
(k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section, signs and labels.
shall meet the requirements of para- (10) Access to training materials. (i)
graph (k)(9)(viii) of this section. The employer shall make readily avail-
(viii) The training program shall be able to affected employees without
conducted in a manner that the em- cost, written materials relating to the
ployee is able to understand. In addi- employee training program, including
tion to the content required by provi- a copy of this regulation.
sions in paragraphs (k)(9)(iii) through (ii) The employer shall provide to the
(vi) of this section, the employer shall Assistant Secretary and the Director,
ensure that each such employee is in- upon request, all information and
formed of the following: training materials relating to the em-
(A) Methods of recognizing asbestos, ployee information and training pro-
including the requirement in paragraph gram.
(k)(1) of this section to presume that (iii) The employer shall inform all
certain building materials contain as- employees concerning the availability
bestos; of self-help smoking cessation program
(B) The health effects associated with material. Upon employee request, the
asbestos exposure; employer shall distribute such mate-
(C) The relationship between smok- rial, consisting of NIH Publication No,
ing and asbestos in producing lung can- 89–1647, or equivalent self-help mate-
cer; rial, which is approved or published by
(D) The nature of operations that a public health organization listed in
could result in exposure to asbestos, Appendix J to this section.
the importance of necessary protective (l) Housekeeping—(1) Vacuuming.
controls to minimize exposure includ- Where vacuuming methods are se-
ing, as applicable, engineering con- lected, HEPA filtered vacuuming
trols, work practices, respirators, equipment must be used. The equip-
housekeeping procedures, hygiene fa- ment shall be used and emptied in a
cilities, protective clothing, decon- manner that minimizes the reentry of
tamination procedures, emergency pro- asbestos into the workplace.
cedures, and waste disposal procedures, (2) Waste disposal. Asbestos waste,
and any necessary instruction in the scrap, debris, bags, containers, equip-
use of these controls and procedures; ment, and contaminated clothing con-
where Class III and IV work will be or signed for disposal shall be collected
is performed, the contents of EPA 20T– and disposed of in sealed, labeled, im-
2003, ‘‘Managing Asbestos In-Place’’ permeable bags or other closed, la-
July 1990 or its equivalent in content; beled, impermeable containers except
545
in roofing operations, where the proce- tions and procedures are performed by
dures specified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of or under the supervision of a licensed
this section apply. physician, and are provided at no cost
(3) Care of asbestos-containing flooring to the employee and at a reasonable
material. (i) All vinyl and asphalt floor- time and place.
ing material shall be maintained in ac- (B) Persons other than such licensed
cordance with this paragraph unless physicians who administer the pul-
the building/facility owner dem- monary function testing required by
onstrates, pursuant to paragraph this section shall complete a training
(g)(8)(i)(I) of this section that the floor- course in spirometry sponsored by an
ing does not contain asbestos.
appropriate academic or professional
(ii) Sanding of flooring material is
institution.
prohibited.
(iii) Stripping of finishes shall be (2) Medical examinations and consulta-
conducted using low abrasion pads at tions. (i) Frequency. The employer
speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet shall make available medical examina-
methods. tions and consultations to each em-
(iv) Burnishing or dry buffing may be ployee covered under paragraph
performed only on flooring which has (m)(1)(i) of this section on the fol-
sufficient finish so that the pad cannot lowing schedules:
contact the flooring material. (A) Prior to assignment of the em-
(4) Waste and debris and accom- ployee to an area where negative-pres-
panying dust in an area containing ac- sure respirators are worn;
cessible thermal system insulation or (B) When the employee is assigned to
surfacing ACM/PACM or visibly dete- an area where exposure to asbestos
riorated ACM: may be at or above the permissible ex-
(i) Shall not be dusted or swept dry, posure limit for 30 or more days per
or vacuumed without using a HEPA fil- year, or engage in Class I, II, or III
ter; work for a combined total of 30 or more
(ii) Shall be promptly cleaned up and days per year, a medical examination
disposed of in leak tight containers.
must be given within 10 working days
(m) Medical surveillance. (1) General—
following the thirtieth day of exposure;
(i) Employees covered. (A) The employer
shall institute a medical surveillance (C) And at least annually thereafter.
program for all employees who for a (D) If the examining physician deter-
combined total of 30 or more days per mines that any of the examinations
year are engaged in Class I, II and III should be provided more frequently
work or are exposed at or above a per- than specified, the employer shall pro-
missible exposure limit. For purposes vide such examinations to affected em-
of this paragraph, any day in which a ployees at the frequencies specified by
worker engages in Class II or Class III the physician.
operations or a combination thereof on (E) Exception: No medical examina-
intact material for one hour or less tion is required of any employee if ade-
(taking into account the entire time quate records show that the employee
spent on the removal operation, includ- has been examined in accordance with
ing cleanup) and, while doing so, ad- this paragraph within the past 1-year
heres fully to the work practices speci- period.
fied in this standard, shall not be (ii) Content. Medical examinations
counted. made available pursuant to paragraphs
(B) For employees otherwise required (m)(2)(i)(A) through (m)(2)(i)(C) of this
by this standard to wear a negative
section shall include:
pressure respirator, employers shall en-
sure employees are physically able to (A) A medical and work history with
perform the work and use the equip- special emphasis directed to the pul-
ment. This determination shall be monary, cardiovascular, and gastro-
made under the supervision of a physi- intestinal systems.
cian. (B) On initial examination, the
(ii) Examination. (A) The employer standardized questionnaire contained
shall ensure that all medical examina- in Part 1 of Appendix D to this section,
546
and, on annual examination, the abbre- (D) A statement that the employee
viated standardized questionnaire con- has been informed by the physician of
tained in Part 2 of Appendix D to this the increased risk of lung cancer at-
section. tributable to the combined effect of
(C) A physical examination directed smoking and asbestos exposure.
to the pulmonary and gastrointestinal (ii) The employer shall instruct the
systems, including a chest roentgeno- physician not to reveal in the written
gram to be administered at the discre- opinion given to the employer specific
tion of the physician, and pulmonary findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
function tests of forced vital capacity cupational exposure to asbestos.
(FVC) and forced expiratory volume at (iii) The employer shall provide a
one second (FEV(1)). Interpretation copy of the physician’s written opinion
and classification of chest shall be con- to the affected employee within 30 days
ducted in accordance with Appendix E from its receipt.
to this section. (n) Recordkeeping. (1) Objective data
(D) Any other examinations or tests relied on pursuant to paragraph (f) to
deemed necessary by the examining this section. (i) Where the employer
physician. has relied on objective data that dem-
(3) Information provided to the physi- onstrates that products made from or
cian. The employer shall provide the containing asbestos or the activity in-
following information to the exam- volving such products or material are
ining physician: not capable of releasing fibers of asbes-
(i) A copy of this standard and Ap- tos in concentrations at or above the
pendices D, E, and I to this section; permissible exposure limit and/or ex-
(ii) A description of the affected em- cursion limit under the expected condi-
ployee’s duties as they relate to the tions of processing, use, or handling to
employee’s exposure; satisfy the requirements of paragraph
(iii) The employee’s representative (f), the employer shall establish and
exposure level or anticipated exposure maintain an accurate record of objec-
level; tive data reasonably relied upon in sup-
(iv) A description of any personal port of the exemption.
protective and respiratory equipment (ii) The record shall include at least
used or to be used; and the following information:
(v) Information from previous med- (A) The product qualifying for ex-
ical examinations of the affected em- emption;
ployee that is not otherwise available (B) The source of the objective data;
to the examining physician. (C) The testing protocol, results of
(4) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The testing, and/or analysis of the material
employer shall obtain a written opin- for the release of asbestos;
ion from the examining physician. This (D) A description of the operation ex-
written opinion shall contain the re- empted and how the data support the
sults of the medical examination and exemption; and
shall include: (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
(A) The physician’s opinion as to ations, materials, processing, or em-
whether the employee has any detected ployee exposures covered by the ex-
medical conditions that would place emption.
the employee at an increased risk of (iii) The employer shall maintain
material health impairment from expo- this record for the duration of the em-
sure to asbestos; ployer’s reliance upon such objective
(B) Any recommended limitations on data.
the employee or on the use of personal (2) Exposure measurements. (i) The em-
protective equipment such as res- ployer shall keep an accurate record of
pirators; and all measurements taken to monitor
(C) A statement that the employee employee exposure to asbestos as pre-
has been informed by the physician of scribed in paragraph (f) of this section.
the results of the medical examination NOTE: The employer may utilize the
and of any medical conditions that services of competent organizations
may result from asbestos exposure. such as industry trade associations and
547
employee associations to maintain the (6) Records of required notifications.

records required by this section. Where the building owner has commu-
(ii) This record shall include at least nicated and received information con-
the following information: cerning the identification, location and
(A) The date of measurement; quantity of ACM and PACM, written
(B) The operation involving exposure records of such notifications and their
to asbestos that is being monitored; content shall be maintained by the
(C) Sampling and analytical methods building owner for the duration of own-
used and evidence of their accuracy; ership and shall be transferred to suc-
(D) Number, duration, and results of cessive owners of such buildings/facili-
samples taken; ties.
(E) Type of protective devices worn, (7) Availability. (i) The employer,
if any; and upon written request, shall make all
(F) Name, social security number, records required to be maintained by
and exposure of the employees whose this section available to the Assistant
exposures are represented. Secretary and the Director for exam-
(iii) The employer shall maintain ination and copying.
this record for at least thirty (30) (ii) The employer, upon request, shall
years, in accordance with 29 CFR make any exposure records required by
1910.33. paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section
(3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- available for examination and copying
ployer shall establish and maintain an to affected employees, former employ-
accurate record for each employee sub- ees, designated representatives, and
ject to medical surveillance by para- the Assistant Secretary, in accordance
graph (m) of this section, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33(a) through (e) and
with 29 CFR 1910.33. (g) through (i).
(ii) The record shall include at least (iii) The employer, upon request,
the following information: shall make employee medical records
(A) The name and social security required by paragraphs (m) and (n) of
number of the employee; this section available for examination
(B) A copy of the employee’s medical and copying to the subject employee,
examination results, including the anyone having the specific written con-
medical history, questionnaire re- sent of the subject employee, and the
sponses, results of any tests, and physi- Assistant Secretary, in accordance
cian’s recommendations. with 29 CFR 1910.33.
(C) Physician’s written opinions; (8) Transfer of records. (i) The em-
(D) Any employee medical com- ployer shall comply with the require-
plaints related to exposure to asbestos; ments concerning transfer of records
and set forth in 29 CFR 1910.33(h).
(E) A copy of the information pro- (ii) Whenever the employer ceases to
vided to the physician as required by do business and there is no successor
paragraph (m) of this section. employer to receive and retain the
(iii) The employer shall ensure that records for the prescribed period, the
this record is maintained for the dura- employer shall notify the Director at
tion of employment plus thirty (30) least 90 days prior to disposal and,
years, in accordance with 29 CFR upon request, transmit them to the Di-
1910.33. rector.
(4) Training records. The employer (o) Competent person. (1) General. On
shall maintain all employee training all construction worksites covered by
records for one (1) year beyond the last this standard, the employer shall des-
date of employment by that employer. ignate a competent person, having the
(5) Data to Rebut PACM. Where the qualifications and authorities for en-
building owner and employer have re- suring worker safety and health re-
lied on data to demonstrate that PACM quired by subpart C, General Safety
is not asbestos-containing, such data and Health Provisions for Construction
shall be maintained for as long as they (29 CFR 1926.20 through 1926.32).
are relied upon to rebut the presump- (2) Required inspections by the com-
tion. petent person. Section 1926.20(b)(2)
548
which requires health and safety pre- (I) Ensure that notification require-
vention programs to provide for fre- ment in paragraph (k) of this section
quent and regular inspections of the are met.
job sites, materials, and equipment to (ii) [Reserved]
be made by competent persons, is in- (4) Training for the competent person.
corporated. (i) For Class I and II asbestos work the
(3) Additional inspections. In addition, competent person shall be trained in
the competent person shall make fre- all aspects of asbestos removal and
quent and regular inspections of the handling, including: abatement, instal-
job sites, in order to perform the duties lation, removal and handling; the con-
set out below in paragraph (o)(3)(i) of tents of this standard; the identifica-
this section. For Class I jobs, on-site tion of asbestos; removal procedures,
inspections shall be made at least once where appropriate; and other practices
during each work shift, and at any for reducing the hazard. Such training
time at employee request. For Class II, shall be obtained in a comprehensive
III, and IV jobs, on-site inspections course for supervisors that meets the
shall be made at intervals sufficient to criteria of EPA’s Model Accreditation
assess whether conditions have Plan (40 CFR part 763, subpart E, Ap-
changed, and at any reasonable time at pendix C), such as a course conducted
by an EPA-approved or state-approved
employee request.
training provider, certified by EPA or a
(i) On all worksites where employees
state, or a course equivalent in strin-
are engaged in Class I or II asbestos gency, content, and length.
work, the competent person designated
(ii) For Class III and IV asbestos
in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of
work, the competent person shall be
this section shall perform or supervise trained in aspects of asbestos handling
the following duties, as applicable: appropriate for the nature of the work,
(A) Set up the regulated area, enclo- to include procedures for setting up
sure, or other containment; glove bags and mini-enclosures, prac-
(B) Ensure (by on-site inspection) the tices for reducing asbestos exposures,
integrity of the enclosure or contain- use of wet methods, the contents of
ment; this standard, and the identification of
(C) Set up procedures to control asbestos. Such training shall include
entry to and exit from the enclosure successful completion of a course that
and/or area; is consistent with EPA requirements
(D) Supervise all employee exposure for training of local education agency
monitoring required by this section maintenance and custodial staff as set
and ensure that it is conducted as re- forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2), or its
quired by paragraph (f) of this section; equivalent in stringency, content and
(E) Ensure that employees working length. Competent persons for Class III
within the enclosure and/or using glove and IV work, may also be trained pur-
bags wear respirators and protective suant to the requirements of paragraph
clothing as required by paragraphs (h) (o)(4)(i) of this section.
and (i) of this section; (p) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, C, D,
(F) Ensure through on-site super- and E to this section are incorporated
vision, that employees set up, use, and as part of this section and the contents
remove engineering controls, use work of these appendices are mandatory.
practices and personal protective (2) Appendices B, F, H, I, J, and K to
equipment in compliance with all re- this section are informational and are
quirements; not intended to create any additional
obligations not otherwise imposed or
(G) Ensure that employees use the
to detract from any existing obliga-
hygiene facilities and observe the de-
tions.
contamination procedures specified in
paragraph (j) of this section; APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1101—OSHA REFERENCE
(H) Ensure that through on-site in- METHOD—MANDATORY
spection, engineering controls are func- This mandatory appendix specifies the pro-
tioning properly and employees are cedure for analyzing air samples for asbestos
using proper work practices; and, and specifies quality control procedures that
549
must be implemented by laboratories per- brated for a field diameter of 100 microm-
forming the analysis. The sampling and ana- eters (±2 micrometers).
lytical methods described below represent 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the
the elements of the available monitoring microscope shall be about 3 degrees meas-
methods (such as Appendix B of this regula- ured using the HSE phase shift test slide as
tion, the most current version of the OSHA outlined below.
method ID–160, or the most current version a. Place the test slide on the microscope
of the NIOSH Method 7400). All employers stage and center it under the phase objec-
who are required to conduct air monitoring tive.
under paragraph (f) of the standard are re- b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into
quired to utilize analytical laboratories that focus.
use this procedure, or an equivalent method,
NOTE: The slide consists of seven sets of
for collecting and analyzing samples.
grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block)
Sampling and Analytical Procedure in descending order of visibility from sets 1
to 7, seven being the least visible. The re-
1. The sampling medium for air samples quirements for asbestos counting are that
shall be mixed cellulose ester filter mem- the microscope optics must resolve the
branes. These shall be designated by the groooved lines in set 3 completely, although
manufacturer as suitable for asbestos count- they may appear somewhat faint, and that
ing. See below for rejection of blanks. the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be in-
2. The preferred collection device shall be visible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least par-
the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open- tially visible but may vary slightly in visi-
faced 50-mm electrically conductive exten- bility between microscopes. A microscope
sion cowl. The 37-mm cassette may be used if that fails to meet these requirements has ei-
necessary but only if written justification ther too low or too high a resolution to be
for the need to use the 37-mm filter cassette used for asbestos counting.
accompanies the sample results in the em-
c. If the image deteriorates, clean and ad-
ployee’s exposure monitoring record. Do not
just the microscope optics. If the problem
reuse or reload cassettes for asbestos sample
persists, cosult the microscope manufac-
collection.
turer.
3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min
and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25/ 11. Each set of samples taken will include
mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used, 10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field
an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 2.5 blanks. These blanks must come from the
liters/min shall be selected. same lot as the filters used for sample collec-
tion. The field blank results shall be aver-
4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume
aged and subtracted from the analytical re-
for each air sample shall be collected to
sults before reporting. A set consists of any
yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square
sample or group of samples for which an
millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter
evaluation for this standard must be made.
darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen
Any samples represented by a field blank
on the filter, a second sample shall be start-
having a fiber count in excess of the detec-
ed.
tion limit of the method being used shall be
5. Ship the samples in a rigid container
rejected.
with sufficient packing material to prevent
dislodging the collected fibers. Packing ma- 12. The samples shall be mounted by the
terial that has a high electrostatic charge on acetone/triacetin method or a method with
its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) can- an equivalent index of refraction and similar
not be used because such material can cause clarity.
loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette. 13. Observe the following counting rules.
6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than
before and after use with a representative fil- 5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved
ter cassette installed between the pump and fibers along the curve.
the calibration devices. b. In the absence of other information,
7. Personal samples shall be taken in the count all particles as asbestos, that have a
‘‘breathing zone’’ of the employee (i.e., at- length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3:1 or
tached to or near the collar or lapel near the greater.
worker’s face). c. Fibers lying entirely within the bound-
8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field
phase contrast using a microscope with an 8 shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the
to 10 X eyepiece and a 40 to 45 X objective for boundary once, having one end within the
a total magnification of approximately 400 X circle, shall receive the count of one half
and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The (1⁄2). Do not count any fiber that crosses the
microscope shall also be fitted with a green graticule boundary more than once. Reject
or blue filter. and do not count any other fibers even
9. The microscope shall be fitted with a though they may be visible outside the grati-
Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule cali- cule area.
550
d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- of at least two other independent labora-
less individual fibers can be identified by ob- tories. Each laboratory shall participate in
serving both ends of an individual fiber. round robin testing at least once every 6
e. Count enough graticule fields to yield months with at least all the other labora-
100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop tories in its interlaboratory quality assur-
counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber ance group. Each laboratory shall submit
count. slides typical of its own workload for use in
14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at this program. The round robin shall be de-
the rate of 10 percent. signed and results analyzed using appro-
priate statistical methodology.
Quality Control Procedures b. All laboratories should also participate
1. Intralaboratory program. Each labora- in a national sample testing scheme such as
tory and/or each company with more than the Proficiency Analytical Testing Program
one microscopist counting slides shall estab- (PAT), or the Asbestos Registry sponsored by
lish a statistically designed quality assur- the American Industrial Hygiene Association
ance program involving blind recounts and (AIHA).
comparisons between microscopists to mon- 3. All individuals performing asbestos anal-
itor the variability of counting by each ysis must have taken the NIOSH course for
microscopist and between microscopists. In a sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos
company with more than one laboratory, the dust or an equivalent course.
program shall include all laboratories, and 4. When the use of different microscopes
shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-labora- contributes to differences between counters
tory variability. and laboratories, the effect of the different
2a. Interlaboratory program. Each labora- microscope shall be evaluated and the micro-
tory analyzing asbestos samples for compli- scope shall be replaced, as necessary.
ance determination shall implement an 5. Current results of these quality assur-
interlaboratory quality assurance program ance programs shall be posted in each lab-
that, as a minimum, includes participation oratory to keep the microscopists informed.
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1101—SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS (NON-MANDATORY)

Matrix Air:
OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits:
Time Weighted Average ......................................................................................................................... 0.1 fiber/cc
Excursion Level (30 minutes) ................................................................................................................. 1.0 fiber/cc
Collection Procedure:
A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must
be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber density
of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2 on the filter.
Recommended Sampling Rate ..................................................................................................................... 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute

(L/min)
Recommended Air Volumes:
Minimum ................................................................................................................................................. 25 L
Maximum ................................................................................................................................................ 2,400 L
Analytical Procedure: crocidolite, amosite (cummingtonite-

A portion of the sample filter is cleared grunerite asbestos), tremolite asbestos, ac-
and prepared for asbestos fiber counting by tinolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and
Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) at 400X. any of these minerals that have been chemi-
Commercial manufacturers and products cally treated and/or altered. The precise
mentioned in this method are for descriptive chemical formulation of each species will
use only and do not constitute endorsements vary with the location from which it was
by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from
mined. Nominal compositions are listed:
other sources can be substituted.
Chrysotile .......... Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4
1. Introduction Crocidolite ......... Na2 Fe32+ Fe23+ Si8
This method describes the collection of O22(OH)2
airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated Amosite ............. (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2
sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester Tremolite-actin-
(MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast olite ................ Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 Si8 O22(OH)2
microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are Anthophyllite .... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2
unique to this method and are defined below:
Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos which
brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, meets the criteria specified below for a fiber.
551
Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a 1.2. Principle
fiber to it’s diameter (e.g. 3:1, 5:1 aspect ra-
Air is drawn through a MCE filter to cap-
tios).
ture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped
Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles
portion of the filter is removed, placed on a
formed by comminution of minerals, espe-
glass microscope slide and made transparent.
cially those characterized by parallel sides
A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM.
and a moderate aspect ratio (usually less
All the fibers meeting defined criteria for as-
than 20:1).
bestos are counted and considered a measure
Detection Limit: The number of fibers nec-
of the airborne asbestos concentration.
essary to be 95% certain that the result is
greater than zero. 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages
Differential Counting: The term applied to
the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- There are four main advantages of PCM
bers from the fiber count because they do over other methods:
not appear to be asbestos. (1) The technique is specific for fibers.
Fiber: A particle that is 5 µm or longer, Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique
with a length-to-width ratio of 3 to 1 or which excludes non-fibrous particles from
longer. the analysis.
Field: The area within the graticule circle (2) The technique is inexpensive and does
that is superimposed on the microscope not require specialized knowledge to carry
image. out the analysis for total fiber counts.
Set: The samples which are taken, sub- (3) The analysis is quick and can be per-
mitted to the laboratory, analyzed, and for formed on-site for rapid determination of air
which, interim or final result reports are concentrations of asbestos fibers.
generated. (4) The technique has continuity with his-
Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: The torical epidemiological studies so that esti-
non-asbestos form of these minerals which mates of expected disease can be inferred
meet the definition of a fiber. It includes any from long-term determinations of asbestos
of these minerals that have been chemically exposures.
treated and/or altered. The main disadvantage of PCM is that it
Walton-Beckett Graticule: An eyepiece grati- does not positively identify asbestos fibers.
cule specifically designed for asbestos fiber Other fibers which are not asbestos may be
counting. It consists of a circle with a pro- included in the count unless differential
jected diameter of 100 ±2 µm (area of about counting is performed. This requires a great
0.00785 mm2) with a crosshair having tic- deal of experience to adequately differen-
marks at 3-µm intervals in one direction and tiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Posi-
5-µm in the orthogonal direction. There are tive identification of asbestos must be per-
marks around the periphery of the circle to formed by polarized light or electron micros-
demonstrate the proper sizes and shapes of copy techniques. A further disadvantage of
fibers. This design is reproduced in Figure 1. PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are
The disk is placed in one of the microscope about 0.2 µm in diameter while the finest as-
eyepieces so that the design is superimposed bestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 µm in
on the field of view. diameter. For some exposures, substantially
more fibers may be present than are actually
1.1. History counted.
Early surveys to determine asbestos expo- 1.4. Workplace Exposure
sures were conducted using impinger counts
of total dust with the counts expressed as Asbestos is used by the construction indus-
million particles per cubic foot. The British try in such products as shingles, floor tiles,
Asbestos Research Council recommended fil- asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation
ter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969, and acoustical products. Non-construction
the Bureau of Occupational Safety and uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper,
Health published a filter membrane method paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most
for counting asbestos fibers in the United significant exposures in the workplace is the
States. This method was refined by NIOSH removal and encapsulation of asbestos in
and published as P & CAM 239. On May 29, schools, public buildings, and homes. Many
1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sam- workers have the potential to be exposed to
pling with phase contrast counting for eval- asbestos during these operations.
uation of asbestos exposures at work sites in About 95% of the asbestos in commercial
the United States. The use of this technique use in the United States is chrysotile. Cro-
was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase cidolite and amosite make up most of the re-
contrast microscopy has continued to be the mainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or ac-
method of choice for the measurement of oc- tinolite are likely to be encountered as con-
cupational exposure to asbestos. taminants in various industrial products.
552
1.5. Physical Properties samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989
(N=36) and the concentration range was from
Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile
120 to 1,300 fibers/mm2.
strength along its axis, is chemically inert,
non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a 4. Interferences
high electrical resistance and good sound ab-
sorbing properties. It can be weaved into ca- Fibrous substances, if present, may inter-
bles, fabrics or other textiles, and also mat- fere with asbestos analysis.
ted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. Some common fibers are:
fiberglass
2. Range and Detection Limit anhydrite
2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter plant fibers
is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2. With a Walton- perlite veins
Beckett graticule this range is equivalent to gypsum
0.8 to 10 fibers/field. Using NIOSH counting some synthetic fibers
statistics, a count of 0.8 fibers/field would membrane structures
give an approximate coefficient of variation sponge spicules
(CV) of 0.13. diatoms
2.2. The detection limit for this method is microorganisms
4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm2. This wollastonite
was determined using an equation to esti- The use of electron microscopy or optical
mate the maximum CV possible at a specific tests such as polarized light, and dispersion
concentration (95% confidence) and a Lower staining may be used to differentiate these
Control Limit of zero. The CV value was materials from asbestos when necessary.
then used to determine a corresponding con-
centration from historical CV vs fiber rela- 5. Sampling
tionships. As an example: 5.1. Equipment
Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) =
AC—1.645(CV)(AC) 5.1.1. Sample assembly (The assembly is
shown in Figure 3). Conductive filter holder
Where: consisting of a 25-mm diameter, 3-piece cas-
AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber con- sette having a 50-mm long electrically con-
centration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower ductive extension cowl. Backup pad, 25-mm,
Control Limit=0 and solving for CV: cellulose. Membrane filter, mixed-cellulose
0 = AC—1.645(CV)(AC) ester (MCE), 25-mm, plain, white, 0.4 to 1.2-
CV = 0.61 µm pore size.
This value was compared with CV vs. count NOTES:
curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for (a) DO NOT RE-USE CASSETTES.
Leidel-Busch counting statistics or for an (b) Fully conductive cassettes are required
OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center (OSHA- to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the cas-
SLTC) CV curve (see Appendix A for further sette due to electrostatic attraction.
information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fibers per (c) Purchase filters which have been selected
100 fields, respectively. Although a lower de- by the manufacturer for asbestos counting
tection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields is sup- or analyze representative filters for fiber
ported by the OSHA-SLTC data, both data background before use. Discard the filter
sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields value. lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields are
found.
3. Method Performance—Precision and (d) To decrease the possibility of contamina-
Accuracy tion, the sampling system (filter-backup
Precision is dependent upon the total num- pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually
ber of fibers counted and the uniformity of preassembled by the manufacturer.
the fiber distribution on the filter. A general (e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell-mouth,
rule is to count at least 20 and not more than may be used within the limits of their vali-
100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100 dation.
fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields 5.1.2. Gel bands for sealing cassettes.
have already been counted. Counting more 5.1.3. Sampling pump.
than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in Each pump must be a battery operated,
precision. As the total count drops below 10 self-contained unit small enough to be
fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is placed on the monitored employee and not
noted. interfere with the work being performed. The
At this time, there is no known method to pump must be capable of sampling at the col-
determine the absolute accuracy of the as- lection rate for the required sampling time.
bestos analysis. Results of samples prepared 5.1.4. Flexible tubing, 6-mm bore.
through the Proficiency Analytical Testing 5.1.5. Pump calibration.
(PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA- Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or elec-
SLTC showed no significant bias when com- tronic meter.
pared to PAT reference values. The PAT 5.2. Sampling Procedure
553
5.2.1. Seal the point where the base and lower the count or make counting impos-
cowl of each cassette meet with a gel band or sible. If more than about 25 to 30% of the
tape. field area is obscured with dust, the result
5.2.2. Charge the pumps completely before may be biased low. Smaller air volumes may
beginning. be necessary when there is excessive non-as-
5.2.3. Connect each pump to a calibration bestos dust in the air.
cassette with an appropriate length of 6-mm While sampling, observe the filter with a
bore plastic tubing. Do not use luer connec- small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of
tors—the type of cassette specified above has dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and
built-in adapters. seal the cassette, and replace with a new
5.2.4. Select an appropriate flow rate for sampling assembly. The total dust loading
the situation being monitored. The sampling should not exceed 1 mg.
flow rate must be between 0.5 and 5.0 L/min 5.2.9. Blank samples are used to determine
for personal sampling and is commonly set if any contamination has occurred during
between 1 and 2 L/min. Always choose a flow sample handling. Prepare two blanks for the
rate that will not produce overloaded filters. first 1 to 20 samples. For sets containing
5.2.5. Calibrate each sampling pump before greater than 20 samples, prepare blanks as
and after sampling with a calibration cas- 10% of the samples. Handle blank samples in
sette in-line (Note: This calibration cassette the same manner as air samples with one ex-
should be from the same lot of cassettes used ception: Do not draw any air through the
for sampling). Use a primary standard (e.g. blank samples. Open the blank cassette in
bubble burette) to calibrate each pump. If the place where the sample cassettes are
possible, calibrate at the sampling site. mounted on the employee. Hold it open for
about 30 seconds. Close and seal the cassette
NOTE: If sampling site calibration is not
appropriately. Store blanks for shipment
possible, environmental influences may af-
with the sample cassettes.
fect the flow rate. The extent is dependent
5.2.10. Immediately after sampling, close
on the type of pump used. Consult with the
and seal each cassette with the base and
pump manufacturer to determine dependence plastic plugs. Do not touch or puncture the
on environmental influences. If the pump is filter membrane as this will invalidate the
affected by temperature and pressure analysis.
changes, correct the flow rate using the for- 5.2.11 Attach and secure a sample seal
mula shown in the section ‘‘Sampling Pump around each sample cassette in such a way
Flow Rate Corrections’’ at the end of this ap- as to assure that the end cap and base plugs
pendix. cannot be removed without destroying the
5.2.6. Connect each pump to the base of seal. Tape the ends of the seal together since
each sampling cassette with flexible tubing. the seal is not long enough to be wrapped
Remove the end cap of each cassette and end-to-end. Also wrap tape around the cas-
take each air sample open face. Assure that sette at each joint to keep the seal secure.
each sample cassette is held open side down 5.3.1. Send the samples to the laboratory
in the employee’s breathing zone during with paperwork requesting asbestos analysis.
sampling. The distance from the nose/mouth List any known fibrous interferences present
of the employee to the cassette should be during sampling on the paperwork. Also,
about 10 cm. Secure the cassette on the col- note the workplace operation(s) sampled.
lar or lapel of the employee using spring 5.3.2. Secure and handle the samples in
clips or other similar devices. such that they will not rattle during ship-
5.2.7. A suggested minimum air volume ment nor be exposed to static electricity. Do
when sampling to determine TWA compli- not ship samples in expanded polystyrene
ance is 25 L. For Excursion Limit (30 min peanuts, vermiculite, paper shreds, or excel-
sampling time) evaluations, a minimum air sior. Tape sample cassettes to sheet bubbles
volume of 48 L is recommended. and place in a container that will cushion
5.2.8. The most significant problem when the samples in such a manner that they will
sampling for asbestos is overloading the fil- not rattle.
ter with non-asbestos dust. Suggested max- 5.3.3. To avoid the possibility of sample
imum air sample volumes for specific envi- contamination, always ship bulk samples in
ronments are: separate mailing containers.
Environment Air Vol. (L) 6. Analysis
Asbestos removal operations (visible 100. 6.1. Safety Precautions
dust).
Asbestos removal operations (little 240. 6.1.1. Acetone is extremely flammable and
dust). precautions must be taken not to ignite it.
Office environments ............................. 400 to 2,400. Avoid using large containers or quantities of
acetone. Transfer the solvent in a ventilated
CAUTION: Do not overload the filter with laboratory hood. Do not use acetone near
dust. High levels of non-fibrous dust par- any open flame. For generation of acetone
ticles may obscure fibers on the filter and vapor, use a spark free heat source.
554
6.1.2. Any asbestos spills should be cleaned 6.5. Sample Mounting
up immediately to prevent dispersal of fi-
NOTE: See Safety Precautions in Section
bers. Prudence should be exercised to avoid
6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to
contamination of laboratory facilities or ex- produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy)
posure of personnel to asbestos. Asbestos background in a medium with a refractive
spills should be cleaned up with wet methods index of approximately 1.46. The technique
and/or a High Efficiency Particulate-Air below collapses the filter for easier focusing
(HEPA) filtered vacuum. and produces permanent mounts which are
CAUTION: Do not use a vacuum without a useful for quality control and interlabora-
HEPA filter—It will disperse fine asbestos fi- tory comparison.
bers in the air. An aluminum block or similar device is re-
quired for sample preparation.
6.2. Equipment
6.5.1. Heat the aluminum block to about 70
6.2.1. Phase contrast microscope with bin- °C. The hot block should not be used on any
ocular or trinocular head. surface that can be damaged by either the
6.2.2. Widefield or Huygenian 10X eyepieces heat or from exposure to acetone.
(NOTE: The eyepiece containing the grati- 6.5.2. Ensure that the glass slides and cover
cule must be a focusing eyepiece. Use a 40X glasses are free of dust and fibers.
phase objective with a numerical aperture of 6.5.3. Remove the top plug to prevent a
0.65 to 0.75). vacuum when the cassette is opened. Clean
6.2.3. Kohler illumination (if possible) with the outside of the cassette if necessary. Cut
green or blue filter. the seal and/or tape on the cassette with a
razor blade. Very carefully separate the base
6.2.4. Walton-Beckett Graticule, type G–22
from the extension cowl, leaving the filter
with 100 ±2 µm projected diameter.
and backup pad in the base.
6.2.5. Mechanical stage. A rotating me- 6.5.4. With a rocking motion cut a tri-
chanical stage is convenient for use with po- angular wedge from the filter using the scal-
larized light. pel. This wedge should be one-sixth to one-
6.2.6. Phase telescope. fourth of the filter. Grasp the filter wedge
6.2.7. Stage micrometer with 0.01-mm sub- with the forceps on the perimeter of the fil-
divisions. ter which was clamped between the cassette
6.2.8. Phase-shift test slide, mark II (Avail- pieces. DO NOT TOUCH the filter with your
able from PTR optics Ltd., and also finger. Place the filter on the glass slide
McCrone). sample side up. Static electricity will usu-
6.2.9. Precleaned glass slides, 25 mm×75 ally keep the filter on the slide until it is
mm. One end can be frosted for convenience cleared.
in writing sample numbers, etc., or paste-on 6.5.5. Place the tip of the micropipette con-
labels can be used. taining about 200 µL acetone into the alu-
6.2.10. Cover glass #11⁄2. minum block. Insert the glass slide into the
6.2.11. Scalpel (#10, curved blade). receiving slot in the aluminum block. Inject
6.2.12. Fine tipped forceps. the acetone into the block with slow, steady
pressure on the plunger while holding the pi-
6.2.13. Aluminum block for clearing filter
pette firmly in place. Wait 3 to 5 seconds for
(see Appendix D and Figure 4).
the filter to clear, then remove the pipette
6.2.14. Automatic adjustable pipette, 100- to and slide from the aluminum block.
500-µL. 6.5.6. Immediately (less than 30 seconds)
6.2.15. Micropipette, 5 µL. place 2.5 to 3.5 µL of triacetin on the filter
(NOTE: Waiting longer than 30 seconds will
6.3. Reagents result in increased index of refraction and
6.3.1. Acetone (HPLC grade). decreased contrast between the fibers and
6.3.2. Triacetin (glycerol triacetate). the preparation. This may also lead to sepa-
6.3.3. Lacquer or nail polish. ration of the cover slip from the slide).
6.5.7. Lower a cover slip gently onto the fil-
6.4. Standard Preparation ter at a slight angle to reduce the possibility
of forming air bubbles. If more than 30 sec-
A way to prepare standard asbestos sam- onds have elapsed between acetone exposure
ples of known concentration has not been de- and triacetin application, glue the edges of
veloped. It is possible to prepare replicate the cover slip to the slide with lacquer or
samples of nearly equal concentration. This nail polish.
has been performed through the PAT pro- 6.5.8. If clearing is slow, warm the slide for
gram. These asbestos samples are distributed 15 min on a hot plate having a surface tem-
by the AIHA to participating laboratories. perature of about 50 °C to hasten clearing.
Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm The top of the hot block can be used if the
sample membrane is required for an asbestos slide is not heated too long.
count, any PAT sample can serve as a 6.5.9. Counting may proceed immediately
‘‘standard’’ for replicate counting. after clearing and mounting are completed.
555
6.6. Sample Analysis boundary more than once. Reject and do not
count any other fibers even though they may
Completely align the microscope according
be visible outside the graticule area. If a
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Then,
fiber touches the circle, it is considered to
align the microscope using the following
cross the line.
general alignment routine at the beginning
(9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un-
of every counting session and more often if
less individual fibers can be clearly identi-
necessary.
fied and each individual fiber is clearly not
6.6.1. Alignment
connected to another counted fiber. See Fig-
(1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small
ure 1 for counting conventions.
amount of dirt can significantly degrade the
(10) Record the number of fibers in each
image.
field in a consistent way such that filter
(2) Rough focus the objective on a sample.
non-uniformity can be assessed.
(3) Close down the field iris so that it is
(11) Regularly check phase ring alignment.
visible in the field of view. Focus the image
(12) When an agglomerate (mass of mate-
of the iris with the condenser focus. Center
rial) covers more than 25% of the field of
the image of the iris in the field of view.
view, reject the field and select another. Do
(4) Install the phase telescope and focus on
not include it in the number of fields count-
the phase rings. Critically center the rings.
ed.
Misalignment of the rings results in astig-
(13) Perform a ‘‘blind recount’’ of 1 in every
matism which will degrade the image.
10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides
(5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the
using a person other than the original
microscope stage and focus on the lines. The
counter.
analyst must see line set 3 and should see at
least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6 6.7. Fiber Identification
or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination
which does not pass this test may not be As previously mentioned in Section 1.3.,
used. PCM does not provide positive confirmation
6.6.2. Counting Fibers of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential
(1) Place the prepared sample slide on the counting techniques should be used if dis-
mechanical stage of the microscope. Position crimination is desirable. Differential count-
the center of the wedge under the objective ing may include primary discrimination
lens and focus upon the sample. based on morphology, polarized light anal-
(2) Start counting from one end of the ysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data
wedge and progress along a radial line to the by Scanning Electron or Transmission Elec-
other end (count in either direction from pe- tron Microscopy.
rimeter to wedge tip). Select fields ran- A great deal of experience is required to
domly, without looking into the eyepieces, routinely and correctly perform differential
by slightly advancing the slide in one direc- counting. It is discouraged unless it is le-
tion with the mechanical stage control. gally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obvi-
(3) Continually scan over a range of focal ously not asbestos should it be excluded from
planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 µm of the the count. Further discussion of this tech-
filter surface) with the fine focus control nique can be found in reference 8.10.
during each field count. Spend at least 5 to If there is a question whether a fiber is as-
15 seconds per field. bestos or not, follow the rule:
(4) Most samples will contain asbestos fi- ‘‘WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.’’
bers with fiber diameters less than 1 µm.
6.8. Analytical Recommendations—Quality
Look carefully for faint fiber images. The
Control System
small diameter fibers will be very hard to
see. However, they are an important con- 6.8.1. All individuals performing asbestos
tribution to the total count. analysis must have taken the NIOSH course
(5) Count only fibers equal to or longer for sampling and evaluating airborne asbes-
than 5 µm. Measure the length of curved fi- tos or an equivalent course.
bers along the curve. 6.8.2. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos
(6) Count fibers which have a length to counting shall set up a slide trading arrange-
width ratio of 3:1 or greater. ment with at least two other laboratories in
(7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields. order to compare performance and eliminate
Continue counting until either 100 fibers are inbreeding of error. The slide exchange oc-
counted or 100 fields have been viewed; curs at least semiannually. The round robin
whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers results shall be posted where all analysts can
in the final field. view individual analyst’s results.
(8) Fibers lying entirely within the bound- 6.8.3. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos
ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field counting shall participate in the Proficiency
shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the Analytical Testing Program, the Asbestos
boundary once, having one end within the Analyst Registry or equivalent.
circle shall receive a count of 1⁄2. Do not 6.8.4. Each analyst shall select and count
count any fiber that crosses the graticule prepared slides from a ‘‘slide bank’’. These
556
are quality assurance counts. The slide bank is always 0.00785 mm2 the number of fields
shall be prepared using uniformly distributed per filter will always be 49,000. In addition it
samples taken from the workload. Fiber den- is necessary to convert liters of air to cc.
sities should cover the entire range routinely These three constants can then be combined
analyzed by the laboratory. These slides are such that ECA/(1,000×MFA)=49. The previous
counted blind by all counters to establish an equation simplifies to:
original standard deviation. This historical
distribution is compared with the quality as-  FB   BFB 
surance counts. A counter must have 95% of
  −  × 49
all quality control samples counted within  FL   BFL 
three standard deviations of the historical AC =
mean. This count is then integrated into a FR × T
new historical mean and standard deviation
for the slide. 7.3. Recount Calculations
The analyses done by the counters to es-
tablish the slide bank may be used for an in- As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a
terim quality control program if the data are ‘‘blind recount’’ of 10% of the slides is per-
treated in a proper statistical fashion. formed. In all cases, differences will be ob-
served between the first and second counts of
7. Calculations the same filter wedge. Most of these dif-
7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbes- ferences will be due to chance alone, that is,
tos fiber concentration on the filter sample due to the random variability (precision) of
using the following formula: the count method. Statistical recount cri-
teria enables one to decide whether observed
differences can be explained due to chance
 FB   BFB   alone or are probably due to systematic dif-
  −   × ECA ferences between analysts, microscopes, or
  FL   BFL   other biasing factors.
AC = The following recount criterion is for a
1000 × FR × T × MFA pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc.
where: The criterion is given at the type-I error
AC=Airborne fiber concentration level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk
FB=Total number of fibers greater than 5 µm that we will reject a pair of counts for the
counted reason that one might be biased, when the
FL=Total number of fields counted on the large observed difference is really due to
filter chance.
BFB=Total number of fibers greater than 5 Reject a pair of counts if:
µm counted in the blank
BFL=Total number of fields counted on the
blank
AC 2 − AC1 > 2.78
ECA=Effective collecting area of filter (385
mm2 nominal for a 25-mm filter.)
FR=Pump flow rate (L/min) × ( )
AC AVG × CVFB
MFA=Microscope count field area (mm2).
This is 0.00785 mm2 for a Walton-Beckett Where:
Graticule. AC1=lower estimated airborne fiber con-
T=Sample collection time (min) centration
1,000=Conversion of L to cc AC2=higher estimated airborne fiber con-
NOTE: The collection area of a filter is sel- centration
dom equal to 385 mm2. It is appropriate for ACavg=average of the two concentration esti-
laboratories to routinely monitor the exact mates
diameter using an inside micrometer. The CVFB=CV for the average of the two con-
collection area is calculated according to the centration estimates
formula: If a pair of counts are rejected by this cri-
Area = †(d/2)2 terion then, recount the rest of the filters in
the submitted set. Apply the test and reject
7.2. Short-Cut Calculation any other pairs failing the test. Rejection
Since a given analyst always has the same shall include a memo to the industrial hy-
ER29JN95.002</GPH>
interpupillary distance, the number of fields gienist stating that the sample failed a sta-
per filter for a particular analyst will remain tistical test for homogeneity and the true air
constant for a given size filter. The field size concentration may be significantly different
for that analyst is constant (i.e. the analyst than the reported value.
is using an assigned microscope and is not 7.4. Reporting Results
changing the reticle).
ER10AU94.034</GPH>
For example, if the exposed area of the fil- Report results to the industrial hygienist
ter is always 385 mm2 and the size of the field as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If
557
ER10AU94.033</GPH>
multiple analyses are performed on a sam- Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 dif-
ple, an average of the results is to be re- ferent counters independently of one an-
ported unless any of the results can be re- other. The standard deviation and the CV
jected for cause. statistic was calculated for each sample.
This data was then plotted on a graph of CV
8. References vs. fibers/mm2. A least squares regression
8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al., U.S. Public Health was performed using the following equation:
Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos CV = antilog10[A(log10(x))2+B(log10(x))+C]
Textile Industry (Public Health Bulletin No. where:
241), U.S. Treasury Dept., Washington, DC, x = the number of fibers/mm2
1938. Application of least squares gave:
8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measure- A = 0.182205
ment of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Mem- B = 0.973343
brane Filter Method (Technical Note), Asbes- C = 0.327499
tos Research Council, Rockdale, Lancashire, Using these values, the equation becomes:
Great Britain, 1969.
CV = antilog10[0.182205(log10(x))2
8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown,
¥0.973343(log10(x))+0.327499]
T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting
Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections
by Phase Contrast Microscopy, Bureau of Oc-
cupational Health, U.S. Dept. of Health, Edu- This correction is used if a difference
cation and Welfare, Cincinnati, OH, 1969. greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/
8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, or pressure is noted between calibration and
2nd ed., Vol. 1 (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 77– sampling sites and the pump does not com-
157–A). National Institute for Occupational pensate for the differences.
Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1977. pp.
239–1—239–21. P  T 
8.5. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations
29 CFR 1910.1001. 1971.
Q act = Q cal ×  cal  ×  act 
8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos,  Pact   Tcal 
Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final Where:
Rule, Federal Register 51:119 (20 June 1986).
Qact = actual flow rate
pp. 22612–22790.
Qcal = calibrated flow rate (if a rotameter was
8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and
used, the rotameter value)
Actinolite, Code of Federal Regulations
Pcal = uncorrected air pressure at calibration
1910.1001. 1988. pp. 711–752. Pact = uncorrected air pressure at sampling
8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard— site
Occupational Exposure to Asbestos (DHEW/ Tact = temperature at sampling site (K)
NIOSH Pub. No. HSM 72–10267), National In- Tcal = temperature at calibration (K)
stitute for Occupational Safety and Health,
NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH, 1972. pp. III–1—III–24. Walton-Beckett Graticule
8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde,
When ordering the Graticule for asbestos
R.D., Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane
counting, specify the exact disc diameter
Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos
needed to fit the ocular of the microscope
Fibers (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 79–127). Na-
and the diameter (mm) of the circular count-
tional Institute for Occupational Safety and
ing area. Instructions for measuring the di-
Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1979.
mensions necessary are listed:
8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- (1) Insert any available graticule into the
croscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, focusing eyepiece and focus so that the grati-
Analytical Techniques in Occupational cule lines are sharp and clear.
Health Chemistry, edited by D.D. Dollberg (2) Align the microscope.
and A.W. Verstuyft. Wash. DC: American (3) Place a stage micrometer on the micro-
Chemical Society, (ACS Symposium Series scope object stage and focus the microscope
120) 1980. pp. 13–41. on the graduated lines.
Quality Control (4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL
(µm), using the stage micrometer.
The OSHA asbestos regulations require (5) Remove the graticule from the micro-
each laboratory to establish a quality con- scope and measure its actual grid length, AL
trol program. The following is presented as (mm). This can be accomplished by using a
an example of how the OSHA-SLTC con- mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a
structed its internal CV curve as part of jeweler’s loupe with a direct reading scale.
meeting this requirement. Data is from 395 (6) Let D=100 µm. Calculate the circle di-
samples collected during OSHA compliance ameter, dc (mm), for the Walton-Beckett
inspections and analyzed from October 1980 graticule and specify the diameter when
through April 1986. making a purchase:
558
ER10AU94.036</GPH>
Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable
AL × D range: 100 ±2 µm) with a stage micrometer
dc = upon receipt of the graticule from the manu-
PL facturer. Determine the field area (mm2).
Example: If PL=108 µm, AL=2.93 mm and Field Area = †(D/2) 2
D=100 µm, then, If D = 100 µm=0.1 mm, then
Field Area = †(0.1 mm/2) 2=0.00785 mm 2
2.93 × 100 The Graticule is available from: Graticules
dc = = 2.71mm Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN,
108 Kent, England (Telephone 011–44–732–359061).
(7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle com- Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145
bination on the microscope must be cali- Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [tele-
brated. Should any of the three be changed phone (617) 891–6000] or McCrone Accessories
(by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replace- and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chi-
ment, etc.), the combination must be recali- cago, IL 60616 [phone (312)-842–7100]. The
brated. Calibration may change if interpupil- graticule is custom made for each micro-
lary distance is changed. scope.
ER10au94.025</GPH>
ER10AU94.038</GPH></EXAMPLE>
559
ER10AU94.037</GPH>
COUNTS FOR THE FIBERS IN THE FIGURE istered to all employees who are exposed to
asbestos above the permissible exposure
Structure No. Count Explanation limit, and who will therefore be included in
1 to 6 ............. 1 Single fibers all contained within the their employer’s medical surveillance pro-
Circle. gram. Part 1 of the appendix contains the
7 ..................... ⁄
12 Fiber crosses circle once. Initial Medical Questionnaire, which must be
8 ..................... 0 Fiber too short. obained for all new hires who will be covered
9 ..................... 2 Two crossing fibers.
10 ................... 0 Fiber outside graticule.
by the medical surveillance requirements.
11 ................... 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice. Part 2 includes the abbreviated Periodical
12 ................... 1⁄2 Although split, fiber only crosses Medical Questionnaire, which must be ad-
once. ministered to all employees who are pro-
vided periodic medical examinations under
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] the medical surveillance provisions of the
standard.
APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL
QUESTIONNAIRES; MANDATORY
This mandatory appendix contains the
medical questionnaires that must be admin-
560
561
EC30OC91.064</GPH>
562
EC30OC91.065</GPH>
563
EC30OC91.066</GPH>
564
EC30OC91.067</GPH>
565
EC30OC91.068</GPH>
566
EC30OC91.069</GPH>
567
EC30OC91.070</GPH>
568
EC30OC91.071</GPH>
569
EC30OC91.072</GPH>
570
EC30OC91.073</GPH>
571
EC30OC91.074</GPH>
APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1101—INTERPRETATION APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1101—WORK PRACTICES

AND CLASSIFICATION OF CHEST ROENTGENO- AND ENGINEERING CONTROLS FOR CLASS I
GRAMS—MANDATORY ASBESTOS OPERATIONS (NON-MANDATORY)
(a) Chest roentgenograms shall be inter- This is a non-mandatory appendix to the
preted and classified in accordance with a asbestos standards for construction and for
professionally accepted classification system shipyards. It describes criteria and proce-
and recorded on an interpretation form fol- dures for erecting and using negative pres-
lowing the format of the CDC/NIOSH (M) 2.8 sure enclosures for Class I Asbestos Work,
form. As a minimum, the content within the when NPEs are used as an allowable control
bold lines of this form (items 1 through 4) method to comply with paragraph (g)(5)(i) of
shall be included. This form is not to be sub- this section. Many small and variable details
mitted to NIOSH. are involved in the erection of a negative
(b) Roentgenograms shall be interpreted pressure enclosure. OSHA and most partici-
and classified only by a B-reader, a board eli- pants in the rulemaking agreed that only the
gible/certified radiologist, or an experienced major, more performance oriented criteria
should be made mandatory. These criteria
physician with known s.
are set out in paragraph (g) of this section.
(c) All interpreters, whenever interpreting
In addition, this appendix includes these
chest roentgenograms made under this sec- mandatory specifications and procedures in
tion, shall have immediately available for its guidelines in order to make this appendix
reference a complete set of the ILO-U/C coherent and helpful. The mandatory nature
International Classification of Radiographs of the criteria which appear in the regu-
for Pneumoconioses, 1980. latory text is not changed because they are
included in this ‘‘non-mandatory’’ appendix.
572
EC30OC91.075</GPH>
Similarly, the additional criteria and proce- A physical description of the work area;
dures included as guidelines in the appendix, A description of the approximate amount of
do not become mandatory because manda- material to be removed;
tory criteria are also included in these com- A schedule for turning off and sealing exist-
prehensive guidelines. ing ventilation systems;
In addition, none of the criteria, both man- Personnel hygiene procedures;
datory and recommended, are meant to A description of personal protective equip-
specify or imply the need for use of patented ment and clothing to be worn by employ-
or licensed methods or equipment. Rec- ees;
ommended specifications included in this at- A description of the local exhaust ventila-
tachment should not discourage the use of tion systems to be used and how they are
creative alternatives which can be shown to to be tested;
reliably achieve the objectives of negative- A description of work practices to be ob-
pressure enclosures. served by employees;
Requirements included in this appendix, An air monitoring plan;
cover general provisions to be followed in all
A description of the method to be used to
asbestos jobs, provisions which must be fol-
transport waste material; and
lowed for all Class I asbestos jobs, and provi-
The location of the dump site.
sions governing the construction and testing
of negative pressure enclosures. The first Materials and Equipment Necessary for Asbestos
category includes the requirement for use of Removal
wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and imme-
diate bagging of waste; Class I work must Although individual asbestos removal
conform to the following provisions: projects vary in terms of the equipment re-
• oversight by competent person quired to accomplish the removal of the ma-
• use of critical barriers over all openings terials, some equipment and materials are
to work area common to most asbestos removal oper-
• isolation of HVAC systems ations.
• use of impermeable dropcloths and cov- Plastic sheeting used to protect horizontal
erage of all objects within regulated areas surfaces, seal HVAC openings or to seal
In addition, more specific requirements for vertical openings and ceilings should have a
NPEs include: minimum thickness of 6 mils. Tape or other
• maintenance of ¥0.02 inches water gauge adhesive used to attach plastic sheeting
within enclosure should be of sufficient adhesive strength to
• manometric measurements support the weight of the material plus all
• air movement away from employees per- stresses encountered during the entire dura-
forming removal work tion of the project without becoming de-
• smoke testing or equivalent for detection tached from the surface.
of leaks and air direction Other equipment and materials which
• deactivation of electrical circuits, if not should be available at the beginning of each
provided with ground-fault circuit inter- project are:
rupters. —HEPA Filtered Vacuum is essential for
cleaning the work area after the asbestos
Planning the Project has been removed. It should have a long
The standard requires that an exposure as- hose capable of reaching out-of-the-way
sessment be conducted before the asbestos places, such as areas above ceiling tiles,
job is begun [§ 1926.1101 (f)(1)]. Information behind pipes, etc.
needed for that assessment, includes data re- —Portable air ventilation systems installed
lating to prior similar jobs, as applied to the to provide the negative air pressure and air
specific variables of the current job. The in- removal from the enclosure must be
formation needed to conduct the assessment equipped with a HEPA filter. The number
will be useful in planning the project, and in and capacity of units required to ventilate
complying with any reporting requirements an enclosure depend on the size of the area
under this standard, when significant to be ventilated. The filters for these sys-
changes are being made to a control system tems should be designed in such a manner
listed in the standard, [see also those of that they can be replaced when the air flow
USEPA (40 CFR 61, subpart M). Thus, al- volume is reduced by the build-up of dust
though the standard does not explicitly rein the filtration material. Pressure moni-
quire the preparation of a written asbestos toring devices with alarms and strip chart
removal plan, the usual constituents of such recorders attached to each system to indi-
a plan, i.e., a description of the enclosure, cate the pressure differential and the loss
the equipment, and the procedures to be used due to dust buildup on the filter are rec-
throughout the project, must be determined ommended.
before the enclosure can be erected. The fol- —Water sprayers should be used to keep the
lowing information should be included in the asbestos material as saturated as possible
planning of the system: during removal; the sprayers will provide a
573
fine mist that minimizes the impact of the sheeting should be secured with duct tape or
spray on the material. an equivalent method to provide a tight seal
—Water used to saturate the asbestos con- around the object.
taining material can be amended by adding Bagging Waste: In addition to the require-
at least 15 milliliters (1⁄4 ounce) of wetting ment for immediate bagging of waste for dis-
agent in 1 liter (1 pint) of water. An exam- posal, it is further recommended that the
ple of a wetting agent is a 50/50 mixture of waste material be double-bagged and sealed
polyoxyethylene ether and in plastic bags designed for asbestos disposal.
polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester. The bags should be stored in a waste storage
—Backup power supplies are recommended, area that can be controlled by the workers
especially for ventilation systems. conducting the removal. Filters removed
—Shower and bath water should be with from air handling units and rubbish removed
mixed hot and cold water faucets. Water from the area are to be bagged and handled
that has been used to clean personnel or as hazardous waste.
equipment should either be filtered or be
collected and discarded as asbestos waste. Constructing the Enclosure
Soap and shampoo should be provided to The enclosure should be constructed to
aid in removing dust from the workers’ provide an air-tight seal around ducts and
skin and hair. openings into existing ventilation systems
—See paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section and around penetrations for electrical con-
for appropriate respiratory protection and duits, telephone wires, water lines, drain
protective clothing. pipes, etc. Enclosures should be both airtight
—See paragraph (k) of this section for re- and watertight except for those openings de-
quired signs and labels. signed to provide entry and/or air flow con-
trol.
Preparing the Work Area
Size: An enclosure should be the minimum
Disabling HVAC Systems: The power to volume to encompass all of the working sur-
the heating, ventilation, and air condi- faces yet allow unencumbered movement by
tioning systems that service the restricted the worker(s), provide unrestricted air flow
area must be deactivated and locked off. All past the worker(s), and ensure walking sur-
ducts, grills, access ports, windows and vents faces can be kept free of tripping hazards.
must be sealed off with two layers of plastic Shape: The enclosure may be any shape
to prevent entrainment of contaminated air. that optimizes the flow of ventilation air
Operating HVAC Systems in the Restricted past the worker(s).
Area: If components of a HVAC system lo- Structural Integrity: The walls, ceilings
cated in the restricted area are connected to and floors must be supported in such a man-
a system that will service another zone dur- ner that portions of the enclosure will not
ing the project, the portion of the duct in the fall down during normal use.
restricted area must be sealed and pressur- Openings: It is not necessary that the
ized. Necessary precautions include caulking structure be airtight; openings may be de-
the duct joints, covering all cracks and open- signed to direct air flow. Such openings
ings with two layers of sheeting, and pres- should be located at a distance from active
surizing the duct throughout the duration of removal operations. They should be designed
the project by restricting the return air flow. to draw air into the enclosure under all an-
The power to the fan supplying the positive ticipated circumstances. In the event that
pressure should be locked ‘‘on’’ to prevent negative pressure is lost, they should be
pressure loss. fitted with either HEPA filters to trap dust
Sealing Elevators: If an elevator shaft is or automatic trap doors that prevent dust
located in the restricted area, it should be ei- from escaping the enclosure. Openings for
ther shut down or isolated by sealing with exits should be controlled by an airlock or a
two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting vestibule.
should provide enough slack to accommo- Barrier Supports: Frames should be con-
date the pressure changes in the shaft with- structed to support all unsupported spans of
out breaking the air-tight seal. sheeting.
Removing Mobile Objects: All movable ob- Sheeting: Walls, barriers, ceilings, and
jects should be cleaned and removed from floors should be lined with two layers of
the work area before an enclosure is con- plastic sheeting having a thickness of at
structed unless moving the objects creates a least 6 mil.
hazard. Mobile objects will be assumed to be Seams: Seams in the sheeting material
contaminated and should be either cleaned should be minimized to reduce the possibili-
with amended water and a HEPA vacuum ties of accidental rips and tears in the adhe-
and then removed from the area or wrapped sive or connections. All seams in the sheet-
and then disposed of as hazardous waste. ing should overlap, be staggered and not be
Cleaning and Sealing Surfaces: After located at corners or wall-to-floor joints.
cleaning with water and a HEPA vacuum, Areas Within an Enclosure: Each enclosure
surfaces of stationary objects should be cov- consists of a work area, a decontamination
ered with two layers of plastic sheeting. The area, and waste storage area. The work area
574
where the asbestos removal operations occur figuration, and shape of the enclosure as well
should be separated from both the waste as ambient and mechanical air pressure con-
storage area and the contamination control ditions around the enclosure.
area by physical curtains, doors, and/or air- Air Flow Patterns: The flow of air past
flow patterns that force any airborne con- each worker shall be enhanced by posi-
tamination back into the work area. tioning the intakes and exhaust ports to re-
See paragraph (j) of this section for remove contaminated air from the worker’s
quirements for hygiene facilities. breathing zone, by positioning HEPA vacu-
During egress from the work area, each um cleaners to draw air from the worker’s
worker should step into the equipment room, breathing zone, by forcing relatively
clean tools and equipment, and remove gross uncontaminated air past the worker toward
contamination from clothing by wet clean- an exhaust port, or by using a combination
ing and HEPA vacuuming. Before entering of methods to reduce the worker’s exposure.
the shower area, foot coverings, head cov- Air Handling Unit Exhaust: The exhaust
erings, hand coverings, and coveralls are re- plume from air handling units should be lo-
moved and placed in impervious bags for dis- cated away from adjacent personnel and in-
posal or cleaning. Airline connections from takes for HVAC systems.
airline respirators with HEPA disconnects Air Flow Volume: The air flow volume
and power cables from powered air-purifying (cubic meters per minute) exhausted (re-
respirators (PAPRs) will be disconnected moved) from the workplace must exceed the
just prior to entering the shower room. amount of makeup air supplied to the enclo-
sure. The rate of air exhausted from the en-
Establishing Negative Pressure Within the closure should be designed to maintain a
Enclosure negative pressure in the enclosure and air
Negative Pressure: Air is to be drawn into movement past each worker. The volume of
the enclosure under all anticipated condi- air flow removed from the enclosure should
tions and exhausted through a HEPA filter replace the volume of the container at every
for 24 hours a day during the entire duration 5 to 15 minutes. Air flow volume will need to
of the project. be relatively high for large enclosures, enclo-
Air Flow Tests: Air flow patterns will be sures with awkward shapes, enclosures with
checked before removal operations begin, at multiple openings, and operations employing
least once per operating shift and any time several workers in the enclosure.
there is a question regarding the integrity of Air Flow Velocity: At each opening, the air
the enclosure. The primary test for air flow flow velocity must visibly ‘‘drag’’ air into
is to trace air currents with smoke tubes or the enclosure. The velocity of air flow within
other visual methods. Flow checks are made the enclosure must be adequate to remove
at each opening and at each doorway to dem- airborne contamination from each worker’s
onstrate that air is being drawn into the en- breathing zone without disturbing the asbes-
closure and at each worker’s position to tos-containing material on surfaces.
show that air is being drawn away from the Airlocks: Airlocks are mechanisms on
breathing zone. doors and curtains that control the air flow
Monitoring Pressure Within the Enclosure: patterns in the doorways. If air flow occurs,
After the initial air flow patterns have been the patterns through doorways must be such
checked, the static pressure must be mon- that the air flows toward the inside of the
itored within the enclosure. Monitoring may enclosure. Sometimes vestibules, double
be made using manometers, pressure gauges, doors, or double curtains are used to prevent
or combinations of these devices. It is rec- air movement through the doorways. To use
ommended that they be attached to alarms a vestibule, a worker enters a chamber by
and strip chart recorders at points identified opening the door or curtain and then closing
by the design engineer. the entry before opening the exit door or
Corrective Actions: If the manometers or curtain.
pressure gauges demonstrate a reduction in Airlocks should be located between the
pressure differential below the required equipment room and shower room, between
level, work should cease and the reason for the shower room and the clean room, and be-
the change investigated and appropriate tween the waste storage area and the outside
changes made. The air flow patterns should of the enclosure. The air flow between adja-
be retested before work begins again. cent rooms must be checked using smoke
Pressure Differential: The design param- tubes or other visual tests to ensure the flow
eters for static pressure differentials be- patterns draw air toward the work area with-
tween the inside and outside of enclosures out producing eddies.
typically range from 0.02 to 0.10 inches of
Monitoring for Airborne Concentrations
water gauge, depending on conditions. All
zones inside the enclosure must have less In addition to the breathing zone samples
pressure than the ambient pressure outside taken as outlined in paragraph (f) of this sec-
of the enclosure (¥0.02 inches water gauge tion, samples of air should be taken to dem-
differential). Design specifications for the onstrate the integrity of the enclosure, the
differential vary according to the size, con- cleanliness of the clean room and shower
575
area, and the effectiveness of the HEPA fil- C. The potential for an asbestos-containing
ter. If the clean room is shown to be con- product to release breathable fibers depends
taminated, the room must be relocated to an largely on its degree of friability. Friable
uncontaminated area. means that the material can be crumbled
Samples taken near the exhaust of port- with hand pressure and is therefore likely to
able ventilation systems must be done with emit fibers. The fibrous fluffy sprayed-on
care. materials used for fireproofing, insulation,
or sound proofing are considered to be fri-
General Work Practices able, and they readily release airborne fibers
Preventing dust dispersion is the primary if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos
means of controlling the spread of asbestos floor tile or roofing felt are considered non-
within the enclosure. Whenever practical, friable if intact and generally do not emit
the point of removal should be isolated, en- airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding,
closed, covered, or shielded from the workers sawing and other aggressive operations. As-
in the area. Waste asbestos containing mate- bestos-cement pipe or sheet can emit air-
rials must be bagged during or immediately borne fibers if the materials are cut or
after removal; the material must remain sawed, or if they are broken.
saturated until the waste container is sealed. D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to air-
Waste material with sharp points or cor- borne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.1 fi-
ners must be placed in hard air-tight con- bers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc)
tainers rather than bags. averaged over the 8-hour workday, and 1
Whenever possible, large components fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc)
should be sealed in plastic sheeting and re- averaged over a 30 minute work period.
moved intact.
Bags or containers of waste will be moved II. Health Hazard Data
to the waste holding area, washed, and A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory
wrapped in a bag with the appropriate labels. disease and various types of cancers if the fi-
Cleaning the Work Area bers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers
from contaminated clothing or skin can also
Surfaces within the work area should be result in these diseases. The symptoms of
kept free of visible dust and debris to the ex- these diseases generally do not appear for 20
tent feasible. Whenever visible dust appears or more years after initial exposure.
on surfaces, the surfaces within the enclo- B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to
sure must be cleaned by wiping with a wet cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer
sponge, brush, or cloth and then vacuumed of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a
with a HEPA vacuum. rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of
All surfaces within the enclosure should be the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of meso-
cleaned before the exhaust ventilation sys- thelioma include shortness of breath, pain in
tem is deactivated and the enclosure is dis- the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal
assembled. An approved encapsulant may be pain.
sprayed onto areas after the visible dust has
been removed. III. Respirators and Protective Clothing
APPENDIX G TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] A. Respirators: You are required to wear a
respirator when performing tasks that result
APPENDIX H TO § 1926.1101—SUBSTANCE TECH- in asbestos exposure that exceeds the per-
NICAL INFORMATION FOR ASBESTOS. NON- missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc and
MANDATORY when performing certain designated oper-
ations. Air-purifying respirators equipped
I. Substance Identification with a high-efficiency particulate air
A. Substance: ‘‘Asbestos’’ is the name of a (HEPA) filter can be used where airborne as-
class of magnesium-silicate minerals that bestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 1.0
occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are in- f/cc; otherwise, more protective respirators
cluded in this group are chrysotile, crocid- such as air-supplied, positive-pressure, full
olite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, facepiece respirators must be used. Dispos-
tremolite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos. able respirators or dust masks are not per-
B. Asbestos is and was used in the manu- mitted to be used for asbestos work. For ef-
facture of heat-resistant clothing, auto- fective protection, respirators must fit your
motive brake and clutch linings, and a vari- face and head snugly. Your employer is re-
ety of building materials including floor quired to conduct a fit test when you are
tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-ce- first assigned a respirator and every 6
ment pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant months thereafter. Respirators should not be
drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and loosened or removed in work situations
boiler insulation materials and in sprayed-on where their use is required.
materials located on beams, in crawlspaces, B. Protective Clothing: You are required to
and between walls. wear protective clothing in work areas where
576
asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the per- aminations. These exposure records must be
missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical
records must be kept for the period of your
IV. Disposal Procedures and Clean-up employment plus thirty (30) years.
A. Wastes that are generated by processes D. Your employer is required to release
where asbestos is present include: your exposure and medical records to your
1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. physician or designated representative upon
2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trim- your written request.
mings, or reject materials.
3. Housekeeping waste from wet-sweeping APPENDIX I TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL SURVEIL-
or HEPA-vacuuming. LANCE GUIDELINES FOR ASBESTOS, NON-
4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating mate- MANDATORY
rial that is removed from buildings.
5. Asbestos-containing building products I. Route of Entry
removed during building renovation or dem- Inhalation, ingestion.
olition.
6. Contaminated disposable protective II. Toxicology
clothing.
B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened Clinical evidence of the adverse effects as-
under exhaust hoods and packed into air- sociated with exposure to asbestos is present
tight containers for disposal. Empty ship- in the form of several well-conducted epide-
ping drums are difficult to clean and should miological studies of occupationally exposed
be sealed. workers, family contacts of workers, and
C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters persons living near asbestos mines. These
should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed studies have shown a definite association be-
with a fine water mist and placed into a la- tween exposure to asbestos and an increased
beled waste container. incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peri-
D. Process waste and housekeeping waste toneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal can-
should be wetted with water or a mixture of cer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling
water and surfactant prior to packaging in fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by
disposable containers. exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos
E. Asbestos-containing material that is re- has also been associated with an increased
moved from buildings must be disposed of in incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal,
leak-tight 6-mil plastic bags, plastic-lined pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As
cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal with other known chronic occupational dis-
containers. These wastes, which are removed eases, disease associated with asbestos gen-
while wet, should be sealed in containers be- erally appears about 20 years following the
fore they dry out to minimize the release of first occurrence of exposure: There are no
asbestos fibers during handling. known acute effects associated with expo-
sure to asbestos.
V. Access to Information Epidemiological studies indicate that the
A. Each year, your employer is required to risk of lung cancer among exposed workers
inform you of the information contained in who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased
this standard and appendices for asbestos. In over the risk of lung cancer among non-ex-
addition, your employer must instruct you posed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These
in the proper work practices for handling as- studies suggest that cessation of smoking
bestos-containing materials, and the correct will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a per-
use of protective equipment. son exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it
B. Your employer is required to determine to the same level of risk as that existing for
whether you are being exposed to asbestos. an exposed worker who has never smoked.
Your employer must treat exposure to ther- III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure-Related
mal system insulation and sprayed-on and Disease
troweled-on surfacing material as asbestos
exposure, unless results of laboratory anal- The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or
ysis show that the material does not contain gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure
asbestos. You or your representative has the to asbestos are not unique, except that a
right to observe employee measurements and chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung
to record the results obtained. Your em- cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural
ployer is required to inform you of your ex- calcification, or pleural fibrosis. Symptoms
posure, and, if you are exposed above the per- characteristic of mesothelioma include
missible exposure limit, he or she is required shortness of breath, pain in the walls of the
to inform you of the actions that are being chest, or abdominal pain. Mesothelioma has
taken to reduce your exposure to within the a much longer latency period compared with
permissible limit. lung cancer (40 years versus 15–20 years), and
C. Your employer is required to keep mesothelioma is therefore more likely to be
records of your exposures and medical ex- found among workers who were first exposed
577
to asbestos at an early age. Mesothelioma is (iii) A physical examination including a
always fatal. chest roentgenogram and pulmonary func-
Asbestosis is pulmonary tibrosis caused by tion test that includes measurement of the
the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the employee’s forced vital capacity (FVC) and
lungs. Symptoms include shortness of forced expiratory volume at one second
breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings (FEV1).
of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, short- (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the
ness of breath occurs even at rest. The diag- examining physician deems by sound med-
nosis of asbestosis is based on a history of ical practice to be necessary.
exposure to asbestos, the presence of charac-
The employer is required to make the pre-
teristics radiologic changes, end-inspiratory
crackles (rales), and other clinical features scribed tests available at least annually to
of fibrosing lung disease. Pleural plaques and those employees covered; more often than
thickening are observed on X-rays taken specified if recommended by the examining
during the early stages of the disease. Asbes- physician; and upon termination of employ-
tosis is often a progressive disease even in ment.
the absence of continued exposure, although The employer is required to provide the
this appears to be a highly individualized physician with the following information: A
characteristic. In severe cases, death may be copy of this standard and appendices; a de-
caused by respiratory or cardiac failure. scription of the employee’s duties as they re-
late to asbestos exposure; the employee’s
IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations representative level of exposure to asbestos;
As noted above, exposure to asbestos has a description of any personal protective and
been linked to an increased risk of lung can- respiratory equipment used; and information
cer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, from previous medical examinations of the
and asbestosis among occupationally ex- affected employee that is not otherwise
posed workers. Adequate screening tests to available to the physician. Making this in-
determine an employee’s potential for devel- formation available to the physician will aid
oping serious chronic diseases, such as a can- in the evaluation of the employee’s health in
cer, from exposure to asbestos do not pres- relation to assigned duties and fitness to
ently exist. However, some tests, particu- wear personal protective equipment, if re-
larly chest X-rays and pulmonary function quired.
tests, may indicate that an employee has The employer is required to obtain a writ-
been overexposed to asbestos increasing his ten opinion from the examining physician
or her risk of developing exposure related containing the results of the medical exam-
chronic diseases. It is important for the phy- ination; the physician’s opinion as to wheth-
sician to become familiar with the operating
er the employee has any detected medical
conditions in which occupational exposure to
conditions that would place the employee at
asbestos is likely to occur. This is particu-
an increased risk of exposure-related disease;
larly important in evaluating medical and
work histories and in conducting physical any recommended limitations on the em-
examinations. When an active employee has ployee or on the use of personal protective
been identified as having been overexposed equipment; and a statement that the em-
to asbestos measures taken by the employer ployee has been informed by the physician of
to eliminate or mitigate further exposure the results of the medical examination and
should also lower the risk of serious long- of any medical conditions related to asbestos
term consequences. exposure that require further explanation or
The employer is required to institute a treatment. This written opinion must not re-
medical surveillance program for all employ- veal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated
ees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the
or above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 opinion must be provided to the affected em-
fiber per cubic centimeter of air). All exami- ployee.
nations and procedures must be performed
by or under the supervision of a licensed APPENDIX J TO § 1926.1101—SMOKING CES-
physician, at a reasonable time and place, SATION PROGRAM INFORMATION FOR ASBES-
and at no cost to the employee. TOS—NON-MANDATORY
Although broad latitude is given to the
physician in prescribing specific tests to be The following organizations provide smok-
included in the medical surveillance pro- ing cessation information.
gram, OSHA requires inclusion of the fol- 1. The National Cancer Institute operates a
lowing elements in the routine examination: toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS)
(i) Medical and work histories with special with trained personnel to help you. Call 1–
emphasis directed to symptoms of the res- 800–4–CANCER* to reach the CIS office serv-
piratory system, cardiovascular system, and ing your area, or write: Office of Cancer
digestive tract. Communications, National Cancer Institute,
(ii) Completion of the respiratory disease National Institutes of Health, Building 31
questionnaire contained in Appendix D. Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892.
578
2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree ID–191
Road, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30026, (404) Matrix: Bulk
320–3333 Collection Procedure:
The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each
voluntary organization composed of 58 divi- type of material and place into separate
sions and 3,100 local units. Through ‘‘The 20 mL scintillation vials.
Great American Smokeout’’ in November, Analytical Procedure:
the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and nu- A portion of each separate phase is ana-
merous educational materials, ACS helps lyzed by gross examination, phase-polar
people learn about the health hazards of examination, and central stop dispersion
smoking and become successful ex-smokers. microscopy.
3. American Heart Association, 7320 Green- Commercial manufacturers and products
ville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750– mentioned in this method are for descriptive
5300 use only and do not constitute endorsements
by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from
The American Heart Association (AHA) is other sources may be substituted.
a voluntary organization with 130,000 mem-
bers (physicians, scientists, and laypersons) 1. Introduction
in 55 state and regional groups. AHA pro-
duces a variety of publications and audio- This method describes the collection and
visual materials about the effects of smok- analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light
ing on the heart. AHA also has developed a microscopy techniques including phase-
guidebook for incorporating a weight-control polar illumination and central-stop disper-
component into smoking cessation pro- sion microscopy. Some terms unique to as-
grams. bestos analysis are defined below:
Amphibole: A family of minerals whose
4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broad-
crystals are formed by long, thin units which
way, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245–
have two thin ribbons of double chain sili-
8000
cate with a brucite ribbon in between. The
A voluntary organization of 7,500 members shape of each unit is similar to an ‘‘I beam’’.
(physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the Minerals important in asbestos analysis in-
American Lung Association (ALA) conducts clude cummingtonite-grunerite, crocidolite,
numerous public information programs tremolite-actinolite and anthophyllite.
about the health effects of smoking. ALA Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi-
has 59 state and 85 local units. The organiza- brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile,
tion actively supports legislation and infor- cummingtonite-grunerite asbestos (amosite),
mation campaigns for non-smokers’ rights anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos,
and provides help for smokers who want to crocidolite, actinolite asbestos and any of
quit, for example, through ‘‘Freedom From these minerals which have been chemically
Smoking,’’ a self-help smoking cessation treated or altered. The precise chemical for-
program. mulation of each species varies with the lo-
5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. De- cation from which it was mined. Nominal
partment of Health and Human Services, compositions are listed:
5600 Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room Chrysotile...............................Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4
110, Rockville, Maryland 20857 Crocidolite (Riebeckite asbestos)..............Na2
The Office on Smoking and Health (OSH) is Fe32+Fe23+Si8 O22(OH)2
the Department of Health and Human Serv- Cummingtonite-Grunerite asbestos
ices’ lead agency in smoking control. OSH (Amosite) .................(Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2
has sponsored distribution of publications on Tremolite-Actinolite asbestos .....Ca2(Mg,Fe)5
smoking-related topics, such as free flyers on Si8 O22(OH)2
relapse after initial quitting, helping a Anthophyllite asbestos ................(Mg,Fe)7 Si8
friend or family member quit smoking, the O22(OH)2
health hazards of smoking, and the effects of Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos meeting
parental smoking on teenagers. the criteria for a fiber. (See section 3.5. of
*In Hawaii, on Oahu call 524–1234 (call col- this Appendix)
lect from neighboring islands), Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a
Spanish-speaking staff members are avail- fiber to its diameter usually defined as
able during daytime hours to callers from ‘‘length : width’’, e.g. 3:1.
the following areas: California, Florida, Brucite: A sheet mineral with the composi-
Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 201), tion Mg(OH)2.
New York, and Texas. Consult your local Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope):
telephone directory for listings of local chap- This is a dark field microscope technique
ters. that images particles using only light re-
fracted by the particle, excluding light that
APPENDIX K TO § 1926.1101—POLARIZED LIGHT
travels through the particle unrefracted.
MICROSCOPY OF ASBESTOS (NON-MANDATORY)
This is usually accomplished with a McCrone
Method number: objective or other arrangement which places
579
a circular stop with apparent aperture equal tos mines. Although known to be injurious
to the objective aperture in the back focal for centuries, the first modern references to
plane of the microscope. its toxicity were by the British Labor
Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust
formed by the comminution of minerals, es- from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases
pecially those characterized by relatively were described in the literature after the
parallel sides and moderate aspect ratio. turn of the century. Cancer was first sus-
Differential Counting: The term applied to pected in the mid 1930’s and a causal link to
the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of
bers from a phase contrast asbestos count
the public concern for worker and public
because they are not asbestos.
safety with the use of this material, several
Fiber: A particle longer than or equal to 5
µm with a length to width ratio greater than different types of analysis were applied to
or equal to 3:1. This may include cleavage the determination of asbestos content. Light
fragments. (see section 3.5 of this appendix). microscopy requires a great deal of experi-
Phase Contrast: Contrast obtained in the ence and craft. Attempts were made to apply
microscope by causing light scattered by less subjective methods to the analysis. X-
small particles to destructively interfere ray diffraction was partially successful in
with unscattered light, thereby enhancing determining the mineral types but was un-
the visibility of very small particles and parable to separate out the fibrous portions
ticles with very low intrinsic contrast. from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the min-
Phase Contrast Microscope: A microscope imum detection limit for asbestos analysis
configured with a phase mask pair to create by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Dif-
phase contrast. The technique which uses ferential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no
this is called Phase Contrast Microscopy more successful. These provide useful cor-
(PCM). roborating information when the presence of
Phase-Polar Analysis: This is the use of po- asbestos has been shown by microscopy;
larized light in a phase contrast microscope. however, neither can determine the dif-
It is used to see the same size fibers that are ference between fibrous and non-fibrous min-
visible in air filter analysis. Although fibers
erals when both habits are present. The same
finer than 1 µm are visible, analysis of these
is true of Infrared Absorption (IR).
is inferred from analysis of larger bundles
that are usually present. When electron microscopy was applied to
Phase-Polar Microscope: The phase-polar asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were
microscope is a phase contrast microscope discovered present too small to be visible in
which has an analyzer, a polarizer, a first any light microscope. There are two dif-
order red plate and a rotating phase con- ferent types of electron microscope used for
denser all in place so that the polarized light asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Micro-
image is enhanced by phase contrast. scope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Mi-
Sealing Encapsulant: This is a product croscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Micros-
which can be applied, preferably by spraying, copy is useful in identifying minerals. The
onto an asbestos surface which will seal the SEM can provide two of the three pieces of
surface so that fibers cannot be released. information required to identify fibers by
Serpentine: A mineral family consisting of electron microscopy: morphology and chem-
minerals with the general composition istry. The third is structure as determined
Mg3(Si2 O5(OH)4 having the magnesium in by Selected Area Electron Diffraction—
brucite layer over a silicate layer. Minerals SAED which is performed in the TEM. Al-
important in asbestos analysis included in
though the resolution of the SEM is suffi-
this family are chrysotile, lizardite,
cient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy
antigorite.
of chemical analysis that can be performed
1.1. History on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fi-
bers of less than 0.2 µm diameter. The TEM
Light microscopy has been used for well
is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small
over 100 years for the determination of min-
to be resolved by light microscopy and
eral species. This analysis is carried out
using specialized polarizing microscopes as should be used in conjunction with this
well as bright field microscopes. The identi- method when necessary. The TEM can pro-
fication of minerals is an on-going process vide all three pieces of information required
with many new minerals described each for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker
year. The first recorded use of asbestos was than 1 µm can adequately be defined in the
in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the mate- light microscope. The light microscope re-
rial was used in the mud wattle for the wood- mains as the best instrument for the deter-
en huts the people lived in as well as mination of mineral type. This is because
strengthening for pottery. Adverse health as- the minerals under investigation were first
pects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000 described analytically with the light micro-
years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote scope. It is inexpensive and gives positive
about the poor health of slaves in the asbes- identification for most samples analyzed.
580
Further, when optical techniques are inad- (c) The analysis is quick, requires little
equate, there is ample indication that alter- preparation time, and can be performed on-
native techniques should be used for com- site if a suitably equipped microscope is
plete identification of the sample. available.
The disadvantages are:
1.2. Principle (a) Even using phase-polar illumination,
Minerals consist of atoms that may be ar- not all the fibers present may be seen. This
ranged in random order or in a regular ar- is a problem for very low asbestos concentra-
rangement. Amorphous materials have tions where agglomerations or large bundles
atoms in random order while crystalline ma- of fibers may not be present to allow identi-
terials have long range order. Many mate- fication by inference.
rials are transparent to light, at least for (b) The method requires a great degree of
small particles or for thin sections. The sophistication on the part of the
properties of these materials can be inves- microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as
tigated by the effect that the material has his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a
on light passing through it. The six asbestos microscopist’s accuracy is enhanced by expe-
minerals are all crystalline with particular rience. The mineralogical training of the an-
alyst is very important. It is the basis on
properties that have been identified and cat-
which subjective decisions are made.
aloged. These six minerals are anisotropic.
(c) The method uses only a tiny amount of
They have a regular array of atoms, but the
material for analysis. This may lead to sam-
arrangement is not the same in all direc-
pling bias and false results (high or low).
tions. Each major direction of the crystal
This is especially true if the sample is se-
presents a different regularity. Light pho-
verely inhomogeneous.
tons travelling in each of these main direc-
(d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and
tions will encounter different electrical not distinguishable as fibers so identifica-
neighborhoods, affecting the path and time tion cannot be made.
of travel. The techniques outlined in this
method use the fact that light traveling 1.4. Method Performance
through fibers or crystals in different direc-
tions will behave differently, but predict- 1.4.1. This method can be used for deter-
ably. The behavior of the light as it travels mination of asbestos content from 0 to 100%
through a crystal can be measured and com- asbestos. The detection limit has not been
pared with known or determined values to adequately determined, although for selected
identify the mineral species. Usually, Polar- samples, the limit is very low, depending on
the number of particles examined. For most-
ized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed
ly homogeneous, finely divided samples, with
with strain-free objectives on a bright-field
no difficult fibrous interferences, the detec-
microscope platform. This would limit the
tion limit is below 1%. For inhomogeneous
resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 µm.
samples (most samples), the detection limit
Because OSHA requires the counting and
remains undefined. NIST has conducted pro-
identification of fibers visible in phase con-
ficiency testing of laboratories on a national
trast, the phase contrast platform is used to
scale. Although each round is reported sta-
visualize the fibers with the polarizing ele-
tistically with an average, control limits,
ments added into the light path. Polarized
etc., the results indicate a difficulty in es-
light methods cannot identify fibers finer tablishing precision especially in the low
than about 1 µm in diameter even though concentration range. It is suspected that
they are visible. The finest fibers are usually there is significant bias in the low range es-
identified by inference from the presence of pecially near 1%. EPA tried to remedy this
larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers by requiring a mandatory point counting
are present, but not identifiable by light mi- scheme for samples less than 10%. The point
croscopy, use either SEM or TEM to deter- counting procedure is tedious, and may in-
mine the fiber identity. troduce significant biases of its own. It has
1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages not been incorporated into this method.
1.4.2. The precision and accuracy of the
The advantages of light microcopy are: quantitation tests performed in this method
(a) Basic identification of the materials are unknown. Concentrations are easier to
was first performed by light microscopy and determine in commercial products where as-
gross analysis. This provides a large base of bestos was deliberately added because the
published information against which to amount is usually more than a few percent.
check analysis and analytical technique. An analyst’s results can be ‘‘calibrated’’
(b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The against the known amounts added by the
minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fi- manufacturer. For geological samples, the
brous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at degree of homogeneity affects the precision.
the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of 1.4.3. The performance of the method is an-
analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR anal- alyst dependent. The analyst must choose
ysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the carefully and not necessarily randomly the
material is not known to be fibrous. portions for analysis to assure that detection
581
of asbestos occurs when it is present. For States is composed of minerals which may
this reason, the analyst must have adequate contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual
training in sample preparation, and experi- formation of great amounts of asbestos is
ence in the location and identification of as- relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are loca-
bestos in samples. This is usually accom- tions in which environmental exposure can
plished through substantial on-the-job train- be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of
ing as well as formal education in min- California.
eralogy and microscopy. There are thousands of uses for asbestos in
industry and the home. Asbestos abatement
1.5. Interferences
workers are the most current segment of the
Any material which is long, thin, and population to have occupational exposure to
small enough to be viewed under the micro- great amounts of asbestos. If the material is
scope can be considered an interference for undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure
asbestos. There are literally hundreds of occurs when the asbestos-containing mate-
interferences in workplaces. The techniques rial is abraded or otherwise disturbed during
described in this method are normally suffi- maintenance operations or some other activ-
cient to eliminate the interferences. An ana- ity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in
lyst’s success in eliminating the inter- place in the United States is chrysotile.
ferences depends on proper training. Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly
Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral all the difference. Tremolite and
families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. anthophyllite make up a very small percent-
In the serpentine family, the only common age. Tremolite is found in extremely small
fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally, amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Ac-
the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril tinolite exposure is probably greatest from
habit with morphology similar to the environmental sources, but has been identi-
amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist fied in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on
of a score of different minerals of which only insulating materials which may have been
five are regulated by federal standard: certified as asbestos-free.
amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos,
tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos. 1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties
These are the only amphibole minerals that
have been commercially exploited for their The nominal chemical compositions for
fibrous properties; however, the rest can and the asbestos minerals were given in Section
do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit. 1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the
In addition to the related mineral inter- same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a
ferences, other minerals common in building high tensile strength along the fiber axis.
material may present a problem for some They are chemically inert, non-combustible,
microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite, and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile,
quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollas- they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid
tonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fi- (HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl.
brous materials commonly present in work- Asbestos has high electrical resistance and
places are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic good sound absorbing characteristics. It can
wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar, be woven into cables, fabrics or other tex-
nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon tiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats.
fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal
fibers, etc. 1.8. Toxicology (This Section is for Informa-
Matrix embedding material can sometimes tion Only and Should Not Be Taken as
be a negative interference. The analyst may OSHA Policy)
not be able to easily extract the fibers from
Possible physiologic results of respiratory
the matrix in order to use the method.
exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the
Where possible, remove the matrix before
pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis,
the analysis, taking careful note of the loss
asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory
of weight. Some common matrix materials
are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, ce- cancer. The possible consequences of asbes-
ment, and epoxy. A further negative inter- tos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Cri-
ference is that the asbestos fibers themselves teria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos
may be either too small to be seen in Phase Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR
contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001.
fibrous quality, having the appearance of
2. Sampling Procedure
plant fibers. The analyst’s ability to deal
with these materials increases with experi- 2.1. Equipment for sampling
ence.
(a) Tube or cork borer sampling device
1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure (b) Knife
Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment. (c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial
More than 40% of the land area of the United (d) Sealing encapsulant
582
2.2. Safety Precautions 3. Analysis
Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care The analysis of asbestos samples can be di-
when sampling. While in an asbestos-con- vided into two major parts: sample prepara-
taining atmosphere, a properly selected and tion and microscopy. Because of the different
fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take asbestos uses that may be encountered by
samples in a manner to cause the least the analyst, each sample may need different
amount of dust. Follow these general guide- preparation steps. The choices are outlined
lines: below. There are several different tests that
(a) Do not make unnecessary dust. are performed to identify the asbestos spe-
(b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g). cies and determine the percentage. They will
be explained below.
(c) Tightly close the sample container.
(d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where 3.1. Safety
the sample was taken, if necessary.
(a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle
2.3. Sampling Procedure the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods.
If samples are received in bags, envelopes or
Samples of any suspect material should be other inappropriate container, open them
taken from an inconspicuous place. Where only in a hood having a face velocity at or
the material is to remain, seal the sampling greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small
wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the amount to a scintillation vial and only han-
potential for exposure from the sample site. dle the smaller amount.
Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the
material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL open lab area.
scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be (c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic.
sure to collect samples from all layers and Take care not to get this material on the
phases of material. If possible, make sepa- skin. Wash immediately with soap and water
rate samples of each different phase of the if this happens.
material. This will aid in determining the (d) Samples that have been heated in the
actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES, muffle furnace or the drying oven may be
PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO hot. Handle them with tongs until they are
COLLECT SAMPLES. The use of plastic bags cool enough to handle.
presents a contamination hazard to labora- (e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF
tory personnel and to other samples. When (tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only
these containers are opened, a bellows effect be handled in an appropriate fume hood and
blows fibers out of the container onto every- according to instructions given in the Mate-
thing, including the person opening the con- rial Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
tainer.
3.2. Equipment
If a cork-borer type sampler is available,
push the tube through the material all the (a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x
way, so that all layers of material are sam- and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces,
pled. Some samplers are intended to be dis- G–22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple
posable. These should be capped and sent to disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red
the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotat-
borer is used, empty the contents into a scin- ing position condenser with oversize phase
tillation vial and send to the laboratory. rings, central stop dispersion objective,
Vigorously and completely clean the cork Kohler illumination and a rotating mechan-
borer between samples. ical stage.
(b) Stereo microscope with reflected light
2.4 Shipment illumination, transmitted light illumina-
tion, polarizer, analyzer and first order red
Samples packed in glass vials must not or gypsum plate, and rotating stage.
touch or they might break in shipment. (c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo
(a) Seal the samples with a sample seal microscope
over the end to guard against tampering and (d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 °C
to identify the sample. (e) Drying oven capable of 50–150 °C
(b) Package the bulk samples in separate (f) Aluminum specimen pans
packages from the air samples. They may (g) Tongs for handling samples in the fur-
cross-contaminate each other and will inval- nace
idate the results of the air samples. (h) High dispersion index of refraction oils
(c) Include identifying paperwork with the (Special for dispersion staining.)
samples, but not in contact with the sus- n = 1.550
pected asbestos. n = 1.585
(d) To maintain sample accountability, n = 1.590
ship the samples by certified mail, overnight n = 1.605
express, or hand carry them to the labora- n = 1.620
tory. n = 1.670
583
n = 1.680 lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a
n = 1.690 measurable effect on the optical properties
(i) A set of index of refraction oils from of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of
about n=1.350 to n=2.000 in n=0.005 incre- what to expect, a sample of standard asbes-
ments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) tos should be heated to the same tempera-
(j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends ture for the same length of time so that it
1×3 inches 1mm (thick, precleaned. can be examined for the proper interpreta-
(k) Cover Slips 22×22 mm, #11⁄2 tion.
(l) Paper clips or dissection needles
(m) Hand grinder (c) Samples With Organic Interference—THF
(n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common
(o) 0.1 molar HCl material treated with this solvent, although,
(p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific substances containing tar will sometimes
Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid, yield to this treatment. Select a portion of
Tetrasodium ..........................................0.7 g/l the material and then grind it up if possible.
Sodium Potassium Tartrate .........8.0 mg/liter Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube.
Hydrochloric Acid ..........................99.2 g/liter Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic
Sodium Tartrate.............................0.14 g/liter matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Re-
(q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) member, THF is highly flammable. Filter the
(r) Hotplate capable of 60 °C remaining material through a tared silver
(s) Balance membrane, dry and weigh to determine how
(t) Hacksaw blade much is left after the solvent extraction.
(u) Ruby mortar and pestle Further process the sample to remove car-
bonate or mount directly.
3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation (d) Samples With Carbonate Interference
Sample preparation begins with pre-prepa- Carbonate material is often found on fibers
ration which may include chemical reduc- and sometimes must be removed in order to
tion of the matrix, heating the sample to perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a
dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The portion of the material and place it in a test
end result is a sample which has been re- tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or
duced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to decalcifying solution in the tube to react all
fit under the cover slip. Analyze different the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation;
phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little
the tile mastic should be analyzed separately more solution. If no more gas forms, the re-
as the mastic may contain asbestos while action is complete. Filter the material out
the tile may not. through a tared silver membrane, dry and
(a) Wet Samples weigh to determine the weight lost.
Samples with a high water content will not
3.4. Sample Preparation
give the proper dispersion colors and must be
dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the Samples must be prepared so that accurate
lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle determination can be made of the asbestos
in the drying oven and heat at 100 °C to dry- type and amount present. The following
ness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a
not submitted to the lab in glass must be re- low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow):
moved and placed in glass vials or aluminum (1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard,
weighing pans before placing them in the or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip,
drying oven. the grain size must be reduced. Place a small
(b) Samples With Organic Interference—Muf- amount between two slides and grind the
fle Furnace material between them or grind a small
These may include samples with tar as a amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The
matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other or- choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby,
ganic that can be reduced by heating. Re- or diamond mortar depends on the hardness
move the sample from the vial and weigh in of the material. Impact damage can alter the
a balance to determine the weight of the sub- asbestos mineral if too much mechanical
mitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely
furnace at 500 °C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvi- destroy the observable crystallinity of asbes-
ous organic material has been removed. Re- tos and should not be used). For some sam-
trieve, cool and weigh again to determine ples, a portion of material can be shaved off
the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grind-
to determine the asbestos content of the sub- er or hack saw blade.
mitted sample, because the analyst will be The preparation tools should either be dis-
looking at a reduced sample. posable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous
NOTE: Heating above 600 °C will cause the scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the
sample to undergo a structural change washing. Rinse the implements with copious
which, given sufficient time, will convert the amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free
chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at environment.
584
(2) If the sample is powder or has been re- This is useful to identify asbestos in severely
duced as in (1) above, it is ready to mount. inhomogeneous samples.
Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tis- When it is determined that amphiboles
sue and write the identification on the paint- may be present, repeat the above process
ed or frosted end. Place two drops of index of using the appropriate high-dispersion oils
refraction medium n=1.550 on the slide. (The until an identification is made or all six as-
medium n=1.550 is chosen because it is the bestos minerals have been ruled out. Note
matching index for chrysotile. Dip the end of that percent determination must be done in
a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle into the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles
the droplet of refraction medium on the slide tend to disappear in their matching medi-
to moisten it. Then dip the probe into the ums.
powder sample. Transfer what sticks on the
probe to the slide. The material on the end of 3.5. Analytical procedure
the probe should have a diameter of about 3 NOTE: This method presumes some knowl-
mm for a good mount. If the material is very edge of mineralogy and optical petrography.
fine, less sample may be appropriate. For The analysis consists of three parts: The
non-powder samples such as fiber mats, for- determination of whether there is asbestos
ceps should be used to transfer a small present, what type is present and the deter-
amount of material to the slide. Stir the ma- mination of how much is present. The gen-
terial in the medium on the slide, spreading eral flow of the analysis is:
it out and making the preparation as uni- (1) Gross examination.
form as possible. Place a cover-slip on the (2) Examination under polarized light on
preparation by gently lowering onto the the stereo microscope.
slide and allowing it to fall ‘‘trapdoor’’ fash- (3) Examination by phase-polar illumina-
ion on the preparation to push out any bub- tion on the compound phase microscope.
bles. Press gently on the cover slip to even (4) Determination of species by dispersion
out the distribution of particulate on the stain. Examination by Becke line analysis
slide. If there is insufficient mounting oil on may also be used; however, this is usually
the slide, one or two drops may be placed more cumbersome for asbestos determina-
near the edge of the coverslip on the slide. tion.
Capillary action will draw the necessary (5) Difficult samples may need to be ana-
amount of liquid into the preparation. Re- lyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from
move excess oil with the point of a labora- those techniques combined with light mi-
tory wiper. croscopy for a definitive identification.
Treat at least two different areas of each Identification of a particle as asbestos re-
phase in this fashion. Choose representative quires that it be asbestiform. Description of
areas of the sample. It may be useful to se- particles should follow the suggestion of
lect particular areas or fibers for analysis. Campbell. (Figure 1)
585
For the purpose of regulation, the mineral ily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very
must be one of the six minerals covered and long compared with their widths. The fibers
must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large have a very high tensile strength as dem-
specimen samples of asbestos generally have onstrated by bending without breaking. As-
the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are eas- bestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily
586
ER10AU94.026</GPH>
parted, show longitudinal fine structure and venience. Examine with the polarizing stereo
may be tufted at the ends showing ‘‘bundle microscope. Estimate the percentage of as-
of sticks’’ morphology. In the microscope bestos based on the amount of birefringent
some of these properties may not be observ- fiber present.
able. Amphiboles do not always show stri- (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar
ations along their length even when they are microscopes at magnifications of 160 and
asbestos. Neither will they always show tuft- 400×. Note the morphology of the fibers.
ing. They generally do not show a curved na- Long, thin, very straight fibers with little
ture except for very long fibers. Asbestos and curvature are indicative of fibers from the
asbestiform minerals are usually character- amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are
ized in groups by extremely high aspect ra- usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate
tios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar
analysis is useful for characterizing popu- microscope under conditions of crossed
lations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller
individual fibers of intermediate to short as- than 1.0 µm in thickness must be identified
pect ratio. Observation of many fibers is by inference to the presence of larger, identi-
often necessary to determine whether a sam- fiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fi-
ple consists of ‘‘cleavage fragments’’ or of as- bers are visible, electron microscopy should
bestos fibers. be performed. At this point, only a tentative
Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos identification can be made. Full identifica-
minerals are easily distinguishable from true tion must be made with dispersion micros-
asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage copy. Details of the tests are included in the
fragments usually have larger diameters appendices.
than 1 µm. Internal structure of particles (4) Once fibers have been determined to be
larger than this usually shows them to have present, they must be identified. Adjust the
no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, microscope for dispersion mode and observe
cleavage fragments of the monoclinic the fibers. The microscope has a rotating
amphiboles show inclined extinction under stage, one polarizing element, and a system
crossed polars with no compensator. Asbes- for generating dark-field dispersion micros-
tos fibers usually show extinction at zero de- copy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align
grees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. a fiber with its length parallel to the polar-
Morphologically, the larger cleavage frag- izer and note the color of the Becke lines.
ments are obvious by their blunt or stepped Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length
ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they perpendicular to the polarizer and note the
tend to be acicular rather than filiform. color. Repeat this process for every fiber or
Where the particles are less than 1 µm in fiber bundle examined. The colors must be
diameter and have an aspect ratio greater consistent with the colors generated by
than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that standard asbestos reference materials for a
the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if positive identification. In n=1.550,
there is any question whether the fibers are amphiboles will generally show a yellow to
cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber
Care must be taken when analyzing by indices of refraction are higher than the liq-
electron microscopy because the inter- uid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the col-
ferences are different from those in light mi- ors are yellow, prepare further slides as
croscopy and may structurally be very simi- above in the suggested matching liquids list-
lar to asbestos. The classic interference is ed below:
between anthophyllite and biopyribole or in-
termediate fiber. Use the same morpho- Type of asbestos Index of refraction
logical clues for electron microscopy as are
Chrysotile ............................... n=1.550.
used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril split-
Amosite .................................. n=1.670 or 1.680.
ting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, Crocidolite .............................. n=1.690.
curvature, etc. Anthophyllite .......................... n=1.605 and 1.620.
(1) Gross examination: Tremolite ................................ n=1.605 and 1.620.
Examine the sample, preferably in the Actinolite ................................ n=1.620.
glass vial. Determine the presence of any ob-
vious fibrous component. Estimate a per- Where more than one liquid is suggested,
centage based on previous experience and the first is preferred; however, in some cases
current observation. Determine whether any this liquid will not give good dispersion
pre-preparation is necessary. Determine the color. Take care to avoid interferences in the
number of phases present. This step may be other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n=1.620 will
carried out or augmented by observation at give the same colors as tremolite. In n=1.605
6 to 40× under a stereo microscope. wollastonite will appear yellow in all direc-
(2) After performing any necessary pre- tions. Wollastonite may be determined under
preparation, prepare slides of each phase as crossed polars as it will change from blue to
described above. Two preparations of the yellow as it is rotated along its fiber axis by
same phase in the same index medium can be tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos minerals
made side-by-side on the same glass for con- will not change in this way.
587
Determination of the angle of extinction Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines
may, when present, aid in the determination that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbes-
of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbestos.
tos fibers usually have 0° extinction or am- The reported result is:
biguous extinction, while cleavage fragments
have more definite extinction. R = (Microvisual result in percent) × (Frac-
Continue analysis until both preparations tion remaining after step 2) × (Fraction re-
have been examined and all present species maining of original sample after step 1)
of asbestos are identified. If there are no fi- R = (5)×(.30)×(.60)=0.9%
bers present, or there is less than 0.1% (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos
present, end the analysis with the minimum present. For samples where asbestos was
number of slides (2). identified, but is less than 1.0%, report ‘‘As-
(5) Some fibers have a coating on them bestos present, less than 1.0%.’’ There must
which makes dispersion microscopy very dif- have been at least two observed fibers or
ficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or fiber bundles in the two preparations to be
electron microscopy may be performed in reported as present. For samples where as-
those cases. Determine the percentage by bestos was not seen, report as ‘‘None De-
light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to tected.’’
overestimate the actual percentage present.
(6) Percentage determination is an esti- Auxiliary Information
mate of occluded area, tempered by gross ob- Because of the subjective nature of asbes-
servation. Gross observation information is tos analysis, certain concepts and procedures
used to make sure that the high magnifica- need to be discussed in more depth. This in-
tion microscopy does not greatly over- or formation will help the analyst understand
underestimate the amount of fiber present. why some of the procedures are carried out
This part of the analysis requires a great the way they are.
deal of experience. Satisfactory models for
asbestos content analysis have not yet been 4.1. Light
developed, although some models based on
metallurgical grain-size determination have Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels
found some utility. Estimation is more eas- from its source in packets called quanta. It
ily handled in situations where the grain is instructive to consider light as a plane
sizes visible at about 160× are about the same wave. The light has a direction of travel.
and the sample is relatively homogeneous. Perpendicular to this and mutually perpen-
View all of the area under the cover slip to dicular to each other, are two vector compo-
make the percentage determination. View nents. One is the magnetic vector and the
the fields while moving the stage, paying at- other is the electric vector. We shall only be
tention to the clumps of material. These are concerned with the electric vector. In this
not usually the best areas to perform disper- description, the interaction of the vector and
sion microscopy because of the interference the mineral will describe all the observable
from other materials. But, they are the areas phenomena. From a light source such a mi-
most likely to represent the accurate per- croscope illuminator, light travels in all dif-
centage in the sample. Small amounts of as- ferent direction from the filament.
bestos require slower scanning and more fre- In any given direction away from the fila-
quent analysis of individual fields. ment, the electric vector is perpendicular to
Report the area occluded by asbestos as the direction of travel of a light ray. While
the concentration. This estimate does not perpendicular, its orientation is random
generally take into consideration the dif- about the travel axis. If the electric vectors
ference in density of the different species from all the light rays were lined up by pass-
present in the sample. For most samples this ing the light through a filter that would only
is adequate. Simulation studies with similar let light rays with electric vectors oriented
materials must be carried out to apply in one direction pass, the light would then be
microvisual estimation for that purpose and POLARIZED.
is beyond the scope of this procedure. Polarized light interacts with matter in
(7) Where successive concentrations have the direction of the electric vector. This is
been made by chemical or physical means, the polarization direction. Using this prop-
the amount reported is the percentage of the erty it is possible to use polarized light to
material in the ‘‘as submitted’’ or original probe different materials and identify them
state. The percentage determined by micros- by how they interact with light.
copy is multiplied by the fractions remain- The speed of light in a vacuum is a con-
ing after pre-preparation steps to give the stant at about 2.99×108 m/s. When light trav-
percentage in the original sample. For exam- els in different materials such as air, water,
ple: minerals or oil, it does not travel at this
Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 °C speed. It travels slower. This slowing is a
for 1 h. function of both the material through which
Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains the light is traveling and the wavelength or
after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl. frequency of the light. In general, the more
588
dense the material, the slower the light trav- tion to fiber length is used to aid in the iden-
els. Also, generally, the higher the fre- tification of asbestos.
quency, the slower the light will travel. The
ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to 4.3. Polarized Light Technique
that in a material is called the index of re-
Polarized light microscopy as described in
fraction (n). It is usually measured at 589 nm
this section uses the phase-polar microscope
(the sodium D line). If white light (light con-
taining all the visible wavelengths) travels described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast
through a material, rays of longer wave- microscope is fitted with two polarizing ele-
lengths will travel faster than those of short- ments, one below and one above the sample.
er wavelengths, this separation is called dis- The polarizers have their polarization direc-
persion. Dispersion is used as an identifier of tions at right angles to each other. Depend-
materials as described in Section 4.6. ing on the tests performed, there may be a
compensator between these two polarizing
4.2. Material Properties elements. A compensator is a piece of min-
Materials are either amorphous or crys- eral with known properties that ‘‘com-
talline. The difference between these two de- pensates’’ for some deficiency in the optical
scriptions depends on the positions of the train. Light emerging from a polarizing ele-
atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous ma- ment has its electric vector pointing in the
terials are randomly arranged with no long polarization direction of the element. The
range order. An example of an amorphous light will not be subsequently transmitted
material is glass. The atoms in crystalline through a second element set at a right
materials, on the other hand, are in regular angle to the first element. Unless the light is
arrays and have long range order. Most of altered as it passes from one element to the
the atoms can be found in highly predictable other, there is no transmission of light.
locations. Examples of crystalline material
are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. 4.4. Angle of Extinction
It is beyond the scope of this method to de-
Crystals which have different crystal regu-
scribe the different types of crystalline ma-
terials that can be found, or the full descrip- larity in two or three main directions are
tion of the classes into which they can fall. said to be anisotropic. They have a different
However, some general crystallography is index of refraction in each of the main direc-
provided below to give a foundation to the tions. When such a crystal is inserted be-
procedures described. tween the crossed polars, the field of view is
With the exception of anthophyllite, all no longer dark but shows the crystal in
the asbestos minerals belong to the color. The color depends on the properties of
monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the the crystal. The light acts as if it travels
basic repeating unit of the crystal and for through the crystal along the optical axes. If
monoclinic crystals can be described as hav- a crystal optical axis were lined up along one
ing three unequal sides, two 90° angles and of the polarizing directions (either the polar-
one angle not equal to 90°. The orthorhombic izer or the analyzer) the light would appear
group, of which anthophyllite is a member to travel only in that direction, and it would
has three unequal sides and three 90° angles. blink out or go dark. The difference in de-
The unequal sides are a consequence of the grees between the fiber direction and the
complexity of fitting the different atoms angle at which it blinks out is called the
into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in angle of extinction. When this angle can be
a regular array, that array is not symmet- measured, it is useful in identifying the min-
rical in all directions. There is long range eral. The procedure for measuring the angle
order in the three major directions of the of extinction is to first identify the polariza-
crystal. However, the order is different in tion direction in the microscope. A commer-
each of the three directions. This has the ef- cial alignment slide can be used to establish
fect that the index of refraction is different
the polarization directions or use
in each of the three directions. Using polar-
anthophyllite or another suitable mineral.
ized light, we can investigate the index of re-
This mineral has a zero degree angle of ex-
fraction in each of the directions and iden-
tify the mineral or material under investiga- tinction and will go dark to extinction as it
tion. The indices a, b, and g are used to iden- aligns with the polarization directions. When
tify the lowest, middle, and highest index of a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinc-
refraction respectively. The x direction, as- tion, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule
sociated with a is called the fast axis. Con- with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as
versely, the z direction is associated with g to the direction of polarization in the field of
and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has a view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece
along the fiber length making it ‘‘length- in this position so it will not shift.
fast’’. The remainder of the asbestos min- After the polarization direction has been
erals have the g axis along the fiber length. identified in the field of view, move the par-
They are called ‘‘length-slow’’. This orienta- ticle of interest to the center of the field of
589
view and align it with the polarization direc- thickness and birefringence. Such a compen-
tion. For fibers, align the fiber along this di- sator when oriented at 45° to the polarizer di-
rection. Note the angular reading of the ro- rection, provides a retardation of 530 nm of
tating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances
the stage until the fiber goes dark or ‘‘blinks the red color and gives the background a
out’’. Again note the reading of the stage. characteristic red to red-magenta color. If
The difference in the first reading and the this ‘‘full-wave’’ compensator is in place
second is an angle of extinction. when the asbestos preparation is inserted
The angle measured may vary as the ori- into the light train, the colors seen on the fi-
entation of the fiber changes about its long bers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbes-
axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually re- tos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a
port the maximum angle of extinction. As- fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same
bestos forming minerals, when they exhibit direction as the fast axis of the gypsum
an angle of extinction, usually do show an plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction
angle of extinction close to the reported is retarded by both the asbestos and the gyp-
maximum, or as appropriate depending on sum. This results in a higher retardation
the substitution chemistry. than would be present for either of the two
minerals. The color seen is a second order
4.5. Crossed Polars with Compensator
blue. When the fiber is rotated 90° using the
When the optical axes of a crystal are not rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber
lined up along one of the polarizing direc- is now aligned with the fast direction of the
tions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is
part of the light travels along one axis and aligned with the slow direction of the gyp-
part travels along the other visible axis. This sum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast
is characteristic of birefringent materials. direction of the gypsum, and slower in the
The color depends on the difference of the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will
two visible indices of refraction and the vibrate slower in the slow direction of the
thickness of the crystal. The maximum dif- gypsum and faster in the fast direction of
ference available is the difference between the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtrac-
the a and the g axes. This maximum dif- tive and the color seen is a first order yel-
ference is usually tabulated as the low. As long as the fiber thickness does not
birefringence of the crystal. add appreciably to the color, the same basic
For this test, align the fiber at 45° to the colors will be seen for all asbestos types ex-
polarization directions in order to maximize cept crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors
the contribution to each of the optical axes. will be weaker, may be in the opposite direc-
The colors seen are called retardation colors. tions, and will be altered by the blue absorp-
They arise from the recombination of light tion color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of
which has traveled through the two separate other materials will give the same colors as
directions of the crystal. One of the rays is asbestos, and therefore, this test is not defin-
retarded behind the other since the light in itive for asbestos. The test is useful in dis-
that direction travels slower. On recombina- criminating against fiberglass or other
tion, some of the colors which make up amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fi-
white light are enhanced by constructive in- bers. Certain synthetic fibers will show re-
terference and some are suppressed by de- tardation colors different than asbestos;
structive interference. The result is a color however, there are some forms of poly-
dependent on the difference between the in- ethylene and aramid which will show mor-
dices and the thickness of the crystal. The phology and retardation colors similar to as-
proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations bestos minerals. This test must be supple-
are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three mented with a positive identification test
items, retardation, thickness and when birefringent fibers are present which
birefringence are related by the following re- can not be excluded by morphology. This
lationship:
test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers
R=t(nγ¥nα)
less than 1 µm in diameter. For positive con-
R=retardation, t=crystal thickness in µm,
firmation TEM or SEM should be used if no
and
larger bundles or fibers are visible.
nα,γ=indices of refraction.
Examination of the equation for asbestos 4.6. Dispersion Staining
minerals reveals that the visible colors for
almost all common asbestos minerals and Dispersion microscopy or dispersion stain-
fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The ing is the method of choice for the identi-
eye is relatively poor at discriminating dif- fication of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke
ferent shades of gray. It is very good at dis- line analysis is used by some laboratories
criminating different colors. In order to and yields the same results as does disper-
compensate for the low retardation, a com- sion staining for asbestos and can be used in
pensator is added to the light train between lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion stain-
the polarization elements. The compensator ing is performed on the same platform as the
used for this test is a gypsum plate of known phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and
590
compensator removed. One polarizing ele- sistent with standard asbestos minerals in
ment remains to define the direction of the the correct direction for a positive identi-
light so that the different indices of refrac- fication of asbestos. If only one of the colors
tion of the fibers may be separately deter- is correct while the other is not, the identi-
mined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field fication is not positive. If the colors in both
technique when used for asbestos. Particles directions are bluish-white, the analyst has
are imaged with scattered light. Light which chosen a matching index oil which is higher
is unscattered is blocked from reaching the than the correct matching oil, e.g. the ana-
eye either by the back field image mask in a lyst has used n=1.620 where chrysotile is
McCrone objective or a back field image present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.)
mask in the phase condenser. The most con- should be used to prepare another specimen.
venient method is to use the rotating phase If the color in both directions is yellow-
condenser to move an oversized phase ring white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates
into place. The ideal size for this ring is for that the index of the oil is lower than the
the central disk to be just larger than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in
objective entry aperture as viewed in the n=1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Select
back focal plane. The larger the disk, the the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and prepare
less scattered light reaches the eye. This will another slide. Continue in this fashion until
have the effect of diminishing the intensity a positive identification of all asbestos spe-
of dispersion color and will shift the actual cies present has been made or all possible as-
color seen. The colors seen vary even on mi- bestos species have been ruled out by nega-
croscopes from the same manufacturer. This tive results in this test. Certain plant fibers
is due to the different bands of wavelength can have similar dispersion colors as asbes-
exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask tos. Take care to note and evaluate the mor-
may either reside in the condenser or in the phology of the fibers or remove the plant fi-
objective back focal plane. It is imperative bers in pre-preparation. Coating material on
that the analyst determine by experimen- the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may de-
tation with asbestos standards what the ap- stroy the dispersion color. Usually, there
propriate colors should be for each asbestos will be some outcropping of fiber which will
type. The colors depend also on the tempera- show the colors sufficient for identification.
ture of the preparation and the exact chem- When this is not the case, treat the sample
istry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight as described in Section 3.3. and then perform
differences from the standards should be al- dispersion staining. Some samples will yield
lowed. This is not a serious problem for com- to Becke line analysis if they are coated or
mercial asbestos uses. This technique is used electron microscopy can be used for identi-
for identification of the indices of refraction fication.
for fibers by recognition of color. There is no
direct numerical readout of the index of re- 5. References
fraction. Correlation of color to actual index 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, OSHA meth-
of refraction is possible by referral to pub- od ID160, Revised November 1992.
lished conversion tables. This is not nec- 5.2. Ford, W.E., Dana’s Textbook of Min-
essary for the analysis of asbestos. Recogni- eralogy; Fourth Ed.; John Wiley and Son,
tion of appropriate colors along with the New York, 1950, p. vii.
proper morphology are deemed sufficient to 5.3. Selikoff, I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and
identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978,
Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and pp. 3,20.
XRD may be required to provide additional 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. Annual Re-
information in order to identify other types port for 1898, H.M. Statistical Office, Lon-
of asbestos. don, p. 170 (1898).
Make a preparation in the suspected 5.5. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and
matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n=1.550 for Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978,
chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests to pp. 26,30.
determine whether the fibers are 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate
birefringent or not. Take note of the mor- Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties,
phological character. Wavy fibers are indic- United States Department of the Interior,
ative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, Bureau of Mines, Information Circular
frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole as- 8751, 1977.
bestos. This can aid in the selection of the 5.7. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations, 29
appropriate matching oil. The microscope is CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.58.
set up and the polarization direction is noted 5.8. National Emission Standards for Hazardous
as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the po- Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revision,
larization direction. Note the color. This is Federal Register, Vol. 55, No. 224, 20 November
the color parallel to the polarizer. Then ro- 1990, p. 48410.
tate the fiber rotating the stage 90° so that 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Defini-
the polarization direction is across the fiber. tions, Description, Modes of Formation, Phys-
This is the perpendicular position. Again ical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk
note the color. Both colors must be con- to the Mining Community, Nation Bureau of
591
Standards Special Publication, Wash- § 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; in-
ington, DC, 1977. terpretation of term.
5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and Endemic
Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, J. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Occ Medicine, 1981, 23,(8),548–550. struction work under this section are iden-
5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos—1972, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1002 of this
U.S. Department of Health Education and chapter.
Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
Disease Control, National Institute for Oc-
cupational Safety and Health, HSM–72–
§ 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-
10267.
Nitrobiphenyl, etc.).
5.12. Campbell,W.J., et al, Relationship of
Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, United struction work under this section are iden-
States Department of the Interior, Bureau tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
of Mines, Information Circular 8367, 1979. chapter.
5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver,
private communication, July 1987. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J.,
Rock Forming Minerals, Longman, Thetford, § 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
UK, 1974. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; Third Ed. struction work under this section are iden-
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and Other chapter.
Hydrous Pyriboles—Mineralogy, Reviews in
Mineralogy, Vol 9A, Michigan, 1982, pp 1– [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
102.
5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- § 1926.1105 [Reserved]
croscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos and
Quartz, ACS Symposium Series, No. 120, § 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
Analytical Techniques in Occupational NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Health Chemistry, 1979. struction work under this section are iden-
5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. chapter.
5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Re-
search Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
1987.
5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refrac- § 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene
tive Indices from Dispersion Staining (and its salts).
Data, The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989.
5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other struction work under this section are iden-
Health Related Silicates, ASTM Technical
Publication 834, ASTM, Philadelphia 1982.
chapter.
5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H.
(Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of As- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
bestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, pp. 93–
101, SME-AIME, 1981. § 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbes-
tos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Hazards, pp. 45–67 Wiley, 1979. struction work under this section are iden-
[51 FR 22756, June 20, 1986, as amended at 52 chapter.
FR 17755, May 12, 1987; 53 FR 27346, July 20,
1988; 55 FR 3732, Feb. 5, 1990; 57 FR 24331, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
June 8, 1992. Redesignated at 59 FR 41131,
Aug. 10, 1994 and further amended at 59 FR § 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
41144, 41150, 41152, and 41153, Aug. 10, 1994; 60 NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
FR 33345, June 28, 1995; 60 FR 33995, June 29,
1995; 60 FR 36044, July 13, 1995; 60 FR 50412,
50413, Sept. 29, 1995; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996;
61 FR 43458, Aug. 23, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8, chapter.
1998; 63 FR 20099, Apr. 23, 1998; 63 FR 35138, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
June 29, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR
16674, 16675, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, Aug. 24,
2006]
592
§ 1926.1110 Benzidine. § 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this section are iden- struction work under this section are iden-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this tical to those set forth at § 1910.1018 of this
chapter. chapter.
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl. § 1926.1126 Chromium (VI).

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (a) Scope. (1) This standard applies to
struction work under this section are iden- occupational exposures to chromium
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this (VI) in all forms and compounds in con-
chapter. struction, except:
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] (2) Exposures that occur in the appli-
cation of pesticides regulated by the
§ 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. Environmental Protection Agency or
another Federal government agency
(e.g., the treatment of wood with pre-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this servatives);
chapter. (3) Exposures to portland cement; or
(4) Where the employer has objective
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
data demonstrating that a material
containing chromium or a specific
§ 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone.
process, operation, or activity involv-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- ing chromium cannot release dusts,
struction work under this section are iden- fumes, or mists of chromium (VI) in
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this concentrations at or above 0.5 µgm/m3
chapter.
as an 8-hour time-weighted average
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] (TWA) under any expected conditions
of use.
§ 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. (b) Definitions. For the purposes of
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- this section the following definitions
struction work under this section are iden- apply:
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this Action level means a concentration of
chapter. airborne chromium (VI) of 2.5
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5
µgm/m3) calculated as an 8-hour time-
§ 1926.1115 4- weighted average (TWA).
Dimethylaminoazobenzene. Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
struction work under this section are iden- tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this ment of Labor, or designee.
chapter. Chromium (VI) [hexavalent chromium
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] or Cr(VI)] means chromium with a va-
lence of positive six, in any form and in
§ 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. any compound.
Director means the Director of the
National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De-
chapter. partment of Health and Human Serv-
ices, or designee.
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Emergency means any occurrence
that results, or is likely to result, in an
§ 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride.
uncontrolled release of chromium (VI).
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- If an incidental release of chromium
struction work under this section are iden- (VI) can be controlled at the time of re-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1017 of this lease by employees in the immediate
chapter.
release area, or by maintenance per-
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] sonnel, it is not an emergency.
593
Employee exposure means the expo- with either paragraph (d)(2) or para-
sure to airborne chromium (VI) that graph (d)(3) of this section.
would occur if the employee were not (2) Scheduled monitoring option. (i) The
using a respirator. employer shall perform initial moni-
High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] toring to determine the 8-hour TWA
filter means a filter that is at least 99.97 exposure for each employee on the
percent efficient in removing mono-dis- basis of a sufficient number of personal
persed particles of 0.3 micrometers in breathing zone air samples to accu-
diameter or larger. rately characterize full shift exposure
Historical monitoring data means data on each shift, for each job classifica-
from chromium (VI) monitoring con- tion, in each work area. Where an em-
ducted prior to May 30, 2006, obtained ployer does representative sampling in-
during work operations conducted stead of sampling all employees in
under workplace conditions closely re- order to meet this requirement, the
sembling the processes, types of mate- employer shall sample the employee(s)
rial, control methods, work practices, expected to have the highest chromium
and environmental conditions in the (VI) exposures.
employer’s current operations. (ii) If initial monitoring indicates
Objective data means information that employee exposures are below the
action level, the employer may dis-
such as air monitoring data from in-
continue monitoring for those employ-
dustry-wide surveys or calculations
ees whose exposures are represented by
based on the composition or chemical
such monitoring.
and physical properties of a substance
(iii) If monitoring reveals employee
demonstrating the employee exposure
exposures to be at or above the action
to chromium (VI) associated with a
level, the employer shall perform peri-
particular product or material or a spe-
odic monitoring at least every six
cific process, operation, or activity.
months.
The data must reflect workplace condi-
(iv) If monitoring reveals employee
tions closely resembling the processes,
exposures to be above the PEL, the em-
types of material, control methods, ployer shall perform periodic moni-
work practices, and environmental toring at least every three months.
conditions in the employer’s current (v) If periodic monitoring indicates
operations. that employee exposures are below the
Physician or other licensed health care action level, and the result is con-
professional [PLHCP] is an individual firmed by the result of another moni-
whose legally permitted scope of prac- toring taken at least seven days later,
tice (i.e., license, registration, or cer- the employer may discontinue the
tification) allows him or her to inde- monitoring for those employees whose
pendently provide or be delegated the exposures are represented by such mon-
responsibility to provide some or all of itoring.
the particular health care services re- (vi) The employer shall perform addi-
quired by paragraph (i) of this section. tional monitoring when there has been
This section means this § 1926.1126 any change in the production process,
chromium (VI) standard. raw materials, equipment, personnel,
(c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). work practices, or control methods
The employer shall ensure that no em- that may result in new or additional
ployee is exposed to an airborne con- exposures to chromium (VI), or when
centration of chromium (VI) in excess the employer has any reason to believe
of 5 micrograms per cubic meter of air that new or additional exposures have
(5 µgm/m3), calculated as an 8-hour occurred.
time-weighted average (TWA). (3) Performance-oriented option. The
(d) Exposure determination—(1) Gen- employer shall determine the 8-hour
eral. Each employer who has a work- TWA exposure for each employee on
place or work operation covered by this the basis of any combination of air
section shall determine the 8-hour monitoring data, historical monitoring
TWA exposure for each employee ex- data, or objective data sufficient to ac-
posed to chromium (VI). This deter- curately characterize employee expo-
mination shall be made in accordance sure to chromium (VI).
594
(4) Employee notification of determina- employee exposure to or below the

tion results. (i) Where the exposure de- PEL, the employer shall use them to
termination indicates that employee reduce employee exposure to the lowest
exposure exceeds the PEL, as soon as levels achievable, and shall supplement
possible but not more than 5 working them by the use of respiratory protec-
days later the employer shall either tion that complies with the require-
post the results in an appropriate loca- ments of paragraph (f) of this section.
tion that is accessible to all affected (ii) Where the employer can dem-
employees or shall notify each affected onstrate that a process or task does
employee individually in writing of the not result in any employee exposure to
results. chromium (VI) above the PEL for 30 or
(ii) Whenever the exposure deter- more days per year (12 consecutive
mination indicates that employee ex- months), the requirement to imple-
posure is above the PEL, the employer ment engineering and work practice
shall describe in the written notifica-
controls to achieve the PEL does not
tion the corrective action being taken
apply to that process or task.
to reduce employee exposure to or
below the PEL. (2) Prohibition of rotation. The em-
(5) Accuracy of measurement. Where ployer shall not rotate employees to
air monitoring is performed to comply different jobs to achieve compliance
with the requirements of this section, with the PEL.
the employer shall use a method of (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General.
monitoring and analysis that can The employer shall provide respiratory
measure chromium (VI) to within an protection for employees during:
accuracy of plus or minus 25 percent (i) Periods necessary to install or im-
(±25%) and can produce accurate meas- plement feasible engineering and work
urements to within a statistical con- practice controls;
fidence level of 95 percent for airborne (ii) Work operations, such as mainte-
concentrations at or above the action nance and repair activities, for which
level. engineering and work practice controls
(6) Observation of monitoring. (i) are not feasible;
Where air monitoring is performed to (iii) Work operations for which an
comply with the requirements of this employer has implemented all feasible
section, the employer shall provide af- engineering and work practice controls
fected employees or their designated and such controls are not sufficient to
representatives an opportunity to ob- reduce exposures to or below the PEL;
serve any monitoring of employee ex- (iv) Work operations where employ-
posure to chromium (VI). ees are exposed above the PEL for
(ii) When observation of monitoring fewer than 30 days per year, and the
requires entry into an area where the employer has elected not to implement
use of protective clothing or equipment engineering and work practice controls
is required, the employer shall provide to achieve the PEL; or
the observer with clothing and equip-
(v) Emergencies.
ment and shall assure that the ob-
server uses such clothing and equip- (2) Respiratory protection program.
ment and complies with all other appli- Where respirator use is required by this
cable safety and health procedures. section, the employer shall institute a
(e) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi- respiratory protection program in ac-
neering and work practice controls. (i) cordance with 29 CFR 1910.134.
Except as permitted in paragraph (g) Protective work clothing and equip-
(e)(1)(ii) of this section, the employer ment—(1) Provision and use. Where a
shall use engineering and work prac- hazard is present or is likely to be
tice controls to reduce and maintain present from skin or eye contact with
employee exposure to chromium (VI) chromium (VI), the employer shall pro-
to or below the PEL unless the em- vide appropriate personal protective
ployer can demonstrate that such con- clothing and equipment at no cost to
trols are not feasible. Wherever fea- employees, and shall ensure that em-
sible engineering and work practice ployees use such clothing and equip-
controls are not sufficient to reduce ment.
595
(2) Removal and storage. (i) The em- the employer shall provide washing fa-
ployer shall ensure that employees re- cilities in conformance with 29 CFR
move all protective clothing and equip- 1926.51. Eating and drinking areas pro-
ment contaminated with chromium vided by the employer shall also be in
(VI) at the end of the work shift or at conformance with § 1926.51.
the completion of their tasks involving (2) Change rooms. The employer shall
chromium (VI) exposure, whichever assure that change rooms are equipped
comes first. with separate storage facilities for pro-
(ii) The employer shall ensure that tective clothing and equipment and for
no employee removes chromium (VI)- street clothes, and that these facilities
contaminated protective clothing or prevent cross-contamination.
equipment from the workplace, except (3) Washing facilities. (i) The employer
for those employees whose job it is to shall provide readily accessible wash-
launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of ing facilities capable of removing chro-
such clothing or equipment. mium (VI) from the skin, and shall en-
(iii) When contaminated protective sure that affected employees use these
clothing or equipment is removed for facilities when necessary.
laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or (ii) The employer shall ensure that
disposal, the employer shall ensure employees who have skin contact with
that it is stored and transported in chromium (VI) wash their hands and
sealed, impermeable bags or other
faces at the end of the work shift and
closed, impermeable containers.
prior to eating, drinking, smoking,
(iv) Bags or containers of contami-
chewing tobacco or gum, applying cos-
nated protective clothing or equipment
metics, or using the toilet.
that are removed from change rooms
for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, (4) Eating and drinking areas. (i)
or disposal shall be labeled in accord- Whenever the employer allows employ-
ance with the requirements of the Haz- ees to consume food or beverages at a
ard Communication Standard, 29 CFR worksite where chromium (VI) is
1910.1200. present, the employer shall ensure that
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The eating and drinking areas and surfaces
employer shall clean, launder, repair are maintained as free as practicable of
and replace all protective clothing and chromium (VI).
equipment required by this section as (ii) The employer shall ensure that
needed to maintain its effectiveness. employees do not enter eating and
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the drinking areas with protective work
removal of chromium (VI) from protec- clothing or equipment unless surface
tive clothing and equipment by blow- chromium (VI) has been removed from
ing, shaking, or any other means that the clothing and equipment by meth-
disperses chromium (VI) into the air or ods that do not disperse chromium (VI)
onto an employee’s body. into the air or onto an employee’s
(iii) The employer shall inform any body.
person who launders or cleans protec- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer
tive clothing or equipment contami- shall ensure that employees do not eat,
nated with chromium (VI) of the poten- drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
tially harmful effects of exposure to apply cosmetics in areas where skin or
chromium (VI) and that the clothing eye contact with chromium (VI) oc-
and equipment should be laundered or curs; or carry the products associated
cleaned in a manner that minimizes with these activities, or store such
skin or eye contact with chromium products in these areas.
(VI) and effectively prevents the re- (i) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i)
lease of airborne chromium (VI) in ex- The employer shall make medical sur-
cess of the PEL. veillance available at no cost to the
(h) Hygiene areas and practices—(1) employee, and at a reasonable time and
General. Where protective clothing and place, for all employees:
equipment is required, the employer (A) Who are or may be occupation-
shall provide change rooms in conform- ally exposed to chromium (VI) at or
ance with 29 CFR 1926.51 Where skin above the action level for 30 or more
contact with chromium (VI) occurs, days a year;
596
(B) Experiencing signs or symptoms (ii) The employee’s former, current,

of the adverse health effects associated and anticipated levels of occupational
with chromium (VI) exposure; or exposure to chromium (VI);
(C) Exposed in an emergency. (iii) A description of any personal
(ii) The employer shall assure that protective equipment used or to be
all medical examinations and proce- used by the employee, including when
dures required by this section are per- and for how long the employee has used
formed by or under the supervision of a that equipment; and
PLHCP. (iv) Information from records of em-
(2) Frequency. The employer shall ployment-related medical examina-
provide a medical examination: tions previously provided to the af-
(i) Within 30 days after initial assign- fected employee, currently within the
ment, unless the employee has received control of the employer.
a chromium (VI) related medical exam-
(5) PLHCP’s written medical opinion.
ination that meets the requirements of
(i) The employer shall obtain a written
this paragraph within the last twelve
medical opinion from the PLHCP,
months;
(ii) Annually; within 30 days for each medical exam-
(iii) Within 30 days after a PLHCP’s ination performed on each employee,
written medical opinion recommends which contains:
an additional examination; (A) The PLHCP’s opinion as to
(iv) Whenever an employee shows whether the employee has any detected
signs or symptoms of the adverse medical condition(s) that would place
health effects associated with chro- the employee at increased risk of ma-
mium (VI) exposure; terial impairment to health from fur-
(v) Within 30 days after exposure dur- ther exposure to chromium (VI);
ing an emergency which results in an (B) Any recommended limitations
uncontrolled release of chromium (VI); upon the employee’s exposure to chro-
or mium (VI) or upon the use of personal
(vi) At the termination of employ- protective equipment such as res-
ment, unless the last examination that pirators;
satisfied the requirements of paragraph (C) A statement that the PLHCP has
(i) of this section was less than six explained to the employee the results
months prior to the date of termi- of the medical examination, including
nation. any medical conditions related to chro-
(3) Contents of examination. A medical mium (VI) exposure that require fur-
examination consists of: ther evaluation or treatment, and any
(i) A medical and work history, with special provisions for use of protective
emphasis on: past, present, and antici- clothing or equipment.
pated future exposure to chromium (ii) The PLHCP shall not reveal to
(VI); any history of respiratory system the employer specific findings or diag-
dysfunction; any history of asthma, noses unrelated to occupational expo-
dermatitis, skin ulceration, or nasal sure to chromium (VI).
septum perforation; and smoking sta-
(iii) The employer shall provide a
tus and history;
copy of the PLHCP’s written medical
(ii) A physical examination of the
opinion to the examined employee
skin and respiratory tract; and
within two weeks after receiving it.
(iii) Any additional tests deemed ap-
propriate by the examining PLHCP. (j) Communication of chromium (VI)
(4) Information provided to the PLHCP. hazards to employees. (1) General. In ad-
The employer shall ensure that the ex- dition to the requirements of the Haz-
amining PLHCP has a copy of this ard Communication Standard, 29 CFR
standard, and shall provide the fol- 1910.1200, employers shall comply with
lowing information: the following requirements.
(i) A description of the affected em- (2) Employee information and training.
ployee’s former, current, and antici- (i) The employer shall ensure that each
pated duties as they relate to the em- employee can demonstrate knowledge
ployee’s occupational exposure to chro- of at least the following:
mium (VI); (A) The contents of this section; and
597
(B) The purpose and a description of as those on the job for which exposure
the medical surveillance program re- is being determined;
quired by paragraph (i) of this section. (D) Environmental conditions pre-
(ii) The employer shall make a copy vailing when the historical monitoring
of this section readily available with- data were obtained are the same as
out cost to all affected employees. those on the job for which exposure is
(k) Recordkeeping—(1) Air monitoring being determined; and
data. (i) The employer shall maintain (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
an accurate record of all air moni- ations, materials, processing, or em-
toring conducted to comply with the ployee exposures covered by the excep-
requirements of this section. tion.
(ii) This record shall include at least (iii) The employer shall ensure that
the following information: historical exposure records are main-
(A) The date of measurement for each tained and made available in accord-
sample taken; ance with 29 CFR 1910.1020.
(B) The operation involving exposure (3) Objective data. (i) The employer
to chromium (VI) that is being mon- shall maintain an accurate record of
itored; all objective data relied upon to com-
(C) Sampling and analytical methods ply with the requirements of this sec-
used and evidence of their accuracy; tion.
(D) Number, duration, and the results (ii) This record shall include at least
of samples taken; the following information:
(E) Type of personal protective (A) The chromium containing mate-
equipment, such as respirators worn; rial in question;
and (B) The source of the objective data;
(F) Name, social security number, (C) The testing protocol and results
and job classification of all employees of testing, or analysis of the material
represented by the monitoring, indi- for the release of chromium (VI);
cating which employees were actually (D) A description of the process, oper-
monitored. ation, or activity and how the data
(iii) The employer shall ensure that support the determination; and
exposure records are maintained and (E) Other data relevant to the proc-
made available in accordance with 29 ess, operation, activity, material, or
CFR 1910.1020. employee exposures.
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) (iii) The employer shall ensure that
Where the employer has relied on his- objective data are maintained and
torical monitoring data to determine made available in accordance with 29
exposure to chromium (VI), the em- CFR 1910.1020.
ployer shall establish and maintain an (4) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
accurate record of the historical moni- ployer shall establish and maintain an
toring data relied upon. accurate record for each employee cov-
(ii) The record shall include informa- ered by medical surveillance under
tion that reflects the following condi- paragraph (i) of this section.
tions: (ii) The record shall include the fol-
(A) The data were collected using lowing information about the em-
methods that meet the accuracy re- ployee:
quirements of paragraph (d)(5) of this (A) Name and social security number;
section; (B) A copy of the PLHCP’s written
(B) The processes and work practices opinions;
that were in use when the historical (C) A copy of the information pro-
monitoring data were obtained are es- vided to the PLHCP as required by
sentially the same as those to be used paragraph (i)(4) of this section.
during the job for which exposure is (iii) The employer shall ensure that
being determined; medical records are maintained and
(C) The characteristics of the chro- made available in accordance with 29
mium (VI) containing material being CFR 1910.1020.
handled when the historical moni- (l) Dates. (1) For employers with 20 or
toring data were obtained are the same more employees, all obligations of this
598
section, except engineering controls re- Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
quired by paragraph (e) of this section, ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
commence November 27, 2006. tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
(2) For employers with 19 or fewer ment of Labor, or designee.
employees, all obligations of this sec- Authorized person means any person
tion, except engineering controls re- authorized by the employer and re-
quired by paragraph (e) of this section, quired by work duties to be present in
commence May 30, 2007. regulated areas or any person author-
(3) For all employers, engineering ized by the OSH Act or regulations
controls required by paragraph (e) of issued under it to be in regulated areas.
this section shall be implemented no Competent person, in accordance with
later than May 31, 2010. 29 CFR 1926.32(f), means a person des-
[71 FR 10382, Feb. 28, 2006] ignated by the employer to act on the
employer’s behalf who is capable of
§ 1926.1127 Cadmium. identifying existing and potential cad-
(a) Scope. This standard applies to all mium hazards in the workplace and the
occupational exposures to cadmium proper methods to control them in
and cadmium compounds, in all forms, order to protect workers, and has the
in all construction work where an em- authority necessary to take prompt
ployee may potentially be exposed to corrective measures to eliminate or
cadmium. Construction work is defined control such hazards. The duties of a
as work involving construction, alter- competent person include at least the
ation and/or repair, including but not following: Determining prior to the
limited to the following: performance of work whether cadmium
(1) Wrecking, demolition or salvage is present in the workplace; estab-
of structures where cadmium or mate- lishing, where necessary, regulated
rials containing cadmium are present; areas and assuring that access to and
(2) Use of cadmium containing-paints from those areas is limited to author-
and cutting, brazing, burning, grinding ized employees; assuring the adequacy
or welding on surfaces that were paint- of any employee exposure monitoring
ed with cadmium-containing paints; required by this standard; assuring
(3) Construction, alteration, repair, that all employees exposed to air cad-
maintenance, or renovation of struc- mium levels above the PEL wear ap-
tures, substrates, or portions thereof, propriate personal protective equip-
that contain cadmium, or materials ment and are trained in the use of ap-
containing cadmium; propriate methods of exposure control;
(4) Cadmium welding; cutting and assuring that proper hygiene facilities
welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing are provided and that workers are
or welding with cadmium alloys; trained to use those facilities; and as-
(5) Installation of products con- suring that the engineering controls
taining cadmium; required by this standard are imple-
(6) Electrical grounding with cad- mented, maintained in proper oper-
mium welding, or electrical work using ating condition, and functioning prop-
cadmium-coated conduit; erly.
(7) Maintaining or retrofitting cad- Director means the Director of the
mium-coated equipment; National Institute for Occupational
(8) Cadmium contamination/emer- Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De-
gency cleanup; and partment of Health and Human Serv-
(9) Transportation, disposal, storage, ices, or designee.
or containment of cadmium or mate- Employee exposure and similar lan-
rials containing cadmium on the site guage referring to the air cadmium
or location at which construction ac- level to which an employee is exposed
tivities are performed. means the exposure to airborne cad-
(b) Definitions. mium that would occur if the employee
Action level (AL) is defined as an air- were not using respiratory protective
borne concentration of cadmium of 2.5 equipment.
micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5 Final medical determination is the
µg/m3), calculated as an 8-hour time- written medical opinion of the employ-
weighted average (TWA). ee’s health status by the examining
599
physician under paragraphs (l)(3)-(12) of (iii) Determinations of employee ex-

this section or, if multiple physician posure shall be made from breathing-
review under paragraph (l)(13) of this zone air samples that reflect the mon-
section or the alternative physician de- itored employee’s regular, daily 8-hour
termination under paragraph (l)(14) of TWA exposure to cadmium.
this section is invoked, it is the final, (iv) Eight-hour TWA exposures shall
written medical finding, recommenda- be determined for each employee on
tion or determination that emerges the basis of one or more personal
from that process. breathing-zone air samples reflecting
High-efficiency Particulate Air [HEPA] full shift exposure on each shift, for
filter means a filter capable of trapping each job classification, in each work
and retaining at least 99.97 percent of area. Where several employees perform
mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 microm- the same job tasks, in the same job
eters in diameter. classification, on the same shift, in the
Regulated area means an area demar- same work area, and the length, dura-
cated by the employer where an em- tion, and level of cadmium exposures
ployee’s exposure to airborne con- are similar, an employer may sample a
centrations of cadmium exceeds, or can representative fraction of the employ-
reasonably be expected to exceed the ees instead of all employees in order to
permissible exposure limit (PEL). meet this requirement. In representa-
This section means this cadmium tive sampling, the employer shall sam-
standard. ple the employee(s) expected to have
(c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). the highest cadmium exposures.
The employer shall assure that no em- (2) Specific. (i) Initial monitoring. Ex-
ployee is exposed to an airborne concept as provided for in paragraph
centration of cadmium in excess of five (d)(2)(iii) of this section, where a deter-
micrograms per cubic meter of air (5 mination conducted under paragraph
µg/m3), calculated as an eight-hour (d)(1)(i) of this section shows the possi-
time-weighted average exposure bility of employee exposure to cad-
(TWA). mium at or above the action level, the
(d) Exposure Monitoring—(1) General. employer shall conduct exposure moni-
(i) Prior to the performance of any con- toring as soon as practicable that is
struction work where employees may representative of the exposure for each
be potentially exposed to cadmium, the employee in the workplace who is or
employer shall establish the applica- may be exposed to cadmium at or
bility of this standard by determining above the action level.
whether cadmium is present in the (ii) In addition, if the employee peri-
workplace and whether there is the odically performs tasks that may ex-
possibility that employee exposures pose the employee to a higher con-
will be at or above the action level. centration of airborne cadmium, the
The employer shall designate a com- employee shall be monitored while per-
petent person who shall make this deforming those tasks.
termination. Investigation and mate- (iii) Where the employer has objec-
rial testing techniques shall be used, as tive data, as defined in paragraph (n)(2)
appropriate, in the determination. In- of this section, demonstrating that em-
vestigation shall include a review of ployee exposure to cadmium will not
relevant plans, past reports, material exceed airborne concentrations at or
safety data sheets, and other available above the action level under the ex-
records, and consultations with the pected conditions of processing, use, or
property owner and discussions with handling, the employer may rely upon
appropriate individuals and agencies. such data instead of implementing ini-
(ii) Where cadmium has been deter- tial monitoring.
mined to be present in the workplace, (iv) Where a determination con-
and it has been determined that there ducted under paragraphs (d)(1) or (d)(2)
is a possibility the employee’s exposure of this section is made that a poten-
will be at or above the action level, the tially exposed employee is not exposed
competent person shall identify em- to airborne concentrations of cadmium
ployees potentially exposed to cad- at or above the action level, the em-
mium at or above the action level. ployer shall make a written record of
600
such determination. The record shall the PEL, the employer shall include in
include at least the monitoring data the written notice a statement that
developed under paragraphs (d)(2)(i)– the PEL has been exceeded and a de-
(iii) of this section, where applicable, scription of the corrective action being
and shall also include the date of deter- taken by the employer to reduce em-
mination, and the name and social se- ployee exposure to or below the PEL.
curity number of each employee. (6) Accuracy of measurement. The em-
(3) Monitoring frequency (periodic mon- ployer shall use a method of moni-
itoring). (i) If the initial monitoring or toring and analysis that has an accu-
periodic monitoring reveals employee racy of not less than plus or minus 25
exposures to be at or above the action percent (±25%), with a confidence level
level, the employer shall monitor at a of 95 percent, for airborne concentra-
frequency and pattern needed to assure tions of cadmium at or above the ac-
that the monitoring results reflect tion level and the permissible exposure
with reasonable accuracy the employ- limit.
ee’s typical exposure levels, given the (e) Regulated areas—(1) Establishment.
variability in the tasks performed, The employer shall establish a regu-
work practices, and environmental lated area wherever an employee’s ex-
conditions on the job site, and to as- posure to airborne concentrations of
sure the adequacy of respiratory selec- cadmium is, or can reasonably be ex-
tion and the effectiveness of engineer- pected to be in excess of the permis-
ing and work practice controls. sible exposure limit (PEL).
(ii) If the initial monitoring or the (2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall
periodic monitoring indicates that em- be demarcated from the rest of the
ployee exposures are below the action workplace in any manner that ade-
level and that result is confirmed by quately establishes and alerts employ-
the results of another monitoring ees of the boundaries of the regulated
taken at least seven days later, the em- area, including employees who are or
ployer may discontinue the monitoring may be incidentally in the regulated
for those employees whose exposures areas, and that protects persons out-
are represented by such monitoring. side the area from exposure to airborne
(4) Additional monitoring. The em- concentrations of cadmium in excess of
ployer also shall institute the exposure the PEL.
monitoring required under paragraphs (3) Access. Access to regulated areas
(d)(2)(i) and (d)(3) of this section when- shall be limited to authorized persons.
ever there has been a change in the raw (4) Provision of respirators. Each per-
materials, equipment, personnel, work son entering a regulated area shall be
practices, or finished products that supplied with and required to use a res-
may result in additional employees pirator, selected in accordance with
being exposed to cadmium at or above paragraph (g)(2) of this section.
the action level or in employees al- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer
ready exposed to cadmium at or above shall assure that employees do not eat,
the action level being exposed above drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
the PEL, or whenever the employer or apply cosmetics in regulated areas, or
competent person has any reason to carry the products associated with any
suspect that any other change might of these activities into regulated areas
result in such further exposure. or store such products in those areas.
(5) Employee notification of monitoring (f) Methods of compliance—(1) Compli-
results. (i) The employer must, as soon ance hierarchy. (i) Except as specified in
as possible but no later than 5 working paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, the
days after the receipt of the results of employer shall implement engineering
any monitoring performed under this and work practice controls to reduce
section, notify each affected employee and maintain employee exposure to
of these results either individually in cadmium at or below the PEL, except
writing or by posting the results in an to the extent that the employer can
appropriate location that is accessible demonstrate that such controls are not
to employees. feasible.
(ii) Wherever monitoring results indi- (ii) The requirement to implement
cate that employee exposure exceeds engineering controls to achieve the
601
PEL does not apply where the em- (ii) Measurements of the system’s ef-
ployer demonstrates the following: fectiveness in controlling exposure
(A) The employee is only intermit- shall be made as necessary within five
tently exposed; and working days of any change in produc-
(B) The employee is not exposed tion, process, or control that might re-
above the PEL on 30 or more days per sult in a significant increase in em-
year (12 consecutive months). ployee exposure to cadmium.
(iii) Wherever engineering and work (iii) Recirculation of air. If air from
practice controls are not sufficient to exhaust ventilation is recirculated into
reduce employee exposure to or below the workplace, the system shall have a
the PEL, the employer nonetheless high efficiency filter and be monitored
shall implement such controls to re- to assure effectiveness.
duce exposures to the lowest levels (iv) Procedures shall be developed
achievable. The employer shall supple- and implemented to minimize em-
ment such controls with respiratory ployee exposure to cadmium when
protection that complies with the re- maintenance of ventilation systems
quirements of paragraph (g) of this sec- and changing of filters is being con-
tion and the PEL. ducted.
(iv) The employer shall not use em- (5) Compliance program. (i) Where em-
ployee rotation as a method of compli- ployee exposure to cadmium exceeds
ance. the PEL and the employer is required
(2) Specific operations—(i) Abrasive under paragraph (f)(1) of this section to
blasting. Abrasive blasting on cadmium implement controls to comply with the
or cadmium-containing materials shall PEL, prior to the commencement of
be conducted in a manner that will pro- the job the employer shall establish
vide adequate protection. and implement a written compliance
(ii) Heating cadmium and cadmium- program to reduce employee exposure
containing materials. Welding, cutting, to or below the PEL. To the extent
and other forms of heating of cadmium that engineering and work practice
or cadmium-containing materials shall controls cannot reduce exposures to or
be conducted in accordance with the below the PEL, the employer shall in-
requirements of 29 CFR 1926.353 and 29 clude in the written compliance pro-
CFR 1926.354, where applicable. gram the use of appropriate respiratory
(3) Prohibitions. (i) High speed abra- protection to achieve compliance with
sive disc saws and similar abrasive the PEL.
power equipment shall not be used for (ii) Written compliance programs
work on cadmium or cadmium-con- shall be reviewed and updated as often
taining materials unless they are and as promptly as necessary to reflect
equipped with appropriate engineering significant changes in the employer’s
controls to minimize emissions, if the compliance status or significant
exposure levels are above the PEL. changes in the lowest air cadmium
(ii) Materials containing cadmium level that is technologically feasible.
shall not be applied by spray methods, (iii) A competent person shall review
if exposures are above the PEL, unless the comprehensive compliance pro-
employees are protected with supplied- gram initially and after each change.
air respirators with full facepiece, (iv) Written compliance programs
hood, helmet, suit, operated in positive shall be provided upon request for ex-
pressure mode and measures are insti- amination and copying to the Assist-
tuted to limit overspray and prevent ant Secretary, the Director, affected
contamination of adjacent areas. employees, and designated employee
(4) Mechanical ventilation. (i) When representatives.
ventilation is used to control exposure, (g) Respirator protection—(1) General.
measurements that demonstrate the ef- For employees who use respirators re-
fectiveness of the system in controlling quired by this section, the employer
exposure, such as capture velocity, must provide respirators that comply
duct velocity, or static pressure shall with the requirements of this para-
be made as necessary to maintain its graph. Respirators must be used dur-
effectiveness. ing:
602
(i) Periods necessary to install or im- (A) Select, and provide to employees,
plement feasible engineering and work- the appropriate respirators specified in
practice controls when employee expo- paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR
sures exceed the PEL. 1910.134.
(ii) Maintenance and repair activi- (B) Provide employees with full face-
ties, and brief or intermittent work op- piece respirators when they experience
erations, for which employee exposures eye irritation.
exceed the PEL and engineering and (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered
work-practice controls are not feasible and non-powered air-purifying res-
or are not required. pirators.
(iii) Work operations in the regulated (ii) The employer must provide a
areas specified in paragraph (e) of this powered air-purifying respirator in-
section. stead of a negative-pressure respirator
(iv) Work operations for which the when an employee entitled to a res-
employer has implemented all feasible pirator chooses to use this type of res-
engineering and work-practice con- pirator and such a respirator will pro-
trols, and such controls are not suffi- vide adequate protection to the em-
cient to reduce employee exposures to ployee.
or below the PEL. (h) Emergency situations. The em-
(v) Work operations for which an employer shall develop and implement a
ployee, who is exposed to cadmium at written plan for dealing with emer-
or above the action level, requests a gency situations involving substantial
respirator. releases of airborne cadmium. The plan
(vi) Work operations for which engi- shall include provisions for the use of
neering controls are not required by appropriate respirators and personal
paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section to re- protective equipment. In addition, em-
duce employee exposures that exceed ployees not essential to correcting the
the PEL. emergency situation shall be restricted
(vii) Emergencies. from the area and normal operations
(2) Respirator program. (i) The em- halted in that area until the emer-
ployer must implement a respiratory gency is abated.
protection program in accordance with (i) Protective work clothing and equip-
29 CFR 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except ment—(1) Provision and use. If an em-
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m). ployee is exposed to airborne cadmium
(ii) If an employee exhibits breathing above the PEL or where skin or eye ir-
difficulty during fit testing or res- ritation is associated with cadmium
pirator use, the employer must provide exposure at any level, the employer
the employee with a medical examina- shall provide at no cost to the em-
tion in accordance with paragraph ployee, and assure that the employee
(l)(6)(ii) of this section to determine if uses, appropriate protective work
the employee can use a respirator clothing and equipment that prevents
while performing the required duties. contamination of the employee and the
(iii) No employee must use a res- employee’s garments. Protective work
pirator when, based on their most re- clothing and equipment includes, but is
cent medical examination, the exam- not limited to:
ining physician determines that the (i) Coveralls or similar full-body
employee will be unable to continue to work clothing;
function normally while using a res- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and boots
pirator. If the physician determines the or foot coverings; and
employee must be limited in, or re- (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or
moved from, their current job because other appropriate protective equip-
of the employee’s inability to use a res- ment that complies with 29 CFR
pirator, the job limitation or removal 1910.133.
must be conducted in accordance with (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
paragraphs (l) (11) and (12) of this sec- ployer shall assure that employees re-
tion. move all protective clothing and equip-
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers ment contaminated with cadmium at
must: the completion of the work shift and do
603
so only in change rooms provided in ac- manner that prevents the release of
cordance with paragraph (j)(1) of this airborne cadmium in excess of the per-
section. missible exposure limit prescribed in
(ii) The employer shall assure that no paragraph (c) of this section.
employee takes cadmium-contami- (v) The employer shall inform any
nated protective clothing or equipment person who launders or cleans protec-
from the workplace, except for employ- tive clothing or equipment contami-
ees authorized to do so for purposes of nated with cadmium of the potentially
laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or harmful effects of exposure to cad-
disposing of cadmium-contaminated mium, and that the clothing and equip-
protective clothing and equipment at ment should be laundered or cleaned in
an appropriate location or facility a manner to effectively prevent the re-
away from the workplace. lease of airborne cadmium in excess of
(iii) The employer shall assure that the PEL.
contaminated protective clothing and (j) Hygiene areas and practices—(1)
equipment, when removed for laun- General. For employees whose airborne
dering, cleaning, maintenance, or dis- exposure to cadmium is above the PEL,
posal, is placed and stored in sealed, the employer shall provide clean
impermeable bags or other closed, im- change rooms, handwashing facilities,
permeable containers that are designed showers, and lunchroom facilities that
to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. comply with 29 CFR 1926.51.
(iv) The employer shall assure that (2) Change rooms. The employer shall
containers of contaminated protective assure that change rooms are equipped
clothing and equipment that are to be with separate storage facilities for
taken out of the change rooms or the street clothes and for protective cloth-
workplace for laundering, cleaning, ing and equipment, which are designed
maintenance or disposal shall bear la- to prevent dispersion of cadmium and
bels in accordance with paragraph contamination of the employee’s street
(m)(2) of this section. clothes.
(3) Cleaning, replacement, and disposal. (3) Showers and handwashing facilities.
(i) The employer shall provide the pro- (i) The employer shall assure that em-
tective clothing and equipment re- ployees whose airborne exposure to
quired by paragraph (i)(1) of this sec- cadmium is above the PEL shower dur-
tion in a clean and dry condition as ing the end of the work shift.
often as necessary to maintain its ef- (ii) The employer shall assure that
fectiveness, but in any event at least employees who are exposed to cad-
weekly. The employer is responsible mium above the PEL wash their hands
for cleaning and laundering the protec- and faces prior to eating, drinking,
tive clothing and equipment required smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or
by this paragraph to maintain its effec- applying cosmetics.
tiveness and is also responsible for dis- (4) Lunchroom facilities. (i) The em-
posing of such clothing and equipment. ployer shall assure that the lunchroom
(ii) The employer also is responsible facilities are readily accessible to em-
for repairing or replacing required pro- ployees, that tables for eating are
tective clothing and equipment as maintained free of cadmium, and that
needed to maintain its effectiveness. no employee in a lunchroom facility is
When rips or tears are detected while exposed at any time to cadmium at or
an employee is working they shall be above a concentration of 2.5 µg/m3.
immediately mended, or the worksuit (ii) The employer shall assure that
shall be immediately replaced. employees do not enter lunchroom fa-
(iii) The employer shall prohibit the cilities with protective work clothing
removal of cadmium from protective or equipment unless surface cadmium
clothing and equipment by blowing, has been removed from the clothing
shaking, or any other means that dis- and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or
perses cadmium into the air. some other method that removes cad-
(iv) The employer shall assure that mium dust without dispersing it.
any laundering of contaminated cloth- (k) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces
ing or cleaning of contaminated equip- shall be maintained as free as prac-
ment in the workplace is done in a ticable of accumulations of cadmium.
604
(2) All spills and sudden releases of ployer demonstrates that the em-
material containing cadmium shall be ployee:
cleaned up as soon as possible. (1) Is not currently exposed by the
(3) Surfaces contaminated with cad- employer to airborne concentrations of
mium shall, wherever possible, be cadmium at or above the action level
cleaned by vacuuming or other meth- on 30 or more days per year (twelve
ods that minimize the likelihood of consecutive months); and,
cadmium becoming airborne. (2) Is not currently exposed by the
(4) HEPA-filtered vacuuming equip- employer in those tasks on 30 or more
ment or equally effective filtration days per year (twelve consecutive
methods shall be used for vacuuming. months).
The equipment shall be used and (B) Previously exposed— The employer
emptied in a manner that minimizes shall also institute a medical surveil-
the reentry of cadmium into the work- lance program for all employees who
place. might previously have been exposed to
(5) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, cadmium by the employer prior to the
and brushing may be used only where effective date of this standard in tasks
vacuuming or other methods that min- specified under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(A) of
imize the likelihood of cadmium be- this section, unless the employer dem-
coming airborne have been tried and onstrates that the employee did not in
found not to be effective. the years prior to the effective date of
(6) Compressed air shall not be used this section work in those tasks for the
to remove cadmium from any surface employer with exposure to cadmium
unless the compressed air is used in for an aggregated total of more than 12
conjunction with a ventilation system months.
designed to capture the dust cloud cre- (ii) To determine an employee’s fit-
ated by the compressed air. ness for using a respirator, the em-
(7) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con- ployer shall provide the limited med-
tainers, personal protective equipment, ical examination specified in paragraph
and clothing contaminated with cad- (l)(6) of this section.
mium and consigned for disposal shall (iii) The employer shall assure that
be collected and disposed of in sealed all medical examinations and proce-
impermeable bags or other closed, im- dures required by this section are per-
permeable containers. These bags and formed by or under the supervision of a
containers shall be labeled in accord- licensed physician, who has read and is
ance with paragraph (m)(2) of this sec- familiar with the health effects section
tion. of appendix A to this section, the regu-
(l) Medical Surveillance—(1) General— latory text of this section, the protocol
(i) Scope—(A) Currently exposed—The for sample handling and lab selection
employer shall institute a medical sur- in appendix F to this section, and the
veillance program for all employees questionnaire of appendix D to this sec-
who are or may be exposed at or above tion.
the action level and all employees who (iv) The employer shall provide the
perform the following tasks, operations medical surveillance required by this
or jobs: Electrical grounding with cad- section, including multiple physician
mium welding; cutting, brazing, burn- review under paragraph (l)(13) of this
ing, grinding or welding on surfaces section without cost to employees, and
that were painted with cadmium-con- at a time and place that is reasonable
taining paints; electrical work using and convenient to employees.
cadmium-coated conduit; use of cad- (v) The employer shall assure that
mium containing paints; cutting and the collecting and handling of biologi-
welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing cal samples of cadmium in urine (CdU),
or welding with cadmium alloys; fusing cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2
of reinforced steel by cadmium weld- microglobulin in urine (b2-M) taken
ing; maintaining or retrofitting cad- from employees under this section is
mium-coated equipment; and, wrecking done in a manner that assures their re-
and demolition where cadmium is liability and that analysis of biological
present. A medical surveillance pro- samples of cadmium in urine (CdU),
gram will not be required if the em- cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2
605
microglobulin in urine (b2-M) taken CdB level to be at or below 5 µg/lwb,

from employees under this section is then:
performed in laboratories with dem- (A) For employees who are subject to
onstrated proficiency to perform the medical surveillance under paragraphs
particular analysis. (See appendix F to (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of
this section.) current or anticipated exposure to cad-
(2) Initial Examination. (i) For em- mium, the employer shall provide the
ployees covered by medical surveil- minimum level of periodic medical sur-
lance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this veillance in accordance with the re-
section, the employer shall provide an quirements in paragraph (l)(4)(i) of this
initial medical examination. The ex- section; and
amination shall be provided to those (B) For employees who are subject to
employees within 30 days after initial medical surveillance under paragraph
assignment to a job with exposure to (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section because of
cadmium or no later than 90 days after prior but not current exposure, the em-
the effective date of this section, ployer shall provide biological moni-
whichever date is later. toring for CdU, B2-M, and CdB one year
(ii) The initial medical examination after the initial biological monitoring
shall include: and then the employer shall comply
with the requirements of paragraph
(A) A detailed medical and work his-
(l)(4)(vi) of this section.
tory, with emphasis on: Past, present,
(ii) For all employees who are subject
and anticipated future exposure to cad-
to medical surveillance under para-
mium; any history of renal, cardio-
graph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the re-
vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic,
sults of the initial biological moni-
reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal
toring tests show the level of CdU to
system dysfunction; current usage of
exceed 3 µg/g Cr, the level of b2-M to be
medication with potential nephrotoxic
in excess of 300 µg/g Cr, or the level of
side-effects; and smoking history and
CdB to be in excess of 5 µg/lwb, the em-
current status; and
ployer shall:
(B) Biological monitoring that in-
(A) Within two weeks after receipt of
cludes the following tests:
biological monitoring results, reassess
(1) Cadmium in urine (CdU), stand- the employee’s occupational exposure
ardized to grams of creatinine (g/Cr); to cadmium as follows:
(2) Beta-2 microglobulin in urine (b2- (1) Reassess the employee’s work
M), standardized to grams of creatinine practices and personal hygiene;
(g/Cr), with pH specified, as described (2) Reevaluate the employee’s res-
in Appendix F to this section; and pirator use, if any, and the respirator
(3) Cadmium in blood (CdB), stand- program;
ardized to liters of whole blood (lwb). (3) Review the hygiene facilities;
(iii) Recent Examination: An initial (4) Reevaluate the maintenance and
examination is not required to be pro- effectiveness of the relevant engineer-
vided if adequate records show that the ing controls;
employee has been examined in accord- (5) Assess the employee’s smoking
ance with the requirements of para- history and status;
graph (l)(2)(ii) of this section within (B) Within 30 days after the exposure
the past 12 months. In that case, such reassessment, specified in paragraph
records shall be maintained as part of (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, take reason-
the employee’s medical record and the able steps to correct any deficiencies
prior exam shall be treated as if it were found in the reassessment that may be
an initial examination for the purposes responsible for the employee’s excess
of paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this sec- exposure to cadmium; and,
tion. (C) Within 90 days after receipt of bi-
(3) Actions triggered by initial biological ological monitoring results, provide a
monitoring. (i) If the results of the bio- full medical examination to the em-
logical monitoring tests in the initial ployee in accordance with the require-
examination show the employee’s CdU ments of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this sec-
level to be at or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M tion. After completing the medical ex-
level to be at or below 300 µg/g Cr and amination, the examining physician
606
shall determine in a written medical or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M level falls to or
opinion whether to medically remove below 300 µg/g Cr and CdB level falls to
the employee. If the physician deter- or below 5 µg/lwb, the employer shall:
mines that medical removal is not nec- (A) Periodically reassess the employ-
essary, then until the employee’s CdU ee’s occupational exposure to cad-
level falls to or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M mium;
level falls to or below 300 µg/g Cr and (B) Provide biological monitoring in
CdB level falls to or below 5 µg/lwb, the accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B)
employer shall: of this section on a quarterly basis; and
(1) Provide biological monitoring in (C) Provide semiannual medical ex-
accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) aminations in accordance with para-
of this section on a semiannual basis; graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section.
and (iv) For all employees to whom med-
(2) Provide annual medical examina- ical surveillance is provided, beginning
tions in accordance with paragraph on January 1, 1999, and in lieu of para-
(l)(4)(ii) of this section. graph (l)(3)(iii) of this section, when-
(iii) For all employees who are sub- ever the results of initial biological
ject to medical surveillance under monitoring tests show the employee’s
paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the CdU level to be in excess of 7 µg/g Cr, or
results of the initial biological moni- b2-M level to be in excess of 750 µg/g Cr,
toring tests show the level of CdU to be or CdB level to be in excess of 10 µg/
in excess of 15 µg/g Cr, or the level of lwb, the employer shall comply with
CdB to be in excess of 15 µg/lwb, or the the requirements of paragraphs
level of b2-M to be in excess of 1,500 µg/ (l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within
g Cr, the employer shall comply with 90 days after receipt of biological moni-
the requirements of paragraphs toring results, the employer shall pro-
(l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within vide a full medical examination to the
90 days after receipt of biological moni- employee in accordance with the re-
toring results, the employer shall pro- quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of
vide a full medical examination to the this section. After completing the med-
employee in accordance with the re- ical examination, the examining physi-
quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of cian shall determine in a written med-
this section. After completing the medical opinion whether to medically re-
ical examination, the examining physi- move the employee. However, if the
cian shall determine in a written med- initial biological monitoring results
ical opinion whether to medically re- and the biological monitoring results
move the employee. However, if the obtained during the medical examina-
initial biological monitoring results tion both show that: CdU exceeds 7 µg/
and the biological monitoring results g Cr; or CdB exceeds 10 µg/lwb; or b2-M
obtained during the medical examina- exceeds 750 µg/g Cr, and in addition CdU
tion both show that: CdU exceeds 15 µg/ exceeds 3 µg/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 µg/
g Cr; or CdB exceeds 15 µg/lwb; or b2-M liter of whole blood, then the physician
exceeds 1500 µg/g Cr, and in addition shall medically remove the employee
CdU exceeds 3 µg/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 from exposure to cadmium at or above
µg/liter of whole blood, then the physi- the action level. If the second set of bi-
cian shall medically remove the em- ological monitoring results obtained
ployee from exposure to cadmium at or during the medical examination does
above the action level. If the second set not show that a mandatory removal
of biological monitoring results ob- trigger level has been exceeded, then
tained during the medical examination the employee is not required to be re-
does not show that a mandatory removed by the mandatory provisions of
moval trigger level has been exceeded, this paragraph. If the employee is not
then the employee is not required to be required to be removed by the manda-
removed by the mandatory provisions tory provisions of this paragraph or by
of this paragraph. If the employee is the physician’s determination, then
not required to be removed by the man- until the employee’s CdU level falls to
datory provisions of this paragraph or or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M level falls to or
by the physician’s determination, then below 300 µg/g Cr and CdB level falls to
until the employee’s CdU level falls to or below 5 µg/lwb, the employer shall:
607
(A) Periodically reassess the employ- (E) Biological monitoring, as re-

ee’s occupational exposure to cad- quired in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this
mium; section;
(B) Provide biological monitoring in (F) Blood analysis, in addition to the
accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) analysis required under paragraph
of this section on a quarterly basis; and (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including
(C) Provide semiannual medical ex- blood urea nitrogen, complete blood
aminations in accordance with para- count, and serum creatinine;
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (G) Urinalysis, in addition to the
(4) Periodic medical surveillance. (i) analysis required under paragraph
For each employee who is covered by (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including
medical surveillance under paragraph the determination of albumin, glucose,
(l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of and total and low molecular weight
current or anticipated exposure to cad- proteins;
mium, the employer shall provide at (H) For males over 40 years old, pros-
least the minimum level of periodic tate palpation, or other at least as ef-
medical surveillance, which consists of fective diagnostic test(s), and;
periodic medical examinations and (I) Any additional tests or procedures
periodic biological monitoring. A peri- deemed appropriate by the examining
odic medical examination shall be pro- physician.
vided within one year after the initial (iii) Periodic biological monitoring
examination required by paragraph shall be provided in accordance with
(l)(2) of this section and thereafter at paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section.
least biennially. Biological sampling (iv) If the results of periodic biologi-
shall be provided at least annually ei- cal monitoring or the results of bio-
ther as part of a periodic medical ex- logical monitoring performed as part of
amination or separately as periodic bi- the periodic medical examination show
ological monitoring. the level of the employee’s CdU, b2–M,
(ii) The periodic medical examination or CdB to be in excess of the levels
shall include: specified in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iii)
of this section; or beginning on Janu-
(A) A detailed medical and work his-
ary 1, 1999, in excess of the levels speci-
tory, or update thereof, with emphasis
fied in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iv), the
on: Past, present and anticipated fu-
employer shall take the appropriate
ture exposure to cadmium; smoking actions specified in paragraphs
history and current status; reproduc- (l)(3)(ii)–(iv) of this section, respec-
tive history; current use of medica- tively.
tions with potential nephrotoxic side-
(v) For previously exposed employees
effects; any history of renal, cardio- under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this sec-
vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, tion:
and/or musculo-skeletal system dys-
(A) If the employee’s levels of CdU
function; and as part of the medical
did not exceed 3 µg/g Cr, CdB did not
and work history, for employees who exceed 5 µg/lwb, and b2–M did not ex-
wear respirators, questions 3–11 and 25– ceed 300 µg/g Cr in the initial biological
32 in appendix D to this section; monitoring tests, and if the results of
(B) A complete physical examination the followup biological monitoring re-
with emphasis on: blood pressure, the quired by paragraph (l)(3)(i)(B) of this
respiratory system, and the urinary section one year after the initial exam-
system; ination confirm the previous results,
(C) A 14 inch by 17 inch, or a reason- the employer may discontinue all peri-
ably standard sized posterior-anterior odic medical surveillance for that em-
chest X-ray (after the initial X-ray, the ployee.
frequency of chest X-rays is to be de- (B) If the initial biological moni-
termined by the examining physician); toring results for CdU, CdB, or b2–M
(D) Pulmonary function tests, includ- were in excess of the levels specified in
ing forced vital capacity (FVC) and paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, but
forced expiratory volume at 1 second subsequent biological monitoring re-
(FEV1); sults required by paragraph (l)(3)(ii)–
608
(iv) of this section show that the em- if any; the employee’s smoking history
ployee’s CdU levels no longer exceed 3 and status; the respiratory protection
µg/g Cr, CdB levels no longer exceed 5 program; the hygiene facilities; the
µg/lwb, and b2–M levels no longer ex- maintenance and effectiveness of the
ceed 300 µg/g Cr, the employer shall relevant engineering controls; and take
provide biological monitoring for CdU, all reasonable steps to correct the defi-
CdB, and b2–M one year after these ciencies found in the reassessment that
most recent biological monitoring re- may be responsible for the employee’s
sults. If the results of the followup bio- excess exposure to cadmium.
logical monitoring specified in this (B) Provide semi-annual medical re-
paragraph, confirm the previous re- examinations to evaluate the abnormal
sults, the employer may discontinue clinical sign(s) of cadmium toxicity
all periodic medical surveillance for until the results are normal or the em-
that employee. ployee is medically removed; and
(C) However, if the results of the fol- (C) Where the results of tests for
low-up tests specified in paragraph total proteins in urine are abnormal,
(l)(4)(v)(A) or (B) of this section indi- provide a more detailed medical eval-
cate that the level of the employee’s uation of the toxic effects of cadmium
CdU, b2–M, or CdB exceeds these same on the employee’s renal system.
levels, the employer is required to pro- (6) Examination for respirator use. (i)
vide annual medical examinations in
To determine an employee’s fitness for
accordance with the provisions of para-
respirator use, the employer shall pro-
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section until the
vide a medical examination that in-
results of biological monitoring are
cludes the elements specified in para-
consistently below these levels or the
graph (l)(6)(i)(A)–(D) of this section.
examining physician determines in a
This examination shall be provided
written medical opinion that further
prior to the employee’s being assigned
medical surveillance is not required to
to a job that requires the use of a res-
protect the employee’s health.
pirator or no later than 90 days after
(vi) A routine, biennial medical ex-
this section goes into effect, whichever
amination is not required to be pro-
date is later, to any employee without
vided in accordance with paragraphs
a medical examination within the pre-
(l)(3)(i) and (l)(4) of this section if ade-
ceding 12 months that satisfies the re-
quate medical records show that the
quirements of this paragraph.
employee has been examined in accord-
ance with the requirements of para- (A) A detailed medical and work his-
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section within tory, or update thereof, with emphasis
the past 12 months. In that case, such on: past exposure to cadmium; smoking
records shall be maintained by the em- history and current status; any history
ployer as part of the employee’s med- of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory,
ical record, and the next routine, peri- hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal
odic medical examination shall be system dysfunction; a description of
made available to the employee within the job for which the respirator is re-
two years of the previous examination. quired; and questions 3–11 and 25–32 in
(5) Actions triggered by medical exami- appendix D;
nations. (i) If the results of a medical (B) A blood pressure test;
examination carried out in accordance (C) Biological monitoring of the em-
with this section indicate any labora- ployee’s levels of CdU, CdB and b2–M in
tory or clinical finding consistent with accordance with the requirements of
cadmium toxicity that does not require paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section,
employer action under paragraphs unless such results already have been
(l)(2), (3) or (4) of this section, the em- obtained within the twelve months;
ployer shall take the following steps and
and continue to take them until the (D) Any other test or precedure that
physician determines that they are no the examining physician deems appro-
longer necessary. priate.
(A) Periodically reassess: The em- (ii) After reviewing all the informa-
ployee’s work practices and personal tion obtained from the medical exam-
hygiene; the employee’s respirator use, ination required in paragraph (l)(6)(i)
609
of this section, the physician shall de- this section, no termination of employ-
termine whether the employee is fit to ment medical examination is required.
wear a respirator. (9) Information provided to the physi-
(iii) Whenever an employee has ex- cian. The employer shall provide the
hibited difficulty in breathing during a following information to the exam-
respirator fit test or during use of a ining physician:
respirator, the employer, as soon as (i) A copy of this standard and appen-
possible, shall provide the employee dices;
with a periodic medical examination in (ii) A description of the affected em-
accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of ployee’s former, current, and antici-
this section to determine the employ- pated duties as they relate to the em-
ee’s fitness to wear a respirator. ployee’s occupational exposure to cad-
(iv) Where the results of the exam- mium;
ination required under paragraphs (iii) The employee’s former, current,
(l)(6)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are and anticipated future levels of occupa-
abnormal, medical limitation or prohi- tional exposure to cadmium;
bition of respirator use shall be consid- (iv) A description of any personal
ered. If the employee is allowed to wear protective equipment, including res-
a respirator, the employee’s ability to pirators, used or to be used by the em-
continue to do so shall be periodically ployee, including when and for how
evaluated by a physician. long the employee has used that equip-
(7) Emergency Examinations. (i) In ad- ment; and
dition to the medical surveillance re-
(v) Relevant results of previous bio-
quired in paragraphs (l)(2)–(6) of this
logical monitoring and medical exami-
section, the employer shall provide a
nations.
medical examination as soon as pos-
sible to any employee who may have (10) Physician’s written medical opin-
been acutely exposed to cadmium be- ion. (i) The employer shall promptly
cause of an emergency. obtain a written, medical opinion from
(ii) The examination shall include the examining physician for each med-
the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii), ical examination performed on each
of this section, with emphasis on the employee. This written opinion shall
respiratory system, other organ sys- contain:
tems considered appropriate by the ex- (A) The physician’s diagnosis for the
amining physician, and symptoms of employee;
acute overexposure, as identified in (B) The physician’s opinion as to
paragraphs II(B)(1)–(2) and IV of appen- whether the employee has any detected
dix A of this section. medical condition(s) that would place
(8) Termination of employment exam- the employee at increased risk of ma-
ination. (i) At termination of employ- terial impairment to health from fur-
ment, the employer shall provide a ther exposure to cadmium, including
medical examination in accordance any indications of potential cadmium
with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section, toxicity;
including a chest X-ray where nec- (C) The results of any biological or
essary, to any employee to whom at other testing or related evaluations
any prior time the employer was re- that directly assess the employee’s ab-
quired to provide medical surveillance sorption of cadmium;
under paragraph (l)(1)(i) or (l)(7) of this (D) Any recommended removal from,
section. However, if the last examina- or limitation on the activities or duties
tion satisfied the requirements of para- of the employee or on the employee’s
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section and was use of personal protective equipment,
less than six months prior to the date such as respirators;
of termination, no further examination (E) A statement that the physician
is required unless otherwise specified has clearly and carefully explained to
in paragraph (l)(3) or (l)(5) of this sec- the employee the results of the medical
tion; examination, including all biological
(ii) In addition, if the employer has monitoring results and any medical
discontinued all periodic medical sur- conditions related to cadmium expo-
veillance under paragraph (l)(4)(v) of sure that require further evaluation or
610
treatment, and any limitation on the ployee must be permanently removed

employee’s diet or use of medications. from excess cadmium exposure.
(ii) The employer shall promptly ob- (E) The employer may not return an
tain a copy of the results of any bio- employee who has been medically re-
logical monitoring provided by an em- moved for any reason to his/her former
ployer to an employee independently of job status until a physician determines
a medical examination under para- in a written medical opinion that con-
graphs (l)(2) and (l)(4) of this section, tinued medical removal is no longer
and, in lieu of a written medical opin- necessary to protect the employee’s
ion, an explanation sheet explaining health.
those results. (ii) Where an employee is found unfit
(iii) The employer shall instruct the to wear a respirator under paragraph
physician not to reveal orally or in the (l)(6)(ii) of this section, the employer
written medical opinion given to the shall remove the employee from work
employer specific findings or diagnoses where exposure to cadmium is above
unrelated to occupational exposure to the PEL.
cadmium. (iii) Where removal is based upon any
(11) Medical Removal Protection reason other than the employee’s in-
(MRP)—(i) General. (A) The employer ability to wear a respirator, the em-
shall temporarily remove an employee ployer shall remove the employee from
work where exposure to cadmium is at
from work where there is excess expo-
or above the action level.
sure to cadmium on each occasion that
(iv) Except as specified in paragraph
medical removal is required under
(l)(11)(v) of this section, no employee
paragraphs (l)(3), (l)(4), or (l)(6) of this
who was removed because his/her level
section and on each occasion that a
of CdU, CdB and/or b2–M exceeded the
physician determines in a written med-
trigger levels in paragraph (l)(3) or
ical opinion that the employee should
(l)(4) of this section may be returned to
be removed from such exposure. The
work with exposure to cadmium at or
physician’s determination may be
above the action level until the em-
based on biological monitoring results,
ployee’s levels of CdU fall to or below 3
inability to wear a respirator, evidence µg/g Cr, CdB fall to or below 5 µg/lwb,
of illness, other signs or symptoms of and b2–M fall to or below 300 µg/g Cr.
cadmium-related dysfunction or dis- (v) However, when in the examining
ease, or any other reason deemed medi- physician’s opinion continued exposure
cally sufficient by the physician. to cadmium will not pose an increased
(B) The employer shall medically re- risk to the employee’s health and there
move an employee in accordance with are special circumstances that make
paragraph (l)(11) of this section regard- continued medical removal an inappro-
less of whether at the time of removal priate remedy, the physician shall fully
a job is available into which the re- discuss these matters with the em-
moved employee may be transferred. ployee, and then in a written deter-
(C) Whenever an employee is medi- mination may return a worker to his/
cally removed under paragraph (l)(11) her former job status despite what
of this section, the employer shall would otherwise be unacceptably high
transfer the removed employee to a job biological monitoring results. There-
where the exposure to cadmium is after and until such time as the em-
within the permissible levels specified ployee’s biological monitoring results
in that paragraph as soon as one behave decreased to levels where he/she
comes available. could have been returned to his/her
(D) For any employee who is medi- former job status, the returned em-
cally removed under the provisions of ployee shall continue medical surveil-
paragraph (l)(11)(i) of this section, the lance as if he/she were still on medical
employer shall provide follow-up med- removal. Until such time, the employee
ical examinations semi-annually until, is no longer subject to mandatory med-
in a written medical opinion, the ex- ical removal. Subsequent questions re-
amining physician determines that ei- garding the employee’s medical re-
ther the employee may be returned to moval shall be decided solely by a final
his/her former job status or the em- medical determination.
611
(vi) Where an employer, although not ticipation in medical surveillance pro-

required by this section to do so, re- vided in accordance with this section.
moves an employee from exposure to (13) Multiple physician review. (i) If
cadmium or otherwise places limita- the employer selects the initial physi-
tions on an employee due to the effects cian to conduct any medical examina-
of cadmium exposure on the employ- tion or consultation provided to an em-
ee’s medical condition, the employer ployee under this section, the employee
shall provide the same medical re- may designate a second physician to:
moval protection benefits to that em- (A) Review any findings, determina-
ployee under paragraph (l)(12) of this tions, or recommendations of the ini-
section as would have been provided tial physician; and
had the removal been required under (B) Conduct such examinations, con-
paragraph (l)(11) of this section. sultations, and laboratory tests as the
(12) Medical removal protection benefits. second physician deems necessary to
(i) The employer shall provide medical facilitate this review.
removal protection benefits to an em- (ii) The employer shall promptly no-
ployee for up to a maximum of 18 tify an employee of the right to seek a
months each time, and while the em- second medical opinion after each oc-
ployee is temporarily medically re- casion that an initial physician pro-
moved under paragraph (l)(11) of this vided by the employer conducts a med-
section. ical examination or consultation pur-
(ii) For purposes of this section, the suant to this section. The employer
requirement that the employer provide may condition its participation in, and
medical removal protection benefits payment for, multiple physician review
means that the employer shall main- upon the employee doing the following
tain the total normal earnings, senior- within fifteen (15) days after receipt of
ity, and all other employee rights and this notice, or receipt of the initial
physician’s written opinion, whichever
benefits of the removed employee, in-
is later:
cluding the employee’s right to his/her
(A) Informing the employer that he
former job status, as if the employee
or she intends to seek a medical opin-
had not been removed from the em-
ion; and
ployee’s job or otherwise medically
(B) Initiating steps to make an ap-
limited.
pointment with a second physician.
(iii) Where, after 18 months on med- (iii) If the findings, determinations,
ical removal because of elevated bio- or recommendations of the second phy-
logical monitoring results, the employ- sician differ from those of the initial
ee’s monitoring results have not de- physician, then the employer and the
clined to a low enough level to permit employee shall assure that efforts are
the employee to be returned to his/her made for the two physicians to resolve
former job status: any disagreement.
(A) The employer shall make avail- (iv) If the two physicians have been
able to the employee a medical exam- unable to quickly resolve their dis-
ination pursuant to this section in agreement, then the employer and the
order to obtain a final medical deter- employee, through their respective
mination as to whether the employee physicians, shall designate a third phy-
may be returned to his/her former job sician to:
status or must be permanently re- (A) Review any findings, determina-
moved from excess cadmium exposure; tions, or recommendations of the other
and two physicians; and
(B) The employer shall assure that (B) Conduct such examinations, con-
the final medical determination indi- sultations, laboratory tests, and dis-
cates whether the employee may be re- cussions with the other two physicians
turned to his/her former job status and as the third physician deems necessary
what steps, if any, should be taken to to resolve the disagreement among
protect the employee’s health; them.
(iv) The employer may condition the (v) The employer shall act consist-
provision of medical removal protec- ently with the findings, determina-
tion benefits upon the employee’s par- tions, and recommendations of the
612
third physician, unless the employer shall be posted at all approaches to

and the employee reach an agreement regulated areas so that an employee
that is consistent with the rec- may read the signs and take necessary
ommendations of at least one of the protective steps before entering the
other two physicians. area.
(14) Alternate physician determination. (ii) Warning signs required by para-
The employer and an employee or des- graph (m)(2)(i) of this section shall
ignated employee representative may bear the following information:
agree upon the use of any alternate
form of physician determination in lieu DANGER, CADMIUM, CANCER HAZARD,
of the multiple physician review pro- CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DIS-
vided by paragraph (l)(13) of this sec- EASE, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY,
tion, so long as the alternative is expe- RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS
ditious and at least as protective of the AREA
employee. (iii) The employer shall assure that
(15) Information the employer must pro- signs required by this paragraph are il-
vide the employee. (i) The employer luminated, cleaned, and maintained as
shall provide a copy of the physician’s necessary so that the legend is readily
written medical opinion to the exam- visible.
ined employee within five working
(3) Warning labels. (i) Shipping and
days after receipt thereof.
storage containers containing cad-
(ii) The employer shall provide the
mium, cadmium compounds, or cad-
employee with a copy of the employ-
mium contaminated clothing, equip-
ee’s biological monitoring results and
ment, waste, scrap, or debris shall bear
an explanation sheet explaining the re-
appropriate warning labels, as specified
sults within five working days after re-
in paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of this section.
ceipt thereof.
(ii) The warning labels shall shall in-
(iii) Within 30 days after a request by
clude at least the following informa-
an employee, the employer shall pro-
tion:
vide the employee with the informa-
tion the employer is required to pro- DANGER, CONTAINS CADMIUM, CANCER
vide the examining physician under HAZARD, AVOID CREATING DUST, CAN
paragraph (l)(9) of this section. CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE
(16) Reporting. In addition to other
medical events that are required to be (iii) Where feasible, installed cad-
reported on the OSHA Form No. 200, mium products shall have a visible
the employer shall report any abnor- label or other indication that cadmium
mal condition or disorder caused by oc- is present.
cupational exposure to cadmium asso- (4) Employee information and training.
ciated with employment as specified in (i) The employer shall institute a
Chapter (V)(E) of the Reporting Guide- training program for all employees who
lines for Occupational Injuries and Ill- are potentially exposed to cadmium,
nesses. assure employee participation in the
(m) Communication of cadmium haz- program, and maintain a record of the
ards to employees—(1) General. In com- contents of such program.
munications concerning cadmium haz- (ii) Training shall be provided prior
ards, employers shall comply with the to or at the time of initial assignment
requirements of OSHA’s Hazard Com- to a job involving potential exposure to
munication Standard for the construc- cadmium and at least annually there-
tion industry, 29 CFR 1926.59, including after.
but not limited to the requirements (iii) The employer shall make the
concerning warning signs and labels, training program understandable to
material safety data sheets (MSDS), the employee and shall assure that
and employee information and train- each employee is informed of the fol-
ing. In addition, employers shall com- lowing:
ply with the following requirements: (A) The health hazards associated
(2) Warning signs. (i) Warning signs with cadmium exposure, with special
shall be provided and displayed in regu- attention to the information incor-
lated areas. In addition, warning signs porated in appendix A to this section;
613
(B) The quantity, location, manner of (A) The monitoring date, shift, dura-
use, release, and storage of cadmium in tion, air volume, and results in terms
the workplace and the specific nature of an 8-hour TWA of each sample
of operations that could result in expo- taken, and if cadmium is not detected,
sure to cadmium, especially exposures the detection level;
above the PEL; (B) The name, social security num-
(C) The engineering controls and ber, and job classification of all em-
work practices associated with the employees monitored and of all other em-
ployee’s job assignment; ployees whose exposures the moni-
(D) The measures employees can take toring result is intended to represent,
to protect themselves from exposure to including, where applicable, a descrip-
cadmium, including modification of tion of how it was determined that the
such habits as smoking and personal employee’s monitoring result could be
hygiene, and specific procedures the taken to represent other employee’s
employer has implemented to protect exposures;
employees from exposure to cadmium (C) A description of the sampling and
such as appropriate work practices, analytical methods used and evidence
emergency procedures, and the provi- of their accuracy;
sion of personal protective equipment; (D) The type of respiratory protec-
(E) The purpose, proper selection, fit- tive device, if any, worn by the mon-
ting, proper use, and limitations of res- itored employee and by any other em-
pirators and protective clothing; ployee whose exposure the monitoring
(F) The purpose and a description of result is intended to represent;
the medical surveillance program re- (E) A notation of any other condi-
quired by paragraph (l) of this section; tions that might have affected the
monitoring results.
(G) The contents of this section and
(F) Any exposure monitoring or ob-
its appendices, and,
jective data that were used and the lev-
(H) The employee’s rights of access
els.
to records under § 1926.33(g) (1) and (2).
(iii) The employer shall maintain
(iv) Additional access to information this record for at least thirty (30)
and training program and materials. years, in accordance with § 1926.33 of
(A) The employer shall make a copy this part.
of this section and its appendices read- (iv) The employer shall also provide a
ily available to all affected employees copy of the results of an employee’s air
and shall provide a copy without cost if monitoring prescribed in paragraph (d)
requested. of this section to an industry trade as-
(B) Upon request, the employer shall sociation and to the employee’s union,
provide to the Assistant Secretary or if any, or, if either of such associations
the Director all materials relating to or unions do not exist, to another com-
the employee information and the parable organization that is competent
training program. to maintain such records and is reason-
(5) Multi-employer workplace. In a ably accessible to employers and em-
multi-employer workplace, an employees in the industry.
ployer who produces, uses, or stores (2) Objective data for exemption from re-
cadmium in a manner that may expose quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For
employees of other employers to cad- purposes of this section, objective data
mium shall notify those employers of are information demonstrating that a
the potential hazard in accordance particular product or material con-
with paragraph (e) of the hazard com- taining cadmium or a specific process,
munication standard for construction, operation, or activity involving cad-
29 CFR 1926.59. mium cannot release dust or fumes in
(n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure moni- concentrations at or above the action
toring. (i) The employer shall establish level even under the worst-case release
and keep an accurate record of all air conditions. Objective data can be ob-
monitoring for cadmium in the work- tained from an industry-wide study or
place. from laboratory product test results
(ii) This record shall include at least from manufacturers of cadmium-con-
the following information: taining products or materials. The data
614
the employer uses from an industry- file for one (1) year beyond the date of
wide survey must be obtained under training of that employee.
workplace conditions closely resem- (5) Availability. (i) Except as other-
bling the processes, types of material, wise provided for in this section, access
control methods, work practices and to all records required to be main-
environmental conditions in the em- tained by paragraphs (n)(1)–(4) of this
ployer’s current operations. section shall be in accordance with the
(ii) The employer shall maintain the provisions of § 1926.33 of this part.
record for at least 30 years of the objec- (ii) Within 15 days after a request,
tive data relied upon. the employer shall make an employee’s
(3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- medical records required to be kept by
ployer shall establish and maintain an paragraph (n)(3) of this section avail-
accurate record for each employee cov- able for examination and copying to
ered by medical surveillance under the subject employee, to designated
paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section. representatives, to anyone having the
(ii) The record shall include at least specific written consent of the subject
the following information about the employee, and after the employee’s
employee: death or incapacitation, to the employ-
(A) Name, social security number, ee’s family members.
and description of duties; (6) Transfer of records. Whenever an
(B) A copy of the physician’s written employer ceases to do business and
opinions and of the explanation sheets there is no successor employer or des-
for biological monitoring results; ignated organization to receive and re-
(C) A copy of the medical history, tain records for the prescribed period,
and the results of any physical exam- the employer shall comply with the re-
ination and all test results that are requirements concerning transfer of
quired to be provided by this section, records set forth in § 1926.33 (h) of this
including biological tests, X-rays, pul- part.
monary function tests, etc., or that (o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
have been obtained to further evaluate ployee observation. The employer shall
any condition that might be related to provide affected employees or their
cadmium exposure; designated representatives an oppor-
(D) The employee’s medical symp- tunity to observe any monitoring of
toms that might be related to exposure employee exposure to cadmium.
to cadmium; and (2) Observation procedures. When ob-
(E) A copy of the information pro- servation of monitoring requires entry
vided to the physician as required by into an area where the use of protec-
paragraph (l)(9) of this section. tive clothing or equipment is required,
(iii) The employer shall assure that the employer shall provide the observer
this record is maintained for the dura- with that clothing and equipment and
tion of employment plus thirty (30) shall assure that the observer uses
years, in accordance with § 1926.33 of such clothing and equipment and com-
this part. plies with all other applicable safety
(iv) At the employee’s request, the and health procedures.
employer shall promptly provide a (p) [Reserved]
copy of the employee’s medical record, (q) Appendices. Except where portions
or update as appropriate, to a medical of appendices A, B, D, E, and F to this
doctor or a union specified by the em- section are expressly incorporated in
ployee. requirements of this section, these ap-
(4) Training. The employer shall cer- pendices are purely informational and
tify that employees have been trained are not intended to create any addi-
by preparing a certification record tional obligations not otherwise im-
which includes the identity of the per- posed or to detract from any existing
son trained, the signature of the em- obligations.
ployer or the person who conducted the
training, and the date the training was APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE
completed. The certification records SAFETY DATA SHEET
shall be prepared at the completion of NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
training and shall be maintained on struction work under this Appendix A are
615
identical to those set forth in Appendix A to § 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter.
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE struction work under this section are iden-
TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR CADMIUM tical to those set forth at § 1910.1045 of this
chapter.
struction work under this Appendix B are [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
identical to those set forth in Appendix B to
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter. § 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide.
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1127 [RESERVED] NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1127—OCCUPATIONAL tical to those set forth at § 1910.1047 of this
HEALTH HISTORY INTERVIEW WITH REF- chapter.
ERENCE TO CADMIUM EXPOSURE
[61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
struction work under this Appendix D are § 1926.1148 Formaldehyde.
identical to those set forth in Appendix D to NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter. struction work under this section are iden-
APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1127—CADMIUM IN tical to those set forth at § 1910.1048 of this
WORKPLACE ATMOSPHERES chapter.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
struction work under this Appendix E are
identical to those set forth in Appendix E to § 1926.1152 Methylene chloride.
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction employment under this section are
APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1127—NONMANDATORY identical to those set forth at 29 CFR
PROTOCOL FOR BIOLOGICAL MONITORING 1910.1052.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997]
struction work under this Appendix F are
identical to those set forth in Appendix F to APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNA-
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter.
TIONS FOR GENERAL INDUSTRY
[57 FR 42452, Sept. 14, 1992, as amended at 57 STANDARDS INCORPORATED INTO
FR 49272, Oct. 30, 1992; 58 FR 21787, Apr. 23, BODY OF CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
1993. Redesignated and amended at 59 FR 215,
Jan. 3, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR New Designations for General Industry
31433, 31434, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8, Standards Incorporated Into Body of Con-
1998; 70 FR 1144, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16675, Apr. struction Standards
3, 2006; 71 FR 50192, Aug. 24, 2006]
1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910
§ 1926.1128 Benzene. STANDARDS
struction work under this section are iden- Source § no. and/or
New § no. and/or para. para.
chapter.
1926.20 (c) ..................... 1910.5 (a)
[61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] [Do.] (d) ................... [Do.] (c)
[Do.] (e) ................... [Do.] (d)
§ 1926.1129 Coke oven emissions. 1926.32(g) ...................... 1910.12(b)
1926.33 ........................... 1910.20
1926.34 (a) ..................... 1910.36(b)(4)
[Do.] (b) ................... 1910.37 (q)(1)
[Do.] (c) .................... [Do.] (k)(2)
chapter.
1926.35 ........................... 1910.38(a)
[61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] 1926.50(g) ...................... 1910.151(c)
1926.51(a)(6) .................. 1910.141(a)(2)(v)
§ 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3- [Do.] (d)(2) ................... [Do.] (h)
chloropropane. [Do.] (f) (2)—(4) .......... [Do.] (d) (1)—(3)
[Do.] (g) ....................... [Do.] (g)(2)
[Do.] (h) ....................... [Do.] (a)(5)
[Do.] (i) ........................ [Do.] (e)
1926.53 (c)—(r) .............. 1910.96
chapter.
1926.57 (f)—(i) ............... 1910.94
[61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] 1926.64 ........................... 1910.119
616
1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910
STANDARDS—Continued STANDARDS—Continued
Source § no. and/or Source § no. and/or

New § no. and/or para. New § no. and/or para.
para. para.
1926.65 ........................... 1910.120 1926.303(b)(2) ................ 1910.215(a) (2)

1926.66 (a) ..................... 1910.107 (a) [Do.] (e) ................... [Do.] (4)
[Do.] (b) ....................... [Do.] (b) (1)—(10) 1926.304 (g) ................... 1910.213(h)(1)
[Do.] (c)—(d) ............... [Do.] (c)—(d) [Do.] (h) ................... [Do.] (d)(1)
[Do.] (e)—(g) ............... [Do.] (h)—(j) [Do.] (i) ..................... [Do.] (c)(1)
1926.95 ........................... 1910.132 1926.305(d)(1) ................ 1910.244(a)(2) (iii)—(viii)
1926.96 ........................... 1910.136 1926.306 ......................... 1910.169
1926.97 (a)—(e) ............. 1910.156(e) 1926.307 ......................... 1910.219
[Do.] (f)—(h) ................ [Do.] Subpt. L App. 1926.350(a) (10) ............. 1910.253(b) (4)(iii)
E [Do.] (11) ................. [Do.] (2)(ii)
1926.98 ........................... 1910.156(f) [Do.] (12) ................. 1910.101(b)
1926.102(a) (6) ............... 1910.133(a) (2) 1926.353(b)(3) ................ 1910.252(b)(4)(iv)
[Do.] (7) ....................... [Do.] (4) 1926.416 (a)(4) ............... 1910.333(c)(2)
[Do.] (8) ....................... [Do.] (5) [Do.] (f) (1) .................. [Do.] (c)(10)
1926.103 (d) ................... 1910.134 (a) [Do.] (2) ................... 1910.334(a)(1)
[Do.] (e) ....................... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (3) ................... [Do.] (a)(2)(iii)
[Do.] (f)—(i) ................. [Do.] (d)—(g) [Do.] (4) ................... [Do.] (a)(5)
1926.150(c)(1) (xi) .......... 1910.157 (g)(1) [Do.] (5)—(6) ........... [Do.] (b) (1)—(2)
[Do.] (xii) .................. [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (7)—(9) ........... [Do.] (c) (1)—(3)
[Do.] (xiii) ................. [Do.] (c)(4) [Do.] (10) ................. [Do.] (d)
[Do.] (xiv) ................. [Do.] (e)(3) 1926.417(d) .................... 1910.333(b)(2)
1926.152 (b)(5) ............... 1910.107(e)(2) 1926.451(a) (22) ............. 1910.28(a) (15)
[Do.] (h) ................... 1910.106(j) [Do.] (23) ................. [Do.] (18)
[Do.] (i) ..................... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (24) ................. [Do.] (20)
[Do.] (j) ..................... [Do.] (c) 1926.453 (a) ................... 1910.29(a)
[Do.] (k) (1)—(3) ...... [Do.] (g)(4) [Do.] (b) ................... [Do.] (c)
[Do.] (k)(4) ............... [Do.] (a)(22) 1926.550 (a)(19) ............. 1910.184(c)(9)
1926.153(a) (3) ............... 1910.110(a)(4) 1926.600(a)(7) ................ 1910.176(f)
[Do.] (m) (1) ............. [Do.] (d)(1) 1926.602(c)(1) (vii) ......... 1910.178(m) (3)
[Do.] (2) ................... [Do.] (d)(2) [Do.] (viii) .............. [Do.] (12)
[Do.] (3) ................... [Do.] (d)(7)(vii) 1926.900 (s) ................... 1910.109 (g)(2)(ii)
[Do.] (4) ................... [Do.] (d)(7)(viii) [Do.] (t) .................... [Do.] (h)(3)(ii)
[Do.] (n) ................... [Do.] (b)(5)(iii) 1926.905(u) .................... [Do.] (e)(3)(iii)
[Do.] (o) ................ [Do.] (d)(10) 1926.914(aa) .................. [Do.] (a)(12)
1926.156 ......................... 1910.160 1926.1050(b) .................. 1910.21(g)(9)
1926.157 ......................... 1910.162
1926.158 ......................... 1910.164 1926.1071 ....................... 1910.401
1926.159 ......................... 1910.165 1926.1072 ....................... 1910.402
1926.200(c)(3) ................ 1910.145(d)(4) 1926.1076 ....................... 1910.410
1926.250(c) ..................... 1910.176(c) 1926.1080 ....................... 1910.420
[Do.] (d) (1)—(4) ...... 1910.30(a) (1), (2), (4) 1926.1081 ....................... 1910.421
and (5) 1926.1082 ....................... 1910.422
1926.251(a)(5) ................ 1910.184(a) 1926.1083 ....................... 1910.423
[Do.] (a)(6) ................... [Do.] (d) 1926.1084 ....................... 1910.424
[Do.] (b)(6)(i)—(ii) ........ [Do.] (e)(3)(i)—(ii) 1926.1085 ....................... 1910.425
[Do.] (c)(6)—(7) ........... [Do.] (c) (2)—(3) 1926.1086 ....................... 1910.426
[Do.] (c)(8) ................... [Do.] (c)(5) 1926.1087 ....................... 1910.427
[Do.] (c)(9) ................... [Do.] (c)(7) 1926.1090 ....................... 1910.430
[Do.] (c)(10)—(12) ....... [Do.] (c)(10)—(12) 1926.1091 ....................... 1910.440
[Do.] (c)(13)—(15) ....... [Do.](f) (2)—(4) 1926.1092 ....................... 1910.441
[Do.] (d)(3)—(6) ........... [Do.] (h) (2)—(5)
[Do.] (e)(3)—(5) ........... [Do.] (i) (2)—(4) 1926.1102 ....................... 1910.1002
[Do.] (e)(6)—(7) ........... [Do.] (i) (6)—(7) 1926.1103 ....................... 1910.1003
[Do.] (e)(8) ................... [Do.] (i)(9) 1926.1104 ....................... 1910.1004
1926.300(b) (3) ............... 1910.212(a)(1) 1926.1105 ....................... 1910.1005
[Do.] (4) ................... [Do.] (a)(3) 1926.1106 ....................... 1910.1006
[Do.] (5) ................... [Do.] (a)(5) 1926.1107 ....................... 1910.1007
[Do.] (6) ................... [Do.] (b) 1926.1108 ....................... 1910.1008
[Do.] (7) ................... 1910.215(b)(9) 1926.1109 ....................... 1910.1009
[Do.] (8) and (9) ....... [Do.] (b) (3) and (4) 1926.1110 ....................... 1910.1010
1926.302(b)(10) .............. 1910.244(b) 1926.1111 ....................... 1910.1011
617
1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910
STANDARDS—Continued STANDARDS—Continued
Source § no. and/or Source § no. and/or

New § no. and/or para. New § no. and/or para.
para. para.
1926.1112 ....................... 1910.1012 1926.1129 ....................... 1910.1029

1926.1113 ....................... 1910.1013 1926.1144 ....................... 1910.1044
1926.1114 ....................... 1910.1014 1926.1145 ....................... 1910.1045
1926.1115 ....................... 1910.1015 1926.1147 ....................... 1910.1047
1926.1116 ....................... 1910.1016 1926.1148 ....................... 1910.1048
1926.1117 ....................... 1910.1017
1926.1118 ....................... 1910.1018 [58 FR 35305, June 30, 1993, as amended at 61
1926.1128 ....................... 1910.1028 FR 9255, Mar. 7, 1996]
618

OSHA 1926 Construction Safety

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OSHA 1926 Construction Safety

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.

61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-

Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—LIST OF NA-

1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. STANDARDS

Subpart A—General § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.

opportunity to be heard upon the re- 29 CFR citation OMB con-

1926.33 ................................................................ 1218–0065 Subpart B—General

which subject to specific exemptions, full scope of the work to be performed

single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-

§ 1926.21 Safety training and edu- cient atmosphere. Confined or enclosed

§ 1926.26 Illumination. contract, except naval ship construc-

(c) Approved means sanctioned, en- (k) Employer means contractor or

(2) There shall be no cross-connec- in near proximity to the worksite and

APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL

Abate; see Temephos.

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Bromine ................................................. 7726–95–6 0.1 0.7 —

Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

p-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 106–46–7 75 450 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Endosulfan ............................................ 115–29–7 — 0.1 X

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Total particulate ............................. 15 — —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Mica; see Silicates.

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Pentane ................................................. 109–66–0 500 1500 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth,

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ..................... 79–34–5 5 35 X

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Vinyl toluene .......................................... 25013–15–4 100 480 —

§ 1926.56 Illumination. (b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex-

aprons or equivalent protection to pro- centered’’ consisting of a steel disc

both ends of a power-driven, rotatable in Table D–57.1 with a recommended

TABLE D–57.3—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE TABLE D–57.6—GRINDING AND POLISHING

Up to 12 (30.48) .................................................. 220 Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220

Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex-

.................................... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of

9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220

FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS

NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as

STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300

FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE

Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for

Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex-

12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220

Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume

FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION

(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors

................. 150 small booth .................... 125–175

................. 200 small booth .................... 150–250

(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7

finish. Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1

booth or room is in use for spraying. sources of heat may be employed to

Chemical Name CAS* TQ Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount